Untitled
Untitled
Untitled
Create successful ePaper yourself
Turn your PDF publications into a flip-book with our unique Google optimized e-Paper software.
LATINGILDERSLEEVE'SGBAMMAE
Vov\GILDERSLEEVE'SLATIN GRAMMARTHIRD EDITION, REVISED AND ENLARGEDBYB. L. GILDERSLEEVEPROFESSOR OP GREEK IN THE JOHNS HOPKINS UNIVERSITYANDGONZALEZ LODGEASSOCIATE PROFESSOR OP LATIN IN BRYN MAWR COLLEGE3Lont0nMACM ILLAN AND CO.,1903LIMITED
PREFACE.THE first edition of this LATIN GRAMMAR appeared in1867, the second in 1872 ;the third edition, carefully revisedand very much enlarged, is herewith presented to the public.In the preparation of this third edition the office of thesenior collaborator has been chiefly advisory, except in theSyntax. In the syntax nearly everything that pertains tothe history of usage has been brought together by ProfessorLODGE ;but for all deviations from the theory of formereditions we bear a joint responsibility.A manual that has held its place, however modest, formore than a quarter of a century, hardly needs an elaborateexposition of the methods followed ;but as the new grammarembraces a multitude of details that were not takenup in the old grammar, it has been thoughtfit that ProfessorLODGE should indicate the sources of the notes withwhich he has enriched the original work.August 1, 1895.B. L. GlLDERSLEEVE.GONZALEZ LODGE.THE following supplementary note may serve to embody a partialbibliography of the more important works used in this revision, andsome necessary explanations of the method :Fairly complete bibliographies of works on Latin Etymologyand Syntax may be found in REISIG'S Vorlesungen uber lateinischeSprachwissenschaft (new edition, by HAGEN, SCHMALZ, and LANDGRAF,1881-1888), and in the Lateinische Grammatik of STOLZ and SCHMALZ(in MULLER'S Handbuch der klassischen Altertumswissenschaft; 3dedition, 1890). Important also are the Grammars of KUHNER (1877,1878) * and ROBY (1881, 1882) ; though many statements in both, butespecially in the former, must be corrected in the light of more recentstudy. Some indications of more modern theories may be found in* A new Historical Grammar, by STOLZ, SCHMALZ, LANDGRAF, and WAQENEK, wasannounced by TKUBNEK in 1891
IVPKEFACE.the Erlduterungen zur lateinischen Grammatik of DEECKE (1893).Many matters of importance both in Etymology and Syntax aretreated in the Archiv fur lateinische Lexicographie, and the constructionswith individual words are often well discussed in KEEBS' Antibarbarusder lateinischen Sprache (6th edition, by SCHMALZ, 1886).For the accentuation and pronunciation of Latin we have alsoCORSSEN'S Aussprache, Vocalismus und Betonung der lateinischenSprache (1868, 1870), and SEELMANN'S Die Aussprache des Latein (1885).For the Etymology we must refer to BUCHELER'S Grundriss derlateinischen Declination (3d edition, by WINDEKILDE, 1879) and toSCHWEIZER-SIDLER'S Lateinische Grammatik (1888) ;also to manyarticles in various journals, most of which are given by STOLZ. Indispensableis NEUE'S Formenlehre der lateinischen Sprache, of which thesecond volume of the third edition has already appeared (1892) and thefirst parts of the third volume (1894), under the careful revision ofWAGENEE; also GEOEGES' Lexikon der lateinischen Wortformen (1890).For the Formation of Words and the relation of Latin forms to thoseof the related languages we have HENRY'S Precis de Grammaire Compareeand BRUGMANN'S Grundriss der vergleichenden Grammatik, bothnow accessible in translations. On these, in connection with SCHWEIZER-SIDLEE, the chapter on the Formation of Words has been based.In the historical treatment of the Syntax we must still rely in largemeasure on DRAEGER'S Historische Syntax der lateinischen Sprache(2d edition, 1878, 1881), faulty and inaccurate though it often is :many of the false statements have been corrected on the basis of morerecent individual studies by SCHMALZ ;but even SCHMALZ is not alwayscorrect, and many statements of his treatise have been silently emendedin the present book. For the theoretical study of some problems ofLatin Syntax HAASE'S Vorlesungen uber lateinische Sprachwissenschaft(1880) should not be overlooked. Since the appearance of the secondedition of SCHMALZ, in 1890, considerable progress has been made inthe various journals and other publications, as may be seen fromDEECKE'S summary in BURSIAN'S Jahresbericht for 1893. Every efforthas been made to incorporate in this grammar the main results ofthese studies as far as practicable. We may also draw attention tothe following important articles, among others, some of which arementioned in the books above referred to :WOLFFLIN'S numerous articles in the Archiv ; THIELMANN'S articlesin the Archiv on habSre with Perfect Participle Passive, and on theReciprocal Relation ;LANDGRAF'S articles on the Figura Etymologica,in the second volume of the Acta Seminarii Erlangensis, and on theFuture Participle and the Final Dative, in the Archiv; BALE'S treatiseon The Cum Constructions, attacking the theories of HOFFMANN (LateinischeZeitpartikeln, 1874) and LUBBERT (Die Syntax von Quom, 1869),
PREFACE.VHOFFMANN'S reply to HALE (1891), and WETZEL'S Der Streit zwischenHOFFMANN und HALE (1892) ;DAHL'S Die lateinische Partikel ut (1882),with GUTJAHR-PROBST'S Der Oebrauch von ut bei Terenz (1888) ;ZIM-MERMANN'S article on quod und quia im alteren Latein (1880) ;SCHERER'Sarticle on quando, in Studemund's Studien ; MORRIS'S articles on theSentence Question in Plautus and Terence in the A.J.P. (vols. x. andxi.) HALE'S articles on the ;Sequence of Tenses in the A.J.P. (vols. viii.and ix.), containing a discussion of the earlier Literature ;ELMER'Sarticles on the Latin Prohibitive in A.J.P. (vol. xv.)A bibliography of the treatises on Prosody and Versification maybe found in GLEDITSCH'S treatise in the second volume of MULLER'SHandbuch ; this, with PLESSIS' Metrique Orecque et Latine (1889), hasbeen made the basis of the chapter on Prosody ; but in the treatmentof early metres, regard has been had to KLOTZ (Altromische JUetrik,1890), and to LINDSAY'S recent papers on the Saturnian in the A.J.P.(vol. xiv.). In the matter of the order of words we have followedWEIL'S treatise on the Order of Words, translated by SUPER (1887).The question of the correct measurement of hidden quantities isstill an unsettled one in Latin ;for the sake of consistency the usageof MARX, Hulfsbuchlein fur die Aussprache der lateinischen Vokalein positionslangen Silben (2d edition, 1889) has been followed.The quotations have been made throughout from the Teubner Texteditions except as follows : Plautus is cited from the Triumvirateedition of RITSCHL ; Vergil from the Editio Maior of RIBBECK ; Ovidand Terence from the Tauchnitz Texts ;Horace from the Editio Minorof KELLER and HOLDER ;Lucretius from the edition of MUNRO;Ennius and Lucilius from the editions of L. MULLER ; fragmentaryScenic Poets from the edition of RIBBECK. Special care has beentaken to make the quotations exact both in spelling and wording ;andany variation in the spelling of individual words is therefore due tothe texts from which the examples are drawn.Where it has been necessary to modify the quotations in order tomake them suitable for citation, we have enclosed within squarebrackets words occurring in different form in the text, and in parentheseswords that have been inserted ;where the passage would notyield to such treatment, Cf.has been inserted before the reference.We have not thought it necessary to add the references in the Prosodyexcept in the case of some of the citations from early Latin.In the spelling of Latin words used out of quotation, as a rule uand v have been followed by o rather than by u ;but here the requirementsof clearness and the period of the language have often beenallowed to weigh. Otherwise we have followed in the main BRAM
CONTENTSETYMOLOGY.SECTIONLetters and Syllables. 1-15Alphabet, 1; Vowels, 2, 3; Diphthongs, 4; Consonants,6, 7 ;Phonetic Variations, 8, 9 ; Syllables, 10,11 ; Quantity, 12-14 ; Accentuation, 15.Parts of Speech 16Inflection of the Substantive 17-71Definitions, 18 ; Gender, 19-21 ; Number, 22 ;Cases, 23-25 ; Declensions, 26 ; Endings, 27 ;FirstDeclension, 29, 30 ;Second Declension, 31-34 ;ThirdDeclension, 35-60 ;Fourth Declension, 61, 62 ;FifthDeclension, 63, 64 ;Greek Substantives, 65, 66 ;IrregularSubstantives, 67-71.Inflection of the Adjective 72-90Definition, 72 ;First and Second Declension, 73-76; Pronominal Adjectives, 76; Third Declension,77-83 ; Irregular Adjectives, 84, 85 ; Comparison ofAdjectives, 86-90.Adverbs 91 93Formation of Adverbs, 91, 92 ; Comparison, 93.Numerals 94-98Cardinals, 94 ; Ordinals, 94 ; Distributives, 97 ;Adverbs, 98.Pronouns ...Personal, 100-102 ; Determinative, 103 ;Demonstrative,104 ; Eelative, 105 ; Interrogative, 106 ;Indefinites,107; Adjectives, 108; Correlative, 109-111.Inflection of the Verb 112-175Definitions, 112, 113; Endings, 114, 115; Inflectionof ease, 116, 117; of prodesse, 118; of posse, 119. RegularVerbs, 120-167; Division, 120; Rules for formingTenses, 121. First Conjugation, 122; Second Conjugation,123, 124; Third Conjugation, 125,126; Fourth
viiiCONTENTS.Conjugation, 127 ; Deponents, 128 ; Periphrastic,129; Notes, 130, 131. Formation of the Stems, 132-135; Change in Conjugation, 136; List of Verbs,137-167. Irregular Verbs, 168-174; Ire, 169, 2; quire,SECTIONnequlre, 170; ferre, 171; edere, 172; fieri, 173; velle,n5lle, malle, 174; Defective Verbs, 175.Formation of Words 176-200Simple Words, 179-192; Substantives, 180, 181;Adjectives, 182; Substantives without Suffixes, 183;Suffixes, 184-189; Verbs, 190-192 ; Compound Words,193-200; Substantives, 194-198; Verbs, 199, 200.SYNTAX.Simple Sentence . 202-471Subject, 203, 204; Predicate, 205-209; Concord,210, 211; Voices, 212-221. Tenses, 222-252; Present,227-230; Imperfect, 231-234; Perfect, 235-240; Pluperfect,241; Future, 242, 243; Future Perfect, 244,245; Periphrastic, 246-251; Tenses in Letters, 252.Moods, 253-283; Indicative, 254; Subjunctive, 255-265 ; Imperative, 266-275 ;Tenses in Moods and VerbalSubstantives, 276-283.Simple Sentence Expanded. 284-471Multiplication of the Subject. . . . . . 285-287Qualification of the Subject .'..... 288-325Adjectives, 289-303; Numerals, 292-295; Comparativesand Superlatives, 296-303: Pronouns, 304-319;Personal. 304; Demonstrative, 305-307; Determinativeand Reflexive, 308-311 ; Possessive, 312 ;Indefinite,313-319; Apposition, 320-325; Predicative Attributionand Apposition, 325.Multiplication of Predicate 326Qualification of Predicate 327-449The Cases 328-418Accusative, 328-343; Dative, 344-359; Genitive,360-383; Ablative, 384-410; Locative, 411; Prepositions,412-418; with Accusative, 416; with Ablative,417; with Accusative and Ablative, 418.Infinitive 419-424Subject, 422; Object, 423; Predicate, 424.
CONTENTS.IXSECTIONGerund and Gerundive 425-433Genitive, 428; Dative, 429;Accusative, 430; Ablative,431 ;with Prepositions, 432, 433.Supine 434-436Accusative, 435; Ablative, 430.Participles 437, 438Adverbs 439-449Negatives, 441-449.Incomplete (Interrogative) Sentence 450-471Direct Simple Questions, 453-457; Direct DisjunctiveQuestions, 458, 459 ;Indirect Questions, 460;Moods in Direct, 402-466; Moods in Indirect, 467.Compound Sentence 472-670Coordinate Sentence 473-503Copulative, 474-482; Adversative, 483-491 ;Disjunctive,492-497; Causal and Illative, 498-503.Subordinate Sentences ....... 504-670Moods in, 508; Sequence of Tenses, 509-519; Reflexivein, 520-522.Object Sentences 523-537Introduced by quod, 524, 525 ;in Accusative andInfinitive, 526, 527, 532-535; in Nominative andInfinitive, 528; in Participle, 536, 537.Causal Sentences ........ 538-542Introduced by quod, quia, etc., 539-541 ; by quod,with verbs of Emotion, 542.Sentences of Design and Tendency .... 543-558Final, 544-550; Pure Final, 545; ComplementaryFinal, 546-549; After verbs of Fear, 550.Consecutive, 551; Pure Consecutive, 552; ComplementaryConsecutive, 553-557; Exclamatory Questions,558.Temporal Sentences 559-588Antecedent Action, 561-567; Iterative Action, 566,567; Contemporaneous Action, 568-573; SubsequentAction, 574-577 ;Sentences with cum, 578-588.Conditional Sentences 589-602Logical, 595; Ideal, 596; Unreal, 597; Incomplete,598-601 ;Of Comparison, 602.Concessive Sentences .... 603-609
XCONTENTS.SECTIONRelative Sentences . . 610-637Concord, 614-621 ; Tenses, 622, 623 ; Moods, 624-637.Comparative Sentences 638-644Correlative, 642 ;with atque or ac, 643 ;with quam,644.The Abridged Sentence 645-663Historical Infinitive, 647 ; Gratis Obllqua, 648 ;Moods in, 650-652; Tenses in, 653-655; ConditionalSentences in, 656-659 :Pronouns, 660 ;Partial Obliquity,662, 663.Participial Sentences 664-670Arrangement of Words and Clauses .... 671-687Figures of Syntax and Rhetoric 688-700Principal Rules of Syntax. . .Pp. 437-444PROSODY.Quantity 702-717General Rules, 702-706 : of Final Syllables, 707-713; of Stem Syllables, 714 ; of Compounds, 715 ; in-Early Latin, 716, 717.Figures of Prosody 718-728Versification 729-827Definition, 729-754 ;Versus Italicus, 755 ; SaturnianVerse, 756; Iambic Rhythms, 757-767; TrochaicRhythms, 768-776 ; Anapaestic Rhythms, 777-782;Dactylic Rhythms, 783-789 ; Logacedic Rhythms,790-805 ;Cretic and Bacchic Rhythms, 806-814 ;Ionic Rhythms, 815-819 ; Compound Verses, 820-823 ; Cantica, 824, 825 ;Metres of HORACE, 826, 827.PAGESAppendix 491-493Roman Calendar, Roman Weights and Measures,Roman Money, Roman Names.Index of Verbs 494-502General Index . . 503-546
LATINGRAMMAR.ETYMOLOGY.Alphabet.1. THE Latin alphabet has twenty-three letters :ABCDEFGHI KLM NOPQRSTVXYZREMARKS. i. The sounds represented by C and K were originallysound of G, but they gradually approximateddistinct, C having theeach other, until C supplanted K except in a few words, such asKalendae, Kaeso, which were usually abbreviated, Kal., K. The originalforce of C is retained only in C. (for Gains) and Cn. (for Gnaeus).2. J, the consonantal form of I, dates from the middle ages. V representedalso the vowel u in the Latin alphabet and its resolution;intotwo letters V for the consonant, and U for the vowel also dates fromFor convenience, V and U are still distinguished inthe middle ages.this grammar.3. Y and Z were introduced in the time of Cicero to transliterateGreek v and J.In early Latin was represented by u (occasionallyby i or oi), and J by ss or s. Z had occurred in the earliest times, buthad been lost, and its place in the alphabet taken by G, which wasintroduced after C acquired the sound of K.NOTE. The Latin names for the letters were :a, be, ce, de, e, ef, ge, ha, i, ka, el,em, en, o, pe, qu (= cu), er, es, te, U, ex (ix),to be pronounced according to therules given ia 3, 7. For Y the sound was used, for Z the Greek name (zSta).Vowels.2. The vowels are a, e, i, o, u, (y) ;and are divided :1.According to their quality (i.e., the position of the organs usedin pronunciation), intoguttural (or back), a, o, u ; palatal (or front), e, i, (y).2.According to their quantity or prolongation (i. e., the timerequired for pronunciation), into**, 1512 long' ( ~~ ) ;short ' (w )'
2 VOWELS DIPHTHONGS CONSONANTS.REMARK. Vowels whose quantity shifts in poetryare called common(see 13), and are distinguished thus :^, by preference short ; ^, by preference long.3,Sounds of the Vowels.a = a in father. o = o in bone.5 = e in prey. u = oo in moon.I = i in caprice. y = u in sur (French), German fl.REMARK. The short sounds are only less prolonged in pronunciationthan the long sounds, and have no exact English equivalents.Diphthongs.4. There are but few diphthongs or double sounds in Latin. Thetheory of the diphthong requires that both elements be heard in a slur.The tendency in Latin was to reduce diphthongs to simple sounds ;for example, in the last century of the republic ae was gliding into e,which took its place completely in the third century A. D. Hncearose frequent variations in spelling : as glaeba and glSba, sod; sooboedire and obedire, obey ; faenum (foemun) and fSnum, hay.ae = aye (ah-eh). ei = ei in feint (drawled).oe = oy in boy. eu = eu in Spanish deda (Sh-oo).au = ou in OUT. (ui= we, almost).NOTE.Before the time of the Gracchi we find ai and oi instead of ae and oe.5. The sign (Diwresis Greek =separatwri) over the second vowelshows that each sound is to be pronounced separately ; S8r, air ;Oenomatis,intoaloe.6. Consonants are divided :Consonants.1. According to the principal organs by which they are pronounced,Labials (lip-sounds) : b, p, (ph), f, v, m.Dentals (tooth-sounds): d, t, (tb.), 1, n, r, s.NOTE.Gutturals (throat-sounds):g, c, k, qu, (ch), h, n (see 7).Instead of dental and guttural, the terms lingual and palatal axe often used.2. According to their prolongation, intoA. Semi-vowels : of which1, m, n, r, are liquids (m and n being nasals).his a breathing.8 is a sibilant.
CONSONANTS PHONETIC VARIATIONS. 3B. Mutes : to which belongP-mutes, p, b, (ph), f, labials.T-mutes, t, d, (th), dentals.K-mutes, k, c, qu, g, (ch), gutturals.Those on the same line are said to be of the same organ..Mutes are further divided intoTenues (thin, smooth) : p, t, k, c, qu, hard (surd).Mediae (middle) : b, d, g, soft (sonant).(Asplratae (aspirate, rough): ph, th, ch,] aspirate.Those on the same line are said to be of the same order.The aspirates were introduced in the latter part of the second centuryB. C. in the transliteration of Greek words, and thence extended tosome pure Latin words ; as, pulcher, Gracchus.3. Double consonants are : z = dz in acfee ;x cs (ks), gs ;i and ubetween two vowels are double sounds, half vowel, half consonant.Sounds of the Consonants.7. The consonants are sounded as in English, with the followingexceptions :C is hard throughout = k.Ch is not a genuine Latin combination (6, 2). In Latin words it is ak ;in Greek words a kh, commonly pronounced as ch in German.G is hard throughout, as in get, give.H at the beginning of a word is but slightly pronounced in the;middle of a word it is almost imperceptible.I consonant (J) has the sound of a broad y ; nearly like y in yule.N has a guttural nasal sound before c, g, q, as in anchor, anguish.Qu = kw (nearly) ;before o, qu = c. In early Latin qu was not followedby u. Later, when o was weakened to u, qu was replaced by c ;thus quoin became cum. Still later qu replaced c, yielding quum.E is trilled.8 and X are always hard, as in hiss, aa;e.T is hard throughout ;never like t in nation.TT consonant (V) ispronounced like the vowel, but with a slur. Inthe third century A. D. it had nearly the sound of our w. In Greek itwas frequently transliterated by Ofi so; OvaXe'pios = Valerius.Phonetic Variations inVowels and Consonants.8. Vowels.i.Weakening. In the formation of words from roots or stemsshort vowels show a tendency to weaken ;that is, a tends to become e
4 PHONETIC VARIATIONS.and then i,or o and then u, while o tends towards e or i, and u towards iThis occurs most frequently in compound words, to a less degree inwords formed by suffixes. Diphthongs are less frequently weakenedand long vowels very rarely. The principal rules for these changes areas follows, but it must be remembered that to all there are more or lessfrequent exceptions :A. i. In the second part of compound words, and in reduplicatedwords, the root-vowel a is weakened to 6, which usually passes overinto i in open syllables (11, R.), and often to fi before 1 and labialmutes : c5n-scend5 (scando) ;con-cido (cado) ;d5-sulto (salt5) ;fefelll (falls).2. As final vowel of the stem a is weakened in the first part of a compoundword, usually to i, rarely to 6 or u: aquili-fer (aquila-) ;causi-dicus(causa-). 3. In or before suffixes, a becomes I: domi-tus (doma-).NOTE. A frequently resists change, especially in verbs of the First and SecondConjugations : as, sg-parare (parare) circum-iacere (iacere) ; ;so satis-facere(facere) and others.E. i. In the second part of compound words, root vowel 6 is usuallyretained in a close (11, E.) syllable, and weakened to I in an opensyllable ; but it is invariably retained before r : in-flecto (fleets) ;obtineo(teneS) ;ad-verto (verto). 2. In or before suffixes, and in the finalsyllable of a word, it also becomes I : geni-tor (gene-) ;un-decim (decem).I. At the end of a word I ischanged to 6 : mare (mari).0. i. In composition final stem-vowel 5 is usually weakened to I ;before labials sometimes to u :agri-cola (agro-) ;auru-fex (usually aurifex).2. In suffixes, and in final syllables, it is weakened to I : amlci-tia(amico-) ; gracili-s (also gracilu-s).TT. In composition final stem-vowel u is usually weakened to I;the same weakening occurs sometimes within a word or before a suffix :mani-festuB (also manu-fSstus) ;lacrima (early lacruma).AE, ATT. In the second part of a compound word root-diphthong aeis usually weakened to I, but often there is no change ;au is occasionallychanged to fl : ex-qulro (quaerS) ;con-cludS (claudo).2. Omission. Vowels are frequently omitted both in simple andcompound words, either within the word (syncope) or at the end (apocope): dextera and dextra ; princeps (for primceps, from prlmiceps) ; pergS(for perrego) ;ut (utl) ;neu (neve).3. Epenthesis. Vowels are sometimes inserted to ease the pronunciation,but usually before liquids or in foreign words :ager (agro-)see 31 ; DaphinS (= Daphne) ;drachuma (= drachma).4. Assimilation. Two vowels in adjoining syllables tend to becomelike each other; this assimilation is usually regressive (i. e., of thefirst to the second), especially when 1 separates them ; it is rarely progressive.Compare facilis with facul, familia with famulus, bene with bonus.
PHONETIC VARIATIONS. 55. A vowel before a liquid tends to become u, less often o or e :adulescens and adolescens; vulgus and volgus ;decumus (decem) ;comparetempus with temporis ; peperi (from pari5), etc.9. Consonants.1. Assimilation. When two consonants come together in Latin,they tend to assimilate one to the other. This assimilation is usuallyregressive ; sometimes it is progressive. It is either complete, thatis, the two consonants become the same ;or partial, that is, the oneis made of the same order or same organ as the other. These changesoccur both in inflection and in composition, but they are especiallynoteworthy in the last consonant of prepositions in composition.Scrip-turn for scrib-tum (regressive partial) ;ac-cedere for ad-c5dere(regressive complete) ;cur-sum for cur-tum (progressive partial) ;celerrimusfor celer-simus (progressive complete).2. Partial Assimilation. (a) The sonants g and b, before the surd t,or the sibilant s, often become surds (c, p )the surds; p, c, t beforeliquids sometimes become sonants (b, g, d) the labials; p, b before nbecome m; the labial m before the gutturals c, q, g, h, i (j),the dentalst, d, s,and the labials f, v, becomes n the dental n before labials; p, b,m, becomes m rgc-tum; (for r6g-tum) ; scrip-si (for scrlb-si) ; seg-mentum(for sec-mentum) ;som-nus (for sop-mis) ; prin-ceps (for prim-ceps).NOTE. Similar is the change of q (qu) to c before t or s : COC-tum (for coqu-tum).(b) After 1 and r, t of the suffixes tor, tus, turn, becomes a by progressiveassimilation : cur-sum (for cur-tum).3. Complete Assimilation. There are many varieties, but the mostimportant principle is that a mute or a liquid tends to assimilate toa liquid and to a sibilant :puella (puer) cur-rere; (for cur-sere) ;cSs-si(for c6d-si) corolla;(corona), etc.4. Prepositions. Ab takes the form a before m or v, and in a-ful ;appears as au in au-fero, au-fugio ;as abs before c, t ;as as beforep. Ad is assimilated before c, g, 1, p, r, s, t,with more or lessregularity ;before gn, sp, sc, st,it often appears as a. Ante appearsrarely as anti. Cum appears as com before b, m, p ;con before c, d, f, g,; ; i, q, s,v co before gn, n assimilated sometimes before 1 and r. Exbecomes S before b, d, g, i (j), 1, m, n, r, v;ef or ec, before f. In usuallybecomes im before b, m, p ;before 1, r it is occasionally assimilated ;the same holds good of the negative prefix in. Ob is usually assimilatedbefore c, f, g, p ; appears as o in o-mitto, o-perio, obs in obs-olesco,and os in ostendo. Sub is assimilated before c, f, g, p, r ; appears as susin a few words, as sus-cipio ; occasionally su before s, as su-spicio. Transsometimes becomes tra before d, i (j),n ;tran before s. Amb- (inseparable)loses b before a consonant, and am is sometimes assimilated. Circumsometimes drops m before i. Dis becomes dif before f ;dir before a
6 PHONETIC VARIATIONS SYLLABLES.vowel ;di before consonants, except c, p, q, t, s, followed by a vowel,when it is usually unchanged. The d of red and s6d is usually droppedbefore consonants.NOTE. In early Latin assimilation is much less common than in the classicalperiod.5. Dissimilation. To avoid the harshness of sound when two syllablesbegin with the same letter, the initial letter of the one is oftenchanged ;this is true especially of liquids, but occasionally of otherletters :singu-la-ris (for singu-la-lis) ;men-dig (for medl-die).KOTK. This principle often regulates the nse of -bnun or -bulum, and of -cramor -culum in word formation (181, 6) :compare perlculum with simulacrum.6. Omission. (a) When a word closes with a doubled consonant ora group of consonants, the final consonant is regularly dropped inLatin ;sometimes after the preceding consonant has been assimilatedto it. In the middle of a word, after a long syllable, ss and 11 are simplified; 11 is sometimes simplified after a short vowel, which is thenlengthened if the syllable is accented (compensatory lengthening) ; butif the syllable is unaccented, such lengthening need not take place.this case other doubled consonants may also be simplified.fel (for fell) ;lac (for lact) ; vigil (for vigils) ; lapis (for lapid-s, lapiss) ;mlsi (for mis-si) ;villa and vilicus ;but currus and curulis.InNOTE. X is retained, even after 1 and r,as in calx, arx also; ps, bs,as in stirps,urbs ;ms is found in hiems only.(&) In the tendency to easier pronunciationconsonants are oftendropped both at the beginning and in the middle of a word :stimulus (for stigmulus) ; pastor (for pasctor) ;ai5 (for ahi8) ;natus (forgnatus, retained in early Latin, rarely later) ;latus (for tlatus), etc.7. Epenthesis. Between m and 1,m and s,m and t,a p is generated :ez-em-p-lum (ex-im5) ; com-p-sl (com.5) ; em-p-tus (em5).8. Metathesis or transposition of consonants occurs sometimes inLatin, especially in Perfect and Supine forms cerno Pf : .; crg-vl, etc.Syllables.10. The syllable is the unit of pronunciation ; it consistsof a vowel, or a vowel and one or more consonants.A word has as many syllables as it contains separate vowelsand diphthongs.In dividing a word into syllables, a consonant, betweentwo vowels, belongs to the second :a-mo, I love ; li-xa, asutler.
SYLLABLES QUANTITY. 7Any combination of consonants that can begin a word(including mn, under Greek influence) belongs to the followingvowel ;in other combinations the first consonantbelongs to the preceding vowel : a-sper, rough; fau-stus,lucky ; li-bri, looks ; a-nmis, river.REMARKS. i. The combinations incapable of beginning a word are(a) doubled consonants :sic-cus, dry ; (b) a liquid and a consonant :al-mus, fostering ; am-bo, both ; an-guis, snake ; ar-bor, tree.2.Compounds are treated by the best grammarians as if their partswere separate words :ab-igo, I drive off ; rfis-publica, commonwealth.11. The last syllable of a word is called the ultimate(ultima, last) the next to the last the ;penult (paene, almost,and ultima) ;the one before the penult, the antepenult(ante, before, and paenultima).REMARK. A .syllable is said to be open when it ends with a vowel ;close, when it ends with a consonant.Quantity.12. i. A syllableis said to be long by nature, when itcontains a long vowel or diphthong : mos, custom ; caelum,heaven.REMARKS. r. A vowel before nf, ns, gm, gn, islong by nature :Infelix, unlucky ; mensa, table ; agnien, train ; agnus, lamb. In manycases, however, the n has disappeared from the written word ;so insome substantival terminations : 5s (Ace. PI., 2d decl.), fis (Ace. PI.,4th decl.) ;in adjectives in osus (f5rm5sus, shapely, for fSrmSnsus) ;inthe numerical termination Ssimus (= Snsimus). See 95, N. 5.2. Before i consonant (j) a vowel islong by nature : PompSius,Pompey ; except in compounds of iugum, yoke (bl-iugus, two-horse),and in a few other words.NOTE. From about 134 to about 74 B. C. a, 8, u, were often represented by aa, 66,liu ;I by ei. From the time of Augustus to the second century I was indicated by alengthened I. From Sulla's time until the third century long vowels (rarely, however, I)were indicated by an Apex (').2. A syllable is said to be long by position, when a shortvowel is followed by two or more consonants, or a doubleconsonant :ars, art ; cdllum, neck ; abrumpo, / break off ;p6r mare, through the sea ; nex, murder.
18 ACCENTUATION.3. A syllable is said to be short when it contains a shortvowel, which is not followed by two or more consonants :Idcus, place ;tabula, picture.REMARK. A vowel is short by nature when followed by anothervowel, or by nt, nd: d6us, God; innocentia, innocence; amandus, to beloved.13. A syllable ending in a short vowel, followed by a mutewith 1 or r, is said to be common (anceps, doubtful): ten.6-brae, darkness.REMARK. In prose such syllables are always short. In poetry theywere short in early times, common in the Augustan period.14. Every diphthong, and everyvowel derived from adiphthong, or contracted from other vowels, is long:saevus,cruel; conclude, I shut up (from claudo, I shut); cogo (fromco-ago), / drive together.Accentuation.15. i.Dissyllabic words have the accent or stress on thepenult :6qu6s ( = equus), horse.2. Polysyllabic words have the accent on the penult, whenthe penultislong on the; antepenult, when the penultisshort or common :mandare, to commit ; mandere, to chew ;intigrum, entire; circumdare, to surround; sup6rstites,survivors.REMARKS. i. The littleappendages (enclitics), que, ve, ne, add anaccent to the ultimate of words accented on the antepenult:luminaque,and lights ; fluminave, or rivers ; v6merene 1 from a ploughshare ? Dissyllablesand words accented on the penult are said to shift their accentto the final syllable before an enclitic :egomet, I indeed ; amareve, orto love, ; but it is more likely that the ordinary rule of accentuationwas followed.2. Compounds (not prepositional) of facere and dare retain theaccent on the verbal form :calefacit, venumdare.3. Vocatives and genitives of substantives in ius of the second declension,as well as genitives of substantives in ium, retainon the same syllable as the nominative :Vergill.the accentNOTE. Other exceptions will be noted as they occur. In the older language theaccent was not bounded by the antepenult accipi5 taccipio:, concutio iccncutio).
PARTS OF SPEECHINFLECTION.Parts of Speech.16. The Parts of Speech are the Noun (Substantive andAdjective), the Pronoun, the Verb, and the Particles (Adverb,Preposition, and Conjunction), defined as follows :1 . The Substantive gives a name :vir, a man ; Codes,Codes ; donum, a gift.2. The Adjective adds a quality to the Substantive : bonusa good man.vir,3. The Pronoun points out without describing:hie, this ;ille, that ; ego, /.4. The Verb expresses a complete thought, whether assertion,wish, or command ; amat, he loves ; amet, may he love ;ama, love thou !5. The Adverb shows circumstances.6. The Preposition shows local relation.7. The Conjunction shows connection.REMARKS. i. Substantive is short for noun-substantive, and adjectivefor noun-adjective. Substantives are often loosely called nouns.2. The Interjection is either a mere cry of feeling: Sh\ ah ! and doesnot belong to language, or falls under one of the above-mentionedclasses.3. The Particles are mainly mutilated forms of the noun and pronoun.NOTES. 1. The difference between substantive and adjective is largely a differenceof mobility that; is, the substantive is fixed in its application and the adjective is general.2. Noun and pronoun have essentially the same inflection ;but they are commonlyseparated, partly on account of the difference in signification, partly on account ofcertain peculiarities of the pronominal forme.Inflection.17. Inflection (Inflexio, bending) is that change in theform of a word (chiefly in the end) which shows a change inthe relations of that word. The noun, pronoun, and verb areinflected ;the particles are not capable of further inflection.The inflection of nouns and pronounsis called declension,and nouns and pronouns are said to be declined.The inflection of verbs is called conjugation, and verbsare said to be conjugated.
IO THE SUBSTANTIVE GENDER.The Substantive.18. A Substantive is either concrete or abstract ; concretewhen it gives the name of a person or thing abstract when;it gives the name of a quality ;Concrete substantives are either properProper when they areproper, or peculiar, to certain persons,places, or things:as amicitia, friendship.or common :Horatius, Horace; Neapolis, Naples;Padus, Po.Common when they are common to a whole class :dominus, a lord ; urbs, a city ; amnis, a river.Gender of Substantives.19. For the names of animate beings, the genderis determinedby the signification for ; things and qualities, by thetermination.Names of males are masculine ;names of females, feminine.Masculine :Romulus; luppiter; vir, man; equus, horse.Feminine : Cornelia; luno ; femina, woman; equa, mare.20. Some classes of words, without natural gender, havetheir gender determined by the signification :1. All names of months and winds, most names of rivers,and many names of mountains are masculine ; as :Aprllis,April, the opening month ; Aquilo, the north wind; Albis,the River Elbe ; Athos, Mount Athos.REMARKS. i. Names of months, winds, and rivers were lookedupon as adjectives in agreement with masculine substantives understood(mgnsis, month ; ventns, wind ; fluvius, amnis, river).2. Of the rivers, Allia, Lethe, Matrona, Sagra, Styx are feminine ;Albula, Acheron, Garumna vary, being sometimes masculine, sometimesfeminine.3. Of the mountains, Alpgs, the Alps, is feminine ; so, too, sundry(Greek) names in a (G. ae), 6 (G. 5s) : Aetna (usually), Calpe",Cyllene, Hybla, Ida, Ossa (usually), Oeta (usually), Bhodope, PholoS, PyrSne,and Carambis, Peloris. Pelion and SSracte (usually), and names of mountainsin a (G. orum), as Maenala (G. Maenalorum), are neuter.II. Names of countries (terrae, fern.), islands (insulae,fern.), cities (urbes, fern.), plants (plantae, fern.}, and trees
GENDER NUMBER, II(arbores, fern.), are feminine: Aegyptus, Egypt ; Rhodus,Rhodes ; pirus, a pear-tree ; abies, a fir-tree.REMARKS. i. Names of countries and islands in us (os) (Gr. i) aremasculine, except Aegyptus, Chius, Chersongsus, Cyprus, Delos, Epfrus,Lemnos, Lesbos, Peloponnesus, Rhodus, Sanios, Bosporus (the country).2. Many Greek names of cities follow the termination. Towardsthe end of the republic many feminine names change the ending -usto -urn and become neuter :Abydus and Abydum, Saguntus andSaguntum.3. Most names of trees with stems in -tro (N. -ter) are masculine :oleaster, wild olive ; pinaster, wild pine. So also most shrubs :dumus,bramble-bush ; rims, sumach. Neuter are acer, maple ; laser, a plant ;papaver, poppy (also masc. in early Latin) ; r5bur, oak; siler, willow;siser, sMrret (occasionally masc.) ; euber, cork-tree ; tuber, mushroom.III. All indeclinable substantives, and all words andphrases treated as indeclinable substantives, are neuter :right; a longum, a long; scire tuum, thy knowing ; tristevale, a sad "farewell."fas,21. i. Substantives which have but one form for masculineand feminine are said to be of common gender:clvis,citizen (male or female) ; comes, companion ; iudex, judge.2. Substantlva mobilia are words of the same origin, whosedifferent terminations designate difference of gender : magister,master, teacher ; magistra, mistress ; servus, serva,slave (masc. and fern.) ; victor, victrlx, conqueror (masc. andfern.).3. If the male and female of animals have but one designation,mas, male, and femina, female, are added, when itnecessary to be exact : pavO mas (masculus), peacock ; pavOfemina, peahen. These substantives are called epicene(eiriKoiva, utrlque generl communia, common to eachgender).Number.22. In Latin there are two numbers t the Singular,denoting one ; the Plural, denoting more than one.REMARK. The Dual, denoting two, occurs in Latin only in twowords (duo, two; ambo, both), in the nominative and vocative of themasculine and neuter.is
12 CASES.Cases.23. In Latin there are six cases :1. Nominative (Case of the Subject).Answers : who 9 what ?z. Genitive (Case of the Complement).Answers : whose ? whereof ?3. Dative (Case of Indirect Object or Personal Interest).Answers : to whom ? for whom ?4. Accusative (Case of Direct Object).Answers : whom ? what ?5. Vocative (Case of Direct Address).6. Ablative (Case of Adverbial Eelation).Answers : where, ? whence ? wherewith ?NOTE. These six cases are the remains of a larger number. The Locative (answers :where ?), is akin to the Dative, and coincident with it in the 1st and 3d Declensions ;in the 2d Declension it is lost in the Genitive ; it is often blended with the Ablative inform, regularly in syntax. The Instrumental (answers: wherewith?), which isfound in other members of the family, is likewise merged in the Ablative.24. i.According to their form, the cases are divided intostrong and weak The :strong cases are Nominative, Accusative,and Vocative. The weak cases are Genitive, Dative,and Ablative.2.According to their syntactical use, the cases are dividedinto Casus Recti, or Independent Cases, and Casus ObliquI, orDependentCases. Nominative and Vocative are CasusRecti, the rest Casus ObliquI.25. The case-forms arise from the combination of the caseendingswith the stem.1. The stem is that which is common to a class of formations.NOTES. 1. The stem is often so much altered by contact with the case-ending, andthe case-ending so much altered by the wearing away of vowels and consonants,that they can be determined only by scientific analysis. So in the paradigm mSnsa,the stem is not mens, but mensa, the final a having been absorbed by the ending inthe Dative and Ablative Plural mensls. So -d,the ending of the Ablative Singular,has nearly disappeared, and the locative ending has undergone many changes (5, Si, 1,6). The " crude form " it is often impossible to ascertain.2. The root is an ultimate stem, and the determination of the root belongs to com
DECLENSIONS. 13parative etymology. The stem may be of any length, the root was probably a monosyllable.In penna the stem is penna- in ; pennula, pennula- in; pennatulus,pennatulo-; the root is PET (petna, pesna, penna), and is found in pet-ere, to fallupon, to fly at ; Greek, irr-op
FIEST DECLENSION.
SECOND DECLENSION. 1 5PL. N. mSnsae, the tables, tables.G. mensarum, of the tables, of tables.D. mensis, to, for the tables, to, for tables.Ac. me"nsas, the tables, tables.V. mensae, tables! tables!Ab. mSnsIs, from, with, by, the tables, from, with, by, tables.REMARKS. i. The early ending of the Gen., as, found in a few casesm early poets, is retained in the classical period (but not in CAESAR orLIVY) only in the form familias, of a family, in combination with pater,father, mater, mother, filius, son, filia, daughter, viz. : paterfamilias,materfamilias, filius familias, filia familias.2. The Loc. Sing, is like the Genitive: Komae, at Rome; mflitiae,abroad.3. The Gen. PI. sometimes takes the form -urn instead of -arum;this occurs chiefly in the Greek words amphora (amphora, measure oftonnage), and drachma, franc (Greek coin). The poets make frequentuse of this form in Greek patronymics inand -da, -das, compounds ofcola (from colo, I inhabit) and -gena (from root gen, beget).4. The ending -abus is found (along with the regular ending) in theDat. and Abl. PI. of dea, goddess, and filia, daughter. In late Latinthe use of this termination becomes more extended.NOTES. 1. A very few masc. substantives show Nom. Sing, in as in early Latin.2. A form of the Gen. Sing, in al, subsequent to that in as, is found in earlyinscriptions, and not unfrequently in early poets, but only here and there in classicalpoetry (VERG., A., 3, 354, etc.) and never in classical prose.3. The early ending of the Dat. al (sometimes contracted into 5), is found occasionallyin inscriptions throughout the whole period of the language.4. The older ending of the Abl., ad, belongs exclusively to early Latin. Inscriptionsshow els for Is in Dat. and Abl. PL, and once as in the Dat. Plural.30. Rule of Gender. Substantives of the First Declensionare feminine, except when males are meant.Hadria, the Adriatic, is masculine.SECOND DECLENSION.31. The stem ends in 6, which in the classical period isweakened to u, except after u (vowel or consonant), where 6 isretained until the first century A.D. In combination withthe case-endings itmerges into 6 or disappears altogether.In the Vocative (except in neuters) it is weakened to e.The Nominative ends in s (m. and f.) and m (n.). Butmany masculine stems in which the final vowel, 5, is precededby r,and insert 6 before the r if itdrop the (os) us and e of the Nominative and Vocative,was preceded by a consonant.
l6SECOND DECLENSION.32. i. Stems in -ro. The following stems in -ro do not drop the (os)us and e of the Nom. and Voc. :ems, master ; hesperus, evening star ;icterus, jaundice ; iuniperus, juniper ; morns, mulberry ; numerus, number;taurus, bull ; virus, venom; umerus, shoulder; uterus, womb.NOTE. Socerus is found in early Latin. Plautus uses uterum (n.) once.2. In the following words the stem ends in -ero and the e is thereforeretained throughout : adulter, adulterer ; gener, son-in-law; Liber,god of wine ; puer, boy ; socer, father-in-law ; vesper, evening ; and inwords ending in -fer and -ger, from fer5, J bear, and gero, I carry, as,signifer, standard-bearer, anniger, armor-bearer .Also Ibfr and Celtibgr (names of nations) have in the Plural Iberland Celtiben,33. Hortns (m.), garden; puer (m.), ~boy ; ager (m.),field ; bellum (n.),war ; are thus declined :So. N. hortus, puer, ager, bellum,G. hortl, puerl, agrl, belli,D. horto, puerS, agr5, bello,Ac. hortum, puerum, agrum, bellum,V. horte, puer, ager, bellum,Ab. horto. puer5. agr6. bells.PL. N. hortl, puerl, agrl, bella,G. hortorum, puerorum, agrSrum, bellomm,D. hortis, puerls, agrls, bellls,Ac. hortos, pueros, agros, bella,V. hortl, puerl, agrl, bella,Ab. hortis. puerls. agrls. bellls.REMARKS. i. Stems in -io have Gen. Sing, for the most part in I untilthe first century A. D., without change of accent :ingeni (N. ingenium),of genius, Vergfll, of Vergil. See 15, R. 3.2.Proper names in -ius (stems in -io) have Voc. in I, without changeof accent :Antonl, TullI, Gal, Vergfll. Filius, son, and genius, genius,form their Voc. in like manner : fill, genl. In solemn discourse -us ofthe Nom. isemployed also for the Vocative. (See Liv. i. 24, 7.) Soregularly deus, God !3. The Loc. Sing, ends in I(apparent Genitive), as BhodI, at Rhodes,TarentI, at Tarentum.4. In the Gen. PI. -urn instead of -5rum is found in words denotingcoins and measures ; as, nummum, of moneys (also -5rum) = sestertium, ofsesterces ; denarium (occasionally -6rum) ;talentum (occasionally -orum) ;tetrachmum; medium (also -6mm), of measures; iugerum; medimnum;stadium (also -Orum). Likewise in some names of :persons deum (also
THIRD DECLENSION. 17orom) ;fabrtun (in technical expressions ; as praefectns fabrum, otherwise-orum) ;liberum (also -5rum) ;virum (poetical, except in technicalexpressions, as triumvirum) socium; (also -orum). Some other examplesare poetical, rare or late.5. The Loc. PL is identical with the Dative :Delphis, at Delphi.6. Deus, God, is irregular. In addition to the forms already mentioned,it has in Norn. PL del, dii, dl ;in Dat. and Abl. PL dels,diis, clis.NOTES. 1. The ending -61 for -I in the Gen. Sing, is found only in inscriptions subsequentto the third Punic War.2. Puer, boy, forms Voc. puere in early Latin.3. The original Abl. ending -d belongs to early inscriptions.4. In early inscriptions the Norn. PL ends occasionally in 6s, els, Is :magistres(for magistrl) vireis (for virl). The rare endings oe and g iploirume for plurimi)and the not uncommon ending el belong to the same period.5. Inscriptions often show els for is in Dat. and Abl. Plural.34. Rule of Gender. Substantives in -us are masculine ;in -urn neuter.EXCEPTIONS. Feminine are : 1st. Cities and islands, as, Corinthus,Samus. 3d. Most trees, as, fSgus, beech ; pirus, pear-tree. 3d. ManyGreek nouns, as, atomus, atom ; dialectus, dialect ; methodus, method ;paragraphus, paragraph ; periodus, period. 4th. Alvus, belly (m. inPLAUT.) ; colus (61, N. 5), distaff (also m.) ; humus, ground; varmus,wheat-fan.Neuters are :pelagus, sea ; virus, venom ; vulgus, the rabble (sometimesmasculine).THIRD DECLENSION.35. i. The stem ends in a consonant, or in the closevowels i and u.2. The stems are divided according to their last letter,called the stem-characteristic, following the subdivisions ofthe letters of the alphabet:I. Consonant Stems. II. Vowel Stems.A. Liquid stems, ending in 1, m, n, r. 1. Endingin i.B. Sibilant stems, ending in s. 2. Ending in u,Ending in a P-mute, b, p. (Compare the Fourth2. Ending in a K-mute, g, c. Declension.)!1. 3. Ending in a T-mute, d, t.36. i. The Nominative Singular, masculine and feminine,ends in s, which, however, is dropped after 1, n, r, s,and combines with a K-mute to form x. The final vowel ofthe stem undergoes various changes.2
1 8 THIRD DECLENSION.The Vocative is like the Nominative.In the other cases, the endings are added to the unchangedstem.2. Neuters always form :The Nominative without the case-endings.The Accusative and Vocative cases in both numbers likethe Nominative.The Nominative Plural in &.-es.37. Singular.Notes on the Cases.1. GENITIVE. In old Latin we find on inscriptions the endings -us (Gr. -o) and2. DATTVE. The early endings of the Dat. are -el and -6. These were succeededby I after the second century B. C., 8 being retained in formulas like lure" dlcund5(Liv., 42, 28, 6), in addition to the usual form.3. ACCUSATIVE. The original termination -im, in stems of the vowel declension,loses ground, and stems of this class form their Ace. more and more in -em, after theanalogy of consonant stems. For the classical usage see 57, B. i.4. ABLATIVE. In inscriptions of the second and first centuries B. C. we find -el,-I. and -e. But -el soon disappears, leaving e and I. In general e is the ending for theconsonant stems and I for the vowel. But as in the Ace., so in the Abl., the e makesinroads on the i, though never to the same extent. (See 57, B. 2.) On the otherhand, some apparently consonant stems assume the ending i. Thus some in -as,-atis: hereditatl (200 B. C.), aetatl (rare); liti (rare), supellectill (classical;early e) ;also the liquid stems which syncopate in the (Jen., as imber. The ending-d is rare and confined to early inscriptions.5. LOCATIVE. Originally coincident in form with the Dat, the Loc. of the ThirdDeclension was finally blended with Abl., both in form and in syntax. In the followingproper names the old form is frequently retained ZarthaginJ, at Carthage, Sulmoni,at Sulmo, Lacedaemonl, at Lacedaemon, Sicyoni, TroezSnl, Anxurl,:Tlburl. Also Acheruntl. In the case of all except Amur, Tibur, Acheruns, theregular form is more common.The following Loc. forms of common nouns are found :heri, loci, noctu (principallyin early Latin), orbi (Cic.), peregrl (early Latin), praefiscinl (early Latin),riirl, temper! (the usual form in early Latin), vesperl. In all cases the Abl. formin e is also found.38. Plural.1. NOMINATIVE. Early Latin shows -Sis, -Is in the masc. and feminine. The latterwas usually confined to vowel stems, but also occurs occasionally in consonant stems(ioudicls).Later the ending was -gs for all kinds of stems.2. GENITIVE. The ending -urn, uniting with the vowel in vowel stems, gives-itun. But many apparently consonant stems show their original vowel form by taking-ium : (1) Many fern, stems in -tat- (N. tas) with -ium as well as -tun. (2) Monosyllabicand polysyllabic stems in -t, -c, with preceding consonant. (3) Monosyllablesin -p and -b, sometimes with, sometimes without, a preceding consonant. (4) Stems in-ss- ;see 48, B.3. ACCUSATIVE. Old Latin shows also -eis. The classical form is -Ss for consonantand -Is for vowel stems. But -6s begins to drive out -Is in some vowel steins andwholly supplants it in the early Empire. On the other hand, some apparently originalconsonant stems show -Is in early Latin, but the cases are not always certain.
CONSONANT STEMS.IQI.-CONSONANT STEMS.A. Liquid Stems.1. LIQUID STEMS IN 1.39. Form the Nominative without s and fall into twodivisions* :A. Those in which the stem characteristic is preceded by a vowel :1. -al, -alls : sal (with compensatory lengthening), salt ; Punicproper names like Adherbal, Hannibal.2. -il, -His : mugil (mugilis is late), mullet ; pugil (pugilis in VARRO),boxer ; vigil,watchman. -il, -His : sfl,ochre ; Tanaquil (withshortened vowel), a proper name.3 -ol, -olis : sol, sun.4. -ul t -ulis : consul, consul; exsul, exile; praesul, dancer.B. Two neuter substantives with stems in -11,one of which is lost inthe Nominative :mel, mellis, honey ; fel, fellis, gall.SG. N. consul, consul (in.). PL. N. consults, the consuls.G. consults, G. consulum,B. consull, D. cSnsulibus,Ac. cSnsulem, Ac. consulSs,V. consul, V. consulgs,Ab. consule. Ab. consulibus.Rules of Gender. i. Stems in -1 are masculine.EXCEPTIONS : Sfl, ochre, and sal, salt (occasionally, but principally inthe Sing.), are neuter.2. Stems in -11 are neuter.2. LIQUID STEMS IN m.40. Nominative with s. One example only:hiem(p)s,winter (f.) ;Gen v Mem-is, Dat., hiem-I, etc.3. LIQUID STEMS IN n.41. Most masculine and feminine stems form the NominativeSingular by dropping the stem-characteristic andchanging a preceding vowel to o.* In the following enumerations of stem-varieties, Greek substantives are as a ruleomitted.
20 THIED DECLENSION.Some masculine and most neuter steins retain the stemcharacteristicin the Nominative and change a precedingi to e.The following varieties appear :1.-en, -enis : the masculine substantives lien, splen, spleen; r6n6e(pi.), kidneys.2. -Of -inis : homo, man; nemo, no one; turb8, whirlwind; Apollo,Apollo. Also substantives in -dS (except praedo, G. -onis, robber) ;andin -go (except harpago, Gr. -onis, grappling-hook ; ligo, G. -onis, mattock) ;as, grando, hail ; virgo, virgin. -en finis : the masc. substantivesflamen, priest; oscen (also f.), divining bird; pecten, comb; musicalperformers, cornicen, fidicen, liticen, tiblcen, tubicen. Also manyneuters : as nomen, name.3. -o (in early Latin o, in classical period weakened), -onis : leo,lion; and about seventy others. -o, -onis : Saxo, Saxon (late).4. Irregular formations : car, G. carnis, flesh ; Ani5, G. Anienis, ariver ; Neri6, G. NSrienis, a proper name. Sanguls, blood, and pollis,flour, drop the stem characteristic and add s to form nominative ; G.sanguinis, pollinis.FEMININE.42. MASCULINE.41, i, 2.So. N. Ie6, lion(m.).G. leonis,D. leonl,Ac. leonem,V. leo,Ab. leone,PL. N. leones,G. leonum,D. leonibos,Ac. leones,V. leonSs,Ab. leonibus.NOTE. Early Latin shows homonem, etc., occasionally.43. Rules of Gender. i. Substantives in -C are masculine,except car6, flesh, and those in -do, -go, and -io.EXCEPTIONS. -Masculine are cardo, hinge; ordo, rank; harpago, grapplinghook; ligo, mattock ;marg5, border (occasionally fern, in late Latin) and concrete;nouns like pugio, dagger, titiS, firebrand, vespertilio, bat.2. Substantives in -en (-men) are neuter. See exceptions,
CONSONANT STEMS. 214. LIQUID STEMS IN r.44. Form Nominative without s.Stems fall into the following classes :i.-ar,-(tris: salar, trout ; proper names like Caesar, Hamilcar;the neuters baccar, a plant ; iubar, radiance ; nectar, nectar. -ar,arts: Lar, a deity. -ar, arts : Nar (ENN., VERG.), a river.-ar, arris :far (n.) spelt.2. -er, ~eris : acipSnser, a fish ; agger, mound ; anser, goose ; asser,pole ; aster, a plant ; cancer, the disease ; career, prison; later, brick;mulier (f .),woman ; passer, sparrow ; tuber (m. and f.), apple ; vesper,evening (68, 10) ; vSmer, ploughshare (47 , 2).The neuters acer, maple;cadaver, dead body ; cicer, pea ; laser, a plant ; laver, a plant ; papaver,poppy ; piper, pepper ; slier, willow ; siser, skirret ; suber, cork ; tuber,tumor ; fiber, teat ; [verber], thong. -er> -ris : four words, accipiter,hawk ; frater, brother ; mater, mother ; pater, father. Also some propernames, as DiSspiter, Falacer, and the names of the months, September,October, November, December. Also, imber, shower, linter, skiff, fiter,bag, venter, belly, which were probably vowel stems originally (see 45,R. i). -er, -eris : a6r, air ; aether, ether. -er, -eris : v5r,spring.3. -or, -oris : arbor (f.), tree (stem originally in -os) ;some Greekwords in -tor, as rhetor, rhetorician ; slave names in -por, as Marcipor ;the neuters :ador, spelt ; aequor, sea ; marmor, marble. -or, -oris :very many abstract words, as amor, love; color, colour; clamor, outcry ;soror, sister ; uxor, wife ; these may come from stems in 5s (see 47, 4) ;also verbals in -tor, as victor.4. -ur, -uris : augur, augur ; furfur, bran ; turtur, dove ; vultur,vulture; lemures (pi.), ghosts, and a few proper names ;also theneuters fulgur, lightning ; guttur, throat ; murmur, murmur ; sulfur,sulphur.-ur, -uris ; fur, thief.5. Four neuters, ebur, ivory ; femur, thigh ; iecur, liver ; robur, oak,show Gen. in -oris ;two of these, femur, iecur, have also the irregularforms feminis and iecineris, iecinoris, iocinoris. Iter, way, has G. itineris;and supellex, furniture, has G. supellSctilis.45. SINGULAR. PLURAL. SINGULAR. PLURAL.N. labor, toil (m.), labor es, pater, father (m.), patrSs,G. laboris, laborum, patris, patrnm,D. labor!, laboribus, patrl, patribus,Ac. laborem, labores, patrem, patres,V. labor, laborgs, pater, patrgs,Ab. labore, laboribus. patre. patribus.
22 THIRD DECLENSION.REMARKS. i. Imber, shower, linter, skiff, uter, bag, venter, belly,show the vowel nature of their steins by having Gen. PI. in -ium.Imber has also sometimes Abl. Sing, in I.(See 37, 4. )2. Bobur, strength, also forms a Nom. r5bus (47, 4), and v5mer, ploughshare,vomis (47, 2).NOTE. Arbor, and many stems in -or, were originally stems in -s ;the s became r(47) between two vowels in the oblique cases, and then reacted upon the Nominative.But many Nominatives in -os are still found in early Latin ;and some are still retainedin the classical times : arbos (regularly in VERG., frequently in LUCK., HOR., Ov.),hones (regularly in VERG., commonly in Cic., LIVT), and others.46. Rules of Gender. i. Substantives in -er and -or aremasculine. 2. Substantives in -ar and -ur are neuter.EXCEPTIONS. Masculine are salar, trout, and proper names in -ar ;augur,augur ; furfur, bran ; names of animals in -ur and a few proper names in -ur.Feminine are arbor, tree ; mulier, woman ; soror, sister ; uzor, wife. Neuterare acer, maple ; ador, spelt ; aequor, sea ; cadaver, dead body ; cicer, pea ;iter, way ; laser, a plant ~ laver, a plant ;marmor, marble ; papaver, poppy ;piper, pepper ; slier, willow ; siser, skirret ; suber, cork ; tuber, tumor ; fiber,teat ; v6r, spring ; [verber], thong.B.-Sibilant Stems.47. The Nominative has no additional s, and changes inmasculines e to i, and in neuters e or o to u before s.In the oblique cases, the s of the stem usually passes over,between two vowels, into r (rhotacism).There are the following varieties of stems :1. -as, -aris : mas, male. -as, -dsis : vas (n.), vessel. -as,-assis : as (m.), a copper (vowel long in Nom. by compensatorylengthening), and some of itscompounds (with change of vowel), asbes, semis.2. -es, -erist CerSs, Ceres. -is, -eris : cinis, ashes; cucumis,cucumber (see 57, R. i), pulvis (occasionally pulvis), dust; vGmia, ploughshare(see 45, R. 2). -us, -eris : Venus, and occasionally plgnus,pledge (see 4).3. -Is, -iris : glls, dormouse.4. -OS, -osis : old Latin ianitos, labos, clamos (see 45, N.). -OS,-ossis : os (n.), bone. -6s, -oris : flos, flower; glos, sister-in-law;lepos,charm; m5s(m.), custom; -6s (n.), mouth ; ros,dew. -us, -oris :corpus, body ; decus, grace ; pignus, pledge, and twelve others ;on robus(see 45, R. 2).5. -us, -uris: Ligus, Ligurian. -us, -uris: tellus (f.), earth;mus (m.), mouse; the neuters: crus, leg; ius, right; pus, pus; rus,country; tus, incense.6. aes, aeris, brass.
CONSONANT STEMS.2348. SINGULAR. PLURAL. SINGULAR. PLURAL.N. A. V. genus, kind (n.), genera, corpus, body (n.), corpora,G. generis, generum, corporis, corporum,D. generl, generibus, corporl, corporibus,Ab. genere. generibus. corpore. corporibus.REMARK. As, a copper, and os, bone, form the Gen. PL in -ium, afterthe usage of vowel stems (see 38, 2). So also mus, mouse.49. Rule of Gender. Masculine are substantives in -is(-eris), and -6s, -oris: except 6s, mouth (G. oris), which isnenter.Neuter are substantives in -us (G. -eris, -oris),and in -us(G. -uris) except ; tellus, earth (G. telluris),which is feminine;and the masculines, lepus, hare (G. leporis) ; mus,mouse (G. muris).C. Mute Stems.50. All masculines and feminines of mute stems have s inthe Nominative. Before s a P-mute is retained, a K-mutecombines with it to form x, a T-mute isdropped.Most polysyllabic mute stems change their final vowel iinto e in the Nominative.The stems show variations as follows :51. Stems in a P-mute.1. -abSf -abis : trabs, beam ; Arabs. -aps, -apis : [daps], feast.2. -ebs, ebis : plebs, commons.3. -eps, -ipis : princeps, chief, and fourteen others. -ips,-ipis :stips, dole.4. -ops, -opis : [ops], power.5. -eps, upis : auceps, fowler, and the old Latin manceps, contractor.6. -rbs, -rbis : urbs, city.7. -rps, -rpis : stirps, stock.So. N. princeps, chief (m.), PL. prlncipgs,G. principis, principum,D. principl, prmcipibus.Ac. prlncipem, prlncipgs,V. princeps, prlncipgs,Ab. principe.prlncipibus.52. Stems in a K-mute.i.-ax, -acis: fax, torch, and many Greek words in -ax, Atax,proper name, -ax, -acis : fornax, furnace ; Umax, snail ; pax, peace ;and Greek cordax, thorax.X
24 THIED DECLENSION.2. -ex, -ecis : faenisex, mower ; nex, murder ; [prex], prayer ;[resex], stump. -ex, -eds : allex (also allEc), brine ; vervgx, wether.-ex, -egis : grex, herd ; aquilex, water-inspector. -ex, -egis :interrex ; lex, law ; rex, Icing.3. 'ex, ids : auspex, soothsayer, and about forty others. -ex,-igis : remex, rower. -ix, Ids : cervix, neck, and about thirtyothers ;verbals in -ix, as victrlx. -ix, -ids :appendix, appendix, andten others. -ix, -igis : strix, screech-owl ; also many foreign propernames, as Dumnorix, which may, however, be forms in -ix, -igis.4. -ox, -6ds : ce!5x, cutter ; v5x, voice. -ox, -ods : Cappadox,Cappadocian. -ox, -ogis : Allobrox, Allobrogian.5. -ux,-uds: crux, cross; dux, leader ; ma, nut. -ux,-uds:lux, light ; ballux, gold-dust ; Pollux. -ux, -ugis : coniux (-uns),spouse. 'Ux, -ugis : frux, fruit.6. 'TX, -rds : arx, citadel ; merx, wares. -Ix, -Ids : faix,sickle ; calx, heel, lime. -nx, -nds : lanx, dish ; compounds of -uux,as quincunx, and a few names of animals ; phalanx has G. phalangis.7. Unclassified : nix (G. nivis), snow ; b6s (G. bovis ;see 71), ox; [faux](G. faucis), throat ; faex (G. faecis), dregs.So. N. rex, king (m.). PL. rggSs,G. regis, rSgum,D. r6gi, rggibus,Ac. regem, r5g6s,V. r6x, r8g6s,Ab. rege,rBgibus.53. Stems in a T-mute1.-as, -atis : many feminine abstracts, as aetas, age ; some propernames, as Maecenas. -as, -atis : anas, duck. -as, -adis : vas,bail ; lampas, torch.2. -es,-etis: indiges, patron deity ; interpres, interpreter; praepes,bird; seges, crop; teges, mat. -es, -etis : abies, fir; aries, ram;paries, wall. -es, -etis : quies, quiet ; requies, rest. -es, -edis :p6s, foot, and its compounds. -es, -edis : heres, heir ; merces, hire.3. -es, -itis : antistes, overseer ; caespes, sod, and some fifteen others,-es, -idis : obses, hostage ; praeses, protector. -is, -itis :lls, suit. -is, -idis : capis, bowl ; cassis, helmet, and nearly fortyothers, mostly Greek.4. -os, -ofis : c5s, whetstone ; d6s, dowry ; nepos, grandson ; sacerdos,priest. -os, -ddis : cust5s, guard.5. -us, 'Utis : glus, glue, and some abstracts : iuventus, youth ;salus, safety ; senectus, old age ; servitus, servitude ; virtus, manliness.-us, -udis : pecus, sheep. -us, -udis : incus, anvil ; palus,marsh ; subscus, tenon.
CONSONANT STEMS. 256. -aes, -aedis : praes, surety. -aus, -audis : laus, praise ;fraus, fraud.7. -Is, -Itis : puls, porridge. -ns f-ntis : Infans, infant ; dens,tooth ; fons, fountain ; m5ns, mountain ; frons, Z>row ; pens, bridge ; gens,tribe; lens, lentil; mSns, mind; rudens, rope; torrens, torrent. -s,-ntis : latinised Greek words like gigas, giant. -rs, -rtis : ars, art ;cohors, cohort,- fors, chance ; Mars; mors, death ; sors, lot.8. Unclassified : cor (G. cordis), heart ; nox (G. noctis), night ; caput(G. capitis), Aeorf ; lac (G. lactis), milk.So. N. aetas, age, (f.). PL. aetatSs, SG. p6s, foot (m.). PL. pedes,G. aetatis, aetatum, pedis, pedum,1). aetati, aetatibus, pedl, pedibus,Ac. aetatem, aetates, pedem, pedes,Y. aetas, aetates, pes, pedes,Ab. aetate, aetatibus. pede, pedibus.54. Many substantives of this class were originally vowel stems(see 56), and show their origin by having the termination -ium in theGen. PI. and -I in the Abl. Singular. Some not originally vowel stemsdo the same. (See 38, 2.)Monosyllabic mute stems, with the characteristic preceded by aconsonant, have the Gen. PL in -ium :urbium, of cities ; arcium, ofcitadels ; montium, of mountains ; partium, of parts ; noctium, of thenights. But -um is also found in gentum (ATTIUS), partum (ENNius) ;so always opum.Monosyllabic mute stems, with characteristic preceded by a longvowel or diphthong, vary : dot-ium, lit-ium, fauc-iuni, fraud-um (-ium),laud-um (-ium). But praed-um, vScum.Monosyllabic mute stems with characteristic preceded by a shortvowel have -um ;but fac-ium, nuc-um (-ium), niv-ium (-um).The polysyllabic stems in -nt and -rt have more frequently -ium, asclientium (-um), of clients ; cohortium (-um), of companies. So adulSscentium(-um), amantium (-um), Infantium (-um), parentum (-ium), serpentium(-um), torrentium (-um) ;rudentum (-ium) ;but only quadrantum.Of other polysyllabic stems feminine stems in -at have frequentlyboth -um and -ium, as aetatum and aetatium, civitatum and civitStium,etc. ; the rest have usually -um : but artifex, (h)aruspex, extispex, iudex,supplex, coniux, r6mex, and usually fornax have -ium.municeps, princeps have -um.Falus has usually paludium.Forceps, manceps,NOTES. i. The accusative lentim from [16ns] is occasionally found, and partimfrom pars,as an adverb.2. Sporadic ablatives in -i occur as follows : animantl (Cic.), bidentl (LucB.),tridentl (Sn,., VEBG.), capitl, consonant! (gram.), hgrSdl (inscr.), Iggl (inscr.),lent! (TITIN., COL.), lucl (early), mentl (COL.), occipiti (PKBS., Aus.), pad(VABBO), parti, rudentl (VITK.). sorti, torrentl (SEN.).
26 THIED DECLENSION.55. Rule of Gender. Mute stems, with Nominative in s,are feminine.1.Exceptionsin a k-mute. ,Masculines are substantives in -ex, -6x, -ix, and -rtnx ; except cortex,bark, forfex, shears, frutex, shrub, imbrex, tile, latex, fluid, obex, bolt,silex, flint, varix, varicose vein, which are sometimes masculine, sometimesfeminine ; and faex, dregs, forpex, tongs, iSx, law, nex, slaughter,vlbex, weal, and forms of [prex], prayer, which are feminine. Calx,heel, and calx, chalk, are sometimes masculine, sometimes feminine.2. Exceptions in a t-mute.Masculine are substantives in -es, -itis, except merges (f.), sheaf;also pes, foot, and its compounds ; paries, wall ; lapis, stone.Masculines in -ns are :dens, tooth, and its compounds ; f5ns, spring ;m5ns, mountain ; pons, bridge, ; rudfins, rope ; torrens, torrent ; also somesubstantivised adjectives and participles.Neuters are only : cor, heart, lac, milk, and caput, head.II.-VOWEL STEMS.1 .Vowel Stems in I.56. Masculines and feminines form their Nominative in s.Some feminines change, in the Nominative, the stemvoweli into e.Neuters change, in the Nominative, the stem-vowel i intoe. This e is generally dropped by polysyllabic1 and r.neuters afterStems in i have Genitive Plural in -ium.Neuter stems in i have the Ablative Singular in i, andNominative Plural in -ia.The varieties of stems are :1. -is, -is : nearly one hundred substantives, like clvis, citizen.2. -es, -is : thirty-five, like vulpSs, fox. Some of these have alsovariant nominatives in -is in good usage.3. -e, -is : some twenty neuters, as mare, sea.4. ,-is : twenty-four neuters, which form Nominative by droppingthe stem characteristic and shortening the preceding vowel : animal,-alls, animal ; calcar (G-. calcaris), spur.5. For substantives in -er, -ris, see 44, 2. Irregular is senex,(G. senis ;see 57, R. 3), old man.
VOWEL STEMS.So. N. collis, hill, turris, tower. vulp6s,/o:c. mare, sea. animal, living being.G. collis, turris, vulpis, raaris, animalis,D. colll,Ac. collem,V. collis,Ab. colle,turrl,turrim(em),turris,turrl(e),vulpl,vulpem,vulpes,vulpe,marl,mare,mare,marl,animal!,animal,animal,animal!,PL N. collSs, turrSs,G. collium, turri-um,D. collibus, turri-bus,Ac. collisCes), turris(es),V. colles, turrSs,Ab. collibus. turri-bus.vulpes, maria, animalia,vulpium, marum, animalium,vulpibus, maribus, animalibus,vulpls(e"s), maria, animalia,vulpes, maria, animalia,vulpibus. maribus. animalibus.57. REMARKS. i. The proper ending of the Ace. Sing, -im, is retainedalways in amussis, buris, cucumis (see 47, 2), futis, mephitis,ravis, rumis, sitis, tussis, vis ;and in names of towns and rivers in -is,as Neapolis, Tiberis ; usually in febris, puppis, pelvis, restis, securis, turris ;occasionally in bipennis, clavis, cratis, cutis, len(ti)s (see 54, N. i), messis,navis, neptis, praesaepis, sementis, strigilis.2. The Abl. in -I is found in substantives that regularly have -imin Ace. (except perhaps restis): also not unfrequently in amnis, avis,bipennis, canalis, clvis, classis, finis (in formulas), fustis, Ignis (in phrases),orbis, sementis, strigilis, uuguis ; occasionally in anguis, bilis, clavis,collis, convallis, corbis, messis, neptis ; regularly in neuters in e, al, and ar,except in rete, and in the towns Caere, Praeneste.NOTE. So also the adjectives of this class, when used as substantives by ellipsis :annSlis (sc. liber, book), chronicle ; natalis (sc. die's, day), birthday; Aprllis (sc.mSnsis, month), and all the other months of the Third Declension :Abl., annall,natall, Aprill, SeptembrI, etc. But iuvenis, young man; and aedllis, aedile,have Abl., iuvene, aedile ; adjectives used as proper nouns have generally Abl. ine, as, luvenalis, luvenale.3. In the Gen. PL, instead of the ending -ium, -urn is found alwaysin canis, dog, iuvenis, young man, panis, bread, senex, old, Strugs, heap,volucris, bird; usually in apis, bee, sgdes, seat, vat6s, bard ; frequentlyin mgnsis, month. On imber, etc., see 45, R. i. Post-classical and rareare ambagum, caedum, cladum, veprum, and a few others ;marum (theonly form found) occurs once.4. In the Nom. PL -els and -Is are found in early Latin. So occasionallyin consonant stems (see 38, i), but in classical times such usageis doubtful.5. The proper ending of the Aec. PL, -Is (archaic, -els), is found frequentlyin the classical period along with the later termination -Ss, whichsupplants -Is wholly in the early empire. On the other hand, -Is for -68in consonant stems is confined to a few doubtful cases in early Latin.
28 THIRD DECLENSION.58. Rule of Gender. i. Vowel stems, with Nominativein -6s are feminine ;masculine, partly feminine.those with Nominative in -is are partlyMasculine are: anmis, river (f., early); ante's (pl.)> rows; axis, axle; buris, ploughtail;cassSs (pi.), toils; caulis, stalk; collis, hill; crlnis, hair; gnsis, glaive;fascis, fagot ; follis, bellows ; funis, rope (f ., LUCE.) ;fustis, cudgel ; ignis, fire ;mane's (pi.), Manes ; m6nsis, month ; mugil(is), mullet ; orbis, circle ; panis, bread ;postis, door-post ; torr is,.fire-brand ; unguis, nail ; vectis, lever ; vermis, worm.Common are :c&Uis, footpath , canalis, canal ; clunis, haunch ; cor bis,basket ;finis, end ; rStis, net (also re"te, n.) ; sentis (usually pi.), bramble ; scrobis, ditch ;torquis (es), necklace ; t5l6s (pl.)i goitre ; veprSs (pi-), bramble.REMARK. Of the names of animals in -is,some are masculine ; tigris,tiger (fern, in poetry) ; canis, dog (also fern.) ; piscis, fish ; others feminine:apis, tee ; avis, bird ; ovis, sheep ; fglis, cat (usually feles).2. Vowel stems, with Nominative in -e, -al, -ar, are neuter.2. Vowel Stems in u.59. Of stems in u, the monosyllabic stems, two in number,belong tothe Third Declension.PL. gruesSo. N. grus, crane (f.)Ab. grue gruibos.(jr.gmisgruumD. grulgruibusAc. gruemgruesV. grusgruesSfis, swine (commonly f.), usually subus, in Dat. and Abl. Plural.TABLE OF NOMINATIVE AND GENITIVE ENDINGS op THE THIRD DECLENSION.The * before the ending denotes that it occurs only in the one word cited.60.
VOWEL STEMS.B. NOMINATIVES ENDING WITH B,OK
JOFOURTH DECLENSION.FOURTH DECLENSION.61. The Fourth Declension embraces only dissyllabic andpolysyllabic stems in u.The endings are those of the Third Declension.In the Genitive and Ablative Singular, and in the Nominative,Accusative, and Vocative Plural (sometimes, too, inthe Dative Singular), the u of the stem absorbs the vowel ofthe ending, and becomes long. In the Dative and AblativePlural it is weakened to i before the ending -bus.The Accusative Singular, as always in vowel stems, hasthe ending -m, without a connecting vowel (compare theAccusative in -i-m of the stems in i),hence -u-m.MASCULIKE.NEUTER.SG. N.G.fructus, fruit.fructus,PL. fructus, SG. cornu, horn. PL. cornua,cornuum,cornibus,cornua,cornua,cornibus.REMARKS. i. Dot. Abl. The original form -u-bus is retainedalways in acus, arcus, quercus, tribus, and in classical times in partus.But artus, genu, lacus, portus, specus, tonitru, veru, have both forms.2. Domus, house, is declined : G. domu-os (archaic), domu-is and domi(early), domu-us (late), domus. D. domo (early), domuL Ac. domum.V. domus. Ab. dom-ti (sporadic), domo. Loc. domi. PI. N. domus.G. domorum (LucR. always, VERG., FLOR.), domuum (late). D. Ab.domibus. Ac. domos, domus. Classical forms are those in black-facedtype. A classical variant for domi (Loc.) is domui.NOTES. 1. Singular: Genitive. In early inscriptions we find the ending -os, assenatuOS ;and in early authors not nnf requently -is, along with the contraction -us(uis), which becomes the regular form in classical times. In inscriptions under theempire -us is occasionally found, as exercituus. The termination -I,after the analogyof the Second Declension, is common in early Latin, and is still retained in somewords even into the classical period ;as senatl (Cic., SALL., LIVT), tumultl (SALL.).2. Dative. In the early tune -uel is found very rarely for -ul. Also u, as senatu,fructu, which became the only form for neuters. In classical tunes -u in masc. andfern, is poetical only (CAESAR uses, however, casu, exercitu, magistratu, senatu,quaestu), but extends to prose in the Augustan age and later.3. Plural : Norn., Ace., Voc. In imperial inscriptions -uus occurs.4. Genitive. The poets frequently contract -uum into -um for metrical reasons,and this usage was sometimes extended to prose (not by CICERO) in common words ;passum for passuum.5. Colus, distaff, belongs properly to the Second Declension, but has variants : Q.COlus, Ab. colu, PL, N., Ac., fromcolus,the Fourth.aa
FIFTH DECLENSION. 3!62. Rule of Gender. Substantives in -us are masculine ;those in -ti are neuter.EXCEPTIONS. Feminines are acus, needle (usually), domus, house,Idus (pi.), the Ides, manus, hand, penus, victuals (also m.), porticus,piazza, qulnquatrus (pi.), festival of Minerva, tribus, tribe. Early andlate Latin show some further variations.FIFTH DECLENSION.63. The stem ends in -e ;Nominative in s.In the Genitive and Dative Singular -e has been shortenedafter a consonant.In the Accusative Singular we find always e.The ending in the Genitive Singularis that of the SecondDeclension, -I ;the other endings are those of the Third.MASCULINE.FEMININE.SG. N. dies, day. PL. digs, SG. rgs, thing. PL. rfis rG. diet, dierum, rei, rSrom,D. diei, diebus, rei, rebus,Ac. diem, digs, rem, res,V. diSs, digs, rgs, rgs,Ab. dig. diebus. re. rebus.REMARKS. i. Plural: Gen., Dat., All. Common in but two substantives,digs, rgs. Late Latin shows also specigbus, and very rarely spebusand aciebus.2. Many words of the Fifth Declension have a parallel form, whichfollows the First Declension, as mollitigs, softness, and mollitia. Wherethis is the case, forms of the Fifth Declension are usually found onlyin the Nom., Ace., and Abl. Singular.NOTES. 1. Singular : Genitive. The older ending -g-s is found sporadically inearly Latin, but usually the ending -g-I, which became later -8-1 after consonants,though early poets show numerous examples of rgl, spgi, fidel. gl was occasionallyscanned as one syllable, whence arose the contraction g, which is retained not unfrequentlyin the classical period so; acig (CAES., SALL.), dig (Pi-, CAES., SALL., LIVY,later), fidg (Pi., HOB., Ov., late Prose), and other less certain cases; Joccursvery rarely,principally in early Latin (but dil, VEKG., pernicil, Cic.). Plebes, in combinationwith tribunus, aedllis, scitum, often shows a Gen. plgbl (plgbei).2. Dative. The contraction -g is found, but less often than in the Gen. ; awe(SALL.) ;dig, facig (early Latin) ; fidg (early Latin, CAES., SAXL., LIVY), pernicig(LIVY), and a few other forms. The Dat. in -I is found very rarely in early Latin.64. Rule of Gender. Substantives of the Fifth Declensionare feminine except dies (which in the Sing, is common,and in the PI. masculine), and raerldies (m.), midday.
DECLENSION OF GREEK SUBSTANTIVES.Declension of Greek Substantives.65. Greek substantives, especially proper names, are commonlyLatinised, and declined regularly according to theirstem-characteristic. Many substantives, however, eitherretain their Greek form exclusively, or have the Greek andLatin forms side by side. These variations occur principallyin the Singular, in the Plural the declension is usually regular.Singular Forms of Greek Substantives.P5nelop6,First Declension.AnchisBs,Anchisae,Anchlsae,Anchisen, am,Anchlse, a, a,Anchisa.N.G.D.Ac.V.Ab.Androgeos, as,Androgel,Androgeo,Androgeon, o,onaAndrogeos,Androgeo.N.G.D.Ac.V.Ab.Atlas,Atlantis,Atlanti,Atlanta,Atla,Atlante.hSros, hero,herois,heroi,heroa, em,heros,heroe.
IKREGULAR SUBSTANTIVES. 33
34 IRREGULAR SUBSTANTIVES.palatum, -us, palate, thesaurus, -um, treasure,pileus, -um, cap, uterus, -um, u-omb,sagum, -us, cloak, vallus, -um, palisade,tergum, -us, back, and many others.2. The gender varies in Singular and Plural, a. The Plural has-a sometimes, while the Singular ends in -us (or -er):clivus, hill, iocus,jest, locus (loca, localities ; loci, usually passages in books, topics), andmany others, especially names of places.b. The Plural has -I,while the Singular ends in -um :filum, thread,r6num, bit, rastrum, hoe, and many others.68. B. Heteroclites, or substantives which show different stems withthe same Nominative ; Metaplasts, or those which have certain formsfrom another than the Nominative stem.1. 1st, 2d. esseda, -um, chariot, margarita, -um, pearl,ostrea, -um, oyster,2. 1st, 5th. duritia, -6s, hardness, materia, -68, matter,and many others. See 63, R. 2.3. 2d, 1st. mendum, -a, fault, sertum, -a, wreath.The following form their Plural according to the First Declension only balneum,:bath, delirium, pleasure, epulum, banquet, fulmentum, prop.4. 2d, 3d. sequester, trustee, Mulciber, Vulcan.5- 2d, 4th. Many names of trees of the Second Declension have certain casesaccording to the Fourth ; never, however, the Gen. and Dat. PI., and very rarely theDat. Sing. as ; cornus, cupressus, fagus, ficus, laurus, myrtus, plnus, and afew others.Also angiportus, alley, colus, distaff, domus, house, and a large number of substantivesof the Fourth Declension which have one or two cases of the Second ;soarcus has G. arcl; conatus (-um), iussus (-tun), vultus have Norn. PI. in a;senatus has Gen. Sing, senatl. See 61, KB, NN.Finally, some substantives of the Second Declension form individual cases accordingto the Fourth fasti (Ac. pi. :fastus), fretum (N. fretus, Ab. fretu), lectus (G.lecttis), tributum (N. tributus), and others.6. 2d, 5th. diluvium, -Ss, flood.7. 3d. 2d. Vas, vessel, and vasum ; palumbes, pigeon, and palumbus ; [iuger],acre, and alliugerum Greek nouns in -a (G. atis), as;poma, poem (G. poSmatis),but PL Gen. poSmatorum, Dat. Abl. poSmatis.8. 3d, 5th. Fames, hunger, tabes, corruption, have Abl. fame, tab6 ; requi6s,quiet (G. -6tis) has Ace. requiem, Abl. requi6 satias (G. atis) is early and late for;satietas, sufficiency, and a form saties is cited from late authors ;plgbs (G. plgbis),commons, and pl6b6s (G. plebei).9- 4th, 3d. Specus, cave, has occasionally forms of the Third Declension.10. 2d, 3d, 1st. Vesper, evening, has Ace. vesperum Dat. Abl.;vesperS PI.;Nom. vespera of the Second Declension Ace. ; vesperam Abl. ; vesperaof the First ;Gen. vesperis Abl. ; vespere Loc.; vespere, vesper!of the Third.11. 4th, 2d, 3d. Penus,/ocKZ, (G. Us). Forms of the Second Declension are rare ;of the Third early and late.12. Variations in the same Declension : femur (G. femoris, feminis, etc.) ; iecur(G. iecoris. iecinoris, etc.) ;pecus, early, also pecu (G. peooris, pecudis, etc.).Also allSc and Sll6x, baccar and baccaris, cassis and cassida, lac and lacte(early), panis and pane (early), re"te and r6tis, satias and satietas.
IRREGULAR SUBSTANTIVES. 35II. Defective Substantives.I. SUBSTANTIVES DEFECTIVE IN NUMBER.69. A. Substantives used in Singular only : Singularia tantum.Most abstract substantives, and names of materials ;such asiustitia, justice, aurum, gold.B. Substantives used in Plural only: Pluralia tantum.altaria, ium,
30 IRREGULAR SUBSTANTIVES.NOTES. 1. Four of these have the Abl. Sing, in -e: ambage, compede, fauce,prece.2. Names of persons or towns, and collectives and the like, may be either singuiSriatantum, as luppiter Roma; ; capillus, hair ; or pluralia tantum, asmaiorSs, ancestors ; Quirites liberl, children ; pulmonSs, lungs. Many of these;are not included in the above list, which is meant to contain only the principal forms.Akin to pluralia tantum are :C. Substantives used in Plural with a special sense :Heterologa.aetlgs, is,
ADJECTIVES. 3771. III. Peculiarities.as, assis (m.), a copper.auceps, aucupis, fowler.bos (for bovs), bovis (c.), ox, cow.G. Pi. bourn.D. Ab. bubus, bobus.caput, capitis (n.), head.anceps, ancipitis, two-headed.praeceps, -cipitis, headlong.caro, carnis (f.),Jlesh.PL G. carnium.Cere's, Cereris, Ceres.far, farris (n.) spelt.fel, fellis (n.), gall.femur, femoris (n.), thigh.feminis.ADJECTIVES.iter, itineris (n.), way, route.iecur, iecoris (n.), liver.iecinoris, iecineris, iocineris.luppiter, lovis.mel, mellis (n.), honey.nix, nivis (f snow..),OS, ossis (n.), bone (48 B.).8s, 6ris (n.), mouth.pollis, jwllinis (m.), flour.sanguis, sanguinis (m.), Wood.senex, senis, oW wiaw.supellex, supellectilis (f.), furniture.Venus, Veneris, Venus.72. The adjective adds a quality to the substantive. Adjectiveshave the same declension as substantives, and accordingto the stem-characteristic are of the First and Second, orThird Declension.Adjectives of the First and Second Declension.73. Stems in -o for masculine and neuter, -a for feminine ;nominative in -us, -a, -urn ;(er), -a, -um. The same variationsin termination occur as in the substantives ; except thatadjectives in -ius form Singular Genitive and Vocative regularly.See 33, E. i and 2.Bonus, bona, bonum, good.M. p. N. M. F. N.SG. N. bonus, bona, bonum. PL. bonl, bonae, bona.6. bonl, bonae, boni. bonorum, bonarum, bonorum.D. bono, bonae, bond. bonis, bonis, bonls.Ac. bonum, bonam, bonum. bonos, bonas, bona.V. bone, bona, bonum. boni, bonae, bona.Ab. bono, bona, bono. bonis, bonis, bonis.Miser, misera, miserum, wretched.SG. N. miser, misera, miserum. PL. miseri, miserae, misera.6. miseri, miserae, miseri. miserorura, miserarum, miseroriun,D. misero, miserae, misero. miserls, miserls, miserls.Ac. miserum, miseram, miserum. miseros, miseras, misera.V. miser, misera, miserum. miseri, miserae, misera.Ab. miserS, misera, misero. miserls, miserls, miserls.
38 ADJECTIVES.Piger, pigra, pigrom, slow.So. N. piger, pigra, pigrum. PL. pigri, pigrae, pigra.G. pigri, pigrae, pigri. pigrorum, pigrarum, pigrorum.D. pigrS, pigrae, pigr5. pigris, pigrls, pigris.Ac. pigrum, pigram, pigrum. pigros, pigras, pigra.V. piger, pigra, pigrum. pigri, pigrae, pigra.Ab.pigro, pigjra, pigrS. pigris, pigris, pigris.REMARK. For irregularities in the declension of ambo, both, duo,two, see 95 ; for meus, my, see 100, R. i.74. Stems in -ro follow the same principle in the formationof the Nominative masculine as the substantives, exceptthat -us is retained in ferus, wild, properus, quick, praeproperus,praeposterus, absurd, inferus, lower (infer is early),superus, upper (super is early), and a few others in late Latin ;also when -ro is preceded by a long vowel ; as, austerus,harsh, maturus, early, procerus, tall, purus, pure, severus,serious, sincerus, sincere, serus, late, verus, true.REMARKS. i. Dextera, dexterum, etc., right, are found side by sidewith dextra, dextrum, etc., throughout the language (see 8, 2). CAESARuses only the shorter form.2. A few adjectives of this class lack the Nom. Sing, wholly or inpart so there is no cSterus or posterns in the classical ;period.75. NOTES ON THE CASES. 1. The Gen. Sing, in -I from adjectives In -ius occursoccasionally in inscriptions and in late authors. The Gen. Sing. fern, in early Latinhad sometimes 51,arid in inscriptions occasionally -aes and -as.2. The Dat. Sing. fern, in early Latin occasionally ended in -SI, and in the oldestinscriptions in -5.3. In early inscriptions the -d of the Abl. is occasionally retained.4. Very rarely in early inscriptions does the Nom. PL masc. end in -els, and in onecase the Nom. PI. fern of a perfect participle ends in -SI.5. In poetry, but at all periods, we find -um alongside of -Srtun and -arum in theGen. Plural.6. In the Dat. and Abl. PL -ils from adjectives in -ius is often contracted to Is ;usually in names of months and in adjectives formed from proper names. In earlyinscriptions -abus is found occasionally for -Is in the Dat. and Abl. PL feminine.76. The so-called pronominal adjectives alter, one of thetwo; altemter (a combination of alter and uter), either ofthe two ; alius, other; neuter, neither ; nullus, none; solus,sole ; totus, whole ; ullus, any ; unus, one ; uter, which of thetwo, and their compounds, show the following variations indeclension
ADJECTIVES.391.They usually make the Gen. Sing, in -Ius for all genders.REMARKS. i. The Gen. alius is very rare, and as a possessive itsplace is usually taken by alignus.2. The I of the ending -Ius (except in alius) could be shortened inpoetry. .This was usually the case with alter, and regularly in thecompounds of uter ; as, utriusque.NOTE. The regular forms are early and rare ;in classical prose only nulll (Cic.Eosc. Cam. 16, 48) and occasionally aliae.2. They usually make the Dat. Sing, in -I.NOTE. Regular forms are sometimes found, but in classical prose only alterae,null5, toto, and perhaps tStae. AH is found in early Latin for alii.3. In the compound alteruter we find usually both parts declined ;sometimes the second only.4. Alius makes Nom. and Ace. Sing, neuter irregularly: aliud.NOTE. Alis and alid,for alius and aliud,are early and rare ;the latter, however,occurs several times in LUCK, and once in CATULLUS.Adjectives of the Third Declension.77. The declension of the adjectives of the Third Declensionfollows the rules given for the substantives.Most adjectives of the Third Declension are vowel stemsin -i,with two (rarely three) endings in the Nominative.The remaining adjectives of the Third Declension are consonantstems and have one ending only in the Nominative.ADJECTIVES OF TWO ENDINGS.78. i. These have (except stems in -ri)one ending in theNominative for masculine and feminine, one for neuter.Most stems in -i form the masculine and feminine alike,with Nominative in s ;but the Nominative neuter weakensthe characteristic i into e.(Compare mare, sea.)2. Several stems in -i, preceded by r (cr, tr, br), form theNominative masculine, not by affixing but s, by dropping thei and inserting short e before the r, as, stem acri, sharp,Nom., acer (m.), acris (f.),acre (n.).These adjectives are acer, alacer, campester, celeber, celer, equester,paluster, pedester, puter, saluber, Silvester, terrester, volucer, and the lastfour months ;and are sometimes called adjectives of three endings.The e belongs to the stem in celer, celeris, celere, swift, and thereforeappears in all cases.
ADJECTIVES.N.
ADJECTIVES. 41Present active participles are also consonant stems andfollow the same declension.81. The stem varieties are :1. Liquid stems in (a) -1: vigil (G. vigil-is), alert, pervigil; (b) -r: par(G.par-is), equal, impar (these two lengthen the vowel in the Nom.), compar and three,others ;pauper (G. pauper-is), poor, uber ;memor (G. memor-is), mindful, immemor;concolor (G. -6r-is), and three other compounds of color ; degener (G.-er-is), from genus (G. gener-is).2. Sibilant stems in (a) -s : exos (G. exoss-is), boneless (LucR.) (b) -r ; : gnarus(G. gnarur-is ; PLAUT.), Ligus, vetus ; pubgs (G. puber-is), impubes.3. Mute stems in (a) a K-mute : audax (G. audac-is), bold, and four others ; fglix(G. fslic-is), pernix, atrox (G. atrSc-is), ferSx, v6l6x ;exlgx (G. -16g-is) ;trux(G. truc-is), redux ;the multiplicatives in -plex (G. -plic-is), as simplex, etc. (b) AP-mute :inops (G. inop-is) ;caelebs (G. caelib-is) ;compounds of -ceps (G. -cip-is,from capere),as particeps, and of -ceps (G. -cipit-is, from caput), as anceps, praeceps(PLAUT. sometimes uses, in the Nom., ancipes, praecipes, etc.). (c) A T-mute :hebes (G. hebet-is) and three others ;locuplSs (G. -pl6t-is) and three others ; dives(G. dlvit-is), for which in poetry dls (G. dlt-is), SOSpes ; compos (G. compot-is),impos ; superstes (G. -sti-tis), ales ;exherSs (G. ed-is) ;dSses (G. dSsid-is),reses ;compounds from substantives : consors (G. -sort-is), exsors; concors, discors,misericors, socors, vecors ; expers (G. -ert-is), iners, sellers ;amens (G.ament-is), demens ;intercus (G. cut-is) ; pernox (G. -noct-is) ; tope's (G. -ped-is),quadrupSs, alipes ;adjectives and participles in -ans, -6ns (G. -ant-is, -ent-is)and proper names in -as (G. at-is), -is (G. -it-is), -ns (G. -nt-is), -rs (G. -rt-is),Arplnas, Samnls, Veiens, Gamers.82. The consonant stems have the same forms in all thegenders, except that in the Accusative Singular, and in theNominative, Accusative, and Vocative Plural, the neuter isdistinguished from the masculine and feminine.In the oblique cases they follow in part the declension ofvowel stems ; thus,1. In the Ablative Singular they have I and e when usedas adjectives commonlyI ;when used as substantives commonlye.The participles, as such, have e ;or adjectives, either e or i, with tendency to I.but used as substantives2. In the neuter Plural they have ia ; except vetus, old,which has vetera.Manyhave no neuter.3. In the Genitive Plural they have :ium, when the stemcharacteristicispreceded by a long vowel or a consonant ;um, when the characteristic ispreceded byThe participles have ium.a short vowel.
42 ADJECTIVES.M. and P. N. M. and F. N. M. and F. N.So N. flix,lucky,Rllx, priid5ns,wMf, prudens, vetus, old, vetus,G. felicis, fellcis, prudentis, prftdentis, veteris, veteris,D. fellci, feiicl, prudent!, prfldentl, veteri, veteri,Ac. felicein, felix, prudentem, prudens, veterem, vetus,V. felix, fellx, prudens, prudens, vetus, vetus,Ab. fgllcl(e) felicl(e) prfidentl(e) prudent! (e) vetere(l) vetere(i)PL. N. felices, felicia, prudentes, prudentia, vetere"s, vetera,G. felicium, fSlicium, prudentium, prfldentium, veterum, veterura,D. fellcibus, fellcibus, prudentibus, prudentibus, veteribus, veteribus,Ac. felices, felicia, prudentes, prudentia, veteres, vetera,V. fgllces, felicia, prudentes, prudentia, veteres, vetera,Ab. fellcibus, fellcibus. prudentibus, prudentibus. veteribus, veteribus.M. and F. N. M. and F. N.So. N. amans, loving,
ADJECTIVES. 432. Many adjectives which end in -is, -e, in the classical times, showparallel forms in -us, -a, -um, in early Latin, and more rarely in lateLatin. Adjectives in -us, -a, -um, in early Latin, seem to have had atendency to go over into forms in -is, -e. Thus, hilarus is the regularform in early Latin ;in CICERO it is used side by side with hilaris,and later hilaris is universal. Other examples in the classical periodare inermis and inermus ;imberbis and imberbus ;alaris and alarius ;ausiliaris and auxiliarius ;intercalaris and intercalarius ;talaris andtalarius.85. B. DEFECTIVE.1. Several adjectives lack a Nom. Singular, wholly or in part : as,cetera (f.), ceterum, perperum (n.), nuperum (n.), primoris (G.), bimaris(G-.), bimatris (Gr.), tricorporis (Gr.), and a few others.2. Some adjectives are defective in other cases :thus, exspes andperdius, -a are found only in the Nom. ;exlex only in the Nom. and Ace.(exlggem) ; pernox only in Nom., Abl. (pernocte), and Nom. PI. (pernoctSs,rare) ;centimanus has only the Ace. Sing. (HoB., Ov.) ;also unimanus(Liv.), and a few others.C. INDECLINABLES.NSquam ; potis, and pote (early) ; frugf macte; (mactus, -um, veryrare) ; necesse, necessum, and necessus (early and poetical) ; volup andvolupe (early) ;and the judicial dainnas.COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES.86. The Degrees of Comparison are : Positive, Comparative,and Superlative.The Comparativeis formed by adding to the consonantstems the endings -ior for the masculine and feminine, and-ins for the neuter.The Superlative is formed by adding to the consonantstems the endings -is-simus, -a, -um (earlier -is-sumus).Vowel stems, before forming the Comparative and Superlative,drop their characteristic vowel.POSITIVE. COMPARATIVE. SUPERLATIVE.M. and F. N.altus,a,um, high, altior, higher, altius, altissimus, a, um, highest.fortis, e, brave, fortior, fortius, fortissimus.utilis, e, useful, utilior, utilius, utilissimus.audax, bold, audacior, audacius, audacissimus.prudSns, wise, prudentior, prudentius, prudentissimus.NOTE. In early Latin we find very rarely -i5s for ior ;also -ior used for the neuterae well.
44 ADJECTIVES.Peculiarities.87. i.Adjectives in -er add the Superlative ending (-rumus) -rimus(for -simus by assimilation ;see 9, i) directly to the Nominative masculine.The Comparative follows the rule.POSITIVE. COMPABATIVB. SUPERLATIVE.miser, a, urn, wretched, miserior, miserius, miserrimus.celer, is, e, swift, celerior, celerius, celerrimua.acer, acris, acre, sharp, acrior, acrius, acerrimus.REMARKS. i. Dexter, right, and sinister, left,have always dexteriorand sinisterior in the Comparative. Deterior, worse, dSterrimus, lacks aPositive.2. Vetus, old, has Comp. veterior (archaic) or vetustior ; Sup.,veterrimus. Maturus, ripe, has occasionally Sup. maturrimus in additionto the normal maturissimus.NOTE. In early Latin and in Inscriptions this rule is occasionally violated. Thuscelerissimus in ENNIUS ;integrissimus, miserissimus, in inscriptions.2. Some Comparatives in -er-ior, whqse Positive is lacking or rare,form the Superlative either in -remus by metathesis ;or in -imus or-umus ;or in both. These are: citerior, on this side, citimus (rare);exterior, outer, extre*mus, extimus (latter not in Cic.) ;dexterior (87,i, R. i ;once in Cic.), dextimus (rare ;not in Cic.) ; Inferior, lower,Infinras, imus ; interior, inner, intimus ; posterior, hinder, postremus,postumus ; superior, upper, suprSmus, summus.3. Six adjectives in -ilis add -limus to the stem, after dropping -i, toform the Superlative ; perhaps by assimilation : facilis, easy ; difficilis,hard; similis, like ; dissimilis, unlike; gracilis, slender, and humilis, low.facilis, Comp. facilior, Sup. facillimus.4. Adjectives in -dicus, -ficus, -volus, borrow the Comparative andSuperlative from the participial forms in -dlcens, -ficens, and -volgns.benevolus, benevolent, Comp. benevolentior, Sup. benevolentissimus.maledicus, scurrilous. maledicentior, maledicentissimus.magnificus, distinguished. magnificentior, niagnificentissimus.NOTE.BenevolSns, malevolens, maledicSns,still occur in early Latin.5. In like manner egenus and prSvidus form their Comparative andSuperlative.egSnus, needy, egentior, egentissimus.providus, far-sighted, prSvidentior, pr5videntissim.ua.
ADJECTIVES. 456. Adjectives in -us (os), preceded by a vowel (except those in -quos),form the Comparative and Superlative by means of magis and maxime,more and most.idoneua,./?
46 ADJECTIVES.89. The Superlative follows the declension of adjectivesof Three Endings of the First and Second Declensions. TheComparative is declined according to the Third Declension,thus :M. andF. N. M. and F. N.So. N. altior, altius. PL. altiorSs, altiora.G. altioris, altioris. altiorum, altiorum.J). altiori, altiorl. altioribus, altioribus.Ac. altiorem, altius. altiores, altiora.V. altior, altius. altiores, altiora.Ab. altiore and -I, altiore and -I. altioribus, altioribus.REMARKS. i. In classical prose the Abl. Sing, ends n -e. In thepoets and in early and late prose often in -I.2. Extremely rare is the ending-is for -6s in the Nom. Plural. Inthe Ace. PI. this ending -Is (-els) is more common but still not frequent,and confined mainly to plurls, minorls, maiorls, melioris. Theneuter in -ia is found rarely in compluria, and perhaps once in pluria.3.The Gen. PL in -ium is found in plurium and complurium only.90. Irregular Comparison.bonus, good, melior, melius, optimus.malus, bad, peior, peius, pessimus.magnus, great, maior, maius, maximus.parvus, small, minor, minus, minimus,multus, much, 8. plus (no Dat. nor Abl.), plurimus.PI. plurSs, plura.complurSs, complura and -ia.nequam, worthless, nSquior, ngquius, nequissimus.firugi (indecl.), frugal, frugalior, frugalissimus.ADVERBS.91. Most adverbs are either oblique cases or mutilatedforms of oblique cases of nominal or pronominal stems.The cases from which they are derived are principally theAccusative and the Ablative.i. (a) From the Accusative are Substantival Adverbs in -tim. Thiswas a favorite formation, and is used very often in all periods. In theclassical times the adverbs of this form are :Acervatim, articulatim, centuriatim, certatim, generatim, gradatim,gregatim, membratim, paulatim, prlvatim, separatim, singulatim, statim,summatim, virltim, tributim, strictim, pedetemptim, raptim, furtim, partim,praesertim, confestim, and a few others ; disguised forms of -tim are :caesim, in-forcisim, sensim, cursim, passim, vicissim, caed-tim (9, 1-3), etc.;also interim.
ADVEEBS.47(I) A few very common adverbs are, perhaps, from Accusative Singularfeminine of adjectives and pronominal stems. Chiefly clam,secretly, coram, in one's presence, palam, openly, perperam, wrongly, tarn,so, quam, as, aliquam, some, iam, already; and forms in -fariam, as bifariam,multifariam, etc.(c)The Accusative Singular neuter of many adjectival and pronominalstems is used as an adverb. This is true of all Comparatives.Multum, much ; paulum, a little ; nimiurn, too much ; cSterum, for therest; primum, first; postremum, finally; potissimum, chiefly ; facile,easily ; dulce, sweetly ; trlste, sadly ; impune, scot-free ; aliquantum,somewhat, and others.To the Comparatives belong magis, more ; nimis, too ; satis, enough.(d) The Accusative Plural feminine is found in alias, at other times,perhaps in foras, out-of-doors. The Accusative Plural neuter is foundin alia, cetera, omnia, and occasionally in reliqua and a few others.2. (a) From the Ablative are some substantival adverbs ;the principalones in classical Latin being domo, at home; impendio, greatly;initio, at the outset ; modo, only ; oppido, very; principio, in the beginning; private, privately ; vulgo, commonly ; forte, by chance ; magnopere,greatly, and other compounds of -opere ; gratiis, for nothing, and ingra-and a few others.tils,(5) Ablatives are also adverbs in 8 from adjectives in -us and -er :altus, lofty, alts ; pulcher, beautiful, pulchrS ; miser, wretched, misers.Also fer6 and ferine (Sup.), almost.(c) The Ablative of some adjectives and pronouns serves as anadverb :tuto, safely; falsS, falsely ; perpetuo, ceaselessly ; continue, forthwith;improvise, unexpectedly ; prlmo, at first ; h5c, here; ist6, there, etc.(d) In a few cases the adverbial form is the Abl. Sing, feminine :alia, otherwise ; aliqua, somehow}; dextera and dextra, to the right ;sinistra and laeva, to the left hand; qua, on which side; recta,straightway, and some others.(e) A large number of these adjectives show adverbs in two endings,sometimes with a difference in meaning :consults and consults, purposely ; certs, at least, and certo, certainlycerto scio, J know for certain) ; rar6, thinly,(certe scio,/ certainly know ;and rar6, seldom ; vSrS, in truth, and vSro, true but ; rSctS, correctly, andrecta, straightway ; dextera or dextra, to the right ; and dexterS, skilfully.(/) Ablatives are also qul, how (archaic), nSqulquam, to no purpose;aliSqul, otherwise; perhaps also diu, by day, and its compounds.
48 ADVERBS.3. Locative in origin are the following, in addition to those mentionedunder 37, 5 : dig (in combination with numeral adjectives inearly Latin, as die septimi) and itscompounds cottidie, daily, hodie, today,pridie, the day before, postrldie, the day after ; quotannis, yearly ;foris, outside. Also many forms from the pronominal stems, as hie, illic,istic (isti belongs to early Latin and VERG.); sic, so, ut (uti, utei), as;ibi, there, and its compounds alibi, ibidem ;ubi (cubi), where, and itscompounds.4. A number of adverbs cannot be referred to. a definite case, as :adverbs of separation: bine, hence, illinc (illim), istinc (istim), thence;temporal adverbs : tune, then, cum, when, quondam, once, quando, when ?and itscompounds; also, ante, before ; post (poste), after; paene, almost ;prope, propter, near ; saepe, often ; circiter, around; praeter, past ; ergo,therefore; eras, to-morrow ; baud (hau, haut), not ; item, likewise ; susquedeque, up and down ;viz, scarcely.92. i- Adjectives and participles of the Third Declension form theiradverbs by adding -ter (-iter) to the stem ;stems in -nt dropping the t,and stems in a k-mute inserting the connecting vowel i before the ending;also a few adjectives of the Second Declension :fortis, brave, fortiter ; ferox, wild, ferSciter ; prudSns, foreseeing, priidenter.Exceptions : audax, bold, audac-ter (seldom audaciter) ; difficilis, hardto do, difficulter, difficiliter (but generally, n5n facile, vix, aegrg), and others.2. A large number of adjectives of the Second Declension in -us, -a,-urn, and -er, -era, -erum, form in early and late Latin their adverbs bydropping the stem vowel and adding -iter (those in -tus added -eronly). Many of these occur in classical writers alongside of the normalform in -6 : humaniter and humane, humanely ; largiter and large,lavishly ; turbulenter and turbulente, riotously.3. Some adverbs of origin are formed from substantival or adjectivalstems by the ending -tus. In classical Latin mainly antlquitus, fromearly time; dlvlnitus, from the gods ; funditus, from the foundation ; penitus,from the depths ; radicitus, from the, roots ; also intus, from within.4. The termination -versus, -vorsum, is used to show direction whither ;but in classical Latin it is found principally in the adverbs : intrSrsus(intrSvorsus), inwards; prorsus (-um), onwards; rursus (-urn, rusum),back ; sursum (susum), up; vorsum, towards.5. A very large number of adverbs are formed by adding variousother terminations ; as, -de : inde, thence, unde, whence ; -dem :pridem, long ago, itidem, likewise, etc. ; -do : quandS, when, etc. ;darn : quondam, once ; -dum : dudum, a while ago ; vixdum, hardlyyet, etc.; -per: nuper, lately, parumper, a little, semper, always, etc.;-quam: umquam, ever, numquam, never, etc.; -secus: ertrinsecus,outside, etc.; -tenus: quatenus, how far 9 etc.
NUMERALS. 496. Syntactical and miscellaneous admodum, : very (to a degree), dSnuo,anew, imprimis ; super, above, and its compounds, desuper, insuper extemplo,at once ; usque, to, and its;compounds invicem, in turn ; adeo,;so / antea, before ; interea, meanwhile ; postea, after ; praeterea, besides ;propterea, on that account, and a few others.COMPARISON OF ADVERBS.93. The Comparative of the adverb is the Accusativeneuter of the Comparative of the adjective.The Superlativeends in -is-sime, -er-rim6, etc., according to the Superlativeof the adjective.POSITIVE.
1. CABDINAL NUMBERS.NUMERALS.
1. CARDINAL NUMBERS.1001 MI mille et unusNUMERALS.1101 MCI mille centum unus1120 MCXX mille centum viginti millesimus centesimus vlcesimus[simus primus[Onusmillesimus centesimus vlc6-1121 MCXXI miUe centum viginti1200 MCC mille ducentl2000 MM duo niilia (niillia)bina milia2222 duo milia ducentl vi-bis millesimus ducentesimusginti duo5000 100 quinque miliaquina milia10,000 CCIOO decem miliatiena milia2. ORDINAL NUMBERS.millesimus primusmillesimus centesimus primusmillesimus ducentesimusbis millesimusvicesimus secundusquinquies millesimusdecies millesimus21,000 unum et viginti milia semel et vlcies millesimus100,000 centum miliacenties millesimuscentena milia [milia1,000,000 decies centena (centum) decies centies millesimus95. The Cardinal numerals are indeclinable, except : unus,one, duo, two, tres, three, the hundreds beginning withducentl, two hundred, and the plural milia, thousands, whichforms milium and milibus.N. duo, two,
52 NUMERALS.isduo, sometimes found. The Gen. duum (old duom) for duSrum is not nnfrequent.In the Dat. and Abl., duo is found in inscriptions, and for ambobus occasionallyambls. In the Ace. PI. masc., duo and ambo for duos and ambos are quite commonin early Latin, and also in classical times, but the better forms are duos, ambos.3. Quattor is found for quattuor occasionally in inscriptions, and in early poetryquattuor was sometimes scanned as a dissyllable.4. In inscriptions the forms meilia and mlllia are also found.5. In regard to spelling of the Ordinals we find in early Latin qulnctus as well asqulntus ; septumus arid decumus regularly, and often the endings -gnsimus and-Snsumus in Ordinals from vicgsimus on.96. 1. Compound Numerals.1. From 10 to 20, as in the tables, or separately: decem et tr5a.2. The numbers 18, 19, 28, 29, etc., are commonly expressed bysubtraction ; occasionally, as in English, but never in CICERO, and veryrarely in other classical authors. duodScentum is not found, and undecentumbut once (PLIN. MAI.).3. From 20 to 100, the compound numerals stand in the same orderas the English : twenty-one, vlginti unus ; or, one and twenty, Onus et(atque) vigintl ; as, twenty-one years old : annos unum et vlginti (vlgintiunum), unum et vlginti annos natus. But compounds like septuaginta ettres are not uncommon, though avoided by good writers.if there4. From 100 on, et may be inserted after the first numeral,be but two numbers ; as, centum quattuor, or centum et quattuor. Ifthe smaller number precedes, the et should be inserted ;likewise in allcases where a word is inserted within the compound numeral, asducentl anni et vlginti. If there be three numerals, the et is regularlyomitted ; exceptions are very rare.5. In compound ordinals alter is preferred to secundus.6. Centena milia is often omitted after the numeral adverb decies= 1,000,000 ; especially in stating sums of money.7. Fractions are expressed by pars (omitted or expressed) in combinationwith dimidia (|), tertia (), quarta (J), etc. A Plural numeratoris expressed by a Cardinal ; as, duae qulntae (f).The fraction isoften broken up ; as, pars dimidia et tertia (% -J- + $). The even denominatorscould be divided ; as, dimidia tertia (i x J = ).Insteadof dimidia without pars, dlmidium is used.2. Numeral Signs.D is short for 10,M for CIO. Adding O on the right of 10 multiplies by 10 ;100 = 5000 ;1000 = 50,000. Putting C before as often as O stands after multiplies theright-hand number by 2 ;CIO = 1000 ;CCIOO = 10,000 ;CCCIOOO = 100,000. A lineabove multiplies by 1000 ;V = 5000. A line above and at each side multiplies by100,000: |xim| =1,400,000. These signs may be combined :thus, |xill| XXXVII Dor |xni| XXXVII MD = 1,337,500. PLIN., Jf. H. iv., 12, 24. Other signs are \b , J-(inscr.) for 50,
NUMERALS. 5397. 3. Distributive Numerals.1 singuli, -ae, -a, one each. 302 bini, -ae, -a,two each. 403 ternl (trim) 504 quaternl 605 quini 706 sen! 807 septeni 908 octonl 1009 noveni 10210 deni 12511 undgnl 20012 duodeni 30013 terni d6nl 40014 quaternl deni 50015 quini deni 60016 sen! deni 70017 septeni deni 80018 octonl deni, duodevlceni 90019 novSni deni, undevicSnl 100020 vicenl 200021 vlceni singuli 300022 vicenl bini, bini et vicenl 10,00028 duodetrlcenl 100,00029 iindetrlceniThese answer the question quotBni, how many each ftricenlquadrageniqulnquaggnisexagemseptuagenloctogSninonagenlcentenicenteni binicenteni vicenl quiniducenltreceniquadringenlquingenisexceni fsesceni)septingenioctingeninongenlsingula mfliabina mfliatrina mfliadena mfliacentena mfliaREMARKS. i. The Gen. PI. masc. and neuter ends usually in -urn,except that singulus has always singulorum, and CICERO uses binorum.2. The Distributives are used with an exactness which is foreign toour idiom, whenever repetition is involved, as in the multiplicationtable. But when singuli is expressed, the Cardinal may be used.3. The Distributives are used with pluralia tantum : blnae litterae,two epistles. But with these unl is used for one, trinl for three : unaelitterae, trinae litterae.4. The same rules as to the insertion or omission of et apply to theDistributives as to the Ordinals (96, 1. 3, 4).NOTES. 1. The poets and later prose writers occasionally use the Distributives forCardinals, with words other than plQralia tantum (B. 3) also some forms of;theSingular. Especially noteworthy is the combination trlnum nundinum, which istechnical, and therefore found also in model prose.2. Parallel forms not found in classical times are quadrlni (early, late), and thelate du(o)centnl, trecenteni, quadringenteni, quingentSni, ses(x)cent6ni,milleni, etc.
54 NUMERALS.14. Multiplicative Numerals.Only the following forms occur :1 simplex, single, 5 quincuplex2 duplex, double, 7 septemplex3 triplex, triple, 10 decemplex4 quadruplex, quadruple. 100 centuplesThese answer the question, how manyfold ?5. Proportional Numerals.Only the following forms occur t1 simplus, -a, -urn, single, 4 quadruplus2 duplus, double. 7 septuplus3 triplus 8 octuplusThese answer the question, how many times as great ?98. NUMERAL ADVERBS.
PRONOUNS. 55REMARKS. i. These adverbs, from quinquiSs on, have an older formin -6ns ; quinquiSns. In totiens, so often, and quotiSns, how often, thisremained the more usual form in classical times.2. The combination of an adverb with a distributive adjective wasmuch liked by the Romans as bis blna for : quaterna, etc. But thenormal forms are not unfrequent.NOTE. For the adverbs from undeciSs on, examples are very rare, and some arecited only from the grammarians. So, when two forms are given, one is often due tothe grammarians thus ;quInquiSs deciSs, sexies deciSs, are cited only from Pwa-CIAM . The order, too, of compound adverbs varies.PRONOUNS.99. Pronouns point out without describing.NOTE. The pronoun is not a word used instead of a noun. The noun says toomuch, for all nouns (proper as well as common) are originally descriptive the; pronounsimply points out. The noun says too little, because it cannot express person, as ego,/, tQ, thou ; it cannot express local appurtenance, as hie, this (here), ille, that (there).A. PERSONAL PRONOUNS.100. I. Personal Pronouns of the First Person.So.-N.SUBSTANTIVE.POSSESSIVE.rneus, -a, -urn, mine or my.
56 PRONOUN'S101. II. Personal Pronouns of the Second Person.SUBSTANTIVE.POSSESSIVE.So. N. V. tu, thou,G. tul, of thee,D. tibi, to, for thee, tuns (-os), -a, -urn (-om), thy or thine.Ac. tS, thee,Ab. tB, from, with, by thee.PL. N. vSs, ye or you,G. vestrl, of you,vestmm,D. vobis, to, for you, your or yours.Ac. vos, you,Ab. vobis, from, with, by you.vester (archaic voster), vestra, vestrum,NOTES. 1. Early forms are G. : tls D. tibel;(inscr.), tibg (inscr.) ;Ac. Ab. tSd,t5tS Pi.;G. vostrl, vostrorum, -arum.2. Vestrum is for the Partitive Genitive.3. Tuom and vostrom in the Gen. PL of the Possessives are rare and confined toearly X&tin.4. On Synizesis see 100, N. 3. On combination with -met or -ptesee 102, N. 2, 3.III. Personal Pronouns of the Third Person.102. The original personal pronoun of the third person,together with its possessive, is used only as a reflexive inLatin, and therefore lacks a Nominative. Its place is takenin the oblique cases by the Determinative is (103).DETERMINATIVE.SUBSTANTIVE.POSSESSIVE.SG. N. [is, ea, id], he, she, it, supplied by the Genitive.G. gins, of him, 6ius, his, hers, its.etc.PL. N. [el, il, i ; eae, ea], they,G. eorum, earum, eorum, of them, eSrum, earum, e5rum, their or theirs,etc.REFLEXIVE.SUBSTANTIVE.POSSESSIVE.So.-N.G. sul, of him, her, it(setf), suus (-os), -a, -um (-om), his,D. aibl, to, for, him(self), her(self), her(s), its (own).Ac. s5, sSsS, him(self), her(self),Ab. s6, 8s6, from, with, by him(sey).PL. N.G. sui, of them(selves), suus (-os), -a, -um (-om), tk&rD. sib!, to, for them(selves), (awti), theirs.Ac. s6, S6s6, them(selves),Ab. s6, Sgs6, from, with, by themselves).
PRONOUNS. 57NOTES. 1. Inscriptions show sibei. The use of ggsS in classical prose is regulatedin Gen. PI. from suus is rare and early.2. The enclitic -met may be added to all the forms of ego (except to allnostrum),mainly by artistic reasons. Suomthe forms of tu (except tu and vestrum), to sibi, sS, and some forms of suus ;egomet, I myself. Instead of tumet, tute is found ;from which early poets formedoccasionally tutemet, tutimet. Met is also occasionally appended to forms of meus(early) and tuus (late).8. The enclitic -pte is joined very rarely to forms of the Personal Pronoun (m6pte,PL., Men. 1059) ;more often to the Abl. Sing, of the Possessives ; it is especially commonwith su5 ; suopte ingenio, by his own genius.4. From noster and vester and also from ctiius, whose ? are formed the Gentileadjectives of one ending:nostras, of our country ; vestras, of your country ; cuias,of whose country ? G. nostratis, vestratis, cuiatis.103. B. DETERMINATIVE PRONOUNS.SINGULAR.i. is, he, that.PLURAL.N. is, ea, id, il, el, I, eae, ea,G. eius, eius, Sins, eorum, earum, eorum,I)..el, el, el, iis, eis, Is,Ac. eum, earn, id, cos, eas, ea,Ab. co, ea, eo. iis, els, is.NOTE. The following variations in the forms are found : N. it for id (post-cl.) ;G. ellus (inscr.), eius (early poetry) D.; elel (inscr.), SI, el (early poetry), eae(f.) ; Ac. em, im (early), for earn ; PL N. els, eels, iels, iel (early and rare), for el ;the usual classical form is il ;G. eum (inscr.) for e5rum ;D. eieis, 6elS, iels (inscr.),thus (early poetry and rare) ;the usual classical form is iis. The early forms sum,sana, sos, sas, for earn, earn, eos, eas, are cited by FESTUS. Ace. and Abl. Sing, andGen. PL often suffer Synizesis in early poetry.SINGULAR.2. Idem (is + dem), the same.PLURAL.N. Idem, eadem, idem, Idem, eidem, ildem, eaedem, eadem,G. eiusdem, eiusdem, elusdem, eorundem, earundem, eorundem,D. eidem, eidem, eidem, Isdem, elsdem, ilsdem,Ac. eundem, eandem, idem, eosdem, easdem, eadem,Abl. eodem, eadem, eodem, Isdem, elsdem, ilsdem.NOTE. Variations in form : N. eidem, isdem (inscr., early) for Idem ;D. Idem(inscr.) for eidem; PL N. Idem (more usual in poetry), elsdem, Isdem (inscr.);D. Ab. ilsdem (rare), elsdem (uncommon in classical prose). Synizesis is common.SINGULAR.3. ipse (perhaps is + pse), he, self.PLURAL.N. ipse, ipsa, ipsum, ipsl, ipsae, ipsa,6. ipsius, ipslns, ipslus, ipsorum, ipsarum, ipsorum.B.(ipsl,]) ipsl, ipsl, ipsis, ipsis, ipsls,Ac. ipsum, ipsam, ipsum, ipsos, ipsas, ipsa,Ab. ipso, ipsa. ipso. ipsis, ipsis, ipsis.
58 PRONOUN'S.NOTES. 1. In the earlier time the first part of ipge was also declined, thus : N.eapse ; Ac. eumpse, eampse ;Ab. eopse, eapse- Other forms are doubtful.2. For ipsethe form ipsus was very commonly employed in early Latin, but fadesout with TERENCE, and later is only sporadic.3. Inflectional variations are : D. ips5, ipsae (late) ;PL N. ipsei (inscr.). The fewother forms are uncertain. Ipslus is dissyllabic twice in TERENCE.4. PLAUTUS shows ipsissimus (comp. Gr. avrdraTos), and hi late Latin ipsimuaand ipsima are found. A post-Ciceronian colloquialism was isse, issa.5.Ipse combines with -met : ipsemet and ipsimet (N. PL), both rare.104. Q. DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS.I. Demonstrative Pronoun for the First Person.haec, these,horum,his,haec,his.NOTES. 1. The full forms of hie in -ce are still found in limited numbers hi earlyLatin ;G. hoiusce (in the phrase huiusce modi, the form is common hi the classicalperiod and later) ;D. holce (inscr.) ;PL N. helsce, hlsce (not uncommon) ;G.horunce (rare) ; D., Ab. hisce (in PLAUT. andTBB. usually before vowels); Ac. hosce,hasce (not uncommon ; occasionally hi Cic.).2. Other variations in form are : G. huius and huius (in early poetry for metricalreasons); D. hae (rare and early); Ac. hone ;PL N. hel, hels for hi, haec for hae (hiPLAUT. and TER. regularly before vowels or h, occasionally before consonants ;occasionallyalso hi classical times and later) ; G. h5rnnc, harunc (early). PL N. hiefor hi and D. Ab. hlbus for his are doubtful.3. HIc combines with -ne. Usually -ne was appended to hlce, etc., and the eweakened to i. Sometimes -ne is added directly to the regular forms. The examplesare frequent hi early Latin, but occur also in Cic. and later writers :hzcine, haecine,hocine, huicine, huncine, hancine, hocine, hacine, haecine (N. PL fem.),haecine (N. PL neut.), hiscine, hoscine, hascine also ; hlcne, haecne, hocne,huiusne, huncne, hancne, hocne, hacne, haecne, hosne, hasne.II.Demonstrative Pronoun for the Second Person.iste, that.
PRONOUNS. 59(neuter, occasionally in Cic., Ep. and later), being wholly confined to early and lateLatin. N. istic, istaec, istuc (istoc, once) ;D. istic ;Ac. istunc, istanc ;Ab.istoc, istac. Pi. N. istaec (f.), istaec (n.).3. In a few cases in PLAUT. and TER. -ne is appended to istice, etc., the precedinge being weakened to i :istuciue, istocine, istacine, ist5scin'.III.Demonstrative Pronoun for the Third Person.SG. N. ille,
1160 PRONOUNS.the same as those of quisquis and can be distinguished only by the usage. In combinationwith modi we find culcul in Gen. sometimes in CICEKO. In the Plural theonly form found is quibusquibus. (Liv. XLI., 8, 10.)5. In quicumque the -cumque is often separated by tmesis. The only variationsin form are quelquomque, quescumque in early Latin, and occasionally qulscumquefor quibuscumque (several times in CICERO).106. E. INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS.Substantive. quis 1 who ? quid ? what fAdjective. qul ? quae ? quod 1 which ?Subst. and Adj. uter ? utra 1 utrum 1 who, which of two fSG. N. quis ? quid ? who ? what ? POSSESSIVE.G. cuius * cuius 1 whose? ciiius, cuia, cuium, whose ?D. cul ? cul? to, for whom ?Ac. quern 1 quid ? whom ? what ?Ab. qu51qu5 1 from, with, ~bywhom or what ?The plural of the substantive interrogative pronoun and both numbersof the adjective interrogative pronoun coincide with the forms ofthe relative qul, quae, quod, who, which.Strengthened Interrogatives.Substantive, quisnam ? ivfio, pray f quidnam 7 what, pray tAdjective,ecquis 1 is there any one who ? ecquid ?quinaraquodnam ? which, pray f? ?quaenamecqull ecqua? (ecquae)? ecquod?REMARK. In the poets qul is sometimes found as a substantivefor quis in independent sentences. In dependent sentences the usealways fluctuates. A difference in meaning can hardly be made otherthan that qul is generally used in much the same sense as qualis. Onthe other hand, quis is often used as an adjective for qul ; usually, however,the substantive which follows is best looked upon as in apposition.In the classical period qul is the normal form for the adjectivein dependent questions.NOTES. 1. Inscriptions show here and there quit and quot for quid and quod.Quid is sometimes used for quod, but usually in the phrase quid nSmen tibi est andonly in early Latin. Sometimes quae seems to be used as a substantive, but anotherexplanation is always possible.2. In the oblique cases the same variations occur as in the oblique cases of the relative.The Abl. qul means how ?3. For the declension of uter see 76.4. The possessive cuius (quoins), -a, -um was used both as relative and as interroga-
PRONOUNS. 6 1tive. It IB frequent in PLATJT. and TEE., but rare in other authors. Besides the Nom.the only forms found are Ac. quoium, quoiam Ab. ; quoia ;PI. N. quoiae, and,perhaps, G. PI. quoium.an for and occasionally5. Quisnamis sometimes used as adjective qninam quinamfor quisnam as a substantive. The -nam may be separated by tmesis. Ecquisand ecqulare not common, and are subject to the same fluctuations as quis and qul.Ecquis combines with -nam to form ecquisnam and a few other occasional forme,as :ecquaenam, ecqoidnam, ecquodnam, ecquonam, ecquosiiam.107. F. INDEFINITE PRONOUNS.I. Substantive, aliquis, aliqua (rare), aliquid, ) somebody, some onequis, qua, quid, f or other.Adjective. aliqui, aliqua, aliquod, ')I some, any.qui, quae, qua, quod,)REMARK.The common rule is that quis and qul occur properly onlyafter si, nisi, n6, num, or after a relative ; otherwise aliquis, aliqui.NOTES. 1.Aliquis and quis are not unfrequently need as adjectives instead ofaliqui, qul, but rarely in early Latin. Occasionally (not hi early Latin) isaliquiusedas a substantive. Qul is also so used, but only after si, sin, sive, nS.The use of quid and aliquid for quod and aliquod, and of aliquod for aliquid,is very rare and late.2. Besides the variations in form mentioned under the relative and interrogative, theindefinitive quis shows quSs as an early form for qul (N. PL), and in PL Nom. Ace.neut. quae and qua in equally good usage. Aliquis shows in Abl. Sing, aliqui (rareand early), in the PL Nom. Ace. neut. always aliqua, and not unfrequently in postclassicalLatin aliquis for aliquibus.2. quldam, quaedam, quiddam (and quoddam), a certain, certain one.REMARK. Quldam, quaedam occur both as substantives and adjectives,but quiddam is always substantive, quoddam always adjective.The Plural is rare in early Latin (never in PLAUTUS).3. quispiam, quaepiam, quidpiam (and quodpiam), some one, some.quisquam, , quicquam, any one (at all). No plural.NOTES. 1.quispiam, quaepiam are rare as adjectives. In the neuter, quippiamand quoppiam occur rarely. The comic poets do not use the Plural, and it is rareelsewhere.2.Quisquam is seldom used as an adjective, except with designations of persons ;seriptor quisquam, any writer (at all), Gallus quisquam, any Gaul (at all). Thecorresponding adjective is ullus. The use of quisquam as a feminine is only in earlyLatin.Quidquam is a poor spelling for quicquam. In Abl. Sing, qulquam occursIn Sing. Gen. Dat. Ace. frequently, and in Plural always, forms of ullusoccasionally.were used.
. ........62 CORRELATIVES.quilibet, quaelibet, quidlibet (and quodlibet), J) you like,NOTE. Quivls, quaevis, quilibet (archaic -lubet), quaelibet may be used eitheras substantives or adjectives, but quidvis, quidlibetare substantives only, quodvls,quodlibet are adjectives only. Peculiar forms of quivls are G. quoivis in quoivlsmodi(PLAUT.) ; D., quovls (late) Ab., qulvls (PLAUT., TER.), and the compounds;cuiusvlscumque (LUCR. in., 388) and qu5viscumque (MART, xrv., 2, 1). Quilibetmay be separated by tmesis into qul and libet (SAT.T.., Cat. 5, 4).5. quisque, quaeque, quidque and quodque, each one.unusquisque, unaquaeque, unumquidque and unumquodqne, each oneseverally.NOTE. Quisque occurs occasionally in early Latin as a feminine, and with its formsis not unfrequently found in early and late Latin for quisquis, or quicumque. Quidqueis substantive, quodque adjective. In the Abl. Sing, qulque occurs occasionally.The Plural is regular, but rare until post-classical times. In Nom. PI. is eitherquaequefern, or neuter.108. The declension of the pronominal adjectives has beengiven in 76. They are :ullus, -a, -urn, any ; nullus, -a, -urn, no one, not one. The correspondingsubstantives are nemo (76) and nihil, the latter of which formsonly nibili (Gen.) and nihilo (Abl.), and those only in certain combinations.nonnullus, -a, -urn, some, many a, declined like nullus.alms, -a, -ud, another; the Possessive of alius is alienus.alter, -era, -erum, the other, one (of two).neuter, neutra, neutrum, neither of two.alteruter, alterutra, alterutrum, the one or the other of the two.uterque, utraque. utrumque, each of two, either, ambo, -ae, -o, both.utervis, utravis, utrumvls. ) , . ,. ... ' > whichever you please of the two.nterlibet, utraiibet, utrumlibet, \CORRELATIVES.109. I. CORRELATIVE PRONOMINAL ADJECTIVES.INTERROGATIVES. DEMONSTRATIVES. RELATIVES.quis 1 who ? is, that, qul, who.qualis 1 of what talis, such (of that qualis, as (of whichkind ? kind), kind).quantus ? how much ? tantus, so much, quantus, as much.quot 1 how many ? tot, so many, quot, as many.
1COREELATIVE8. 63110. II. CORRELATIVE PRONOMINAL ADVERBS.1. Pronominal adverbs of place.ubl ? where ? ibl, there. ubi, where.qua ? where, hie, hae, here, this way. qua, where, whichwhich way 9way.istlc, istac, there, that way.illic, iliac, there, yonder way.unde ? whence ? inde, thence. unde, whence.hinc,istinc,ftewee.thence.iliinc, thence, from yonder.qu5? whither 9 eo, thither. quo, whither.hue, (hoc,)istuc, (istoc,)illuc, (illoc,)hither.thither.2. Pronominal adverbs of me.thither, yonder.quando ] wfte/i F turn, ^e?i. qnandS, when.tune, ^Aa^ it/we, quom, cum.nunc, wow.quotiSns ? Aow o/^e7i F totiens, 50 o/ferc. quotiens, as o/
64 THE VERB.THE VERB.112. The inflection given to the verbal stem is called Conjugation,and expresses :1. Person and Number ;2. Voice Active or Passive.The Active Voice denotes that the action proceeds from thesubject amo, / love.:The Passive Voice denotes that the subject receives theaction of the Verb :amor, / am loved.3. Tense Present, Imperfect, Future,Perfect, Pluperfect, Future Perfect.The Present, amo, / love ; Future, amabo, / shall love ;Pure Perfect, amavi, / have loved ; Future Perfect, amavero,I shall have loved, are called Principal Tenses.The Imperfect, amabam, I was loving ; Historical Perfect,amavl, I loved ; Pluperfect, amaveram, / had loved, are calledHistorical Tenses.REMARK.The Pure and Historical Perfects are identical in form.4. Mood Indicative, Subjunctive, Imperative.The Indicative Mood is the mood of the fact:amo, / love.The Subjunctive Mood is the mood of the idea : amem,may I love, I may love ; amet, may he love, he may love j siamet, if he should love.The Imperative Mood is the mood of command :thou !For further distinctions see Syntax.ama, love5. These forms belong to the Finite Verb. Outside of theFinite Verb, and akin to the noun, are the verbal forms calledInfinitive, Supine, Participle, Gerund.The Infinitive active and the Supine are related to the noun, theformer being originally a Dative or Locative and the Supine showingtwo cases, Accusative and Ablative.No adequate uniform translation can be given, but for the generalmeaning see paradigms.113. A large number of Verbs have the passive form but
SruntTHE VERB.65are active in meaning : hortor, / exhort. These are calleddeponent (from deponere, to lay aside).114. The Inflection of the Finite Verb is effected by theaddition of personal endings to the verb stems.1. The personal endings are mostly pronominal forms, which serveto indicate not only person, but also number and voice. They are :ACTIVE.PASSIVE.SG. i. -m (or a vowel, coalescingwith -r.the characteristic ending) ; Pf . I,2. -s; Pf. -s-tl; Impv. -t5(d) or want- -riser -re; Impv.ing,3. -t ; Impv. t3(d), -tur ; Impv. -tor.PL. i. -mus, -mur.2. -tis ;Pf . -s-tis- ; Impv. -te or -tote, -mini.3. -rit Pf . or Sre; ; Impv. -nto(d), -ntur ; Impv. -ntor.-re or -tor.2. The personal endings are added directly to the stem in the PresentIndicative and Imperative only, except in the third conjugation, insome forms of the Future Indicative. In the other tenses certainmodifications occur in the stem, or tense signs are employed :(a) In the Present Subjunctive final a of .the stem is changed to g (e) ;final 6 to ea (ea) ;final I to ia (ia) ;final e to a (a). In the Future Indicativefinal e is changed to a or 6 (e) ;final i to ia (i6, ie).(b) The tense signs are : for the Imperfect Indicative, ba (ba) ;forthe Imperfect Subjunctive, rS (re) ;for the Future Indicative in a and Sverbs bl (b, bu) ;for the Perfect Indicative, I (i) ;for the Perfect Subjunctive,-er! for the; Pluperfect Indicative, era (era) ;for the PluperfectSubjunctive, issS (isse) for the Future Perfect;Indicative, erl (er).3. The stem itself is variously modified either ; by change of vowelor by addition of suffixes, and appears in the following forms :(a) The Present stem ; being the stem of the Present, Imperfect, andFuture tenses. These forms are called the Present System.(b) The Perfect stem ; being the stem of the Perfect, Pluperfect, andFuture Perfect tenses. These forms are called the Perfect System.(c) The Supine* stem ; being the stem of the Future Active and PerfectPassive Participles and of the Supine. These forms are called theSupine System,NOTE.For details as to the formation of these stems, see 132 ff.* This designation is retained because it is an established terminus technlcus ; as amatter of fact the Supine stem is not the stem of the Participles.5
66 THE VERB.115. i- The Perfect, Pluperfect, and Future Perfect tenses in thePassive are formed by the combination of the Perfect Passive Participlewith forms of the verb sum, / am.2. The Future Passive Infinitive is formed by the combination ofthe Supine with the Present Passive Infinitive of e5, 1 go.3. The infinite parts of the verb are formed by the addition of thefollowing endings to the stems :ACTIVE.INFINITIVE. Pr. -re,Pf. -isse,Fut. -turum (-a, -am), esse,PARTICIPLES. Pr. -nfl (G. -ntis),Pf.Fut. -torus (-a, -urn).GERUND.GERUNDIVE.ndl (-d5, -dum, -do). -ndus (-a, -am).n,LPASSIVE.-tas (-ta, -tarn), esse.-turn iri.tas (-ta, -torn).SUPINE.-torn ;-tu116.So. i. sum,2. es,3. est,PL. i.sumus,THE VERB sum, I am.(Pres. stem es-, Perf. stem fa-)IVE.SUBJUNCTTVE.PRESENT./ am, sim, / be,thou art, sis, tTiou be,he, she, it is. sit, he, she, it be.2. estis,3. sunt,So. i. eram,2. eras,3. erat,PL. i. eramus,2. eratis,3. erant,So. i. er5,2. eris,3- erit,PL. i. erimus,2. eritis,3. erunt,
THE VERB. 67PERFECT.So. i. fill,I have been, I fuerim, I have, may have, teen,was,2. fuistX, thou hast been, fueris, thou have, mayest have,thou wast,been,3. fait, he has been, he fuerit, he have, may have, been.was.PL. i. fuimus, we have been, we fuerlmus, we have, may have, been,were,2. fuistis, you have been, fueritis, you have, may have,you were, been,3. fuerunt, fuere, they have fuerint, they have, may have,been, they were.been.PLUPERFECT.So. i. fueram, 1 had been, fuissem, I had, might have, been,2. fueras, thou hadst been, fuissSs, thou hadst, mightst have,3. fuerat, he had been. fuisset, he had, might have, been.PL. i.fueramus, we had been, fuissgmus, we had,might have, been,2. fueratis, you had been, fuissStis, you had, might have,been,3. fuerant, they had been. fuissent, they had, might have,been.FUTURE PERFECT.SG. i. fuero, I shall have been,2. fueris, thou wilt have been,3. fuerit, he will have been.PL. i. fuerlmus, we shall have been,2. fueritis, you will have been,3. fuerint, they will have been.IMPERATIVE.INFINITIVE.PRESENT. FUTURE. PRES. esse, to be,So. i. , , PERF. fuisse, to have been,2. es, be thou, est5, thou shalt be, FUT. futurum (-am, -urn) esse3- , estB, he shall be. (fore),to be about tobe.PL. I. , PARTICIPLE.2. este, be ye, est5te, you shall be,3- ,suntS, they shall be. PUT. futurus, -a, -um, aboutto be.
68 THE VERB.NOTES. 1. Early forms are :(a) In the Pres. Ind. es for es ; regularly in PLAUTUS and TERENCE, but thequantity of the vowel is disputed.(6) In the Pres. Subjv. siem, sie"s, siet, sient ; regular in inscriptions until thefirst century B. C. and common hi early poets chiefly for metrical reasons ;side byside with this occur fuam, fuas, fuat, fuant (also LUCK, iv., 637, VERG. x., 108, LIT.xxv., 12, 6), which are taken up again by very late poete. Sit is also common.(c) In the Impf Subjv. the forms .forem, fores, foret, forent were probably in veryearly times equivalent to futurus essem,etc. ; and occasionally this force seems to bestill present in the later period, especially in SALLUST ; usually, however, they areequivalent to essem, essSs, esset, essent in the Inf. fore;always remained theequivalent of fatunim esse.(d) In all the Perfect forms the original length was fa-, which is still found occasionallyin early Latin.() Early and principally legal are the rare forms escit, escet, esit,for erit ;-essint for erunt.2. The Pres. Part, ie found only in the compounds ;ab-sSns, absent, and praes5ns,present.117. COMPOUNDS OF sum, / am.ab-sum, J am away, absent. Pf .ob-sum, / am against, I hurt. Pf .(abful) aful.obfui or offal,ad-sum, I am present. Pf. afful. pos-sum, I am able.dS-sum, / am wanting. prae-sum, / am over, I superintend.In-sum, lam in. pro-sum, I am for, I profit.inter-sum, / am between. sub-sum, / am under. No Pf.super-sum, / am, or remain, over.These are all inflected like sum ;but prosum and possumrequire special treatment by reason of their composition.Prosum, I profit.118. In the forms of prosum, prod- is used before vowels.INDICATIVE.SUBJUNCTIVE.PRESENT. pr5-sum, prod-es, prod-est, pr5-sim,pro-sumus, prod-estis, pro-sunt,IMPERFECT. prSd-eram, prod-essem,FUTURE.prod-er5,PERFECT. prO-fuI, pr5-fuerim,PLUPERFECT. pr5-fueram, pr5-fuissem.Fur. PERF.pr6-fuer5,INFmnTVE. PHES. prod-esse ; FUT. pr5-futurum esse (-fore) ; PERF. pro-fuisse.Possum, / am able, I can.119. Possum iscompounded of pot (potis, pote) and sum ;t becomes s before s ;in the perfect forms, f is(pot-fui)lost.
INDICATIVE.THE VERB. 69SUBJUNCTIVE.PRESENT.SG. i. pos-sum, I am able, can, pos-sim, I be able.2. pot-es, pos-sls,3. pot-est. pos-sit.PL. i. pos-sumus, pos-simus,2. pot-estis, pos-sitis,3. pos-sunt. pos-sint.IMPERFECT.So. i. pot-eram, I was able, could, pos-sem, I were, might be, able.2. pot-eras, pos-sSs,3. pot-erat. pos-set.PL. i. pot-eramus, pos-semus,2. pot-eratis, pos-s5tis,3. pot-erant. pos-sent.FUTURE.SG. i. pot-er5, 1 shall be able.2. pot-eris,3. pot-erit.PL. i. pot-erimus,2. pot-eritis,3. pot-erunt.PERFECT.SG. i. pot-m, I have been able, pot-uerim, / have, may have, beenable.2. pot-uistl, pot-ueris,3. pot-uit. pot-uerit.PL. i. pot-uimus, pot-uerlmus,2. pot-uistis, pot-uerltis,3. pot-u5mnt. pot-uerint.PLUPERFECT .SG. i. pot-ueram, / had been able. pot-uissem, / had, might have,been able.2. pot-ueras, pot-uiss5s,3. pot-uerat. pot-uisset.PL. i. pot-ueramus, pot-uissgnras,2. pot-ueratis, pot-uiss6tis,3. pot-uerant. pot-uissent.
REGULAR VERBS.:YcFUTURE PERFECT.So. i. pot-uer8, 1 shall have been PL. i. pot-uerlmua, \?\y- VIBRASVj]2. pot-uerls, [able, 2. pot-ueritis, ^**J^*^]3. pot-uerit. 3- pot-uerint.INFINITIVE. PRES., posse,to be able. PERP., potuisse, to have been able.NOTES. 1. In the early Latin the fusion of the two parts of the compound has notfully taken place ;we accordingly find not unfrequently:potis sum, potis es, potisest, potis sunt ; potis siem, potis sis, potis sit, potis sint ; potis erat ; potefuisset ;and sometimes (even in classical and Augustan poete) potis and pote alone,the copula being omitted. Partial fusion is seen in Inf. pot-esse, potisse Subjv.;poti-sit (inscr.), poti-sset.2. Occasional passive forms (followed by a passive infinitive) are found in earlyLatin (not in PLAUT. or TER.) and LUCRETIUS :potestur, possStur, possitur, poteratur. Poterint for ispoterunt doubtful.REGULAR VERBS.SYSTEMS OF CONJUGATION.120. i. There are two Systems of Conjugation, the Thematicand the Non-thematic (132). The Non-thematic isconfined to a small class. The Thematic System comprisesfour Conjugations, distinguished by the vowel characteristicsof the present stem, a, 6, 8, which i, may be found by dropping-re from the Present Infinitive Active. The consonantpreceding the short vowel stem-characteristic is called theconsonant stem-characteristic.2. From the Present stem, as seen in the Present Indicativeand Present Infinitive active ;from the Perfect stem,as seen in the Perfect Indicative active ;and from theSupine stem, can be derived all the forms of the verb.These tenses are accordingly called the Principal Parts;and in the regular verbs appear in the four conjugations asfollows :PRES. IND.
REGULAR VERBS.JlRules for forming the Tenses.121. r - The Present System. From the Present stem as obtainedby dropping -re of the Pres. Inf. Active, forma. Pres. Subjv. by changing final a to e, 6 to ea, e to a (or -ia), i to ia,and adding -m for active, -r for passive Pres. Impv. Passive by adding;-re; Fut. Impv. by adding -to for Active and -tor for the Passive ;Pres.Part, by adding -ns and lengthening preceding vowel Gerund; byadding -ndl after shortening a and S, changing I to ie, and in a few verbse to ie. Pres. Impv. Active is the same as the stem ;Pres. Indie. Passivemay be formed from Pres. Indie. Act. by adding -r (after shortening 5).b. Impf. Indie, by adding -bam for active and -bar for passive to thestem in the first and second conjugations to the; lengthened stem inthe third and fourth (e to S or is,I to is) ; Impf. Subjv. by adding theendings -rem and -rer, or by adding -m and -r respectively to the Pres.Inf. Active.c. Future, by adding -bo and -bor to the stem in the first and secondconjugations -m and -r in the third and in the fourth ;(e being changedto a to (ia) ; I, ia).2. The Perfect System. From the Perfect stem as obtained by droppingfinal I of the Perfect, form-isse.a. Perf. /Subjv. Active by adding -erim ; Perf. Inf. Active by addingb. Plupf. Indie. Active by adding -eram ; Plup. Subjv. Active byadding -issem.c. Fut. Perf. Active by adding -er5.3. The Supine System. From the Supine stem as obtained by droppingfinal -m of the Supine, formtou).a. Perf. Part. Passive by adding -s.b. Fut. Part. Active by adding -rus (preceding u being lengthenedc. The Compound Tenses in the Passive and the Periphrastic formsby combining these Participles with forms of ease, to be.REMARK. JSuphonic changes in the consonant stem-characteristic.Characteristic b before s and t becomes p ; g and qu before t becomec ; c, g, qu, with s,become x ;t and d before s are assimilated, andthen sometimes dropped. See further, 9.scrlb-o, scrip-si, scrip-turn ; lego, lec-tum ; coqu-o, coc-tum ; dic-o, clixi(die-si) ; inng-o, iunx-i (iung-sl) ; coqu-o, coxi (coqu-sl) ; ed-o, e-sum (edsum); ced-o, ces-si (cSd-si) ; mitt-6, mi-si (mit-sl), mis-sum (mit-sum).
EEGULAK VEEBS.122. First Conjugation.CONJUGATION OF amare, tolorn.PRIN. PARTS :am-o, ama-re, ama-vl, ama-tum.INDICATIVE.ACTIVE.PRESENT.SUBJUNCTIVE.Am loving, do love, love.SG. i. am-5,2. ama-s,3. ama-t,PL. i. amS-mus,2. ama-tis,3. ama-nt,Be loving, may love.ame-m,amC-s.anic-t.ame-mos,ame-tis,ame-nt.IMPERFECT.Was loving, loved.SG. i. ama-ba-m,2. ama-ba-s,3. ama-ba-t,PL. i. ama-ba-nuis,2. ainfi-ba-tis,3. ama-ba-nt,Were loving, might love.ama-re-m,ama-rg-s,ama-re-t.ama-rg-mus,ama-rS-tis,ama-re-nt.PTITUBE.Shall be loving, shall love.So. i. ama-b-5,2. ama-bi-s,3. amS-bi-t,PL. i. aina-bi-mus,2. ama-bi-tis,3. ama-bu-nt.PERFECT.Have, may have, loved,Have loved, did love.3. ama-v-Srunt (-6re), ama-v-eri-nt.SG. i. ama-v-I,amS-v-eri-m,2. ama-v-isti,amu-v-erl-s,3. ama-v-it,ama-v-eri-t.PL. i. ama-v-imus,ama-v-erl-mus,2. ania-v-istis,ama-v-erf-tis,
REGULAR VERBS.First Conjugation.INDICATIVE.Had loved.SG. i.ama-v-era-m,2. amS-v-era-s,3. ama-v-era-t,ACTIVE.SUBJUNCTIVE.PLUPERFECT.Had, might have, loved.amS-v-isse-m,aina-v-isse-s,ama-v-isse-t.PL. i.ama-v-era-mus,2. amS-v-era-tis,3. ama-v-era-nt,FUTURE PERFECT.Shall have loved.SG. i. ama-v-er-5,2. ama-v-erl-s,3. ama-v-eri-t.ama-v-issS-mus,ama-v-issS-tis,ama-v-isse-nt.PL. i. ama-v-erl-mus,2. ama-v-eri-tis,3. ama-v-eri-nt.IMPERATIVE.PRESENT.FUTTTRE.SG. i. , ,2, ama, love thou, ama-t5,3. .amS-tO,thou shalt love,he shall love.PL. i. ,2. ama-te, love ye, ama-t5te, ye shall love.3. , ama-ntO, they shall love.PRES.PERF.FUT.ama-re, to love.ESI PUNITIVE.amS-v-isse, to have loved.amfi-tur-um, -am, -um esse, to be about to love.GERUND.SUPINE.N. [ama-re], loving.G. ama-nd-i, of loving.D. ama-nd-8, to loving.Ac. [ama-re], Ac. ama-tum, to love.(ad) ama-nd-um, loving, to love.Ab. ama-nd-6, by loving. Ab. ama-tii, to love, in the loving.PARTICIPLES.PRESENT. N. ama-n-s (G. ama-nt-is), loving.FUTURE. amS-tur-us, -a, -urn, being about to love.
74 REGULAK VERBS.First Conjugation.PASSIVE.INDICATIVE.Am loved.SG. i. amo-r,2. ama-ris (-re),3. ama-tur,PRESENT.SUBJUNCTIVE.Be, may be, loved.iuno-r,am5-ris (-re),am5-tur.PL. I. aUKl-mur,2. ama-minl,3. ama-ntur,amC-mur,ame-minl,ame-ntur.Was loved.So. i. ama-ba-r,2. {iinil-ba-ris (-re),3. amS-ba-tur,IMPERFECT.Were, might be, loved.ama-re-r,amS-rg-ris (-re),ama-rg-tur.PL. i. ama-ba-mur,2. ama-ba-mini,3. anuT-ba-ntur,amu-re-mur,ama-r6-minl,ama-re-ntur,Shall be loved.SG. i. ama-bo-r,2. ama-be-ris (-re),3. amS-bi-tur.FUTURE.PL. i. ama-bi-mur,2. ama-bi-minl,3. amS-bu-ntur.PERFECT.Have been loved, was loved.SG. i. ama-t-us, -a, -um sum,2. es,3- est,Have, may have, been loved.ama-t-us, -a, -um sim,sis,sit,PL. i. amS-t-I, -ae, -a sumus,2. estis,3. sunkama-t-I, -ae, -asimus,sltis,sint.
REGULAR VERBS. 75First Conjugation.PASSIVE.INDICATIVE.SUBJUNCTIVE.PLUPERFECT.Had been loved.Had, might have, been loved.So. i. Jimu-t-us, -a, -am eram, ama-t-us, -a, -am essem,2. eras, esses,3. erat, esset,PL. i. amS-t-I, -ae, -a eramus, amS-t-I, -ae, -a essemas,2. eratis, essetis,3. erant. esseiit.FUTURE PERFECT.Shall have been loved.So. i. amS-t-as, -a, -um erO,2. eris,3. erit.PL. i. ama-t-I, -ae, -a erimas,2. erit is,3. erant.IMPERATIVE.PRESENT.FUTURE.Sa. i. , ,2. ama-re, be thou loved. ama-tor, thou shall be loved,3. , ama-tor, he shall be loved.PL. i. , ,2. araa-mini, be ye loved. ,.3. ama-ntor, they shall be loved.INFINITIVE.PRES. amS-rl, to be loved.PERF. ama-t-um, -am, -am ease, to have been loved.FUT. ama-tom Irl, to be about to be loved.FUT. PF.ama-t-om, -am, -am fore.PARTICIPLE.GERUNDIVE.PERT, ama-t-as, -a, -am, loved. ama-nd-us, -a, -am, (one) to be loved.
76 REGULAR VERBS.123. Second Conjugation.CONJUGATION OF delere, to destroy (Not out).PRIN. PARTS :dele-6, dele-re, dele-vl, dele-turn.ACTIVE.PASSIVE.INDIC.SUBJV. ESTDIC. SUBJVPKKSENT.So.PL.dele-ba-m,dele-ba-s,d5le-ba-t,dele-ba-mus,dele-ba-tis,dele-ba-nt.So.PL.dele-M,dele-bi-8,dele-bi-t,dele-bi-mus,d5le-bi-tis,dele-bu-nt.
REGULAR VERBS. 77Second Conjugation.ACTIVE.PASSIVE.INDIC. SUBJV. INDIC. STJBJV.PLUPERFECT.SG. dele-v-era-m, dele-v-isse-m, dele-t-us eram, dele-t-us essem,dele-v-era-s, dele-v-issS-s, eras, essgs,dele-v-era-t, dele-v-isse-t. erat, esset.PL. dele-v-era-mus, dele-v-isse"-mus, dele-t-I eramus, dele-t-I essemus,dele-v-era-tis,dele-v-era-nt,dele-v-isse"-tis,dele-v-isse-nt.eratis,erant,essgtis,esseut.FUTURE PERFECT.So.dele-v-er-5,dele-t-user5,dele-v-er!-s,eris,dele-v-eri-t,erit.PL.dele-v-erl-mus,dele-t-ierimus,dele-v-er!-tis,dele-v-eri-nt,eritis,erunt.So.PL.PRESENT.dele,IMPERATIVE.FUTURE. PRESENT. FUTURK.d5le-t5,dele-re,d5l6-tor,dele-t5,dele-tor.dele-te,dele-tote,d5le-nto.d&le-mini,dele-ntor.INFINITIVE.PBES. dele-re.PERF. dele-v-isse.FUT. dele-tur-um, -am, -um esse.PRES. dele-rl.PERF. dele-t-um, -am, -um esse.PUT. dele-turn irl.FUT. PF. dele-t-um, -am, -um fore.GERUND.N. [dele-re],G. dele-nd-I.D. dele-nd-5.Ac. [dele-re](ad) dele-nd-um.Ab. dele-nd-o.SUPINE.Ac. dele-turn.Ab. dele-tu.PARTICIPLES.PRES. N. del5-n-s ;G. dele-nt-is.PUT. dele-tur-us, -a, -um.PEHF. dele-t-us, -a, -um.GERUNDIVE,dele-nd-us, -a, -uia.
78 REGULAR VERBS.124. Like delere, to destroy, are conjugated only, nere, to spin,flere, to weep, and the compounds of -plere, and fill, -olere grow(the latter with Supine in -itum); also ciere, to stir up. See 13 7 (b).All other verbs of the Second Conjugation retain the characteristice in thePresent System, but dropit in the Perfect System,changing vi to ui, and weaken it to i in the Supine System.Second Conjugation.CONJUGATION OF monere, to remind.PRIN. PARTS :ACTIVE.mone-o, mon5-re, mon-ui, mom-turn.PASSIVE.
REGULAR VERBS. 79ACTIVE.Second Conjugation.PASSIVE.INDIC. SUBJV. INDIC. SUBJV.PLUPERFECT.go. mon-u-era-m, mon-u-isse-m, raoni-t-us eram. moni-t-us essem,mon-u-era-s, mon-u-isse"-s, eras, esses,mon-u-era-t, mon-u-isse-t. erat, esset,PL. mon-u-era-mus, mon-u-issg-mus, moni-t-I eramus, moni-t-I essSmus,mon-u-era-tis, mon-u-issB-tis, eratis, essStis,mon-u-era-nt. mon-u-isse-nt. erant. essent.FUTURE PERFECT.SG.mon-u-er-3,mon-u-erl-s,moni-t-us er6,ens,mon-u-eri-t,erit,PL.mon-u-erl-mus,moni-t-Ierimus,mon-u-erl-tis,mon-u-eri-nt.eritis,erunt.IMPERATIVE.PRESENT.FUTURE.PRESENT.FUTURE.SG.mon6,monB-t5,mone-t5,mone-re,mone-tor,mone-tor,PL.mone-te,mone-t5te,mone-nt5.mone-minl,mone-ntor.PRES.PERP.FUT.N.G.D.Ac.Ab.INFINITIVE.mon5-re. PRES. mone-rLmon-u-isse. PERF. moni-t-um, -am, -tun esse.moni-tur-um, -am, um ease. FUT. moni-t-um Irl.GERUND.[mon5-re].mone-nd-I.mone-nd-5.SUPINE.[mone-re] Ac. moni-tum.(ad) mone-nd-um.mone-nd-5. Ab. moni-tu.FUT. PP.moni-t-um, -am, -um fore.PARTICIPLES.PRES. N. mon5-n-s ;G. mone-nt-is.FUT.moui-tur-us, -a, -um.moni-t-us, -a, -um.GERUNDIVE,mone-nd-us, -a, -um,
8oREGULAR VERBS.125. Third Conjugation.CONJUGATION OF emere, tobuy.PRIN. PARTS :em-o, erne-re, 6m-I, 6m(p)-tum.ACTIVE.PASSIVE.ENDIC.SUBJV. INDIC. SUBJV.PRESENT.So -"-em-o,SG.PL.ema-m,emB-s,eme-t,eme-mus,em5-tis,eme-nto
REGULAR VERBS. 81Third Conjugation.ACTIVE.PASSIVE.INDIC.SUBJV.INDIC.SUBJV.PLUPERFECT.G. 5m-era-m,5m-era-s,5m-era-t,
82 REGULAR VERBS.126. Many verbs of the third conjugation with stem in ie (PreiIndie, in io) weaken this ie to e before -re, and to i before m,and t in all tenses of the Present System except the Futur
REGULAR VERBS.127. Fourth Conjugation.CONJUGATION OF audire, to hear.PRIN. PARTS :audi-o, aucll-re, audl-vl, audl-tura.ACTIVE.PASSIVE.INDIC. SUBJV. INDIC. SttBJV.PRESENT.
84 REGULAR VERBS.INDIC.ACTIVE.FourthConjugation.PASSIVE.
DEPONENT VERBS.DEPONENT VERBS.128. Deponent verbs have the passive form, but are activein meaning. They have also the Present and Future ActiveParticiples, and the Future Active Infinitive. Thus a deponentverb alone can have a Present, Future, and PerfectParticiple, all with active meaning. The Gerundive, however,is passive in meaning as well as in form.The conjugation differs in no particular from that of theregular conjugation.i. First Conjugation.CONJUGATION OF hortart, to exhort.PRIN. PARTS: hort-or, horta-rl, horta-tus sum.So.PL.SG.PL.SG.PL.INDICATIVE.Exhort,hort-o-r,horta-ris (-re),horta-tur,hort&-mur,horta-minl,horta-ntur.Was exhorting.horta-ba-r,horta-bS-ris (-re),horta-ba-tur,horta-ba-mur,horta-ba-minl,horta-ba-ntur.Shall exhort.horta-bo-r,horta-be-ris (-re),horta-bi-tur,horta-bi-mur,horta-bi-minl,horta-bu-ntur.SUBJUNCTIVE.PRESENT.Be exhorting, may exhort.IMPERFECT.FUTURE.horte-r,horte-ris (-re),hort5-tur,hort5-mur,horte-minl,horte-ntur.Were exhorting, might exhort.horta-re-r,horta-rS-ris (-re),horta-r6-tur,horta-rS-mur,horta-re-minl,horta-re-ntur.
86 DEPONENT VERBS.PERFECT.Have exhorted, exhorted.Have, may have, exhorted.SG. horta-t-us, -a, -um sum, horta-t-us, -a, -um sim,es,est,sis,sit,PL. horta-t-I, -ae, -a sumus, horta-t-I, -ae, -a slmus,estis,sunt.sltis,sint.PLUPERFECT.Had exhorted.Had, might have, exhorted.SG. horta-t-us, -a, -um eram, horta-t-us, -a, -um essem,er&s,esses,erat,esset,PL. horta-t-I, -ae, -a eramus, horta-t-I, -ae, -a essemus,eratis,erant.FUTURE PERFECT.Shall have exhorted.essetis,essent.SG. horta-t-us, -a, -um er5,eris,erit,PL. horta-t-I, -ae, -a erimus,eritis,erunt.SG.PL.PRESENT.horta-re, exhort thou.IMPERATIVE.FUTURE.horta-tor, thou shall exhort.horta-tor, he shall exhort.horta-minl, exhort ye.INFINITIVE.horta-ntor, they shall exhort.PARTICIPLES.PRES. horta-rl, to exhort. PRES. horta-n-s, exhorting.PUT. horta-tur-um, am, -um esse, FUT. horta-tur-us, -a, um, aboutto be about to exhort.to exhort.PERF. horta-t-um, -am, -um esse, to PEHF. hortS-t-us, -a, -um, havinghave exhorted.exhorted.F. P. horta-t-um, -am, -um fore. GERUNDIVE.SUPINE. horta-nd-us, -a, -um, [one] to beAc. horta-tum, to exhort, for ex- exhorted.horting.GERUND.Ab. horta-tu, to exhort, in the ex- G. horta-nd-I, of exhorting.horting.
DEPONENT VERBS.2. Second, Third, Fourth Conjugations.SYNOPSIS OF vererl, to fear; loqui, to speak; mentiri, to lie.PRIN. PARTS :vere-or, ver6-rl, veri-tus sum; loqu-or, loqu-i, locu-tua sum;nieuti-or, menti-ri, mentl-tus sum.INDICATIVE.PEES.IMPERP.PUT.PERF.PLUPP.FUT. PP.PEES.
88 PEEIPHRASTIC CONJUGATION.Periphrastic Conjugation.129. The Periphrastic Conjugation arises from the combinationof the Future Participle active and the Gerundivewith forms of the verb sum.INDICATIVE.ACTIVE.SUBJUNCTIVE.PBES. amaturus (-a, -um) sum, amaturus (-a, -urn) sim,Am about to love.Be about to love.IMPF. amaturus eram, amaturus essem,Was about to love.Were about to love.PUT.amaturus ero,Shall be about to love.PEKF. amaturus fui, amaturus fuerim,Save been, was, about to love. Have, may have, beenabout to love.FLUFF. amaturus fueram, amaturus fuissem,Jlad been about to love. Had, might have, beenFUT. PEKF.amaturus fuero,Shall have been about to love.about to love.INFINITIVE. PBES. amatur-um (-am, -um) esse, To be about to love.PERT. amatur-um fuisse, To have been about to love.PASSIVE.PBES. amandus (-a, -um) sum, amandus (-a, -um) sim,Have to be loved.Have to be loved.IMPF. amandus eram, amandus essem, forem,Had to be loved.Had to be loved.FUT.amandus ero, Shall have to be loved.PEBF. amandus fui,amandus fuerim,Have had to be loved.Have had to be loved.PLTTPF. amandus fueram, amandus fuissem,Had had to be loved. Should have had to beloved.INFINITIVE. PBES. amandum (-am, -urn) esse, To have to be loved.PERI, amandum fuisse, To have had to be loved.
NOTES ON THE CONJUGATIONS. 89Notes on the Four Conjugations.130. The Present System.1. PRESENT INDICATIVE. (a) In the third person Singular active, early Latin, andoccasionally later poets, often retain the original length of vowel in the endings -at, -8t,and -It of the first, second, and fourth conjugations. Final -It in the third conjugationis rare, and due, perhaps, to analogy or to metrical necessity. In the first personPlural the ending -mus is found a few times in poetry. In third person Plural anearlier ending, -onti, is found only in a Carmen Saliare, and is disputed. The endingout is frequent in early Latin for -unt.(b) In the second Singular, passive, in all tenses of the Present stem, the ending -reis much more common in early Latin than -ris, and is regular in Cic. except in the Pr.Indie., where he prefers -ris on account of confusion with Pr. Inf., admitting -re onlyin deponents, and then but rarely. In general, in the Pr. Indie, -re is rare in the firstand second conjugations, more rare ii the third, and never found in the fourth, in proseauthors. Post-Ciceronian prose writers, e. g., LIVT, TACITUS, prefer -ris, even in theother tenses of the Present stem. The poets use -ris or -re to suit the metre.2. IMPERFECT INDICATIVE. In the fourth conjugation, instead of -ig-,we find inThis is common in early Latin (especially sclbam), in the poets to suitearly times -I-.the metre, and occasionally in later prose. In the verb e5, and its compounds (butambire varies), this form was regular always.3. FUTURE INDICATIVE. PLAUTUS shows sporadic cases of -It,as erlt, vSnlbit(v6neo). In the fourth conjugation -fl)5 for -iam is very common in early Latin(especially sdb6), and forms in -Ibo of the third conjugation are occasional.4. PRESENT SUBJUNCTIVE. Final -at of the third person Singular active is occasionalin early Latin and also in later poets. In early Latin the active endings -im, -Is,it, -int are found in dare (and some compounds), which forms very often duim,duls, duit, duint. On similar forms from esse,see 116 ;from edere, see 172.5. IMPERATIVE. (a) Four verbs, dlcere, ducere, facere, ferre (171), form the Pr.Impv. active die, due, fac, fer. But in early Latin dice, duce face are not uncommon.,The compounds follow the usage of the simple verbs, except non-prepositional compoundsof facio. Scire, to know, lacks the Pr. Impv. scl.(b) The original ending of the Fut. Impv. active -t5d is found in early inscriptions,but very rarely.(c) The Pr. Impv. passive (second and third Singular) ends occasionally in early Latinin -mino.6. PRESENT INFINITIVE PASSIVE. The early ending -rier (-ier) is very common inearly Latin and occasionally in poetry at all periods. PLAUTUS shows about 140 suchformations. In literary prose it does not appear till very late.7. The PRESENT PARTICIPLE occurs sporadically in early Latin with the ending5s, -5s, the n having been omitted owing to its weak sound ;see 12, R. i.8. The older ending of the GERUND and GERUNDIVE in the third and fourth conjugationswas -undus ;and -endus was found only after u. In classical times -undusis frequent, especially in verbs of third and fourth conjugations. Later, -endus is theregular form.131. The Perfect System.i. SYNCOPATED FORMS. The Perfects in -avl, -evi, -Ivi, often dropthe v before s or r, and contract the vowels throughout, except those in-Ivi, which admit the contraction only before s.The syncopated forms are found in all periods, and in the poets areused to suit the metre.
9
THE STEM. 911. Future Perfect : fax5 (facere) ; capsd (capere) and compounds ; iuss5(iubere ;VERG.) ; amasso (amare) ; servasso (servare) and compounds, together with someothers.2. Perfect Sulyunctive : faxim and compounds ; duxim ;ausim ( auclere, alsoused by Cic.) ; iussim ; cmpsim teniere) locassim ( locate); ; aegassim (negare).In the second and third persons Sing., where the Fut. Pf . Indie, and the Pf. Subjv. areidentical, the forms are much more common. The plural forms are much less frequent.3. Pluperfect Subjunctive : faxem ; pro-mlssem intel-lexSs; ;re-cSsset and afew other forms ; Sr@psSm.US (HOB., S., i. 5, 79). These forms are rare.4. Infinitive : dlxe ; dS-spexe ; ad-duxe, etc. ; intel-lexe ; de-traxe, etc. ; advexe; ad-misse, and a few others. Also the Future forms averuncassere, reconciliassere,impetrassere, oppugaassere.The exact origin of these forms is still a matter of dispute, but the common view isthat they are aoristic formations.5. From the earliest times the third Plural of the Pf . Indie, active shows two endings,-Sront (later -Srunt) and -6re. The form in -Brant was always preferred, andin classical prose is the normal form. The form in -Sre seems to have been the popularform, and is much liked by LIVY and later writers. TACITUS seems to have preferred-grunt for the Pure Perfect, and -gre for the Historical Perfect. The poetsscan, according to the exigencies of the metre, at all periods also grunt.6. In regard to the other endings, we have to notice in early Latin -Is occasionallyin the Pf .Subjv. and Fut. Pf. Indie, active ;Perfects in -il are always written with -ieioninscriptions ;hi other Perfects the third person Singular in -Sit (older -St), or -It ;as dedet ; occasionally the first person ends in -el and the second in -istei. Peculiarforms are dedrot (dedro), (for dederunt), fBcSd (for fgcit), and a few others.THE STEM.132. With the exception of the verbs sum, / am, edo, I eat,eo, I go, fero, / bear, void, I wish (perhaps do, I give), andtheir compounds, most of whose forms come directly fromthe root, all verbs in Latin form their stems from the root bythe addition of a vowel or of a combination of a vowel with aconsonant. This vowel is called the thematic vowel ;see 190.In the first, second, and fourth conjugations, and in someverbs of the third conjugation, the stem thus formed is foundthroughout the whole conjugation in other verbs;the presentstem shows different forms from the other stems.1. THE PRESENT STEM.133. I. The, Stem or Thematic class To : this class belong those verbswhose stems are formed by the addition of a thematic vowel (usually i,sometimes u) to the root, as in the third conjugation, or to a stemformed by the addition of a, 8, or i to the root, as in the first, second,and fourth conjugations. The stem thus formed is seen (withlengthened vowel sometimes) in all forms of the verb. To this classbelong verbs of the first, second, and fourth conjugations, and in the
92 THE STEM.third (a) verbs formed from a strong root, i. e., verbs with 1, u, a, e, 6,ae, au ;and with e in the stem ;as dico (= deicS), duco (= douco), rado,verbs formed fromcedo, rodo, caedo, plaudo ; veb.5, vergo, pendo, etc.; (b)a weak root, *'. e., those with vowel i, u, 6, and probably those with a:as di-vido, faro, olo (olere), ago.II. The Reduplicated class : The Present stem is formed by reduplication,with i in the reduplicated syllable:gen-, gi-gno (for GI-GEN-O), gi-gne-re, to beget ; sta-, si-sto, si-ste-re, toset, stand. Compare stare, to stand. Other forms, as sldo (for SI-S(E)DO),Ber5 (for si-so), and perhaps bibo, have the Reduplication concealed.III. The T class : The root, which usually ends in a guttural, isstrengthened by to, te : flecto (FLEC-), flecte-re, to bend.IV. The Nasal class: In this class the root is strengthened byno, ne, the nasal being insertedA. In vowel-stems : sinO (si-), sine-re, to let ; line (LI-), line-re, to besmear.B. After the characteristic liquid: cerno (CEE-), cerne-re, to sift,separate ; temno (TEM-), temne-re, to scorn.NOTES. 1. After 1 assimilation takes place:pello (for pel-n5), pelle-re, to drive.2. In a few verbs the strengthened forms (-no after a vowel, -ino after a liquid) areconfined mainly to the third person Plural active of the Present, and are found not laterthan the close of the sixth century of the city danunt (= : dant), explenunt(= explent), nequinont (= nequeunt), and a few others.C. Before the characteristic mute : vinco (vie-), vince-re, to conquer ;frango (FRAG-), frange-re, to break; fundo (FUD-), funde-re, to pour.Before a p-mute n becomes m: rumpo (BUP-), rumpe-re, to rend;combo (CUB-), cumbe-re, to lie down.D. Here belong also those verbs in which the root is strengthenedby -nuo, nue ;as sternuo (STER-), sternue-re, to sneeze.NOTE. In verbs like tinguo, I soak, the consonantal u disappears before a consonantin the Pf . and Supine:tinxl, tine-turn.V. The Inchoative class : The Present stem has the suffix -sco, -see.ira-scor, lam in a rage ; cre-sco, I grow ; ob-dorml-sco, I fall asleep;nanci-scor (NAC-), I get; n5-scoapl-scor, I reach; pro-fid-scor, I set out ;(= gno-sco), / become acquainted ; po-sc5 (= porc-sco), I demand ; nHs-ce5(= mic-sc-eoi, I mix; disco (= di-dc-sc3), / learn. A number of Inchoativesare derivative formations from substantives ; as, lapidSsco (fromlapis), / become stone.VI. The I class : Instead of the simple thematic vowel i the root isincreased by the form ie. In some forms of the Present stem, i. e., -thePr. Inf., Impf. Subjv., second Sing., Pr. Impv., this appears in theform e ;in some other forms itappears as i : capi-6 (CAP-), cape-re, totake.
THE STEM. 93NOTE. Verbs of the fourth conjugation also belong to the i class ;but for conveniencethe i class is here restricted as above.VII. The Mixed class : Some verbs that originally belong to thei-class have gone over in the Present stem to the forms of the stemclass : as venio (VEN-), venl-re, to come; video (VID-), vidS-re, to see; son5(SON-), sona-re, to sound.II.THE PERFECT STEM.134. I. Perfect in -vi (or -ul) These are formed by the addition:(a) Of -vi to the stem as itappears in the Present Inf. in combinationwith the thematic vowel. To this class belong the Perfects of thefirst and fourth conjugations, and the few verbs of the second conjugationmentioned in 124 ; ama-re, ama-vl ; audl-re, audl-vl ; dele-re, del5-vl.(b) Of -uI to the Present stem after its characteristic vowel isdropped. Here belong the majority of the verbs of the second conjugation; mone-re, mon-ul.II. Perfect in -si: These are formed by the addition of -si to theroot ;which is, as a rule, long either by nature or position. This classcomprises a large number of verbs in the third conjugation in whichthe stem-characteristic consonant is a mute ;three in which it is -m(preme-re, to press ; sume-re, to take ; con-tem(n)e-re, to scorn) ;and a fewin which it is -s,as ur-5, / burn, us-si; haereo, I stick, liaesl (= haes-sl).Examples are r6p5, 1 creep, rep-si ; scrlbo, / write, scrip-si ; dic5, / say,dixl (= dic-sl) ; carpo, I pluck, carp-si ; rado, I scrape, rasi (= rad-sl).NOTE. But verbs in -ndo,take I in the Perfect :defend-0, / strike (ward) off,defend-i ; perhaps because they formed originally a reduplicated perfect ; as, mando,I chew, man(di)dl ;so (fe)fendl, I have struck.III. Reduplicated Perfects : These are formed by prefixing to theunstrengthened root its first consonant (or consonantal combination)together with the following vowel, a and ae being weakened to e, or, ifthe root began with a vowel, by prefixing e, and adding the terminationI. In Latin but few of these forms remain, and they have been variouslymodified : disco, I learn, di-dici ; spondeS, / pledge, spo(s)pondl ;tango, J touch, te-ti-gl ; tundo, / strike, tu-tud-I ; ago, 7 act, Sgl(= e-ag-I) ; emo, I buy, Smi (= e-em-I).In composition the reduplication is in many cases dropped ;soalways in compounds of cade-re, to fall ; caede-re, to fell ; cane-re, tosing ; falle-re, to deceive ; pange-re, to fix ; parce-re, to spare ; pare-re.to bear ; pende-re, to hang ; punge-re, to prick ; tange-re,to touch ;tende-re, to stretch (occasionally retained in late Latin) ; tonde-re, toshear (but occasionally retained in late Latin) ; tunde-re, to strike.Disc-ere, to learn, always retains it, and so posce-re, to demand, and admordere,to bite. Of compounds of curre-re, to run, succurrere always
'94 THE STEM.drops the reduplication, praecurrere always retains it the others :vary.Of compounds of dare, abscondere usually drops it, but all trisyllabiccompounds that change the a, and all quadrisyllable compounds, retainit.Compounds of sistere, to set, and stare, to stand, retain it.IV. Perfect in I. Verbs of the third conjugation, with & short stemsyllable,take I in the Perfect, after lengthening the stem-syllable andchanging a into 5. In many cases these Perfects are the remains ofreduplicated forms : Ieg6, / read, I5g-l ; vide-o, I see, vld-i ; fodi-o, 1stab, f5d-I ; fugi-6, I flee, fug-I ; frang-S, I Ireak, freg-I.V. Denominative verbs in-u5, like acu6, / sharpen; metuo, I fear ;also stermuJ, / sneeze, form the Perfect in -u-I after the analogy of primaryverbs, and the formation in -ul gradually extended in Latin.III.THE SUPINE STEM.135. I- Supine in -turn, Perfect Passive Participle in -tus: Thestems are formed by the addition of -tu or -to(a) To the stem as it appears in the Present Infinitive active. Herebelong most verbs of the first and fourth conjugations, and those verbsof the second conjugation that are mentioned in 124 :ama-tum, dSl6-tum, audl-ttun. Those verbs of the second conjugation which formPerfect in -nl, form the Supine stem by weakening the thematic vowele to i,and adding -tu, -to, except cgnsS-re, to deem, doce-re, to teach,mlscS-re, to mix, ten6-re, to hold, torrS-re, to scorch, which omit the thematicvowel, and form censum, doctum, mlxtum, (tentum), tostum.(b) To the unstrengthened stem. Here belong most verbs of thethird conjugation and the five verbs of the second just given, withsporadic forms in the other conjugations : cap-turn (capi5, I take),rep-turn (repo, I creep), die-turn (dlco, I say), fac-tum (faciS, I do).In combinations of -t- with a dental, assimilation took place, givingusually ss after a short vowel and s after a long vowel scissum :(scindC,I cleave), caesura (caedo, I fell). On the analogy of this and under theinfluence often of Perfect in -si,we find -s- also in some other stems :1. In stems with a guttural characteristic ; as, fix-urn (figo, I fix) ; often with apreceding liquid mersum : (mergS, / dip ; Pf .mersi) ;tersum (tergeS, / wipe ;Pf .
CHANGE OF CONJUGATION. 95IT. FUTURE ACTIVE PARTICIPLE IN -turns. The same changes occurin the stem as are found in the case of the Supine.1. In some stems ending in -u a thematic vowel i is inserted ;asarguiturus (arguere, to prove); luiturus (luere, to loose); abnuiturus(abnuere, to deny) ; ruiturus (ruere, to rush) ; eruiturus (8ruere, to rootout) ; fruituras (frui, to enjoy).2. Some Future Participles are found without corresponding Perfeet: caliturus (calere, to be warm) ; cariturus (cargre, to lack) ; doliturus(dol6re, to grieve) ; iaciturus (iacgre, to lie) ; pariturus (parere, to obey) ;valiturus (valSre, to be well).3. Irregular are : agn5turus, agniturus (agnoscere, to know well);dlsciturus (discere, to learn) ; hausurus, haustiirus (haurlre, to drain) ;nisurus (niti, to lean) ; moriturus (morl, to die) ; nosciturus (nSscere, toknow) ; oriturus (orirl, to arise) ; pariturus (parere, to bear).Change of Conjugation.136. A change of Conjugation occurs in verbs which showa long thematic vowel in the Present stem, but not in thePerfect stem, or the reverse.1. Verbs with Perfect and Supine formed regularly, according tothe third conjugation, have the Present stem formed according to oneof the other three :auge-o,senti-o,saepi-o,veni-5,vide-o,vinci-5,auge-re,2. Verbs with Perfect and Supine formed according to the first,second, or fourth conjugations, have the Present stem formed accordingto the third, in consequence of strengthening :ster-n-6, ster-ne-re, stra-vl, stra-tum, to strew.cre-sc-o, cr5-sce-re, crS-vI, cr5-tum, to grow.li-n-o, line-re, 16-vI (11-vP, li-tum, to smear.3. Verbs with the Present formed regularly according to the thirdconjugation, have the Perfect and Supine formed according to (a) thesecond, or (b) the fourth conjugation:(a) accumbere, to recline, fremere, to rage, gemere, to groan, glgnere, to beget,molere, to grind, strepere, to resound, vomere, to vomit, form Perfect in -ul, Supinein -itum.alere, to nourish, colere, to cultivate, consulere, to consult, frendere, to show theteeth, occulere, to conceal, rapere, to snatch, and its compounds form Perfect in -ul,Supine in -turn (-sum), For ali-tus,see 142, 3.
goLIST OF VERBSCOmpescere, to check, con-cinere, to sing together, and other compounds of canere,to sing, excellere, to excel, stertere, to snore, tremere, to tremble, form Perfect in-Hi, but no Supine.(&) arcessere, to summon, incessere, to enter, cupere, to desire, petere, to seek,quaerere, to search, and its compounds, rudere, to roar, sapere, to savor, form Perfectin -IvI, Supine in -itum.4. Stems vary among the first, second, and fourth conjugations.(a) Verbs with the Present formed according to the first, and Perfectand Supine according to the second conjugationcrepare, to crackle, cubare, to lie, domare, to conquer, micare, to flash,plicare, to fold, sonar e, to sound, tonare, to thunder, vetare, to forbid, withPerfect in -ul, Supine in -itum :fricare, to rub, necare, to kill, secare, to cut, with Perfect in -ui,Supine in -turn (but participles in atus are occasional, principally in laterLatin).(b) Verbs with Present formed according to fourth, and Perfect andSupine according to the second : amiclre, to wrap, aperlre, to open,operlre, to cover, sallre, to leap, and compounds.(c) Of the second and fourth conjugations is cie-o (ci-o), ciS-re (cl-re),civl, citum (ci-tum), to stir up, and itscompounds while ; pot5, potare, todrink, forms Sup. po-tum or po-tatum, and Fut. Part, po-turus orpota-turus.5. dare, to give, and stare, to stand, pass over to the third conjugationin the Perfect, in consequence of reduplication.LIST OF VERBS ACCORDING TO THE PER-FECT FORM.PERFECT : -vl ;SUPINE : -turn.137. Stem class :(a) Verbs of first and fourth conjugations, except those mentionedin 136, 4.Irregular in Supine issepeli-o, sepeli-re, sepeli-vl, sepul-tum, to bury.(b) In the second conjugation :dele-o, d5l5-re, dSlS-vI, dele-turn, to destroy.fle-o, fle-re, fl-vl, fle-tum, to weep.ne-o, ne-re, ne-vi, n5-tum, to spin.-ole-5 (ab-, in-), -ol6-re, -ole-vl, to grmc.These compounds form Supine in itum ; abolitum, inolitus.-ple5, -pie-re, pis-vl, pl6-tum, tojm.So the compounds with com-, in-, ex-, re-, sup-.vie-6, vie-re, vie-tus, to plait.Irregular iscie-6(ci-8), ciS-re (clre), cl-vl, cl-tum (ci-tum), to stir vp.In the compounds we find the Participles concitus or concitus, percitus, excltusor excitus,but accltus.
ACCORDING TO THE PERFECT FORM. 97(c) In the third conjugation :arcess-o, arcesse-re, arcessi-vi, to arcessl-tum, send for.So, too, lacess-o, / tease, capess-o, / lay hold of. In early Latin we often findaccerso, the relation of which to arcesso is variously explained. The fonns arcesslri,and later arcessiretur, from the fourth conjugation, also occur.in-cess-6, in-cesse-re, in-cessi-vl (cessi),to attack.So faccss-o, I cause, make off.pet-o, pete-re, peti-vl, petl-tum, to seek (fly at).quaer-o, quaere-re, quaesi-vi, quaesl-tum, to seek.con-quir-o, con-quire-re, conquisl-vl, con-quisl-tum, to hunt up.So other compounds of -quiro (quaero).rud-o, rude-re, rudl-vl, rudl-tum, to roar.ter-o, tere-re, trl-vl, trl-tum, to rub.TIB., i. 4,48, has at-teruisse,.aud APULEIUS has similar forms.138. Reduplicated class :ser-o, sere-re, sg-vl, sa-tum, to sow.So consero,but with Sup. con-situm.139. Nasal class:A. li-n-5, li-ne-re, lg-vl, li-tum, to besmear.So compounds of Iin5. Pf li-vl is rare.si-n-6, si-ne-re, si-vi, si-tum, to let.So dS-sino, Heave off, and in early Latin, pono (= po-sino), I put.B. cer-n-o, cer-ne-re, crg-vl, (crg-tum), to separate.So dScerno, / decide.sper-n-o, sper-ne-re, spr5-vl, spr6-tum, to despise.ster-n-o, ster-ne-re, stra-vl, stra-tum, tos/rew.140. Inchoative class :invetera-sc-o, invetera-sce-re, invetera-vl, invetera-tum, to grow old.pa-sc-o, pa-sce-re, pa-vl, pas-turn, to graze (trans.).vespera-sc-o, vespera-sce-re, vespera-vi, to become evening.So advesperasco.cre-sc-6, cr6-sce-re, cr6-vl, crg-tum, to grow.So the compounds.con-cupi-sc-o, -cupl-sce-re, -cupi-vl, -cupl-tum, to Iongf 01:ob-dormi-sc-o, -dorml-sce-re, -dormi-vl, -dorml-tum, to fall asleep.So condormisco, 6dormlsc6.ex-ol6-sc-o, -ol6-sce-re, -ol5-vl, -o!6-tum, to get one's growth.So ob-solSsc5, 1 grow old. But ab-olesco, I disappear, has abolitum; co-alesco,I rini' together, co-alitum; acl-olesco, I grow up, ad-ultum in the Sup.; andinolescS lacks the Supine.quig-sc-5, quiS-sce-re, quiS-vI, quie-tum, forest.8ci-sc-o, scl-sce-re, scl-vl, sci-tum,So ad-8Cisco, / take on.1to decree,
98 LIST OF VERBSSU-6SC-5, suS-sce-re, su6-vl, sue-tum, to accustom one's self,So compounds as-, con-, de-, man-.(g)no-sc-o, no-sce-re, no-vl, to(no-turn),know.So ignosco,/ pardon ; but co-gn5sco, / recognise, and other compounds of nosco,have Sup. in -ittun.re-sip-isc-6, -sipl-sce-re, -sipl-vl,to come to otters senses.141. 1-class:cupi-o, cupe-re, cupl-vi, cupi-tum, to desire.sapi-o, sape-re, sapl-vl (-ui\ to have a flavor.PEEFECT : -ui ;SUPINE : (i)tum.142. Stem class :1. The majority of the verbs of the second conjugation; see 134, 1, b,and 135, a. Butsorbe-6, sorbS-re, sorb-ul,Pf .sorp-sioccurs iii VAL. MAX. and LUCAN.to tup vj>.2. Of the first conjugation:crep-5, crepa-re, crep-ul, crepi-tum, to raffle.So the compounds, but in early and late Latin the regular fornig of dis-creparoand in-crepare are occasional.cub-5, cuba-re, cub-ul, cubi-tiun, to lie.Occasional regular forms in post-Ciceronian Latin.clom-o, doma-re, doni-ui, domi-tum,to tame.fric-5, frica-re, fric-ul, fric-tum (-a-tum), to rub.Occasionally in early and more often in post-classical Latin, the regular forms arefound in the compounds so; always -frica-turus.mic-o, mica-re, mic-ul, to quiver, flash,But di-micare, toflght (onf), is regular, except occasionally in OVID.nec-5, neca-re, neca-vi (nec-ui rare), neca-tum, to kill.The compound 5neca-re, to kill off, has gnecavi in early Lathi, otherwise gnecul(rare) and; enectus (but PLIK. MAI., gnecatus '.plic-5, plica-re, (plica-vl), plici-tum, to fold.The simple forms of plicareare rare. The compounds ap-, com-, ex-, im-, varybetween -avl and -nl in the Pf., and -atum and -itum in the Sup. ;but CICERO usesalways applicavi, application; complicavl, complicatom; and usually explicavl,always explicatum; always implicatum ; circiimplicare is always regular ;forms of replicare are rare.sec-Q, seca-re, sec-ul, sec-turn, to ait.Regular forms are early, late, and rare.son-o, sona-re, son-ui, soni-tum, to sound.But regularly sonatiirus. Regular forms are late. In early Latin the forms sonere,sonit, sonunt, resonit, resonunt, show that the simple verb was sonere.ton-6, tona-re, ton-ul,But at-tonitus aud intonatus (Hon., Epod. 2, 51).to thunder.
ACCORDING TO THE PERFECT FORM. 99vet-5, veta-re, vet-ul,But PERSIUS (5, 90) uses veta-vi.veti-tum,toforbid.3. Of the third conjugation :
100 LIST OF VERBS144. Nasal class :frend-o, frende-re, frS-sum, frSs-sum, to gnash.Also in the form frende-o, frende-re.ac-cumb-6, -cumbe-re, cub-ui, cubi-ttun, to lie down.So also the compounds con-, dis-, in- ;but re-cumbo lacks the Supine.ex-cell-o, -celle-re, (cell-ul), (cel-sus\ to surpass.But per-cellere,tobeat down, has Pf .per-cull, Sup. per-culsum. Excellueruntis found in GELL. xiv. 3, 7, and in AUGUSTINE ;otherwise forms of Pf. and Sup. donot occur.145. The Inchoative class :dispeac-o, dispesce-re, dispesc-ui,So compescere, to check./,, i,t i, *,*,-.A large number of verbs are formed from verbs of the second conjugation,or from substantives or adjectives, and take Pf. in -ul;as,oo-alesc-o,See 140.
ACCORDING TO THE PERFECT FORM. 101luge-6, luge-re, luxl, to be in mourning.alge-o, algg-re, al-sl, to freeze.fulge-o, fulge-re, ful-sl, to glow.In early Latin, forms of the third conjugation occur :fulgit, fulgere, effulgero(VERG., A, vm. 677).indulge-o, indulg8-re, indul-si,mulce-6, mulce-re, mul-si,Rarely mulc-tus in compounds.mulge-o, mulg6-re, mul-si,(indul-tum),mul-sum,mul-sumXctum),to give way.to stroke.tomUk.terge-o, terge-re, ter-sl,ter-sum,to wipe.Forms of the third conjugation : tergit, tergitur, terguntur, are occasionallyfound ;and so too in some late compounds. VARRO has tertus.torque-o, torqu6-re, tor-si,turge-o, turg6-re, tur-sl,urge-6, urge-re, ur-sl,co-nive-5 (gnigv), -nlve-re, -nixl (IvI),tor-turn,to twist,to swell,to press,to close the eyes.2. In the third conjugation:carp-5,de-cerp-o,carpe-re,de-cerpe-re,
IO2 LIST OF VERBSsug-o, suge-re, suxi,Put. exsugebo is found in PLAUT., Ep. 188.suc-tum,to suck.merg-6, merge-re, mer-sl,sparg-5, sparge-re, spar-si,con-sperg-o, con-sperge-re, con-sper-si,coqu-5,coque-re,coxi,mer-sum,spar-sum,con-sper-sum,coc-tum,to plunge.to strew,to besprinkle.to cook.[-lig-5 aeg-), -lige-re,-16x1,-lec-tum.]dl-lig-6, dl-lige-re, dl-lexl,dil6c-tum, to love.intelligo, orinteUego, intellege-re, intel-lexl, intel-lgc-tum, to understand.negligo, orneg-leg-6, neg-lege-re, neg-lSxI, neg-16c-tum, to neglect.Other compounds have legl. SALL., J. 40, 1, has negl6gisset.reg-o, rege-re, r6xl, rSc-tum,di-rig-5, dl-rige-re, dl-rSxI, di-rec-tum,per-g-6, per-ge-re, per-rSxi, per-r6c-tum,su-rg-o, su-rge-re, sur-r6xl, sur-r6c-tum,But expergoformed expergitus in carry and late Latin.to keep right,to guide,to go on.to rise up.teg-6, tege-re, t6xl,claud-o, claude-re, clau-sl,con-, ex-clud-5, ex-clude-re, ex-clu-sl,Early Latin shows also cliido, cludere.laed-5,col-lid-o,laede-re,col-lide-re,lae-si,col-11-si,tSc-tum,clau-sum,ex-clu-sum,lae-sum,col-ll-sum,to cover.to shut.to shut up, out.to harm.to strike together,lud-5, lude-re, lu-sl,plaud-o ap-plaud-o), plaude-re, plau-si,(ex-plOd-5, ex-plode-re, ex-plo-sl,rad-6, rade-re, ra-sl,rCd-5, r5de-re, rS-sl,trud-5, trude-re, tru-sl,vad-5 (in-, S-), -vade-re, -va-sl,ced-o, cede-re, ces-sl,quati-6, quate-re, (quas-si),con-cutifi (per-, ex-), con-cute-re, con-cus-si,mitt-6,mitte-re, mi-si,dI-vid-5,ur-5,com-bur-5,ger-o,flu-5 (flugv-),stru-o (strugv-),trah-o (tragh-),veh-6 (vegh),vlv-o (vigv-),dl-vide-re,tire-re,com-bure-re,gere-re,flue-re,strue-re,trahe-re,vehe-re,vlve-re,di-vl-si,us-sl,com-bus-si,ges-si,fluxi,struxi,traxi,vexl,vlxl,lu-sum,plau-sum,ex-plo-sum,ra-sum,r5-sum,tru-sum,-va-sum,ces-sum,to play.to clap,to hoot off.to scratch.to gnaw.to push.to go.to give way,quas-sumto shake.con-cus-sum, to shatter.mis-sum,di-vi-sum,to send.to part.us-tum, to burn.com-bus-tum, to burn up.ges-tum,(flux-us),struc-tum,trac-tum,vec-tum,vic-tuin,to carry,to flow,to build,to drag.to carry.to live,
ACCORDING TO THE PERFECT FORM. 103148. Tlie T-class:flect-6,
IO4 LIST OF VERBS2. In the fourth conjugation :saepi-6,saepl-re,sanci-o,sancl-re,The Sup. sanci-tum is rare.saep-si,vinci-o,vinci-re,farci-6 (-ferci-o\ farcl-re,fulci-o,fulcl-re,sarci-o,sarci-re,senti-6,sentl-re,hauri-6,haurl-re,VERG., A. iv., 383, has hausurus. Early Latin shows haurfbant (Lucn.) andhaurierint ;hauriturus is very late.
ACCORDING TO THE PERFECT FORM.lOgIn-st-o, in-sta-re, m-stit-I, to stand upm.ob-st-o, ob-sta-re, ob-stit-I,to stand outagainst.per-st-o, per-sta-re, per-stit-1,to stand finn.prae-st-o, prae-sta-re, prae-stit-f,to stand ahead.re-st-o, re-sta-re, re-stit-1, to stand over.dl-st-o, dl-sta-re,to stand apart.ex-st-o, ex-sta-re,to stand out.All compounds of stare with dissyllabic prepositions have, however, -steti in thePerfect, as :vpon ; thus :ante-sto, / am superior ; inter-sto, / am between ; super-sto, / standcircum-st-o, circum-sta-re, circum-stet-i,to stand round.NOTE. Compare sisto and its compounds ; 154, i.152. In the second conjugation :morde-o, mordS-re, mo-mord-1, mor-sum,to bite.pende-o, pendS-re, pe-pend-I,to hang (intr.).sponde-5, sponde-re, spo-pond-i, spon-sum, to pledge oneself '.Compounds omit the reduplication, but PLAUT. shows also de-spo-pondisse andde-spo-ponderas.tonde-o, tondS-re, to-tond-i, ton-sum, to shear.153. In the third conjugation :(a)Stem class.Reduplication lost in the compounds :cad-6, cade-re, ce-cid-I, ca-sum, tofall.oc-cid-o, oc-cide-re, oc-cid-i, oc-ca-sum, to perish.re-cidere sometimes forms reccidl,as well as recidl,in the Perfect.caed-6, caede-re, ce-cld-i, cae-sum, to/ell.oc-cld-6, oc-cide-re, oc-cld-i, oc-cl-sum, to kill.can-o, cane-re, ce-cin-i, (can-turn), to sing.Compounds form the Pf . in -ui. For (cantum), cantatum was used.parc-o, parce-re, pe-perc-i (par-si), (par-sums), to spare.com-parco (-perco), com-parce-re, com-pars-J, com-par-sum, to save.pars! is common in early Latin, and is the only form used by PLAUTUS. EarlyLatin shows rarely parcui. TER. uses compersit.154. (b) Reduplicated class :i. sisto ( si-st-o), as a simple verb, has the transitive meaning,7 (cause to) stand, but in its compounds, the intransitive meaning, /stand. Compare sto, I stand, and itscompounds (151) :sist-o, siste-re, (stit-I), sta-tum,So the compounds :to (cause to)stand.con-sist-o, con -siste-re, c5n-stit-I, con-sti-tum, to come to a stand,d-sist-o (ab-), dS-siste-re, d6-stit-l, de-sti-tum, to stand off.
io6 LIST OF VERBSex-sist-6,
ACCORDING TO THE PERFECT FORM.IQ?PERFECT: -I; SUPINE: -turn, -sum.158. In the first conjugation:iuv-6, iuva-re, iuv-I, iu-tum (iuvaturus), to help.ad-iuv-5, -iuva-re, -iuv-1, -iu-tum (-iu-turus), to standby as aid.(lav-6), (lav-ere), lav-I, lau-tum (lo-tum), to wash.lav-o, lava-re, (lava-vi), lava-turn, to wash.The Present forms of lavere belong principally to early Latin, with occasionalforms in Augustan poets and late writers ; lautum and iQtum are both used in classicaltimes ;but lautum belongs rather to early, lotum to post-classical Latin. Theform lavatum is early and poetical.159. In the second conjugation :cave-o, cavS-re, cav-I, cau-tum, to take heed.fave-o, fav6-re, fav-I, fau-tum, to be well-disposed,ferve-o (o), ferv6-re (ere), ferv-I (ferb-ul),to seethe.The Pr. forms of the third conjugation belong to early Latin and the poets. ThePf . in -ul is post-Ciceronian.fove-o, fovB-re, f5v-I, f5-tum, to keep warm.move-6, mov5-re, mov-1, mo-tum,to move.pave-o, pav6-re, pav-1, to quake (withfear).prande-o, prand5-re, prand-i, pran-sum, to breakfast.sede-6, sedS-re, sSd-i, ses-sum, to sit.stride-o (-d5), strldg-re(-e-re), strld-I, to whistle, screech.vove-o, vovS-re, vov-1, vo-tum, to now.The Present forms of the third conjugation belong almost entirely to Augustan poetsand later writers.vide-o, vide-re, vld-I, vl-sum, to see.160. In the third conjugation:With long vowel in the Perfect.i. The Stem, class:ag-o, age-re, Sg-I, ac-tum, to do, drive.co-g-5, c5-ge-re, co-eg-1, co-ac-tum, to compel.dS-g-o, d6-ge-re, to pass (time).red-ig-6, red-ige-re, red-6g-i, red-ac-tum, to bring back.em-0,^ eme-re, em-1, emp-tum, to take, to buy.inte'r-im-6, -ime-re, -em-I, -emp-tum, to make aivay with.CO-em-5, / buy up, is conjugated like em-0. But the compounds with ad-, ex-,inter-, red-, take -im-o. So, too, dir-im-5, / sever.ed-6, ede-re, 8d-I, S-sum, to eat.NOTE. In agere, edere, emere, the reduplication has coalesced with the root ; as,6gl = eagl.cud-o, cude-re, (cQd-I), (cu-sum), to hammer.The Pf. and Sup. occur in compounds only.
io8LIST OF VERBSleg-o, lege-re, l^g-1, iSc-trun, to pick up, read.col-lig-6, col-lige-re, col-leg-i, col-lgc-tum. to gather.So the other compounds, except di-lig-o, intel-leg-6, neg-leg-6, see 147, 2.lc-5 (defective), Ice-re, ic-I, ic-tum, to strike.Present stem rare :ic-it, ic-itur, ic-imur.sid-o, side-re, sld-I, to fit down.The Pf. was originally reduplicated as the Present ;see 133, u. In composition thePf. is -sedi, -sessum,/TOi sede-5,thus :con-sid-o, con-side-re, con-sed-i, con-ses-sum, to settle down.scab-o,scab-i,to scratch.solv-1, solu-tum, to loose, pay.vert-1, ver-sum, to turn.revert-i (active), re-ver-sum, to turn back.verr-i (rare), ver-sum, to sweep.vis-i,to visit.volv-i, volu-tum, to roll.OLI percel!5, percull, see 144. On tollo, sustull,sec 155.
c5p-I,ACCORDING TO THE PERFECT FORM.IO93.The I-class.(a) With long vowel in the Perfect.capi-o (cap-), cape-re,.cap-turn, to take.ac-cipi-o, ac-cipe-re, ac-cep-I, ac-cep-tum, to receive.faci-6, face-re, fec-1, fac-tum, to make.cale-faci-o (calf.), cale-face-re, cale-fSc-I, cale-fac-tum, to make warm.per-fici-o, per-fice-re,' per-fe"c-l, per-fec-tum, to achieve.The Pf. was originally reduplicated ;on Impv. fac,see 130, 5.fodi-o, fode-re, fod-1, fos-sum, to dig.fugi-o, fuge-re, fug-f, (fug-i-turus),to flee.iaci-o, iace-re, ie"c-I, iac-tum, to cast.con-ici-5, con-ice-re, con-i6c-i, con-iec-tum, to gather.(b) With short vowel in the Pf. due to the loss of the reduplication:find-o, finde-re, fid-1, fis-sum, to cleave.scind-5, scinde-re, scid-I, scis-sum, to split.The reduplicated form sci-cidl is found in early Latin.161. In the fourth conjugation :amici-o forms rarely in late Latin amid ;see 142, 4.com-peri-5, com-perl-re, com-per-1, com-per-tum, to find out.re-peri-5, re-perl-re, rep-per-I, re-per-tum, tofind.See the simple verb parere, 157.veni-o, venl-re, v6n-I, venjtum, to come.In early Latin sporadic tenses from a form venere occur, as advenat, Svenat.162. A number of verbs of the third conjugation have a characteristic-u- ;these form the perfect in -I.ab-lu-o,
I IODEPONEXTS.DEPONENTS.163. The majority of the deponent verbs belong to the first conjugation.In many instances they have parallel active forms in early orin late Latin. The principal verbs are as follows :In the first conjugation:adul-or, adula-rl, aclula-tus sum, tofaicn upon.Occasionally active in ante-classical Latin (LucR. v., 1070) and more often in laterLatin.alterc-or, alterca-rl, alterca-tus sum, to wrangle.In early Latin altercasti (TBB., And. 653), altercas. Active forms more commonin late Latin.arbitr-or, arbitra-ri, arbitra-tus sum, to think.PLAUT. uses this verb also as an active, but later this usage is rare.aucup-or, aucupa-ri, aucupa-tus sum,to try to catch.Active forms are common in early Latin.augur-or, augura-rf, augura-tus sum,to take the auguries.Active forms are early, legal, and late. Use as a passive is occasional in the classicalperiod.auspic-or, auspica-rl, auspica-tus sum, to take the auspices.Active forms are early and late. Cic. and LIVT use the verb as a passive in a fewinstances.comit-or, comita-rl, comita-tus sum, to accompany.Poets (Ov., PROP., etc.) use the active forms frequently. The Perfect Part, comitatusis common as a passive, also in classical Latin.comment-or, commenta-rl, commenta-tus sum,to discuss.Cic. uses commentatus as a passive in Br. 88, 301, Fam. xvi., 26, 1.conflict-or, conflicta-rl. confllcta-tus sum, to struggle.Occasionally found for confllctare. See TEB., Arid., 93.conspic-or, conspica-rl, conspica-tus sum, to descry.So dBspicor, suspicor. But a few forms are occasionally (usually in early Latin)used as passives, especially dSspicatus (PLAUT., TEK.), compared dSspicatissimusby Cic. (Sest. 16, 36, Verr. in., 41, 98). PLAUT., Cos. 394, suspicSs.contempl-or, contempla-rl, contempla-tus sum, to survey.The active forms are used frequently in early Latin (regularly by PLAUT.).c5pul-or, c5pula-rl, copulS-tus sum, tojoin.So PLAUT., Aid. 116. Otherwise everywhere copulare.crlmin-or, crimina-rl, crimina-tus sum, to charge.PLAUT. uses crJminaret, ENNIUS crlminat.cunct-or, cuncta-rl, cuncta-tus sum, to delay.Active forms are occasional in early and late Latin.dign-or, dfgna-rl, dlgna-tus sum, to deem worthy.This verb is predominantly post-classical and poetical. The active forms are earlyand rare ; perhaps once in CICERO.
DEPONENTS.Illfabric-or, fabrica-rl, fabrica-tus sum, to forge,The active forms belong to poetry aud to post-Augustan prose.faener-or, faenera-rl, faenera-tus sum,to lend on Interest.Active forms occasional in early Latin and more frequent in late Latin.fluctu-or, fluctua-ri, fluctua-tus sum, to undulate.Active forms are rare in PLAUT. and in Cic., but iiot uncommon later. The deponentforms are post-Ciceronian.(for), fa-rl, fa-tus sum, to speak.See 175, 3.frustr-or, frustra-ri, frustra-tus sum, to deceive.Active forms rare, but at all periods.illacrim-or, illacrima-rl, illacrima-tus sum,to weep over.In Cic. and HOR. ;otherwise active.interpret-or, interpreta-rl, interpreta-tus sum, to interpret.Cic. uses interpretatus occasionally as a passive ;likewise LIVY and others.luct-or, lucta-rl, lucta-tus sum, to wrestle.PLAUT., TER., ENNIUS, VARHO show sporadic forms of the active.ludific-or, ludifica-rl, ludifica-tus sum,to make aport.Active frequent in PLAUT., and occasionally later.medic-or, medica-rl, medica-tus sum,to heal.The active is once in PLAUT., and frequent in poets and post-Augustan prose.medit-or, medita-ri, medita-tus sum,to think overThe form meditatUS is very commonly found as a passive.muner-or, munera-rl, munera-tus sum,to bestow.Active forms in early Latin and occasionally in Cic. and later.nutrlc-or, niitrlca-rl, nutrlca-tus sum, to suckle.Active forms in early Latin.od5r-or, odora-rl, odora-tus sum, to smell.Active forms occasional at all periods.opln-or, opfna-ri, opina-tus sum,to think.opino is frequent in early Latin, and oplnatus as passive is common in CICEKO.palp-or, palpa-rl, palpa-tus sum, to stroke.Is occasional (principally in early Latin) for palpare.popul-or, popula-ri, popula-tus sum,to ravage.Active forms in simple verb and compounds are early, poetical, and post-classicsclscit-or, sclscita-rl, sclscita-tus sum, to ingittre.PLAUT., Merc. 389, sciscitaro (active).scrut-or, scruta-ri, scruta-tus sum,to search.PLAUT., Aul. 657, perscrutavl. The use as a passive occurs first in SENECAsect-or, secta-ri, secta-tus sum,to pursue.Active forms and passive usages are early.stabul-or, stabula-ri, stabula-tus sum, to stable.Active forms begin with VERGIL.tut-or, tuta-rl, tuta-tus sum,to protect.Active forms and passive usages are early and rare.
112 DEPONENTS.tumultu-or, tumultua-ri, tumultua-tus sum,to raise a riot.But PLAUTITS uses active forms ;and passive uses are occasional later.vag-or, vaga-rl, vaga-tus sum,to wander.Active forms belong to early Latin.vener-or, venera-ri, venera-tus sum,to reverence.But PLAUT. uses venero, venerem ;VEKO., HOB., and later writers show passiveuses.164. In the second conjugation :fate-or, fate-rl, fas-sus sum,to confess.cSn-fite-or, c5n-fite-rl, con-fes-sus sum, to confess.Both fateor and confiteor are used occasionally as passives by Cic. and later.lice-or, licS-rl, lici-tus sum,to bid (at a salt).mere-or, merg-ri, meri-tus sum, to deserve.Especially in the phrases mererl bene dS aliquo, to deserve well of any one.Otherwise the active is usual.misere-or, misere-rl, miseri-tus sum,to pity.In early Latin the active forms are found occasionally, e. g., LUCK, in., 881.pollice-or, pollic8-ri, pollici-tus sum,to promise.Occasionally used as a passive in post-classical Latin.re-or, rS-rl, ra-tus sum,to think.Pr. Part. Active is wanting.tue-or, tuS-rl, tui-tus (tutus' sum, to protect.In early Latin and occasionally later, a parallel form, tuor, tul, tuitus sum,occurs. For toitus usually tutatus.vere-or, verS-rl, veri-tus sum, to fear.165- In the third conjugation :aplsc-or, apisc-i, ap-tus sum,to get.Simple verb is frequent in early and late Latin. Of the compounds, adipiscor,adiplsci, adeptus sum, is usually deponent in classical times, but occurs occasionallyas a passive in SALL. and later writers. The compounds ind-, red-,are rare.am-plect-or, am-plect-I, am-plex-us sum, to twine round, embrace.So the compounds complector, circumplector. In early Latin active forms areoccasionally found e. ; g., amplectitote, circumplecte (PLAUT.).com-min-lsc-ol, com-min-isc-i, com-men-tus sum, to think up, devise.OVID and later writers use commentus as a passive.experg-isc-or, (-reg-) ex-perg-Isc-I, ex-per-rSc-tus sum, to (right one's selftip) awake.fung-or, fung-I, func-tus sum,to discharge.This verb is used passively very rarely:TER., Ad. 508. LUCK, in., 968. Cic., Sest.4,10.fru-or (frugv-), fru-I, fruc-tus (fru-i-tus) sum, to enjoy.The form fruitus is rare and late.
DEPONEKTS. 113gradi-or, grad-1, gres-sus sum, to step,ag-gredi-or, ag-gred-i, ag-gres-sus sum,to attack.Occasionally active forms of t-he fourth conjugation are found in early Latin.lab-or, lab-1, lap-sus sum, to glide.loqu-or, loqu-1, locu-tus sum, to speak.mori-or, mor-1, mortu-us sum,to die.Early Latin shows parallel forms of the fourth conjugation, as morlri, cmorirl.Fut. Part, moritiirus ;see 135, n., 3.nanc-Isc-or, nanc-lsc-1, nac-tus (nanc-tus) sum, to get.nasc-or (gna-), nasc-1, na-tus sum,to be bom.Put. Part, nasciturus.nlt-or (gnict-1.nit-I, ni-sus (nlx-us) sum, to stay one's self on.(.'from genii),nl-surus,ob-llv-lsc-or, ob-liv-isc-1, ob-11-tus sum, to forget.pac-isc-or, pac-isc-1, pac-tus sum (pepigl),to drive (a bargain).Occasionally active forms are found in early Latin ;in Cic. pactus is frequentlyused as a passive. See pango.pati-or, pat-I, pas-sus sum,to suffer.per-peti-or, per-pet-i, per-pes-sus sum, to endure to the end.pro-fic-isc-or, pro-fic-isc-i, pro-fec-tus sum,to (getforward) set out.ButPLAUT., MM. 1329, proficlSCO.quer-or, quer-i, ques-tus sum, to complain.sequ-or, sequ-I, secu-tus sum, to follow.ulc-isc-or, ulc-Isc-i, ul-tus sum, to avenge.Active forms are rare ;so once in ENNIUS. But SALL., LIVT, and later writers usethe verb as a passive sometimes.ut-or, ut-i, u-sus sum,to use.PLAUT. shows the compound abusa as a passive (Asin. 196).veh-or, veh-I, vec-tus sum,to (wagon) ride.vesc-or, vesc-1, tofeed.166- In the fourth conjugation :assenti-or, assenti-rl, assen-sus sum, to assent.Active forms are not uncommon in early Latin. Cic. uses the Pf . active forms frequentlylikewise later writers.;com-peri-or, comperl-rl, to find out.Occasionally found (but rarely in classical Latin ; as, SALL., J., 45, 1 ; 108, 3) forcomperio, comperlre. But experior, experirl, expertus sum, to try, is regularlydeponent ; though Cic. and others use often the Pf. active forms.largi-or, largl-rl, largi-tus sum,to bestow.menti-or, menti-rl, menti-tus sum,to lie.The poets and later prose writers use this as a passive also.m6ti-or, mSti-ri, mSn-sus sum,to measure.Passive usage is common, especially in the compounds : dSmSnsus, climensus,emgnsus, permSnsus, remensus.
114 SEMI-DEPONENTS.5rdi-or, ordl-rl, 6r-sus sum, to begin.orsus, and more commonly exorsus, are also found as passives.ori-or, ori-ri, or-tus sum, to arise.The Pr. Indie, is usually formal according to the third conjugation ;the Impf.Subjv. always orerer ;but the Fut. Part, is oriturus. The compounds follow thesame usage except adorlrl, to rise up at, attack, which follows the fourth conjugation.parti-or, parti-rl, parti-tus sum, to share.Active forms and passive uses are found in early Latin, and sporadically inand later.C'ic.poti-or, potl-ri, potl-tus sum,to get possession of '.The Pr. Indie., Impf. Subjv., and occasionally other forms, are also found in earlyLatin and the poets, inflected according to the third conjugation so; regularly afterPLAUT. potitur, frequently poterStur, potergmur.puni-or, punl-rl, punl-tus sum,to punish.Occasionally in Cic. and late writers for punlre.sorti-or, sortl-rl, sortl-tus sum,to cast lots.Active occasionally in early Latin, and passive uses later of the Pf .Participle.SEMI-DEPONENTS.167. i. A few verbs form the Perfect forms only as deponents :aude-5, aude-re, au-sussum,to dare.On the aorist forms ausim, etc., see 131, 4, b.fld-o, fld-ere, fi-sus sum,to trust.gaude-o, gaudS-re, gav-lsus sum,to rejoice.sole-o, sole-re, sol-itus sum, to be ivont.The Pf. active is found in early Latin ;but rarely.2. The reverse usageis found in :tore-vert-or, re-vert-I, re-vert-I,turn back.So also dgverti,but without Pf. Part. Keversus is also used actively, bnt reversussum for revertl is post-classic.See also assentior, etc., 166.NOTES. 1. Some active verbs have a Perfect Participle passive with active meaning,as : cenatus, one who has dined, from c
IRREGULAR VERBS. 115IRREGULAR VERBS.168. Irregular in the formation of the tense-stems :1. Nine verbs of the third conjugation, which have, in spite of theshort stem-syllable, the Pf. in -si, viz. :clepo, Ijllch ;rego, I keep right ; tego, leaver in ; coquo, I bake ; and the compoundsof lego, I pick-up ; lacio, I lure ; specie, I spy (-Iig5, -licio, -spicio) ; divide,I part ; quatio, I shake. See 147, 2.Prom lego, however, only dlligS, Hove ; intellego, / understand ; and neglegS,neglect, are irregular. The other compounds are regular. See 147, 2.2. Five verbs of the third conjugation, which, in spite of long stemsyllable,have the Pf . in -I, viz. :Iamb5 / lick ; cudo, / hammer ; sldS, / sit (160, 1) ;strldeO, / whistle (159) ;vertO, / turn (160, 1).3. Assimilation between bs and ms occurs in the Pf. and Sup. ofiube-S, I order. See 147, 1.prem-o (-prim-5), I press. See 147, 2.4. Special irregularities occur in :bib-5, I drink. 154, 2.mane-5, /remain. 147, 1.ni5ti-or, I measure. 166.met-5, I mow. 142, 3.mori-or, I die. 165.rauci-o, lam hoarse. 150, 2.re-or, I think. 164.5. Formed from different tense-stems, are the tenses offer-5, I bear. 171.toll-o, I lift. 155.169. Irregular in the conjugation of the Present-stem i1 .ori-or, ori-ri, or-tus sum, to arise.See 166.%2. I-re, to go.The stem is i, which, before a, 0, u, becomes e,PRIN. PARTS :e5, Ire, IvI (il), itum.INDICATIVE.SUBJUNCTIVE./ go.I be going.PBES. So. i. e-5, PL. i-nius, SG. ea-m, PL. ea-mus,2. I-s, i-tis, ea-s, ea-tis,3. i-t, eu-nt. ea-t, ea-nt,
iIl6IKREQULAE VERBS.IMPF. I-ba-m, I went. 1-re-m, / were going.FUT. i-b-o, I shall go.PEBF. I-v-i (i-1),/ have gone. 1-v-eri-m (i-eri-m).PLUPP. I-v-era-m (i-era-m), / had gone. I-v-isse-m (i-isse-m, 1-sse-m).FUT.PF. i-v-er-o (i-er-5),I shall have gone.IMPERATIVE.So. 2. I, go thou. i-to, thou shall go.-3. i-to, he shall go.PL. 2. 1-te, go ye. I-t5te, ye shall go.3. eu-nto, they shall go.INFINITIVE.PARTICIPLES.PRE#. l-re. PBES. i6-ns (Gr. eu-nt-is).PUT. i-tur-um esse. PUT. i-tur-us.PEBF. i-v-isse (i-sse).GERUND.SUPINE.eu-ncl-l, etc. i-tum, to go.REMARKS. i. Like the simple verb are inflected most of the compounds,except in the Perfect system, where syncope regularly takesplace (see 131, 2). V6n-eo, / am for sale, and per-eS, / perish, serve aspassives to vSn-do, / sell, and per-do, / destroy, whose regular passivesoccur only in the forms v5nditus, vSndendus, and perditus (but see Hon.,Sat. , ii. 6, 59). Amb-io, I solicit, follows the fourth conjugation throughout,but in post-Ciceronian writers (LivY, TAC., PLIN. Mix.) shows occasionalforms like those of e5. Some compounds show occasionally Fut.in -earn after the time of SENECA.2. The passive of the simple verb is found only in the impersonalforms Itur, Ibatur, itum est, Irl (in combination with the Supine). Butcompounds with transitive force are conjugated regularly ; so, praeter-e5forms praeter-eor, -iris, Itur, -imur, -iminl, -euntur, ibar, etc., -itussum, eram, ero, -euntor, -Itor, -in, -eundus.3. quire, to be able ; nequlre, to be unable.170. (a) que-5, I am able, is found in the following forms, of whichthose in parenthesis are unclassical, occurring jn early and late Latinand the poets ;CAESAR uses no form of queo.PR. INDIC. queS, (quis), (quit), qulmus, (quitis), queunt. PR. SUBJV. queam,queas, queat, queamus, queatis, queant. IMPP. (quibam), (quirem). FUT.(quibo). PF. quivi, etc.; qulverim, etc. PLUPF. quiveram, etc.; quivissem,etc. FUT. PP. quivers, etc. PR. INF. quire. PF. qulvisse. PART, quigns.(b)neque-6, / am unable, has the same forms, all of which seem to beclassic excepting the Future Indicative, which is not cited.
IREEGULAR VERBS. 1174. fer-re, to bear.171. The endings beginning with t, s, and r are addeddirectly to the root (132). Some parts are supplied by tul-(tol-, tla-).PRES.INDICATIVE./ bear.PBIN. PABTS :fero, ferre, tuli, latum.So. i. fer-5, PL. fer-i-mus,ACTIVE.SUBJUNCTIVE./ be bearing.SG. fera-m, PL. fera-mua,2. fer-s, fer-tis,3. fer-t, fer-u-nt.fera-s,fera-t,fera-tis,fera-nt.IMPP. ferS-ba-m, / was bearing.FUT. fera-m, / shall bear.PEBF. tul-I, / have borne.PLUPF.FUT. PP.tul-era-m.tul-er-o.fer-re-m, I icere bearing.tul-eri-m.tul-isse-m.IMPERATIVE.SG. 2. fer, bear thou.PL. 2. fer-te, bear ye.3-INFINITIVE.PRES. fer-re.FUT. la-tur-um esse.PERF. tul-isse.GERUND,fere-nd-l, etc. PASSIVE.fer-t5,fer-to,fer-tote,feru-nto,thou shalt bear,he shall bear,ye shall bear,they shall bear.PARTICIPLES.PRES. ferS-ns, bearing.PUT. la-tur-us.SUPINE,la-torn (t(o)la-tum).PRES.INDICATIVE.I am borne.SG. i. fer-o-r, PL. feri-mur,SUBJUNCTIVE./ be borne.SG. fera-r, PL. fera-mur,
Il8IRREGULAR VERBS.IMPERATIVE.SG. 2. fer-re, be thou borne. fer-tor, thou shalt be borne3. fer-tor, he shall be borne.PL. 2. feri-mini, be ye borne.3. feru-ntor, they shall be borneINFINITIVE.PARTICIPLE.PRES. fer-rl, to be borne. PERF. la-t-us, -a, -urn, borne.Fur. la-turn W. GERUNDIVE.PERF. la-turn esse, to have been borne. fere-nd-us.COMPOUNDS.af-fer-6,
SG. 2. ede, 5s,PL. 2. edi-te, es-te,3-INFINITIVE.IRREGULAR VERRS.IMPERATIVE.eat thou.eat ye.PRES. ede-re, gs-se, to eat.FUT.PEKP.es-ur-um esse.gd-isse.GERUND.ede-nd-i, etc.PASSIVE.edi-to, Ss-to,edi-to, gs-to,edi-tote, es-tote, ye shall eat.edu-nto,they shall eatPARTICIPLE.PBES.FUT.(edS-ns).gs-ur-us.SUPINE.es-uin, es-u.thou shalt eat.he shall eat.In the passive voice the only peculiarities are as follows: Pr. Indie.Sing. Third, editur and gstur. Impf. Subjv. Sing. Third, edergtur andgssgtur. The Pf. Part, is gsus and the Gerundive edendus.NOTE. In the Pr. Subjv. Active, early Latin shows edim, edis, edit, cdimus,editis, edint. Also gssum and gssu in the Sup., gssurus in the Fut. Part. Comederealso shows coinestus for comesus.6. fi-eri, to become.173. Fl-5 is conjugated in the Present, Imperfect, and Future,according to the fourth conjugation, but in the Subjunctive Imperfectand in the Infinitive the stem is increased by e; thus, fi-e-rem, I werebecoming ; fi-e-n, to become. In these forms the i is short, but elsewhereit islong even before another vowel.The Infinitive ends in -rl,and the whole Verb in the Present-stemis treated as the Passive to faci5, / make. The rest of the Passive isformed regularly from facio.PBES.IMPF.FUT.PEKP.PLUPF.PBIN. PARTS :fl5, fieri, factus sum.ACTIVE./ make.faciS,faciebam, I made.faciam, / shall make.fScI.fgceram.FUT. Pr. fgcero.etc.IMPERATIVE.(fl),(fi-te).(fl-t6).INDIC.PASSIVE.fl6, 1 am made, I become.fls, fit (fimus, fltis), fiunt.flgbam, / ivas made, I became.flam, / shall be made (become).factus sum.factus cram.factus er5.SUBJV. flam, fias,PKES.PERF.FUT.fiat, etc.fierem, fiergs, etc.INFINITIVE.fieri.factum esse, to have become,futurum esse or fore.FUT. Pr. factum fore.
I2OIRREGULAR VERBS.NOTES. 1. Occasionally in early Latin the form fiere is found for the Infinitive,which indicates that the verb was originally active. The forms fieri and fierem arevery common in early Latin, along with the normal forms. Of the forms hi parenthesisfimus and fitis do not certainly occur, and the Imperative forms are early. Passiveforms of fio are very rare never in; PLAUTUS or TERENCE.2. The compounds of facio with Prepositions change the a of the stem into and i,form the Passive in classical Latin regularly from the same stem :perficiS, / ackiere,Pass, perficior ; interficio, Pass, interficior, lam destroyed. But interfleri, c5nflerent,confieri, and several other forms are found in early Latin, and occasionallyin classical times. When compounded with words other than prepositions, facioretains its a, and uses fi5 as its Passive :patefacio, Hay open, Pass. patefi5; calefacio, I warm, Pass, calefio.For the accent, see 15, 2, K. 2.174. 7. vel-le, to ~bewilling.nolle, to be unwilling ; malle, to be willing rather.PHIN. PARTS :vo!5, velle, volul ; no!5, nolle, nolul ; malo, malle, malui.
DEFECTIVE VERBS. 121IMPV.INF. PR. velle,PF. voluisse,PART, volens,SG.PL.noil, nollto.nolite, nolitote, noluntS.nolle,malle.noluisse,maluisse.nolens.NOTES. 1. To the time of CICERO, and occasionally later, volt, voltis,are employedfor vult, vultis. In familiar language si vis, Si vultis, were contracted to sis,sultis ;vis was further combined with -ne into vin.2. Nolo is a contraction of nevolo (= non volo),and in early Latin we find, alongwith the forms given above, also nevis, nevolt ;also occaBionally we find non veils,non velit, non velint, non vellem, for noils,etc. ; but the feeling is slightly different.3. Malo = ma from volo, magdnage, magis)-volo. Frequently in PLAUT., butrarely in TER., we find mavolo, mavolunt, mavolet, mavelim, -Is, -it, mavellem,instead of maid, malim, malls, etc.175. DEFECTIVE VERBS.i .aid, / say aye.3. ait, PL. 3. aiunt.INDIC. PRES. SG. I. aio, 2. ais,IMFF.aiebam, etc.PERF. 3- ai*-SUBJV. PRES. SG. 2. aias, 3. aiat,3. aiant.PART, aiens (as adj.), affirmative. IMPV. al.NOTE. In early Latin ain (= aisne ?) was scanned often as a monosyllable ;andin the Impf ., aibam, albas, aibat, aibant were frequently employed along with thenormal forms. The Irnpv. is rare, and found only in early Latin. Pr. Subjv. aiam isemended into PL., Ep., 281.2. inquam, / say, quothI.INDIC. PHES. So. i.inquam, 2. inquis, 3. inquit.PL. i. inquimus, 2. inquitis, 3. inquiont.IMPF. SG. 3. inquiSbat.FUT. SG. 2. inquies, 3. inquiet.PERF. SG. i. inquil, 2. inquistl, 3. inquit.IMPV. inque, iuquito.3. fa-ri, to speak.INDIC. PRES. f&tue. FUT. fabor, ffibitur. PERF. Stus sum, etc. IMPV. fare.PART. PRES. fans, fantis, fantl, fantem. GER. fandl, fando. SUP. fatu.NOTE. In addition to these, compounds show also PRES. :-faris, -famur, -faminl,-fantur ;IMPF. :-fabar, -fabantur ;PUT. :-fabere, -fabimur PABT. : -fante;and others. These forma, as well as the uncompounded forms, though occasionallyfound in prose, are peculiar to the poets until post-Augustan times. The Pf . Part, issometimes used passively ;so especially fatum,/te ; effatus, designated.
122 DEFECTIVE VERBS.4. have-re (ave-re), salve-re.IMPV. have, salve, salvebis, hail thou !haveto,salveto.havete, salvete, hail ye !INF. havgre, salvere.Corresponding to these are the forms of valere, viz. : val6, valete,valere, farewell.5. coepi, meminl, odi, novl.In use only in the Perfect-stem are coepi, / have begun, which servesas a Perfect toiucipio, and memini, / remember, 5dl, / hate, n5vl (fromnosco, see 131, 3, 140), I know, am aware, consuevi (from consuesc5), 1am wont, which have the force of Presents.a. INDIC. coepi, / have begun. SUBJV. coeperim.coeperam.coepissem.coeperO. INF. coepisse, to have begun.NOTE. Early Latin shows coepio, coepias, coepiat, coepiam, coepere, coeperet.Future Participle coepturusis Post-Augustan.isIncSpI ante-classical.Passive forms coeptus sum, etc., occur with the same meaning in combination witha Passive Infinitive. See 423, N. 3.b. INDIC. memini, I remember. SUBJV. meminerim.memineram.meniinisseni.meminerS. INF. meminisse, to remember.IMPV. So. memento. PL. mementote.c. INDIC. Odi, I hate, SUBJV. Sderim.oderam.odissem.odero. INF. Sdisse, to hate.FUT. PAKT. osurus.NOTE. Occasionally in early Latin, the poets, and later prose, deponent forms of thePerfect are found, 6sus sum, etc. For the Passive the phrase odi5 esse is used.d. INDIC. n5vl. SUBJV. nSverim (nSrim).noveram ( noram). novissem (nossem).noverS (n5r5). INF. nSvisse (n5sse) to know.6. cedo, quaeso.Other defective forms are :SG. cedo, give ! (old Impv.) PL. cette.INDIC. PBES. quaes5, please (i. e., I seek, beg), quaesumus.NOTE. Other forms of quaeso are found occasionally in early Latin, and sporadicallyin Cic., SAIX., and later ;the Pf. forms have been attached to quaerere, 137, c.
FOKMATION OF WORDS. 123FORMATION OF WORDS.176. By the formation of words is meant the way in whichstems are made of roots, new stems of old, and in whichwords are compounded.177. All roots of the Latin language are probably monosyllabic.* They can be ascertained only by scientific analysis.The difference between Root and Stem has been set forth in 25, NN.Sometimes the Stem is the same as the Boot ;But it is usually different.Verbs (132).especially in the Root178. Words are either simple or compound.A simple word is one that is formed from a single root :sol, sun; sta-re, stand, stay.A compound word is one that is made up ofroots :sdl-stiti-um, sun-staying, solstice.A. Simple Words.two or more179. Simple words are partly primitive, partly derivativeor secondary.1. Primitive words come from the root, and as this usually appearsin the simplest form of the verb-stem, primitive words are calledverbals. Examples are the root-verbal forms (134, n., 132, 135, i.),some substantives of the third declension, as dux (duc-s), leader, rootdue (see 183, i), many substantives of the first, second, and fourthdeclensions, as : scrlb-a (scrflbo, / write), scribe.2. Derivative words are formed from a noun-stem ;hence calleddenominatives : vetus-tas, age, from vetes- (N. vetus), old.NOTE.Denominative verbs include many verbs which cannot definitely be referredto any substantive ;such as many frequentatives and intensives. In its narrower significationthe term refers to the special class of verbs made from substantives in use.180. Substantives are generally formed by means of a suffix.A suffix is an addition to a stem, and serves to define itsmeaning or show its relations. So from the verbal stem scrlb-(scrlbo, I write) comes scrip-tor, writ-er; scrlp-tio(n), writ-ing.* The theory of monosyllabic roots is adopted here as being somewhat more convenientthan the theory of polysyllabic roots, now held by some important scholars.Of course it will be understood that the actual existence of mere roots can be assumedonly for a very early period in the development of language, long before the independentexistence of Latin.
124 FORMATION OF WORDS.Suffixes are either primary or secondary. A primary suffix is oneadded to a root (or verb stem) to form primitive words. A secondarysuffix is one used in the formation of derivative words. Thus, -tor inscrip-tor is a primary suffix ; -tas in vetus-tas is secondary.NOTES. 1. By the fading out of the difference between primary and secondary suffixes,primary suffixes come to be used sometimes to form secondary derivatives.2. Consonant stems before consonant suffixes undergo the usual changes (9). Soscrlb-tor becomes scrip-tor ; rgg-s becomes re's. Stems are sometimes extended bya vowel, usually i, less often u, to facilitate pronunciation : val-i-dus, strong ; dOCu-mentum,proof; sometimes they change the stem vowel : teg, cort r ; tog-a, toga ;tug-urium, hut.3. Vowel stems lengthen the final vowel :acu-, sharpen ; acu-men, sharp part,point.The final vowel often disappears before the suffix :opta-, choose ; opt-io, choice.181. FORMATION OF SUBSTANTIVES.The suffixes, as applied to various roots, have often special functions,and form words of definite meaning. The most important areas follows :1.Agency is indicated by-tor, -trie (N. tor (?.), trtx (/.)): ama-tor, lover; vic-trix, conqneress; occasionally -ter (N. ter, G. -tri): ar-bi-ter (= ad + ba, step),umpire; -on (N. 6, G. onis): com-bib-o (fellow-drinker), boon companion;occasionally -o, -a (N. -us, -a):serv-os, slave; scrib-a, scribe;-onOf -ona (N. onu-s, -ona):col-onu-s, settler ; -(i)t (N. es, G. itis) :mil-es, soldier, and a few others.2. Action, Activity, and Event are indicated bya. -tu (N. tu-s, su-s, G. -us):ad-ven-tus, arrival ; -tri-na (N.trlna) : doc-trlna, instruction; -ln-a (N. -Ina):rap-ina, rapine; -men(N. men, G. min-is) : ag-men, train; -mento (N. mentum):tor-mentu-m,torture; -e-la (ella) : loqu-ela, speech; quer-Sla, complaint; -cinio(N. -u-m) : latro-ciniu-m, highway robbery ; -monio, -rnonia (N.monia, moniu-m) : queri-mOnia, complaint ; testi-moniu-m, testimony.b. Abstracts. Masculine : -5s- (N. -or, G. -or-is):ang-or, anguish.Feminine : -on (N. d5, g5, G. in-is):ima-g5, image; cup-i-do, desire;-ia : audac-ia, boldness ; -ion (N. i5):leg-io, legion; -tin : avari-tia,avarice; collateral are some with Nom. in -ties, as duri-tiSs, hardness;-tion (N. ti6, sio):amb-i-tio, ambition ; con-ftl-sio, confusion; -tat(N. tas) :aequali-tas, equality; -tura : pic-tura, painting; -tut- (N. tus,sus): iuven-tus, youth; -tu (-su) (N. tu-s, su-s), s6n-sus, perception;-tudon (N. tud-o, G. -inis): aegri-tudo, sickness of heart. Neuter: -tio(N. tiu-m) : servi-tiu-m, bondage.3. An Artisan or Tradesman is indicated by-ario (N. ariu-s):argent-ariu-s, money changer.
FORMATION OF WORDS. 1254. The Trade is indicated by-aria : argent-aria, silver mine, bank.5. The Locality of the work (or trade) is indicated by-firio (N. ariu-m):semin-ariu-m, seed-plot ; -dnio (N. 5niu-m) : fullonium,fuller's shop; -Ina : offic-ma, workshop; -cro, -eulo (N. -cru-ra,culu-m) : lava-cru-m, bath ; -trino, -trlna (N. trina, trinu-m): sutrlna,shoemaker's shop ; pis-trinu-m, mill.6. Instrument and Means are indicated by-bro, -bra, (N". bra, bru-m):ll-bra, balance, ; crl-brum, sieve; -cro,-culo (N. cru-m, culu-m):ba-culu-m, walking stick; -lo, -la (N. -la,-lu-m) : pi-la, pillar ; t6-lu-m, weapon; -ulo, -ula (N. ulu-s, ula, ulu-m):cap-ulu-s, handle; r6g-ula, rule; cing-ulu-m, girdle; -mento (N.mentu-m) : al-i-mentu-m, nourishment ; -fro, -tra (N. tra, tru-m):fenes-tra, window ; ara-tru-m, plough.7. Relationship is indicated by-ter (N. ter, G. tr-is):pa-ier, father; ma-ter, mother.8. Condition or Relation by-Ina :dlscipl-ina, discipline; medic-Ina, medicine.g. Function is indicated by-tura (sura) : cul-tura, cultivation.10. Office is indicated by-atu (N". atus, G. atus):consul-atus, consulship; -tura (-surd):dicta-tura, dictatorship.11. Dense Growths are indicated by-eto (N. gtu-m):murt-6tu-m, myrtle grove; -to (N. tu-m) :virgultu-m,brushwood.12. Diminutives are indicated by-lo, -la (N. lu-s, etc.), before which a liquid is assimilated (9, 3):(ager), agel-lu-s, little field ; (tabul-a), tabel-la, tablet ; (coron-a), corol-la,chaplet ; Catul-lu-s (= Caton-lu-s) ;homul-lu-s (= homon-lu-s), manikin;-olo, -ulo : olo after e, i, v, otherwise -ulo (N. olu-s, ola, ulu-s, ula) :(alve-us), alve-olu-s, little hollow ; (ffli-a), fili-ola, little daughter ; (valv-a),valv-olae, pod (little flaps); (circu-s), circ-ulu-s, little ring, -culo, -cula(N. culu-s, etc.), after e, i, u, and consonant stems :(sp5s), spS-cula, slighthope; (amni-s), amni-culu-s, streamlet; (versu-s), versi-culu-s, versicle;(homo, homin-), homun-culu-s, manikin ; (flos), flos-culu-s, floweret ; (cor,cord-), cor-culu-m, dear heart.NOTE. Diminutives have, as a rule, the gender of their primitives. Exceptionsare sometimes due to difference in signification.
126 FORMATION OF WORDS.182. FORMATION OF ADJECTIVES.The significance of the most important adjective suffixes, which areoften identical with the substantive suffixes, are as follows :1. Action is indicated by-bundo, -bunda : cuncta-bundu-s, lingering. Repeated action by-ulo, -ula : cred-ulu-s, quick to believe; quer-ulu-s, complaining. Passiveaction is indicated by -bili ; ama-bili-s, lovable; vend-i-bili-s, to besold.2.Capacity and Inclination are indicated by-cundo, -cunda : fa-cundu-s, of ready speech ; verS-ctmdu-a,modest. Passive Capacity by -Hi : ag-ili-s, readily moved, quick ;doc-ili-s, teachable. The Capacity and Resulting Condition by -till :duc-tili-s, ductile ; fic-tili-s, capable of being moulded, of clay.3. Tendency is indicated by-aci (N. ax):aud-ax, bold ; rap-ax, greedy.4. Likeness and Composition or Material are indicated by-aceo, -acea : arundin-aceu-s, reedy ; cret-aceu-s, chalky; -icio :i.ater-iciu-s, made of brick ; -no, -na : acer-nu-s, of maple ; -neo 9-nea : ae-neu-s, brazen.5. Belonging to is indicated by-*o, -id : imperator-iu-s, belonging to a general ; -icio, -icia :aedil-iciu-s, belonging to an cedile; -ano, -ana : hum-anu-s, human ;urb-anu-s, urbane, city.6. Appurtenance and Medium are indicated by-ticOf -tica : aqua-ticu-s, aquatic ; -till- : aqua-tili-s, aquatic ;pluma-tili-s, (embroidered) like feathers.7. Origin is indicated by-io, -ia : Cornel-ia (I6x), Corinth-iu-s ; -ano, -ana, -Ino, -Ina :Rom-ann-s. Lat-mu-s.8. Time is indicated by-tino, -tina : cras-tinu-s, of to-morrow; -terno, -terna : hesternu-s,of yesterday; -urno, -urna : noct-urnu-s, by night ; -tino,-tina : matii-tinu-s, of early morning.9. Locality, where, whence, is indicated by-ia : Gall-ia, Gaul ; -tino : intes-tlnu-s, inner, intestine; -ensi :circ-Snsi-s, from the circus ; Sicili-ensi-s, Sicilian ; -ati (N. -as): cuias,of what country ?
FORMATION OF WORDS. I2/10. Fulness is indicated by-oso, -osa : anim-6su-s, full of spirit ; verb-5sti-s, wordy ; -lento,tenta : sanguin-o-lentu-s, bloody ; op-u-lentu-s, with abundant means.11. Descent and Relationship are indicated in Latin mainly by Greekadjectives, made by the addition of Greek suffixes to proper names.These suffixes areM. -ides (G. idae), F. -is (G. idis), from Nominatives in us, or, os,and s preceded by a consonant ;M. -ides (G. Idae), F. -eis (G. eidis),from Nominatives in -eus ;M. -ades (G. adae), F. -eis (G. Sidis), fromNominatives in as (G. ae) and -6s (G. -ae) M. -iades ; (G. iadae), F.-ias (G. iadis). from Nominatives in ius, 6s, on, o ;F. -Ine, from Nominativesin -us and -eus ;F. -idne, from Nominatives in ius : (Tantalus)Tantal-ides, son of Tantalus ; Tantal-is, daughter of Tantalus ; (Pelops)Pelopides ; (Th6s-eus) Thes-ides, Th6sSis ; (Aeneas) Aene-ades (Aeneadae also) ;(Laertes) Laert-iades ; (Neptunus) Neptiin-In5 ; (Acrisius) Acrisione", etc.12. Diminutive adjectives are formed bythe same suffixes asdiminutive substantives (181, 12):albus, white, albu-lus, whitish ; miser,wretched, mis-ellus, poor (little) ;Seer, sharp, acri-culu-s, somewhat sharp.183. SUBSTANTIVES WITHOUT SUFFIXES.(Root Substantives.)A few substantives are formed from roots without a suffix :1. With weak root : duc-s (dux), leader, from root due, lead ; nec-s(nex), killing, from root nee, kill.2. With strong root : luc-s (lux), light, from root Itic, light ; r6g-s(rex), king, from root reg, rule.3. With reduplication:car-cer, jail ; mar-mor, marble ; mur-inur,murmur.THE SUFFIXES IN184 Vowels.DETAIL.-o, -a (N. u-s, a, u-m). Primary and secondary adjectives, andprimary substantives. The primary adjectives resemble somewhatactive participles in meaning ; fer-u-s, wild ; vag-u-s, wandering. Secondaryare especially adjectives in -orus, as dec-oru-s, graceful, fromdecor, grace, and many others. Masculine substantives in -u-s are oftennouns of agency, sometimes nomina actionis and concretes therefrom :coqu-o-s, cook ; rog-u-s, pyre.Those in -a (a) are regularly nomina agentis,especially in composition ; scrlb-a, scribe ; agri-cola, husbandman(land-tiller). Feminines are in -o (which are principally names oftrees : pir-us, pear tree) and in -a :lup-a, she-wolf, as well as lup-u-s.Neuters are those in -u-m, especially names of fruits:pir-u-m, pear.
128 FORMATION OF WORDS.-i (N. i-s, e). Substantives : M.orb-i-s, circle ; pisc-i-s, fsh, etc. ;F. av-i-s, bird ; nav-i-s, ship ; N. mar-e, sea ; conclav-e, room. Adjectives:dnlc-i-s, sweet ; turp-i-s, ugly.NOTE.In adjectives especially, i is often weakened from -o,as inermis and iner-Sometimes in substantives the Norn, shows es instead of asis, caedes andmus, etc.caedis, etc.-io, -ia (X. iu-s, ia, iu-m). i. This is the principal secondary suffix,and is found iu many combinations ;but it is also found as primaryin substantives : M. gen-iu-s, genius ; glad-iu-s, sword ; F. pluv-ia,rain; tib-ia, fife; N. fol-iu-m, leaf; od-iu-m, hate; and in adjectivesex-im-iu-s, pre-eminent (taken out) ; sauc-iu-s, wounded, pluv-iu-s, rainy.2. The suffix occurs as secondary in the forms -eio (-aeo\ -io, eo, io, ina large number of Gentile names :Flav-Siu-s, Flav-iu-s ; Liic-eiu-s, Luc-Iu-s, Luc-iu-s similar to these are those in;ed-iu-s, id-iu-s, id-iu-s, -61-iu-s,fl-iu-s, as Luc-id-iu-s, Corn-el-iu-s, Luc-fl-iu-s. Also in some adjectives ofmaterial in eu-s, as aur-eu-s, golden ; ferr-eu-s, iron. It occurs, moreover,to be discussedin many compound adjective and substantive endings,later, and in many abstract substantives in -antia, -entia,as abundant-ia,abundance ; sci-ent-ia, knowledge, etc.NOTE. Instead of -ia,we find -ea in a few words :cav-ea, cage ; cochl-ea, snail.-u (N. u-s, u). M. arc-u-s, bate ; curr-u-s, chariot ; F. ac-u-s, needle ;man-u-s, hand; X. gel-u, frost; gen-u, knee. Secondary is socr-u-s,mother-in-law. This suffix is found occasionally in adjectives compoundedwith manus, as centi-manus, hundred-handed ; also in the formui in a few adjectives, as ten-ui-s, thin.NOTE.The suffix -o often alternates with -u.-no, -ua (N. uo-s, ua, uo-m). Primary and secondary substantivesand adjectives. Primary: M. eq-uo-s, horse ; F. al-vo-s, belly ; N.ai-vo-m, field ; par-vo-s, small. Secondary M. : patr-uo-p, uncle; cer-vo-s,stag ; F. ian-ua, gate ; cern-uo-s, stooping ; aesti-vo-s, of the summer.NOTE. Ivo-S is found in voc-lVO-S (vacuos), rediv-lvo-S,etc. -vo is weakenedto -vi in pel-vi-S, basin.185. Suffixes with Gutturals.1. -co, -en (N. cu-s, ca, cu-m). This forms both adjectives andsubstantives, but is usually secondary. As primaryit is found in :io-cu-s, jest ; lo-cu-s, place ; as secondary medi-cu-s, physician : ; pedi-ca,in fetter. Adjectives are primary : cas-cu-s, very old ; or secondary in civi-cu-s, civic.2. -aco, -aca (N. acu-s, aca, acu-m). Primary in clo-aca, sewer;secondary in ver-b8n-aca, vervain, and in adjectives, as mer-acu-s, pure.
FORMATION OF WORDS.I2Q3. -tco, -lea (N. icu-s, lea, Icu-m). In substantives, such as : M.umbil-icu-s, navel ; F. lect-ica, litter ; urt-Ica, nettle. In adjectives, as :am-lcu-s, friendly, etc.4. -uco, -uca (N. ficu-s, uca, ucu-m). Primary in the adjectives:cad-ucu-s, tottering ; mand-ucu-s, voracious ; secondary in alb-ucu-s, asphodel; and in substantives 'n -uca, as er-uca, caterpillar ; verr-uca, wart.NOTE. Similar is the secondary suffix -inquo in long-inquo-s, distant; propinquo-s,near.5. -de (N. ax) forms substantives and adjectives ;the latter expressinginclination. Primary : aud-ax, bold ; fug-ax, fleeing. Secondary: F. forn-ax, furnace ; Hm-ax, snail ; vSr-ax, truthful.6. -ec (N. ex) is found in verv-6x, wether.7. -ic (N. ex) forms a number of substantives that are mainly masculine,except names of plants and trees. Primary : M. ap-ex, point ;cort-ex, baric ; F. il-ex, holm-oak. Secondary : F. imbr-ex, gutter-tile.8. -ic (N. Ix) forms substantives and adjectives. Primary: F. radix,root ; fgl-ix, happy. Secondary : corn-lx, crow, and feminines in-trlx.9. -be (N. ox) is found in the substantive eel-ox, yacht, and in anumber of adjectives:atr-ox, ferocious.10. -dceo, -acea (N. aceu-s, acea, aceu-m), forms adjectives ofmaterial or likeness : cret-aceu-s, chalk-like.NOTE. Notice also the suffix -ac-io, especially in proper names :V5r-acia.11. -ic-eo, -ic-io (N. iceu-s, etc., iciu-s, etc.), form adjectives indicatingmaterial, the latter suffix also some indicating relation :palmiceu-s,ofpalms ; tribun-iciu-s, proceeding from a tribune.12. -Ic-io (X. iciu-s, etc.) is found in nov-lciu-s, new, and in wordsof participial meaning coming from forms in -to, as advent-Iciu-s,stranger.13. -uc-eo f -uc-io, occurs in pann-uceu-s or pann-uciu-s.14. -ci-no and ci-n'-io occur (perhaps) in vati-cinu-s, prophetic,and in some secondary neuter substantives, which denote action orevent, as latro-ciniu-m, robbery..15. -cro, -cri, -do, -culo (N. cer, sris, elu-m, culu-m) are foundin some adjectives with participial force, and in a few neuter substantivesindicating, instrument or locality ; as ala-cer, quick ; medio-cris,mediocre ; perl-clum (-culu-m), danger ; ba-culu-m, stick (also m.) ; sepulcrum,grave. Also the primary ridi-culu-s, laughable, and the secondaryanni-culu-s, aged.9
130 FORMATION OF WORDS.186. Suffixes with a Dental.1. -d (N. (d)s). Substantives only:fr&u-s, cheatery ; merct-t, pay ;custo-s, guard.2. -do, -di (N. du-s, etc., di-s). A secondary suffix used especiallyfor the formation of adjectives:frig-i-du-s, cold ; vir-i-dis, blooming.3. -to (-so) (N. tu-s, ta, tu-m). This forms substantives and adjectives,and is both primary and secondary. Primary : M. cub-i-tu-s,elbow; dig-i-tus, finger ; also substantives in -ta after Greek analogy:poS-ta, poet ; F. has-ta, spear ; am-i-ta, aunt ; N". lu-tu-m, mud ; t6ctum,roof ; ap-tu-s, fit ; bea-tu-s, blessed. Secondary M. : nau-ta, sailor ;F. iuven-ta, youth ; N. dense growths in 6-tu-m : frutic-6-tu-m, copse ;ius-tu-B^Mstf," and passive adjectives like barb-a-tus, bearded.4. -ti (-si) [N. tis (sis)]forms primary and secondary substantivesand adjectives. Primary: M. fus-ti-s, club ; cas-si-s, hunting-net ; F.cu-ti-s, skin ; si-ti-s, thirst ; for-ti-s, brave ; ml-ti-s, mild. Secondary :(i) in adjectives and substantives indicating home, origin, usuallypreceded by a, I,more rarely 6 : Camer-s (Camer-ti-s), from Camerinum;Arplna-s (Arplna-ti-s), of Arpinum ; nostr-as, from our country ; (2) inthe form -finsi (for ent-ti) in adjectives of origin and locality : Sicili-Snsi-s,from Sicily ; castr-6nsi-s, belonging to a camp.5. -t (N. (t)s) forms primary and secondary substantives and adjectives.Primary : M. com-e-s, companion ; dSn-s, tooth ; F. qui-6-s,rest ; ar-s, art ; locupl-6-s, wealthy ; with preceding e :dlv-e-s, rich.Note also the Participles in -ns. Secondary : M. al-e-s, bird ; eque-s,horseman.6. -ento- (N. -entu-s, etc.) forms substantives and adjectives ; thelatter are participial in nature. M. v-entu-s, wind ; F. pol-enta, cluster ;N. ungu-entu-m, salve ; cru-entu-s, bloody. Secondary adjectives:gracil-entu-s, slender ; and by false analogy corpul-entu-s, corpulent, andthe like.7. -tat, -tut (M. ta-s, tu-s), forms secondary feminine abstracts andcollectives :clv-i-ta-s, citizenship ; Hber-ta-s, freedom ; iuven-tu-s, youth ;vir-tfi-s, manliness.8. -tio, -tia, -tie (N. tiu-m, tia, ti5-s), likewise form abstracts andcollectives, some neuter, most masculine :servi-tiu-m, slavery ; mollitiaand molli-tiS-s, gentleness, etc.NOTES. 1. In in-i-tiu-m, beginning, and spa-tiu-m, room, the suffix is primary.2. Many roots form various derivatives of similar meaning, thus : dur-i-tia, duri-tie-s,dur-i-ta-s, hardness, etc.9. -ti-co (N. ti-cu-s, etc.) forms secondary adjectives signifyingpertaining to ; domes-ticu-s, domestic; aqua-ticu-s, aquatic.
FORMATION OF WORDS. 131NOTE. In such substantives as canti-CU-m, triti-C-um, the ending -co lias beenadded to a participial form in -to (canto, trlto).10. -ter forms primary substantives of kinship; as, pa-ter, etc.Different in formation is soror, which, like ux-or, has no feminine ending.11. -tor (-sor), F. -tric(K. tor, trlx), form substantives of agency,those in trlx being all secondary : aud-i-tor, hearer ; v6na-trlx, huntress ;-tor is secondary in gladia-tor, etc.12. -turo-f -tur-a, (N. turu-s, etc.),forms participles in turu-s, asama-turu-s, and feminine substantives denoting activity or office : cultur-a,cultivation ; c6n-sur-a, censorship,13. -tor-io (-sor-io) (N. t8riu-s, etc.), form neuter substantives ofplace and instrument, and adjectives denoting that which pertains tothe actor : audi-tor-iu-m, lecture hall ; alea-tor-iu-s, pertaining to a diceplayer.14. -tro, -tra (N. tra, tru-m), forms substantives, mostly neuter,of means: ara-tru-m, plough; fenes-tra (f.), window. From words likemon-s-tru-m, monster, come by falsewild pine.analogy those in -ster, as pin-aster,15. -tero, -tera (N. ter, tra, tru-m) forms comparatives: al-ter,other ; dex-ter, right ; nos-ter, our ; perhaps also adjectives of relation,appurtenance, or locality in -s-ter (Gr. stris), such as : palus-ter (= paludter),swampy ; eques-ter, equestrian ; campes-ter, champaign ; terres-ter,of the earth, terrestrial.16. -trino, -trlna (N. trlna, trlnu-m), forms substantives of activity(f.), or of locality (f., n.):doc-trina, instruction ; pls-trlna, bakery;pls-trlnu-m, (pounding) mill.17. -till- (-sili) (N. tili-s, tile) forms primary adjectives of capacityand adaptation, and with preceding a secondary adjectives of relationor belonging : duc-tili-s, ductile ; mis-sili-s, missile ; aqua-tili-s, belongingto the water.1 8. -ter-no (N. ternu-s, etc.) forms adjectives indicating time :hes-ternu-s, of yesterday.19. -tur-no(N. turnu-s, etc.) forms substantives and adjectivesindicating continuance, from which come proper names :Sa-turnu-s,Vol-turnu-s, tac-i-turnu-s, silent.20. -tino, -tlno (N. tinu-s, tinu-s, etc.), forms adjectives of time,the latter also of place: cras-tinu-s, of to-morrow ; intes-tlnn-s, inner,intestine ; matu-tinu-s, of early morning.21. -tu (-su) (N. tu-s, su-s) forms substantives of action and itsresult :adven-tu-s, arrival ; cur-su-s, course ; or-tu-s, rising.22. -a-tu (N. a-tu-s) forms secondary substantives of office : consula-tu-s,consulshipsen-a-tu-s, senate.
132 FORMATION OF WORDS.187. Suffixes with a Labial.1.-bo, -ba (N. bu-s, etc.), forms substantives and adjectives: M.mor-bu-s, disease ; F. bar-ba, beard ; N. ver-bu-m, word ; pro-bu-s, upright.2. -bro, -bra (N. bra, brti-m), forms substantives indicating meansor instrument. Primary : F. dola-bra, celt ; li-bra, balance ; ter-e-bra,borer; N. cri-bru-m, sieve. Secondary : candela-bru-m, candlestick.NOTE. Very rare are masculines as, ;fa-ber, wright ; Mulci-ber, Vulcan.3. -bulo, -bula (N. bula, bulu-m), form substantives : F. fa-bula,tale ; fl-bula (fig-),brooch ; N. pa-bulu-m, fodder ; sta-bulu-m, stall.4. -bill (N. bili-s) forms adjectives, mostly of passive meaning inclassical prose ama-bili-s, lovable : ; no-bili-s, noble ; fle-bili-s, weeping.188. Suffixes with an original S.1. -is (N. is, G. er-is) forms a few substantives: v5m-is (also v5m-er),ploughshare; cin-is, ashes; pulv-is, dust ; cucum-is, cucumber.2. -us (N. us, G. er-is, or-is) forms primary and secondary neutersubstantives. Primary : foed-us, bond ; gen-us, race ; temp-us, time.Secondary : pect-us, breast ; fiin-us, funeral.NOTE. Some such words have become monosyllabic, as aes, iiis, rfls.3. -OS (-or) (N. 6s, or, G. 5r-is) forms many primary and a fewsecondary masculine abstracts. Primary : fl-6s, flower; ain-or, love.Secondary :aegr-or, sickness.NOTE. Noteworthy are M. lep-US, hare ; F. arb-os, tree (45 N.); Ven-us (G. Yeneris),and the adjective vet-us (G. veteris), old.4. -es (N. es, Ss, G. is, ei) forms a few substantives of the third andfifth declension :vat-6s, bard ; fam-6s, hunger; pl6b-6s, people.5. -or-o (N. 5ru-s, etc.) forms secondary adjectives, as :can-5ru-s,sounding ; hon-oru-s, honourable; and a few substantives, as :aur-ora,morning; Flora, etc.189. Suffixes with a Liquid.1. -lo, -la (N. lu-s, etc.), forms many feminine and neuter, and afew masculine substantives : M. ma-lu-s, mast ; F. pi-la, pillar ; N.cae-lu-m (= caed-lu-m), chisel ;fl-lu-m, thread.2. -i-lOf -i-la (N. ilu-s, etc.),forms primary and secondary sub-
FORMATION OF WOKDS. 133stantives and adjectives. M. sib-i-lu-s, hissing ; N. cae-lu-m (= cavi-lu-m,hollow), heaven; nub-i-lu-s, cloudy.3. (-o-lo),-u-lo, -u-la (N. ulu-s, etc.), form primary and secondarysubstantives, most of which indicate instrument, and primary adjectivesindicating repeated action or tendency: M. ang-u-lu-s, corner;oc-u-lu-s, eye ; F. reg-u-la, rule ; teg-u-la, tile ; N. iac-u-lu-m, javelin ;spec-u-lu-m, mirror; bib-u-lu-s, bibulous; cr6d-u-lu-s, quick to believe;quer-u-lu-s, complaining ; caer-u-lu-s, blue (secondary), and caer-u-leu-s.Also fam-u-lu-s, servant, and the extension fam-ili-a, family.4. -li (N. li-s, le) occurs in the substantive : M. cau-li-s, stalk ; andin adjectives:subtMi-s, fine; incl-li-s, cut in. Secondary in fide-li-s,faithful.5. -i-li (N. ili-s, ile) forms a few substantives and many adjectivesindicating passive capacity : F. strig-i-li-s, scraper ; N. teg-i-le, roof.Also vig-il, watchman ; ag-i-li-s, readily moved ; doc-ili-s, teachable.Secondary in hum-i-li-s, low, and in the terminations -tili-s,-sili-s.6. -olOy -ola (after e, i, v), -ulo, -ula (N. olu-s, ulu-s, etc.), formdiminutives :alve-olu-s, little belly ; fili-olu-s, little son ; riv-ulu-s, brooklet; rgg-ulu-s, chief ; voc-ula, voice ; gran-ulu-m, grain ; alb-ulu-s, whitish;parv-olu-s, small.7. -ello, -ella (X. ellu-s, etc.), forms diminutives after 1 and byassimilation after n, r :pop-ellu-s, tribelet; tab-el-la, tablet; pu-el-la, girl;bel-lu-s (bonus), good ; misel-lus (miser), wretched. Doubly diminutiveare catel-lu-s, puppy ; cistel-la, basket ; capitel-lu-m, head.8. -illo, -ilia (N. illu-s, etc.), forms diminutives, and is formed likeello, but usually after a precedingi :pulv-illu-s, small cushion ; pistrilla,small mill; sig-illu-m, small image ; bov-illu-s, bovine. Also codicilll,billets ; paux-illu-s, slight; pus-illu-s, tiny.9. -otto, is found in cor-ol-la, wreath ; 81-la, jar (aula).10. -ullo f -ulla, occurs in ul-lu-s, any. Sul-la (= Sur-u-la), Catullu-s(Caton-lus), homullus (= homon-lu-s).11. (-co-lo), -cu-lo (N. culu-s, etc.), forms diminutives, especiallyafter consonantal and e, i,u stems : M. fl6s-culu-s, floweret ; homun-culu-s,manikin (irregular) ; avu-n-culu-s, uncle (mother's brother, irregular) ;F. spg-cula, little hope; auri-cula, ear; arbus-cula, little tree (irregular) ;domu-n-cula, little house (irregular) N. cor-culu-m, (dear) heart ; munus-;culu-m, little gift. Adjectives are dulci-culu-s, sweetish, and especiallydiminutives from comparative stems, melius-culu-s.12. -cello (-cillo) (N. cellu-s, etc.) stands to culo as ello to ulo: M.peni-cillu-s, -m, painter's brush ; es-cillu-m, little mouth ; molli-cellu-s,eoftish.
134 FORMATION OF WORDS.13. -uleo (N. uleu-s) forms substantives that were originally adjectival:acQleu-s, sting.14. -dlif-dri (N. ali-s, ari-s, etc.), form secondary adjectives, someof which are substantivised in the neuter, and a few substantives : v6nalis,venal; mort-ali-s, mortal; singul-ari-s, unique; vulg-ari-s, common;can-ali-s, canal; animal, living being; calc-ar, spur.15. -ela (-ella) forms primary and secondary substantives, most ofwhich indicate action: loqu-ela (loqu-ella), talking; cand-6la, candle;cust5d-ela, watching.16. -eli (N. gli-s, etc.) forms secondary substantives and adjectives:cardu-eli-s, linnet; crud-Sli-s, cruel.REMARK. A further development of -6li is -6lio, -elia : Aur-eli-us,contum-gli-a, contumely.17. -Hi (N. fli-s, lie) forms secondary substantives and adjectives:M. aed-ili-s, cedile; N. cub-lie, couch; sed-lle, seat; clv-ili-s, civic; erl-li-s,master's.18. -mo, -ma (N. mu-s, etc.),forms primary substantives and primaryand secondary adjectives. The feminine substantives expressusually the result of an action: M. an-i-mu-s, spirit; cal-mu-s, cal-a-mu-s,stalk; F. fa-ma, fame; flam-ma, flame; N. ar-ma, arms; po-mum, fruit.Adjectives, primary: al-mu-s, fostering; fir-mu-s, strong. Secondary:op-I-mu-s, fat ; patr-I-mu-s, matr-I-mu-s, with father, mother, living.19. -men, (N. men, G. min-is) forms primary, neuter substantives,mostly indicating activity or results of activity ag-men, train; :flu-men,river ; but M. fla-men, priest.20. -men-to (N. mentu-m) forms substantives (mostly primary)indicating instrument : al-i-mentu-m, nourishment ; tor-mentu-m, torture.NOTES. 1. -men and -mentum are often formed from the same radical. In thatcase mentu-m is the more common :teg-u-men, teg-u-mentu-m, covering.2. Rare and archaic are feminines in -menta : armenta = armentu-m.3. -menti occurs in s6menti-s (f ), seed = sSmen (n.).21. -met (N. mes, G. mit-is) forms a few masculine substantives :tra-mes, path ; fo-mes, fuel ; ll-mes, cross-path.22. -mino, -mina, -mno, -mna (N. minu-s, etc.), form substantives: M. ter-minu-s, boundary ; P. al-u-mna, foster-daughter; f8-mina, woman ; N. da-mnu-m, loss.23. -mon (N. m6, G. m5n-is) forms primary and secondary masculinesubstantives :pul-mO, lung ; ser-mo, discourse ; te-m5,^oZe (of a chariot).24. -mdn-io, -mdn-ia (N. monia, mOniu-m), forms primary and
FORMATION OF WORDS. 135secondary substantives. Primary F. : al-i-monia, nourishment ; quer-imBnia,complaint ; N. al-i-moniu-m, nourishment. :Secondary P. ammonia,tartness ; N. matr-i-moniu-m, marriage.25. -mor forms primary masculine substantives : cre-mor, broth ;ru-mor, rumour.26. -mic (N. mex, G. mic-is) forms a few substantives :cl-mex, bug ;pu-mex, pumice.27. a. -no, -na (N. nu-s, etc.), forms primary and secondary adjectives; the primary are participial in meaning ; the secondary indicatematerial or relation, and occasionally locality ; when added to localcomparatives and adverbs, distributive numerals are also formed withthis suffix. Primary : dig-nu-s, worthy; plS-nu-s, full. Secondary :diur-nu-s, daily ; frater-nu-s, brotherly ; acer-nu-s, maple ; ex-ter-nu-8,outer ; bi-nl, two each.NOTE. Adjectives denoting material have also -neo (= n'-eo), as ae-neu-s,brazen ; Ilig-neu-s, quer-neu-s.b. -no, -na (N. nu-s, etc.),forms primary and a few secondary substantives.Primary: M. fur-nu-s, oven; pug-nu-s, fist; F. cS-na, meal ;la-na, wool. N. do-nu-m, gift ; r6g-nu-m, kingdom. Secondary: M.tribu-nu-s, tribune ; F. fortu-na, fortune ; albur-nu-m, sap-wood.NOTE.This suffix is extended iu pecu-nia, money.28. -bundo-, -cundo (X. bundu-s, etc., cundu-s, etc.), form adjectivesof activity : cunct-a-bundu-s, delaying; fa-cundu-s, eloquent.29. -ni (N. ni-s) forms primary substantives and adjectives:am-ni-s,stream; pS-ni-s, tail; pa-ni-s. bread ; im-ma-ni-s, wild ; sgg-ni-s, lazy.30. -iw-O, -ina (N. inu-s, etc.), forms primary and secondary substantivesand adjectives. Primary: M. dom-inu-s, lord ; F. pag-ina,page ; lic-inu-s, curled upwards. Secondary : M. ped-ic-inu-s, foot ;F. fisc-ina, basket ; N. suc-inu-m, amber ; faec-inu-s, making dregs.NOTE.The suffix is extended in the proper name Lic-iniu-S.31. -ano, -ana (N. anu-s, etc.), forms secondary adjectives, someof which are substantivised. They indicate origin or appurtenance ;decum-anu-s, belonging to the tenth ; hum-anu-s, human ; alt-anu-s, seawind.Primary in Volc-anu-s, Di-ana.32. -dn-eo (N. aneu-s, etc.) forms primary and secondary adjectives.Primary : consent-aneu-s, harmonious. Secondary:subit-aneu-s,sudden. This suffix becomes anio (= an'io) in proper names :Afr-aniu-s,Fund-aniu-s.33. -eno, -ena (N. enu-s, etc.), forms secondary substantives and
136 FORMATION OF WORDS.adjectives : M. Vlbidi-Snu-s ;F. cat-Sna, chain ; hab-Sna, rein ; N.ven-enu-m, poison ; eg-gnu-s, needy ; ali-6nu-s, strange..NOTE.This is extended to Sn-on in toll-8n5, (well) sweep.34. -ino, -Ina (X. inu-s, etc.), forms primary and secondary substantivesand adjectives. Primary: M. cat-inu-s, -m, dish ; F. rap-ina,rapine; ru-ina, ruin; nec-op-inu-s, unexpected. Secondary: M. pulv-Inu-s, cushion; sal-mu-m, salt-cellar, and many feminines, especiallythose denoting shops and factories; rgg-Ina, queen ; cul-ina, kitchen;offic-Ina, workshop ; agn-Inu-s, belonging to a lamb ; div-inu-s, divine.NOTE.An extension of this suffix is found in rlc-lniu-m, veil.35. -en (X. -en, G. -in-is) forms a few substantives : M. pect-en, comb ;N. glut-en, glue.36. -on (X. 5, G. in-is) forms a few substantives : M. card-o, hinge ;marg-o, rim ; ord-6, rota ; F. a-sperg-6, sprinkling ; virg-5, maid ; car-5,flesh.NOTES. 1.Noteworthy is hom-0, hom-in-is, man,2. This suffix occurs very commonly in compounds forming feminine abstracts :-eddn (N. Sd5), dulc-edo, sweetness ; -iddn (N. Id5), cup-Ido, desire ; form-Id5,/ear; -udon (N. udo\ test-udo, tortoise ;-tn don (N. tud5), aegri-tud5,sickness ; -agon (N. ago), im-ago, image ; -ugon (N. ugo), aer-ugo, rust ;-Igon (N. Igo), cal-lgo, thick darkness ; or-Ig6, origin, etc.37. -on (N. 5, G. onis) forms primary and secondary substantives.The primary are nouns of agency : combib-5, fellow-drinker ; prae-c-o,herald ; tl-r5, recruit. The secondary indicate often the possession ofsome bodily or mental peculiarities; ale-o, dice-player; centuri-0,centurion.38. -ion (X. i8) forms a few masculine and many feminine primaryand secondary substantives. Primary : M. p&g-i5, dagger ; F. opln-io,opinion ; reg-i5, region. Secondary : M. pell-i5, furrier ; vespertll-i6,bat; F. com-mun-i5, communion.NOTE. Especially frequent are feminine abstracts in t-i5 (s-i5) : amb-i-ti6, ambition; op-pugna-tiQ, siege. Noteworthy are the secondary diminutives, homunc-i5,senec-io.39. -otiOf -onct (X. 6nu-s, ona), forms few primary and many secondarysubstantives the masculines;indicate agents, especially personemployed M. : col-5nu-s, settler ; F. matr-ona, matron; Bell-5na.40. -onio, -onia (X. 6niu-s, etc.), forms substantives and adjectives: M. Fav-6niu-s, zephyr; Pomp-5niu-s, etc.; caup-oniu-s, belongingto a host. Xeuters indicate the trade or shop : full-Sniu-m, fuller*s-shop.41. -ro, -ra (X. (e)r, -ra, ru-m), forms primary substantives and adjectives: M. ag-e-r, field ; cap-e-r, goat ; mu-ru-s, ivall ; F. lau-m-s, laurel ;
FORMATION OF WORDS. 137ser-ra, saw ; N. flag-ru-m, whip ; lab-ru-m, lip ; cla-ru-s, bright ; pfi-rus,clean.Often a short vowel precedes: M. num-e-ru-s, number ; F. cam-era,vault ; N. iug-eru-m, measure of land. So hil-aru-s, joyous ; Ub-er,free ; cam-uru-s, vaulted ; sat-ur, full.NOTES. 1. Extensions are Mer-curiu-s, tug-uriu-m, hut.2. In a number of primary substantives and adjectives simple r is preceded by ashort vowel : M. late-r,tile ; ans-er, goose ; F. mul-i-er, woman ; N. ac-er, maple;v6r (= ves-er), spring ; cic-ur, tame.42. -ri (N. -(e)-r, -ris, G. ris) forms substantives and adjectives: M.imb-e-r, rain-storm ; ac-e-r, sharp ; funeb-ri-s, funeral ; perhapsceleb-er, thronged.43. -aro forms adjectives, as :av-aru-s, greedy ; am-aru-s, bitter.44. -arty -ali (N. ari-s, ali-s, etc.), forms secondary substantives andadjectives -ari when the stem has ; 1, -ali when it has an r :pugill-arS-s,tablets ; prlmipil-ari-s, one who has been primipilus ; some neuters in ar(from -are) :calc-ar, spur; ex-em-p-1-ar, pattern; pulvm-ar, (sacred) couch;auxili-ari-s, auxiliary ; mllit-ari-s, military ; c5nsul-ari-s, consular.45. -aria, -aria (N. ariu-s, etc.), forms substantives and adjectives.There are sometimes collateral forms in -Sri-s. The substantives,when masculine, indicate artisans; when feminine, business or profession; when neuter, the place where the work is carried on. M.argent-ariu-s, money-changer ; ferr-ariu-s, iron-ivorker ; F. argent-aria,silver mine, bank or banking ; N. api-ariu-m, beehive ; pom-ariu-m, appleorchard.46. -ero (N. Sru-s, etc.) forms sev-6rus, earnest, and the substantivegal-Sru-s, -m, bonnet.47. -ari forms the substantive sec-uri-s, axe, and by extension p6nuria,ivant.48. The letter r appears often in combination with other suffixes, as :-er-co in lup-ercu-s, Pan ; nov-erca, step-mother ; -er-to in lac-ertu-s, arm ;lac-ertu-s, a lizard ; -er-bo in ac-erbu-s, sour ; sup-erbu-s, proud ; -er-vo inac-ervo-s, heap; cat-erva, crowd; -er-na in cav-erna, hollow; lu-cerna,lamp ; -ter-na in lan-ter-na, lantern ; -ur-no in alb-urnu-s, white fish ;lab-urnu-m, laburnum.190. FORMATION OF VERBS.1. Primitives are confined to the Third Conjugation, to some formsof the Irregular verbs, and to some Inchoatives. The various stemformationsare shown in 133.2. Derivatives comprise the verbs of the First, Second, and Fourth
138 FORMATION OF WORDS.Conjugations, and some verbs of the Third Conjugation.They are all(except the Inchoatives and the Meditatives) formed with the suffix io,ie (yo, ye), which is added either to simple verbal stems, or to noun(16) stems already existing or presupposed. The i in io, ie, contractswith the preceding vowels a, 6, i, u, leaving the ordinary forms of theregular conjugations. Certain categories of these verbs have obtainedspecial names according to their various meanings :The Causatives, formed by a change in the stem-vowel.The Desideratives, formed by the addition of -io to nomina agentisin -tor ;afterwards a desiderative force was associated with the combination-tor-io (-tar-io), and it was applied indiscriminately.The Frequentatives come originally probably from participial stemsin -to ;Latin developed also the suffix -ito ; further, this being addedagain to -to gave rise to -tito (-sito).The Inchoatives, formed by a special suffix, -sco (sko), are treated inconjugation as primitives belonging to the Third Conjugation.The Meditatives have not been explained.NOTE. Theoretically the Verbalia are all DSnoniinadva, but owing to the wideworking of Analogy, it has been impossible in many cases, as in ama-re, monS-re, todiscover an original noun ;while in other cases, as the verbal is formed from a part ofa denominative verb, it is convenient to retain the division.191. A. Verbalia (derived from verb-stems, 190, N.):1. Frequentatives or Intensives, denoting repeatedor intenseAction. These verbs end in -tare (-sare), -itare, -titare (-sitare),and follow the supine stem (perfect passive form).(a) cantare, sing ; compare can5 (cantum) : cursare, run to and fro ;compare curro (curstun) : dictare, dictate ; compare dic5 (dictum) : dormltare,be sleepy ; compare dormio (dormltum) : habitare, keep, dwell ;compare habeB (habitnm) : pollicitarl, promise freely ; compare polliceor(pollicitus) : pulsar e, beat ; compare pello (pulsum).(b) agit&re (ago), noscitare (nosco), sclscitare (scIscO), visitare (vls5),vocitare (voco), volitate (vo!5).(c)cantitare (cantare), dictitare (dictare), cursitare (cursare).NOTES. 1. The simple verb presupposed by the frequentative or intensive is oftenout of use, as in the case of :gus-tare, taste ; hor-tarf ,exhort. The frequentative orintensive in -tare is often out of use :actitare, repeatedly or zealously agitate (noSctare), from ago, actum: iSctitSre, read carefully (no Igctare), from lego,lectum.2. The verbs of the Fourth Conjugation form no frequentatives except dormi5,sleep, dormito ; muniS, fortify, munfto (rare) ;saliS, leap, saltO ; aperto, laybare, and opertS, cover, and compounds of ventS (venio, come).2. Inchoatives indicate entrance uponformation see 133, V.an action. For their3. Desideratives denote Desire or Tendency. They are formed
FORMATION OF WORDS. 139by means of the suffix -turio (-surio): gsurire (for ed-t), to be sharp-setfor eating, hungry ; 6m-p-turlre, to be all agog for buying.4. Causatives signify the Effecting of the Condition indicated bytheir original verb. They are found mainly in the Second Conjugation,and show usually a change in the stem-vowel.Change: cadere, fall, and caedere, fell; liqugre, melt (trans.), andllquere, melt (intr.) ;from root men- (as in me-men-to) comes monere,remind ; necare, kill, and nocere, be death to ; placere, please, andplacare, cause to be pleased, appease ; sedSre, sit, and sedare, settle.No change ; fugere, flee, and fugare, put to flight ; iacere, throw, andiacere, (lie)thrown; pendere (hang) weigh, and pendere, hang (intr.).5. Meditatives : (verbs that look forward to an action). Theseend in -essere :arcessere, to summon ; capessere, to catch at ; facessere,to do eagerly ; incessere, to enter ; lacessere, to irritate (136, 3, V).192. B. Denominatives (derived from noun-stems):1. These are most commonly found in the First Conjugation, eventhough the stem-vowel of the noun is i or u.(a) acerva-re, heap up (from acervo-s); aestua-re, seethe (aestu-s) ;corona-re, wreathe (corOna) ; leva-re, lighten (lev-i-s) ; macula-re, besmirch(macula) ; nomina-re, name (nomen, nomin-is) ; onera-re, load(onus, oner-is).The Deponents signify Condition, Employment: aneilla-rl, be maid(ancilla) ; aqua-ri, be a drawer of water (aqua) ; fura-rl, thieve (fOr) ;laeta-rl, be glad (laetu-s).(b) albS-re, be white (albu-s) ; flor6-re, be in bloom (fl5s, fl5ris) ; fronde-re,be in leaf (fr5ns. frondi-s) ; luce-re, be light (lux, luc-is).(c) argue-re (be bright, sharp), prove ; laede-re, hurt ; metue-re, be infear (metu-s).(d) custodl-re, guard (custSs, custod-is) ; fini-re, end (flni-s) ;leni-resoften (ISni-s) ; vestl-re, clothe (vesti-s).3. Noteworthy are the Diminutives formed bythe suffix -illare :st-illare, drop (st-illa) ; scint-illare, sparkle (scint-illa) ; osc-illare, to swing(5sc-illum). Similar in function but of different formation are pullulare,sprout (pul-lus) ; fodic-are, punch (fodere, dig) albicare, whiten(albu-s).NOTES. 1. The Denominatives of the First, Third, and Fourth Conjugations areregularly transitive, those of the Second Conjugation are regularly intransitive.2. These verbs are often found only in combination with prepositions:ab-undare,run over, abound (from unda, wave) ;ac-cusare, accuse (from causa, case) ;ex-aggerare,pile up (from agger) ; ex-stirpare, root out (stirp-s) ; il-luminare, illumine.(from lOmen, lumin-is).
I4OFORMATION OF WORDS.B. Compound Words.I. FORMATION OF COMPOUND WORDS.193. i.By composition words are so put together that anew word is made with a signification of its own. Thesecond word is regularly the fundamental word, the firstthe modifier.NOTE. Properly speaking, composition occurs only in the case of substantives, i. e.->where two or more simple stems come together. In verbs, there is either juxtaposition,where the parts still retain their original force, or the combination of a verb with apreposition. Broadly speaking, however, composition applies to all combinations ofwords.2.Composition is either proper or improper.194. Substantive.In Composition Improperthere are either traces of constructionor the first part is still inflected : S-n5rmis = ex nSrma, out ofall rule, ; iSgis-lator, lawgiver ; Senatus-consultum, decree of the Senate.Many of these compounds have gradually become inflectional : delirus(de-lira), crazy from fear ; Sgregius (6-grege), distinguished (fromthe crowd) ; procSnsul (for pro console) trium-vir;(from trium virtun), etc.NOTE. From composition we must distinguish juxtaposition. So a preposition isbrought into juxtaposition with a substantive, or a substantive with a substantive :ad-modum, to a degree, very ; ob-viam, in (he way, meeting ; ususfructtis,fruct; luppiter, Father Jove. Noteworthy are the Copulative compounds ;such arecompound numerals like un-decim, duo-decim, etc., and occasional others :su-ovetaur-Ilia,offerings of swine, sheep, and bulls.195. Composition Proper.i. The first part of the compound may be a particle, as ne-far-iu-s,nefarious ; vS-sanu-s, mad, out of one's sound senses : or a substantive.If it is a substantive(a) The stems in -a, -o, -u regularly weaken these vowels into -ibefore the consonants of the second part, which i may vanish : causidicus,pleader, lawyer (causa) ; signi-fer, standard-bearer (slgnu-m) ;comi-ger, horn-wearer (cornti) ; man-ceps (maim- and cap-), one who takesin hand, contractor. The i-stems retain i or drop it : igni-vomu-s, firevomiting(igni-s) ; nau-fragu-s, shipwrecked (navi-s).(b) Vowel-stems drop their vowel before the vowel of the secondpart : magn-animu-s, great-souled ; un-animu-s, of one mind.(c) Consonant-stems either drop their consonants or add i: homicld-a,manslayer (homin-) ; lapi-cid-a, stone-cutter (lapid-) ; matr-i-cid-a,mother -murderer, matricide.NOTE. The first part is rarely, if ever, a verb. APULEIUS uses the form pQeci-
FORMATION OF WORDS. 14!2. The second part of the composition is a noun : tri-enn-iu-m, space,of three years (annus); miseri-cor-s, tender-hearted (cor).When the second part ends in a vowel, itadapts itself, if an adjective,to changes of gender, as flavi-comus, yellow-haired (coma, hair),but more often this final vowel becomes i and the adjective follows thethird declension :tri-rgmi-s, trireme (rgmu-s, oar) ; ab-normi-s, abnormal(norma, norm).When the second part ends in a consonant, the last term usuallyundergoes no change : bi-dSn-s, two-pronged ; simplex (sim-plec-s), simple,NOTE.From genus (G. generis), is formed dS-gener.II. SIGNIFICATION OF COMPOUNDS.196. Compound substantives and adjectives are divided accordingto their signification into two main classes : Determinative and Possessive.In Determinative compounds one of the terms is subordinate to theother. They fall into two classes Attributive or : Appositional, andDependent.197. i Attributive compounds. The first part is the attribute ofthe second.The first word is, (i) a substantive :ali-pgs, wing-foot(ed) ; (2) an adjective: magn-animus, great-hearted; lati-fundium, large estate; (3) anumeral : bi-enni-um (i. e., spatium), space of two years.2. Dependent compounds. In these the second word is simply limitedby the other, its signification not being altered.(a) The first word is :(i) an adjective: merl-diSs (from medi-die =medi5 dig), mid-day ; (2) an adverb : bene-ficus (well-doing), beneficent ;male-ficus, evil-doing ; (3) a numeral :ter-geminus, triple; (4) a particle:dis-sonus, harsh-sounding ; per-magnus, very large ; in-dlgnus,unworthy ; (5) a verb-stem : horr-i-ficus, horrible (horror-stirring).(b) The first word gives a case relation, such as (i) the Accusative := armi-ger arma gergns, armour-bearer ; agri-cola=.agrum coigns (landtiller),husbandman; (2) the Genitive : s5l-stitium = sSlis static (sunstaying),solstice ; (3) the Locative :alieni-gena (born elsewhere), alien ;(4) the Instrumental : tibi-cen = tibia cangns, flute-player.198. Possessive Compounds are adjectival only, and are so calledbecause they imply the existence of a Subject possessing the qualityindicated.The first term is, (i) a substantive :angui-manus, (having a) snakehand(elephant): (2) an adjective:flavi-comus, (having) yellow hair ;(3) a numeral :bi-fr5ns, (having) two front(s) ; (4) a particle : dis-cors,discordant ;. in-ers, inactive.
142 FORMATION OF WORDS.NOTE. Notice that these divisions run into each other ; thus magn-animus lapossessive, attributive, and dependent.199. Verb.In Composition Imp roper theverb is joined to a verb, substantive,or adverb. In Composition Proper the verb is combinedwith a preposition.200. i- Compo sition Improper.(a) Verb urith verb : This only takes place when the second part ofthe compound is facio or fJ8 (173, N. 2). The first part of the compoundis regularly an intransitive of the second conjugation : cale-faci5, cale-05, warm, am warmed.(b) Verb with substantive : anim-adverto = animum adverto, takenotice ; manu-mitt5, set free ; usiL-capi5, acquire by use.(c) Verb with adverb : bene-dico, bless ; male-dlc5, curse ; malO, n515(for mage (magis) volo, ne- vo!5), satis-faciS, satisfy.2. Composition Proper.The verb combines with separable or inseparable prepositionsCompare 413, R. 3.(a) With inseparable prepositions: amb-eo, go about ; am-plector, enfold;an-b.815, draw deep breath, pant; dis-currS, run apart; dir-imo,160, i, and 715, E. i ; por-tend5, hold forth, portend; red-do, give back;re-solv8, resolve ; s5-iung5, separate.(b) With separable prepositions: ab-eS, go away ; ad-e5, come up ;ante-currS, run in advance ; com-pono, put together ; d5-curr5, run down,finish a course ; ex-cedo, overstep ; in-cludo, shut in ; ob-dQc5, drawover ; per-agro, wander through ; post-habeo, keep in the background ;prae-dlc5, foretell ; praeter-e6, pass by ; pr5d-e6, go forth ; prae-vide5,foresee ; sub-iciO, put under ; subter-fugiS, flee from under ; super-sum,remain over ; trans-gredior, pass beyond.
SYNTAX.201. SYNTAX treats of the formation and combination ofsentences.A sentence is the expression of a thought (sententia) inwords.Sentences are divided into simple and compound.A simple sentence is one in which the necessary partsoccur but once ;for the compound sentence see 472.The necessary parts of the sentence are the subject and thepredicate.The predicate is that which is said of the subject.The subject is that of which the predicate is said.The moon shines.Luna fulget,Luna is the subject ; fulget, the predicate.REiMARKs. i. The Interjection (16, R. z) and the Vocative case (23,5) stand outside the structure of the sentence, and therefore do notenter as elements into Syntax, except that the Vocative is subject tothe laws of Concord. See R. 3.2. The Vocative differs from the Nominative in form in the seconddeclension only, and even there the Nominative is sometimes usedinstead, especially in poetry and solemn prose.Almae fllius Maiae, H., 0., I. 2, 43 ;son of mild Mala! Audi tu,populus Albanus, L., i. 24, 7 ;hear thou, people of Alba !6 is prefixed to give emphasis to the address:f5rm5se puer, minium nS crSde colon, V., EC. z, 17 ;O shapely boy! trustnotcomplexion all too much.The Vocative is commonly interjected in prose, except in highly emotional pas-3. On the use of the Vocative of an adjective or participle in apposition,attribution, or predication, see 289, 325, R. i.SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE.202. The most simple form of the sentence is the finiteverb : su-m, I am ; doce-s, thou teachest ; scrlbi-t, he writes.
144 SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE.REMARK. Here the form contains in itself all the necessary elements(compare 114), the persons being indicated by the endings.From the expansion and modification of the finite verb arise all thecomplicated forms of the compound sentence.203. SUBJECT. The subject of the Unite verb is always inthe Nominative Case, or so considered.REMARKS. i. The subj. of the Inf. is in the Accusative (343, 2).2. The use of the Nom. in Latin is the same as in English.204. The subject may be a substantive or a pronoun, orsome other word, phrase, or clause used as a substantive :Deus muncluni gubernat, GOD steers the universe. Ego rgggs gicl,[C.] ad Her., iv. 53, 66 ;I drove out kings. Sapiens r6s adversas nontimet, THE SAGE does not fear adversity, VictI in servitutem rediguntur,THE VANQUISHED are reduced to slavery. Contendisse decSrumest, Ov., M., ix. 6 ;TO HAVE STRUGGLED is honourable. Magnumbeneficium [est] naturae quod necesse est morl, SEN., E.M.,ioi, 14;it is a great boon of nature, THAT WE MUST NEEDS DIE.syllabas, (the word) "VIDES" has two syllables.VidSs habet duasNOTES. 1. Masculine and feminine adjectives, and to a less degree participles,are used as substantives, but with the following limitations :(a) Many adjectives in -arius and -icus (the latter mostly Greek), designatingoffice or occupation, and words expressing friendship, kinship, or other relationship,are used often as substantives both in the Sing, and the PI. of the masculine and feminine:aquarius, waterman ; librarius, bookman (-seller, ivriler, etc.) v grammati-CUS, grammarian- , amlcus, friend ; cognatus, kinsman ; socius, partner. Many ofthese have become almost wholly fixed as substantives, as faalous,friend. See 16, N. 1.(b) Adjectives are very often used as substantives in the masc. PI. when they designatea class : pauper5s, the poor ; dlvitSs, the rich. In the oblique cases of the Sing.,this use is also not uncommon ;but in the Xom. the substantive is generally expressed :vir bonus, a good man ; mulier peregrlna, a foreign woman. So regularly, if usedwith a proper name :Plato, doctissimus homo, the learned Plato. Exceptions are rareand scattering in prose ego et suavissimus CicerS valBmus, C., Fam., xrv. : 5, 1.(c) On the use of participles aa substantives see 437, N.(d) When persons are not meant, a substantive is understood : canl (capilll), ffrayhairs ; calida (aqua), warm water ; dextra (manus), right hand.2. Neuter adjectives and participles are freely employed as substantives in both numbers;in the PI. usually in Nom. and Ace., in the Sing, in all cases, butespecially in conr.ectioawith prepositions:medium, (he midst ; extrSmum, the end ; reliquom, theresidue ; futurum, thefuture ; bonum, good ; bona, blessings, possessions ; malum,evil ; mala, misfortunes. The Plnral is frequently employed when the English idiomprefers the Singular : v6ra, the truth ; bmnia, everything.3. Adjectives of the Second Declension are sometimes used as neuter substantives ir,the Gen., after words of quantity or pronouns : aliquid bonl, something good ; nihilmall, nothing bad. Adjectives of the Third Declension are thus employed only incombination with those of the Second, and even then very rarely (369, B. i).Usually the adjective of the Third Declension draws the adjective of the Second
SUBJECT PREDICATE COPULA. 145Into its own construction :Quid habet ista re's aut laetabile aut gl5riQsum?C., Tusc., i. 21, 49 ;what is there to be glad of or to brag about in that?4. Instead of the neuter adjective, the word rSs, thing, is frequently used, especiallyin forms which are identical for different genders, and consequently ambiguous ;sobonarum rerura, of blessings, rather than bon5rum (masc. and neut.).5. In Latin the PI. of abstract substantives occurs more frequently than in English ;adventus imperatorum, the arrival(s) of the generals (because there were severalgenerals, or because they arrived at different times). Pluralising abstract substantivesoften makes them concrete :fortitudin6s, gallant actions ; formldine"s, bugbears ;irae, quarrels.6. Other PI. expressions to be noted are: nivSs, snow(-Jlakes) ; grandings, hail(-stones) ; pluviae, (streams of) rain ; ligna, (logs of) wood ; earn 6s, pieces of meat ;aera, articles of bronze ; also symmetrical parts of the human body : cervicSs, neck ;pectora, breast.The PI. is freely used in poetry and in later prose : Otia si tollas, perifire Cupldinisarcus, Ov., Hem. Am., 139 ; if you do away with holidays, Cupid's bmv (andarrows) are ruined.7. The rhetorical Boman often uses the First Person PI. for the First Person Singular.The usage originates in modesty, but mock modesty is the worst form of pomposity.It is never very common, and is not found before CICERO : Librum ad tS d8 senectutemisimus, C., Cat. M., i, 3 ;we (I) haw sent you a treatise on old age.In poetry there is often an element of shyness ; Sitque memor nostri necne, refertemibl, Ov., Tr., iv. 3, 10 ; bring me back (word) whether she thinks of us (meamong others) or no.8. (a) The Sing., in a collective sense, is also used for the PI., but more rarely: faba,beans ; porous, pig (meat) ; galllna,/0z0/ (as articles of food) ;vestis, clothing.(b) The use of the Sing, in designations of nationalities and divisions of troops isintroduced by LIVY :Romanus, the Roman forces ; Poenus, the Carthaginians ;hostis, the enemy ; miles, the soldiery ; pedes, (he infantry ; eques, the cavalry.205. PKEDICATE and COPULA. When the predicate is notin the form of a verb, but in the form of an adjective orsubstantive, or equivalent, the so-called copula is generallyemployed, in order to couple the adjective or substantivewith the subject.The chief copula is the verb snm, I am.Fortima caeca est, C., Lael., 15, 54 ; fortune is blind. TTsus magisterest optimus, C., Rab. Post., 4, 9 ; practice is the best teacher.NOTE.Strictly speaking, the copula is itself a predicate, as is shown by the translationwhen it stands alone or with an adverb :est Deus, there is a God, God exists ;r6ct5 semper erunt rSs, things will always be (go on) ^veU ;sic vita hominum est,C., Rose. Am., 30, 84 ;such is human " life ; So runs the world away."206. Other copulative verbs are :videri, to seem; nasci,to be lorn; fieri, to become; evadere, to turn out; creari, tobe created; deligi, to be chosen; putari, to be thought; haberl,to be held; did, to be said; appellari, to be called; nominari,to be named. Hence the rule :Verbs of seeming, becoming, with the passive of verbs of10
146 SUBJECT OMITTED. IMPERSONAL VERBS.making, choosing, showing,thinking, and calling,take twoNominatives, one of the subject, one of the predicate:N6m8 nascitur dives, SEN., E.M., 20, 13; no one is born rich. Ariatidesiustus adpellatur, Aristides is called just.[Servius] rex est declaratus,L., i. 46, 1 Servius was declared; king. [Thucydidgs] niimquam estnumeratus orator, C., 0., 9, 31 ; Thucydides lias never been accounted anorator.REMARKS. i. With esse, serve as; vidgrl, seem; kaberi, be held; dQd,be deemed, and rarely with other verbs, instead of the Predicate Nom.,a phrase may be employed, as : pro" with Abl., (in) Ioc5, in numer5, withGen., etc.Audacia'pro miir5 habetur, S., C., 58, 17 ;boldness is counted as a bulwark.In fUil Ioc5, C., Red, in Sen., 14, 35 ;as a son.2. The previous condition isgiven by ex or dS and the Abl. (396, N. 2).Ex Cratore arator factus, C. ,Ph. ,in. 9, 22 ;a pleader turned plowman.3. All copulative verbs retain the Nom. with the Inf. after auxiliaryverbs (423).Beatus esse sine virtute nenuJ potest, C., N.D., i. 18, 48 ;no one can behappy without virtue.4. On the Double Ace. after Active Verbs, see 340.NOTES. 1. The verbs mentioned, with some others, are found in good prose. Othersare either poetical or unclassical, thus :perhibSrl, to be held, is early ;apparfire, toappear, is poetic and post-classical for vidSri ;reddi is not used for fieri ; sisti,to beset down, is Plautine ;manSre, to remain, is late (permanSre once in CICERO).2. Noteworthy is the use of audlre, like the Greek axoueix, to be catted, which isconfined to HORACE ;rSxque paterque audlsti, Ep., i. 7, 38 ; S., 11. 6, 20, just as" hear" in this sense is said to be confined to MILTON.207. SUBJECT OMITTED. The personal pronounis notexpressed in classical prose, unless it is emphatic, as, forexample, in contrasts :Amamus parentSs, We love (our) parents. Ego rggSs 6i6ci, vos tyrann5sintroducitis, [C.] ad Her., iv. 53, 66 I;drove out kings, ye are bringingin tyrants.NOTE. The insertion of the pronoun without emphasis is very common in thecomic poets, and seems to have been a colloquialism. Also common in CATULLUS, SAL-LUST (as an archaism), and PETRONIUS.208. IMPERSONAL VERBS. Impersonal Verbs are verbs inwhich the agent is regularly implied in the action, the subjectin the predicate, so that the person is not expressed.Chief of these are :i. Verbs pertaining to the state of the weather-: tonat, it thunders,the thunder thunders, or rather, the Thunderer thunders; fulget, fulgu-
COPULA OMITTED. 147rat (less common), fulminat (poet.), it lightens; pluit (poet.), it rains;ningit, it snows, etc.Nocte pluit tola, V., (POET. LAT. MIN., iv. 155, B.) ; all night it (he,Jupiter) rains.NOTE. The divine agent is sometimes expressed ; so, naturally, in religious or popularlanguage : love tonante, fulgurante, c., Div., n. 18, 43 ; love fulgente, C.,N. D., n. 25, 65.2. The passive of intransitive verbs is often used impersonally ; soregularly of verbs which in the active are construed with the Dat. (217):vlvitur, people live ; curritur, there is a running ; pugnatur, there is abattle ; mihi invide"tur, / am envied. The subject is contained in the verbitself :sic vivitur = sic vita vlvitur, such is life ; pugnatur = pugna pugnatur,a battle is (being) fought. In the same way explain taedet, it wearies ;miseret, it moves to pity ; piget, it disgusts ; pudet, it puts to shame.NOTES. 1. With all other so-called Impersonal Verbs an Inf. (422, 535) or an equivalent(523) is conceived as a subject: N5n labet mihi deplorare vitam ,C., Cat.M., 23, 84. Sed accidit perincommode quod eum nusquam vidistl, C., Aft.,1. 17, 2.2. Other uses coincide with the English. So the Third Person PL of verbs ofSaying, Thinking, and Calling. Also the ideal Second Person Singular (258). To benoticed is the occasional use of inquit, quoth he, of an imaginary person, but not byCAESAR, SALLUST, or TACITUS : N5n concede, inquit, Epicure, C., Ac., n. 32, 101 ;I do not yield the point, quoth he (one), to Epicurus.209. COPULA OMITTED. Est or sunt is often omitted insaws and proverbs, in short statements and questions, inrapid changes, in conditional clauses, and in tenses compoundedwith participles :Summum ius summa iniuria, C., Off., i. 10, 33 ; the height of right (is)the height of wrong. Nemo malus fsllx, Juv., iv. 8 ;no bad man (is)happy. Quid dulcius quam habere quicum omnia audeas loqul T C., Lad.,7, 22 ;what sweeter than to have some one with whom you can ventureto talk about everything ? Sed haec vetera ;illud v6ro recgns, C., Ph., n.II, 25. Aliquamdiu certatum, S., lug., 74, 3. Cur hostis Spartacus, si tuclvis* C., Parad.,4, 30.So also esse, with participles and the like :Caesar statuit exspectandam classem, CAES. ,B. &., in. 14, 1 : Caesarresolved that the fleet must be waited for.NOTES. 1. The omission of esse is not common with the Nom. and Infinitive.2. Popular speech omits freely ; so, mlrum nl, mlrum quin, factum, in Latinare due mlrumcomedy ;likewise potis and potefor forms of posse. To a like originquantum, nimium quantum, etc., found at all periods.3. The ellipsis of other forms of the copula is unusual. Thus CICERO occasionallyomits sit in the Indirect Question, and TACITUS other forms of the Subjv. besides.Fuisse is omitted by LIVT, and not unfrequently by TACITUS.4. The Ellipsis of esse was sometimes due to the desire of avoiding the heaping up
148 AGREEMENT OF PREDICATE WITH SUBJECT.of Infinitives.Thus sentences like non dubitS t6 esse sapientem dlcere (to declareyou to be wise) were regularly cut down to non dubito t sapientem dicere (to declareyou wise).5. The ellipsis of other verbs, such as facere, ire, venire, dicere, etc., is characteristicof popular speech ; it is therefore not uncommon in CICERO'S letters (ad Att.\in PLINY'S letters, and in works involving dialogue, such as CICERO'S philosophicalwritings. The historians avoid it, and it never occurs in CAESAK and VELLEIUS.CONCORD.210. THE THREE CONCORDS. There are three greatconcords in Latin :i. The agreement of the predicate with the subject (211).2. The. agreement of attributive or appositive with the substantive(285, 321).3. The agreement of the relative with antecedent (614).211. Agreement of the Predicate with the Subject.in number andThe verbal predicate agrees with its subject jperson.( in number,The adjective predicate agrees with its subject 4 gender, and( case.The substantive predicate agrees with its subject in case.Substantlva mobiiia (21, 2) are treated as adjectives, and follow thenumber and gender of the subject.Ego rgges elSci, vSs tyrannos introducitft, [C.] ad Her., iv. 53, 66 (207).Verae amicitiae sempiternae sunt, C., Lad., 9, 32 ; true friendships areabiding. DCs est decem talenta, TER. , And., 950 the; dowry is ten talents.Usus magister est optimus, C. ,Bab. Post. , 4, 9 (205). Arx est monosyllabum,"Arx" is a monosyllable. Compare Ignis c5nfector est et consumptoromnium, C M N.D., n. 15, 41 ; fire is the doer-up (destroyer) and eater-up(consumer) of everything, with confectrix rgrum omnium vetustas, C. , Frag.REMARKS. i. The violation of the rules of agreement is due chieflyto one of two causes; either the natural relation is preferred to theartificial (c5nstructi5 ad sSnsum, per synesin, according to the sense), orthe nearer is preferred to the more remote. Hence the followingEXCEPTIONS. (a) Substantives of multitude often take the predicatein the Plural: paxs,part ; vis (power), quantity ; multitude, crowd ;organized bodies more rarely. Also, but not often, such words asquisque, uterque, nem6, etc.Pars malor receperant sSsS, L., xxxiv. 47, 6 ;the greater part had retired.Omnis multitude abeunt, L., xxiv. 3, 15 ;all the crowd depart.
AGEEEMENT OF PREDICATE WITH SUBJECT. 149Magna vis eminus missa telorum multa nostrls vulnera infer Sbant, CAES.,B.C., ii. 6, 5. Uterque eorum ex castrls exercitum gducunt, CAES., B.C.,in. 30, 3.NOTE. This usage is very common in comedy, but extremely rare in model prose.LIVY shows a greater variety and a larger number of substantives than any otherauthor, and poets and late prose writers are free. Yet HORACE uses regularly the Sing,with a collective, while VERGIL varies, often employing first a Sing, and then a PI. verbwith the 'same substantive (as A., n. 64). TACITUS often uses quisque with a Plural.(b)The adjective predicate often follows the natural gender of thesubject ; so especially with milia. This usage belongs pre-eminentlyto the historians.Capita coniurationis virgis caesl (sunt), L., x. i, 3 ;the heads of theconspiracy were flogged. Samnitium caesi tria milia, Cf. L., x. 34, 3 ;of the Sammies (there) were slain three thousand.The passive verb often agrees in gender with the predicate Non:omnis error stultitia dicenda est, G.,Div., n. 43, 90 ;not every false stepis to be called folly.(c)The copula often agrees with the number of the predicate ("thewages of sin is death ") :Amantium Irae (204, N. 5)amoris integratiS est, TER., And., 555; lovers'quarrels are love's renewal.2. A superlative adjective denned by a Partitive Gen. follows thegender of the subj. when it precedes:Indus, qul est omnium fluminum maximus, C., N.D., n. 52, 130 ;theIndus, which is the greatest of all rivers.Otherwise it follows the Genitive ;but this usage is post-classic :Velocissimum omnium animalium est delphlnus, PLIN., N.H., ix. 8, 20 ;the dolphin is the swiftest of all animals.3. The Voc. is sometimes used by the poets in the predicate, eitherby anticipation or by assimilation.(See 325, R. i.)4. The neuter adjective is often used as the substantive predicate ofa masculine or feminine subject:Triste lupus stabulls, V., EC., 3, 80 the ; wolf is a baleful thing to thefolds. Varium et mutaMle semper fSmina, V., A.,iv. 569 ;"a thing ofmoods and fancies" is woman ever.This construction is poetical ; in CICERO it is used with a few wordsonly ;such as extrgmum, commune :Omnium rgrum (204, N. 4) mors [est] extrSmum, Cf. C., Fam:, vi. 21, 1;death is the end of all things.5. The demonstrative pronoun is commonly attracted into the genderof the predicate:Negat Epicurus ;hoc enim vostrum lumen est, C., Fin., IT. 22, 70 ; Epicurussays No ; for he is your great light. Ea n6n media sed nulla via*est, L., xxxii., 21, 33 ;that is not a middle course, but no course at all.
I5OFORMS OF THE VERBAL PREDICATE.But innegative sentences, and when the pronoun is the predicate,there is no change. So in definitions :Quid aut quale [est] Deus 1 Cf. C., N.D., \. 22, 60 ;what or what mannerof thing is God ? Nee sopor illud erat, V., A., in. 173. Quod ita eritgestum, id lex erit, C., Ph., 1. 10, 26.Exceptions are but apparent. C., O.,n. 38, 157.6. The adjective predicate sometimes agrees with a substantive inapposition to the subject.dvitas, and the like :So especially when the appositive is oppidum,Corioll oppidum captum [est], L.,n. 33, 9; Corioli-town was taken.Corinthum, tstlus Graeciae lumen, exstinctum esse voluerunt, C.,lmp., 5,11 ; they would have Corinth, the eye of all Greece, put out.NOTES. 1. Peculiar is the occasional use of the Fut. participle in -urum forfeminines in early Latin : Altero (gladiS) tS occisurum ait (Casina\ alterovflicum. PL., Cos., 693. So True., 400.2.Age is often used in early Latin as If it were an adverb, with the Plural ;occasionallyalso cave :Age modo fabricaminl. PL., Cos., 488.Akin is the use of a Voc. Sing, with a PI. verb, which is occasionally found in classicalprose also : Turn Scaevola ; quid est, Cotta ? inquit, quid tacetis 1 c., 0.,1-35,160.The use of aliquis, some one of you, in this way is early :Aperlte aliquis actutumostium, TER., Ad., 634.3. Other less usual constructions ad sgnsum are : the use of a neuter demonstrativewhere a substantive of a different gender is expected, and the construction of r5s as ifit were neuter (both found also in CICEKO) the neuter;Singular Humming up a precedingPlural :In Graecia music! florurunt, discSbantque id (that [accomplishment]') omnes,C., Tusc., i. 2, 4. Servitia repudiabat, ctiius (of which [class]) initiS ad eummagnae cSpiae concurrSbant, S., C'., 56, 5. See also C., Div., 11. 57, 117.Forms of the Verbal Predicate.VOICES OF THE VERB.212. There are two Voices in Latin Active and Passive.REMARK. The Latin Passive corresponds to the Greek Middle, and,like the Greek Middle, may be explained in many of its uses as aReflexive.213. ACTIVE. The Active Voice denotes that the actionproceeds from the subject. Verbs used in the Active Voicefall into two classes, as follows :Verbs are calledTransitive when their action goes over toan object (transeo, / go over} ;Intransitive when their actiondoes not go beyond the subject occidere, to :fell= to(Transitive) ; occidere, to fall (Intransitive).
PASSIVE VOICE. 151REMARK. -Properly speaking, a Transitive Verb in Latin is one thatforms a personal passive, but the traditional division given above hasits convenience, though it does not rest upon a difference of nature,and a verb may be trans, or intrans. according to its use. So(a) Transitive verbs are often used intransitively, in which case theyserve simply to characterize the agent. This is true especially of verbsof movement ; as declinare, inclinare, movere, mutare, vertere, and thelike, and is found at all periods.(b) On the other hand, many intrans. verbs are often used transitively.This occurs also at all periods, but the Ace. is usually the innerobject (332).(c) On the use of the Inf. active, where English uses the passive,see 532, N. 2.214. PASSIVE. The Passive Voice denotes that the subfeetreceives the action of the verb.The instrument isput in the Ablative.Virgls caedetur, C., Verr., in. 28, 69 ;he shall be beaten with rods.[Ignis] lumine proditur su5, Ov., Her., 15, 8 ;the fire is betrayed byits own light.The agentisput in the Ablative with ab (a).Ab amicis prSdimur, C., Cluent., 52, 143 ;we are betrayed by friends.Virgls caesi tribunl ab legato sunt, L., xxix. 18, 13 ;the tribunes werebeaten with rods by the lieutenant.REMARKS. i. Intrans. verbs of passive signification are construed aspassives fame : per ire, C., Inv., n. 57, 172, to perish of hunger. So venire,to be sold ; vapulare (chiefly vulgar), to be beaten, ab aliquo, by some one.Ab reo fustibus [vapulavit], Cf. QUINT., ix. 2, 12; he was whacked withcudgels by the defendant. SalvSbis a meo Cicerone, C., Att., vi. 2, 10 ;/reeting to you from Cicero.2. When the instrument is considered as an agent, or the agent asan instrument, the constructions are reversed :Vinci a Voluptate, C., Off., i. 20, 68 ;to be overcome by Dame Pleasure.Patricils iuvenibus saepserant latera, L. ,m. 37, 6 ; they had flanked himwith a guard of patrician youths.The latter construction is very rare in CICERO, and seems to belongpre-eminently to the historians.Animals, as independent agents, are treated like persons.A cane non magno saepe tenetur aper, Ov., Rem.Am., 422 a boar is;often held fast by a little dog.Animals, as instruments, are treated like things.Compare equ5 vehl, to ride a horse (to be borne by a horse), with inequ5, on horseback.
152 VOICES OF THE VERB.215. The person in whose interest an action is done is putin the Dative. Hence the frequent inference that the personinterested is the agent. See 354.1. With the Perfect passive it is the natural inference,and common in prose.Mih res tota provisa est, C., Verr., iv. 42, 91 ;I have had the wholething provided for. Carmina nulla mihf sunt scrlpta, Ov., Tr., v. 12, 35;poems I have nor
REFLEXI VE DEPONENT. 1 5 36886, [C.] ad Her., i. 6, 9. (Persuadeo hospitem, PETR., 62, 2, is perhaps an intentionalsolecism.)2. Similar liberties are taken by poets and late prose writers with the passive ofother intrans. verbs, such as concSdere, permittere, praecipere, prSniintiare FS-:tis numquam concessa (= cui concessum est) mov6rl Camarma, V., A., in. 700.218. REFLEXIVE. Reflexive relations, when emphatic,are expressed as in English :Omne animal se ipsum diligit, C., Fin., v. 9, 24, Every living creatureloves itself.But when the reflexive relation is more general, the passive(middle) is employed :lavor, / bathe, I bathe myself.Purgarl [nequlvgrunt], Cf. L., xxiv. 18, 4 ; they could not clear theinselves.Cum in mentem vSnit, p3nor ad scribendum, C., Fam., ix. 15,4 ;when the notion strikes me I set myself to writing.NOTE. Some of these verbs approach the deponents, in that the reflexive meaningof the passive extends also to some active forms ; thus, from vehor, I ride, we get theform vehSns, riding (rare): AdulSscentiam per media's laudSs quasi quadrlglsvehentem, C., Br., 97, 331.219. As the active is often used to express what the subjectsuffers or causes to be done, so the passive in its reflexive(middle) sense is often used to express an action which thesubject suffers or causes to be done to itself :trahor, I letmyselfbe dragged ; tondeor, / have myself shaved.Duos MysSs [Insuisti] in culeum, Cf. C., Q.F., i. 2, 2, 5 ; you sewed twoMysians into a sack (had them sewn). Sine gemitu aduruntur, C., Tusc.,v. 27. 77 ; they let themselves be burned without a moan. Diruit, aedificat,H., Ep., i. i, 100 ;he is pulling down, he is building. Ipse docetquid agam; fas est et ab hoste docSrl, Ov., M., iv. 428 he ; himself teaches(me) what to do ; it is (but) right to let oneself be taught even by anenemy (to take a lesson from a foe).220. DEPONENT. The Deponentis a passive form whichhas lost, in most instances, its passive (or reflexive) significa-translated as a transitive or intransi-tion. It iscommonlytive active :hortor, / am exhorting (trans.) ; morior, / amdying (intrans.).NOTES. 1. A number of intrans. verbs show also a Perfect Part, passive usedactively ; not, however, in classical prose combined with esse to take the place of theregular Perfect. On the use of such participles as substantives, see 167, N. i.Quid causae excogitarl potest, cur te lautum voluerit, cenatuni nolueritoccldere ? C., Dei., 7, 20.2. Many verbs show both active and deponent forms side by side. In this case theactive forme belong more often to early authors. See 163-167.
154 TENSES.221. RECIPROCAL. Reciprocal relations ("one another"}are expressed by inter, among, and the personal pronouns,nos, us ; vos, you ; sfi, themselves. Inter se amant, Tliey loveone another.REMARKS. i. Combinations of alter altenun, alius alium, uterquealterum, and the like, also often give the reciprocal relation : sometimesthere is a redundancy of expression.Placet Stoicis homines hominum causa esse generates, ut ipsl inter s5alii aliis prodesse possent, C., Off., i. 7, 22 ;it is a tenet of the Stoicsthat men are brought into the world for the sake of men, to be a blessingto one another.2. Later writers use invicem or mutuo, inter s6, vicissim ;and earlyLatin shows occasionally uterque utrumque.Quae omnia hue spectant, ut invicem ardentius diligamus, PLIN.,^.,vii. 20, 7 ;all these things look to our loving one another more fervently.Uterque utrlquest cordl, TER., Ph., 800 ;TENSES.either is dear to other.222. The Tenses express the relations of time, embracing :1. The stage of the action (duration in time).2. The period of the action (position in time).The first tells whether the action isgoing on, or finished.The second tells whether the action is past, present, or future.Both these sets of relations are expressed by the tenses ofthe Indicative or Declarative mood less clearly by the Subjunctive.223. There are six tenses in Latin ;1. The Present, denoting continuance in the present.2. The Future, denoting continuance in the future.3. The Imperfect, denoting continuance in the past.4. The Perfect, denoting completion in the present.5. The Future Perfect, denoting completion in the future.6. The Pluperfect, denoting completion in the past.224. An action may further be regarded simply as attained,without reference to its continuance or completion. Continuanceand completion require a point of reference for definition;attainment does not. This gives rise to the aoristic orindefinite stage of the action, which has no especial tense-
TABLE OF TEMPOEAL BELATIONS. 155form. It is expressed by the Present tense for the present ;by the Future and Future Perfect tenses for the future;and by the Perfect tense for the past.Of especial importance are the Indefinite or HistoricalPresent and the Indefinite or Historical Perfect (Aorist),which differ materially in syntax from the Definite or PurePresent and Perfect.225. The Tenses are divided into Principal and Historical.The Principal Tenses have to do with the Present andFuture. The Historical Tenses have to do with the Past.The Present, Pure Perfect, Future, and Future Perfect arePrincipal Tenses.The Historical Present, Imperfect, Pluperfect, and HistoricalPerfect are Historical Tenses.The Historical Tenses are well embodied in the following distich :Talia tentabat, sic et tentaverat ante,Vixque dedit victas utilitate manus. Ov., Tr., i. 3, 87.226. Table of Temporal Relations.INDICATIVE MOOD.ACTIVE.Continuance. Completion. Attainment.PEES. scrlbS, scrips!, scrlbo,I am writing. I have written. I write.FUT. scribam, scrlpserS, scrlbam (scrlpserB),/ shall be writing. I shall have written. I shall write.PAST. scrlbSbam, scrlpseram, scrfpsl,I was writing. I had written. I wrote.PASSIVE.Continuance. Completion. Attainment.PRKS. scrlbitur (epistula), scrlpta est, scrlbitur,The letter is written has been written, is written.FUT.PAST.(writing).is written.scrlbStur, scrlpta erit, scrlbetur,The letter will be will have been, will be written.written (writing).will be written.BcrlbSbatur, scrlpta erat- scrlpta est,The letter was writ- had been written, was written,ten (writing). was written.
156 PRESENT TENSE.REMARK. The English passive isambiguous. The same form is currentlyused for continuance, attainment, and completion. The contextalone can decide. A convenient test is the substitution of the active.( Continuance, Some one was writing a letter.A letter was written :
IMPERFECT TENSE. 157say a feu* things of myself ExspectabS dum . venit, TER., Eun., 206 ;1will wait all the time that he is coming, or, until he comes.NOTES. 1. This construction is archaic and familiar. It is very common in theComic Poets, very rare in CICERO and CAESAR, but more common later. Some usageshave become phraseological, as si vivo, if Hive, as Hive.2. On the Pr. Indie, for the Deliberative Subjv., see 254, N. 2.229. The Present Tense is used far more frequently thanin English, as a lively representation of the past (HistoricalPresent) :Cohortis incSdere iubet, S., C., 60, 1 ;he orders the cohorts to advance.Maturat proficlscl, CAES., B. G., i. 7, 1 ;he hastens to depart.REMARK. Dam, while (yet), commonly takes a Pr., which is usuallyreferred to this head. Dum, so long as, follows the ordinary law, 571, ff .Dum haec in colloquio geruntur, Caesari nuntiatum est, CAES., /!'., i.46, 1 ; while these things were transacting in the conference, word wasbrought to Caesar.230. The Present is used in Latin of actions that are continuedinto the present, especially with lam, now ; iam diu,now for a long time ; iam pridem, now long since. In Englishwe often translate by a Progressive Perfect.(Mithridate's) annum iam tertium et vlcSsimum regnat, C., Imp., 3, 7 ;Mithridates has been reigning no^o going on twenty-three years. Liberrevos a Philippe iam diu magis vultis quam audetis, L., xxxn. 21, 36;you have this long time had the wish rather than (= though not) thecourage to deliver yourselves from Philip." How doe* your honor for this many a day?" SHAK., Ham., in. i, 91.NOTES. 1. The Pr. sometimes gives the resulting condition :Qul mortem non timet, magnum is sibl praesidium ad beatam yltam comparat,C., Tusc., n. i, 2 ;he who fears not death gets for himself great warrant for ahappy life. (DIcunt) vincere (= victorem esse) bellC Romanum, L., n. 7, 2.2. More free is this usage in the poets, sometimes under Greek influence :AuctSre Phoebo gignor (yiyvoti.cn. = -yoi/os ei/tu) jbaud generis pudet. SEN.,Ag., 295.VERGIL is especially prone to use a Pr. after a Past, denoting by the Past the cause,by the Pr. the effect: Postquam altum tenuSre rates nee iam amplius ullaeadparent terrae, A., m. 192.Imperfect Tense.231. The Imperfect Tense denotes continuance in thepast: pugnabam, I was fighting.The Imperfectisemployed to represent manners, customs,situations; to describe and to particularise. A good exampleis TEE., And., 74 ff.
158 IMPERFECT TENSE.The Imperfect and the Historical Perfect serve to illustrateone another. The Imperfect dwells on the process;the Historical Perfect states the result. The Imperfectcounts out the items; the Historical Perfect gives the sum.A good exampleis NEP., n. i, 3.232. The two tenses are often so combined that the generalstatement isgiven by the Historical Perfect, the particularsof the action by the Imperfect :(VerrSs) in forum vgnit ardebant ocull; ;t5t5 ex ore crudelitas 5mine"bat,C., Verr., v. 62, 161 ;Verres came into the forum, his eyes were bhtziny,his whole countenance.cruelty was standing out from233. The Imperfectis used of attempted and interrupted,intended and expected actions (Imperfect of Endeavor}. Itisthe Tense of Disappointment and (with the negative) ofResistance to Pressure. (Mere negation is regularly Perfect. )Curiam relinquebat, TAC., Ann., n. 34, 1; Tie was for leaving thesenate-house. [LSx] abrogabatur, C'f. L., xxxiv. i, 7 ;the law was to beabrogated. Simul ostendebatur (an attempt was made to show) quomodoc6nstituti5nem reperirl oportSret, [C.] ad Her., n. i, 2. DlcSbat (positive)melius quam scrlpsit (negative) Hortensius, C., Or., 38, 132 ;Hortensiusspoke better than he wrote. Aditum n5n dabat, NEP., iv. 3, 3 he WOULD; not grant access (dedit, DID not). See also MART., xi. 105.NOTES. 1. The Impf. as the Tense of Evolution is a Tense of Vision. Bat in English,Impf. and Hist. Pf. coincide ;hence the various translations to put the reader inthe place of the spectator.2. The continuance is in the mind of the narrator ; it has nothing to do with theabsolute duration of the action. The mind may dwell on a rapid action or hurry overa slow one. With definite numhers, however large, the Hist. Pf. must be used, unlessthere is a notion of continuance into another stage (overlapping).lived one(Gorgias) centum et novem vixit annos, QUINT., HI. i, 9 ; GorgiasBiennium ibi perpetuom misera ilium lull, TEK., Sec.,hundred and nine years.87 ;/ bore him there poor me .'for two long years together.3. As the Tense of Disappointment, the Impf. is occasionally used, as in Greek, toexpress a startling appreciation of the real state of things (Imperfect of Awakening).Greek influence is not unlikely.Tu aderas, TEK., Ph., 858 ; (so it turns out that) you were here (all the time).Peream male si n6n optimum erat, H., S., H. i, 6 ; perdition catch me if that was'not the best course (after all).Hence the modal use of dSbSbam and poteram (254, K. 2).234. The Imperfect is used as the English Pluperfect,which often takes a progressive translation ; especially withiam, iam din, iam dudum,
, REMARK.PERFECT TENSE. 159lam dudum tibi adversabar, PL., Men., 420 ;Iliad long been opposingyou. (Archias) domicilium Romae multos iam annos [habebat], Cf. C.,Arch., 4, 7 ;Archias had been domiciled at Home now these many years.REMARK. As the Hist. Pr. is used in lively narrative, so the Hist.Inf. is used in lively description, parallel with the Imperfect (647).Perfect Tense.The Perfect Tense has two distinct uses :i. Pure Perfect. 2. Historical Perfect (Aorist).1. PURE PERFECT.235. The Pure Perfect Tense expresses completion in thePresent, and hence is sometimes called the Present Perfect.1. The Pure Perfect differs from the Historical Perfect, in that thePure Perfect gives from the point of view of the Present an instantaneousview of the development of an action from its origin in thePast to its completion in the Present, that is, it looks at both ends of anaction, and the time between is regarded as a Present. The HistoricalPerfect obliterates the intervening time and contracts beginning andend into one point in the Past.2. An intermediate usage is that in which the Perfect denotes auaction in the Past (Historical), whose effect is still in force (Pure).236. Accordingly,the Perfect is used :1 . Of an action that is now over and gone.Viximus, C., Fam., xiv. 4, 5 ;we have lived (life for us has been}.Filium unicum habeo, immo babul, TEB., Heaut., 94 ;I have an onlyson nay, have had an only son. Tempera quid faciunt : bane volo, tSvolul, MART., vi. 40, 4 ;what difference times make ! (Time is) I wantHER, (Time HAS BEEN) I wanted YOU.2. Far more frequently of the present result of a moreremote action (resulting condition):Equum et mulum Brundisil tibi rellqul, C., Fam., xvi. 9, 3 ;Ihave left ahorse and mule for you at Brundusium (they are still there). Perdidispem qua m5 oblectabam, PL., Rud., 222 ;I've lost the hope with which 1entertained myself. Actumst, peristi, TER., Eun., 54; it is all over;you're undone.The Pure Pf. is often translated by the English Present:n6vl, / have become acquainted with, I knoiv ; memini, / haverecalled, ./ remember ; odl, / have conceived a hatred of, I hate ; cSnsuevl,/ have made it a rule, I am accustomed, etc.
l6oHISTORICAL PERFECT.Oderunt hilarem tristgs tristemque iocosl, H., Ep., 1. 18, 89; the longfacedhate the lively man, the jokers hate the long-faced man.But the Aorist force is sometimes found :Tac6, inquit, ante hoc n5vi qnam tu natus es, PHAED., v. g, 4 ; silence,quoth he, I knew this ere that you were born.NOTE. The Pf . is used of that which has been and shall be (Sententious or GnomicPerfect, 242, N. i), but usually in poetry, from CATULLUS on, and frequently with anindefinite adjective or adverb of number or a negative. It is seldom an Aorist (Greek).Evertere domos totas optantibus ipsis dl facilSs, Juv., x. 7 ; whole houses atthe masters' own request the (.too) compliant gods overturn. N8mo repente fuit torpissimus,Juv., 11. 83 ;none of a sudden (hath ever) reach(ed) the depth of baseness.237. As the Present stands for the Future, so the Perfectstands for the Future Perfect.(Brfltus) si c5nservatus erit, vlcimus, C., Fam., xn. 6, 2 ;Brutus ! ifHE is saved, we are victorious, we (shall) have gained the victory.238. Habed or teneo, / hold, / have, with the Accusativeof the Perfect Participle Passive, isnot a mere circumlocutionfor the Perfect, but layspeculiar stress on the maintenanceof the result.Habeo statutum, Cf. C., Verr., in. 41, 95 ;I have resolved, and hold tomy resolution. Perspectum habeo, Cf. C., Fam., in. 10, 7 ;/ have perceived,and I have full insight. Excusatum habeas mS rogo, c6no doml,MART., u. 79, 2 I; pray you have me excused, J dine at home.2.. HISTORICAL PERFECT.239. The Historical or Indefinite Perfect (Aorist) states apast, action, ivithout reference to its duration, simply as athing attained.M115 donium venit, calceos etvestimenta mutavit, paulisper commoratusest, C., Mil., 10, 28; Milo came home, changed shoes and garments, tarrieda little while. (Gorgias) centum et novem vlxit annos, QUINT., in. i,9 (233, N. 2). V5nl, vldl, vlcl, SUET., lul., 37 ;I came, saw, overcame.NOTE.The Pf., as the "short hand " for the Plupf., is mainly post-Ciceronian, butbegins with CAESAR. It is never common: superioribus diebus nSna CaesarisIegi5 castra e5 Ioc5 posuit, CAES., B. C., in. 66, 2.240. The Historical Perfect is the great narrative tense ofthe Latin language, and is best studied in long connectedpassages, and by careful comparison with the Imperfect.See C., Off., in. 27, 100 ; Tusc., i. 2, 4.
PLUPERFECT TEKSE. FUTURE TENSE. l6lPluperfect Tense.241. The Pluperfect denotes Completion in the Past, and isused of an action that was completed before another was begun.It is, so to speak, the Perfect of the Imperfect. Henceit is used :1. Of an action just concluded in the past.Modo Caesarem rggnantem vlderamus, C., Ph., n. 42, 108 ;seen Caesar on the throne.we had just2. Of an action that was over and gone.Fuerat inimlcus, C., Red. in Sen., 10, 26 ;he had been my enemy.3. Of a resulting condition in the past.MassiliSnsSs portas Caesar! clauserant, CAES., B.C., i. 34, 4 ;the Marseillesehad shut their gates against Caesar.(Their gates were shut.)REMARK. When the Pf. of Resulting Condition is translated byan English Pr. (236, 2, R.), the Plupf. is translated by an English Imperfect: nSveram, I had become acquainted with, I knew ; memineram,I remembered ; 5deram, J hated ; cSnsuSveram, / was accustomed, etc.NOTES. 1 . Not unf requently in early Latin, rarely in classical prose, but more oftenin the poets, the Plupf. seems to be used as an Aorist ; so very often dlxerat :Nil equidem tibi abstull. EV. At illud quod tib! abstuleras cedo, PL.,Aul., 635. N5n sum ego qui fueram, PROP., 1. 12, 11. See Ov., 7V., HI. n, 23.2. The Periphrastic Plupf. with habeo corresponds to the Perfect (238). It israre, and shows two forms, one with the Imperfect and one with the Plupf., the latterbeing post-classical.Equitatum, quern ex omul provincia coactum liabebat, praemittit. CAES.,B. &., 1. 15, l. Multorum aures ilia lingua attonitas habuerat, VAL. M., m. 3.Future Tense.242. The Future Tense denotes Continuance in the Future:scrlbam, / shall be writing.The Future Tense is also used to express indefinite actionin the Future :scrlbam, / shall write.REMARKS. i. In subordinate clauses the Latin languageis moreexact than the English in the expression of future relations.Donee eris fellx, multSs numerabis amlcos, Ov., Tr., i. 9, 5 so ; long asyou shall be (are) happy, you will count many friends.2. Observe especially the verbs vo!5, I will, and possum, I can.Odero si potero; si n5n, invitus amabO, Ov., Am., in. n, 35 ;Iwillhate if I shall be able (can) ; if not, I shall love against my will. Qui11
1 62 FUTURE PERFECT TENSE.adipisci vSram glSriam volet, iustitiae fungatur officiis, C., Off., IT. 13, 43 ;whoso shall wish to obtain true glory, iet hirfi discharge the calls ofjustice.3. The Fut. is often used in conclusions, especially in CICERO :Sunt ilia sapientis aberit; igitur a sapiente aegritudS, C). ,Ttisc. ,in. 8, 18.NOTES. 1. The Fut. is used sometimes as a gnomic (236, N.) tense :Haut facul fSmina invenietur bona, AFK., 7; unneth (= hardly) a woman shall befound that's good. Et tremet sapiens et dolSbit, et expallescet, SEN., /:..)/., 71, 29.2. Observe the (principally comic) use of the Future to indicate likelihood :Verbnm hercle hoc vSrom erit, TEE., Eun., 732 ;this will be God't oicn truth.243. The Future is used in an imperative sense, as inEnglish, chiefly in familiar language.Tii nibil dice's, II., A. P., 385 ; you will (are to) say nothing (do yousay nothing). Cum volet accedes, cum te vltabit abibis, Ov., A. A., n.529 ; u'hen she u-ants you, approach ; and when she avoids you, begone,sir. N5n mgappellabis, si sapis, PL., Most., 515 ; see C., Fam., v. 12, 10.Compare utetur and utatur, CORN., n. 3, 5.Similar is the Future in Asseverations (comic).Ita mS amabit luppiter, PL., Trin., 447 ; so help me God !FuturePerfect Tense.244. The Future Perfect is the Perfect, both Pure andHistorical, transferred to the future, and embraces bothcompletion and attainment: fecero, TER., Ph., 882 ;I shallhave done it, or / shall do it (once for all) ; videro, TER.,Ad., 538 ;I will see to it; profecerit, C., Fin., in. 4, 14;it will prove profitable.REMARKS. i. Hence, when the Pf. is used as a Pr., the Fut. Pf.is used as a Future :novero, / shall know; consueverO, / shall be accustomed; Odero, si potero, Ov., Am., in. n, 35 (242, R. 2).2. In subordinate sentences, the Latin language is more exact thanthe English in the use of the Fut. Perfect ; hence, when one action precedesanother in the future, the action that precedes is expressed by theFut. Perfect.Qui prior strinxerit ferrum, eius victoria erit, L., xxiv. 38, 5 ;who firstdraws the sword, his shall be the victory.3. The Fut. Pf. is frequently used in vol5, 1 will; n8l5, I tcill not;possum, / can ; licet, it is left free ; libet, it is agreeable ; placet, it is thepleasure ; whereas the English idiom familiarly employs the Present.yo-u.SI potuero, faciarn vobis satis, C., Br., 5, 21; if I can, I shall satisfy
PERIPHRASTIC TENSES. 1634. The Fut. Pf. in both clauses denotes simultaneous accomplishmentor attainment ;one action involves the other.Qui Antonium oppresserit, is bellum confecerit, C., Fam., x. 19, 2 ;he who shall^ have crushed (crushes) Antony, will have finished (willfinish) the ivar. [Ea] vitia qui fugerit, is omnia fere vitia vltaverit, 0.,Or., 69, 231 Tie who shall have;escaped these faults, ivill have avoidedalmost all faults.Sometimes, however, the first seems to denote antecedence, the secondfinality. An Impv.is often used in the first claiise.Immuta (verborum collocationem), perierit t5ta rs, C., Or., 70, 232 ;change the arrangement of the words, the whole thing falls dead.NOTES. 1. The independent use of the Fut. Pf. is characteristic of Comedy, butoccurs occasionally later in familiar style. Sometimes it gives an air of positiveness :Bene merentl bene profuerit, male merenti par erit, PL., Capt.,vs ; gooddesert shall have good issue ; HI desert shaft, have Us due.Ego eras hie er5 : erashabuero, uxor, ego tamen convlvium, PL., Cos., 786.iniserrimam vitam vel sustentabo vel abiecero, C., Alt., in. 19, l.Ac., ii. 44, 135 ; L., i. 58, 10.Nusquam facilius haneSee also C.,2. The Periphrastic Fut. Pf. with habeo is rare. It corresponds to the Pf. andPluperfect.Quod si fSceris, m5 maximo beneficiS de"vinctum habSbis, C., Att., xvi. 16 B. 9.245. As the Future is used as an Imperative, so the FuturePerfect approaches the Imperative.D6 tS tu videris ; ego dS mg ipse profitebor, C., Ph., u. 46, 118 do ; yousee to yourself ; I myself will define my position.NOTE. This is confined in CICERO almost entirely to videris, which is suspiciouslylike the familiar Greek future o>//ei, and is used in the same way.Periphrastic Tenses.246. The Periphrastic Tenses are formed by combiningthe various tenses of esse, to be, with participles and verbaladjectives. See 129.I. PERIPHRASTIC CONJUGATION-ACTIVE VOICE.247. The Periphrastic Tenses of the Active are chiefly combinationsof esse and its forms with the so-called Future ParticipleActive. The Future Participle is a verbal adjectivedenoting capability and tendency. Compare amator andamaturus. The translation is very various :1. Scripturus sum, I am about to write, I am to write, I purpose towrite, lam likely to write.2. Scripturus eram, / wajft about to write, etc.
164 PERIPHRASTIC TENSES.3. Scrfpturus ful,I have been or was about to write (often = I shouldhave written).4. Scrlpturus faeram, I had been about to write, etc.5. Scripturus ero, 1 shall be about to write, etc.6. Scripturus fuer5, / shall have made up my mind to ivritc, etc. (ofcourse very rare).1. Fiet illud quod futurum est, C., Div., n. B/21 ;what is to be, willbe.z. [Ex] non interfuturus naval! certaminl erat, L., xxxvi. 43, 9 ; theking did not intend to be present at the naval combat.3. Fascls ipsl ad me delaturl fugrunt, C., Ph., xiv. 6, 15 ; they themselveswere ready to tender the fasces to me. DSditos ultinus cruciatibusadfecturl fuerunt, L., xxi. 44, 4 ; they would have put the surrendered toextreme tortures.4. Maior Romanorum gratia fuitquam quanta futura Carthaginiensium1fuerat, L., xxn. 22, 19 ;the Romans' credit for this u-as y.reater than theCarthaginians' would have been.5. Eorinn apud qu5s aget aut erit acturus, mentes sensusque degustet,C., Or., i. 52, 223 ;he must taste-and-test the state of mind of those beforewhom he will plead or will have to plead.6. (Sapiens) non vlvet, si fuerit sine homine victurus, SEX., E.M., 9, 17;The wise man will not continue to live, if he finds that he is to livewithout human society.(The only example cited, and that doubtful.)REMARKS. i. The forms with sum, eram, and the correspondingSubjv. forms with sim, essem, are much more common than those withful, etc.,probably for euphonic reasons.2. The Subjv. and Inf. scripturus sim, essem, fuerim, fuissem, scrlpturumesse, ftiisse, are of great importance in subordinate clauses. (656.)NOTES. 1. The use of forem for essem appears first in SALLUST, but is not uncommonin LIVT, and occurs sporadically later. Fore for esse is post-classical.Dicit se vgnisse quaesitum pacem an bellum agitaturus foret, S., lug., 109, 2.2. The periphrastic use of the Pr. Part, with forms of esse is rare, and in mostcases doubtful, as the question always arises whether the Part, is not rather a virtualsubstantive or adjective. So with the not uncommon ut sis SciSns of the Comic Poets.The effect of this periphrasis is to emphasise the continuance.Nem6 umquam tarn sui despiciSns (desptser of self, self-depredator) fait qulnsperaret melius s6 posse dlcere, C., Or., n. 89, 364.li.PERIPHRASTIC TENSES OF THE PASSIVE.A. Of Future Relations.248. The periphrases fatunim esse (more often fore) ut,(that) it is to le that, and futurum fuisse ut, (that) it wasto be that, with the Subjunctive, are very commonly used totake the place of the Future Infinitive active ; necessarily so
PERIPHRASTIC TENSES. 165when the verb forms no Future Participle.they are more common than the Supinewith Iri.In the passiveSpgro fore ut contingat id nobis, C., Tusc., i. 34, 82 ;/ hope that weshall have that .good fortune In fatls scriptum Vgientes [habgbant] foreut brevi a Gallis E5ma capergtur, C., Dir., i. 44, 100 ;the Veientes hadit written down in their prophetic books that Home would shortly betaken by the Gauls.REMARK. Posse, to be able, and velle, to will, on account of theirfuture sense, do not require a periphrasis. In the absence of periphrasticforms, the forms of posse are often used instead. (65(5, R.)rare.NOTES. 1. These periphrases do not occur in early Latin.2. Fore ut is used chiefly with Pr. and Impf. Subjv. ;Pf. and Plupf. are very(C., Aft., xvi. i6E. 1C.)3. The form futurum fuisse Ut is used with passive and Snpineless verbs, to expressthe dependent apodosis of an unreal conditional sentence.Nisi eo ipso tempore nuntil de Caesaris victoria essent allati, exlstimabantplgrique futurum fuisse utl (oppidum) amittergtur, CAES., B. e., m. 101, 3.(056, 2.)4. The Subjv. forms futurum sit, esset, fuerit ut,are used in the grammars toWarrantsupply the periphrastic Subjv. of passive and Supineless verbs (see 515, K. 2).in real usage is scarce.An utique futurum sit ut Carthaginem superent Roman! 1(not merely periphrastic).QUINT, m. 8, ir249. In eo est, it is on the point,jut> tjiaf (of^ with??*' |was (Impersonal),jthe subjunctive.In eo [erat] ut (Pausanias) comprehendergtur, NEP.,IV. 5, 1 ; it wason the point that Pausanias should be (P. was on the point of being)arrested.NOTE.This phrase occurs in NEPOS and LIVY, seldom in earlier writers.B. Of Past Relations.250. The Perfect Participle passive is used in combinationwith sum, / am, and fill, / have been, I was, to express thePure Perfect and Historical Perfect of the Passive Voice.Eram, / was, and fueram, / had been, stand for the Pluperfect;and ero, 1 shall be, and fuero, 7 shall have been, for theFuture Perfect.REMARKS. i. Ful is the favorite form when the participle is frequentlyused as an adjective convlvium exQrnatum : fuit, the banquetwas furnished forth ; ful is the rrtcexxary form when the Pf . denotesthat the action is ovgr,^uQ g 0ne amatus ful, / have been loved (but I;
1 66 TENSES IN LETTERS.am loved no longer).THe same principle applies to fueram and fuerS,though not so regularly.Simulacrum 6 marmore in sepulcr o positum fait ;hoc quldam homonobilis deportavit, C., Dom., 43 V 111 ;a marble effigy WAS deposited inthe tomb ; a certain man of rank has carried it off.Arma quae fixain parietibus fuerant, ea sunt hum! inventa, C., Div., i. 34,74 ;the armswhich had been fastened to the walls were found on the ground. Quodtib! fuerit persuasum, huic erit persuasum, C., Rose. Com., i,3 what is;(shall have proved) acceptable to you will be acceptable to him.2. To be distinguished is that use of the Pf . where each element hasits full force, the Participle being treated as an adjective.the tense is not past.Gallia est omnis dlvisa in partSs tr6s, CAES., B.G., i, 1.In this caseNOTES. 1. The fol, etc., forms are rarely found in CICERO, never in CAESAB, batare characteristic of LIVT and SAILUST.Z. Forem for essem is common in the Comic Poets, occurs twice in CICERO'S letters(Att., vn. 21,2 ; x. 14,8), never in CAESAR, but in LIVY and NEPOS is very common,and practically synonymous with essem.C. Periphrastic Conjugation Passive Voice.25 1. i . The combination of the Tenses of esse, to be, with theGerundive (verbal in -ndus), is called the Periphrastic Conjugationof the Passive, and follows the laws of the simple conjugation(129). The idea expressed is usually one of necessity.PraepOnenda [est] dlvitiis gloria, C., Top., 22,84 ; glory is to be preferredto riches.2.According to the rule (217) the Gerundive of intransitiveverbs can be used only in the Impersonal form :Parcendum est victls, The vanquished must be spared.NOTES. 1. The Gerundive is a verbal adjective, which produces the effect of a ProgressiveParticiple. Whenever a participle is used as a predicate it becomes characteristic,and good for all time. As amans not only = qul amat, but also = qul amet,so amandus = qul ametur. Compare 438, R.2. Forem for essem is post-classical and comparatively uncommon.TENSES INLETTERS.252. The Eoman letter-writer not unfrequently puts himselfin the position of the receiver, more especially at thebeginning and at the end of the letter, often in the phraseNihil erat (habebam) quod scriberem, / have nothing to write.This permutation of tenses is never kept up long, and appliescnly to temporary situations, never to gen?r?l statements.
MOODS. 167Table ofPermutations.scrlbo, I am writing, becomes scribebam.I "write, scrips!,scrips!, I have"written, scripseram./ wrote, scripseram,or remains unchanged.scribam, / shall ivrite, scripturus eram.The adverbial designations of time remain unchanged orheri, yesterday, becomes pridie.hodie, to-day, quo die" has Htteras cledl, dabam."eras, to-morrow,posters die, postridie"."nunc, "now,turn.Formias me" continue recipere cogitabam, C., Alt., vu. 15, 3 ;lam thinkingof retiring forthwith to Formiae. Cum mih! dixisset Caeciliuspuerum s6 Romam mittere, haec scrips! raptim, C., Alt., n. 9, 1 ;as Caeciliushas told me that he is sending a servant to Rome, I write in ahurry. (Litteras) eram daturus postridie e! qu! mih! primus obviamvSnisset, C., Ait., n. 12, 4 ;I will give the letter to-morrow to the firstman that comes my way.NOTE. CICERO is much more consistent in this tense-shifting than PLINY and;exceptions are not numerous proportionally Ego etsi nib.il habeo quod ad t8:scribam, scribe tamen quia tcum loqu! videor, 0., Ait., xii. 53.MOODS.253. Mood signifies manner. The mood of a verb signifiesthe manner in which the predicate is said of the subject.There are three moods in Latin :1. The Indicative.2. The Subjunctive.3. The Imperative.NOTE. The Infinitive form of the verb is generally, hut improperly, called a mood.The IndicativeMood.254. The Indicative Mood represents the predicate as aIt is sometimes called the Declarative Mood, as thereality.mood of direct assertion.The use of the Latin Indicative diifers little from the English.REMARKS. i. The Latin language expresses possibility and power,obligation and necessity, and abstract relations generally, as facts;whereas, our translation often implies the failure to realise. Such ex-
l68INDICATIVE MOOD.pressions are : debeo, / ought, it is my duty : oportet, it behooves;necesse est, it is absolutely necessary ; possum, / can, I have it in mypower ; eonvenit, it is fitting ; par, aequom est, it is fair; Infinltum,endless; difficile, hard to do ; longum, tedious; and many others also;the Indie, form of the passive Periphrastic Conjugation. Observe thedifference between the use of the Inf. in Eng. and in Latin after pasttenses of debeo, possum, oportet, etc.Possum persequi permulta oblectamenta r6rum rusticarum, C., Cat.M.,16, 55 ;/ might rehearse very many delights of country life. Longumest persequi militates asinorum, C., N.D., n. 64, 159 ;it would be tediousto rehearse the useful qualities of asses (I will riot do it).Ad mortemte duci oportebat, C., Cat., I. i, 2 ;it behooved you to be (you ought tohave been) led to execution (you were not). Volumnia debuit in t8officiosior esse, et id ipsum, quod fecit, potuit dlligentius facere, C., Fam.,xiv. 16 ;it ivas Volumnia 'sduty to be (V. ought to have been) more attentiveto you ; and the little she did do, she had it in her power(she might have done) more carefully. Quae condicio non accipienda fuitto dopotius quam relinquenda patria 1 C., Ait., viu. 3, 3 ;what terms oughtnot to have been accepted in preference to leaving thy country ? [Eum]vivum illinc exire non oportuerat, C., JU'ur., 25, 51 he ; ought never tohave gone out thence alive.The Pf. and Plupf.always refer to a special case.2. The Impf. as the Tense of Disappointmentis sometimes used inthese verbs to denote opposition to a present state of things debe-:bam, / ought (but do not) ; poteras, you could (but do not). These maybe considered as conditionals in disguise. (See R. 3.)Poteram morbos appellare, sed non conveniret ad omnia, C., Fin., in. 10,85 ;I might translate (that Greek word) " diseases," but that would notsuit all the cases (poteram si conveniret). At poteras, inquis, meliusmala ferre silendo, Ov., Tr., v. i, 49" "; But," you say, you could (you donot) bear your misfortunes better by keeping silent" (poteras si sileres).3. The Indie, is sometimes used in the leading clause of conditionalsentences (the Apodosis), thereby implying the certainty of theresult, had it not been for the interruption. The Indie, clause generallyprecedes, which is sufficient to show the rhetorical character of theconstruction.With the Impf. the action is often really begun :Labebar longius, nisi me" retinuissem, C., Leg., i. 19, 52 I was; lettingmyself go on (should have let myself go on) too far, had I not checkedmyself. Oinnlno supervacua erat doctrina, si natura sufficeret, QUINT.,n. 8, 8 ; training were wholly superfluous, did nature suffice. Praeclareviceramus, nisi Lepidus recgpisset Antonium, C. Fam., ,xn. 10, 3 ;wehad (should have) gained a brilliant victory, had not Lepidus receivedAntony.
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 169In all these sentences the English idiom requires the Subjv., whichis disguised by coinciding with the Indie, in form, except in " were."4. In general relative expressions, such as the double formations,quisquis, no matter who, quotquot, no matter how many, and all forms in-cumque, -ever, the Indie, isemployed in classical Latin where we mayuse in English a Subjv. or its equivalent : quisquis est, no matter who heis, be, may be ; qualecumque est, whatever sort of thing it is, be, may be.Quidquid id est, timeo Danaos et dona ferentSs, V., A., n. 49 ;whateverit (may) be, I fear the Danai even when they bring presents.CICERO has occasional exceptions (Ideal Second Person or by attraction) to this rule,and later writers, partly under Greek influence, frequently violate it. Exceptions inearly Latin are not common.NOTES. 1. CICERO introduces (n5n) putaram, " / should (not) have thought so,"and malueram, I could have preferred. LUCAN and TACITUS alone imitate the latter ;the former was never followed.Malnei-am, quod erat susceptum ab illls, silentio transiri, C., Alt., n. 19,3.Feriam tua viscera, Magne ;malueram socerl, LUCAN, vni. 521.a. In early Latin, occasionally in the more familiar writings of CICERO, and here andthere later we find the Pr. Indie, (in early Latin occasionally the Fut.) used in placeof the Subjv. in the Deliberative Question.Compression palma an porrecta ferio 1 PL., Cos., 405. Advolone an maneo ?C., . i //. ,xui. 40, 2. Quoi dono lepidum novoin libellum, CAT., i, 1.Subjunctive Mood.255. The Subjunctive Mood represents the predicate as anidea, as something merely conceived in the mind (abstractsfrom reality).REMARK. The Latin Subjv. is often translated into English by theauxiliary verbs may, can, must, might, could, would, should. Whenthese verbs have their full signification of possibility and power, obligationand neces^ty, they are represented in Latin by the correspondingverbs, thus :may, can, might, could by the forms of posse, to be able,licet, it is left free ; will and would by velle, to will, to be willing ; must,by debeo or oportet (of moral obligation), by necesse est (of absoluteobligation).Nostras iniurias nee potest nee possit alius ulclsci quani vos, L., xxix.18, 18 our ; wrongs no other than you has the power or can well havethe power to avenge.*NOTE. In the Latin Subjv. are combined two moods, the Subjv. proper, and theOptative, sometimes distinguished as the moods of the will and the wish. This fusionhas rendered it difficult to define the fundamental conceptions of certain constructions.* In this unique passage nee pctest denies with the head, nee possit refusea tobelieve with the heart.
I/OPOTENTIAL SUBJUNCTIVE.256. i. The realisation of the idea may be in suspense,or itmay be beyond control. The first, or purely Ideal Subjunctive,is represented by the Present and Perfect Tenses the;second, or Unreal, is represented by the Imperfect and Pluperfect.NOTES. 1. The Subjv., as the name implies (subiung5, / sufyoin), is largely usedin dependent sentences, and will be treated at length in that connection.2. The following modifications of the above principles must be carefully observed :(a) The Romans, in lively discourse, often represent the unreal as ideal, that whichis beyond control as still in suspense. (596, K. i.)(&) In transfers to the past, the Impf. represents the Pr., and the Plunf. the Pf. Subjunctive.(510.)2. The idea may be a view, or a wish. In the first casethe Subjunctive is said to be Potential, in the second caseOptative. The Potential Subjunctiveis nearer the Indicative,from which it differs in tone ;the Optative Subjunctiveis nearer the Imperative, for which it is often used.Potential Subjunctive.257. i. The Potential Subjunctive represent? the opinionof the speaker as an opinion. The tone varies from vaguesurmise to moral certainty, from " may " and " might " to" must." The negative is the negative of the Indicative, non.2. The Potential of the Present or Future is the Presentor Perfect Subjunctive. The verification is in suspense, andso future ;the action may be present or future : with Perfectsometimes past.Velim, I should wish; nolim, I should be unwitting ; malim, I shouldprefer ; dicas, you would say ; credas, you would believe, you must believe; dicat, dlxerit aliquis, some one may undertake to say, go so far asto say.Caedi dlscipulos minims velim, QUINT., i. 3, 13; I should by no meanslike pupils to be flogged. Tu Platonem nee nimis vald nee nimis saepelaudaveris, C., Leg., in. i, 1 ; you cant jwa-ise Plato too much nor toooften.NOTES. 1. The Pf .Subjv. as a Potential seems to have been very rare in early Latin.CICERO extended the usage slightly and employed more persons ;thus First Person PI.and Second Sing, occur first in CICERO. From CICERO'S time the usage spreads, perhapsunder the influence of the Greek Aorist. It was always rare with Deponents andPassives. Another view regards this dlxerit as a Fnt. Pf . Indicative.2. The Potential Subjv. is sometimes explained by the ellipsis of an Ideai or, of an
1OPTATIVE SUBJUNCTIVE. I 71Unreal Conditional Protasis. But the free Potential Subjv. differs from an ellipticalconditional sentence in the absence of definite ellipsis, and hence of definite translation.Compare the two sentences above with :Eum qul palain est adversarius facile cavendo (si caveas) vltare possls,C., Verr., 1. 15, 39 an; open adversary you can readily avoid by caution (if you are cautious).Nil ego contulerim iucundo sanus (= dum sanus ero) aniico, n., S., i. 5,44 ;there is naught I should compare to an agreeable friend, while I am in my soundsenses.3. The Potential Subjv., as a modified form of the Indie., is often found where theIndie, would be the regular construction. So after quanquam (607, R. i).258. The Potential of the Past is the Imperfect Subjunctive,chiefly in the Ideal Second Person, an imaginary" you."Crgder6s victos, L., n. 43, 9 ; you would, might, have thought thembeaten. Haud facile discerneres utrum Hannibal imperatorl an exercitulcarior esset, L., xxi. 4, 3 ;not readily could you have decided whetherHannibal ivas dearer to general or to army. Mirargtur qul turn cerneret,L., xxxiv. 9, 4 ; any one who saw it then must have been astonished.Vellem, 1 should have wished ; nollem, / should have been unwilling ;mallem, / should have preferred (it is too late).NOTES. 1. With vellem, nollem, mallem, the inference points to non-fulfilmentof the wish in the Present (261, R.) ;with other words there is no such inference.2. The Unreal of the Present and the Ideal of the Past coincide. What is unreal ofa real person is simply ideal of an imaginary person. The Impf. is used as the tenseof Description.The Aoristic Pf .Subjv. and the Plupf. Subjv. are rarely used as the Ideal of the Past:Hi ambo saltus ad Libuos Gallos dSduxerint (var. deduxissent), L., xxi. 38, 7.Ea qua minimum crSdidisset (c5nsul) resistebant hostSs, L., xxxn. 17, 4.259. The Mood of the Questionis the Mood of the expectedor anticipated answer (462). Hence the PotentialSubjunctive is used in questions which serve to convey anegative opinion on the part of the speaker.ftuis dubitet (n6m5 dubitet) quin in virtute dlvitiaesint ? G., Par ad.,vi. 2, 48 ;who can doubt that true icealth consists in virtue ? (No one.)Quis tulerit Gracchos dS sgditione querentes 1 Juv., n. 24 who could bear;the Gracchi complaining of rebellion ? (No one.) Apud exercitumfuerls ?C., Mur., 9, 21 can; you have been with the army ? Hoc tantumbellum quis umquam arbitrarStur ab uno imperatore cSnficl posse? C.,Imp., n, 31 ;who would, could, should have thought that this great warcould be brought to a close by one general ?Optative Subjunctive.260. The Subjunctive is used as &nj}ptative or wishingood.^teccxb^; A^
1/2 OPTATIVE SUBJUNCTIVE.The regular negative is ne". Non is used chiefly to negative a singleword ;but very rarely in the classical period. A second wish may beadded by neque or nee (regularly if a positive wish precedes), but this isalso rare in the classical period, and is denied for CAESAR.The Pr. and Pf. Subjv. are used when the decision is in suspense,no matter how extravagant the wish ; the Impf. and Plupf. are usedwhen the decision is adverse. The Pf. is rare and old.Stet haec urbs, C'., Mil., 34, 93 ; may this city continue to stand ! Quoddi omen avertant, C., Ph., in. 14, 35 ; which omen may the gods a cert.Ita di faxint (= fecerint), PL., Poen., 911 the gods grant it ! N6 istuc;luppiter optimus maximus sirit (= slverit) L., xxxiv. !24, 2; may Jupiter,supremely great and good, suffer it not !261. The Optative Subjunctive frequently takes nt (archaicand rare), utinam, utinam ne, utinam non ;also 6 si,oh if (poetical and very rare) ; qul (chiefly in early Latinand in curses).Valeas beneque ut tibi sit, PL., Poen., 912 ; farewell ! God bless you !Utinam modo conata efficere possim, C., Alt., iv. 16; may I but have itin my power to accomplish my endeavours. Utinam revlviscat frater!GELL., x. 6, 2 ;would that my brother would come to life again ! Utinaminserere ioc&s moris esset, QUINT., n. 10, 9; would that it icere usual to introducejokes ! Ulud utinam ne vSrS scriberem, C., Farn., v. 17, 3 ;u-ouldthat what I am writing were not true !Utinam susceptus non essem, C.,Alt., in. -ii, 8; would I had not been born ! (CICERO'S only example ofn5n.) 6 mini praeteritos referat si liippiter annos, V., A., vni. 560; ifJove were to bring me back the years that are gone by .'REMARK. For the wish with adverse decision, vellem and mallem(theoretically also nollem) may be used with the Impf. and sometimes(especially vellem) with the Plupf. Subjunctive.Vellem adesse posset Panaetius! C., Tusc.,i. 33, 81; would that Panaetiuscould be present !Vellem me ad c6nam invItassCs, C., Fam., xn.4, 1 ;would that you had invited ME to your dinner-party.So velim, nolim, etc., for the simple wish (546, R. 2).Tuam mini dari velim eloquentiam, C., N.D., n. 59, 147 ;I could wishyour eloquence given to me.NOTES. 1. Utinam was perhaps originally an Interrogative, How, pray? If so,it belongs partly to the potential ;hence the frequent occurrence of n6n. 6 si (occasionally81, V., A., vi. 187) introduces an elliptical conditional sentence, which is not intendedto have an Apodosis. When the Apodosis comes, it may come in a different form ;asin the example : V., A., vm. 560, 568.2. The Impf. Subjv. is occasionally used in early Latin to give an unreal wish in thePast. This is almost never found in the later period.Utinam te di prius perderent, quam periistl 6 patria tnS, PL., Capt., 537.Tune mini vita foret, TIB., 1. 10, n.
OPTATIVE SUBJUNCTIVE. 1/3262. The Optative Subjunctiveis used in asseverations :Ita vivam ut maximos sumptus facio, C., Att., v. 15, 2 ;as Hive, I amspending very largely (literally, so may I live as I am making very greatoutlay). Moriar, si magis gauderem si id mihi accidisset, C., Att., vin.6, 8 ; may I die if I could be more glad if that had happenedto me.NOTE. The Fut. Indie, in this sense is rare : Sic me dl amabunt tit m8 tuarummiseritumst fortunarum, TEB., Heaut., 463.263. The Subjunctiveis used as an Imperative:1. In the First Person Plural Present, which has no Imperativeform :Am6mus patriam, C., Sest., 68, 143; let us love our country. N8difficilia optSmus, C., Verr., iv. 7, 15 ;let us not desire what is hard to do.NOTE.In the First Person Singular, the command fades into the wish.2. In the Second Person.(a) In the Present chiefly in the Singular, and chiefly of animaginary " you " :Ist5 bon5 utare, dum adsit, cum absit, nS requlras, C., Cat.M., 10, 33 ;you must enjoy that Messing so long as 'tis here, when it is gone youmust not pine for it.NOTE. The Comic Poets use the Pr. negatively very often of a definite person,sometimes combining it with an Impv. : IgnSsce, irata ng si8s, PL., Am., 924 ;butin the classical period such usage is rare, and usually open to other explanations ;adefinite person may be used as a type, or the sentence may be elliptical.(b) In the Perfect negatively :Ne transierls Hiberum, L., xxi. 44, 6; do not cross the Ebro. NS vosmortem timuerltis, C., Tusc.,i. 41, 98; have no fear of death !3. In the Third Person Present (regularly) :Suum quisque noscat ingenium, C., Off., i. 31, 114 ;let each one knowhis own mind. Donis iinpii n6 placare audeant deos, C., Leg., n. 16, 41 ;etthe wicked not dare to try to appease the gods with gifts.NOTE. The Pf. in this usage is very rare. S., lug., 85, 47 ; TAC., Ann., iv. 32, 1.264. The Subjunctiveis used as a Concessive :Sit fur, C., Verr., v. i, 4 ; (granted that] he be a thief. Fuerit (mainsclvis), C., Verr., i. 14, 37; (suppose) that he was a bad citizen.For other examples with ut and n6, see 608.NOTE. The past tenses are very rarely ueed concessively ;see C., 7V?.,m- 19, 75(Impf.) ; Sest., 19, 43 (Plupf.).
11/4 IMPERATIVE MOOD.265. The Subjunctiveis used in Questions which expectan Imperative answer (coniunctivus deliberative).Genuine questions are commonly put in the First Person,or the representative of the First Person :TJtrum super biam prius commemorem an crudelitatem, C., Verr., i. 47,122 ;shall I mention the insolence first or the cruelty ? Magna fuit contentioutrum moenibus s6 defenderent an obviam irent hostibus, NEP., i. 4,4 ;there was a,great dispute ivhether they should defend themselvesbehind the watts or go to meet the enemy. (TTtrum nos dgfendamus anobviam eamus ?)[Example of Third Person, 428, N. i.]Ehetorical questions (questions which anticipate theanswer), under this head, are hardly to be distinguishedfrom Potential.Qu5 mS nunc vertam ?TTndique custodior, C., Att., x. 12, 1 whither;shall I now turn ? Sentinels on every side. Quid agerem? C., Sest.,19, 42 ;what was tl to do 9REMARK. The answer to the Deliberative Question is the Iiupv, orthe Imperative Subjv. of the Present (263, 2) or Past (272, 3).Imperative Mood.266. The Imperativeis the mood of the will; It willsthat the predicate be made a reality. The tone of the Imperativevaries from stern command to piteous entreaty.may appear as a demand, an order, an exhortation, a permission,a concession, a prayer.Abl in malam rem, PL., Capt., 877 ; go (to the mischief), and behanged. Compesce mentem, II., 0., i. 16, 22 curb ; your temper. Da minihoc, mel meum! PL., Trin., 244 ; give me this, honey dear !267. The Imperative has two forms, known as the Firstand the Second Imperative (also,but less accurately, as thePresent and Future Imperative). The First Imperative hasonly the Second Person the Second; Imperative has bothSecond and Third Persons. The First Person is representedby the Subjunctive (2G3, i).REMARK. Some verbs have only the second form. This may bo dueto the signification: so sclto, know thou ; memento, remember thou ;and liabeto, in the sense of know, remember.It
IMPERATIVE MOOD. 1/5On violation of Concord with the Imperative, see 211, N. 2.NOTE. The use of the Pronouns tu, VOS, etc., with the Impv., is colloquial, hencecommon in Comedy or solemn : see; V., A., vi. 95, 365, 675, 834, etc.268. i. The First Imperative looks forward to immediatefulfilment (Absolute Imperative) :Special : Patent portae proficiscere, C., Cat., i. ; 5, 10, Openstand the gates; depart.General: lustitiam cole et pietatem, C., Rep., vi. 16, 16,Cultivate justice and 2Jiety.2. The Second Imperative looks forward to contingentfulfilment (Relative Imperative), and is chiefly used in laws,legal documents, maxims, recipes, and the like : likewise infamiliar language.REGIO IMPERIO DUO SUNTO ; IIQUE CONSULES APPELLAMINO (130, 5, c);NEMINI PARENTO; OLLIS (104, III. N. 1) SALUS POPULJ SUPREMA LEX ESTO,C., Leg., in. 3,8 ;there shall le two (officers) with royal power ; (heyshall le called consuls ; they are to obey no one ; to them the welfare ofthe people must le the paramount law. Rem vobis :prSponam vos earnpenditote, C., Verr., iv. i, 1 ;I will propound the matter to you ; do youthereupon perpend it. Percontatorem fugito, nam garrulus idem est, H.,Ep., 1. 1 8, C9 avoid ; your questioner, for he is a tell-tale too.269. STRENGTHENING WORDS. The Imperative is often strengthened and emphasisedby the addition of Adverbs, fossilised Imperatives, Phrases, etc. :age, agite,agedum, agitedum, come ; enclitic dum, then ; modo, only ;iamdiiduia, at once ;proinde, veil, then ; quin, why not f sane", certainly ; amabo, obsecro, quaesd,please ; sis (= si vis), sultis (- si voltis), sodes (= si audes), if you please. Mostof these belong to familiar language, and are therefore found in great numbers inComedy and in CICERO'S letters. In the classical prose, and even later, they are notcommon. Dum in classical times is confined to isagedum ; quin cited twice inCICERO (Mil., 29, 79 ;Rose. Com., 9, 25), and rarely later. lamdudum begins with VER-CIL, and belongs to poetry and late prose. Sane is not cited for the classical period.Sultis is confined to early Latin ;and socles occurs but once in CICERO (Alt., vn. 3, 11).Mittite, agedum, Iggat8s, L., xxxvni. 47, 11. Quin tu i modo, PL-, Cos., 755.NOTE. On the violation of Concord with age,see 211, N. 2.270. NEGATIVE OE THE IMPERATIVE. i. The regular negativeof the Imperativeis ne (neve, neu), which is found withthe Second Imperative ;with the First Imperative,it ispoetical or colloquial.Hominem mortuum in urbe n5 sepelito nSve uritS, C., Leg., n. 23, 58;thou shalt not Iniry nor lurn a dead man in the city. Impius n6 audet5placare donis Iram deorum, C., Ley., u. 9, 22 the; impious man must not
1/6 IMPERATIVE MOOD.dare attempt to appease by gifts the anger of the gods. Tu ng cSdemalis, sed contra audentior It5, V., A., vi. 95 ; yield not thou to misfortunes,but go more boldly (than ever) to meet them.REMARKS. i. Non may be used to negative a single word:A Iggibus non recgdamus, C., Cluent., 57, 155 ;let us not recede from(let us stick to) the laws. Opus poliat lima, non exterat, Of. QUINT., x. 4,4 ;let the file rub the work up, not rub it out.2 Instead of nS with the First Imperative was employed either noliwith the Infinitive (271, 2) ;or nS with the Pf. Subjv., but the latter isvery rare in elevated prose (263, 2, b). On ng with Pr. Subjv. see 263, 2, a.NOTE. The use of n5n with the actual Impv. is found only in OVID ;but the additionof a second Impv. by neque, nee, instead of nSve, neu, begins in classical times(C., Att., xn. 22, 3), and becomes common later. The use of neque (nee), nihil,nemS, nullus with the Subjv. in an Impv. sense has recently been claimed for thePotential Subjv. (must, 257, i) on account of the negative.271. PERIPHRASES. i. Cura (curato) ut, take care that ;fac (facito) ut, cause tliat ; fac (facito), do, with the Subjunctive,are common circumlocutions for the Positive Imperative.Cura ut quam primum (303, R. i) venias, C., Fam., iv. 10, 1 ; manageto come as soon as possible. Fac cogites, C., Fam., xi. 3, 4, Do reflect !NOTES. 1. FacitO is almost wholly confined to early Latin, especially PLAUTUS ;BO also curatS.2. Early Latin also shows vidB and vidSt5 with Subjv. TERENCE introducesVOlo, velim, with Subjv., which is found also in later times ; as, C., Fam., ix. 12, 2.2. Cavl and cavl (caveto) n6, ~beware lest, with the Subjunctive,and noli, be unwilling, with the Infinitive, are circumlocutionsfor the Negative Imperative (Prohibitive) Fac.ne is also familiarly used.Cav festines, C., _Fam.,xvi. 12, 6 do not be in a; hurry. Tantrumcum finges n6 sis manifesta caveto, Ov., A. A., in. 801; only when youpretend, beware that you be not detected. Noli, amabo, verberare lapidem,n6 perdas mar^m, PL., Cure., 197 ;don't beat a stone, I pray you, lestyou spoil your hand. Fac nS quid aliud cures h5c tempore, C.,Fam.,xvi. n,l; see that you pay no attention to anything else, at this time.NOTES. 1. Rare and confined to early Latin is the use of cav with any but thesecond person. Cf. PL., Aitl., 660 ; TEK., And., 403.2. Other phrases are those with vid6 ng and ciirato n6, with Subjv. comperce,;compgsce with Inf. (all ante-classical) parce, mitte, omitte with Inf. ;(poetical andpost-classical) ; nSlim with Subjv. (Cic.) ;fuge with Inf. (Hon.) ; absiste with Inf.(VERG.).
IMPEKATIVE MOOD. 1 77272. REPRESENTATIVES or THE IMPERATIVE. i. Insteadof the Positive Imperative, may be employed :(a) The Second Person of the Present Subjunctive (263, 2).(b) The Second Person of the Future Indicative (243).(c) The Third Person of the Present Subjunctive (263, 3).2. Instead of the Negative Imperative (Prohibitive), maybe employed :(a)The Second Person of the Present Subjunctive, with n6 (263, 2, N.).(b) The Second Person of the Perfect Subjunctive, with ng (263, 2).(c) The Second Person of the Future, with non (243).(d) The Third Person of the Present or Perfect Subjunctive, withng (263, 3).REMARK. The Pr. Subjv. isemployed when stress is laid on thecontinuance of the action ; the Pf., when stress is laid on the completion.Hence the use of the Pf. Subjv. in total prohibitions and passionateprotests.3. The Imperative of the Past is expressed bythe Imperfectand Pluperfect Subjunctive (unfulfilled duties).Compare 265, K.Dotem daretis ; quaereret alium virum, TER., Ph., 297 ; you shouldhave given her a portion ; she should have sought another match. CrasIres potius, hodig Me cenarSs. Valg, PL., Pers., 710; you ought rather tohave put off going till to-morrow, you ought to (have) dine(d) with usto-day. Good-bye. (Anything decided isregarded as past.) PotiusdocSret (causam) non esse aequam, C., Off., in. 22, 88 ;he should ratherhave shown that the plea ivas not fair. Ng poposcissgs (libros), C., Att.,n. i, 3 ; you ought not to have asked for the books.Observe the difference between the Unfulfilled Duty and the Unrealof the Past (597).Morergtur; fgcisset certg si sine maximo dgdecore potuisset, C.,Rab.Post., 10, 29; he ought to have died ; he would certainly have done so,could he have (done so) without the greatest disgrace.NOTE. The Plupf. tense in this usage is not ante-classical.273. Passionate questions are equivalent to a command :Non tacSs ? PL., Am., 700 won't ; you hold your tongue ? Quin tacgs?Why don't you hold your tongue ? Quln datis, si quid datis? PL., Cas.,765 ;why don't you give, if you are going to do it 9 (Compare Fac, siquid facis, MART., i. 46, 1.) Cur non ut plgnus vltae convlva recedis ?LUCE., in. 938 ; why do you not withdraw as a quest sated with life ?12
1/8 TENSES OF THE MOODS.274. Puta, ut puta, for example, begins with [C.] ad Her., n. n, 16 (readingdoubtful) ;then H., S., n. 5, 32, Qulnte, puta, aut Publl. Later it becomes morecommon, especially with the Jurists. See C., Ph., n. 6, 15.275. Summary of Imperative Constructions,Positive.3d P. Audi, hear thou ; audits (legal or contingent) ; audies (familiar);audias (ideal Second Person chiefly).3d P. Audito (legal), Jet him hear ; audiat.Negative.2d P. Ng audi, hear not (poetic);n6 audits (legal) ;n5n audies (familiar);ne audias (chiefly ideal) ; noli audire (common) ;ne audiverls (rare).3d P. Ne audits (legal), let him not hear; ne audiat ;n6 audiverit.Tenses of the Moods and Verbal Substantives.276. The Indicative alone expresses with uniform directnessthe period of time.277. i. The Present and Imperfect Subjunctive have todo with continued action, the Perfect and Pluperfect withcompleted action. The Perfect Subjunctiveis also used toexpress the attainment.2. In simple sentences Present and Perfect Subjunctivepostpone the ascertainment of the Predicate to the Future.The action itselfmay be Present or Future for the PresentSubjunctive ; Present, Past, or Future for the Perfect Subjunctive.CrSdat.lie may believe (now or hereafter).CrSdiderit. Let him have had the belief (heretofore), he may havecome to the belief (now), he may come to the belief (hereafter).3. In simple sentences the Imperfect and Pluperfect Subjunctiveare Past Tenses, and regularly serve to indicate unreality.(See 597.)NOTE. A Subjv. of the Past, being a future of the past, gives a prospective (orfuture) action the time of which is over (or past), so that the analysis of the past tensesof the Subjv. shows the same elements as the Periphrastic Conjugation with eram andfill. Hence the frequent parallel use. See 254, K. 2, and 597, R. 3.4. In dependent sentences the Subjunctiveis future if theleading verb has a future signification (515, K. 3) otherwise;
TENSES OF THE MOODS. 1/9.the Subjunctive representsthe Indicative. The tense isregulated by the law of sequence. (See 509.)278. The Imperative is necessarily Future.279. The Infinitive has two uses :1. Its use as a Substantive.2. Its use as a representative of the Indicative.280. THE INFINITIVE AS A SUBSTANTIVE. As a Substantivethe Infinitive has two tenses, Present and Perfect.(See 419.)1 . The Present Infinitive is the common form of the Infinitive,used as a Substantive.action.It has to do with continued(a) The Present Infinitive is used as a subject or predicate.(See 423, 424.)Quibusdam totum hoc displicet pb.ilosopb.arl, C., Fin.,i. i, 1 ;to somethis whole business of metaphysics is a nuisance.(b)The Present Infinitive is used as the object of Verbs ofCreation (Auxiliary Verbs, Verbs that help the Infinitiveinto being ; see 423.)Cats servlre quam pugnare mavult, C., Att., vn. 15, 2 ;be a slave rather than to fight (being a slave to fighting).Cato prefers to2. The Perfect Infinitive is comparatively little used as aSubstantive. It has to do with completed action, and is alsoused to express attainment.(a) As a subject, it is used chiefly in fixed expressions orin marked opposition to the Present.Plus proderit demonstrasse rectam prStinus viam quam revocare aberrore iam lapses, QUINT., 11. 6, 2 ;it will be more profitable to havepointed out the right path immediately than to recall from wanderingthose that have already gone astray. [Non] tarn turpe fuit vine! quamcontendisse decorum est, Ov., M., ix. 5 ;'twas not so much dishonour tobe beaten as 'tis an honour to have struggled.REMARKS. i.By a kind of attraction decuit, became, takes occasionallya Pf. Inf. (emotional).Tune flesse decuit, L., xxx. 44, 7 ;that was the time when it wouldhave been becoming to weep (to have wept). Et Srubuisse decebat, Ov. 5M,, iv, 330 the; very flush of shame was becoming.
.OtherwiseISOTENSES OF THE MOODS.2. So oportuit, behooved, is frequently followed by the Pf. Part, passive,with or without esse. This seems to have belonged to familiarstyle ; it is accordingly very common in early Latin.[Hoc] iam pridem factum esse oportuit, C., Cat., i. 2, 5 ; this ought tohave been done long ago.(b] As an object, the Perfect Infinitive is seldom foundin the active, except after velle, to wish, which seems to havebeen a legal usage.Neminem nota strSnui aut ignavl militis notasse volul, L., xxrv. 16, 11 ;/ wished to have marked (to mark finally, to brand) no soldier with themark of bravery or of cowardice. Annalgs, quibus credidisse malls, L.,XLII. ii, 1. NEIQUIS EORUJI BACANAL HABUISE VELET, S. C. DE BAG.it is found mainly in the poets (after the fashion of theGreek Aorist Inf.),and usually with the Pf. and Plupf. tenses, volui,etc., potul, debueram (debui).Fratres tendentes opaco P6lion imposuisse Olympo, H., 0., in. 4, 52 ;brothers striving to pile Pelion on shady Olympus.TheNOTES. 1. This usage with velle seems to have approached often the Fut. Pf. inforce. A Pf. Inf. after the Pr. of posse occurs very rarely Non : potes probassenugas, PL., Aid., 828 see; V., A., vi. 78, and several cases in OVID and MARTIAL.2. The Pf. Inf. act. (subj. or obj.) is often found in the poete, especially in elegiacpoetry, as the first word in the second half of a pentameter, where it can hardly be distinguishedfrom a Present. This usage may be due partly to analogy with verbs of wishing,partly to the exigencies of the metre, partly to the influence of the Greek Aorist. Itmust be distinguished from the normal use of the Perfect :Qnam iuvat inmatesventos audire cubantem Et dominam tenero detinuisse sinu ! TIB., 1. 1, 45.3. Noteworthy is the occasional uec of debeo with the Pf. Inf. act. in the sense"must have": statim vicisse dSbeo, C.,Eosc. Am., 23,73; d6b6s adnotasse,PLIN., Ep., vii. 20, 6.(c) In the Passive, the Perfect Infinitive is used afterverbs of Will and Desire, to denote impatience of anythingexcept entire fulfilment. See 537.[Patriam] exstinctam cupit. C., Fin., iv. 24, 66 ;he desires his countryblotted out.Here the Infinitive esse is seldom expressed.Corinthum patres vestrl totius Graeciae lumen exstinctum esse voluerunt,C., Imp., 5, 11 (211, R. 6).NOTE. This usage is common in Comedy and in CICERO, rare, if at all, in CAESARand SALLUST ;and later also it is rare, surviving chiefly in phrases. The principal verbis vo!5, less often cupio, very rarely expeto and nSlo.s^281. THE INFINITIVE AS THE REPRESENTATIVE OF THEINDICATIVE. As the representative of the Indicative, the
TENSES OF THE MOODS.l8lInfinitive lias all its Tenses :Present, Past, Future, andFuture Periphrastics.1. The Present Infinitive represents contemporaneousaction hence the Present Indicative after a Principal Tense,and the Imperfect after a Historical Tense :Dlco eum venire, I say that he is coming ;that he was coming.dlcebam eum venire, I said2. The Perfect Infinitive represents Prior Action hencethe Perfect and Imperfect Indicative after a PrincipalTense, and the Pluperfect, Imperfect, and Historical PerfectIndicative after a Historical Tense :Dico eum venisse, / say that he came, has come, used to come.Dixl eum venisse, / said that he had come, used to come, did come.NOTE. Meminl, I remember, when used of personal experience, commonly takesthe Present : Turn me rggem appellarl a vobls memini, nunc tyrannum vocarivideo, L., xxxiv. 31, 13 ;/ remember being styled by you a king then, I see that lamcalled a tyrant now.So also rarely memoria teneo, recorder, I remember, I recall, and fugit mS, I donot remember. When the experience is not personal, the ordinary construction is followed: Memineram Marium ad Infimorum hominum. misericordiam con-I remembered that Marius had thrown himself on the mercyfugisse, C., Sest., 22, 50 ;of a set of Imv creatures.The peculiar construction with the Pr. arises from the liveliness of the recollection.When the action is to be regarded as a bygone, the Pf. may be used even of personalexperience Mg memini Iratum dominae turbasse : capillos, Ov., A. A., n. 169 ;/remember in my anger having tousled my sweetheart's hair.282. The Present Participle active denotes continuance ;the Perfect passive, completion or attainment.NOTE. The Latin is more exact than the English in the use of the tenses. Sothe Pf. Part, is frequently employed when we use the Present ; especially in classicalprose, with verbs that, indicate a condition, mental or physical, where the actionof the participle is conceived as continuing up to, and sometimes into, that of the leadingverb, as ratus, thinking ; veritus, fearing ;gavisus, rejoicing, etc. This usagespreads later : complexus, embracing ; hortatus, exhorting.283. The Future Participle (active) is a verbal adjective,denoting capability and tendency, chiefly employed in theolder language with sum, / am, as a periphrastic tense. Inlater Latin it is used freely, just as the Present and PerfectParticiples, to express subordinate relations.NOTES. 1. The so-called Fut. Part, passive is more properly called the Gerundive,and has already been discussed (251).2. The Supine, being without tense relations, does not belong here.
1 82 SIMPLE SENTENCE EXPANDED.SIMPLE SENTENCE EXPANDED.284. The sentence may be expanded by the multiplicationor by the qualfiication, A, of the subject, B, of the predicate.A.1. Multiplication of the Subject.Concord.285. NUMBEK. The common predicate of two or moresubjects is put in the Plural number :Lucius Tarquinius et Tullia minor iunguntur nuptiis, L., i. 46, 9 ;Lucius Tarquinius and Tullia the younger are united in marriage.Pater et mater mortul [sunt], TER., Eun., 518 ; father and mother aredead.EXCEPTIONS. i. The common predicate may agree with a Sing,subject when that subject is the nearest or the most" important: Myflesh and my heart faileth," PSA., LXSIII. 26.Aetas et forma et super omnia Eomanum nSmen te ferociorem facit, L.,xxxi. 1 8, 3 ; your youth and beauty, and, above all, the name of Roman,makes you too mettlesome. Latagum sax5 occupat 6s faciemque adversamV., A., x. 698 (323, N. 2).The agreement depends largely also upon the position of the verb.If it precedes or follows the first subj., the Sing, is more apt to stand.2. Two abstracts in combination, when conceived as a unit, take aSing, verb : " When distress and anguish cometh upon you," PROV., i.27-BeligiS et fides anteponatur amlcitiae, C., Off., in. 10, 46 ;let thereligious obligation of a promise be preferred to friendship.So any close union " Your : gold and silver is cankered," JAS., v. 3.Senatus populusque Eoinanus intellegit, C., Fam., v. 8, 2; the senateand people of Rome perceives (= Rome perceives). Tua fama et gnataevita in dubium veniet, TER., Ad., 340 ; your good name will be jeopardedand your daughter's life.3. When the same predicate is found with two or more subjects,who are conceived as acting independently, classical usage requiresthat the predicate be in the Singular. LIVY introduces the PI., whichgrows, and becomes the rule in TACITUS : Palatium Eomulus, EemusAventlnum ad inaugnrandum templa capiunt, L., i. 6, 4.NOTES. 1.Neque neque, neither nor, allows the PI. chiefly when the Personsare different : Haec neque ego neque tu feciinus, TEK., Ad., 103 ;neither you nor 1did this.
CONCORD. 183The same is true, but not so common, of et et (as well ,), ant ailt, either or.2. A Sing, stib.j. combined with another word by cum, with, is treated properly asa Singular. It is treated as a PI. once each by CATO, TEKENCE (Ileaut., 473), CICERO(by anacoluthon), CAESAR (B. ('., in. 88), more often by SALLUST and his imitators,LIVT, and later writers. VELLEIUS, VALERIUS M., and TACITUS follow the classicalusage.Sulla cum Sclpi5ne .... I6gs inter s6 contulerunt, C., Ph., xn. n,27. Ipsedux cum aliquot principibus capiuntur, L.,xxi. 60, 7; the general himself withsome of the leading men are captured.3. In the Abl. Aba. the Part, stands usually in the PI. with persons, usually in theSing. with, things. C. Graccho et M. Fulvio Placed" interfectis, S., lug., 16, 2.Caritate benevolentiaque sublata, C., Lad., 27, 102.286. GENDER. When the Genders of combined subjectsare the same, the adjective predicate agrees in gender when;the genders are different, the adjective predicate takes eitherthe strongest gender or the nearest.1. In things with life, the masculine genderis thestrongest ;in things without life, the neuter.(a) The strongest:Pater et mater mortul [sunt], TER., Eun., 518 (285).Miirus et porta d8caelotacta erant, L., xxxn. 29, 1 ;wall and gate had been struck by lightning.Hoc anima atque animus vinctl sunt foedere semper, LUCR., in. 416.(b) The nearest :Convicta est Messallna et Sllius, Cf. TAG., Ann., xn. 65 ;Messalinawas convicted and (so ivas) Silius. Hippolochus Larissaeorumque deditumest praesidium, L., xxxvi. 9, 14 ; Hippolochus and the Larissaean garrison(were) surrendered.2. When things with life and things without life are combined,the gender varies.(a) Both as persons :ESx rBgiaque classis profectl (sunt), L., xxi. 50, 11 ; the kingking's fleet set out.and the(b) Both as things :Natura inimlca [sunt] Hbera civitas et rSx, Cf. L., XLiv. 24, 2; a freestate and a king are natural enemies.3. When the subjects are feminine abstracts the predicatemay be a neuter Plural (211, R. 4).Stultitiam et intemperantiam dlcimus esse fugienda, C., Fin., in. n,39 ; folly and want of self-control (we say) are (things) to be avoided.NOTE.This usage does not appear iu early Latin, nor in CAESAR or SALLUST.
184 ADJECTIVE ATTRIBUTE.287. PERSONS. When the persons of combined subjectsare different, the First Person is preferred to the Second,the Second to the Third :Si tu et Tullia, lux nostra, valetis, ego et suavissimus Cicero valSmus,C., Fam., xiv. 5, 1 ; if Tullia, light of my life, and you are well, dearestCicero and I are well.REMARK. (a) In contrasts, and when each person is consideredseparately, the predicate agrees with the person of the nearest subject.Et ego et Cicero meus flagitabit, C., Att.,iv. i8,5 ; my Cicero willdemand it and (so will) 1. Beats vivere alii in alio, vSs in voluptatepSnitis, C., Fin., n. 27, 86 ;some make a blessed life to rest on one thing,some on another, you on pleasure.So regularly with disjunctives, see 285, N. 1.(b) The order iscommonly the order of the persons, not of modernpoliteness : Ego et uxor mea, Wife and I.2. Qualification of the Subject.288. The subject may be qualified by givingit an attribute.An attribute is that which serves to give a specific character.The chief forms of the attribute are :I. The adjective and its equivalents : amicus certus, a sure friend.REMARK. The equivalents of the adjective are : i. The pronounshie, this, ille, that, etc. 2. Substantives denoting rank, age, trade:servus homo, a slave person ; homQ senex, an old fellow ; homo gladiator,a gladiator-fellow; mulier ancilla, a servant-wench. 3. The Genitive(360, i). 4. The Ablative (400). 5. Preposition and case : excessus 8vltS, departure from life. 6. Adverbs, chiefly with substantival participles: rSctS facta, good actions. 7. Relative clauses (505).II. The substantive in apposition: CicerO Orator, CiceroI. ADJECTIVE ATTRIBUTE.Concord.289. The Adjective Attribute agrees with its suin gender, number, and case :GENDER.NUMBER.Vir sapiens, a wise man,virl sapientSs, u'ise men.Mulier pulchra, a beautiful woman, mulierSs pulchrae, beautiful women.RSgium donum, royal gift,regia dona, royal gifts.
ADJECTIVE ATTRIBUTE. 185CASE.Viri sapientis, of a wise. man. bone fill !good son !Mulierl pulchrae, for a beautiful woman, regio done", by royal gift.Virum sapientesi, tvise man. mulieres pulchras, beautifulwomen.290. The common attribute of two or more substantivesagrees Avith the nearest ; rarely with the most important.Volusenus, vir et consilii magnl et virtutis, CAES., B. G., in. 5, 2 ;Volusenus,a man of great wisdom and valour. Cuncta maria terraeque patSbant,S., C., 10, 1 ;all seas and lands lay open. Multa alia castellavlcique aut deleta hostiliter aut Integra in potestatem v5n6re, L., ix. 38, 1.REMARKS. i. For emphasis, or to avoid ambiguity, the adj. is repeatedwith every substantive. Sometimes also for rhetorical reasonssimply.(Semproniae) multae facetiae, multusque lepos inerat, S.,
1 86 NUMERALS.2. Superlatives which denote order and sequence in time and spaceare often used partitively, and then generally precede their substantive: summa aqua, the surface of the water ; summus mons, the top ofthe mountain ; vere prime, primo vere, in the beginning of spring.Similarly in media urbe, in the midst of the city ;the rest of Greece, and the like.reliqua, cetera Graecia,2. When the attribute belongs to two or more words,it isplaced sometimes after them all, sometimes after the first,sometimes before them all.Dlvitiae, nSmen, opes vacuae consilio dedecoris plenae stint, ('., Rep., i.34, 51 :riches, name, resources (when) void of wisdom are full of dishonour.For examples of the other positions see 290.Numerals.292. Duo means simply two, ambo, both (two consideredtogether), uterque, either (two considered apart, as, " Theycrucified two other with him, on either side one," JOHN",xix. 18):Supplicatio amborum nomine et triumphus utrlque decretus est, L.,xxviu. 9, 9 ;a thanksgiving in the name of both and a triumph toeither (each of the two) was decreed.Qui utrunique probat, ambobus debuituti, C., Fin., n. 7, 20 ;he who approves of either oughtavailed himself of both.to haveREMARK. Uterque is seldom PL, except of sets ;so with pluraliatantum.Utrlque (i.e., plebis fautores et senatus) victoriam crudeliter exereebant,S., C., 38, 4 ; either party (democrats and senate) made a cruel use ofvictory. Duae fuSrunt Ariovisti uxores :utraeque in ea fuga perierunt,CAES., B.G., i. 53, 4 ;Ariovistus's vcives were two in number ; both perishedin that flight. Proximo die Caesar e castrls utrisque copias suaseduxit, CAES.,^.^., i. 50, 1.On uterque with the PI., see 211, R. i ;with Gen., see 371, R.293. Mille, a thousand, is in the Sing, an indeclinable adj. and isless frequently used with the Genitive:mllle mllites, rather than mlllemilitum, a thousand soldiers ; in the PI. it is a declinable substantive,and must have the Genitive : duo milia militum, two thousand(s of)soldiers = two regiments of soldiers. If a smaller number comesbetween, the substantive usually follows the smaller number :
INUMERALS. 187,f tria milia qulngentl equits,3500 cavalry, \tria mflia equitum et **< butequites tria milia qulngentl, orequitum tria milia quingenti.But duo milia quingenti hostium in aciS perigre, L., xxn. 7, 3.NOTE. The use of mllle as a substantive with the Part. Gen. is found mostly inante-classical and post-classical Latin. CICERO and CAESAB use it but rarely, and inphrases such as mllle minimum, mllle passuum. LIVY is fonder of it.294. ORDINALS. The Ordinals are used more often inLatin than in English ;thus always in dates : anno ducentfisimoquarto, in the year 204. Sometimes they are used forthe cardinals with a carelessness that gives rise to ambiguity:Quattuor annl sunt, ex quo te non vldl,It is four years, that I have not seen you (since I saw you).Quartus annus ex est, quo te non vidi.It is the fourth year ( four years, going on four years).NOTE. To avoid this ambiguity forms of incipere, to begin, and exigere, tofinish, seem to have been used. Cf., PL., Capt., 980 ; Cist., 161.On quisque with the ordinal, see 318, 2.295. DISTRIBUTIVES. The distributives are used with anexactness which is foreign tois involved, as in the multiplication table.our idiom wherever repetitionBis bina quot [sunt] T C.,N.D., n. 18, 49; how many are twice two 9Scrlptum eculeum cum quinque pedibus, pullos galllnaceos tris cum termspedibus natos esse, L., xxxn. i, 11 ;a letter was written to say that a colthad been foaled with five feet (and) three chickens hatched with threefeet (apiece).With singull the distributive is preferred, but the cardinal may beused.Antonius (pollicitus est) denarios quingenos singulis militibus daturum,C., Fam., x. 32, 4 ;Antonius promised to give five hundred denarii toeach soldier. Singulis censoribus denarii trecentl (so all MSS.) imperatlsunt, C., Verr., n. 55, 137 ;the censors were required to pay threehundred denarii apiece.NOTE. Poets and later prose writers often use the distributive when the cardinalwould be the rule ;thus binl is not unfrequently used of a pair even in CICERO : blnos(scyphos) habebam, Verr., iv. 14, 32. When there is an idea of grouping, the distributiveis often broken up into a multiplicative and a distributive ; as,Carmen ab ter novSnis virginibus canl iussSrunt, L., xxxi. is, 9 ; they ordereda chant to be sung by thrice nine virgins.
188 COMPARATIVES AND SUPERLATIVES.On the other hand, prose sometimes shows a cardinal when exact usage wouldrequire a distributive. So regularly mllia.Milia talentum per duodecim annos (dabitis), L., xxxvn. 45, 15.On the distributives with pluralia tantum, see 97, B. 3.Comparatives and Superlatives.296. COMPARATIVE. The comparative degree generallytakes a term of comparison either with quam, than, or in theAblative :Ignoratio futurorum inalorinn utilior est quam scientia, ('., Die., n. g,23; ignorance of future evils is better than knowledge (of them). Nihilest virtute amabilius, C., Lael., 8, 28 ; nothing is more lovable thanvirtue.REMARKS. i. (a) The Abl. is used only when the word with quamwould stand in the Nom. or Ace. (644).Caesar minor estluam om (-IP U8 >(.Caesar is younger than Pompey.IPompelo,Caesarem plus amamus quam Pom P 6ium >love Caesar more fhan\ \( Pompei5, )Pompey.In the second example the use of the Abl. may give rise to ambiguity,as the sentence may also mean "we love Caesar more thanPompey loves him." This ambiguity is always present when adverbsare used, and hence good prose avoids using a comparative adv. withan Ablative. See H., S., i. i, 97.(b) With cases other than Nona, or Ace., quam isregularly used toavoid ambiguity.Anulis nostris plus quam animls creditor, SEN., Ben., in. 15, 3 (217).2. The Abl. is very common in negative sentences, and is used exclusivelyin negative relative sentences.Polybium sequamur, quo nemS fuit dlligentior, C., Rep., u. 14, 27 ; letus follow Polybius, than whom no one was more careful.3. Measure of difference isput in the Ablative (403).4. Quam is often omitted after plus, amplius, more, and minus, less,and the like, without affecting the construction :Hominl miser 6 plus quingentos colaphos infrSgit mihl, TER., Ad., 199 ;he has dealt me, luckless creature, more than five hundred crushingboxes on the ear. Spatium est non amplius pedum sescentorum, CAES.,B.C., i. 38, 5 the ; space is not more than (of) six hundred feet.But the normal construction is not excluded :Palus n5n latior pedibus qulnquaginta, CAES., B. G., vn. 19, 1 ;a swampnot broader than fifty feet (or pedes quinquaginta). Nostri milites ampliushoris quattuor pugiiaverunt, CAES., B.O., iv. 37, 3.
COMPARATIVES. 1895. In statements of age we may have a variety of expressions ; thus,more than thirty years old may be :1. Natus plus (quam) triginta annos. 3. Maior (quam) trlginta annos natus.2. Natus plus triginta annls (rare). 4. Maior triginta annls (natus).5. Maior triginta annorum.6. On the combination of the comparative with opinione, opinion,sp5, hope, and the like, see 398, N. 1.NOTES. 1. Verbs and other words involving comparison sometimes have the Abl.where another construction would be more natural. Thus, nialle, to prefer (poet, andpost-classical), aequS, aclaeque, equally (early and late), alius, other (mainly poeticand rare): Nullos his mallem ludos spectasse, H., 8., n. 8, 79. Qul me" in terraaeque" fortunatus erit? PL., Cure., 141. Ne putSs alium sapiente bonoquebeatum, Ep., 1. 16, 30.2. Instead of the Abl., the Gen. is found occasionally in late Latin.3. Instead ofquam or the Abl., prepositional uses with the positive are often found;as prae, in comparison with, praeter, ante, beyond ; also supra quam. Poeticalis the circumlocution with qualis,as Hon., Epod., 5, 59. Inferior is sometimes constructedwith the Dat., according to the sense ;4.Atque for quam is mainly poetical ;see 644, N. 2.inferior to instead of lower than.297. Standard of Comparison omitted. When the standardof comparison is omitted, it is supplied : i By the con-.text; 2. By the usual or proper standard ; 3. By the opposite.1.Bythe context :Solent rggSs Persarum plur6s uxSrSs habSre, Cf. C., Verr., in. 33, 76;the kings of Persia usually have more wives [than one].2.By the proper standard :Senectiis est natura loquacior, C., Cat.M., 16, 55,rather (or too) talkative.Old age is naturally3. By the opposite :Quigsse erit melius, L., in. 48, 3 ;it will be better to be-perfectlyquiet(than to make a disturbance).298. Disproportion. Disproportion is expressed by thecomparative with quam pro, than for, and the Ablative, orwith quam ut, that, or quam qui, who, and the Subjunctive:Minor caedSs quam pro tanta vict5ria fuit, L., x, 14, 21 ;the loss was(too) small for so great a victory. Quis non intellegit Canada signa rigidioraesse quam utimitentur vgritatem ? C., Br., 18, 70 ;who does notperceive that Canachus 1 figures are too stiff to imitate the truth ofnature ? Maior sum quam cui possit Fortuna nocSre, Ov., M., vi. 195; /am too great for Fortune possibly to hurt me.
COMPARATIVES.REMARK. Disproportion may also be expressed by the positive incombination with prepositional phrases, etc. :pro multitudine angustiCAES., B.O., i. 2, 5 ;boundaries too small for their multitude.NOTES. 1. The constructions quam pro and quam qul are both post-Ciceronian.2. The ut is frequently omitted after as :quam, Dolabella celerius Asia [exc6ssit],quam eo praesidium adduc! potuisset, C., Fain., XH. 15, 1. This is especiallycommon after potius quam.299. Two Qualities compared. When two qualities of thesame substantive are compared, we find either magis andquam Avith the positive, or a double comparative :Celer tuus disertus magis est quam sapiens, C., Alt., x. i, 4 ; your(friend) Celer is eloquent rather than wise more eloquent than wise,.Acutiorem se quam ornatiorem [vult], C., Opt. Gen., 2, 6 ;he wishes to beacute rather than ornate.NOTES. 1. There is no distinction to be made between the two expressions. In thelatter turn, which is found first, but rarely, in CICERO, the second comparative is merelyattracted into the same form as the first. The same rule applies to the adverb :fortius quam fSHcius, with more bravery than good luck.2. Post-Augustan Latin shows occasionally the comparative followed by quam, andthe positive: Nimia pietas vestra acrius quam considerate excitSvit, TAC., H.,1.83.300. Restriction to the Comparative. When but twoobjects are compared, the comparative exhausts the degreesof comparison, whereas, in English, the superlative is employed,unless the idea of duality is emphatic.Natu maior, the eldest (of two), the elder ; natu minor, the youngest,the younger. Prior, the first ; posterior, the last.Posteriores cogitationes, ut aiunt, sapientiorSs solent esse, C.,PA.,xn.2, 5 ; afterthoughts, as the saying is, are usually the wisest.REMARK. The same rule applies to the interrogative uter, whichof two ? (whether T) : Ex duobus uter dignior ' ex pluribus, quis dignissimus1QUINT., vn. 4, 21 ; of two, which is the worthier ? of more (thantwo), which, is the worthiest ?NOTE. Qui8 is rarely used instead of uter,as C., Fam., vi. 3, 1 ; V., A., xn. 725.301. Comparative Strengthened. The comparativeis often strengthenedduring the classical period by the insertion of etiam, even ; lateralso by adhuc, still. Mult5 is properly the Ablative of difference, andis the normal form until the time of VERGIL, when its place is takenlargely by longe, except in HORACE, who retains multo. Ante-classicaland post-classical Latin occasionally doubles the comparative magis:dulcius, PL., Stich., 699. Ninil invenigs magis hoc certO certius, PL.,
PEONOUNS. 191Capt., 643.Even in CICERO a word involving Inference is sometimesstrengthened by potius :[Themistocll fuit] optabilius obllviscl posse potius quam meminisse, C.,Or., ii. 74, 1300 Tliemistodes; thought it (more) topreferablebe able toforget (rather) than to be able to remember.302. Superlative.The Latin superlative is often to berendered by the English positive, especially of persons :Qulntus Fabius Maximus, Quintus Fabius the Great. Maximo impetu,maiore fortuna, L., xxvin. 36, 2 ;with great vigour, with greater luck.Tarn fsllx essSs quam formosissima vellem, Ov., Am., i. 8, 27 ;would thouwert fortunate as (thou art) fair.303. Superlative. Strengthened. The superlative is strengthened bymultS, much (especially in early Latin) ; longS, by far (the normal usagein the classical period); vel, even; turns, unus omnium, one above allothers; quam (with adverbs and adjectives), quantus (with maximus), ut(with adverbs) potest, potuit, as as possible.Ex Britannls omnibus longe sunt humanissiml qui Cantium incolunt,CAES., B.O., v. 14, 1; of all the Britons by far the most cultivated arethose that inhabit Kent. PrStagoras sophistes illis temporibus vel maximus,C., N.D., i. 23, 63; Protagoras, the very greatest sophist (= professorof wisdom) in those times. Urbem unam mini amicissimam declinavl,C., Plane., 41, 97; I turned aside from a city above all others friendlyto me. (Caesar) quam aequissimo loco potest castra communit, CAES. ,B. O. ,v. 49, 7 ;Caesar fortifies a camp in as favourable a position as possible.REMARKS. i. The omission of potest leaves quam with the superlative,which becomes a regular combination: as (great) as possible.2. For tarn, tantum, with positive followed by quam, quantum qui, andthe superlative, see 642, R. 5.PRONOUNS.I. Personal Pronouns.304. i. The personal Pronoun is usually omitted when itis the subject of a verb ;see 207.2. The Genitive forms, mei, tui, sui, nostrl, vestrl, are usedmainly as Objective Genitives ;see 364, N. 2.(Marcellinus) se" acerrimum tui dSf5ns5rem fore ostendit, C., Fam., I. i,2 ;Marcellinus showed that he would be your keenest defender.NOTES. 1. Nostrum and vestrum for nostrl, vestrl,are very rare : [luppiter,custosl huius urbis ac vestrum, Cf. C., Cat.,w. 12, 29.2. The Possessive pronouns sometimes are found in place of this Genitive Neque:neclegentia tua neque odio id fecit tuo, TER., Ph., 1016;he did this neither from,
1Q2PRONOUNS.neglect of thee norfrom hatred of thee. Vester conspectus reficit et recreat menternmeam, C., Plane., i,2 ;the (tight of you refreshes and renews my spirit*." If I be a master, where is my fear " ? MAI, i. 6.3. The Genitive forms, nostrum and vestrum, are used partit'ively ;see 364, E.TS ad mS venire uterque nostrum cupit, C., Alt., xm. 33, 2 ;each ofshould come to me.us two desires that youNOTES. 1. So regularly also in certain phraseological uses which may be partitiveat basis. Frequentia vestrum, consSnsus vestrum, regularly in combination withomnium (364, B.), and occasionally when the Possessive is more natural ; is enimsplendor est vestrum, C., Att., vn. ISA, 3.2. For a Part. Gen. of the third person (reflexive) a circumlocution must be used, suchas ex 86 or the Possessive suorum.2. Demonstrative Pronouns.305. Hie, this (the Demonstrative of the First Person),refers to that ivhich is nearer the speaker, and may mean :1. The speaker himself : hlc kom
PRONOUNS. 193S51 mg ille admonuit, C., Or., m., 55, 209 ;that (yon) sun reminded me.Q. Catulus non antique 1115 more sed hoc nostrS gruditus, C., Br., 35, 132;Q. Catulus, a cultivated man, not after the old-fashioned standard of aby-gone time (illo) but by the standard of to-day (hoc).Illemay mean :1. That which has been previously mentioned (often ille quidem):illud quod initiS vobis proposul, C., Font., 7, 17; that which I propoundedto you at first.2. That which is well known, notorious (often put after the substantive): testula ilia, that (notorious) potsherd institution of ostracism ;illud Solonis, that (famous saying) of Solon's.3. That which is to be recalled : illud imprimis mlrabile, that (whichI am going to remind you of) is especially wonderful.4. That which isexpected :Ilia digs veniet mea qua lugubria pSnam, Ov., Tr., iv. 2, 73 ; the daywill come when I shall lay aside (cease) my mournful strains.REMARKS. i. Hie and ille are used together in contrasts :as, thethe latter.latter the former, the former(a) When both are matters of indifference the natural signification isobserved :hie, the latter ; ille, the former.Ignavia corpus hebetat, labor ftrmat ilia maturam; senectutem, luclongam adolescentiam reddit, GELS., i. i ;laziness weakens the body, toilstrengthens it ; the one (the former) hastens old age, the other (the latter)prolongs youth.(b) When the former is the more important, hie is the former, ille, thelatter :Melior tutiorque est certa pax quam spgrata victoria ;haec in nostra,ilia in de5rum manu est, L., xxx. 30, 19 ;better and safer is certain peacethan hoped-for victory ; the former is in our hand(s),the latter in thehand(s) of the gods.2. Hie et ille;ille et ille ;ille aut ille, this man and (or) that man =one or tu'o.Non tiicani hoc slgnum ablatum esse et illud hoc; dlco, nullum tSsignum rellquisse, C., Verr., i. 20, 53 ;/ will not say that this statue wastaken off and that ; (what) / say (is) this, that you left no statue at all.3. The derived adverbs retain the personal relations of hie, iste, ille :hie, here (where I am) ; hinc, hence (from where I am) ; hue, hither(where I am) ; istlc, there (where you are) ; illlc, there (where he is), etc.4. The Demonstratives hie, iste, ille, and the Determinative is, areoften strengthened by quidem, indeed. The second member is then introducedby sed, sed tamen (more rarely tamen, v5rum, autem, vSro), vgrumtamen,and sometimes is added asyndetically. The sentence often requiresthat either the demonstrative or the particle be left untranslated.13
194 PRONOUNS.Optare h5c quidem est, n5n doc6re, C., Tusc., u. 13, 30; THAT is a(pious) wish, not a (logical) proof. Nihil perfertur ad n6s praeter rum5re"ssatis istos quidem c5nstants sed adhuc sine auct5re, C., Fain. xir. 9.1 ;nothing is brought to us except reports, consistent enough, it is true, butthus far not authoritative.Ille is most often used thus ; is, iste, hie, more rarely.NOTES. 1. HlC and ille are sometimes employed to add a qualification to a substantiveby means of a contrast : OrStor non ille vulgaris sed hie exeellgns, C.,Or., 14, 45 ;an orator, not of the (yon) common type, but of the ideal excellence (we seek).2. Not unfrequently in poetry, very rarely in prose, in a long sentence a substantiveis repeated bymeans of ille : V., A., i. 3, ille et terris iactatus;H., 0., iv. 9, 51.3. Sometimes two forms of hie, ille,or is are found in the same clause referring todifferent substantives : Evolve dlligenter 5ius [' f-, Platonis] eum librum, quiest d animS, C., Tusc., i. n, 24.4. Hie may refer to an oblique form of is : Non est amlcl talem esse in eum.qualis ille in s6 est, C., Lad., 16, 59.5. Ille is found chiefly in poetry with the personal pronouns ego, tH, and occasionallywith hie, and when so used takes its fullest force. Hunc ilium fatls externaab s6de profectum portendl generum, V., A., VH. 255.3. Determinative and Reflexive Pronouns.308. Is, that, is the determinative pronoun, and serves asthe lacking pronoun of the Third Person. It furnishes theregular antecedent of the relative :Mini venit obviam tuus puer ;is mini lltteras abs te reddidit, C., Ail.,ii. i, 1 ;I was met by your servant ; he delivered to me a letter from you.Is minimS eget mortalis qui minimum cupit, SYRUS, 286 (Fr.); that mortalis in want of least, who wanteth least.EEJIARKS. i. Is, as the antecedent of the relative, is often omitted,chiefly in the Norn., more rarely in an oblique case (619).Bis dat qui dat celeriter, SYRUS, 235 (Fr.); he gives twice who gives ina trice.Often it has the force of talis (631, i) in this connection:Ego is sum qui nihil umquam mea potius quam meorum civium causafecerim, C., Fam., v. 21, 2; / am a man never to have done anythingfor my own sake, rather tfian for the sake of my fellow-citizens.z. Is, with a copulative or adversative particle,is used as he or thatin English, for the purpose of emphasis. Such expressions are : et is,atque is, isque, and lie too, and that too ; neque is, et is non, and he not,and that not ; sed is, but lie, further strengthened by quidem, indeed.To refer to the whole action id is employed.Exempla quaerimus et ea n5n antiqua, C., Verr., in. 90, 210 ;we arelooking for examples, and those, too, not of ancient date. Epicurus unain domo et ea quidem angusta quam magnos tenuit amicorum gregSs, C..Fin., i. 20. 65 ;ivhat shoals of friends Epicurus had in one house, and
PRONOUN'S. 195that a pinched-up one ! NegStium magnum est navigSre atque id mgnseQulnctlli, C., Att. v. 12, 1; it is a big job to take a voyage and that inthe month of July.3. Is does not represent a substantive before a Gen., .as in the Englishthat of. In Latin the substantive is omitted, or repeated, or aword of like meaning substituted.Non iudicio diseipulorum dicere debet magister sed dlscipull magistrl,QUINT., ii. 2, 13; the master is not to speak according to the judgment ofthe pupils ; but the pupils according to that of the master. Nulla estceleritas quae possit cum animi celeritate contendere, C., Tusc., i. 19, 43 ;there is no speed that can possibly vie with that of the mind.M. Coeliustribunal suum iuxta C. Treboni sellam collocavit, CAES., B.C., in. 20, 1;Marcus Coelius placed his chair of office next to that of Gains Trebonius.Of course hie, ille, and iste can be used with the Gen. in their propersense.309. REFLEXIVE. Instead of forms of is,the ReflexivePronoun, sui, sibl, se, together with the Possessive of theReflexive suos (-us), sua, suom (-um) is used. (See 521.)1.Regularly when reference is made to the grammaticalsubject of the sentence :Ipse sg quisque dlligit quod sib! quisque carus est, G.,*Lael., 21, 80;every one lores himself, because every one is dear to himself. (Fadius) amS dlligitur propter summam suam humanitatem, C., Jf r am., xv. 14, 1 ;Fadius is a favourite of mine by reason of his exceeding kindliness.The subject may be indefinite or (occasionally) impersonal.Contentum suls rgbus esse maximae sunt divitiae, C., Par., vi. 3, 51;to be content with one's own things (with what one hath) is the greatestriches. Perventum ad suos erat, L., xxxni. 8, 6." Pure religion and undeflled is this ... to keep himself unspotted from theworld."JAMBS, i.27.2.Frequently when reference is made to the actual subject(521, R. 2) :Suos rgx rgglnae placet, PL., St., 133 ; every queen favours her ownking (every Grill loves her own Jack). Osculatur tigrim suus custos, SEN.,E.M., 85, 41 ;her own keeper kisses the tigress (the tigress is kissed byher own keeper). Cui proposita sit conservatio sui necesse est huic partgsquoque sui caras esse, C., Fin., v. 13, 37; he who has in view the preservationof himself (self-preservation) must necessarily hold dear theparts of (that) self also.This is especially common with suos, which when thus employedhas usually its emphatic sense own, peculiar, proper,:
196 PRONOUNS.3. Sui, sibl, se are the regular complements of the infinitiveand its equivalents when a reflexive idea is involved ; theyare also used with prepositions erga, inter, propter, per, forespecial emphasis.(Roman! sul colligendl hostibus facultatem (non) relinquunt, CAES.,B.O., in. 6, 1 ;the Romans do not leave the enemy a chance to rally.Ipsum Furnium per sS vidl libentissime", C., Fam., x. 3, 1.4. Suos (-us)is also used in prepositional phrases that arejoined closely with the substantives so;after cum, inter, andmore rarely after in, intra, and ad.Magonem cum classe sua in Hispaniam mittunt, L., xxm. 32, 11 ;sent Mago with his fleet to Spain.theyHelvetios in fines suos revertl iussit,CAES., B.G., I. 28, 3 ; he ordered the Helvetians to return to their owncountry.So the phrases su5 tempore, at the right time ; su6 Iocs, at the rightplace.Comoediae quern usura in puerls putem sud loco dicam, QUINT., i. 8, 7 ;what I consider to be the good of comedy in the case of boys I will mentionin the proper place.NOTES. 1. The writer may retain forms of is, if he desires to emphasise his ownpoint of view. So too in prepositional combinations.(Caesar) Ciceronem pro 6ius merits laudat, CAES., B. G., v. 52, 4 ;Caesar praisesCicero according to his desert. [Pompeius] cum decrStum d6 me" Capuae fecit,ipse cunctae Italiae eius fidem imploranti slgnum dedit, C., Ml., 15, 39.2. In early comedy and then again in late Latin, suos is sometimes strengthened bysibl: Suo sibl gladio hunc iugulo, TBB., Ad., 958 ; very rarely in classical Latin(C., Ph., ii. 37, 96). Similarly mea mM, PL., True., 698.3. On suum quisque, see 318, 3.4. In dependent clauses the reflexive is used with reference either to the principal orto the subordinate subject. See for fuller treatment 521.310. Idem, the same, serves to unite two or more attributesor predicates on a person or thing ;it is often to be translatedby at the same time ; likewise, also ; yet, notwithstanding.(Cimon) incidit in eandem invidiam quam pater suus, XEP., v. 3, 1;Cimon fell into the same odium as his father. Quidquid honestum [est]idem [est] utile, C., Off., n. 3, 10 ;whatever is honourable is also (at thesame time) useful. Nil prSdest quod non laedere possit idem, Ov., Tr., n.266 ; nothing helps that may not likewise hurt. (Epicurus), cum optimamet praestantissimam naturam del dlcat esse, negat Idem esse in deo gratiam,G., N.D., 1.43, 121; although Epicurus says that the nature of God is
PRONOUNS. 197transcendently good and great, yet (at the same time) he says that thereis no sense of favour in God. Difficilis facilis, iucundus acerbus, es idem,MART. ,xn. 47, 1 ;crabbed (and) kindly, sweet (and) sour, are you at once.REMARKS. i. When a second attribute is to be added to a substantiveit is often connected by idemque, et Idem, atque idem: Vir doctissimusPlats atque idem gravissimus philosopher uni omnium, C., Leg., IT. 6, 14 ;Plato, a most learned man, and at the same time weightiest of all thephilosophers.2. The same as is expressed by Idem with qul, with atque or ac, withut, with cum, and poetically with the Dative. See 359, N. 6, 642, 643.Tibi mecum in eodem est plstrlno vlvendum, C., Or.,u. 33, 144 ; youhave to live in the same treadmill with me.3. Idem cannot be used with is, of which it is only a stronger form(is + dem).311. i. Ipse, self, is the distinctive pronoun, and separatesa subject or an object from all others :Ipse fSci,/ myself did it and none other, I alone did it, I did it ofmy own accord, I am the very man that did it. Nunc ipsum, at thisvery instant, at this precise moment.Valvae subito s5 ipsae aperuSrunt, C., Div.,i. 34, 74 ;the foldingdoorssuddenly opened of their own accord. (Cato) mortuus est annisoctoginta sex ipsls ante [CicerSnem] consulem, C., Br., 15, 61 ; Cato diedjust eighty-six years before Cicero's consulship. Huic rei quod satis essevisum est militum reliquit (Caesar) ; ipse cum legionibus in fines TrgverSrumproficiscitur, CAES., B.G., v. 2, 4.REMARKS. i.Owing to this distinctive character, ipse is often usedof persons in opposition to things ; riders in opposition to horses ; inhabitantsin opposition to the towns which they inhabit ;the master ofthe house in opposition to his household, etc.E5 quo m5 ipsa misit, PL., Cas.,"]qo; I am going where mistresssent me. Ipse dixit, C., N.D., i. 5, 10 ;the master said (avros !
198 PRONOUNS.the Nominative when the subject isemphatic, in the ObliqueCases when the object is emphatic.S6 ipse laudat, lie (and not another) praises "himself. Sg ipsum laudat,he praises himself (and not another).Piger ipse sibi obstat, PROV. (SEN., E.M., 94, 28) ; the lazy manstands in his own way, is his own obstacle. Non egeo mediclna ;m6ipse consSlor, C., Lael., 3, 10 ;/ do not need medicine; I comfort myself(I am ray only comforter). Eodem modo sapigns erit affectus ergaamicum qu5 in s6 ipsum, C., Fin., i. 20, 68 ;the wise man will feel towardshis friend as he feels towards himself.Exceptions are common :Quique aliis cavit, non cavet ipse sibi, Ov., A. A., i.84 ;and he whocared for others, cares not for himself.NOTE. LIVY seems to use sometimes ipsein connection with a reflexive as if it wereindeclinable or absolute : cum dies vgnit, causa ipse pr5 s6 dicta, damnatur, L.,iv. 44, 10 ; when the appointed day came he pleaded his men. cause and was condemned.4. Possessive Pronouns.312. The Possessive Pronouns are more rarely used in Latinthan in English, and chiefly for the purpose ofclearness.contrast orManus lava et cSna, C., Or., n. 60, 246 ;wash (your) hands and dine.Fraedia mea tu possides, ego aliens misericordia vivo, C., Rose. Am., 50,145 ; you are in possession of my estates, (while) I live on the charityof others.REMARKS. i. Observe the intense use of the Possessive in the senseof property, peculiarity, fitness : suum esse, to belong to one's self, tobe one's own man.Tempore tuo pugnastl, L., xxxvm. 45, 10 ; you have fought at yourown time (= when you wished). Hoc honore mg adfgcistis anno me6,C., Leg. Agr., n. z, 4 ; you visited me with this honour in my own, year(= the first year in which I could be made consul). Pugna suum finem,cum iacet hostis, habet, Ov., Tr., in. 5, 34; a fight has reached its fit endwhen the foe is down.2. On the use of the Possessive Pronouns for the Gen., see 364.5. Indefinite Pronouns.313. Quidam means one, a, a certain one, definite or indefiniteto the speaker, but not definitely designated to the hearer.In the Plural, it is equivalent to some, sundry, without emphasis.
PRONOUNS.199Interea mulier quaedam commigravit hue, TER., And., 6g meanwhilea certain woman took up her quarters here. Intellegendum est quibusdamquaestionibus alios, quibusdam alios esse aptiorgs locos, C., Top., 21, 79 ;it is to be observed that some grounds are more suitable for some questions,for some, others.//., i. 83.Tarn nescire quaedam milites quam sclre oportet, TAC.,REMARKS. i. With an adjective quldam often serves to heighten theattribute by adding a vagueness to it. (Gr. TIS).Est quodam incrSdibill robore animl, C., Mil., 37, 101 ; really he is endowedivith a strange strength of mind (one that is past belief).2. Quldam is often used with or without quasi, as if, to modify anexpression :N5n sunt ist! audiend! qu! virtutem duram et quasi ferream esse quandamvolunt, C., Lael., 13, 48 those ; friends of yours are not to be listened toivho will have it (maintain) that virtue, is hard, and, as it were, made ofiron. Est quaedam virtutum vitiSrumque viclnia, QUINT., n. 12, 4 (cf.in. 7, 25) ;there is a certain neighborly relation between virtues andvices.3. Quldam may be strengthened bythe addition of certus or unus:Vita agenda est certo genere quodam, n5n quolibet, C., Fin., in. 7, 24.Est eloquentia una quaedam d6 summls virtutibus, C., Or., in. 14, 55.314. Aliquis (aliqul) means, some one, some one or other,wholly indefinite to the speaker as well as to the hearer :[Declamabam] cum aliquo cottidie", C., Br., go, 310 ;Iwith somebody or other daily.used to declaimIn the predicate it is often emphatic (by Litotes, 700) : sum aliquis,aliquid, / am somebody = a person of importance, something = ofsome weight ; opposed to : nullus sum, nib.il sum, lam a nobody, nothing.This force is often heightened by a following contrast :Est h5c aliquid, tametsl non est satis, C., Div. in Caec., 15, 47 ;thisis something, although it is not enough. Fac, ut mS velis esse aliquem,quoniam, qui fui et qui esse potul, iam esse n5n possum, C., Alt., in. 15, 8 ;do make out that I am somebody, since I can no longer be the man I wasand the man I might have been.REMARKS. i. Aliquis and aliqul are distinguished as substantive andadjective : accordingly, when aliquis is used with a substantive the relationis appositional. This always occurs with Proper names; and evenwith other substantives the Romans seem to have preferred aliquis toaliqul. (See 107. N. i.)2. With numerals, aliquis is used like English some. Occasionallyalso it has the force of many a. So in CAES., B. C., i. 2, 2, dixerat aliquisleniorem sententiam, where aliquis refers to three persons, named later.
2OOPRONOUNS.315. ftuis (qul), fainter than aliquis, is used chiefly aftersi, if; nisi, unless ; ne, lest ; num, whether, and in relativesentences. See 107, R.Ng quid nimis !TER., And., 6r ; nothing in excess! Fit plerumquent ii qul bonl quid volunt adferre, adfingant aliquid, quo faciant id, quodnuntiant, laetius, C., Ph., 1.3,8; it often happens that those who wish tobring (some) good tidings, invent something more, to make the news morecheering.NOTE?. 1.Aliquis is used after si, etc., when there is stress : si quis, if any ; sialiquis, if some ; si quid, if anything ; si quidquam, if anything at all.SI aliquid dandum est voluptati, senectus modicls convlviis delectari potest,C., Cato. M., 14, 44 ; if something is to be given to pleasure (as something or othermust), old age can take delight in mild festivities.Aliquis is regular if the sentence contains two negatives [Verr6s] nih.il umquam:fgcit sine aliquo quaestu, C., Verr., v. 5, 11. (446.)2.Quis and qul are distinguished as aliquis and aliqul,but the distinction is oftenneglected, even in classical Latin. See 107, N. 1.316. Quispiam is rarer than aliquis, but not to be distinguishedfrom it, except that quispiam never intimates importance.Dixerit quispiam, C., Cat.M., 3, 8 ;some one may say.317. i. ftuisquam and ullus (adjective) mean any one (atall), and are used chiefly in negative sentences, in sentencesthat imply total negation, and in sweeping conditions :[lustitia] numquam nocet culquam, C., Fin., i. 16, 50 ; justice neverhurts anybody. Quis umquam Graecorum rhetorum a Thucydide quidquamduxit 1 C., Or., 9, 317; what Greek rhetorician ever drew anything fromThucydides ? [None]. SI quisquam, ille sapiens fuit, C., Lad., 2,9; ifany one at all (was) wise, he was. Quamdiu quisquam erit qul tS d6fendereaudeat, vIvSs, C., Cat.,i. 2, 6 so ; long as there shall be any one todare defend you, live on. Hostem esse in Syria negant ullum, C., Fam.,in. 8, 10 ; they say that there is not any enemy in Syria. OmninS n6m8ulllus rel fuit gmptor cul dSfuerit hie vgnditor, C.,Ph.,n. 38, 97 ; generallythere was never a buyer of anything who lacked a seller in him(no one ever wanted to buy anything that he was not ready to self).So after comparatives :S51is candor inlustrior est quam Qlllus Ignis, C., N.D., n. 15, 40 ;thebrilliancy of the sun is more radiant than that of any fire.NOTES. 1.Quisquam is occasionally (principally in LIVT) strengthened by Onus,especially after a negative: Cum multl magis fremerent, quam quisquam unusrecusare audSret, L., in. 45, 4.2. After sine, without, omnl is often used instead of ullS (ulla) in early Latin :Sine omni cura dormias, PL., Trin., 621.3. On the use of quisquam as an adj., see 107, 3, N. 2.
PRONOUNS.2O I2. The negative of quisquam is nem6, nobody ; nihil, nothing(108). The negative of ullus is nullus, no, none, whichis also used regularly as a substantive in the Genitive andAblative instead of neminis and nemine.NemQ is also sometimes used apparently as an adjective,though the conception is usually appositional.NSm vir magnus, C., N.D., II. 66, 167 ;no great man, no one (who is)a great man.NOTES. 1. On neque quisquam and et nem5, see 480.2. Nullus is used in familiar language instead of n6n (so sometimes in English) :Philippus nullus usquam, L., xxxn. 35,2 ;no Philip anywhere. Quisis also usedfamiliarly : Prospectum petit, Anthea si quern videat, V., A., 1. 181 ;an Anthem,i. e., Antheus or somebody who would answerfor him.3. Nemo and nullus are occasionally strengthened by unus.318. i.Quisque means each one, as opposed to omnis, every,and is usually post-positive.M6ns cuiusque, is est quisque, C. , Rep. ,vi. 24, 26 ; each man's mindis each man's self. Laudatl omnSs sunt donatique pr5 merits quisque,L., xxxvin. 23 ;all were praised and rewarded, each one according tohis desert. Quam quisque n5rit artem in hac sS exerceat, [C.], Tusc.,i.18, 41. (616.)2. With superlatives and ordinals quisque is loosely translatedevery :Optimum quidque rarissimum est, C., Fin., n. 25, 81 ; every goodthing is rare ; more accurately, the better a thing, the rarer it is. (645,R. 2.) Quints quSque anno Sicilia t6ta cSnsStur, C., Verr., n. 56, 139 ;every fifth year all Sicily is assessed.3. Quisque combines readily with the reflexives, sul, sibl,se, suus, in their emphatic sense (309, 2). Here, except forSuum culque has be-special reasons, the reflexive precedes.come a standing phrase.Sua quemque fraus et suus terror vexat, C., Rose. Am., 24,6? ;it ishis own sin and his own alarm that harasses a man.NOTES. 1. After CICERO'S time, owing to the phraseological character of the combination,sul etc. quisque, we find it used without agreement.Exercitus amisso duce ac passim multls sib! quisque imperium petentibusbrevl dilabitur, S.,Iuy., i8,3. Instigando suos quisque populos eff5c6re utomne Volscum nSmen deficeret, L.,n. 38, 6.2. Classical but not common is the attraction of quisque into the case of thereflexive. Haec procllvitas ad suum quodque genus a similitudine corporisaegrotatio dlcatur, C., Tusc., iv. 12, 28.
2O2PROXOUXS.3.Quisque combined with primus has two meanings : (a) as early as possible, (&)one after the other in order (deinceps).Primo quoque tempore, C., Ph., m. 15, 39 ;at the earliest time jxwsible. Prlmumquidque (each thing in order) considers quale sit, C., JT.Z>., i. 27, 77.4. The various uses of quisque are well summed up iiLNiGELSBACH's formulae :a. Non omnia omnibus tribuenda sunt, sed suum cuique ;b. Omnes idem faciunt, sed optimus quisque optiuie ;c. Non omnibus annis hoc fit, sed tertio quoque anno ;d. Non omnes idem faciunt, sed quod quisque volt.319. Alter and alius are both translated other, another, butalter refers to one of two, alius to diversity. They are usedin various phraseological ways, which can be bestexamples :shown bySolus aut cum alters, alone or with (only) one other; alter Nero, asecond Nero.Alter alterum quaerit, one (definite person) seeks the other (definiteperson) alius alium quaerit, one seeks one, another another ; alterl;alter!, one party another party (already defined) alii ; alii, someothers. Alter often means neighbor, brother, fellow-man ; alius, thirdperson.Alter:(Age"silaiis) fuit claudus alters pede, NEP., svn. 8, 1 :Agesilaiis ivaslame of one foot. Altera manu fert lapidem, panem ostentat altera, PL. ,Aul., 195; in one hand a stone he carries, in the other holds out bread.Mors nee ad vivQs pertinet nee ad mortuos : alterl null! (317, 2, N. 2) snnt,alteros non attinget, C., Tusc., i. 38, 91 ;death concerns neither the livingnor the dead : the latter are not, the former it will not reach.Alius:Fallacia alia aliam trudit, TER., And., 779 ;one lie treads on the heelsof another (indefinite series). Alii voluptatis causa omnia sapientesfacere dixerunt ;alii cum voluptate dignitatem coniungendam putaverunt,C., Gael., 15, 41 some have said that wise men do; everything for thesake of pleasure, others have thought that pleasure is to be combinedwith dignify. DIvitias alii praeponunt, alii honores, C., Lael., 6, 20; someprefer riches, others honors. Alii vestrum ansergs sunt, alii canes, C.,Rose. Am., 20, 57 ;some of you are geese, others dogs. Aliud alii naturaiter ostendit, S., C., z, 9 ;nature shows one path to one man, anotherpath to another man.Alter and alius :Ab alio expectSs alteri quod fScerls, SYRUS, 2 (Fr.) ; you may look forfrom another what you've done unto your brother (from No. 3, whatNo. i has done to No. 2).
APPOSITION. 203NOTES. 1. Alius is found occasionally, especially in late Latin, for alter : aliusNer6, SUET., Tit. ^ but in CAES., B. G., 1. ; 1, 1, alius follows unus. Alii for reliqulor cSteri is occasional, in the earlier times, but more common in LIVT and later.2. The Greek usage of alius in the meaning besides, is poet-Ciceronian and rare.E5 missa plaustra iumentaque alia, L., iv. 41,8.APPOSITION.320. By apposition one substantive is placed by the side ofanother, which contains it :picero Orator, Cicero the orator. Bhenus flumen, the river Shine.CONCORD.321. The word in apposition agrees with the principal word(or words) in case, and as far as it can in gender and number :Norn. Herodotus pater historiae, Herodotus the father of history ;Gen. Herodoti patris historiae ;Dat. HSrodoto patri historiae.Cnidus et Colophon, nobilissimae urbes, captae sunt, Cf. C., Imp., 12, 33;Cnidus and Colophon, most noble cities, were taken. Omnium doctrlnaruminventrices Athenae, Cf. C., Or., i. 4, 13; Athens, the inventor of allbranches of learning.REMARKS. i.Exceptions in number are due to special uses, as, forexample, when cleliciae or amorSs, etc., are used of a Singular :Pompeius, nostri amores, ipse sS affllxit, C., Att., n. 19, 2 ;special passion, has wrecked himself,Pompey, our2. The Possessive Pronoun takes the Gen. in apposition :Tuum, hominis simplicis, pectus vidimus, C., Ph., n. 43, 111 : we haveseen your bosom bared, you open-hearted creature ! Urbs mea unius operafuit salva, Cf. C., Pis., 3, 6 ;the city was saved by my exertions alone.3. On the agreement of the predicate with the word in apposition,see 211, R. 6.NOTES. 1. In poetry, instead of the Voc. in apposition, the Nom. is often found.Semper celebrabere donis, Corniger Hesperidum, fluvius regnator aquarum,V., A., vin. 77. In prose not before PLINY.2. Very rarely persons are looked upon as things, and the Appositives used hi theneuter :Dum patrgs et plSbem, invalida et inermia, ludificStur, TAC., Ann., i. 46.322. Partitive Apposition. Partitive isApposition thatform of Apposition in which a part is taken out of the whole.It is sometimes called Eestrictive Apposition.Maxuma pars fere" morem hunc homines habent, PL., Capt., 232 ;mankindprettymuch the greatest part of them have this way. Ceteramultitude sorte decumus quisque ad supplicium lecti (sunt), L., n. 59, 11 ;(of) the rest of the crowd every tenth man was chosen by lot for punishment.
2O4APPOSITION.323. Distributive Apposition. Distributive Appositionisthat form of Appositionin which the whole is subdividedinto its parts, chiefly with alter alter, the one the other ;quisque, uterque, each one; alii alii, pars pars, someothers.(It is often called Partitive Apposition.)Duae flliae altera occisa altera capta est, CAES., B.&., i. 53, 4 ; (of)two daughters, the one was killed, the other captured.REMARK. The Part. Gen. is more commonly employedof these forms of apposition.than eitherNOTES. 1. Partitive Apposition is not found in CICERO or CAESAR, and DistributiveApposition rarely. They are more frequent in SALLUST, and not uncommon in LIVT.2. The Greek figure of the whole and the part (
APPOSITION.2O5Predicative Apposition : Hercules, when a young man, sleiv alion = he was a young man when he slew a lion.GENITIVE : Potestas eius adhibendae uxoris, the permission to take herto wife.DATIVE : Amico vivo non subvSnistl, you did not help your friend(while he was) alive.ACCUSATIVE : Hercules cervam vivam cepit.Ordinary Attribution : Hercules caught a living doe.Predicative Attribution : Hercules caught a doe alive.ABLATIVE : Acre utuntur importatS, they use imported copper = thecopper which they use is imported.REMARKS. i. The Voc., not being a case proper, is not used predi-Ciitively. Exceptions are apparent or poetical.Quo, moriture, ruis ? V., A., x. 810" ";whither dost thou rush to die(thou doomed to die) ? Sic venias, hodierne, TIB., i. 7, 53.Notice here the old phrase : Macte virtute esto, EL, S., i. 2, 31 ;increasein virtue = heaven speed thee in thy high career.Macte is regarded by some as an old Voc., from the same stem aemagnus by;others as an adverb. A third view is that macte with esto is an adverb, and onlywhen used absolutely a Vocative.2. VictorSs redierunt may mean, the conquerors returned, or, they returnedconquerors ; and a similar predicative use is to be noticed inidem, the same: Ildem abeunt qui vSnerant, C., Fin., iv. 3, 7 ; they goawayjust as they had come (literally, the same persons as they had come).3. Predicative Attribution and Apposition are often to be turnedinto an abstract substantive :Defendi rem publicam adul6sc6ns, non deseram senex, C., Ph., II. 46, 118;I defended the state in my youth, I will not desert her in my old age.So with prepositions:Ante Ciceronem consulem, before the consulship of Cicero ;conditam, before the building of the city.ante urbem4. Do not confound the "as" of apposition with the "as" of comparisonut, quasi, tamquam, sicut, velut (602, N. 1, 642): Hanc (virtutem)vobis tamquam hgrgditatem maiores vestri reliquerunt, C., Ph., iv. 5, 13 ;your ancestors left you this virtue as (if it were) a legacy.5. When especial stress is laid on the adjective or substantive predicate,in combination with the verbal predicate, the English languageisprone to resolve the sentence into its elements :Fragilem true! commlsit pelago ratem primus, H., 0., I. 3, 10; his frailbark to the wild waves he trusted first= to trust his frail bark to thewild waves he was first. Una salus victis nullam sperare salutem, V., A.,i 1 -353 5s le safety for the vanquished 'tis, to hope for none the onlysafety that the vanquished have is to hope for none.
2O6PREDICATE.6. The English idiom often uses the adverb and adverbial expressionsinstead of the Latin adjective: so in adjectives of inclination and disinclination,knowledge and ignorance, of order and position, of time andseason, and of temporary condition generally : libgns, with pleasure;volgns, willing(ly) ; nolens, unwillingly) ; invltus, against one's will ;prudens, aware ; imprudSns, unawares ; sciens, knoicing(ly) ; primus, prior,first ; ultimas, last ; uiedius, in, about the middle ; hodiernus, to-day ;matutlnus, in the morning ; frequens, frequently) ; subllmis, aloft ; totus,wholly ; s51us, unus, alone, and many others.Ego eum a mg invltissimus dlmlsl, C., Fam., xm. 63, 1 ;1 dismissedhim most unwillingly. Plus hodiS boni feci imprudgns quam sciens antehunc diem umquam, TER., Sec., 880 ;I have done more good to-dayunawares than I have ever done knowingly before. Adcurrit, mediammulierem complectitur, TER., And., 133 ;he runs up, puts his arms aboutthe woman's waist.Qni prior strinxerit ferrum eius victoria erit, L., xxiv.38, 5 (244, R. 2). Vespertlnus pete tectum, H., Ep., i. 6. 20 ; seek thy dwellingat eventide. Rarus venit in cenacula miles, Juv., x. 18 ; the soldieryrarely comes into the garret. SS totos tradidfirunt voluptatibus, C.,Lad. , 23, 86 ; they have given themselves wholly to pleasure. Soli h
EXTEKNAL CHANGE ACCUSATIVE. 2O?I. External change : combination with an object.i. Direct Object, Accusative. 2. Indirect Object, Dative.II. Internal changebe in the form ofmay: combination with an attribute which1. The Genitive case. 3. Preposition with a case.2. The Ablative. 4. An Adverb.NOTE. The Infinitive forms (Infinitive, Gerund, Gerundive, and Supine) appearnow as objects, now as attributes, and require a separate treatment.I. External Change.Accusative.The great function of the Accusative is to form temporary compounds with the verb,as the great function of the Genitive is to form temporary compounds with the noun.Beyond this statement everything is more or less extra-grammatical, and sharp subdivisionsare often unsatisfactory. Still it may be said that328. The Accusative is the case of the Direct Object.The Direct Objectis the object which definesaction of the verb.directly theREMARK. The Dative defines indirectly because it involves an Accusative;and the Genitive with the verb depends upon the nominalidea contained in the verb.1. (a) The Object may be contained in the verb (InnerObject, Object Effected) :Deus mundum creavit, God made a creation the universe.(b)Akin to this is the Accusative of Extent :A rScta conscientia traversum unguem non oportet discedere, C., Att.,xin. 20, 4 ;one ought not to swerve a nailbreadth from a right conscience.Decem ann5s (Troia) oppugnSta est, L., v. 4, 11 ten ; years was Troylesieged. Maximam partem lacte vivunt, CAES., B.G., iv. i, 8 ; for themost part they live on milk.2. The object may be distinct from the verb (Outer Object,Object Affected) :Deus mundum gubernat, God steers the universe.
2O8ACCUSATIVE.General View of the Accusative.329. I. Inner Object:Object Effected :Cognate Accusative.Accusative of Extent.1. In Space.2. In Time.II. Outer Object:Object Affected :3. In Degree.Terminal Accusative (Point Reached).1. Whole.2. Part (so-called Greek Accusative).III. Inner and Outer Objects combined :1.Asking and Teaching.2.Making and Taking.IV. Accusative as the most general form of the object (objectcreated or called up by the mind) :1. In Exclamations.2. Accusative and Infinitive.DIRECT OBJECT (Inner and Outer).NOTE. The Accusative is the object reached by the verb. This object is either inapposition to the result of the action of the verb, and then it is called the Inner Objector Object Effected ;or it is in attribution to the result of the action, and then it is saidto be the Outer Object or Object Affected. The Inner Object is sometimes called theVoluntary Accusative, because it is already contained in the verb ;the Outer Object issometimes called the Necessary Accusative, because it is needed to define the characterof the action ;both verb and substantive contribute to the result ; compare hominemcaedere (occldere), to slay a man (Object Affected), with homicidium facere (6Jf.QUINT., v. 9,9), to commit manslaughter (Object Effected).330. Active Transitive Verbs take the Accusative case :Eomulus TJrbem Eomam condidit, Cf. C., Div., I. 17, 80 ; Romulusfounded the City of Rome. (Object Effected.)[MSns] regit corpus, C., Rep., vi. 24, 26 ;mind governs body. (ObjectAffected.)REMARK. Many verbs of Emotion which are intrans. in English aretrans, in Latin, as :dolere, to grieve (for) ; dgspgrare, to despair (of);horrere, to shudder (at) ; mlrarl, to wonder (at) ; rldSre, to laugh (at).Honores d6sp5rant, C., Oat., n. 9, 19 ; they despair of honours (givethem up in despair). Necata est Vitia quod fllil necem flgvisset (541),TAC., Ann., vr. 10, 1 Vitia was executed;for having wept (for) her son'sexecution. Conscia mens rSctl Famae mendacia risit, Ov., F.,i\. 311 ;conscious of right, her soul (but) laughed (at) the falsehoods of Rumour.
ACCUSATIVE.2O9NOTES. 1. From the definition of transitive given above (213, R.) it will be seen thatthis traditional rule reverses the poles ; it is retained merely for practical purposes.2. This Ace. with verbs of Emotion is very rare in early Latin, and is not widelyextended even in the classical period. With most verbs an Abl. of Cause or a prepositionalphrase is much more common, as : Cur d5 sua virtute desperarent ? CAES.,B. G.,i. 40, 4.3. The Ace. with verbal substantives is confined to PLAUTUS :quid tibl n5stactiSst, mendlce homo ? Aul., 423.4. The Ace. with verbal adjectives in -undus is rare and mainly post-classical :Haec prope contionabundus circumibat homines, L., in. 47, 2.331. Verbs compounded with, the prepositions ad, ante,circum, con, in, inter, ob, per, praeter, sub, subter, super, andtrans, which become transitive, take the Accusative.All with circum, per, praeter, trans, and subter.Many with ad, in, and super.Some with ante, con, inter, ob, and sub. See 347.Pythagoras Persarum magos adiit, C., Fin., v. 29, 87 ; Pythagorasapplied to (consulted) the Persian magi. Stella Veneris antegreditursolem, C., N.D., n. 20, 53 ;the star Venus goes in advance of the sun.OmnSs Domitium circumsistunt, CAES., B.C., i. 20, 5 ;all surround Domitius.Earn, si opus esse videbitur, ipse conveniam, C., Fam., v. n, 2 ;I will go to see her, myself, if it shall seem expedient. Convlvia cumpatre n5n inibat, C., Rose. Am., 18, 52 ;he would not go to banquets withhis father. Fretum, quod Naupactum et Patras interfluit, L. ,xxvu. 29, 9 ;the frith that flan's between Naupactus and Patrae. Alexander tertioet tricesimo annO mortem obiit, C., Ph., v. 17, 48 ;Alexander died in histhirty-third year.Caesar omnem agrum Plcenum percurrit, CAES., B.C.,i. 15, 1 ;Caesar traversed rapidly all the Picenian district. [Populus]solet dlgnos praeterire, C., Plane., 3, 8 the ; people is wont to pass by theworthy. Epaminondas poenam subiit, Cf. NEP., xv. 8, 2 ; Epaminondassubmitted to the punishment. Criminum vim subterfugere nullo modepoterat, C., Verr., I. 3, 8 ;he could in no way evade the force of thecharges. Roman! rulnas murl supervadebant, L., xxxn. 24, 5 ;theRomans marched over the ruins of the wall. Crassus Euphratem nullsbelli causa transiit, Cf. C., Fin., 111.22, 75; Crassus crossed the Euphrateswithout any cause for war.REMARKS. i. If the simple verb is trans., it can take two Accusatives:Equitum magnam partem flumen traiecit, CAES., B. C., i. 55, 1 ;hethrew a great part of the cavalry across the river.2. With many of these verbs the preposition may be repeated ; butnever circum :C5pias traiecit Bhodaaum, or trans Rhodanum, he threw histroops across the Rhone.3. Sometimes a difference of signification is caused by the additionof the preposition:14
2IOACCUSATIVE.Adlre ad aliquem, to go to a man ; adlre aliquern, to apply to (to consult)a man.INNER OBJECT.332. Any verb can take an Accusative of the Inner Object,when that object serves to define more narrowly or to explainmore fully the contents of the verb.The most common form of this object is a neuter pronoun or adjective.The most striking form is the so-called Cognate Accusative.333. i. Neuter Pronouns and Adjectives are often usedto define or modify the substantive notion that lies in theverb.XenophSn eadera fere" peccat, G.,N.D., I. 12, 31 ; Xenophon makesvery much the same mistakes. Vellem equidem idem possem gloriarl quodCyrus, C., Cat.M., 10, 32 ;for my part I could wish that it were in mypower to make the same boast as Cyrus.With trans, verbs an Ace. of the person can be employed besides:DIscipulos id unurn moneo ut praeceptores suds non minus quam ipsastudia ament, QUINT., n. 9, 1 ;/ give pupils this one piece of advice,that they love their teachers no less than their studies themselves.REMARKS. i. The usage is best felt by comparing the familiar Englishit after intrans. verbs, " to walk it, to foot it," etc., where " it "represents the substantive that lies in ' ' walk, foot, " etc.2. In many cases the feeling of the case is lost to the consciousness,so especially with the interrogative quid, which has almost the force ofcur. Quid rides ? ichat (laughter) are you laughing = what means yourlaughter ?Id nos ad tS, si quid vellSs, vgnimus, PL., M.G., 1158 ;that's why wehave come to you, to see if you wanted anything.NOTES. 1. With verbs of Emotion this Ace. gives the ground of the emotion :TTtrumque laetor (/ have a double gladness, I am doubly glad), et sine dolore t6fuisse et animo valuisse, c., Fam., vii. i, l. Laetae exclamant : venit ! id quod(in this that, for this that) mS repente aspexerant, TEK., Hec., 368.From this arises the causal force of quod, in that because.2. Occasionally, but at all periods, the relative is used thus, to facilitate connectionwith a demonstrative clause :Quae homings arant (what men do in the way ofplowing, etc.), navigant, aedificant,omnia virtutl parent, 9., C., 2, 7. Id ipsum quod maneam in vita (in theveryfact of my remaining in life) peccare m6 [existimS], C., Fam., iv. 13, 2.2.Cognate Accusative. When the dependent word is ofthe same origin or of kindred meaning with the verb,it iscalled the Cognate Accusative, and usually has an attribute.
ACCUSATIVE. 211Faciam tit mel memineris dum vltam vivas, PL. ,Pers. , 494 I'll make;you think of me the longest day you live. Minna atque inscltum somniavlsomnium, PL., Rud., 597 a marvellous anduncanny dream I've dreamed.;luravi vSrissimum ius iurandum, C., Fam., v. 2, 7; I swore the truest ofoaths.REMARK. After the analogy of the Cognate Ace. are many phraseologicalusages, such as rem certare, to fight a case ; foedus ferire, to makea treaty (compare, to strike a bargain); ius respondere, to render anopinion ; causam vincere, to win a case, etc. Also the phrases withIre :exsequias Ire, to attend a funeral ; Infitias Ire, to deny, etc.NOTES. 1. The omission of the attribute is found most often in legal phraseology,proverbs, and the like :Maidrum nSmd servitutem servlvit, C., Top., 6, 29 ; of our ancestors no one everslaved (what you would call) a slavery. SI servos furtum faxit noxiamve noxit,xii. Tab.2. When the Cognate Ace. is replaced by a word of similar meaning, but of a differentroot, the effect is much the same as when an adjective is employed with the normalAccusative. This usage, however, is rare, and mainly poetical.Tertiam iam aetatem hominnm (Nestor) vivSbat, C., Cat.M., 10,31 (readingdoubtful). Omue mllitabitur bellum, H. , Epod., i, 23.3. Interesting extensions are found in the poets, and rarely in prose.Qul Curios simulant et Bacchanalia vivunt, Juv., n. 3. Nunc Satyrum,nunc agrestem Cyclopa movStur, H., Ep., n. a, 125.4. Instead of the Inner Ace. the Abl. is occasionally found :lapidibus pluere, torain stones ;sanguine sudare, to sweat blood.Herculis simulacrum multo sudflre manavit, C.,Div., i. 34,74; the statue ofHercules ran freely with sweat.5. Verbs of Smell and Taste have the Inner Object, which is an extension of theCognate variety.Fiscis sapit ipsum mare, Cf. SEN., N. Q.,in. 18, 2 ; thejlsh tastes of the very sea.N5n oinnes possunt olSre unguenta exotica, PL., Most., 42 ; it is not every one cansmell offoreign perfumes.6. A poetical and post-classical construction is that which makes a substantivalneuter adjective the object of a verb. This occurs chiefly with verbs of sound : neemortale sonans, V., A., vi. 50 ;magnasonaturum, H., S., i. 4, 44. Yet bolder isnee v5x hominem sonat, V., ^.,1.328. A verb of sight is found in tarn cernisacu turn, H., A, i. 3 26. , Cf. dulce rldentem, H., O.,
212 ACCUSATIVE.REMARKS. i. The number of adjectives and pronouns so used islarge, and in manycases the form is felt more as an adverb than as asubstantive.2. Here belong the adverbial Accusatives tuam, etc. , partem, vicem,which occur occasionally at all periods.335. The Accusative of Extent in Space is used properlyonly with words that involve a notion of space. When spaceis not involved in the governing word the idea of extent isgiven by the use of per, through.Trabgs, distantSs inter s6 binds pedSs, in solo collocantur, CAES., B.G.,vu. 23, 1 ;beams two feet apart are planted in the ground. A recta c5nscientiatraversum unguem non oportet discedere, C. Att., xin. 20, 4 (328,b). Equites per oram maritimam dispositi sunt, Cf. CAES., B.C., m. 24,4 ; cavalry were posted along the sea shore. Phoebidas iter per Thbas[fecit], NEP., xvi. i, 2 ;Phoebidas marched through Thebes. Mllitesaggerem latum pedes trecentos triginta altum pedes octoginta exstruxerunt,CAES., B.G., vu. 24, 1; the soldiers raised an embankment threehundred and thirty feet wide (and) eighty feet high.REMARKS. i. The adjectives in most common use with this Accusativeare longus, long, latus, wide, altus, deep, high. Thickness, whichwas indicated in early times by crassus, is expressed by phrases withcrassitude. Similarly occur phrases with magnitude, longitude, latitude,altitude. Profundus, deep, never occurs with the Accusative.2. With abesse and distare, an Abl. of Measure may also be used :Milibus passuum quattuor et vlginti abesse, CAES., E.G., i. 41, 5 ;tobe twenty-four miles fromNOTE. When the point of reference is taken for granted, ab (a) with the Abl. isoccasionally used ;but only by CAESAB and LIVT. Here it has been suggested that abis used adverbially, and the Abl. is one of Measure.(Host6s) ab milibus passuum minus duobus castra posuSrunt, CAES., B.G.,ii. 7, 3 ;the enemy pitched their camp less than two miles off.336. The Accusative of Extent in Time accompanies theverb, either with or without per, in answer to the question,How long 9Duodequadraginta annos tyrannus Syracusanorum fuit Dionysius, C.,Tusc., v. 20, 57 ; thirty-eight years was Dionysius tyrant of Syracuse.(Gorgias) centum et novem visit annos, QUINT., in. i, 9 (333, N. 2). Ludlper decem digs fact! sunt, C., Cat., in. 8, 20 ; games were performed forten days. Est niecum per diem tStum, PLIN., Ep.,i. 16, 7 ;he is with methe livelong day. Sedet aeternumque sedebit infSlIx Theseus, V., A., vi.617 ;there sits and shall forever sit unhappy Theseus.
ACCUSATIVE. 213REMARKS. i. In giving definite numbers with lam, iam diu, iamdudum, etc., the Latin often employs the ordinal where the Englishprefers the cardinal. Compare the Ablative of Measure (403).Mithridates annum iamtertium et vicesimum rggnat, G.,Imp., 3, 7 (230).2. Per with the Ace. is frequently used like the Abl. of Time WithinWhich. Per ilia tempora = illis temporibus, in those times.So especially with the negative :Nulla r5s per triennium nisi ad nutum istius iudicata est, C., Verr.,i.5, 13 no matter was decided ; during (in) the three years except at hisbeck.3. With an Aoristie tense the dating point is given by abhinc, whichusually precedes the temporal designation.Abhinc annos factumst sSdecim, PL., Cas., 39 ;'twas done sixteen yearsago. D6mosthen6s abhinc annos prope trecentos fuit, C., Div., u. 57, 118;Demosthenes lived nearly three hundred years ago.The use of an Ace. with an Aoristie tense without a dating word, like abhinc, isvery rare and doubtful. CAES., B. G., n. 35, 4, has been emended.4. Natus, old (born), seems to be an exception to R. 3, but it is onlyan apparent one, as the dating point is involved in the verb with whichit is construed. For various constructions with natus, see 296, R. 5.Puer decem annos natus est, the boy is ten years old. Quadragintaannos natus rSgnare [coepit], C., Div., i. 23, 46 ; (he was) forty yearsold (when) he began to reign.NOTES. 1. The use of the indefinite substantival adjective is rare. PLAUTUS usesserapiternum, VERGTL introduces aeternum (see example above), while perpetuumdoes not appear until APULBIUS.2. Here belong the phraseological uses id temporis, id aetatis, which belonged tothe popular speech, and never became firmly rooted in literature. Thus CICERO rarelyuses them, except in his earliest works and his letters. Id isgenus used after the samegeneral analogy, but is not temporal. This occurs in CICEBO but once, Alt., xin. 12, 3.CAESAR never uses any of these forms.3. Poetical and rare is the extension which makes the Accusative of Extent the subjectof a passive verb.Nunctertiavlvitur aetas, Ov., M., xn. 188 = nunc tertiam vivitur aetatem.Tota mini dormltur hiems, MART., xni. 59, l = totam dormio hiemem.Normally the verb becomes impersonal or is regularly used with a proper subject,and the Accusative of Extent is unchanged : [Bellum] quo duodecimum annumItalia urgbatur, L., xxvn. 39, 9.Accusative of the Local Object.Terminal Accusative.337. The activity of a verb may be defined by the PointReached. Hence the rule : Names of Towns and smallIslands, when used as limits of Motion Whither, are put inthe Accusative.
214 ACCUSATIVE.So also rus,into the country, domum, domds, home.MissI legati Athgnas sunt, L., in. 31, 8 ; envoys were sent to Athens.Latona confugit Delum, Cf. C., Verr., i. 18, 48 ;Latona took refuge inDelos. Ego rus ibo atque ibi manebo, TER., Eun., 216; I shall go tothe country and stay there. Innumerabiles (pbilosopb.1) numquam domumreverterunt, C., Tusc., v. 37, 107 ;innumerable philosophers never returnedhome.REMARKS. i. Countries and large islands being looked \ipon asareas, and not as points, require prepositions, such as :in, into ; ad, to ;versus, -ward ; in Graeciam proficiscl, to set out for Greece.2. When nrbem, city, or oppidum, town, precedes the name of thecity or town, the idea of area is emphasised, and the preposition in orad is prefixed if urbem or oppidum follows, in or ad may be omitted ; :In (ad) oppidum Cirtam, to, in (at) the town (of) Cirta.When urbem or oppidum is qualified by an adjective, it regularly followsthe name of the town, and has the preposition:lugurtha Thalam pervenit in oppidum magnum et opulentum, S., lug.,75, 1 ; Jugurtha arrived at Thala, a great and wealthy town.3. Domum, with a possessive pronoun, or Gen., may mean houseas well as home, and accordingly may or may not have in before it :domum meam, or, in domum meam, to my house ; domum Pompeii, or, indomum Pompeii, to Pompey's house ; also domum ad Pompgium. Otherwisein :magnificam domum venire, to come into a grand house.4. Ad means to the neighbourhood of, often before, of militaryoperations. Ad Mutinam, to the neighbourhood (siege of) Mutina(Modena).5. The simple Ace. will suffice even for extent :Omnia ilia municipia, quae sunt a Viboue Brundisium, C., Plane., 41, 97;all the free towns from Vibo to Brundisium.6. Motion to a place embraces all the local designations :Phalara in sinum Maliacum procgsserat, L., xxxv. 43, 8 ;he had advancedto Phalara on the Naliac Gulf. Tarentum in Italiam inferioremproficiscl, to set out for Tarentum in Lower Italy.NOTES. 1. The omission of the preposition before countries and large islands isCAESAR shows such omission with Aegyptus only, CICEROpoetical and post-classical.not at all.2. Poets and later prose writers extend the Ace. also to names of peoples and streams.Beginnings of this are seen in CICERO cum *Bosphorum : cSnfugisset, Mur., 16, 34.3. The insertion of the preposition with names of towns and small islands is rare ingood prose, but is always? legitimate when the preposition is to be emphasised.4. The use of usque with this Ace. to emphasise the continuity of the motion isfound first in TERENCE, occasionally iu CICERO. From LIVT on it spreads and is usedalso with other local designations.5. Verbal substantives are also occasionally followed by this Accusative :KeditUSreturn to Rome.Bomam, C., Ph., n. 42, 108 ;
ACCUSATIVE. 215OUTER OBJECT.Accusative ofRespect.338. The Accusative of the object affected sometimes specifies thatin respect to which the statement of a passive or intransitive verb,or an adjective, applies. There are two varieties :1. Definite: The Accusative of the part affected.Percussa, nova mentem formldine, V., G., iv. 357 ;her mind strickenwith a new dread. lam vulgatum actis quoque saucius pectus, QUINT.,ix. 3, 17 ;newspaper phrase.by this time " breast-wounded" is actually become a common2. Indefinite : cetera, alia, reliqua, oinnia, pleraque, cuncta ;in otherrespects, in all respects, in most respects.Cetera adsentior CrassS, C., Or., i. 9, 35 ;in all other points I agreewith Crassus. Omnia Mercurio similis, V., A., iv. 558 ;in all respectslike unto Mercury.NOTES. 1. This is commonly called the Greek Accusative, because it is so muchmore common in Greek, and because its extension in Latin is due to Greek influence.The first variety is very rare in early Latin ;introduced into prose by SALLUST, it iaextended in LIVY, but in both is applied usually to wounds. It is much more commonin the poets. Of the second variety cStera is found here and there at all periods ;theothers are very rare. Good prose uses the Ablative for the first variety, and for thesecond, ad cetera, in cSteris, per cStera, etc.2. Different is the Accusative with induor, / don ; exuor, I doff; cingor, / gird onmyself, and other verbs of clothing and unclothing, as well as passives, where theSubject is also the Agent in;which verbs the reflexive or middle signification is retained.These uses are poetical or post-classical.Inutile ferrum cingitur, V.,^1., 11.510 ; he girds on (himself) a useless blade.LQricam induitur fldoque accingitur Snse, V., A., VH. 640 ;he dons a corselet andbegirds himself with his trusty glaive. (Arminius) impetu equl pervasit oblitusfaciem suo cruore n n5scere"tur, TAG., Ann. 11.17,7; Hermann pushed his waythrough, thanks to the onset of his charger, having smeared his face with his own gore,to keepfrom being recognised.DOUBLE ACCUSATIVE (Inner and Outer).When two Accusatives depend on the same verb, one is the Inner and the other theOuter object. Theoretically any combination of Inner and Outer objects is allowable ;practically the language has restricted its usage to varieties a and b.339. (a) Active verbs signifying to Inquire, to Require,to Teach, and celare, to conceal, take two Accusatives, oneof the Person, and the other of the Thing.PusiSnem quondam Socrates interrogat quaedam ge5metrica, C., Tusc.,i. 24, 57 ;Socrates asks an urchin sundry questions in geometry.Caesar Aeduos frumentum flagitabat, CAES. ,B.G., i. 16, 1 ;Caesar keptdemanding the corn of the Aedui. Quid nunc tS, asine, litteras doceam 1(265), C., Pis., 30, 73 ; why should I now give you a lesson in literature,
2l6ACCUSATIVE.you donkey ?Non te celavl sermonem Ampii, C., Fam., n. 16, 3, / did notkeep you in the dark about my talk with Ampins.REMARKS. i. The expressions vary a good deal. Observe :This then is not the only way,For it is also right to say,Docere and celare de,Interrogate dg qua re.Posco, / claim, and flagit5,And always peto, postulo,Take aliquid ab aliquo,While quaero takes ex, ab, dg, qu5.Adherbal Eomam legates miserat, qul senatum docerent de caede fratris,S., lug., 13, 3 ;Adherbal had sent envoys to Rome to inform thesenate of the murder of his brother.Bassus noster me de hoc libro celavit,C., Fam., vu. 20, 3 ;our friend Bassus has kept me in the darkabout this book. Aquam a pumice nunc postulas, PL., Pers., 41 ; you arenow asking water of a pumice-stone (blood of a turnip).2. With doceo the Abl. of the Instrument is also used : docere fidibus,equo, to teach the lyre, to teach riding ; with grudire, the Abl., in withthe Abl. or (rarely) dS. Doctus and erudltus generally take the Abl. :Doctus Graecis lltteris, a good Grecian.3. With celarl the Ace. of the Thing becomes the subject, and theAce. of the Person is retained ; or the Ace. of the Person is made thesubject, and instead of the Ace. of the Thing, d6 with the Abl. is used.NOTES. 1. There is a great deal of difference ia the relative frequency of theseverbs. So doceo and its compounds, rogo, posco, repOSCS, C516,are common ; interrogo,oro, exposed, postulo, flagito, consulo, are rare, exigS (in passive), percontor,are ante-classical and post-classical. So, too, the classical Latin in generalavoids two Accusatives, unless one is a neuter pronoun.2. The construction with ab, with verbs of Requiring, is much more common thanthe double Ace., and in some cases is necessary ; so, too, the construction with d6 afterverbs of Inquiring.3. Other verbs of teaching than doceo and its compounds, and Srudlre, always havedS until late Latin, as instruere, etc.So docere, when it means to inform.4. The Passive form, with the Nom. of the Person and the Ace. of the Thing, issparingly used. Discere is the prose word for docSrl, except that the past participledoctus is classical but rare.Motus doceri gaudet lonicos matura virgS, H., 0.,m. 6,21 the rare ;ripemaid delights to learn Ionic dances. Vir omnes belli art6s edoctus, L., xxv. 40, 5 ;one who had learned (been taught) thoroughly all the arts of war.340. (b) Verbs of Naming, Making, Taking, Choosing,Showing, may have two Accusatives of the same Person orThing :[Iram] bene Ennius initium dixit Insaniae, C. , Tusc., iv. 23, 52 ;well didEnnius call anger the beginning of madness. Ancum Marcium rggempopulus creavit, L., i. 32, 1 ; the people made Ancus Marcius king. GateValerium Flaccum habuit collegam, Cf. NEP., xxiv. i, 2; Cato had ValeriusFlaccus (as) colleague. Bum simillimum deo iudico, C., Marc., 3, 8 ;1judge him (to be) very like unto a god.AthSniensibus Pythia praecepit ut
ACCUSATIVE. 217Miltiadem sib! imperatorem sumerent, NEP., i. i, 3 the ; Pythia instructedthe Athenians to take Miltiades (as) their commander. Praesta tS eumqul mini es cognitus, C., Fam., i. 6, 2 ;show yourself the man that Iknow you to be. Quern intellegimus divitem ? C., Par., vi. i, 42 ;whomdo we understand by the rich man ?REMAKKS. i. The Double Ace. is turned into the Double Nom.with the Passive (206).Reddo, I render, is not used in the Passive, but,instead thereof, fio, / become.Habeo, with two Accusatives, commonly means to have ; in the senseof hold, regard, other turns ane used ; usually pro.Utrum pro ancilla me" habes an pro fflia ? PL., Pers., 341 do ;you lookupon me as a maid-servant or as a daughter ?Similarly habere servorum Ioc5, (in) numero deorum, to regard as slaves,as gods.2. With verbs of Taking and Choosing the end is indicated by theDat. or ad with Accusative.(Romulus) trecentos armatos ad custotliam corporis habuit, L., I. 15, 8 ;Romulus had three hundred armed men as a body-guard.341. (c) Double Accusatives, where one is the cognate, are veryuncommon :Tg bonas preces precor, CATO, R.R., i. 3, 4. Tarn tS basia multa basiarevSsan5 satis et super Catullost, CAT., vn. 9.NOTES. 1. Curious extensions occasionally occur :Idem ius iurandum adigit Afranium, CABS., B. C., i. 76.2. In early Latin frequently, and in later times occasionally, the Inner object isgiven by a neuter pronoun, in the simplest form. Quid mS vis ? what do you wantof me? what do you want me for ? So with prohibSre ;also with iubBre (once inCICERO and CAESAR), admonSre,etc.Neque m IQppiter neque dl omnSs id prohibebunt, PL., Am., 1051. Iltteraequae tS aliquid iubSrent, C., Fam., xm. 26, 3.342. (d) In early Latin we find cases of two Accusatives with asingle verb, where the verb forms a single phrase with one of the Accusatives,and the second Accusative is the object of the phrase: animumadvertere, to perceive; ludos facere, to make game of; manum inicere, tolay hands on, etc. In classical Latin these phrases have been usually,where possible, formed into a single word :animadvertere, ludificari.Animum advertit Gracchus in contione Fisonem stantem, C., Tusc., in.20, 48 ;Gracchus perceived Piso standing in the assembly.NOTE. On the Double Accusative with compound verbs, see 331, R. i.ACCUSATIVE AS A GENERAL OBJECTIVE CASE.343. The Accusative as the Objective Case generallyiftused as an object of Thought, Perception, Emotion ;an ob-
2l8DATIVE.ject created by the mind, evoked ordeprecated by the will.Hence the use of the Accusative :(a) In Exclamations.(6) With the Infinitive.1 . The Accusative is used in Exclamations as the generalobject of Thought, Perception, or Emotion :MS miserum, C., Fam., xiv. i, 1 ;poor me ! MS caecum qui haec antenon viderim, C., Att., x. 10, 1 ;Hind me ! not to have seen all this before.So in Exclamatory Questions :QuO mini fortunam, si non concSditur utl ? H., Ep., i. 5, 12 ;what (isthe object of) fortune to me if Tm not allowed to enjoy it ?Interjections are used :Heu me miserum ! Alas .'poor me ! miseras hominum mentes,pectora caeca, LUCR., n. 14 ; oh, the wretched minds of men, oh, theblind hearts !So, in apposition to a sentence, see 324.NOTES. 1. with the Voc. is an address ;with the Nora, a characteristic ;withthe Ace. an object of emotion.2.Em, Lo ! and Ecce, Lo here ! have the Ace. in the earlier language :Em tibl hominem! PL., Asin., 880 ;here's your man! Ecce m6 ! PL., Ep., 680 ;here am I.'So eccum, ellum, eccam, eccillam, in comic poetry.Ecce takes only the Nom. in classical Latin. Distinguish between em and 6n, thelatter of which, in the sense to / does not appear until CICERO'S time, and takes theNominative.Pr6 takes the Vocative : Pr5 di immortalSs ! Ye immortal gods ! The Accusativeoccurs in: PrOdeumatquehominumfidem! C.,Tusc.^.i6,4&\forheaven^ssake!and similar phrases.Ei (hei) ! and Vae ! take the Dative.Ei mini ! Ah me! Vae victis ! Woe to the conquered !2. The Accusative and the Infinitive are combined so asto present the notion of Subject and Predicate as an objectof thought or perception (527). Hence the Accusative withthe Infinitive is used :(a) In Exclamations. (See 534.)(b) As an Object. (See 527.)(c) As a Subject. (See 535.}DATIVE.344. The Dative is the case of the Indirect Object, andalways involves a Direct Object, which may be contained inthe verb or expressed by the complex of verb and object.
DATIVE. 219N5mo errat unl sibl, SEN., E.M., 94, 54 ;no one errs (makes mistakes)to (for) himself alone. Non omnibus dormiS, C., Fam., vn. 24, 1 ;it isnot for everybody that I am asleep. Tib! exercitum patria pr5 sS dedit,C., Ph., xm. 6, 14 ; your country gave you an army for its own defence.Mulier sibi felicior quam viris, C., Ph., v. 4, 11.NOTE. In English the form of the Indirect Object is the same as that of theDirect " : He showed me (Dat.) a pure river " "; he showed me (Ace.) to the priest."Originally a case of Personal Interest, it is used freely of Personified Things, sparinglyof Local Relations, and this despite the fact that Locative and Dative are blended in theFirst and Third Declensions. If a Locative, the Dative is a sentient Locative.Dative with Transitive Verbs.345. The Indirect Objectisput in the Dative with Transitiveverbs, which already have a Direct Object in the Accusative.Translation, to, for, from. This Accusative becomesthe Nominative of the Passive. The Dative depends on thecomplex.Active Form :To Facile :omngs, quom valSmus, recta c5nsilia aegrStls damus, TER.,And., 309 ; readily all of us, when well, give good counsel to the sick.FOR :Frangam tonsorl crura manusque sim.ul, MART., XT. 58, 10 Td;break the barber's legs for him and hands at once.FROM : Somnum mini [adfimit], C., Alt., n. 16, 1 ;it took my sleep awayfrom me.Passive Form :Merces mibi gloria dstur, Ov., F., in. 389; let glory be given TO me as areward. Immeritls franguntur crura caballls, Juv. , x, 60 ;the, innocenthacks get their legs broken FOR them. Anna [adimuntnr] militibus, L.,xxn. 44, 6 ;the soldiers have their arms taken FROM them. Domus pulchradominls aedificatur non muribus, Cf. C., N.D., in. 10, 26 ;a handsomehouse is built for its owners, not for the mice.REMARKS. i. These constructions are found with more or less frequencyat, all periods. But the Dat. with verbs of Taking Away, Prohibiting,and the like, is mostly confined to poetry and later prose.The translation from is merely approximate, instead of for. When theidea of Personal Interest is not involved, the Abl. is necessary.Is frater, qul Sripuit fratrem carcere, non potuit Sripere fato, SEN., Dial,,xi. 14, 4.A good example of a play on construction is PL., Aul., 635 :ST. Nih.il equidem tib! abstull. Eu. At illud quod tibi abstuleras cedo.a. The translation For is nearer the Dat. than To. It is the regular
220 DATIVE.form when the Ace. is that of the object effected ; when it is that of theobject affected the translation is more often to ; but for (in defenceof) is prQ : pro patria morl, to die for one's country. To (with a viewto) is ad or in, and when the idea of motion is involved, the prepositionmust be used, even with dare, which gives its name to the Dative :Litteras alicul dare, to give one a letter (to carry or to have).Litteras ad aliquem dare, to indite a letter to one.Rogas ut mea tibl scripta mittam, C., Fam., i. 9, 23 ; you ask me tosend you my writings (you wish to have them). Libros iam prldem adtg mlsissem si esse Sdendos putassem, C., Fam., i. 9, 23 I should;have sentthe books to you long since if I had thought they ought to be published.Dative with Intransitive Verbs.346. The Indirect Objectisput in the Dative with manyIntransitive Verbs of Advantage or Disadvantage, Yieldingand Besisting, Pleasure and Displeasure, Bidding and Forbidding.Fuit mirificus in Crasso pudor, qul tamen non obesset Sius oration!, 0.,Or., i. 26, 122 ; Crassus had a marvellous modesty, not, however, suchas to be a bar to the effectiveness of his oratory. Ipsa sibl imbecillitasindulget, C., Tusc., iv. 18, 42 ;weakness gives free course to itself. Probusinvidet ngminl, C., Tim., 3, 9 ; your upright man cherishes envy tono one. Catillna litteras mittit s6 fortunae cSdere, S., C., 34, 2; Catilinewrites that he gives way to fortune. Dies stultis quoque medSrl solet, C.,Fam., vii., 28, 3 ;time is wont to prove a medicine even to fools. Moderariet animo et orationl, est non mediocris ingenii, C., Q.F., I. n. 13, 38 ;to put bounds both to temper and to language is the work of no meanability. Sic agam, ut ipsl auctorl huius discipllnae placet, C., Fin., i. 9,29 ;I will act as it seems good to the head of this school (of thought)himself. [Mundus] de5 paret et hulc oboediunt maria terraeque, C., Leg.,in. i, 3 ;the universe is obedient to God, and seas and lands hearkenunto him. Virtutl suorum satis credit, Cf. S., lug., 106, 3; he putsfull confidence in the valour of his men. nil poena, n5bis llbertas [appropinquat],C., Ph., iv. 4, 10; to him punishment, to us freedom, is drawingnigh.REMARKS. i. Of course the passives of these verbs are used impersonally(208) :Qul invident egent, illls quibus invidetur, I rem habent, PL., True., 745 ;those who envy are the needy, those who are envied have the stuff.2. The verbs found with this Dat. in classical Latin are :prSdesse,obesse, nocgre, conducit, ezpedit ; assentlrl, blandlrl, cupere, favgre, gratificarl,gratulari, ignoscere, indulggre, morigerari, studSre, suffragari ;adversari.insidiari. invidSre. irasci, maledlcere, minarl, minitari, obtrectare,
DATIVE. 221officere, refrSgarl, suscSnsSre ; cSdere, concedere ;resistere ; auxiliari, consulere,mederi, opitularl, parcere, prospicere ; moderari, temperare (sib!) ;placgre, displicSre ; auscultare, imperare, oboedire, obsequl, obtemperare,parere, persuadere, servlre, suadgre ; credere, fldere, confldere, diffidere,despSrare ; accidit, contingit, Svenit ; libet, licet ; appropinquare, repugnare.Also nubere, to marry (of a woman) ; supplicare, to implore.NOTES. 1. Some other verbs are used occasionally in the same way, as incommodare,which CICERO uses once. Also, dolSre, with Dat. of suffering: person, is foundsometimes in CICERO, though it belongs rather to the Comic Poets.2. Some of these words have also other constructions. These occur usually in anteclassicaland post-classical Latin ; if in classical Latin a different meaning is usuallyfound in the new construction. Thus indulgSre aliquid, to grant a thing, invidSrealicul aliquid, obtrectare, with Ace., suadSre, persuade*re, with Ace. of the Person,are post-classical and late ;moderari, with Ace., is found in LUCRETIUS and inSilver Latin ;temperare, meaning mix, takes Ace. at all periods. Fldere, confidere,diffidere are found also with Ablative.Sometimes the personal interest is emphasised when the Dat. is employed, as overagainst the Accusative. So regularly with verbs of Fearing, as metuere aliquem,:to dread some one, but metuere alicui, to fearfor some one ; cavSre alicul, to takeprecautions for some one, but cavere aliquem (also de", ab aliquo),to take precautionsagainst some one ; cavere aliqua rS (early), to beware of a thing. Consulerealiquem, to consult a person ; consulere alicul,to consult for a person. On convenire,see 347, R. 2.Noteworthy are the constructions of invidere and vacare :Invidere alicui (in) aliqua rS (Cic. uses prep ) ItobegrudgeamanatMngalicul .aliquid (VERG., HOR., LIVY, etc.) >alicuius rel (once in HORACE, S., n. 6, 84), to begrudge a thing.(alicuius) alicul rei (common), to envy something belonging to a man.Vacare rei,to be at leisure for, to attend to Ire, a re",to be at leisurefrom>Sometimes there is hardly any difference in meaning :Comitor aliquem, / accompany a man ; comitor alicui, / act as companion to aman ; praestolor alicui (better) or aliquem, I wait for.3. Some words with similar meanings take the Accusative ;the most notable are :aequare, to be equal ; decere (to distinguish), to be becoming ; todeficere, be wanting';dSlectare, to please ; iuvare, to be a help ; iubere, to order ; laedere,to injure; and vetare, toforbid.Earn picturam imitati sunt multi, aequavit nem, PLIN., N.H., xxxv. n,126 ;that style of painting many have imitated, none equalled. F5rma viros neglectadecet, Ov., A, A., i. 509 ;a careless beauty is becoming to men. Me di5s dSficiat, Of.C., Verr., n. 21, 52 ;the day would fail me. Fortis fortuna adiuvat, TER., Ph., 203 ;fortune favours tJie brave.TACITUS is the first to use iubBre with Dative ; Ann., iv. 72, etc.4. The Dat. use is often obscured by the absence of etymological translation. Sonubere alicul,to marry a man (to veil for him) ; mederi alicui,to heal (to takeone's measures for) a man ,'^supplicare,to beg (to bow the knee to) ;persuadSre, topersuade (to make it sweet).5. After the analogy of verbs the phrases audientem esse,to hear, i.e., to obey,supplicem esse, to entreat, auctorem esse,to advise, fidem habere, to have faith in,are also found with the Dative :SI potest tibi dict5 audiSns esse quisquam, C., Verr., i. 44, 114.6. The poets are very free in their use of the Dat. with verbs of the same general
222 DATIVE.meaning as those given. So sS mlsc6re, to mingle u-ith ; colre, concurrere, to meet ;verbs of contending, as contendere, bellare, pugnare, certare verbs of;disagreement,as differre, discrepare, dlstare, dissentlre. Here belongs haergre \\ith theDat., as V., A., iv. 73, which may, however, be a Locative construction.Dative and Verbs Compounded with Prepositions.347. Many verbs compounded with the prepositions ad,ante, con, in, inter, ob, (post), prae, sub, and super, take theDative, especially in moral relations.Transitive Verbs have an Accusative case besides.Plebes cuncta comitils adfuit, C., Plane., 8, 21 ;the entire commonaltywas present at the election. Omnis sgnsus hominum multo antecellit s6nsibusbestiarum, C., N.D., n. 57, 145 ; every sense of man is far superiorto the senses of beasts. (Ennius) equl fortis et victSris senectuti comparatsuam, C., Cat.M., 5, 14 Ennius; compares his (old age) to the old ageof a gallant and winning steed. Imminent duo rgggs totl Asiae, C.,Imp., 5, 12 two; kings are menaces to all Asia. Interes cfinsilils, C.,Aft., xiv. 22, 2 ; you are in their councils, are privy to their plans. Pigeripse sibi obstat, PROV. (311, 2). Omnibus Druidibus praeest Onus, CAES.,B.O., vi. 13, 8 ;at the head of all the Druids is one man. Anatum 5vagalllnis saepe supponimus, C., N.D., n. 48, 124 ;we often put ducks' eggsunder hens (for them to hatch).Neque deesse neque superesse rei publicaevo!5, C. (PoLLio), Fam.;~s.. 33, 5; no life that is not true to the state,no life that outlives the state's that is my motto.REMARKS. i. The Dat. is found, as a rule, only when these verbsare used in a transferred sense. In a local sense the preposition shouldbe employed, although even classical Latin is not wholly consistent inthis matter. In poetry and later prose the Dat. is extended even tothe local signification. In early Latin the repetition of the prepositionis the rule.So incuinbere in gladiuni, C., Inv., n. 51, 154, to fall upon one's sword.2. The principal intrans. verbs with the Dat. in classical Latin are:Accedere (to join, or, to le added ; otherwise usually preposition ad) ;accumbere (once in Cic.) ; adesse (also with ad, in, and, in PLAUT. , apud) ;adhaergscere (ad of local uses) ;arrldgre (once in Cic.) ; annuere (occasionallywith Ace.) ;assentlrl ;assidere ;antecedere (also with Ace.):antelre (also with Ace.) ;antecellere (with Ace. from LIVY on) ;congruere(also with cum) consentire (also with cum) cSnstare ; ; ;convenfre (tosuit ; with cum, to agree ivith, especially in the phrase convenit mihicum aliquO, / agree with) ; illudere (also with Ace. and occasionally inand Ace.) ; impends (with Ace. is archaic ; occasionally in) incSdere;(SALL., LIVY, etc.) ;incidere (twice in Cic. ; regularly in) ;incubare (butincumbere regularly with in or ad) ;inesse (once iu Cic.) ; innaergre (occa-
DATIVE. 223sionally ad or in with Abl.) inhiare (PLAUT. has Ace. only) innascl; ;(innatus) inservire; ;Insinuate (once in Cic. ; usually in) insistere;(locally, in with Abl. ; occasionally Ace.) Instare invadere ; ; (once inCic. ; occasionally Ace. ; regularly in) intercSdere; ;intercurrere ;interesse(also with in and Abl.) ;intervenire;obesse ; obrepere (usually in,ad) ;obsistere ;obstare ; obstrepere ; obtingere ;obvenlre ;obversari ;occurrere ;occursare ; praestare ; praesidere ;subesse ;subvenire ;suecedere;succumbere ;succrescere (once in Cic.) ; succurrere ; superesse.3. The same variety of construction is found with transitive verbs, incomposition.4. After the analogy of praestare, excellere, to excel, is also foundwith the Dative.5. Some trans, verbs, compounded with d6 and ex (rarely with ab),take the Dat., but it properly comes under 345.Caesar Deiotaro tetrarchian eripuit, eldemque detraxit Armeniam, Cf.C., Div., ii. 37, 79 ; Caesar wrested from Dejotarus his tetrarchy, andstripped from him Armenia.Dative with Verbs of Giving and Putting.348. A few verbs, chiefly of Giving and Putting, take aDative with an Accusative, or an Accusative with an Ablative,according to the conception.Praedam mflitibus donat, CAES., B.G., vn. n, 9; he presents the bootyto the soldiers. But Rubrium corona donasti, C., Verr. in. 80, 185; thoudidst present Rubrius with a crown.Natura corpus animS circumdedit, SEN., E.M., 92, 13 ;Nature has puta body around the mind. But Deus animum circumdedit corpore, Cf. C.,Tim., 6, 20 ;God has surrounded the mind with a body.REMARKS. i. These are: aspergere, to besprinkle and to sprinkle on ;circumdare, circumfimdere, to surround ; donare, to present ; impertire, toendow and to give ; induere, to clothe and to put on ; ezuere, to strip ofand to strip off ; intercludere, to shut off ; miscere, to mix and to mix in.2. In general, classical Latin here prefers the Dat. of the person,but no fixed rule is followed.Dative of Possessor.349. Esse, to be, with the Dative, denotes an inner connectionbetween its subject and the Dative, and iscommonlytranslated by the verb to have :[Contr5versia] mini fuit cum avuncu!5 tuo, 0., Fin., in. 2, 6; / had alebate with your uncle. An nescls longas rSgibus esse manus 1 Ov., Her.,
224 DATIVE.xvi. 166 ; or perhaps you do not knout that kings have long arms 9Compare non habet, ut putamus, fortuna longas mantis, SEN., E.M., 82, 5.REMARKS. i. The predicate of esse, with the Dat., is translated inthe ordinary manner : Caesar amicus est mini, Caesar is a friend to me(amlcus meus, MY friend, friend of MINE).2. The Dat. is never simply equivalent to the Genitive. The Dat. isthe Person interested in the Possession, hence the Possession is emphaticthe Gen. characterises the Possession by the Possessor, hence the;Possessor is emphatic. The Gen. is the permanent Possessor, or owner ;the Dat. is the temporary Possessor. The one may include the other:the LatinsLatin! concSdunt Romam caput Latio esse, Cf. L., vm. 4, 5;that LATIUM'Sconcede that Latium has its capital in ROME. (Latil:capital is Rome.)3. Possession of qualities is expressed by esse with in and the Abl.,by inesse with Dat. or with in, or by some other turn :Fuit mlrificus in Crasso pudor, C., Or., i. 26, 122 (346). Cimon habebatsatis gloquentiae, NEP., v. 2, 1 ;Cimon had eloquence enough.SALLUST introduces the Dat. also for these relations.4. Abesse and deesse, to be it-anting, to fail, take also the Dat. ofPossessor.5. The Dat. of the person is regular with the phrases nomen (c5gn5-men) est, inditum est, etc. Here the name is in the Nom. in appositionto nomen, in the best usage. Rarely in CICERO, once in SALLUST, neverin CAESAR, more often in early and post-Ciceronian Latin, the name isfound in the Dat. ;either by attraction with the Dat. of the personor on the analogy of the Double Dative. The Appositional Genitiveis first cited from VELLEIUS. The undeclined Nom. after an(361)active verb appears first in OVID ;then in SUETONIUS.Fons aquae dulcis, cui nomen Arethusa est, C., Verr.,iv. 53, 118 ;afountain of sweet water named Arethusa. Apollodorus, cui Pyragro cognomenest, C., Verr., in. 31, 74 ; Apollodorus, surnamed Pyragrus (firetongs).Nomen Arcturo est mihi, PL., Rud., 5 ; my name is Arcturus.Tibi nomen insano posugre, H., S., n. 3, 47 ; they called you " cracked."[Samnltes] Maleventum, cui nunc urbi Beneventum nomen est, perfugerunt,L., ix. 27, 14 the ; Samnitesfled to Maleventum (Ilcome), a city whichnow bears the name Beneventum ("Welcome). Aetas, cui fecimus ' aurea'nomen, Ov., M., xv. 96 ; the age to which we have given the name ' Golden.'Dative of Personal Interest.In its widest sense this category includes the Dative with Transitive and IntransitiveVerbs, already treated, and the Ethical Dative, Dative of Reference, and Dative ofAgent, to follow. In its narrower sense it applies only to persons or their equivalentswho are essential to, but not necessarily participant in or affected by, the result, anddiffers from'the Dative with Transitive and Intransitive Verbs, in that the connectionwith the verb is much more remote.
DATIVE. 225or towards whom it is directed, may be put350. i. The person from whose point of view the action is observed,in the Dative. A convenientbut not exact translation is often the English Possessive (DatlvusEnergicus).El libenter m6 ad pedes abieci, Cf. C., Alt., vrn. 9, 1 ;1 gladly castmyself at Ms feet. In conspectum vgnerat hostibus, HIRT. ,vin. 27 ; hehad come into the sight of the enemy. Tuo vir5 oculi dolent, Cf. TEII.,Ph., 1053; your husband's EYES ache; nearer, your husband has apain in his eyes (tul vin oculi, your HUSBAND'S eyes).NOTE. This Dative is not common in CICERO and is not cited for early Latin. Butit becomes common from LIVT on. With Kelative and Demonstrative pronouns it isoften used by Ciceronian and Augustan poets. In the case of many of the exampleswe have parallel constructions with the Gen. of Possessor, which is the normal usage.2. The Dative is used of the person in whose honour, or interest, oradvantage, or for whose pleasure, an action takes place, or the reverse(Datlvus Commodl et Incommodl) :Consurrgxisse omn6s [Lysandro] dlcuntur, C., Cat.M., 18, 63; all aresaid to have risen up together in honour of Lysander. [De6] noatraaltaria fumant, V., EC., i. 43; our altars smoke in honour of the god.SI quid peccat mihi peccat, TER., Ad., 115 ; if he commits a fault,at my cost.Ethical Dative.it is351. The Ethical Dative indicates special interest in theaction. It may be called the Dative of Feeling, and its useis confined to the personal pronouns (Datlvus EtMcus.)Tu mibl Antonil exemplo istius audaciam dSfendis? C., Verr., m. 91,213 ; do you defend me (to my face) by Antony's example that fellow'saudacity ? Ecce tib! Sebosus! C., Att., n. 15 ; here's your Sebosus !" She's a civil modest wife, one (I tell you) that will not miss youmorning nor evening prayer."SHAKESPEARE.NOTES. 1. This is essentially a colloquialism, common in comedy, especially withecce and em, frequent in CICERO'S letters, occasionally found elsewhere. In poetry,notably Augustan, it is almost wholly absent ;but there are several cases in HORACE.CICERO does not use em. LIVY does not use ecce.2. Especially to be noted is sib! velle, to want, to mean : Quid tibi vis, InsSne,C., Or., n. 67, 269 ;what do you want, madman? Quid volt sibl haec SratiolTER., Heaut., 615 ;what does all this holdingforth mean ?Dative of Reference.352. This indicates the person in whose eyes the statementof the predicate holds good (Datlvus ludicantis).Ut mihi dSformis, sic tibi magnificus, TAC., H., xn. 37 ;to me amonster, to yourself a prodigy of splendour. Quintia formosa "est multfc,CAT. , 86, 1 ; Quintia is a beauty in the eyes of many.15
226 DATIVE.NOTE. This Dative is characteristic of the Augustan poets, but it is also commonenough in CICERO and the prose authors.353. Noteworthy is the use of this Dative in combination with participles,which shows two varieties, one giving the local point of view,the other the mental, both post-Ciceronian and rare. CAESAR givesthe first local usage, LIVY the first mental.[H5c] est oppidum primum Thessaliae venientibus ab Eplro, CAES., B.C.,in. 80 ;this is the first town of Thessaly to those coming (as you come)from Epirus. VSrS aestimantl, L., XXXVTI. 58, 8 ;to one whose judgmentwas true.NOTES. 1. This construction is probably drawn from the Greek, although VITRUvrosshows several examples.2. Certainly Greek is the Dat. of the person with volentl, Cupienti, invItS (est\etc., which is found first in SAIXUST, once in Lrvr, and sporadically in TACITUS, andlater.Dative of the Agent.354. The Dative is used with Passive Verbs, in prosechiefly with the Perfect Passive, to show the interest whichthe agent takes in the result. That the person interested isthe agent is only an inference. (See 215.)Mill! r6s t5ta provisa est, C., Verr., iv. 42, 91 ;I have had the wholematter provided for. Cul non sunt audltae Demosthenis vigiliae? C.,Tusc., iv. 19, 44 ;to whom are not Demosthenes' long watchings a familiarhearsay ?NOTES. 1. Instances of this Dat. with the Tenses of Continuance are poetical, oradmit of a different explanation :Barbaras hie ego sum qui non intellegor Sill,Ov.. Tr., v. io,37 ;I am a barbarianhere because I can't make myself intelligible to any one.Whenever an adj. or an equivalent is used, the Dat. PI. may be an Ablative :Sic dissimillimis bestiolls communiter cibus quaeritur, C., N.D., n. 48, 123 ;so, though these little creatures are so very unlike, their food is sought in common. Carminaquae scribuntur aquae potoribus, H., Ep., i. IQ, 3 ; poems which are writtenwhen people are water-drinkers. CSna ministratur pueris tribus, H., S., i. 6, 116 ;Dinner is served, (the waiters being) the waiters are (but) three.2. This Dat. is rare in early Latin, rare, if ever, in CAESAR, not uncommon in CICERO.But it is much liked by the poets and by some prose writers, notably by TACITUS.355. The agent of the Gerund and Gerundive isput inthe Dative, at all periods.Dfligentia praeeipue colenda est nobis, C., Or., n. 35, 148 ; carefulnessis to be cultivated by us first and foremost. Desperanda tibl salva concordiasocru, Juv., vi. 231 ; you must despair of harmony while Motherin-law'salive.
DATIVE. 227REMARK. To avoid ambiguity, especially when the verb itself takesthe Cat., the Abl. with ab (a) is employed for the sake of clearness :Civibus a vobis consulendum, C., Imp., 2, 6 ;the interest of the citizensmust be consulted by you. Supplicatio ab eo decernenda non fait,C., Ph., xiv. 4, 11.Where there is no ambiguity there is no need of ab :Linguae moderandum est mihi, PL., Cure., 486 I must; put bounds tomy tongue.NOTE. Poets are free in their use of this Dative ;so with verbals in bilis ; as,multisille bonis flebilis occidit, H., 0., i. 24, 9 ; null! exorabilis, SIL. ITAL., v. 131.Dative of the Object For Which.356. Certain verbs take the Dative of the Object ForWhich (to what end), and often at the same time a Dativeof the Personal Object For Whom, or To Whom.NeminI meus adventus labor! aut sumptui fuit, C., Verr., i. 6, 16 ;tono one was my arrival a burden or an expense. Virtus sola neque daturdon6 neque accipitur, S., lug., 85, 38 ;virtue alone is neither given nortaken as a present.HabSre quaestul rem publicam turpe est, C., Off., n.,22, 77 ;it is base to have the state for one's exchequer.REMARKS. i.Noteworthy is the legal phrase culbon5? to whom isit for an advantage 9 = who is advantaged ?2. In the classical times the principal verbs in this construction areesse, dare, ducere, habere, vertere, and a few others which occur less frequently.Later Latin extends the usage to many other verbs, andespecially to Gerundive constructions. Dare is used principally in thephrase dono dare.3. The Double Dative is found principally with esse, but occasionallywith other verbs. Here there seems to have been a tendency,mainly post-Ciceronian, to use the predicative Nom. instead of theDative. Interesting sometimes is the shift in usage ; thus, CICERO saysest turpitude, NEPOS, fuit turpitudini.NOTES. 1. In the same category, but with the idea of finality more clearly indicated,are the agricultural usages, alimento serere, conditui legere ;the medical,remedio adhibere ;the military terms, praesidio, auxilio, mittere, esse,etc.2. With LIVY we notice the great extension of this Dat. with verbs of seeking, choosing,etc., where classical Latin would prefer some other construction. So locum Insidils(insidiarum is classical) circumspectare Poenus coepit, L., xxi. 53, 11. TACI-TUS goes furthest in such usages. CAESAR, however, shows a few instances (-B. G., i.30,8).3. The Final Dative with intrtos. verbs is military and rare. So receptul canere,to sound a retreat, is found first in CABS., B. Cr., vn. 47. SALLUST shows a few examples.The Dat., with similar sub8tnntives, is an extension, and is very rare. CICERO,PA., xin. 7, 15, says receptul signum.
228 DATIVE.4. The origin of this usage may have been mercantile (Key). In English we treatProfit and Loss as persons Quern fors dierum cumque dabit Iucr6 :appone, H., O.,i. 9, 14 " 1; Every day that Fate shall give, set down to Profit.' ' 1On the Dative of the Gerund and Gerundive in a similar sense, see 429.Dative with Derivative Substantives.357. A few derivative substantives take the Dative of theirprimitives :lustitia est obtemperatio iSgibus, C., Leg., i. 15, 42 ; justice is obedienceto the laws.NOTE. We find a few examples in PLAUTCTS, several in CICEEO, and only sporadicallyelsewhere. Usually the verbal force is very prominent in the substantives ; as,insidias consul! inaturare, 8., U., 32, 2.Local Dative.358. The Dative is used in poetry to denote the placewhither.Karthagini iam non ego rmntios mittam superbos, H., 0., iv. 4, 69 ;Iam satis terris nivisto Carthage no more shall I send haughty tidings.atque dirae grandinis mlsit pater, H., 0., i. 2, 1 ; full, full enough of snowand dire hail the Sire hath sent the Land.NOTES. 1. This construction begins with Accrtrs, and is not uncommon in theAugustan poets. No examples are cited from PLACTUS or TERENCE, hence the inferenceis fair that it was not a colloquialism. As a poetical construction it seems to havesprung from personification.2. Occasionally the substantive is also thus construed ;as in the facilis descgnsuaAverno of VERGIL (A., vi. 126).The extreme is reached when the Dative follows Ire and the like :It caelo clamorque virum clangorque tubarum, V., A., xi. 192 ; mounts to1Sigh Heaven warriors' shout and trumpets' blare.3. Tendere mantis has a few times, even in CICERO and CAESAR, the Dat. of theperson, which is sometimes referred to this head. But the usual construction is ad.Matres familiae Roinanis d6 muro mantis tendebant, CAES., B. G., vn. 48.Dative with Adjectives.359. Adjectives of Likeness, Fitness, Friendliness, Nearness,and the like, with their opposites, take the Dative :Canis similis Iup5 est, C., N.D., 1. 35, 97 ;the dog is like unto the wolf.Castris idSneus locus, CAES., E.G., vi. 10, 2 ;a place suitable for a camp.Utile est re! publicae nobiles homines esse dlgnos maioribus sols, C., Sest.,9, 21 ; it is to the advantage of the state that men of rank should beworthy of their ancestors. Virmih! amicissimus, Q. Fabricius, C.. Sest.,35, 75 ; my very great friend, Q. Fabricius. Proxumus sum egomet mihi,TER., And., 636 ; myself am nearest to me. Omni aetatl mors est com-
DATIVE. 229munis, Of. C., Cat.M., 19, 68 ;death is common to every time of life.(Testis) id dlcit quod ill! causae maxims eat aliSnum, C., Caec., g, 24 ;thewitness says what is especially damaging to that case (side).REMARKS. i. Many adjectives which belong to this class are usedalso as substantives, and as such are construed with the Genitive :amicus, friend ; affinis, connection ; aequalis, contemporary ; aliSnus(rare), foreign, strange ; cognatus, kinsman ; communis, common ; contrarius,opposite ; par, match ; proprius, peculiaris, own, peculiar ; similis,like (" we ne'er shall look upon his like again "), especially of gods andmen, and regularly with personal pronouns, and in early Latin ; sacer,set apart, sacred ; superstes (rare), survivor. Comparatives have regularlythe Dative ; Superlatives vary.[Hie], cuius pauc5s pares haec dvitas tulit, C. Pis., , 4, 8 ; (he vvas) a manfew of whose peers the state hath borne. Utinam t5 non solum vitae, sedetiam dlgnitatis nieae superstitem rellquissem, C., Q.F., i. 3, 1 ;wouldthat I had left thee survivor not only of my life but also of my position.2. The object toward which is expressed by the Ace. with in, erga,adversus :Manlius (fait) sevSrus in filium, C., Off., in. 31, 112 ;Manlius was severetoward his son. Me" esse scit sSsS erga benivolum, PL., Capt., 350 he;knows that I am kindly disposed toward him. Vir adversus meritaCaesaris ingratissimus, Cf. VELL., n. 69, 1 ;a man most ungrateful towardsCaesar's services (to him).3. The object for which may be expressed by the Ace. with ad, to :HomS ad nullam rem utilis, C., Off., in. 6, 29 ;a good-for-nothingfellow.This is the more common construction with adjectives of Fitness.NOTES. 1. Propior, nearer, proximus, next, are also construed (like prope, near)occasionally with the Ace. (principally by CAESAB, SALLUST, LIVT), the adverbialforms also with the Abl. with ab, off:Crassus proximus mare Qceanum hiemarat, CAES., B. G., in. 7, 2 ;Crassus hadwintered next the ocean. Id propius fidem est, L., 11.41, 11 that is ;nearer belief,i.e., more likely.2. Ali6nus, foreign, strange, is also construed with the Abl., with or withoutab (a) ;so commonly absonus.Homo sum, human! nil a mg alienura put5, TEB., Heaut., 77 ;lam a man,and nothing that pertains to man do I consider foreign to me.3. lunctus, coniuuctus, joined, are also construed frequently with cum. and theAbl. ; sometimes with the Abl. only improbitas scelere : iuncta, C., Or., n. 58, 237.4. Similis is said to be used with the Gen. when the likeness is general and comprehensive;with the Dat. when it is conditional or partial ; hence, in classical prose,always vSrl simile, LIVT being the first to say vfiro simile.5.Adversus, opponent, seems to be construed with the Gen. once in SALLUST (C.,52, 7) and once in QUINTILIAN (xn. i,2). Invidus, envious, is cited with the Gen.once in CICERO (Flac., i, 2), then not till late Latin ;with the Dat. it is poetical ;otherwisethe possessive pronoun is used, as till invicli (C., Fam., i. 4, 2). Pronus,inclined, with the Dat., occurs in SALLUST (lug., 114,2), then not till TACITUS ;the1construction is ad. Intentus, intent upon, has Abl. in SALLUST (C., a, 9, etc.) ;
2 3O GENITIVE.otherwise Dat., or ad (in) with Ace. Notice the use of aversus with Dat. in TAC.,Ann., i. 66, 2 some other;examples are doubtful.6. In poetry, idem, (he same, is often construed after Greek analogy, with the Dative.Invitum qul servat idem facit occldentl,H.. A.P, 467 ;he who saves a manCslife) against his will does the same thing as one who kills him (as if he had killed him).1. Adverbs of similar meaning sometimes take the Dative :Congruenter naturaeconvenienterque vivere, C., Fin., m. 7, 26.II. Internal Change.Genitive.360. i. The Genitive Case is the Case of the Complement,and is akin to the Adjective, with which itis often parallel.It is the substantive form of the Specific Characteristic.The chief English representatives of the Genitive are :(a) The Possessive case : Domus rggis, the king's palace.(b) The Objective case with of Domus :rggis, the palace of the king.(c) Substantives used as adjectives or in composition Arbor :abietis,fir-tree.REMARKS. i. Other prepositions than of are not unfrequently used,especially with the Objective Genitive. (363, R. i.)Patriae quis exsul s quoque fiigit ? H., 0., n. 16, 19 ;what exile FROMhis country ever fled himself as well ? Boiorum triumph! spem collegaereliquit, L., xxxin. 37, 10 ;he left the hope of a triumph OVER the Bo itto his colleague.Via mortis may be considered the way (mode) of death or the deathpath,instead of via ad mortem (L., XLIV. 4, 14).2. An abstract substantive with the Gen. is often to be translatedas an attribute :Verni temporis suavitas, C., Cat.M., 19, 70 ;the sweet spring-time.Fontium gelidae perennitatgs, C., N.D., n. 39, 98 cool ; springs that neverfail. Compare S., C., 8, 3.And, on the other hand, the predicative attribute is often to betranslated as an abstract substantive with of :Ante Bomam conditam, before the founding of Rome. (325, R. 3.)Notice also hie metus, this fear = fear of this, and kindred expressions: Quam similitudinem = cuius rel similitudinem, C., N.D.,u. 10, 27.2. The Genitive isemployed :I. and II. Chiefly as the complement of Substantives andAdjectives.III. Occasionally as the complement of Verbs.NOTE.As the Accusative forms a complex with the verb, so the Genitive forms acomplex with the Substantive or equivalent. No logical distribution can be whollysatisfactory, and the following arrangement has regard to convenience.
GENITIVE. 231I. GENITIVE WITH SUBSTANTIVES.Adnominal Genitive.Appositive Genitive, or Genitive of Specification.361. The Genitive is sometimes used to specify the contentsof generic words instead of Apposition in the samecase ;there are two varieties :1.Appositional Genitive. Genitive after such words as, v5x, expression; iiomen, name, noun ; verbum, word, verb ; r6s, thing, etc.Nomen amicitiae, C., Fin., n. 24, 78 ;the name friendship.2. Epexegetical Genitive. Genitive after such words as genus, class ;vitium, vice ; culpa, fault, etc.[VirtutSs] continentiae, gravitatis, iustitiae, fidei, C., Mur., 10, 23 ;thevirtues of self-control, earnestness, justice, honour.NOTES -1. The former variety is very rare in CICERO, the latter much more common.A special variety is the use of the Gen. after such words as urbs, oppidum,flumen, etc. This is not found in PLAUTUS and TERENCE, occurs perhaps but oncein CICERO, and seems to be confined to a few cases in poetry and later prose. Oftenpersonification is at work ; thus, in fons Timavi (V., A., i. 244), Timavus is a rivergod, and fSns is not equal to Timavus.2. Examples like arbor abietis (L., xxiv. 3, 4), fir-tree ; arbor flcl (Of. C., Flac.,17, 41), fig-tree, etc., occur only here and there.3. Colloquial, and probably belonging here, are: scelus virl (PL., M. G., 1434), ascoundrel of a man ; flagitium hominis (PL., Asin., 473), a scamp of a fellow, andthe like. Quaedam p6st6s hominum, C., Fam., v. 8, 2 ;certain pestilentfellows.Possessive Genitive, or Genitive of Property.362. The Possessive Genitive is the substantive form of anadjective attribute with which it is often parallel it is ;usedonly of the Third Person.Domus rggis= domus rggia, the palace of the king, the king's palace =the royal palace.REMARKS. i. The Possession in the First and Second Person (andin the Reflexive) is indicated by the Possessive Pronouns (until afterLIVY): amicus meus, a friend of mine ; gladius tuus, a sword of thine.But when omnium is added, vestrum and nostrum are used ;arls et focisomnium nostrum inimlcus, C., Ph., xi. 4, 10. Sometimes the adjectiveform is preferred also in the Third Person canis :aliSnus, a strange dog,another man's dog ; fllius erflis, master's son.2. The attention of the student is called to the variety of formswhich possession may take. Statua Myronis, Myron's statue, may mean:i. A statue which Myron owns; 2. Which Myron has made; 3. Whichrepresents Myron.3. Sometimes the governing word is omitted, where it can be easily
232 GENITIVE.supplied, so especially aedes or templum, after ad, and lessoften afterother prepositions: Pecunia utinam ad Opis mangret, C., Ph., i. 7, 17 ;would that the money were still at Ops's (temple).NOTES. 1. The Family Genitive, as Hasdrubal Gisgonis (L., xxvm., 12, 13),Gisgo's Hafdrubal, Hasdrubal, Gisgo's son (as it were, Hasdrubal >' Gisgo), HectorisAndromache (V., .4., 111.319), Hectares (wife) Andromache, is found twice only inCICEKO, otherwise it is poetical and post-Ciceronian. Servos, however, is regularlyomitted ; Flaccus Claudi, Flaccw, Claudius* slave.2. The Chorographic (geographic) Genitive is rare and post-Ciceronian: R6xChalcidem Euboeae vSnit, L., xxvn. 30, 7; the king came to Chalcls of (in) Euboea.The Chorographic Genitive is not found with persons. Here an adjective or a prepositionalphrase is necessary Thales :MilSsius, or ex Mileto, Tholes oj Miletus.Active and Passive Genitive.363. "When the substantive on which the Genitive dependscontains the idea of an action (nomen actionis), the possessionmay be active or passive. Hence the division into1. The Active or Subjective Genitive : amor Del, the loveof God, the love which God feels (God loves) ;the benefits of (conferred by} one's country (376, R. 2).patriae beneficia,2. Passive or Objective Genitive : amor Dei, love of God,love toward God (God is loved).REMARKS. i. The English form in o/is used either actively or passively: the love of women. Hence, to avoid ambiguity, other prepositionsthan of are often substituted for the Passive Genitive, such as for,toward, and the like. So, also, sometimes in Latin, especially in LIVY,and later Historians generally:Voluntas Serviln erga Caesarem, Cf. C., Q.F., in. i. 6, 26 the ; goodwillof Servilius toward Caesar. Odium in bonds inveteratum, C., Vat.,3, 6 ; deep-seated hate toward the conservatives,2. Both Genitives may be connected with the same substantive :Veteres Helvgtiorum iniuriae popull BomanI, Cf. CAES., B.G., i. 30, 2 ;the ancient injuries of the Roman people by the Helvetians.NOTE.The use of the Genitive with substantives whose corresponding verbs take'other cases than the Accusative, gradually increases in Latin, beginning with theearliest times, but it is not very common in the classical language.364. The Subjective Genitive, like the Possessive, is usedonly of the Third Person. In the First and Second Personsthe possessive pronounis used, thus showing the close relationshipof Agent and Possessor.Amor meus, my love (the love which I feel). Desiderium tnum, yourlonging (the longing which you feel).
GENITIVE. 233Additional attributives are put in the Genitive (321, R. 2):luravi hanc urbem mea unius opera salvam esse, C., Pi's., 3, 6 ; I sworethat this city owed its salvation to my exertions alone.REMARK.Nostrum and vestrum are used as Partitive Genitives:Magna pars nostrum, a great part of us ; uterque vestrum, either (both)of you.Nostrl melior pars means the better part of our being, our better part.With omnium, the forms nostrum and vestrum must be used (362, R. i).NOTES. 1. Occasionally, however, in Latin, as in English, the Gen. is used insteadof the possessive pronoun; so CICERO 8ays splendor vestrum (Alt., VH. 13 a, 3), andconsensus vestrum (Ph., v. i, 2), and one or two others ;but other examples are veryrare until after TACITUS, when the Singular forms, after the example of OVID (Jf.,i.30), become not uncommon. See 304, 3, N. 1." For the life of me " = " for my life."2. On the other hand the Genitives of the personal pronouns are used regularly asthe Objective Genitive :Amor mel, love to me. DSslderium tul, longing for th.ee. Memoria nostrl,memory of us (our memory).Occasionally the possessive pronoun is used even here ;see 304, 2, N.2, and compare"The deep damnation of his taking off."Genitive of Quality.365. The Genitive of Quality must always have an adjectiveor its equivalent.Vir magnae auctoritatis, CAES., B.G., v. 35, 6; a man of great influence.Homo nibili (= nullius pretii), PL., B., 1188 ;a fellow of no account.Trldul via, CAES., B. G., I. 38, 1; a three days' journey. N5nmulti cibl hospitem accipies, multi ioci, C., Fam., ix. 26, 4; you willreceive a guest who is a small eater but a great joker.REMARKS. i. The Genitive of Quality, like the adjective, is notused with a proper name. Exceptions are very rare in classical Latin(CAES., B. G., v. 35, 6, Quintus LQcanius, giusdem ordinis). But later theyare more common.2. The Genitive of Quality is less common than the Ablative, beingused chiefly of the essentials. The Genitive always of Number, Measure,Time, Space the Ablative;always of externals, so of parts of thebody. Often the use seems indifferent. (400.)NOTE. The omission of the adjective is not found before APULEIUS, in whom,as in English, a man of influence may be for a man of great influence.Genitive as a Predicate.366. The Genitives of Possession and Quality may be usedas Predicates.Hie versus Flauti n5n est, hlc est, C., Fam., ix. 16, 4; this verse is not
234 GENITIVE.by Plautus, this Omnia ?'.? .quae mulieris fugrunt, virl flunt d5tis nomine,C., Top., iv. 23; everything that ivas the woman's becomes the husband'sunder the title of dowry. Virtus tantarum virium est ut se ipsa tueatur, C. ,Tusc., v. i,2; virtue is of such strength as to be her own jirofector.REMARKS. i. The Possession appears in a variety of forms, andtakes a variety of translations :Huius ero vivus, mortuus huius ero, PROP., u. 15, 35; hers I shall be,living; dead, hers I shall be. Nolae senatus BSmanorum, plebs Hannibaliserat, L., xxm. 39, 7; at Nola the senate was (on the side) of theRomans, the common folk (on) Hannibal's. Damnatio est iudicum, poenaiSgis, C., Sull., 22, 63; condemning is the judges' (business), punishmentthe law's. Est animi ingenul cui multum debeas eldem plurimum velledebere, C. ,Fam. ,n. 6, 2 ;it shows the feeling of a gentleman to be willingto owe very much to him to whom you already owe much. Panperisest numerare pecus, Ov., M., xm. 823 ; 'tis only the poor man thatcounts his flock ('tis the mark of a poor man to count the flock).Observe the special variety, Genitlvus Auctoris : Is [HerculSs] dicgbaturesse Myronis, C. , Verr., iv. 3, 5 ;that (statue of) Hercules was saidto be Myron's (work), by Myron.So also with facere, to make (cause to be), which is common in LIVYespecially :Romanae dicionis facere, L., xxi. 60, 3 ; to bring under the Romansway.Summum imperium in orbe terrarum Macedonian fecerant, L., XLV.7,3; the paramount authority of the ivorld they had brought (into thehands) of the Macedonians.2. For the personal representative of a quality, the quality itself maybe used sometimes with but little difference, as : stultitiae est, it is thepart of folly ; stultl est, it is the part of a fool. So, too, stultum est,it is foolish. But when the adj. is of the Third Declension, the neutershould not be used, except in combination with an adj. of the Second.Tempori cedere semper sapientis est habitum, C., Fam., iv. 9, 2 to ; yieldto the pressure of the times has always been held wise. Pigrum et inersvidetur sudore adquirere quod possls sanguine parare, TAC., G., 14, 17 ;itis thought slow and spiritless to acquire by sweat what you can get byblood.Some combinations become phraseological, as :consuetudinis, morisest (the latter post-classical), it is the custom.3. The same methods of translation apply to the Possessive Pronounin the Predicate ("Vengeance is mine") meum : est, it is myproperty, business, way.Non est mentlri meum, TER., Ileaut., 549 ; lying is not my way (I donot lie). His tantis in rebus est tuum vidSre, quid agatur, C., Mur., 38,83 ;in this important crisis it is your business to see what is to be done.
GENITIVE. 235Partitive Genitive.367. The Partitive Genitive stands for the Whole to whicha Part belongs.It is therefore but an extension of the PossessiveGenitive. Itmay be used with any word that involvespartition, and has the following varieties (368-372) :368. The Partitive Genitive is used with substantives ofQuantity, Number, Weight.Maximus vini numerus fuit, permagnum pondus argent!, C., Ph., n. 27,66 ;there was a,large amount of wine, an enormous mass of silver. Iniugero Leoutlnl agrl medimnum triticl seritur, 0. Verr., in. 47, 112 ;on ajuger of the Leontine territory a medimnus of wheat is sown. Campanorumalam, quingentos fere" equites excedere acie" iubet, L., x. 29, 2 ;he ordersa squadron of Campanians, about 500 horsemen, to leave the line.REMARK. This is sometimes called the Oenitlvus Generis, Whetherthe conception be partitive or not, depends on circumstances.Medimnus triticl, a medimnus of wheat, may be a medimnus ofWHEAT (Oenitlvus Generis} or a MEDIMNUS of wheat (Partitive).NOTE. The reversed construction is occasionally found. Sex di6s ad earn, remconficiendam spatii postulant, CAES., B. C., i. 3, 6, instead of spatium sex dierum.369. The Partitive Genitive is used with the Neuter Singularof the following and kindred words, but only in theNominative or Accusative.tantum, so much,multum, much,paulum, little,satis, enough,hoc, this,
236 GENITIVE.et memorabilia, something good and memorable (better aliquid bontun ctmemorabile).Quid habet ista res aut laetabile aut gloriosum? C., Tusc.,i. 21, 49(204, x. 3).2. A familiar phrase is : Nihil reliqul facere. i. To leave nothing(not a thing). 2. (Occasionally), to leave nothing undone.NOTES. 1. The conception is often not so much partitive as characteristic. SoQuodcumque hoc regnl, V., A., i. 78 ; this realm, what (little) there is of it (what littlerealm I have). Perhaps, too, such combinations as flagitium hominis may be classedunder this head. See 361, N. 3.2. The partitive construction, with a preposition, is not found iu CICEISO or CAESAR,but begins with SALLUST :Ad id loci, S., C., 45, 3 ; ad id locorum,S., lug., 63, 6.370. The Partitive Genitive is used with numerals bothgeneral and special.Special :Centum militum, a hundred (of the) soldiers, a hundred (of) soldiers.(Centum milites, a, the hundred soldiers.)Qulntus regum, the fifth (of the) Tcing(s).(Qulntus r6x, the fifth king.)General :Multi militum, many of the soldiers, many soldiers.(Multl milites, many soldiers.)REMARKS. i. The English language commonly omits the partition,unless it is especially emphatic :Multl clvium adsunt, many CITIZENS are present.MANY are the citizens present.Multl clvs adsunt,2. When all are embraced, there is no partition in Latin :(N5s) trecentl coniuravimus, L., n. 12, 15 ;three hundred of us havebound ourselves by an oath. Volnera quae circum plurima muros accepitpatrios, Y., A., n. 277; wounds which he received in great numbers beforehis country's walls.QuI omnes, all of whom. Quot estis ? how many are (there of) you ?So always quot, tot, totidem.Here the English language familiarly employs the partition.Exceptionsare very rare.3. On mille and mllia, see 293. On prepositions with numerals, see372, R. 2.371. The Partitive Genitive is used with Pronouns.II militum, those (of the) soldiers. II milites, those soldiers.mi GraecSrum, those (of the) Greeks.Fldenatium qul supersunt. ad urbem Fidenas tendunt, L. , iv. 33, 10 ;thsumiving Fidenates take their way to the city of Fidenae.
GENITIVE. 237REMARKS. i. ITterque, either (both), is commonly used as an adjectivewith substantives :uterque consul, either consul = both consuls; asa substantive with pronouns, unless a substantive is also used :uterquehorum, both of these ; but uterque ille dux. So, too, with relatives inthe neuter, and with Plural forms of uterque, concord is the rule. Compareuterque nostrum, C., Sull., 4, 13, with utrlque nos, C., Fam., xi. 20,3. See 292.2. On the use of prepositions instead of the Genitive, see 372, B. 2.NOTE.The use of the relative with the Genitive is characteristic of LIVY.372. The Partitive Genitive is used with Comparatives andSuperlatives :Prior horum in proeliS cecidit, NEP., xxi. i, 2 the ; former of these fellin an engagement. Indus est omnium fluminum maximus, C., N.D., n.52, 130 (211, R. 2).REMARKS. i. When there are only two, the comparative exhauststhe degrees of comparison (300).2. Instead of the Partitive Genitive with Numerals, Pronouns, Comparatives,and Superlatives, the Abl. may be employed with ex, out of,dS, from (especially with proper names and singulars), in, among (rare),or the Ace. with inter, among, apud: Gallus provocat unum ex Romanls,the Gaul challenges one of the Romans ; Onus dS multis, one of the many(the masses) Croesus inter ; rggSs opulentissimus, Croesus, wealthiest ofkings. With unus, ex or d6 is the more common construction, exceptthat when unus is first in a series, the Gen. is common.3. On the concord of the Superlative see 211, R. 2.NOTES. 1. The Partitive Genitive with positives is occasional in poetry ;in proseit begins with LIVY and becomes more common later.Sequimur tS, sancte deorum, V., A., iv. 576 we; follow thee, holy deity. CanumdggenerSs (caudam) sub alvom flectunt, PLIN.,JV"./T.,XI., 50, 265; currish dogscurl the tail up under the belly.2. Substantival neuters, with no idea of quantity, were rarely followed by the Gen.in early Latin. CICERO shows a few cases of Plurals of superlatives, and one case of aPlural of a comparative in this construction : in interiors aedium Sullae {Alt. iv.,3, 3). CAESAR shows one case of a positive: in occultls Sc reconditis tempi! (B. (7.,in. 105, 5). SALLUST shows the first case of the Singular in praerupti mentis extrgmo(Tug., 37, 4). Then the usage extends and becomes common, especially in TACI-:TUS. In the poets it begins with LUCRETIUS.Ardua dum metuunt amittunt v6ra vial (29, N. 2), LUCE., i. 660 ;the while theyfear the steeper road, they miss the true.So amara curarum, H.,
238 GENITIVE.Notice especially the phrase quod : (or quoad) gius (facere) possum, as far as I cando so: C., Fam., in. 2, 2 ; Att., xi. 12, 4 ; /., n., 6,20.4. The Partitive Genitive with proper names is rare, and mostly confined to LIVT :Consulum Sulpicius in dextro Poetelius in laevo cornu consistunt, L., ix. 27, 8.5. The Partitive Genitive as a Predicate is Greekish : Figs nobilium tu quoquefontium, II-, 0., in., 13, 13 ; tfwu too shalt count among the famousfountains.Genitive with Prepositional Substantives.373. Causa, gratia, ergo, and Instar are construed with theGenitive.[Sophistae] quaestiis causa philosophabantur, C., Ac., n. 23, 72 ;the pro.fessors of wisdom dealt in philosophy for the sake of gain. Tu me amorismagis quam honoris servavisti gratia, ENN., F., 287 (M.); thou didst saveme more for love's (sake) than (thou didst) for honour's sake. Virtutisergo, C., Opt. Gen., 7, 19; on account of valor. Instar montis equus, V.,A., n. 15 ;a horse the bigness of a mountain. Plato mini unus Instar estomnium, C., Br., 51, 191 ; Plato by himself is in my eyes worth them all.REMARKS. i. Causa and gratia, for the sake, commonly follow theIn LIVY and later theyGen. in classical Latin and also in the Jurists.often precede. Ergo, on account, belongs especially to early Latin,except in formulae and laws, and follows its Genitive. It is rare in thepoets. Instar isprobably a fossilised Infinitive (Instare), meaning " theequivalent," whether of size or value.2.Except for special reasons causa takes the possessive pronoun inagreement, rather than the personal pronoun in the Genitive ;morerarely gratia :Vestra relque publicae causa, C., Verr., v. 68, 173 ; for your sake andthat of the commonwealth. But in antithesis, multa quae nostrl causanumquam facergmus, facimus causa amlcorum! C., Lad., 16, 57 (disputed).II.GENITIVE WITH ADJECTIVES.374. Adjectives of Fulness, of Participation, and of Power,of Knowledge and Ignorance, of Desire and Disgust, takethe Genitive.Plenus rimarum, TER., Eun., 105 ; full of chinks ("a leaky vessel").Particeps consilil, C., Sull., 4, 12 ;a sharer in the plan. Mentis compos,C. , Ph., n. 38, 97; in possession of (one's) mind. Multarum renim peritus,C., Font. , n, 25 ;versed in many things. Cupidus pecuniae, Cf. C.,Verr., i. 3, 8 ; grasping after money. Fastldiosus Latinarum (litterarum),C., Br., 70, 247 ;too dainty for Latin. Omnium rSrum inscius, C., Br.,85, 292 ;a universal ignoramus. Cur n5n ut plenus vitae conviva recgdislLUCR., ill. 938 (273).Sitque memor nostri necne, referte mini, Ov., Tr., IV.
GEHITIVE. 2393, 10 (204, N. 7). Conscia mens rectl Famae mendacia risit, Ov., F., IV. 311(330, R.). Agricolam laudat iuris legumque perltus, H., S., i. i, 9; the husbandman('slot) is praised by the counsel learned in the law. Omnes immemorembeneficii oderunt, C., Off., n. 18, 63 ;all hate a man who has nomemory for kindness.(Bestiae) sunt rationis et orationis experte"s, C., Off.,i. 16, 50 ;beasts are devoid of reason and speech (lack discourse of reason).Omnia plena consiliorum, inania verb5rum videmus, C., Or., i. 9, 37; we seea world that is full of wise measures, void of eloquence.fertilis fuit, L., v. 34, 2; Gaul was productive of grain.Gallia frugumNOTES. 1. Of adjectives of Fulness, with the Gen., only plgnus, replStus, inops,and inanis are classical and common ; single instances are found of llberalis, profusus,in SALLUST (C., 7, 6 ; 5, 4), and igiunus occurs once in CICERO. PLAUTUS alsouses onustus and prodigus.Poets and later prose writers are free. Plenus occursvery rarely with the Abl. in CICERO and CAESAR, more often in LIVT. Refertus isused by CICERO usually with the Abl. of the Thing and with the Gen. of thePerson.2. Participation : Classical are particeps, expers, censors, with some adjectivesexpressing guilt, as manifestus (archaic), affinis, reus. Of these particeps takesalso the Dat. in post-classical Latin, and expers has also the Abl. (not classical) fromPLAUTUS on. (See 8., C., 33, 1.) Affinis has the Dat. in LIVY, in local sense also inCICERO ; reus takes Abl. or dS.3. Power: Compos alone is classical, and is occasionally found with Abl. in SAL-LUST, VERGIL, LIVY. PotSns is found in PLAUTUS, the poets, and post-classical prose ;impos in PLAUTUS, and then not until SENECA.4. Knmvledge and Ignorance : Classical are some eighteen. Of these peritus hasalso Abl., and rarely ad ;insuetus takes also Dat. as well as d ; prudens has alsoad ;rudis has Abl. with in. more often than the Gen. in CICERO, but also ad. AnteclassicalLatin shows a few more adjectives.5. Desire and Disgust : Classical are avidus, cupidus, fastldiosus, studiosus.Of these avidus has also in with Ace. and with Abl. ; studiosus has Dat. in PLAUTUS(M. Q., 801) ; single examples are cited with ad and in. Fastldiosus occurs but oncein CICERO (see above) ;see H., 0., in. i, 37.6. In later Latin and in the poets almost all adjectives that denote an affection of themind take a Gen. of the Thing to which the affection refers, where model prose requiresthe Abl. or a preposition: consilii ambiguus, TAC., H., iv. 21 ; doubtful of purpose.Ingratus salutis, V., A., x. 665.The analogy of these adjectives is followed by others, so that the Gen. becomes acomplement to the adjective, just as it is to the corresponding substantive.Integer vitae, H., 0., i. 22, 1 ; spotless of life ; like integritas vltae. (Comparefama et fortunis integer, S., H., n. 41, 5 D ; infame and fortunes intact.)7. The seat of the feeling is also put in the Gen., chiefly with animl and ingenil(which were probably Locatives originally). Aeger animl, L., i. 58, 9 ;sick at heart,heartsick. Audax ingenil, STAT., S., in. 2, 64 ; daring of disposition. The PI. isanimls.8. The Gen. with adjectives involving Separation instead of the Abl. (390, 3) beginswith the Augustan poets ; though SALLUST shows nudus and vacuus (lug., 79, 6 ; 90,1); liber laborum, H., A.P., 212.9. Classical Latin uses certus with Gen. only in the phrase certiorem facere, toinform, which has also d(always in CAESAR).10. Dlgnus, worthy, and indlgnus, unworthy, with Gen. are poetical and rare.11. On alinus, strange, see 359, N. 2. On aequalis, communis, conscius, contrarius,par, proprius, similis, superstes, and the like, see 359, R. i.
24OGENITIVE.Genitive with Verbals.375. Some Present Participles take the Genitive when theylose their verbal nature ;and so occasionally do verbals in-ax in poetry and later prose.(Epamlnondas) erat adeo veritatis diligens ut ne ioco quidem mentiretur,NEP. ,xv. 3, 1 ; Epaminondas ieas so careful (such a lover) of the truthas not to tell lies even in jest. Omnium consBnsii capax imperil nisi imperasset,TAC., H., i. 49 ; by general consent capable of empire, hadhe not become emperor.NOTES. 1. The participle is transient ;the adjective permanent. The simple testis the substitution of the relative and the verb : amans (participle), loving (who isloving) ; amans (adjective), fond, (substantive), lover ; patiens (participle), bearing(who is bearing) ; patiens (adjective), enduring, (substantive), a sufferer.2. Ante-classical Latin shows only amans, cnpiSns, concupiens, fugitans,gerens, persequens, sciSns, temper ans. CICERO carries the usage very far, and it ischaracteristic of his style. CAESAB, on the other hand, has very few cases (B. C., i. 69, 3).CICERO also shows the first case of a Gen. after a compared participle. Sumusnatura appetentissiml honestatis, C., Tusc.,u. 24,58. These participles can alsorevert to the verbal constructions.3. Of verbals with the Gen., PLAUTUS shows one example mendax (Asin., : 855) ;CICERO perhaps one :rapax (Lael., 14, 50). The usage in later Latin and the poets isconfined at most to about one dozen verbals.III.GENITIVE WITH VERBS.Genitive with Verbs of Memory.376. Verbs of Reminding, Remembering, and Forgetting,take the Genitive.T6 veteris amlcitiae coramonefecit, [C.] ad Her. , iv. 24, 33 ;he remindedyou of your old friendship. Est proprium stultitiae aliorum vitia cernere,obllviscl suorum, C., Tusc., in. 30, 73; the fact is, it shoics a fool to havekeen eyes for the faults of others, to forget one's own. Ipse iubet mortistS meminisse dens, MART., n. 59; a god himself bids you remember death.REMARKS. i. Verbs of Reminding take more often the Abl. withd8 (so regularly in CICERO), and the Ace. neut. of a pronoun or Numeraladjective. TACITUS alone uses monere with the Gen. (Ann.,i.67,1).Oro ut Terentiani moneatis de testaments, C., Aft., xi. 16, 5; I beg youto put Terentia in mind ofn. 9, 1 (333, i).the will. Discipulosid unum moneo, QUINT.,2. Verbs of Remembering and Forgetting also take the Ace., especiallyof Things ;
GENITIVE. 241Haec olim meminisse iuvabit, V., A.,i.203 to;remember these thingsone day will give us pleasure. QuI sunt boni civSs, nisi qul patriae beneficiamemine'runt ? C., Plane., 33, 80 ;who are good citizens except thosewho remember the benefits conferred by their country ? ObliviscI nihilsoles nisi iniurias, C., Lig., 12, 35 ; you are wont to forget nothing exceptinjuries.Eecordor (literally= / bring to heart, to mind) is construed with theAec. of the Thing, except in three passages from CICERO ;d6 is foundwith Persons.Et vocem Anchlsae magni voltumque recorder, V., A., vm. 156 ;and Irecall (call to mind) the voice and countenance of Anchises the Great.MeminI, I bear in mind, I (am old enough to) remember, takes theAccusative :[Antipatrum] tu probe meministl, C., Or., in. 50, 194 ;Antipater very well.3. Venit mibl in mentem, it comes into (up to) my mind, mayyou rememberbe construedimpersonally with the Gen., or personally with a subject ;thelatter by CICERO only when the subject is a neuter pronoun.Venit mini Platonis in mentem, C., Fin., v. i, 2 ;Plato rises beforemy mind's eye.Genitive with Verbs of Emotion.377. Misereor, I pity, takes the Genitive, and miseret, itmoves to pity, paenitet, it repents, piget, it irks, pudet, itmakes ashamed, taedet and pertaesum est, it tires, take theAccusative of the Person Who Feels, and the Genitive of theExciting Cause.MisereminI sociorum, C., Verr., i. 28, 72 ; pity your allies ! Suae quemquefortiinae paenitet, C., Fam., vi. i, 1 ;each man is discontented withhis lot. MS non solum piget stultitiae meae, sed etiam pudet, C., Dom.,n, 29 ;/ am not only fretted at my folly, but actually ashamed of it.REMARKS. i. Pudet is also used with the Gen. of the Person whosePresence excites the shame :Pudet deorum hominumque, L., in. 19, 7 ;it is a shame in the sight ofgods and men.2. These Impersonals can also have a subject, chiefly a Demonstrativeor Relative pronoun N5n tS haec pudent* TER., Ad., 754 do: ;not these things put you to the blush ?3. Other constructions follow from general rules. So the Inf.(422) and quod (542).Non m6 vixisse paenitet, C., Cat.M., 23, 84 (540). Quintum paenitetquod animum tuum offendit, Of. C., Aft., xi. 13, 2; Quintus is sorry thathe has wounded your feelings.16
242 GENITIVE.NOTES. 1. With the same construction are found misereS (early Latin), misersc5(poetical), dispudet (early Latin), distaedet (early Latin), vereor (mostly in earlyLatin), and a few others.Latin.2. Miserarl and commiserarl, to pity, commiserate, take Ace. until very lateGenitive with Judicial Verbs.The Genitive with Judicial Verbs belongs to the same category as the Genitive withVerbs of Rating, both being extensions of the Genitive of Quality.378. Verbs of Accusing, Convicting, Condemning, andAcquitting take the Genitive of the Charge.(MiltiadSs) acciisatus est proditi5nis, NEP., i. 7, 5 ; Miltiades wasaccused of treason. [Fannius] C. Verrem Insimulat avaritiae, C., Verr.,I. 49, 128 ;Fannius charges Oaius Verres with avarice. VideS non t6absolutum esse improbitatis sed illos damnatos esse caedis, C., Verr., i. 28,72; I see not that you are acquitted of dishonour, but that they are convictedof murder.REMARKS. i. Judicial Verbs include a number of expressions andusages.So capl, tenSrl, dgprehendl, sS adstringere, se adligare, se obligate(ante-classical), and others, mean to be found guilty ; increpare, increpitare,urg5re, deferre, arguere, etc., mean charge.So also kindred expressions: reum facere, (to make a party) to indict,to bring an action against ; n5men dgferre d6, to bring an actionagainst ; sacrilegii comperttuu esse, to be found (guilty) of sacrilege.2. For the Gen. of the Charge may be substituted nomine or criminewith the Gen., or the Abl. with dS: nomine (srlmine) coniurationisdamnare, to find guilty of conspiracy ; accflsare dS vl, of violence (Gen.vis rare) ;dS vengficiS, of poisoning ; dS rSbus repetundis, of extortion.PSstulare always has dS in CICERO. We find sometimes in with Abl. ;convictus in crimine, on the charge ; or, inter : inter sicarios damnatus est,convicted of homicide (C., Cluent., 7, 21 ; Cf. Ph., n. 4, 8).3. Verbs of Condemning and Acquitting take the Abl. as well as theGen. of the Charge and the Punishment, and always the Abl. ofthe definite Fine ;the indefinite Fine, quantl, dupll, quadrupll, etc., isin the Genitive.Accusare capitis, or capite, to bring a capital charge. Damnare capitis,or capite, to condemn to death. Damnarl decem mllibus, to be fined tenthousand.Multare, to mulct, is always construed with the Ablative : Multarepecunia, to mulct in (of) money.Manlius virtutem filii morte moltavit, QUINT., v. n, 7 ;Manlius punishedthe valour of his son with death.4. Destination and Enforced Labor are expressed by ad or in, but allexamples are post-classical damnarl ad :bSstias, to be condemned (to be
GENITIVE. 243thrown) to wild beasts ; ad (in) metalla, to the mines ; ad (in) opus publicum,to hard labour. Votl damnarl, to be bound to fulfil a vow, isLivian (except NEP., xx. 5, 3, where it has a different sense).5. Verbs of Accusing may have also the Ace. of the Thing and theGen. of the Person : inertiam accusas adulgscentium, C., Or., i. 58, 246.Genitive with Verbs of Rating and Buying.379. Verbs of Eating and Buying are construed with theGenitive of the general value or cost, and the Ablative of theparticular value or cost. (404.)Verbs of Rating are : aestimare, exlstimare (rare), to value ; putare,to reckon ; dUcere (rare in CICERO), to take ; habere, to hold ; pendere(mostly in Comedy), to weigh ; facere, to make, put ; esse, to be (worth) ;fieri, to be considered.Verbs of Buying are : emere, to buy ; vSndere, to sell ; venire, to befor sale ; stare and constare, to cost, to come to ; pr5stare, licSre,exposed, left (for sale) ; conducere, to hire ; locare, to let.to be380. i. Verbs of Eating take :Magni, much, pluris, more, pluriml, maxiinl, most,Parvl, little, minoris, less, minimi, least,TantI, tantidem, so quantl (and compounds), nihili, naught,much,how much,Equivalents of nihili, nothing, are flood, a lock of wool, nauci, a trifle,assis, a copper, pill (both in CATULLUS, mainly), and the like, and so alsohuius, that (a snap of the finger), all usually with the negative.Bum ne ob malefacta, peream; parvl exlstumo, PL., Capt.,682, ;solong as it be not for misdeeds, let me die ; little, do I care. [Voluptatem]virtus minimi facit, C., Fin., 11. 13, 42 virtue makes; very little accountof the pleasure of the senses. [ludicSs] rem publicam flocci non faciunt,Cf. C., Att., iv. 15, 4 the ; judges do not care a fig for the State. Nonhabeo naucl Marsum augurem, C., Div.,i. 58, 132 ;I do not value aMarsian augur a bawbee.REMARK.is worth while.Tanti is often used in the sense of operae pretium est = itEst mini tanti huius invidiae tempestatem subire, C., Cat., n. 7, 15 ;itis worth while (the cost), in my eyes, to bear this storm of odium.NOTES. 1. Aestim5 is found with the Abl. as well as with the Genitive. Soaestimare magno and magni, to value highly. CICERO prefers the Ablative.2. Observe the phrases:bonl (aequi bonlque) facio (a colloquialism), bonl consu!5(an old formula), I put up with, take in good part. Non pgnsi habire (ducere),to consider not worth the while, is post-Augustan and rare.
244 GENITIVE.2. Verbs of Buying take tantl, quantl, pluris, and minoris,The rest are put in the Ablative.Vend5 meum (frumentum) noa pluris quam ceterl, fortasse etiam minoris,C., Off., in. 12, 51 ;Isell my corn not dearer than everybody else, perhapseven cheaper. Magis ilia iuvant quae pluris emuntur, Juv., xi. 16 ;things give more pleasure which are bought for more. Emit (Canius hortSs)tantl quantl Pythius voluit, C., Off., in. 14, 59 ;Canius bought thegardens at the price Pythius wanted.Quanti cenas ? What do you give for your dinner ?Quantl habitas ? What is the rent of your lodgings fBut:ParvO fam6s eonstat, magno fastldium, SEN., E.M., 17, 4 ; hunger costsdaintiness much.An instructive shift:Emit! peril hercle: quantl? Vlgintl minis, TER., Eun., 984 ;helittle,bought her ? I'm undone. For how much ? Twenty minae.REMARK. Bene emere, to buy cheap ; bene vSndere, to sell dear ; maleemere, to buy dear ; male vgndere, to sell cheap. So, too, other adverbs :melius, optime, peius, pessime.Genitive with Interest and Refert.381. Interest and Refert take a Genitive of the Person,seldom of the Thing, concerned.Interest omnium rSctS facere, C., Fin., n. 22, 72 ;it is to the interestof all to do right. RSfert compositionis quae quibus anteponas, QUINT.,ix. 4, 44 ;it is of importance for the arrangement of words, which youput before which.Instead of the Genitive of the personal pronouns, theAblative Singular feminine of the possessives is employed.Mea interest, mea retert, I am concerned.NOTES. 1. Refert is commonly used absolutely, occasionally with mea, etc., seldomwith the Gen., in the classical language.2. Instead of Apposition use the Eelative :Vehementer intererat vestra, qui patrSs estis, liberos vestrSs hie potissimumdiscere, PLIN., Ep., iv. 13, 4 ; it were vastly to the interest of you parents, thatyour children, ifpossible, were taught at home.3. The Nom. as a subject is rare, except in PLINY'S Natural History :Usque adeo magni rgfert studium atque voluptas, LUCB., iv. 984.Occasionally the Nom. of a neuter pronoun is found :Quid (Ace.) tua id (Nom.) rgfert ? TER., Ph., 723 ;what business is that of yours?4. Rgfert is the more ancient, and is employed by the poets (interest is excludedfrom Dactylic poetry by its form) to the end of the classical period. Interest ispeculiar to prose, employed exclusively by CAESAR, and preferred by CICERO when acomplement is added.
GENITIVE. 2455. No satisfactory explanation has been given of this construction. One view isthat mea refert was originally [ex] mea re fert Oike ex mea r est), it is to my advantage,and that the ex was lost. Interest having much the same force, but beinglater in development, took the constructions of refert by false analogy. The Gen.would be but parallel to the possessive.382. i. The Degree of Concern is expressed by an Adverb,Adverbial Accusative, or a Genitive of Value.Id mea minume rgfert, TER., Ad., 88 1 ;that makes no difference at allto me. Theodori nih.il interest, C., Tusc., I. 43, 102 ;It is no concern ofTheodorus. Magni interest mea una nos esse, C., Att., xm. 4 ;it is ofgreat importance to me that we be together.2. The Object of Concern iscommonly putin the Infinitive,Accusative and Infinitive, ut or ne with the Subjunctive,or an Interrogative Sentence.Quid Milonis intererat interfici Clodium ? C., Mil., 13, 34 ;what interesthad Milo in Clodius 1 being killed ? [Caesar dlcere solgbat] nSn tarn suaquamrei publicae interesseuti salvus esset, SUET., lul., 86 ;Caesar used tosay that it was not of so much importance to him(self) as to the Statethat his life should be spared. Vestra interest ne imperatorem pessimlfaciant, TAC., H., i. 30 it is to; your interest that the dregs of creationdo not make the emperor. Quid rgfert tales versus qua voce legantur1Juv., xi. 182 ;what matters it what voice such verses are recitedwith ?3. The Thing Involved isput in the Accusative with ad :Magni ad houorein nostrum interest quam prlmum m@ ad urbem venire,C., Fam., xvi. i, 1 ;it makes a great difference touching our honour thatI should come to the city as soon as possible.Occasional Uses.383. i- The Genitive is found occasionally with certain Verbs ofFulness : in classical Latin principally implere, complere, egere, indiggre.Plso multos codices implevit earum rgrum, C., Verr. i. 46, 119 ;Pisofilled many books full of those things. Virtus plurimae comment ationiset exercitationis indiget, Cf. C., Fin., in. 15, 50 ;virtue stands in needof much (very much) study and practice.NOTES. 1. Classical Latin shows in all cases the Abl. much more frequently thanthe Gen., except hi the case of indigere, where CICERO prefers the Genitive. LIVTlikewise prefers the Gen. with implgre.2. Ante-classical and poetic are explere (VERG.), abundare (Luc.), scatgre(LUCK.), saturare (PLATJT.), obsaturare (TEB.), carere (TER.). CarBre and eg6rehave the Ace. occasionally in early Latin.3. Other Grecisms are laborum decipitur, H.,
246 ABLATIVE.Rfignavit populorum, H., 0., in. 30, 12. Also mlrari with Gen. in VEKGIL (A., xi.126). Noteworthy is the occasional use of crSdere with Gen. in PLAUTDS so once;falll.2. A Genitive of Separation, after the analogy of the Greek, is foundin a few cases in the poets.Tit mg omnium iam labOrum levas, PL., Rud. 247 hoio ; youat last of all my toils and troubles. Desine mollium tandem querellarum,relieve meH., 0., ii. 9, 17 ;cease at last from womanish complainings.3. The Genitive in Exclamations occurs in a very few instances inthe poets. CAT., ix. 5 ; PROP., iv. (v.) 7, 21 ; compare PL., Most., 912 ;LUCAN, n. 45.On the Genitive after comparatives, see 296, N. 2.ABLATIVE.384. The Ablative is the Adverbial, as the Genitive is theAdjective case. It contains three elements :A. Where? B. Whence? C. Wherewith?In a literal sense, the Ablative is commonly used with prepositions ;in a figurative sense, it iscommonly used without prepositions.A. The Ablative of the Place Where appears in a figurative sense asthe Ablative of the Time When.B. The Ablative of the Place Whence appears as :i. The Ablative of Origin. 2. The Ablative of Measure.C. The Ablative of the Thing Wherewith appears in a figurativesense, as :i. The Ablative of Manner. 2. The Ablative of Quality. 3. TheAblative of Means.REMARK. It is impossible to draw the line of demarcation withabsolute exactness. So the Ablative of Cause may be derived from anyof the three fundamental significations of the case, which is evidentlya composite one.To these we add :D. The Ablative of Cause. E. The Ablative Absolute.I. The Literal Meanings of the Ablative.A. ABLATIVE OF THE PLACE WHERE.AblatTvus Localis.385. The Ablative answers the question Where ? and takesas a rule the preposition in.In portfl navigo, TER., And., 480; Iam sailing IN harbour. P5ns inHibSr5 prope effectus (erat), CAES., B.C.,i. 62, 3; the bridge OVER the
ABLATIVE. 247Ebro ivas nearly finished. Histrio in scaena [est], PL. ,Poen. ,20 ;theactor is ON the stage. Haeret in equo senex, Cf. C., Dei., 10, 28 ;the oldman sticks TO his horse.REMARKS. i. Verbs of Placing and kindred significations take theAbl. with in, to designate the result of the motion classical are :ponere,to place, and compounds ;locare, collocare, to put ; statuere, constituere,to set ; consldere, to settle ; defigere, to plant ; demergere, to plunge ;imprimere, to press upon ; insculpere, to engrave (figurative) ; Inscribere,to write upon ; incldere, to carve upon ; includere, to shut into.Plato rationem in capite posuit, iram in pectore locavit, C., Tusc.,i. 10,20 ;Plato has put reason in the head, has placed anger in the breast.(LucrStia) cultrum in corde dgfigit, L., i. 58, 11 ;Lucretia plants a knifein (thrusts a knife down into) her heart. Philosophi in ils librls ipslsquos scrlbunt dS contemnenda glSria sua n5mina inscribunt, C., Tusc.,i.15, 34 ; philosophers write their own names on (the titles of) the verybooks which they write about contempt of glory. (Foedus) in columnaaenea inclsum, C., Balb., 23, 53 ;a treaty cut upon a brazen column.The same observation applies to sub :Pone sub curru nimium propinqui soils in terra domibus negata, 11 ., 0.,i. 22, 21 ; put (me) under the chariot of the ail-too neighboring sun, in aland denied to dwellings.2. Verbs of Hanging and Fastening take ex, ab, or dS.Cul sp6s omnis pendet ex fortuna, hulc nihil potest esse certi, C., Par., n.17 to him;who has all his hopes suspended on fortune, nothing can becertain.3. Here and there in is often rendered by per : C. ,Fam.provincias, here and there in the provinces ; V., A., in. 236., i. 7, 6, perNOTES. 1. In classical prose the use of the Abl. without in is confined to a fewwords, mostly phraseological. So terra, on land ; marl, by sea ; usually in the phraseterra marique (rarely in the reversed order), on land and sea. In terra is morecommon otherwise than terra. Loco and locis, especially when used with adjectives,usually omit in. The same is true of parte and partibus so; regularly dextra(parte), sinistra, laeva, etc., on the right, on the left. LIVT uses likeregi5 locus.The tendency, however, is observable as early as CICERO'S time to omit the in whenan adjective is employed, even in words other than those given above this; tendencybecomes more marked in Lrvr and is very strong in later Latin. The poets are free.Regard must always be had to 389.2. The Ace. with in after verbs of Placing is very rare in classical prose. In earlyLatin it is more common ;so with ponere, imponere, collocare. The examples withAce. in classical Latin are principally with compounds of ponere, as impSnere (usually),repOnere, expdnere. Collocare with in and Ace. in CAES., B. G., 1. 18, 7, is notin a local sense. Sometimes the Dat. is found with imponere.3. With a verb of Rest the motion antecedent to the rest is often emphasised by construingthe verb with in and the Ace. instead of with in and the Abl. This occursmost often with esse and habgre, and seems to have been colloquial, as it is very rarein classical prose.Numero mjbj in mentem fuit dls advenientem gratias agere, PL., Am., 180.
248 ABLATIVE.Adesse in senatum iussit, C., Ph.,v. 7, 19 (Of. hflc ades, come hither). Parcerevictis in animum habebat, L., xxxm. 10, 4.386. Names of Towns in the Singular of the Third Declension,and in the Plural of all Declensions, take the Ablativeof Place Where without in.Ut Roinae consules sic Carthagine quotannis bin! reges creabantur, XEP.,xxin. 7, 4 ;as at Rome (two) consuls, so in Carthage two kings, werecreated yearly.Talis (Romae Fabricius), qualis Aristidgs Athgnis, fait, C.,Off., in. 22, 87; Fabricius was just such a man at Rome as Aristideswas at Athens.REMARKS. i.Appositions are put in the Abl. commonly with in;when the appositive has an attribute, the proper name regularly precedes:Neapoll, in celeberrimo oppido, C., Rob. Post., 10, 26; at Naples,a populous town.2. In the neighborhood of, at, is ad with Ace., especially of militaryoperations: pugna ad Cannas (better Canngnsis), the battle at Cannae;pons ad Genavam, CAES., B.G.,i."j; the bridge at Geneva.387. In citations from Books and in Enumerations, theAblative of the Place Where is used without in.Libro tertio, third book ; versu decim5, tenth verse ; alio Ioc5, elsewhere.But in is necessary when a passage in a book and not the whole book ismeant :Agricultura laudatur in eo libro qui est cle tuenda re familiar!, C.,Cat. M., 17, 59; agriculture is praised in the work on domestic economy.388. In designations of Place, with totus, cunctus, whole ;omnis, all ; medius, middle, the Ablative of the Place Whereis generally used without in.NOTE. The Abl. in names of Towns of the Second Declension is found once in CAE-SAR (B. C., in. 35, but the reading is questioned) ;more often in VITRDVIUS and laterLatin, but in Greek words only. Apparent exceptions in CAESAR and CICERO are to bereferred to the Abl. of Separation. The poets, however, are free.Menippus, meo iudicio, tota Asia disertissimus, C., Br., 91, 315 ; Henippus,in my judgment, the most eloquent man in all Asia (Minor).BattiadSs semper t5to cantabitur orbe, Ov., Am., i. 15, 13 ;Battiades (Callimachus)will always be sung throughout the world.REMAKE. In is not excluded when the idea is throughout, in whichcase per also may be used. Neg5 in Sicilia t5tS (throughout the whole ofSicily) ullum argenteum vas fuisse, etc., C., Verr., iv. i, 1.389. In all such designations of Place as may be regardedin the light of Cause, Manner, or Instrument, the Ablativeis used without a preposition.
ABLATIVE. 249Ut terra Thermopylarum angustiae Graeciam, ita marl fretum EurlpIclaudit, L.,xxxi. 23, 12 as the ; pass of Thermopylae bars Greece byland, so the frith of Euripus by sea. Ariovistus exercitum castrls continuit,CAES., B.G., i. 48, 4 ;Ariovistus kept his army within the camp.Egressus est non vils sed tramitibus, C., Ph., xin. 9, 19 he went out not;by high roads but by cross-cuts. Nemo Ire quemquam publics probibetvia, PL., Cure., 35 no man;forbiddeth (any one to) travel by the publicroad. Matris cinerSs B8mam Tiber! subvecti aunt, Cf. SUET., Cal., 15;his mother's ashes were brought upto Rome by the Tiber.So recipere aliquem tSctS, oppidS, portii, to receive a man into one'shouse, toum, harbour; where, however, the Ace. with in is not excluded:gentes universae in civitatem sunt receptae, C., Balb., 13, 31.390. i . TheB. ABLATIVE OF THE PLACE WHENCE.Ablatlvus Separatlvus.Ablative answers the question Whence ? andtakes as a rule the prepositions ex, out of, d6, from, ab, off.(Bum) exturbastl ex aedibus 1 PL., Trin., 137 did ; you hustle him outof the house ? Araneas deiciam de" pariete, PL., St., 355 / will; get thecobwebs down from the wall. Alcibiadem AthSnignses 6 clvitate expulSrunt,Cf. NEP., vn. 6, 2 ; the Athenians banished Alcibiades from thestate. Decedit ex Gallia R5mam Naevius, C., Quinct., 4, 16 ;Naeviuswithdrew from Gaul to Rome. TJnde dSiScistl sive ex qu5 loco, sive aqu5 Ioc5 (whether OUT OF or FROM which place), e5 restituas, C., Caec.,30, 88.2. The prepositions are often omitted with Verbs of Abstaining,Removing, Relieving, and Excluding so ; regularlywith domo, from home, rure, from the country."With Persons a preposition (chiefly ab) must be used.(Verrgs) omnia dom5 Sius abstulit, C., Verr., 11. 34, 83 ;Verres tookeverything aivay from his house. Ego, cum Tullius rure redierit, mittameum ad tS, C., Fam., v. 20, 9 ;when Tullius returns from the country, Iwill send him to you.Compare AliSno manum abstineant, CATO, Agr., 5, 1 ; let them keeptheir hand(s)from other people's property, with [Alexander] vix a sS mantisabstinuit, C., Tusc., iv. 37, 79 ;Alexander hardly kept (could hardlykeep) his hands from himself (from laying hands on himself).Compare Lapidibus optimos viros foro pellis, C., Har.Res., 18, 39; youdrive men of the best classes from the forum with stones, with Istumaemulum ab e pellit5, TER., Eun., 215 drive that rival; from her.Compare Omnium rSrum natura cognita llberamur mortis metu, C.,Fin., i. 19, 63; by the knowledge of universal nature we get rid of the
25OABLATIVE.fear of death, with TS ab eo libero, C., Q.F., in. i. 3, 9; / rid you ofhim.Compare Amicitia nullo loco excluditur, C., Lad., 6, 22 ; friendship isshut out from no place, with Ab ilia excluder, h5c concludor, Cf. TER.,And., 386 ;I am shut out from HER (and) shut up here (to live with HER).NOTES. 1. In classical Latin the preposition is usually employed in local relations,and omitted in metaphorical relations ; though there are some exceptions.2. It is to be noted that in the vast majority of cases the separation is indicated by averb ;hence this Abl. is found commonly with verbs compounded with prepositions.Thus, classical Latin shows but few simple verbs with the Abl., as follows :mov6re,chiefly in general or technical combinations mov8re :Ioc5, senatu, tribu (CAESAR,however, has no case) ;pellere, in technical language with clvitate, domo, foro,patria, possessionibus, suls sedibus cedere is found with; patria, vita, memoria,possessione, Italia ; cadere, technical with causa solvere with; lege(iSgibus), religione, etc., soru.no levare and liberate are found;chiefly in metaphoricalcombinations, and especially in CICERO ; arcfire has peculiarly ab withmetaphorical, Abl. with local forces. In the case of most of these verbs, the prepositionwith the Abl. is also found.3. Of compound verbs with the Abl., CICERO shows only s5 abdicate (principallytechnical), abesse (rarely), abhorrSre (once) ; abire (in technical uses = sS abdicare),abrumpere (once), absolvere, abstinSre (intraus. without, trans, more often with,preposition), deicere (with aedllitate, etc.), de"movere (once), depellere, desistere,deturbare ;educere (rare) ; efferre (rare) ;ggredl Sicere; ;6labi (rare) ; emittere(CAES.) ;gripere (rare ; usually Dat.) ; gvertere ;excgdere ;excludere ;exire (rare) ;expellere exsolvere; ;exsistere (rare) ; exturbare ;intercludere ;interdlcere (alicul aliqua rS also alicui ; aliquid) ; praecipitare (CAES.) ; probibgre; aupersedere.Early Latin shows a few more verbs with this construction. The poets are free withthe Abl., and also later prose writers, beginning with LIVT.4.Hum6,//ww the ground, begins with VERGIL.- The preposition a is found occasionallywith domo ; necessarily with a word (adjective or adverb) involving measurement,as ;longinque, longS, procul.5. Compounds with dl (dis) also take the Dative (in poetry):Paulum sepultae dlstat inertiae cSlata virtus, H., O.,TV. 9, 29; little dothhidden worth differfrom buried sloth.6. The Place Whence gives the Point of View from which. In English a differenttranslation is often given, though not always necessarily a in the :tergo, rear ; exparte dextra, on the right side ; ab oriente, on the east ; a tanto spatio, at such adistance ; ex fuga, on the flight ; a rS frumentaria labor are, to be embarrassed inthe matter,qfprovisions.3. The prepositions are also omitted with kindred Adjectives.Animus excelsus ornni est liber cura, C., Fin., i. 15, 49 ;a lofty mindis free from all care. (Cato) omnibus humanis vitiis immunis, semper fortunamin sua potestate habuit, VELL., n. 35, 2 ; Cato, exempt from allhuman failings, always had fortune in his own power. lugurtha (Adherbalem)extorrem patria effScit, S., lug., 14, 11 ; lugurtha renderedAdherbal an exile from his country, Utrumque (fraus et vis) hominealignissimum, C., Off., 1. 13, 41.
ABLATIVE. 251NOTES. 1. The preposition is more usual in most cases. PflrilS and immunis, withsimple Abl., are poetical and post-Augustan. Expers, with Abl. instead of with Gen.,belongs to early Latin and SALLUST. BecSns, fresh from, with Abl., belongs toTACITUS.2. Procul, far from, regularly takes the preposition ab, except in the poets andlater prose.3. The Abl. of the Supine is early and late, as CATO, Agr., 5 ; Vllicus primus cubitusurgat, postrSmus cubitum eat. See 436, N. 4.391. Names of Towns and Small Islands are put in theAblative of the Place Whence.DSmarStus ftigit Tarquinios Corintho, C., Tusc., v. 37, 109 ;Demaratusfled to Tarquinii from Corinth. Dolabella Delo proficlscitur, C., Verr.,1. 1 8, 46 ;Dolabella sets out from Delos.REMAKKS. i. The prepositions ab (a) and ex (6) are sometimes usedfor the sake of greater exactness, but rarely in model prose. So regularlyab with the Place from which distance is measured :[Aesculapii templum] quinque milibus passuum ab urbe [Epidaur5] distat,Cf. L., XLV. 28, 3 (403, N. I).When the substantives urbe, city, and oppido, town, are employed, theuse of the preposition is the rule, as also when not the town, but theneighbourhood is intended also ; always with longg. When the Appositivehas an attribute the proper name regularly precedes.Aulide, ex oppido Boeotiae, from Aulis, a town of Boeotia. Ex ApolloniaPontl urbe, from Apollonia, a city of Pontus. Ex oppido Gergovia,CAES., .G.,vu. 4, 2 ; from the town of Gergovia.Early Latin is free in the use of prepositions ;and also from LIVYon the usage seems to increase.2. The Place Whence embraces all the local designations :Agrigento ex Aesculapii fano whereas we should say, from the templeof Aesculapius at Agrigentum. TJnde domo 1 V., A., vui. 114; from whathome ?3. Letters are dated from rather than at a place.NOTE. Names of countries are but rarely used in the Ablative. CICEEO, SAILUST,and LIVT show no instance, CAESAR only one (B.C., in. 58, 4). Occasional examplesare found in early Latin and in old inscriptions ;then in later historians, beginningwith VELLEIUS. The use of prepositions with towns seems in general to have been acolloquialism, Cf. SUET., Aug., 86. The poets are free in their usage.C. ABLATIVE OF THE THING WHEREWITH.Ablatlvus SociatTvus.392. The Ablative of Attendance takes the prepositioncum, 'with.Cum febrl domum rediit, C., Or., in. 2, 6 ;he returned home with a
2$2 ABLATIVE.fever. Catillna stetit in comitio cum telo, Cf. C.. Cat., i. 6, 15 ; Catilinestood in the place of election with a weapon (on him). Cum bacu!5 peraque[senex], MART., iv. 53, 3 an old;man with stick and ivallet. Nee tecumpossum vlvere nee sine t6, MART., xn. 47. 2; I can't live either withyou or without you.REMARKS. i. In military phrases, the troops with which a marchis made are put in the Ablative, with or without cum ; generally withoutcum when an adjective is used (Ablative of Manner), with cum whenno adjective is used (Ablative of Attendance). With definite numbers,however, cum is regularly employed.Albani ingenti exercitu in agrum Romanum impetum fecere, L.. I. 23, 3 ;the Albans attacked the Roman territory with a huge army. Caesar cumequitibus DCCCC in castra pervSnit, CAES., B.C., i. 41, 1; Caesar arrivedin camp with nine hundred cavalry.2. Not to be confounded with the above is the Instrumental Ablative:Navibus profectus est, C., Fam., xv. 3, 2 ;he set out by ship.So also with verbs which denote other military actions :Hasdrubal mediam aciem Hispanls firmat, L., xxin. 29, 4 ;Hannibalstrengthens the centre with Spanish troops. Actum nihil est nisi Poenomilite portas frangimus, Juv., x. 155 ; naught is accomplished unless webreak the gates with the Punic soldiery (as if with a battering-ram).II. The Figurative Meanings of the Ablative.A. The Place Where is transferred to the Time When.Ablative of Time. AblatTvus Temporis.393. Time AVhen or Within Which isputin the Ablative.Qua nocte natus Alexander est, eadem Dlanae Ephesiae templum deflagravit,Cf. C., N.D., n. 27, 69 ;on the same night on which Alexanderwas born, the temple, of Diana of Ephesus burned to the ground. Saturn!Stella triginta fere" annis cursum suum conficit, C.,N.D., n. 20, 52 ;theplanet Saturn completes its period in about thirty years.Many adverbial forms of time are really Locative Ablatives :So hodie, to-day ; herl(e), yesterday ; mane, in the morning.REMARKS. i. Time Within Which may be expressed by per and theAccusative :Per eos ipsos dies quibus Philippus in Achaia fuit, Pliilocles saltumCithaeronis transcendit, L., xxxi. 26, 1 ; during those very days, whilePhilip was in Achaia, Philocles crossed the range of Cithaeron.2. Time Within Which may embrace both extremities ;so usuallywith totus, all, whole :
ABLATIVE.253Nocte pluit tots, redeunt at mane serSna, V. (PoET. LAT. MIN., iv. 155B) ; all night (Jupiter) rains; clear skies come back in the morning.So with definite numbers; but rarely, until the post-Augustanperiod :Scriptum est trlginta annis vixisse Panaetium, posteaquam illos librosedidisset, C., Off., m. 2, 8 ;it is written that Panaetius lived for thirtyyears after he had published those books (not to be confounded with the.Abl. of Difference, 403). Apud Pythagoram dlscipnlls quinque annistacendum erat, SEN., U.M., 52, 10; in the school of Pythagoras thedisciples had to keep silence five years.3. When the Notion is Negative, the English Time For Which is theLatin Within Which.[Koscius] Eoinara multls annis non vSnit, C., Rose. Am., 27, 74 ;Rosciushas not come to Rome in (for) many years. Not always, however;compare Sex mSnsIs iam hie nemo habitat, PL., Most., 954 no one has;been living here these six months.4. Especially to be noted is the Abl. of Time with hie, this ; ille, that :Cul vigintl his annis snpplicati5 dScreta est 1 C., Ph., xiv. 4, 11 ;towhom during these last twenty years has a supplication been decreed ?[Karthaginem] hoc biennio SvertSs, C., Rep., vi. ir, 11 ; Carthage youwill overturn in the next two years.Transferred to Oratio Obllqua, hie becomes ille (660, 3) :Diodorus [responditj illud argentum s5 panels illls diebus mlsisse Lilybaeum,C., Verr., iv. 18, 39 ;Diodorus answered that he had sent thatsilver plate to Lilybaeum within a few days (a few days before).5. The Abl. of Time is regularly accompanied by an attribute inclassical Latin, except in the case of a number of common designations,as aestate, die, bieme, nocte, vespere (vesperi). Exceptions are rare, suchas comitils, luce, pace, militia, and some names of games.394. The Ablative with the preposition in is used of pointswithin a period of time, or of the character of the time.Bis in dig, twice a day ; in pneritia, in boyhood ; in adulgscentia, inyouth.Nullo modo mini placuit bis in di5 saturum fieri, C., Tusc., v. 35, 100 ;it did not suit me in any way to eat my fill twice a day.itidem in adulescentia, PL., B., 410 ;Feel ego istaecI did those things too in my youth.REMARK. The use or omission of in sometimes changes the meaning.So bello Persico, at the time of the Persian war ; but in bello, in wartimes ; in pace, in peace times. Phraseological is in tempore, more frequentthan tempore, at the right time. But in illo tempore means inthose circumstances, at that crisis. At present, for the present, isalways in praesentia or in praesenti (rare).
254 ABLATIVE.NOTES. 1. Classical Latin confines the use of in to designations of Time of Life(though here, when an adjective is employed, in is usually omitted) and to the periodsof time. Later in is used much more extensively. With numerals in is the rule. CATOand the poets have sometimes bis die", as digs = Unas diSs.2. D5, front, is also used in designations of time : principally in the phrase dS diS,de nocte. Tit iugulent hominem surgunt de nocte latrones, II., fyi., i. 2, 32 ; tokUl a man, highwaymen rise by night, i. e., while it is yet night.Inter, between : Quae prandia inter continuom per did! triennium, PL., St.,213 what luncheons I have lost ; during three years together.Intra", within: SubSgit solus intra vlginti dies, PL., Cure., 448; he quelledthem all alone in less than twenty days.On per, through, see 336, B. 2.Cum, with, is found occasionally in phrases, as cum prlma luce, with, daybreak.B. The Place Whence is transferred :i. To Origin. 2. To Eespect or Specification.I. Ablative of Origin.395. Participles which signify Birth take the Ablative ofOrigin ;sometimes with the prepositions ex and d.Amplissima familia nati adulescentes, CAES., B.G., vn. 37, 1; youngmen born of a great house. Numae Pompilii rggis nepos, filia ortus, AncusMarcius erat, L., i. 32, 1 ; King Numa Pompilius's grandson, a daughter'sissue, was Ancus Marcius. Maecenas atavis Sdite rggibus, H., 0., i.i, 1; Maecenas, offshoot of great-grandsire kings. Dis genite et genituredeos, V., A., ix. 639 ; begotten of gods, and destined to beget gods !Sate sanguine divum! V., A., vi. 125 ;seed of blood divine ! Ex mSatque ex hoc natus es, TER., Heaut., 1030 ; you are his son and mine.OdSrunt natos de paelice, Juv.,vi. 627; they hate the offspring of theconcubine.Ab, and occasionally ex, are employed of remote progenitors :Plgrlque Belgae sunt ortl ab Germanis, Of. CAES., B.G., n. 4, 1; Belgiansare mostly of German descent. Oriundi ex Etruscis, Cf. L., n. 9, 1 ;of ^Etruscan origin.NOTES. 1. The principal participles thus used are natus, prognatus, oriundus ;ortus, genitus, and satus beghi in prose with LIVT ; gditus and cr6tus are poetic ;procreatus is late. CICERO uses oriundus but once ; it denotes remote origin.2. With names of Places the preposition is the rule (362, N. 2) ;but there are a fewexceptions in early Latin and in CICERO, arid a couple of examples in CAESAR. Laterthe simple Abl. disappears. The Abl. was the rule with names of Tribes.Periphangs Rhodo mercator, PL., Asin., 499. Magius Cremona, CAES., B. C.,i. 24, 4. Q. Verres RSmilia, C., Verr., i. 8, 23 ; Q. Vcrres of the RomUian tribe.3. With finite verbs denoting Origin, the preposition is regular, except occasionallywith nascl.4. The Ablative of Agent properly belongs here. But for convenience of contrast itis treated under 401.396. The Ablative of Material takes ex in classical Latin.
ABLATIVE. 255Ex animS c5nstamus et corpore, Cf. C., Fin., iv. 8, 19 ;ice consist ofmind and body.Statua ex auro, ex acre, facta, a statue made of gold, of bronze. Oftenan adjective is used :aureus, golden; ligneus, wooden.NOTES. 1. After CICERO constare is used more often with the Abl.; consistere(with the Abl.) is poetical. Continerl, to be contained in, i.e., almost " to consist of,"takes the Abl. only, but with a different conception.Medicina tota constat experimentis, QUINT., n. 17, 9 ; all medicine is made upof experiments (is empirical).2. With fieri the previous state is indicated by dS as well as by ex.D6 templo carcerem fieri! C., Ph., Y. 7, 18 ; from a temple to become a jail.Fles d6 rhgtore consul, Jtrv., TII. 197 ; from (having been) rhetorician you willbecome consul. Ex oratSre arator factus, C., Ph., in. 9, 22 (206, B. 2).3. Otherwise the simple Ablative of Material is poetic or late :Mayors caelatus ferr5, V., A., vm. 700 ; Mars carven of iron.Meliore luto finxit, Juv., xiv. 35 he ; fashioned it of better clay.2. Ablative of Respect.397. The Ablative of Kespect or Specification gives thePoint From Which a thing is measured or treated, and isput in answer to the questionsFrom What Point of View ?According to What ? By What ? In Respect of What ?Discrlptus populus censu, ordinibus, aetatibus, C., Leg., in. 19, 44 a;people drawn off according to income, rank, (and) age. Ennius ingeniomaximus, arte rudis, Ov., Tr., n. 424 Ennius in genius ; great, in artunskilled. Animo Ignavus, procax ore, TAC., H., n. 23, 18 ;coward ofsoul, saucy of tongue.Noteworthy are the phrases : crine ruber, red-haired ; captus oculls(literally, caught in the eyes), blind ; captus mente, insane ; mea sententia,according to my opinion ; iure, by right ; ISge, by law, etc. ; andthe Supines in -u (436).NOTES. 1. Prepositions are also used, which serve to show the conception :(Caesaris) adventus ex colore vestltus cognitus, 6/. CAES., B.., vn. 88, l ;the arrival of Caesar was known by the color of his clothing. DS gestu intellegoquid respondeas, C., Vat., 15, 35 ; Innderstand by your gesture what answer you aregiving. Ab animo aeger fui, PL., Ep., 129 ;at heart I was sick. OtiSsum abanimo, TER., Ph., 340 ; easy in mind'.Similarly ex I5ge, according to law ; ex pact5, according to agreement ; ex (d5)more, according to custom ; ex animi sententia, according to (my) heart's desire ;ex usu, useful.2. A special category is formed by words indicating eminence or superiority ; so excellere,antecellere, praestare, superare, vincere and the; adjectives:Insignia,illustris, dignus ; excellens, praecellgns. Praecellere is found in early and lateLatin, while dlgnarl is poetic and post-Augustan.MaximS populus Eomanus animi magnitudine excellit, C., Off., 1. 18, 61 ; theRoman peojfe excel most in loftiness of mind.On dignuswith Gen., see 374, N. 10.
256 ABLATIVE.A curious usage is that of dec5rus and decSre, with Abl., in PL., M. G., 619; Asin.^j.3. The origin of these constructions is still undetermined. They may be deducedalso from the Instrumental side of the Abl., or from the Locative side.398. The Ablative of Eespect is used with the Comparativeinstead of quam, than, with the Nominative or Accusative;but in the classical language mainly after a negative,or its equivalent.(Abldtlvus Compardtionis.)Tunica propior palliost, PL., Trin., 1154 ;the shirt is nearer than thecloak. Nibil est virtute amabilius, C., Lael., 8, 28 ; nothing is moreattractive than virtue. Quid est in homine ratiSne dlvlnius* C., Leg.,i.7, 22 ;ivhat is there in man more godlike than reason ?So also after adverbs, but not so freely in prose:Lacrima nihil citius argscit, C., Inv., I. 56, 109 ; nothing dries morequickly than a tear. NSm5 est qul tib! sapientius suadgre possit t6 ips5,C., Fam., ii. 7, 1 there is no one;who can give you wiser advice thanyou yourself. Fulcrum Srnatum turpes morgs peius caeno conlinunt, PL.,Most., 291 ; foul behavior doth bedraggle fine apparel worse than mud.REMARK.When the word giving the point of view is a relative, theAbl. must be used. See 296, R. 2.Fbldiae simulacris quibus nihil in illo genere perfectius vidimus, cogitatetamen possumus pulchriora, C., Or., 2, 8 ;the statues of Pheidias, thanivhich we see nothing more perfect in their kind, still leave room for usto imagine those that are more beautiful.NOTES. 1. The comparative is also employed with the Abl. of certain abstractsubstantives and adjectives used as substantives ;so oplni5ne, spe", exspectatione ;aequo, iusto, solito, and the like, all post-Ciceronian except aequo, opinione.(Consul) sSrius sp6 (= quam spSs fuerat) Romam v6nit, L., xxvi. 26,4 the;cotisul came to Rome later than was hoped. Solito citatior amnis, L., xxm. 19, 11;the river runningfaster than usual.2.Aeque and adaequS are found once each in PLAUTUS with the Abl.; and thennot till the time of the elder PLINY.3. For other details, see 206 and 644.C. ABLATIVE OF THE THING WHEREWITH.AblatTvus Sociatlvus.Ablative of Attendance.1 . Ablative of Manner.399. The Ablative of Manner answers the question How ?and is used with the Preposition cum when ithas no Adjective;with or without cum when it has an Adjective or itsequivalent.(Abldtlvus Modi.)[StellaeJ circulos suos orbgsque conficiunt celeritate mlrabill, C., Rep., vi.15, 15 ;the stars complete their orbits with wonderful swiftness. Vos
ABLATIVE. 2575r8 ut attentS bongque cum venia verba mea audiatis, C.. Rose. Am., 4, 9 ;/ beg you to hear my words attentively and with kind indulgence.Beats vlvere, honeste", id est cum virtute, vivere, C., Fin., ill. 8, 29 ;tolive happily is to live honestly, that is, virtuously.NOTES. 1. The simple Abl. without an attribute is confined to a few substantives,which have acquired adverbial force ; early Latin shows astu, curriculo, dolo, ergo,gratils and ingratils, iocu.16, merito, numero, optato, online, sortito, voluntate,vulgo. TERENCE adds :vl, iiire, iniuria. Classical Latin shows some ofthese, also ratione, ratione et via, moribus, consu6tudine, silentiS, casu, le"ge,fraude, vitio, Sacramento (beginning with LIVY), and a few others. Sometimes theidea of Specification is prominent, as in lege, iure (397) ;sometimes it is hard to distinguishbetween the Manner and the Instrument : vl, violently and by violence ; vl etarmis, by force of arms ; pedibus, afoot ; navibus, by ship. Notice, also, the use ofper, through, with the Accusative : per vim, by violence ; per litteras, by letter.2. The post-Ciceronian Latin extends the use of the Abl. without an attribute.3. The phrases sub condicione, sub 16ge, etc., begin with LIVY.2. Ablative of Quality.(Descriptive Ablative.)400. The Ablative of Quality has no Preposition, and alwaystakes an Adjective or an equivalent.[Hannibalis] nomen erat magna apud omnSs gl5ria, C., Or., n. 18, 75 ;the name of Hannibal icas glorious in the esteem of all the world.(AgSsilaus) statura fuit humill, NEP., xvu. 8, 1 ; Agesilaus was (a man)of low stature. Ista turpiculo puella naso, CAT., 41, 3 ;that girl of yourswith the ugly nose. Clavi ferrei digitl pollicis crassitudine, Cf. CAES.,B,G., in. 13, 4 ;iron nails of the thickness of your thumb.REMARKS. i. External and transient qualities are put by preferencein the Ablative ; Measure, Number, Time, and Space are put inthe Genitive only ; parts of the body in the Ablative only. Otherwisethere is often no difference.2. Of unnatural productions cum may be used : agnus cum suillScapite, L., xxxi. 12, 7 ;a lamb with a sivine's head.3. Ablative of Means.401. The Means or Instrument isput in the Ablativewithout a Preposition.The Agent or Doer isput in the Ablative with the Prepo-in thesition ab (a). The Person Through Whom isputAccusative with per.'" nQnti5Xerxes certior factus'est, (^ a messa^2 ~ a nunti5Xerxes was'informed, ]^ a messen ffer -17( 3. per nuntium, by means of a messenger.
2$8 ABLATIVE.Qui sunt homines, a quibus ille se lapidibus adpetltum, etiam percussumesse dlxit ? C., Dom., 5, 13 ;who are the men by whom he said he had beenthrown at with stones, and even hit ? Vulgo occidebantur ? Per qu8set a quibus1 C., Rose. Am., 29, 80; ivere they cut down openly 9 Tliroughwhose instrumentality and by whose agency ? Nee bene promeritls capiturneque tangitur Ira, LUCR., n. 651 (227, N. 4). Ipse docet quid agam:fas est et ab hoste docerl, Ov., M., iv. 428 (219).Discite sanari per querndidicistis amare, Ov., Hem. Am., 43; learn to be healed by means of (himby) whom you learned to love.REMARKS. i. When the Instrument is personified and regarded asan Agent, or the Agent is regarded as an Instrument, the constructionsare reversed ;when an adjective is used, the construction may bedoubtful; see 354, x. i, and 214, R. 2.So iacent suls tSstibus, C., Mil., 18, 47 ; they are cast by their ownwitnesses; or, they are cast,their own men being witnesses.2. A quality, when personified, has the construction of the person.So de-sen a mente, a spe,Vobis animus ab ignavia atque socordia conruptus [est], S., lug., 31, 2;you have had your soul(s) debauched by sloth and indifference.NOTES. 1. The number of verbs construed with this Abl. is very large and comprisesseveral categories so verbs of ;Clothing and Providing, Adorning and Endowing,Training (grudJre also takes in ;others take Ace., see 339), Living and Nourishing,etc.2. Of special importance are assugsco, assuSfacio, assuStus; (Catillna) seelerumexercitatione assugfactus, C., Cat., n. 5, 9. The Dat. is found first in LIVYin prose. Ad with the Ace. is also classical.3. Afficere, to treat, with the Ablative, is a favorite turn ;see the Lexicons.4. Verbs of sacrificing, such as sacrificare, sacrum facere, divlnam rem facere,facere and fieri (mostly poetical), immolare, litare (poetical), have the Abl. of Means.But immolare usually has Ace. and Dat., and so the others occasionally, exceptfacere.Qulnquaginta capris sacrificavgrunt, L., XLV. 16, 6 ; they sacrificed fifty she-5. Here belong also verbs like pluere, sudare (not classic), stillare (not classic),fluere, manare, and the like : sanguine pluisse, L., xxiv. 10, 7. The Ace. is alsocommon.6. NItor, I stay myself, is construed with the Abl.; occasionally with in. FIdo,confide, / trust, rely on, have the Abl. ;but with persons the Dat., sometimes also withthings. On the other hand, diffidS, / distrust, always has the Dat. in classical Latin,but TACITUS shows Abl., and so do other later writers. Stare, to abide by, usuallyhas the Abl., but occasionally in ;manSre has usually in ;the Abl. is poetical. Acquifiscere,to acquiesce in, with Abl. is rare. FrStus, supported, takes the Abl. regularly;LIVT alone uses the Dative. Contentus, satisfied with (oy), is used only of one's ownpossessions (rSbus, fortuna, etc.), and has the Ablative.Salus omnium non vgritate solum sed etiam fama nltitur, '/. C., i. ii.Q.F.,i,2; the welfare of all rests not on truth alone, but also on repute. Eius iudicio starenolim, C., TUSC., n. 26, 63 ;I should not like to abide by his judgment.7. A remnant of the old usage is found with fI5, facio, and esse :Quid fgcistl scipione 1 PL., Cos., 975 what have you done with the wand? Quid;
ABLATIVE. 259mS flet ? PL-, Most., 1166 ;what will become of me? Quid t5 futurumst 1 TEH.Ph., 137 ;what is to become of you ? Quid hoc homine facias T C., Verr., u. 16, 39how will you dispose of this man? Quid hulc homini facias ? C., Caecin., ti, 30what ivill you do to this man f Quid d nobls futurum [estj ? C., Fam., ix. 17, 1wAa< is to happen in our case?The use of the Dative is rare, and still more rare the use of dS.The construction is colloquial, and never found in CAESAR and TACITUS ;it isalways in an interrogative sentence, except in CATO and OVID.4. Ablative of Standard. AblatTvus Mensurae.402. The Standard of Measure isput in the Ablative withverbs of Measurement and Judgment.Benevolentiam non ardor e amoris sed stabilitate iudicgmus, C., Off., i.15, 47 ; good will we are to judge not by ardour but by steadfastness.Magnos homings virtute mgtimur, non fortuna, NEP., xvni. i, 1 ;we measuregreat men by worth, not by fortune. Sonls homings ut aera tinnitudlgnoscimus, QUINT., xi. 3,8! we; distinguish men by sound, as coppersby ring.REMARKS. i. It is often hard to distinguish the Measure from theEespect (see 397).2. Ex with the Abl. is frequently found with these verbs ; so regularlywith aestimare, existimare, spectare, in the sense of judge, value.Dicendum erit non esse ex fortuna fidem ponderandam, C., Part. Or., 34,117 ; the plea will have to be made that faith is not to be weighed byfortune. Sic est vulgus : ex vgritate pauca, ex opinione multa aestimat, C.,Rose. Com., 10, 29 ;this is the way of the rabble : they value few thingsby (the standard of) truth, many by (the standard of) opinion.403. Measure of Difference isput in the Ablative.851 multis partibus maior (est) quam terra universa, C., N.D., 11. 36, 92;the sun is many parts larger than the whole earth. (Via) alters tant5longiorem habgbat anfractum, NEP., xvni. 8, 5; the road had a bend (thatmade it) longer by as much again, as long again. QuinquiSns tantS ampliusVerrgs, quam licitum est, clvitatibus imperavit, Cf. C., Verr., in. 97,225 ;Verres levied on the various cities five times more than was allowedby law. Turrgs dgnls pedibus quam murus altiorgs sunt, CURT., v. i, 26 ;thetowers are (by) ten feet higher than the wall. Tanto est acciisare quamdgfendere, quanto facere quam sanare vulnera, facilius, QUINT., v. 13, 3; itis as much easier to accuse than to defend, as it is easier to inflict woundsthan to heal them. Perfer et obdura : multS graviora tulistl, Ov., Tr., v.n, 7; endure to the end and be firm : you have borne much more grievousburdens.NOTES. 1. This rule applies to verbs involving difference (such as abesse, dlstare,malle, praestare, excellere, etc.), as well as to comparatives, with which must bereckoned infra, supra, ultra.
26oABLATIVE.[Aesculapil templum] qulnque mllibus passuum ab urbe [EpidaurSl dlstat,C!f. L., XLV. 28, 3 ; the temple of Aesculapius is five miles from the city ofEpidaurus.2. The Ace. is sometimes employed (see 335) ; especially with neuter adjectives multum,tantum, etc., but this is not common except with verbs.3. The Plautine Abl. nimi5, with the comparative, is not classical (compare [C.],Alt., x. 8 A, 1), but reappears in LIVY. Aliter with this Abl. is very rare and is not classical.So also the Abl. with the positive, of which a few examples are cited from earlyLatin, as TER., Heaul., 205.4. (a) Especially to be noted is the use of the Abl. of Measure with ante, before,and post, offer :Panels ante diebus, Panels diSbus ante, afew days before.Panels post digbus, Paucis diSbus post, afew days after, aftenvard.Duobus annis postquam Roma condita est, two years after Rome was founded.Paulo post Troiam captam, a little while after the taking of Troy.The Ace. can also be employed :post paucSs ann5s, after afew years ; ante paucosannos, a few years before ; and the ordinal as well as the cardinal numbers (but onlywhen quam follows) two hundred : years after(ward) may be :Ducentls annis post or Ducentesimo anno post,Post ducentos anuos or Post ducentesimum annum.(b) Ante and post do not precede the Abl. in classical Latin except with aliquantO(rare) and paulo. Ante and post,with the Ace. followed by quam, instead of antequamand postquam with the Abl., belong preeminently to post-classical Latin ;classical examples are rare. CICERO never has ante.(c) Ante hos sex mSnsSs, six months ago (compare 393, R. 4) more frequentlyabhino sex menses (336, R. 3) ;abhinc sex mensibus, means six months before.(d) With a relative sentence the Abl. of the relative may be used alone, instead ofante (post) quam :Mors Rosen quadriduo quo is occlsus est, Chrysogono nuntiatur, c., Rose.Am., 37, 105 ;the death of Roscius was announced to Chrysogonus four days after hewas killed (in the course of the four days within which he was killed). See 393.(e) Hence is ad : ad sex mensSs, six months hence.(f) Do not confuse the Ace. with ante and post with the Ace. of Duration of Time.5. Ablative of Price.404. Definite Price isput in the Ablative.Eriphyla auro virl vitam v6ndidit, C., Inv.,i. 50, 94; Eriphyle sold herhusband's life for gold. Vlgintl talentis unam orationem Isocrates v5ndidit,PLIN., N.H., vn. 31, 110; Isocrates sold one speech for twenty talents.Emit morte immortalitatem, QUINT., is. 3, 71 ; he purchased deathlessnesswith death.Argentum accept, dote imperium vgndidl, PL., Asin.,87 ;the cash I took, (and) for a dowry sold my sway.NOTES. 1. Mfttare, to exchange, is sometimes Give, sometimes Get; sometimesSell, sometimes Buy. The latter use is confined to poetry and later prose.Nemo nisi victor pace bellum mutavit, S., C., 58. 15 ;no one unless victorious(ever) exchanged war for peace. Misera pax vel bellB bene mutatur, Cf. TAC.,Ann., in. 44, 10 ; a wretched peace is well exchanged evenfor war.But cur valle permutem Sablna dlvitias operosiores 1 H., 0., in. i, 47 ; whyshould I exchange my Saoine valefo?' riches sure to breed (me) greater trouble?2. So vgnalis, vllis, cheap ; earns, dear. N5n, edepol, minis trecentls carast,PL., Pers., 668 ; she in not dear, \fore George, at three hundred minae.3. For Genitive of Price, see 379.
ABLATIVE.26l6. Ablative with Verbs of Plenty and Want.405. Verbs of Depriving and Filling, of Plenty and Want,take the Ablative.[Dgmocritus] dlcitur oculls s6 prlvasse, C., Fin., v. 29, 87; Democritusis said to have deprived himself of his eyes. Deus bonis omnibus explSvitmundum, C'f. C. ,Univ. ,3,9; God has filled the universe with all blessings.Capua fortissimSrum virorum multitudine redundat, C. ,Pis. ,1 1, 25 ;Capua is full to overflowing with a multitude of gallant gentlemen. Noncaret effects, quod voluSre duo, Ov., Am., n. 3, 16; what two have resolvedon never lacks execution. Qu5 maior est in [animis] praestantia, eo maioreindigent diligentia, C., Tusc., iv. 27, 58.NOTES. 1. Verbs of Depriving are commonly referred to the Ablative of Separation,rather than to the Instrumental Ablative, and are put here for convenience of contrast.But it must be remembered that in the classic tongues the construction of opposites isidentical.2.Egeo and (more frequently) alsoindigeotake the Genitive :N5n tarn artis indigent quam. laboris, C., Or., i. 34, 156 ; they are not so muchin need of skill as of industry. So implSrl, V., A., i. 214.3. Adjectives of Plenty and Want take the Gen., but Borne of them follow theanalogy of the verb (374, N. 1). So onustus, or bus, have Abl. more often than Gen.;indigus, egenus, and inops have the Gen. more commonly. PlSnus has usuallythe Gen.; the Abl. in increasing proportion from LUCRETIUS on. FrequSns and validusdo not take the Gen. until the post-Augustan period. See 374.Asellus onustus auro, C., AtL, 1. 16, 12; a donkey laden with gold. Pollicitisdives quilibet esse potest, Ov., A. A., i. 444 ; anybody can be rich in promises.Amor et melle et felle est fScundissimus, PL., Cist., 67 love is ;(very) fruitful bothin honey and in gall (of acrimony).406. Opus and tisus take the Dative of the Person whoWants and the Ablative of the Thing Wanted but the ; ThingWanted may be the subject, and opus (not usus) the predicate.NovS consilio mini nunc opus est, PL., Ps., 601 ;a new device is whatI'm needing now. Vlginti iam usust filio argent! minis, PL., Asin., 89;my son has urgent need of twenty silver minae. Nihil opus est simulationeet fallScils, C., Or., n. 46, 191 ;there is no need of making believe,and of cheating tricks. N5n opus est verbls sed fustibus, C., Pis., 30,73 ;there is need not of words, but of cudgels. Emas n5n quod opus est,sed quod necesse est ; quod non opus est asse carum est, CATO (SEN., E.JL,94, 27); buy not what you want, but what is absolutely needful; whatyou do not want (have no use for) is dear at a penny.So with the Perfect Participle Passive.Quod parato opus est para, TER., And., 523 ;what must be got ready,get ready. Vlcino conventost opus, PL., Gas., 502 the ; neighbour must
262 ABLATIVE.be called on. Citius quod non factost usus fit quam quod factost opus, PL.,Am., 505.NOTES. 1.Opus est means properly (here : is work to be done with ; usus est,there is making use of Oike utor) ;hence the Ablative. Some think that opus takesAbl. by analogy with usus.2.Opus est is common throughout ; usus est is very rarely found after the earlyperiod. It belongs especially to comedy.3. The Gen. with opus occurs twice in Lirr ;also hi PEOPEBTIUS, QUINTILIAN, andAPULETDS.4. The neut Ace. is usually adverbial (333, i) :Quid (Ace.) digitos opus est graphic lassare tenendo 1 Ov., Am., i. u, 23 ;what is the -use of tiring the fingers by JiMding the stylus f5. Besides the Pf. Part, pass., we find the Infin. and sometimes ut ;in this case thePerson is usually in the Dat. with opus (usus), but may be in the Ace. with the Inf.,or may be omitted.Opus est te ammo valgre ut corpore possls, C., Fam., xvi. 14, 2 ;you must bewell in mind in order to be well in body. An quoiquamst usus homini sS utcruciet ? TEB., Heaut., 81 ; of what good is it to any man to torture himself?The Supine is found occasionally ;in CICERO only scltti (Inv., i. 20, 28 ; disputed).6. In PLAUTUS and LUCRETIUS are occasional examples of usus as a predicate, withthe Thing Wanted as the subject.7. Ablative with Sundry Verbs.407. The Deponent Verbs utor, abutor, fruor, fungor, potior,and vescor, take the Ablative.Victoria utl nescis, L., xxn. 51, 4 ; how to make use of victory youknow not. Quo usque tandem abutSre patientia nostra, C., Cat., i. i, 1 ;how long, tell me, will you abuse our patience ? Lux qua fruimur a De5nobis datur, Cf. C., Rose. Am., 45, 131 ;the light which we enjoy is givento us by God. Funguntur officio ;dgfendunt su5s, C., Gael., 9, 21 ; theyacquit themselves of a duty ; they defend their own people. Fungarvice cotis, H., A. P., 304; Ishall acquit myself of, discharge, theoffice ofa whetstone. Tutius esse arbitrabantur sine ullo vulnere victoria potlri,CAES., B.G., HI. 24, 2; they thought it safer to make themselves mastersof the victory without any wound. Numidae lacte vescebantur, S., lug.,89, 7 ;the Numidians made their food of milk (fed on milk).NOTES. 1. These Ablatives are commonly regarded as Ablatives of the Instrument :but fruor, I getfruit, and vescor, I feed myself from, and perhaps fungor, may takethe Abl. as a Whence-case.2. These verbs seem to have been originally construed with the Ace. ;but this caseis not found in classical Latin except in the Gerundive construction (427, N. 5).(a) Utor with Ace. is very common in PLAUTUS, less so in TERENCE, but only withneuter pronouns. CATO uses also the neuter of substantives. Abutor is combined onlywith Ace. in early Latin.(6) Fruor with Ace. is not in PLAUTUS, but occasionally in TERENCE and CATO.Frunlscor (rare) is transitive in PLAUTUS and QUADRIGARIUS (ap. GELL.).(c) Fungor with Ace. is the rule in early Latin (TER., Ad., 603, is disputed), thenin NEPOS, TACITUS, SUETONIUS, and later.(d) Potior has Gen. at all periods (rare in CICERO ;once in CAESAR) ;the Ace.
ABLATIVE. 263occasionally in early and late Latin, in the b. Afr., the b. Ilisp., and in SALLUST. Noteworthyis the use of an act. potire with Gen. in PL., Am., 178, and a pass, potltus withGen. in several places in PLAUTUS.(e) Vescor takes the Ace. rarely in early Latin, in the poets, and in later Latin.VIvere, helluarl,take Abl. like vescl.3. Utor is a favorite word, and has a most varied translation :Uti aliquo amlco, to avail one's self of (to enjoy) a man's friendship (to have afriend in him) ; utl consilio, to follow advice ; utl bond patre, to have the advantageof having a goodfather ; utl ISgibus,to obey the laws. See the Lexicons.D. ABLATIVE OF CAUSE.408. The Ablative of Cause is used without a preposition,chiefly with Verbs of Emotion. Abldtlvus Causae.In culpa sunt qul officia deserunt mollitia animl, C., Fin., 1. 10, 33 ;they are to Uame who shirk their duties from effeminacy of temper.6d6runt peccare bonl virtutis amore, tt.,JJJp., 1. 16, 52 the ; good hate tosin from love of virtue. Delicto dolere, corrections gaudere (oportet), C.,Lael., 24, 90 one ; ought to be sorry for sin, to be glad of chastisement.Non did potest quam flagrem deslderio urbis, C., Att., v. n, 1 ;J burn(am afire) beyond expression with longing for Rome.NOTES. 1. A number of combinations become phraseological, as the verbals :arbitratu,hortatu, impulsu, iussu, missu, rogatu, etc.; also consiliS, auctoritate,with a Gen. or possessive pronoun iussu :Clvium, at the bidding of the citizens ; meorogatu, at my request.2. The moving cause is often expressed by a participle with the Abl., which usuallyprecedes : adductus, led ; ardSns, fired ; commotus, stirred up ; incitatus, eggedon ; incSnsus, inflamed ; impulsus, driven on ; motus, moved, and many others ;amSre, by love ; Ira, by anger ; odio", by hate ; metu, by fear ; spS, by hope, etc.Metu perterritus, sore frightened ; verScundia dSterritus, abashed, etc.3. Instead of the simple Abl. the prepositions d6 and ex (sometimes in), with theAbl., ob and propter with the Ace., are often used ; perhaps occasionally ab.4. The preventing cause is expressed by prae, for (417, 9): Prae gaudio ubi simnescio, TEB., ffeaut., 308 ;IMow not where I am forjoy.5. On causa and gratis with the Gen., see 373.6. The use of the Abl. for the external cause, as regale genus non tarn rggnlquam rggis vitiis repudiation est (C., Leg., in. 7, 15), the kingly form of governmentwas rejected not so much by reason of the faults of the kingly form, as by reasonof the faults of the king, is not common in the early and in the classical period, exceptin certain formulee ;but it becomes very common later.7. The Ablative of Cause may have its origin in the Instrumental Ablative, in theAblative of Source, or in the Comitatlve Ablative.E. ABLATIVE ABSOLUTE.409. The so-called Ablative Absolute is an Ablative combinedwith a participle, and serves to modifythe verbalpredicate of a sentence. Instead of the participle, a predicativesubstantive or adjective can be employed.
264 ABLATIVE.NOTE. This Ablative, which may be called the Ablative of Circumstance, springsfrom the Temporal Use of the Ablative the Temporal from the Local. Another viewregards it as an Ablative of Manner, with a predicate instead of an attribute.410. The Ablative Absolute may be translated by the Englishso-called Nominative (originally Dative) Absolute, whichis a close equivalent but for ; purposes of style, it is oftenwell to analyse the thought, to change Passive into Active,to make use of an abstract substantive.Xerxe rgnante (= cum Xerxes rSgnaret), Xerxes reigning. WhenXerxes was reigning. In the reign of Xerxes.Xerxe vict5 ( cum Xerxes victus esset), Xerxes being, having been,defeated. When Xerxes had been defeated. After the defeat of Xerxes.Xerxe rSge (= cum Xerxes rSx esset), Xerxes [being} king. WhenXerxes was king.Patre viv5, WHILE father is, was alive (in father's lifetime).Urbe expugnata imperator rediit :PASSIVE FORM :The city [being] taken (after the city was taken), thegeneral returned.ACTIVE FORM ; Having taken the city (after he had taken the city),the general returned.ABSTRACT FORM :After the taking of the city. After talcing thecity.Maxima's virtutes iacgre omnes necesse est voluptate dorninante, C.,Fin., ii. 35, 117 ;all the great(est) virtues must necessarily lie prostrate,IP (or WHEN) the pleasure (of the senses) is mistress. Eomanl vetergsrSgnari omnes volebant liber tatis dulcedine nondum experts, L., i. 17, 3 ;the old Romans all wished to have a king over them (BECAUSE they had)not yet tried the sweetness of liberty.REMARKS. i. As the Latin language has no Pf. Part, active, exceptwhen the Deponent is thus used, the passive construction is farmore common than in English :luvenes veste posita corpora ole5 perunxgrunt, C., Tusc., I. 47, 113 ;theyouths, (having) laid aside their clothing, anointed their bodies with oil;or, laid aside their clothing, and anointed their bodies with oil.2. The Abl. Abs., though often to be rendered by a coordinate sentence,for convenience' sake, always presents a subordinate conception :(Lysander suadet Lacedaemonils ut regia potestate dissoluta ex omnibus)dux dgligatur ad bellum gerendum, NEP., vi. 3, 5 ; Lysander advises theLacedaemonians that the royal power be done away with, AND a leaderbe chosen from all, to conduct the war. Here the one is necessary to theother.3. As a rule, the Abl. Abs. can stand only when it is not identical
LOCATIVE. 265with the subject, object, or dependent case of the verbal predicate.Manlius slew the Gaul and stripped him of his necklace is to be rendered: Manlius caesum Gallum torque spoliavit.This rule is frequently violated at all periods of the language, forthe purpose either of emphasis or of stylistic effect. The shifted constructionis clearer, more vigorous, more conversational.nor will I sufferNeque ilium m8 vivo corrumpl sinam, PL., 5., 41 9 ;him to be debauched while I am alive.The violation is most frequent when the dependent case is in theGenitive :lugurtha fratre me5 interfecto rggnum 6ius sceleris su! praedam fScit,S., lug., 14, 11 ; Jugurtha killed my brother, and (= after killing mybrother) made his throne the booty of his crime.NOTES. 1. The Pf. Part, of Deponents and Semi-deponents as an active in theAhl. Abs. is not found in early Latin, and is not common in classical Latin, whereit is always without an object and is confined to verbs of Growth (principally ortus,COOrtus, natus), Death, and Motion. It becomes common later, being used with anobject from SALLUST on.2. The Pf. Part, of Deponent^ as a passive in the Abl. Abs. is confined in classicalLatin to Smeritus, pactus, partltus. SALLUST and Lnnr, as well as later writers,extend the usage. TACITUS, however, shows but two cases :adeptus (Ann., i. 7, 8) andausus (Ann., in. 67, 4).3. The Fut. Part. act. in the Abl. Abs. is post-Ciceronian, beginning with POLLIOand LIVT.4. The impersonal use of the Abl. Abs. is found not unfrequently in early Latinand CICERO, rarely in CAESAH and SALLUST. Most of the forms so used have becomeadverbial in character, as optato, sortlto, intestato. cousulto, auspicate, dirgcto,merits, etc. The use of a following clause dependent upon the Abl. is begun inCICERO : adiunctS ut (Off., n. 12, 42). SALLUST uses audit 6 and compertS with theInfinitive. But LIVT extends this construction very greatly, and introduces the use ofneuter adjectives in the same way incertO prae tenebrls quid aut : peterent autVltarent, L., xxvm. 36, 12. It is frequent in TACITUS.5. The use of adjectives and substantives in the Abl. is not common in early Latin,but is a favorite usage of the classical period and later : m5 auctore, C., Or., in.14, 54.6. A predicate substantive, with the participle, is rare, but occurs in good prose :PraetSre designate mortu5 filio, c., Tmc,, in. 28, 70.LOCATIVE.411. In the Singular of the First and Second Declensions,names of Towns and Small Islands are put in the Locativeof the Place Where.PompSius hiemare Dyrrhachii, Apollouiae omnibusque oppidis constituerat,CAES., B. C., m. 5, i ; Pompey had determined to winter at Dyrrhachium,Apollonia, and all the towns. TImotheus Lesbl (vixit), NEP.,xn. 3, 4 ;Timotheus lived at Lesbos. Rhodi ego non ful, sed ful inBlthynia, C., Plane., 34, 83 ;Iwas not at Rhodes, but J was in Bithynia.
266 PREPOSITIONS.REMARKS. i. A few substantives of the Third Declension also formsporadic Locatives ;so CarthaginI, in PLAUTUS, CICERO, and later ;Tlburi in CICERO, Livr, and later, and a few others. See 386.2. Other Locative forms are, doml, at home (61, R. 2), humi, on theground (first in CICERO), belli, and mllitiae, in the combinations domlmllitiaeque, belli domlque, in peace and in war, at home and in the field ;rurl, in the country (but rure me5, on my farm).Parvl sunt forls arma nisi est cSnsilium doml, C., Off., i.22,76; oflittle value are arms abroad unless there is wisdom at home. lacSrehumi, C., Cat., i. 10, 26 ; to lie on the ground. Humi prosternere, L.,XLV. 20, 9; to throw flat on the ground.Belli is found alone occasionally in TERENCE and CICERO ; ENNIUS,VERGIL, and OVID have terrae ;VERGIL also campi.3. Appositions are put in the Ablative, commonly with in, and regularlyfollow when qualified by an attribute :MilitSs Albae constitSrunt in urbe opportuna, C., Ph., iv. 2, 6; the soldiershalted at Alba, a conveniently situated town. Archias Antiochlaenatus est celebrl quondam urbe, C., Arch., 3, 4 ;Archias was born atAntioch, once a populous city.When urbe, city, oppido, town, or insula, island, precedes, the prepositionisalways employed :In urbe Roma, in the city (of) Rome. In oppido Citio, in the town ofCitium. In Insula Samo, in the island (of) Samos.4. Doml takes the possessive pronoun in the Genitive :Doml suae senex est mortuus, C., N.D., in. 32, 81; the old man diedat his own house. Metuis ut meae doml curetur dlligenter, TER., Hec.,257; you fear that she will not be carefully nursed at my house. Alsoalienae domul (61, R. 2), C., Tusc.,i. 22, 51; in a strange house ; domlillius, C., Div. in Caec., 18, 58 ;in his house.But in domo Pericll (65), NEP., vii. 2, 1 ;in the household) of Pericles.In domo casts, in a pure house.In domo, in the house (not, at home).NOTES. 1. Early Latin shows a number of Locative forms that have disappearedfor the most part in the classical period. So temperl (tempori) replaced by temporein CICERO (LivT and TACITUS only in tempore) ; niani, replaced by mane ; vesper!and herl ;and rare forms like diS, crastini, proximi. See 37, 5.2. On Locative forms of the pronouns, see 91, 3. On animl, see 374, s. 7.PREPOSITIONS.412. The Prepositions are originally local adverbs, whichserve to define more narrowly the localcases.ideas involved in theThe analogy of the local adverbs is followed by otheradverbs, which are not so much prepositions as prepositionaladverbs. Of the Prepositions proper, that is, Prepositions
PREPOSITIONS. 267used in composition(see Note), as well as in the regimen ofcases, cum (con) does not clearly indicate a local relation.The only cases that involve local ideas are the Accusativeand Ablative. The Accusative, as the case of the DirectObject, represents the relation whither ? the Ablative representsthe relations whence 9 and where fREMARKS. i. In verbs of Motion, the Result of the Motion is oftenconsidered as Rest in a place (where). See 385, N. 2.z. In verbs of Rest, the Rest is sometimes conceived as the Resultof Motion (whither). See 385, N. 3.NOTE. Prepositions derive their name from the fact that they are prefixed in composition.Many of the Latin Prepositions are not used in composition, and these maybe called improper Prepositions. The prefixes amb- (am- an-), dis (dl), por- (porr-,pol-), red- (re-), S6d- (S6-) and vS- are sometimes called inseparable prepositions.413. Position of the Preposition. The Preposition generallyprecedes the case.REMARKS. i. Cum always follows a personal pronoun, and may ormay not follow a relative pronoun mScum, with me : ; quocum or cumqu5, with whom. DS is not uncommonly placed after qu5 and qua, rarelyafter quibus. Position after the relative is found here and there alsoin the case of other Prepositions, but principally in early Latin or thepoets, as follows : ab, ad (also in CICERO), ex, in, per, post (after hunc,C., Tusc., II. 6, 15), and pr5.Dissyllabic Prepositions are postponed more often, but CICERO restrictsthis to pronouns, with the following Prepositions : ante, circa,contra, inter, penes, propter, sine, ultra. CAESAR postpones intra also.Tenus, as far as, and versus, -ward, always follow.2. When the substantive has an attribute the Preposition may comebetween ;hanc igitur ob causam (C., Br. , 24 ,94), for this reason, therefore.an attributive3. The Preposition may be separated from its case byadjective or its equivalent, or other modifier of the case :post vero Sullaevictoriam, but after Sulla's victory ; ad beats vlvendum, for living happily.But model prose usually avoids separating the Preposition bymore than a word or two. The poets have no scruples.NOTES. 1. A peculiarity of poetry, LIVT, and later prose is the post-position of bothPreposition and attribute : metQ in magno, L., ix. 37, 11 ; in greatfear.2. Especially to be noted is the position of per, through (by), in adjurations: Lydiadie per omn6s tS decs oro, H., 0., i. 8, 1 ; Lydia, tell, by all the gods, I pray thee.Per ego tS deos oro, TER., And., 834 ; I pray thee, by the gods.3. Between the Preposition and its case are often inserted the enclitics que, ne, ve ;and after ante, post, and praeter the conjunctions autem, enim, quidem, tamen,vSr5, occur, but not frequently. The first word in the combinations et et, aut aut,
268 PREPOSITIONS.simul simul, vel vel, sometimes follows the Preposition ; cum et diurno et nocturnometii, C., Tusc., \. 23, 66.414. Repetition and Omission of the Preposition. "Withdifferent words which stand in the same connection, the Prepositionis repeated, when the Preposition is emphatic, or theindividual words are to be distinguished ;so regularly afteraut ant, et et, nee nee, vel vel, non modo sed etiam,sed, nisi, quam, and in comparative clauses with ut. Otherwiseit is omitted so ; always with que.Et ex urbe et ex agris, C., Cat., n. 10, 21 ;both from (the) city andfrom (the) country. DS honore aut dS dignitate contendimus, C., Tusc.,in. 21, 50 ;we are striving about office, or about position.REMARKS. i. When a relative follows in the same construction as itsantecedent, the Preposition is usually omitted.(Cim5n) incidit in eandem invidiam (in) quam pater suus, NEP., v. 3, 1;Cimon fell into the same disrepute into which his father had fallen.2. So in questions: Ante tempus morl miserum. Quod tandem tempus 1C., Tusc., I. 39, 93 ;a hard case 'tis, to die before the time. (Before}what time, pray ?3. After quasi, tamquam, sicut, the Preposition is more often inserted.Bus ex urbe tamquam 6 vinclis evolaverunt, Cf. C., Or., n. 6, 22 ; theysped from the city to the country as if from a jail.4. Two Prepositions are rarely used with the same word. Either theword is repeated, a form of is used, or one Prep, turned into an adverb :Pr5 Sclpi5ne et adversus Sclpionem, for and against Scipio. Ante pugnamet post earn, before and after the battle. Et in corpore et extra [sunt]quaedam bona, C., Fin., H. 21, 68. But intrg extraque munltiOnes, CAES.,B.C., in. 72,2.415. As adverbs without a case are used :Ad, about, with numerals in CAESAR, LIVY, and later ; adversus, tomeet, especially in PLAUTUS and TERENCE ;ante and post of Time (403,N. 4) ; contra, opposite, on the other hand ; circa, round about, andcircum (rare) ; prae, forward, in PLAUTUS and TERENCE ; prope, near,and propter (rare) ; ifixtS, near by (rare) ; intra, inside (post-classical) ;extra, outside; Infra, below; supra, above; subter, beneath, and super,above, both rare ; citra, on this side ; ultra, beyond ; coram, in the presenceof; clam, secretly.I. Prepositions Construed with the Accusative.416. The Prepositions construed with the Accusative are :Ad, adversus, ante, apud, circa, circum, circiter, cis, citra,
PKEPOSITION'S. 269clam, contra, erga, extra, Infra, inter, intra, iuxta, ob, penes,per, post (pone), praeter, prope, propter, secundum, supra,trans, ultra, usque, versus.1. Ad. Of Motion Whither, to, up to. Of Direction, towards (ad ori-.entem). Of Respect, for, with regard to (ad has re's perspicax) ;foundfirst in TERENCE. Of Manner, after, according to (ad hunc modum) ;colloquial (in CICERO'S speeches only quern ad modum). Of Place, at(= apud), colloquial (ad montem, C., Fam., xv. 2, 2) and legal (ad forum,ad tS), rare in CICERO'S speeches. Of Time, at, refers only to future,and gives either a point (ad vesperum, at evening), an interval (adpaucSs dies, a few days hence), or an approaching time, towards.With Numerals, about. Of Purpose, for (castra hostl ad praedam relinquunt,L., in. 63, 4). Also in phrases. Post-Ciceronian Latin extendedthe sphere of ad, and colloquially it was often a substitute forthe Dative.2. Adversus (-urn), [i.e., turned to]. Towards, over against, against.Rare in early Latin and in CAESAR and SALLUST. In the sense, overagainst, it is found first in LIVY. In the transferred sense, towards, itexpresses usually hostile disposition, but begins to indicate friendlydisposition in CICERO. Exadversus (-um) is found occasionally, beginningwith CICERO, and is always local.3. Ante [i.e., over against, facing]. Of Place Where, before. OfPlace Whither, before ; rarely (not in CICERO). Of Time, before ; themost frequent use. Of Degree, before ; not in CICERO or CAESAR.4. Apud is used chiefly of Persons. At the house of (characteristiclocality). In the presence of (iiidicem). In the writings of (PlatSnem).In the view of. Of Place, at, in (= in) ;common in comedy (apudvfllam) ;rare elsewhere, especially with proper names, where ad waspreferred, except by SALLUST. In phrases like apud s8 esse, to be inone's senses.5. Circa (circum). Around. Circum is exclusively local (exceptonce in VITRUVIUS, where it is temporal). Circa in the local sense isfound first in CICERO. In the meaning about, of Time or Number,it is found first in HORACE. So, too, in the transferred sense of thesphere of mental action : circa virentls est animus campos, H., 0., 11.5,5.6. Circiter. Of Place, about ; once in PLAUTUS. Usually of Time,about, especially with numerals but;the prepositional usageis on thewhole small.7. Cis, citra. This side, short of. Of Place ;cis found first inVARRO, citra in CICERO. Cis is occasionally temporal in PLAUTUS, SAL-LUST, OVID. Citra, of Time, within, this side of; found first in OVID.Without (stopping short of) ;found first in LIVY, then in OVID, and
2JOPREPOSITIONS.the post-Augustan prose writers. In C., Or., i8,50, citra may be ren-AenA further tool* ; i.e., nearer the beginning.8. Clam. Secretly. With Aec. in early Latin, in the b. Hisp., andin the Jurists. With Abl. in CAESAR (B.C., 11.32, 8), and in the b.Afr., n,4 (both passages disputed). Clanculum with Ace., only inTERENCE.9. Contra. Opposite to, over against, opposed to, against. It appearsas a Preposition first in the classical period, and is used both in localand transferred senses. In the latter case the force ispredominantlyhostile.10. Erga. Opposite, towards. Of Place ; very rarely, in early andlate Latin. Usually in the transferred sense of friendly relations.The hostile sense is occasional in comedy, NEPOS, and later writers.Erga is used always of Persons or personified Things until the time ofTACITUS.n. Extra. Without, outside of, beside. It is used of local and transferredrelations ; rarely in the sense of sine (TAC., H., i. 49) ; occasionallyin sense of praeter, except.12. Infra. Beneath, lower down. Of Space ;more frequently inclassical Latin, of Rank or Grade ; Temporal but once (C., Br., 10, 40).It occurs but rarely in later Latin, and is cited only onc.e from earlyLatin (TEE., Eun., 489).13. Inter. Between. Of Place Where, rarely of Place Whither.Colloquial were phrases like inter viam (vias), on the road, inter nos,between ourselves. Inter paucos, preeminently, is post-classical. OfTime, during ; at all periods, but in CICERO principally in the Letters.14. Intra. Within. Of Local and Temporal (not in CICERO) relations.The usage in transferred relations is post-classical, and mainlypoetical.15. luzta [i.e., adjoining]. Hard by, near, next to. It appears asa Preposition first in VARRO, then in CAESAR, but not in CICERO. It isused locally until LIVY, who employsit also in transferred senses ofTime, Order, etc.16. Ob [i.e., over against, opposite to]. Right before. Of Placeoccasionally at all periods (not in CAESAR, LIVY, CURTIUS, TACITUS).Of Cause, for ; found in early Latin (not with personal pronouns inPLAUTUS), in classical and post-classical Latin in increasing proportion.CAESAR uses it only in formulae with rem (res) and causam.CICERO and CAESAR do not use ob id or ob ea, which, found in earlyLatin, reappear in SALLUST. Ob has almost completely supplantedpropter in TACITUS. With the substantive and participle (ob defensumCapitolium) ob is found first in LIVY.17. Penes. With = in the hands of ; of Persons. Applied to
PKEPOSITIONS. 271Things, it is found in poetry first in HORACE in ; prose first in TACITUS.It is found wholly with esse until later Latin.1 8. Per. Of Space, through ; of Time, during ; of Cause, owing to ;of Instrument, by (both persons and things) ;of Manner, by, in. Itis used phraseologicallyin oaths, by; also with persons (sometimesPer = abthings), as per me licet, as far as I am concerned you may.of Agent is found only in late Latin.19. P5ne. Behind, only in Local relations ; it is most frequent inPLAUTUS, occurs but once in CICERO, never in CAESAR or HORACE, andis rare in general.20. Post. Of Place, behind; rare, but in good usage. Of Time,after. Of Rank, subordinate to ; in SALLUST, poets, and late prose.21. Praeter. Of Place, in front of, on before, past. In a transferredsense, except ; contrary to (oplni5nem and the like). Of Rank, beyond(praeter omngs is cited only from PLAUTUS and HORACE ; usually praetercSteros).22. Prope. Of Place, near ; found first in the classical period. Itsometimes has the constructions of adjectives of Nearness. Of Time,near; very rare and post-classical, as LIVY, SUETONIUS. Propius isfound first in CAESAR as a preposition.23. Propter. Of Place, near. Of Cause, on account of; very commonin early and classical Latin, but avoided by many authors, notablyTACITUS. With substantive and participle it appears first in VARRO ;then is common in LIVY, and later.24. Secundum [i.e., following}. Of Place, along (lltus), close behind;very rare (C., Fam., iv. 12, 1). Of Time, immediately after ; in earlyLatin and CICERO, common in LIVY, but never in CAESAR, SALLUST,TACITUS. Of Series, next to ; in PJLAUTUS and CICERO. Of Reference,according to ; at all periods. Secus is ante-classical and rare.25. Supra. Of Place, above, beyond ; so CICERO almost exclusively.Of Time, beyond; very rare. Of Grade, above. Of Authority, incharge of; VITRUVIUS and later.26. Trans. On the other side, beyond, across ; only in Local relations.27. Ultra. Of Space and Measure, on that side, beyond. Of Time ;only in late Latin. The early form uls is very rare and in formulae, as,Cis Tiberim et uls Tiberim. In late Latin ultra supplants praeter almostwholly.28. Usque, up to, is found once in TERENCE, several times in CICERO,and occasionally later, with the Ace. of the name of a town. Withother names of localities it appears first in LIVY.29. Versus, -ward. As a preposition it first appears in the classicalperiod and is found usually with names of Towns, and small Islands ;with other words it is regularly combined with the prepositions ad (notin CICERO) or in.\
2/2 PEEPOSITIONS.II.Prepositions Construed with the Ablative.417. Prepositions construed with the Ablative are a (ab,abs), absque, coram, cum, de, e (ex), prae, pro, sine, tenus;rarely fine, palam, procul, simul.i. A (ab, abs). Of Place Whence, from, especially of the point ofdeparture so in phrases, a tergo, a capite, etc. Of Cause, from ; (Ira) ;beginning with LIVY. Of Agent, by. Of Remote Origin, from. OfTime, from. Of Reference, according to, after. Of Specification, in(doleo ab oculls) ;often with compound verbs.frequent before 1, n, and r, s, i (j) abs is found only before t6 and in the combination;absque. CICERO uses abs t in his early writings, but prefers a tS in his later ones.2. Absque [i.e., off}. Without. Peculiar to early Latin, where itis used in conditional sentences only. Occasionally in later Latin, as,absque sententia (QuiNT., vn. 2, 44), for praeter sententiam.3. Coram. Face to face with, in the presence of; it is used with Personsonly, and is found first in CICERO, and then in later writers, but ingeneral it is rare until the time of TACITUS, who uses itvery often inthe Annals and always postpones.4. Cum.. With; of Accompaniment in the widest sense. WithAbl. of Manner regularly when there is no attributive ;often whenthere is one. Sometimes it is used of mutual action : orare cum, pleadwith (PLAUTUS), etc.5. D6. Of Place, down from, and then from; especially with compoundsof dS and ex. Of Source, from; with verbs of Receiving (actualand mental). Of Origin; but mainly in poetry and later prose. OfObject, concerning. Of Time; in phrases dS nocte, d6 die" (diem dS die,day after day). Of the Whole from which a part is taken. Of Reference,according to (dS sententia). Of Material ; poetical and late.6. (ex). Of Place, out of, from. Often in phraseological usages,as ex parte, partly ; ex asse, and the like. With verbs of Receiving,from. Of Time, from ; ex tempore is phraseological. Of Origin, from.Of Reference, accordingto. Of Manner ;in many phrases, as exaequo, ex ordine. E is used before consonants only, ex before bothvowels and consonants.7. Fine (or flnl). Up to ; found in PLAUTUS and CATO, then not untilvery late Latin. With the Gen. it occurs in b. Afr. and in SALLUST,Fr.; then not until OVID and very late Latin.8. Palam, in the sense of coram, in the presence of, is found first inHORACE and LIVY, and is rare.
PREPOSITIONS. 2739. Prae. Of Place, in front of; with verbs of Motion only, in classicalLatin. In early Latin in the phrase prae manu, at hand. Of thePreventive Cause, for ; with negatives only, in and after the classicalperiod in ; early Latin, also in positive sentences. Of Comparison, incomparison with ; occasionally at all periods.10. Pro. Of Place, before; not in early Latin, but found first inthe classical period, where it is confined to certain combinations, aspro rostris, castrls, aede, vallo, etc., and means before and on. In behalfof; not cited for early Latin. Instead of; very common at all periods.In proportion to ; at all periods. Quam pr5 found first in LIVY.; 11. Procul, far from, is poetical, and begins in prose with LIVY. Inclassical Latin prose always with ab.12. Simul, in the sense of cum, belongs to poetry and TACITUS (Ann.,in. 64).13. Sine, without, is opposed to cum.14. Tenus, to the extent of. Of Space (actual and transferred), asfar as. It is found occasionally with the Gen., but almost whollywith PI., and perhaps but once in CICERO (Arat., 83) ;otherwise it belongsto poetry, making its first appearance in prose in CICERO (Dei.,13, 36) and LIVY. It occurs with the Ace. in late Latin. Tenus is alwayspostponed.III. Prepositions Construed with the Accusativeand Ablative.418. Prepositions construed with the Accusative and Ablativeare in, sub, subter, super.1. In (the forms endo, indu, are early and rare), (a) With Accusative :Of Place, into, into the midst of. Of Disposition and Direction,towards. Of Time, into (multam noctem), for (diem, mult&s annos, posterum).Of Purpose or Destination, for ; mostly post-classical. Of Manner,in, after. Phraseologically with neuter adjectives : in dsterius, forthe worse ; but mainly post-classical. With Distributives, to, among.(b) With Ablative : Of Place, in, on. Of Time, within. Of Reference,in the case of, in regard to, in the matter of. Of Condition, in(armls). In many phrases, especially with neuter adjectives, in incerto,dubio, integro, ambiguo, etc.2. Sub. (a) With Accusative : Of Place Whither, under. Of TimeApproaching, about (noctem, vesperum) ; just Past, immediately after.Of Condition, under (sub potestatem redigi).(b) With Ablative : Of Place Where, under; also in phrases, subarmls, etc. Of Time When, about ; rare, and first in CAESAR. Of Position,under (rege, iudice, etc.). Of Condition, under (ea condicione) ;firstin LIVY.18
2/4 INFINITIVE.3. Subter, (a) With Accusative ; rare, and locally equal to sub.(6) With the Ablative ;more rare and almost wholly poetical (CATUL-LUS and VERGIL). Cf. C., Tusc.,\. i, 4, which may be Ace. Subtusoccurs only in VITR., iv. 2, 5, and then with the Accusative.4. Super, (a) With Accusative but once before the classical time :Of Place, over, above. Of Time, during ; found first in PLINY, Epp.Metaphorically of Degree, beyond (super modum) ; post-classical.(b) With the Ablative : Of Space, above. Of Time, during (notuntil the Augustan poets). Metaphorically = praeter ; very rare := de, concerning ; colloquial ;hence in PLAUTUS, CATO, CICERO'S Letters(ad Alt.), SALLUST, HORACE, LIVY; but uncommon.INFINITIVE.The Infinitive as a Substantive.419. The Infinitive is the substantive form of the verb.. NOTE. The Infinitive differs from a verbal substantive in that it retains the adverbialattribute, the designations of voice and time, and the regimen of the verb :Amare, to love ; valdS amare, to love hugely ; amarl, to be loved ; amavisse, tohave loved ; amare aliquem, to love a man ; nocere alicui, to hurt a man.But the great claim of the Infinitive to be considered a verb lies in the involution ofpredicate and subject. Like the finite verb, the Infinitive involves predicate and subject;but the subj. is indefinite and the predication is dependent.420. The Infinitive, when it stands alone, involves an indefiniteAccusative Subject, and the Predicate ofthat Subjectis, of course, in the Accusative Case.Begem esse, to be king. Bonum esse, to be good. Compare quid stultiusquam aliquem eo sibl placere quod ipse non fecit, SEN., E.M., 74, 17 ;whatis more foolish than for a man to (that a man should) pride himself onwhat he has not done himself.So in thet paradigm of the verb :Amaturum esse, to be about to love.NOTE. On the Nom. with the Inf. by Attraction, see 528.In consequence of this double nature, the Infinitive may be used asa substantive or as a verb.421. The Infinitive, as a substantive, is used regularly intwo cases only Nominative and Accusative. In the othercases its place is supplied bySupine.the Gerund and the AblativeNOTES. 1. Traces of the original Dat. (or Loc.) nature of the Infinitive are stillapparent iii many constructions, which are, however, mostly poetical:
INFINITIVE. 275(a) With verbs of Motion in early Latin and the later poets, when ut, ad withGerundive or Sup. is to be expected.Abilt aedem vlsere Minervae, PL., 5., goo ; she went away to visit the templeof Minerva. Semper in Oceanum mittit mS quaerere gemmas, PROP., n. (in.) 16(8), 17 ;she is always sending me to the Ocean to look for (in quest of) pearls.(b) With verbs of Giving, Kendering, and the like, in early Latin and the poets, wherethe Ace. of the Gerundive is to be expected.Classical is the use of bibere only, in thisway. (The old form biber points to the effacement of the final sense of this Inf.)lovi bibere ministrare, Cf. C., Tusc., i. 26. Quern virum aut he"roa lyra velacrl tibia sumes celebrare, Clio? H., 0., i. ia,l. Different, of course, are caseslike dl tibi posse tuos tribuant detendere semper, Ov., 2V., m. s,21, where possedefenders is felt as potestatem dSfendendl.(c) With many adjectives where the Slip, in u,or some construction of Purpose, is tobe expected.In early Latin the adjectives are paratus, consugtus, dSfessuS. But this usage iswidely extended by the Augustan poets VERGIL and HORACE, and later.It is confined principally, however, to adjectives of capability, ability, necessity, etc.,and adjectives like facilis (with act. as well as pass. Inf., first in PROP.), difficilis, andthe like : Eoma capl facilis, LUCAN, n. 656. Note the strange usage dissentiremanifSstus, TAC., Ann., n. 57, 4, and occasionally elsewhere.2. The Inf. may take an adj. attribute, but hi classical prose this is limited to ipsum,hoc ipsnm, and totum hoc :VIvere ipsum turpe est nobls, living itself is a disgrace to its.QuibusdamtStum hoc displicet philosopharl (280, i, a).The Infinitive as a Subject.422. The Infinitive, as a Subject, is treated as a neutersubstantive.Incipere multo est quam inpetrare facilius, PL., Poen., 974 ; beginningis much easier (work) than winning. Miserum est deturbari fortGnlsomnibus, C. , Quinct. , 3 1, 95 ;it is wretched to find one's self turned rudelyout of all one's fortunes. Non tarn turpe fuit vincI quam contendisse decorumest, Ov., M., ix. 6 (280, 2, a).NOTES. 1. The use of the Inf. as a subj. grew out of its use as an obj., but theoriginal Dat. (Loc.) sense was lost to the consciousness just as the prepositional senseof our own to is lost when our Inf. becomes a subj.; as in, to err is human, to forgivedivine. No Eoman felt turpe fuit vinci, as, there was disgrace in being beaten ;bonum est legere was to him another bona est I5cti5 (see PRISCIAN, 408, 27).2. The substantives used as predicates are not common in early Latin. Lubldo estis confined to PLADTUS.Stultitia est, consilium est, and tempus est are universal.CICERO introduces the not uncommon m5s est, and many others with est,as :cSnsuStuclo(-inis), vitium, ius, fas, nefas, facinus, fatum, caput, res (CAESAR),opus, munus, officium, onus, sapientia, and a few others. Still more are foundlater. Many of these also take ut ;so officium always in comedy (except TER., And.,331).3. Neuter adjectives are used as predicates in great variety. Ciceronian are certius(quam), consentaneum, falsum, incrSdibile, integrum, gloriosum, maius(quam), mirum, novom, optimum, rectum, singulare, tritum, vgrlsimile,v6rum. Most of them, however, but once. Some of these also take ut,but not oftenin good prose.
276 INFINITIVE.4. In early Latin many impersonal verbs are used as predicates. Classical Latinretains most of them, but drops condecet, dispudet, subolet, and adds some, suchas paenitet, dedecet, displicet, prodest, obest, attinet. Others come in later.Some, such as oportet,also take tit or the simple Snbjv. Noteworthy is est, it is possible,found first in VABRO and LUCB., then not till VERG. and Hon., and never common.5. Certain abstract phrases, whose meanings are akin to the words already mentioned,take the Inf. as a subject. So especially predicate Genitives, as COnsuStudinisand m5ris ;or combinations like quid negotil, nihil negotil est ; predicate Dativessuch as cord! est, curae est,both unclassical ;or phrases, as operae pretitun, inanimo esse, in mentem venire, of which the last two were introduced by CICERO.The Infinitive as an Object.423. i. The Infinitive is used as the Object of Verbs ofCreation, commonly known as Auxiliary Verbs.These Verbs help the Infinitive into existence.2. Such verbs denote Will, Power, Duty, Habit, Inclination, Resolve,Continuance, End, and the like,with their opposites.Emorl cupio, TER., Heaut., 971 ;I want to die. [Cato] esse quam vidSrlbonus malsbat, S., C., 54, 5 ;Cato preferred being (good) to seeminggood. Sed precor ut possim tiitius esse miser, Ov., Tr., v. 2, 78 ;but 1pray that I may be more safely wretched. Vincere scis, Hannibal ;victSriautl nescls, L., xxii. 51 ;how to win victory, you know, Hannibal;hoiv to make use of victory, you know not. QuI mori didicit, servlre d6-didicit, SEN., E.M., 26, 10 ;he who has learned to die has unlearned tobe a slave. Maledictis dSterrgre ng scribat parat, TER., Ph., 3 ;he ispreparing (trying) to frighten (him) from writing, by abuse. QuI mentlrlsolet, peierare c5nsu6vit, C., Rose. Com., 16, 46 ;he who is wont to lieis accustomed to swear falsely.Vulnera quae ffccit dSbuit ipse patl, Ov.,Am., n. 3, 4 ;the wounds he gave he should himself have suffered.Vereor laudare praesentem, C., N.D., i. 21, 58 ; I feel a delicacy aboutpraising a man to his face. Religionum animum n5dls exsolvere pergo,LUCR., i. 932; I go onto loose the spirit from the bonds of superstitiouscreeds. Tua quod nil refert, percontarl desinas, TER., Hec., 810 ;cease toinquire what is not to your advantage.So habeo, / have (it in my power).Tantum habeo pollicerl me tibi cumulate satisfacturum, C., Fam., I. 5 A.3 ;so much I can promise, that I will give you abundant satisfaction.NOTES. 1. The original force of the Inf. is, in most of these constructions, hard todetermine, and was certainly not felt by the Romans themselves. In many cases theInf. seems to have been used because the governing word or phrase was felt to be moreor less equivalent to a Verb of Creation.2. The principal verbs, construed thus with the Inf., are as follows :Will : velle, malle, nolle, cupere, optare (rare, except in passive), petere, pSstulare,avBre, audfire, desiderare (first in Cic.), praegestlre, gestlre, ardSre,
INFINITIVE. 277metuere (anto-class.), verSrl, tim6re, formidare (ante-class.), reformldare, horrgre,horrgscere, hortarl and compounds, monSre and compounds, suadere (firstin Cic.), persuadgre, iubere, imperare, praecipere, cogere, permittere (once inCic., then later), concgdere (ttrst in Cic.), curare (not in CAES., SALL., LIVY), vetare,recusare (first in Cic.), mittere, omittere, intermittere, cunctari, cgssare,morari, dubitare, gravari, prohibere, impedire, deterrere.Power :posse, quire, nequire, sustingre (first in Cic.), valSre (first in Cic.),pollgre (first in Cic.), habgre (rare, except in Cic.), scire, nescire.Duty : dgbgre, necesse habeo.Habit : assugscere, assugfacere (first in Cic.), cSnsugscere, solere.Inclination : conarl (only with Inf.), studSre, contendere, intendere (CAES.),laborare (always with neg. in Cic.), mollrl (rare), aggredl, ingredl, adorlrl, nltl(first in CAES.), enltl (ante-class, and post-class.), quaerere (first in Cic.), temptare(first in HIBTIUS).fiesolve .-cogitare, meditarl, meminl (mostly poet.), parare, statuere (first inCic.), cSnstituere (first in TER.), dgcernere (not class, in pass.), iudicare (first inCic.), destinare (first in CAES.), certum est, dellberatum est, propositum est(first in Cic.).Continuance : stare (first in Cic.), instare, perstare (once in Cic., then late), perseverare(first in Cic.), properare (only word used in early Latin), festlnare (first inCic.), maturare (first in Cic.).Beginning and End : coepl, incipere (first in Cic.), exSrdiri, pergere, dgsinere.Poets are free in using the Inf. after other verbs.3. Notice that coepl, / have begun, and dSsino, / cease, are used in Pf . pass, withpassive Infinitives, in early Latin, CICERO, CAESAR, always ; later the constructionvaries, and TACITUS does not observe the rule.Bello Ath6ni6ns6s undique premi sunt coeptl, NEP., xin. 3, 1 ;the Atheniansbegan to feel the pressure of war on (from) all sides. Vetergs orationgs legl suntdgsitae, C., Sr., 32, 123 the;old speeches have ceased to be read.When the passives are really reflexives or neuter, the active forms may be used.4. Verbs of Will and Desire take ut as well as the Infinitive. So regularly opt5, 1choose, in classical prose.5. Verbs which denote Hope, Promise, and Threat are treated as verbs of Saying andThinking (530), but also occasionally as in English :Spgrant sS maximum fructum esse captures, C., Lad., 21, 79 ; they hope thatthey will derive great advantage. Subrupturum pallam promisit tibl, PL., Asin.,930 he; promised to steal the mantlefrom you.6.Doceo, I teach, iubeO, Ibid, vetS, I forbid, sin5, 1 let, take the Inf. as a SecondAccusative (339):(Dionysius) ne collum tonsori committeret tondere filias suas docuit, C.,Tusc., v. 20, 58 ; Dionysius, to keep from trusting his neck to a barber, taught hisdaughters to shave (taught them shaving). Ipse iubet mortis t6 meminisse deus,MART., n. 59 (376). Vitae summa brevis spem n5s vetat inclioare longam, H.,0., i. 4, 15 ; life's brief sum forbids us open (a) long (account with) hope. Neu sinasMgdos equitare inultos, H., O., i. 2, 51 ; nor let the Median ride and ride unpunished.The Infinitive as a Predicate.424. The Infinitive, as a verbal substantive, may be usedas a Predicate after the copula esse, to be, and the like.Docto hominl et gruditS vlvere est c5gitare, C., Tusc., v. 38, 111 ;to alearned and cultivated man to live is to think.
278 GERUND AND GERUNDIVE.GERUND AND GERUNDIVE.425. The other cases of the Infinitive are supplied by theGerund. With Prepositions, the Gerund, and not the Infinitive,isemployed.N. Legere difficile est, reading (to read) is hard to do.G. Ars legend!, the art of reading.Puer studiosus est legend!, the boy is zealous of reading.D. Puer operani dat legendo, the boy devotes himself to reading.Ac. Puer cupit legere, the boy is desirous to read.Puer prCpgnsus est ad legendum, the boy has a bent toward reading.AB. Puer dlscit legendo, the boy learns by reading.NOTE. Of course the Inf. may be quoted as an abstract notion, a form of the verb :Multum interest inter " dare " et " accipere," SEN., Sen., 5, 10 ;between "Give" and "Receive."differencethere is a vast426. As a verbal form, the Gerund, like the Infinitive,takes the same case as the verb.Homines ad deos nulla re propius accedunt, quam salutem hominibusdando. C., Lig., 12, 38 ;men draw nearer to the gods by nothing somuch as by bringing deliverance to their fellow-men.NOTES. 1. The Gerund is the substantive of the Gerundive (251, N. 1). The mostplausible theory connects the forms in -ndu- with those in -nt- (Pr. Part, active) as beingverbal nouns originally without any distinction of voice. The signification of necessitycomes mainly from the use as a predicate, i.e., through the characteristic idea. Thus,he who is being loved, implies he who is of a character to be loved (qui amStur), andthen he who should be loved.The Gerundive is passive the Gerund, like other verbal nouns :(363), is theoreticallyactive or passive, according to the point of view. Practically, however, the passivesignification of the Gerund is rare.lugurtha ad imperanduni (= ut el imperarStur, perhaps an old military formula) Tisidium vocabatur, Of. 8., lug., 62, 8.2. Gerundive and Pf . Part, passive are often translated alike ;but in the one case theaction is progressive or prospective, in the other it is completed.Caesare interficiendo Brutus et Cassius patriae libertatem restituere conat!sunt ; by the murder of Caesar (by murdering Caesar), Brutus and Cassiusendeavoured to restore their country's freedom to her. Caesare interfecto, Brutuset Cassius patriae libertatem non restituSrunt ; by murdering Caesar, Brutusand Cassius did not restore their country'sfreedom to her.427. Gerundive for Gerund. Instead of the Gerund,with an Accusative Object, the object is generally put in thecase of the Gerund, with the Gerundive as an Attribute.G. Placandl Del, of appeasing God.D. PlacandS De6, for appeasing God.AB. Placando Deo, by appeasing God.
GERUND AND GERUNDIVE. 279In model prosethis construction is invariably employed with Prepositions.Ad placandos De6s, for appeasing the gods (C., Cat., m. 8, 20).In placandls Dils, in appeasing the gods.NOTES. 1. It is impossible to make a distinction between the Gerund and the Gerundiveform. They are often used side by side, where there can be no difference (L.,xxi. 5, 5 ;xxv. 40, 6 ;xxvm. 37, 1 ;xxxi. 26, 6). The preference for the Gerundive isof a piece with the use of the Pf. Part. pass, in preference to an Abstract Substantive(360, B. 2).2. The impersonal Gerundive is found with an Ace. obj. once in PLAUTUS (agitandumstvigilias, Trin., 869), and occasionally elsewhere in early Latin (principallyVAKBO) ; very rarely in CICERO and for special reasons (Cat. M., 2, 6) ;here and therelater (not in CAESAR, HORACE, OVID, and, perhaps, LIVT).Aeternas quoniam poenas in morte timendumst, LUCR., i. mfear eternal punishments in death.;since we must3. Neuter adjectives and pronouns are not attracted :aliquid faciendi ratio,C., Inv., i. 25, 36 ; method of doing something. Cupiditas plura habendi, greed forhaving more. But when the neuter adjective has become a substantive (204, N. 2), theGerundive form may be used :cupiditas v5rl videndl, C., Fin., n. 14, 46 ;the desireof seeing the truth.4. The Gerundive with personal construction can be formed only from TransitiveVerbs, like other passives (217). Hence the impersonal form most be used for all verbsthat do not take the Ace., but with such verbs prepositions are rarely found.Ad nSn parendum senatui, L., XLII. 9 ;for not obeying the senate.5. But the Gerundives from utor, fruor , fungor , potior vescor (407) have the, personalconstruction, but usually only in the oblique cases (C., Fin., 1. 1, 3, is an exception),as a remnant of then- original usage. The poets and later prose writers use stillmore forms in the same way, as laetandus, dolendus, medendus, paenitendus, etc.CICERO also shows single instances of glSriandus, disserendus, respondendus.6. The use of the Nom. of the Gerundive follows the ordinary rules of the Nominative.Genitive of the Gerund and Gerundive.428. The Genitive of the Gerund and Gerundive is usedchiefly after substantives and adjectives which require a complement:Sapientia ars Vivendi putanda est, C., Fin., I. 13, 42 ; philosophy is tobe considered the art of living. Et propter vltam vlvendl perdere causas,Juv. vin. , 84 and;on account of life, to lose the reasons for living. Eaucaque garrulitas studiumque immane loquendl, Ov., M., v. 678 and;hoarsechattiness, and a monstrous love of talking.Triste est nomen ipsum carendi,C., Tusc., i. 36, 87; dismal is the mere word " carSre " (go without).Non est placandi spSs mini nulla Dei, Ov., Tr., v. 8, 22 ;I am not withouthope of appeasing God. Ignorant cupidl maledicendi plus invidiamquam convlcium posse, QUINT., vi. 2, 16 ;those who are eager to abuseknow not that envy has more power than billingsgate. (Titus) equitandiperitisshnus fuit, SUET., Tit., 3 ;Titus was exceedingly skilful in riding.Neuter sui pretegendi corporis memor (erat), L., n. 6, 9 ; neither
28OGEKUND AND GERUNDIVE.thought of shielding his own body. QuI hie mos obsidendi vias et virosalienos appellandi ? L., xxxiv. 2, 9 ; what sort of way is this of blockingup the streets and calling upon other women's husbands ? Summa 61Qdendioccasiost mihi nunc sengs, TER., Ph., 885; I have a tip-top chanceto fool the old chaps now.REMARKS. i. As mel, tul, sui, nostrl, vestrl, are, in their origin,neuter singulars, from meum, my being, tuum, thy being, suum, one'sbeing, etc., the Gerundive isput in the same form : conservandl sui, ofpreserving themselves; vestrl adhortandi, of exhorting you; and noregard is had to number or gender.Copia placandl sit modo parva tul, Ov., Her., 20, 74 ;let (me) only havea slight chance of trying to appease you (feminine).2. The Gen. of the Gerund and Gerundive is used very commonlywith causa, less often with gratia, and rarely with (antiquated) erg5,on account of, to express Design Dissimulandi causa in senatum : venit,S., C., 31, 52; he came into the senate for the purpose of dissimulation.The Gen. alone in this final sense is found once in TERENCE, severaltimes in SALLUST, occasionally later, especially in TACITUS.(Lepidus arma) c6pit llbertatis subvortundae, S., Phil.Fr., 10; Lepidustook up arms as a matter of (for the purpose of) subverting freedom.More commonly ad, rarely ob. See 432.this is occasionalEsse with this Gen. may be translated by serve to ;in CICERO ;see 366, 429, i.Omnia discriruina talia concordiae minuendae [suntj, L., xxxiv. 54, 5 ;all such distinctions are matters of (belong to) the diminishing of concord(serve to diminish concord). Compare CAES., B. G., v. 8, 6: [naves]quas sui quisque commodl fScerat, ships which each one had (had) made(as a matter) ofpersonal convenience.NOTES. 1. In early Latin, in CICERO (early works, Philippics and philosophicalwritings), then in later authors, we find occasionally a Gen. Sing, of the Gerund, followedby a substantive in the Plural. Here it is better to conceive the second Gen. asobjectively dependent upon the Gerund form.Agitur utrum Antonio facultas dStur agrorum suis latronibus condonandl,C., Ph., v. 3, 6 the ; question is whether Antony shall receive the power ofgivingaway (of) lands to his pet highwaymen.2. Fas est, nefas est, ius est, fatum est, copia est, ratio est, consilium est,consilium capere, consilium inlre,aiffl a few others, have often the Inf. where theGerund might be expected. Sometimes there is a difference in meaning ;thus tempus,with Gerund, the proper time (season), with Inf., high time.The poets and later prose writers extend this usage of the Infinitive.3. Another peculiarity of the poets is the construction of the adj. or subst. like thecognate verb with the Inf., instead of with the Gen. of the Gerund. (At) s6ciira qui6set nescia fallere (= quae nesciat fallere) vita, V., G., 11.467 ; quiet without acare, and a life that knoweth not how to disappoint (ignorant of disappointment).Later prose is more careful hi this matter.4. The Gen. of Gerund, depending upon a verb, is rare and Tacitean (Ann., n. 43).TACITVS also uses the appositional Gerund with a substantival neuter (Ann., xin. 26).
GERUND AND GERUNDIVE.28l5. Some substantives, like auctor, dux, may have a Dat. instead of a Gen.; Liv., i.23 m@ AlbanI : gerendo bello ducem creavgre.Dative of the Gerund and Gerundive.429. The Dative of the Gerund and Gerundive is usedchiefly after words that denote Fitness and Function.1. The usage is rare in classical Latin, and begins with a few verbsand phrases: esse (= parem esse), to be equal to ; praeesse and praeficere,to be (put) in charge of; studere and operam addere, laborem impertire, togive one's attention to; then it is used with a few substantives and adjectivesto give the object for which, and with names of Boards.Solvendo clvitates n5n erant, Cf. C., Fam., in. 8, 2 ;the communitieswere not equal to (ready for) payment'(were not solvent). [Sapiens] viressuas novit, scit se esse oneri ferendo, SEN., E.M., 71, 26 ; the wise man isacquainted with his own strength ; he knows that he is (equal) to bearingthe burden.So comitia decemviris creandis (C., Leg.Agr., 2, 8) ; triumvir coloniisdeducendis (S., lug., 42) ; reliqua tempora demetendia fructibus accommodatasunt, C., Cat.M., 19, 70.2. Classical Latin requires ad with the Ace., but from LIVY on theuse of this Dat. spreads, and it is found regularly after words whichimply Capacity and Adaptation. It is found also technically with verbsof Decreeing and Appointing, to give the Purpose.Aqua nitrosa utilis est bibendo, Cf. PLIN., N.H., xxxi. 32, 59; alkalinewater is good for drinking (to drink). Lignum aridum materia est idoneaeliciendis Ignibus, Cf. SEN., N.Q., n. 22, 1 ; dry wood is a fit substancefor striking fire (drawing out sparks). Eeferundae ego habeo linguamnatam gratiae, PL., Pers., 428 ;I have a tongue that's born for showingthankfulness.NOTES. 1. In early Latin the use of this Dat. is very restricted, it being foundprincipally after stud6re ; operam dare, or sumere (both revived by LIVY) ;flnem(or modum) facere ;and a few adjectival forms. Of the latter, CICERO uses only a
282 GERUND AND GERUNDIVE.gold to a rich man to keep. Conon murSs reficiendSs curat, NEP., ix. 4, 5;Conon has the walls rebuilt. Patriam diripiendam reliquimus, C., Fam.,xvi. 12, 1 ;u~e have left our country to be plundered. [Carvilius] aedemfaciendam locavit, L., x. 46, 14 ; Carvilius let the (contract of) buildingthe temple.Of course, the passive form has the Nominative :Filius PhilippI Demetrius ad patrem reducendus legatis datus est, L.,xxxvi. 35, 13 ;the son of Philip, Demetrius, was given to the envoys tobe taken back to his father.NOTES. 1. Early Latin shows with this construction dare, conducere, locare,rogare, petere, habere, propmare. Classical Latin gives up rogare, petere, proplnare,but adds others, as tradere, obicere, concgdere, committere, curare, relinquere,proponere. LIVT introduces suscipere. The use of ad in place of the simpleAce. is not common.[Caesar] oppidum ad diripiendum militibus concessit, CAES., />'. C., in. So, 6.But ad is necessary in n6mini s6 ad docendum dabat, C., Br., 89, 306 ;he wouldyield to no onefor teaching, i.e., would accept no one as a pupil.2. Habeo dicendum and the like for habeo dlcere, or, habeO quod dlcam,belongs to later Latin (TAC., Dial., 37 ;Ann. iv. 40, etc.).Ablative of the Gerund and Gerundive.431. The Ablative of the Gerund or Gerundive is used asthe Ablative of Means and Cause, seldom as the Ablative ofManner or Circumstance.Unus homo nobls cunctando restituit rem, ENNIUS (C., Cat.M.,4, 10);one man by lingering raised our cause again. Hominis m8ns discendoalitur et cSgitando, C., Off., I.30, 105; the human mind is nourished bylearning and thinking. Plausum me5 nomine recitando dederunt, Cf.C.,Att.,iv. i, 6 ; they clapped when my name was read. ExercendocottldiS milite hostem opperiSbatur, L., xxxiii. 3, 5; drilling the soldiersdaily he waited for the enemy.NOTES. i. The Abl. with adjectives is post-Ciceronian dlgna : stirps suscipiendo(instead of quae susciperet) patris imperio, TAC., Ann., xin. 14. So too withverbs : continuando abstitit magistratu, L., ix. 34, 2.2. The Abl. after a comparative is cited only from C., Off., 1. 15, 47.3. In post-Augustan Latin, and occasionally earlier, we find the Abl. of the Gerundparalleled by the Pr. participle:Bocchus, seu reputando (= reputans) seu. . .admonitus, etc., S., lug., 103, 2.Prepositions with the Gerund and Gerundive.432. The Accusative of the Gerund and Gerundive followsthe preposition ad, seldom ante, circa, in, inter, ob, andpropter. See 427.Nulla r6s tantum ad dicendum prQficit quantum scrlpti5, C., Br. 24, 92;
SUPINE. 283nothing is as profitable for speaking as writing Atticus philosophorum.praeceptls ad vitam agendam non ad ostentationem utebatur, Of. NEP., xxv.17, 3; Atticus made use of the precepts of philosophers for the conductof life, not for display. Inter spoliandum corpus hostis exsplravit, Cf.L., ii. 20, 9; while in the act of stripping the body of the enemy hegave up the ghost.REMARK. Ad is very common ; noteworthy is its use with verbs ofHindering (palus Bomanos ad insequendum tardabat, CAES., B. G., vn.26,2); with substantives to give the End (for); with adjectives ofCapacity and Adaptation (aptus, facilis, etc.). See 439, 2.NOTES. 1. Ante is very rare (L., Praef.,6; V.,
284 SUPINE.veniunt; veniunt spectentur ut ipsae, Ov., A. A., i.99; they come to seethe show; they come to be themselves a show. (Galll galUnacei) cum solecunt cubitum, PLIN., N.H., x. 24, 46; cocks go to roost at sunset. Stultitiaest vSnatum ducere invitas canes, Pi,., St., 139; 'tis foolishness to takeunwilling dogs a-hunting.NOTES. 1. Ire and venire are the most common verbs with the Supine, and theyform many phraseological usages, as ire : COCtum, cubitum, dormitum, pastum,supplicatum, sessum, salutatum, etc. Similarly dare is found in phrases withnuptum, venum, pessiun.2. The Supine is very common in early Latin, less so in CICERO, comparatively rarein CAESAR, frequent again in SALLUST and LIVY. Later Latin, and especially the poets,show but few examples, as the final Inf. takes its place.3. The Ace. Supine may take an object, but the construction is not very common :(Hannibal) patriam dgfensum (more usual, ad defendendam patriam) revocatus(est), NEP., xxm. 6, 1 ;Hannibal was recalled to defend his country.4. The Fut. Inf. passive is actually made up of the passive Inf. of Ire, to go, Irl (thata movement is made, from Itur ; 208, 2), and the Supine :Humor venit datum iri gladiatorgs, TER., Hec., 39 ;the rumour comes that gladiators(gladiatorial shows) are going to be given.The consciousness of this is lost, as is shown by the Nom. (528).Eeus damnatum Irl videbatur, QUINT., ix. 2, 88 ; the accused seemed to be aboutto be condemned.The Ablative Supine.436. The Ablative Supine (Supine in -u) is used chieflywith Adjectives, as the Ablative of the Point of View FromWhich (397). It never takes an object.Mlrabile dictu, wonderful (in the telling) to tell, visa, to behold.Id dictu quani re" facilius est, L., xxxi. 38, 4 ;that is easier in the sayingthan in the fact (easier said than done).NOTES. 1. CICERO and Lnnr are the most extensive users of this Supine ;CAESARhas but two forms : factu and natu ;SALLUST but three ; CICERO uses twenty-four.In early Latin and in the poets the usage is uncommon ;in later Latin it grows. Altogetherthere are over one hundred Supines, but only about twenty-five Supines occur inAbl. alone ;the most common are dictfi,to tell, factti, to do, audit U, to hear, visu,to see, memoratu, relatu, tractatu ;then, less often, cSgnitu, to know, invents,intellects, scitu, adspectu.2. The adjectives generally denote Ease or Difficulty, Pleasure or Displeasure, Eightor Wrong (fas and nefas). These adjectives are commonly used with Dative, and aplausible theory views the Supine in u as an original Dative (nl).3.Ad, with the Gerundive, is often used instead :Cibus facillimus ad concoquendum,C., Fin., u. 20, 64 ; food (that is) very easy to digest.The Infinitive, facilis concoqul, is poetical. Common is facile concoquitur.Other equivalents are active Infin., a verbal substantive, a Pf. Part. pass, (withopus), or a relative clause (with dlgnusX4. The use of the Abl. Supine with verbs is very rare.(Vflicus) primus cubitu surgat, postremus cubitum eat, CATO, Ayr., 5, 5 ; thesteward must be the first to get out of bed, the last to go to bed. ObsOnatu reded, PL.?Men., 377 ;I come back from marketing (imitated by STATIUS).
PARTICIPLE. 285PARTICIPLE,437. The Participle may be used as a substantive, but eventhen generally retains something of its predicative nature.Nihil est magnum somnianti, C., Div., n. 68, 141 ; nothing is greatto a dreamer (to a man, when he is dreaming). Kegia, crede mihi, r5sest succurrere lapsis, Ov., Pont., n. 9, 11; it is a kingly thing, believeme,(to run to catch those who have slipped,) to succour the fallen.REMARK.The Attribute of the Participle, employed as a substantive,is generally in the adverbial form rSctS :facta, right actions ; facstsdictum, a witty remark.NOTES. 1 . This use as a substantive is rare in classical prose, but more common in thepoets and in post-classical prose. In the Pr. Part., principally sapiens, adulescgns,amans in;the Pf . more often, but usually in the Plural ;doctl, the learned, victl,the conquered. The first examples of Fut. Part, used as substantives are nuntiaturl(CUBT., vn. 4, 32), peccaturos (TAG., Agr., 19).2. The use of an attributive or predicative Pf. Part, with a substantive is a growth inLatin. Early Latm shows very few cases, and those mostly with opus and usus, CATOhas post dlmissum bellum, and this innovation is extended by VAKRO, with propter.CICERO is cautious, employing the prepositions ante, d6, in, post, praeter, but SAL-LUST goes much farther, as the strange sentence inter haec parata atque dScrSta(664, R. 2) indicates. LIVT and TACITUS are, however, characterised by these prepositionaluses more than any other authors. The use of a Part, in the Norn, in this wayis found first in LIVT.438. The Participle, as an adjective, often modifies itsverbal nature, so as to be characteristic, or descriptive.(EpamlnBndas) erat temporibus sapienter ute"ns, NEP., xv. 3, 1; Epaminondaswas a man who made (to make) wise use of opportunities( is qul uteretur). Senectus est operosa et semper agens aliquid etmoliens, Cf. C., Cat.M., 8, 26; old age is busy, and always doing somethingand working.REMARK.Especial attention is called to the parallelism of the participleor adjective with the relative and Subjunctive:E6s parva dictu, sed quae studils in magnum certamen excSsserit, L.xxxiv. i ;a small thing to mention, but one which, by the excitement ofthe parties, terminated in a great contest. Munera non ad delicias muliebresquaeslta nee quibus nova nupta comatur, TAC., Germ., 18.NOTE. The Put. Part, active is rarely used adjectively in classical Latin exceptthe forms futurus, venturus. The predicate use after verbs of Motion to expressPurpose is found first in CICERO (Verr., i. 21, 56), though very rarely, but becomes increasinglycommon from LIVT'S time. LIVT is the first to use the Fut. Part, as anadjective clause, a usage which also becomes common later.(Maroboduus) misit legates ad Tiberium oraturos auxilia, TAC., Ann., n. 46;Marbod sent commissioners to Tiberius, to beg for reinforcements. Scrvllius adest
286 ADVERB.de tS sententiam laturus (perhaps due to est>, C., Verr., i. 21, 56. Bern ausus plusfamae habituram ((fiat was likely to have) quam fidei, L., n. 10, 11. (Dictator) adhostem ducit, ntillo loco, nisi quantum necessitas cogeret, fortunae s6 commissurus(loitti the intention of submitting), L., xxu. 12, 2.ADVERB.439. i. The Predicate may be qualified by an Adverb.2. Adverbs qualify verbs, adjectives, and other adverbs,and sometimes substantives, when they express or imply verbalor adjective relations.Male vivit, he lives ill ; bene est, it is well ; fere" omnes, almost all ;rutnia saepe, too often ; admodum adulSscSns, a mere youth ; late r6x (V. ,A., i. 21), wide-ruling ; bis consul, twice consul; duo simul bella, twosimultaneous wars.NOTES. 1. The form of the Adverb does not admit of any further inflection, andtherefore the Adverb requires no rules of Syntax except as to its position.2. With other adverbs and with adjectives, adverbs of degree only are allowable, towhich must be reckoned bene, e"gregi6,and (later) Inslgniter.Poetical are suchexpressions as turpiter ater, splendid? mendax (H., A. P., 3 ; 0., m. n, 35). Maleas a negative is found with sanus only in CICEBO (Att., ix. 15, 5) ;other combinationsare poetical, or post-classical.3. The translation for very varies at different periods ; multum is common inPiuiUTtrs and in HORACE'S Satires and Epistles, rare elsewhere ; valdS is introduced byCICEBO, but did not survive him, to any extent. Sane* is also frequent in CICERO, especiallyin the Letters ad Atttcum. CORHTFICIUS affected vehementer, and so do colloquialauthors, as VITRUVIUS; fortiter comes in later; bene is occasional in PLAUTUSand TERENCE, more common in CICERO ;oppido" is characteristic of early Latin, andLIVT and the Archaiste ; admodum is Ciceronian, but adfatim comes later and is rare.AbundS is rare before the tune of SALLUST. Nimium (nimio) belongs to early Latin,as do impSnsS and impendio. Satis is common in the classical period, aud alsonimis, but mainly with negatives.4. The Adverb as an attribute of substantives is rare. CICEBO shows turn, saepe,quasi, tamquam. LIVT uses more.440. Position of the Adverb. Adverbs are commonly putnext to their verb, and before it when itand immediately before their adjective or adverb.ends the sentence,Iniuste facit, he acts unjustly. Admodum pulcher, handsome to a degree,very handsome.REMARK.Valde diligenter, very carefully.Exceptions occur chiefly in rhetorical passages, in whichgreat stress is laid on the adverb, or in poetry:[Iram] bene Ennius initium dixit insaniae, C., Tusc., rv. 23, 52 well;did Ennius call anger the beginning of madness. Vlxit dum vlxit beneTEE., Hec., 461 ;he lived while he lived (and lived) well.One class of Adverbs demands special notice the Negatives.
ADVERB. 287Negative Adverbs.441. There are two original negatives in Latin, ne andhaud (haut, hau). From ne is derived non [n-oinom (unum),no-whit, not], Ne is used chiefly in compounds, or with theImperative and Optative Subjunctive. The old use appearsin ne quidem. Non is used with the Indicative and PotentialSubjunctive hand; negatives the single word, and is usedmainly with adjectives and adverbs.442. Non (the absolute not) is the regular Negative of theIndicative and of the Potential Subjunctive.Quern amat, araat ; quern non amat, non amat, PETR., 37 ;whom shewhom she does not like, she does not like.N5n ausim, / should not venture.likes, she likes ;REMARKS. i. N5n, as the emphatic, specific negative, may negativeanything.(See 270, R. i.)2. N5n is the rule in antitheses : N6n est vivere sed valgre vita, MART.,vi. 70, 15 ;not living, but being well, is life.NOTES. 1. N5n in combination with adjectives and adverbs, and rarely with substantivesand verbs, takes the place of negative in- or ne-. N5n arbitrabatur quodefficeret aliquid posse esse n5n corpus (ao-u/naTo^), c., Ac., i. n, 39; Cat.M., 14, 47.2. Other negative expressions are neutiquam, by no ineans ; nihil, nothing(" Adam, with such counsel nothing swayed "). On niillus,see 317, 2, N. 2.3. Nec = n5n is found in early Latin, here and there in VERG., LIVT, and TACITUS.In classical Latin it ia retained in a few compounds, as :necoplnans, negotium, andin legal phraseology.443. Haud is the negative of the single word, and in modelprose is not common, being used chiefly with adjectives andadverbs : hand quisquam, not any; hand magnus, not great ;hand male, not badly.NOTES. 1. Hau is found only before consonants, and belongs to early Latin andVERGIL. Haut (early) and haud are found indiscriminately before vowels.2. Haud is very rarely or never found in Conditional, Concessive, Interrogative, Relative,and Infinitive sentences.3. CAESAR uses haud but once, and then in the phrase haud sci5 an (457, 2).CICERO says also haud dubito, haud ignore, haud erraver5, and a few others ;and combines it also with adjectives and adverbs, but not when they are compoundedwith negative particles, i.e., he does not say haud difficilis, and the like.4. Hand with verbs is very common hi early Latin, and then again in Lrvr andTACITUS. In antitheses it is i ot uncommon in comedy, but usually hi the secondmember :inceptiSst amentiu? i haud amantium, TER., And. 218 the ; undertakingif one of lunatics, not lovers.5. A strengthened expression s haud quaquam.
288 ADVEKB.444. i. Ne is the Negative of the Imperative and of theOptative Subjunctive.Tu n5 cede malls, V., A., vi. 95 ; yield not thou to misfortunes. Netransients Hiberum, L., xxi. 44, 6 ;do not cross the Ebro. NS vivam,si sciS, C., Att., iv. 16, 8 ; may 1 cease to live (strike me dead), if Iknow.NOTES. 1. On the negative with the Imperative, see 270, N.2. NS as a general negative particle,= n5n,is found very rarely in early Latin,mostly with forms of velle (ne parcunt, PL-, Most., 124, is disputed). Classical Latinretains this only in n6 quidem, in compound nfiquaquam, and in a shortened formin nefas, nego, neque,etc.2. Ne is continued by neve or neu. See 260.Ne illam vendas neu me per das hominem amantem, PL., P*., 322:sell her, and don't ruin me, a fellow in love.don't445. Subdivision of the Negative. A general negativemay be subdivided by neque neque, as well as by aut aut,or strengthened by nenot even.quidem,Nihil umquam. neque Insolens neque gloriosum ex ore [Timoleontis] procSssit,NEP., xx. 4, 2 ; nothing insolent or boastful ever came out of themouth of Timoleon. Consciorum n6m5 aut latuit aut fugit, L., xxiv. 5,14 ; of the accomplices no one either hid or fled. Numquam [Sclpionem]nS minima quidem rS offendl, C.,Lael., 27, 103 ;I never wounded Scipio'sfeelings, no, not even in the slightest matter.(" I will give no thousand crowns neither. " SHAKESPEARE.)NOTE. In the same way nego, / say no, is continued by neque neque (neenec) :Negant nee virtutgs nee vitia crSscere, C., Fin., in. 15, 48 ; they deny thateither virtues or vices increase (that there are any degrees in).446. Negative Combinations. In English, we say eitherno one ever, or, never any one ; nothing ever, or, never anything; in Latin, the former turn is invariably used : nemomnquam, no one ever.Verres nihil umquam fBcit sine aliquo quaestu, C., Verr., v. 5, 11 ;Verresnever did anything without some profit or other.NOTES. 1. No one yet is nondum quisquam ;no more, no longer, is iam n6n.2. The resolution of a negative n6n ullus for nullus, n5n forumquam numquam,n5n scio for nesci5, is poetical, except for purposes of emphasis, or when thefirst part of the resolved negative is combined with coordinating conjunction (480) :N5n ulla tib! facta est iniiiria, Cf. C., Div. in Ca> ;., 18, 60.3. Nem5 often equals ng quis: N6m5 dS n5 )Is unus excellat, C., Tusc.,\.36, 105.
POSITION OF THE NEGATIVE. 289447. Nego (/ say no, I deny), is commonly used instead ofdico non, / saynot.Assem s6sS daturum negat, C., Quinct., j, 19 ; Tiesaysthat lie willnot give a copper. Vel ai vel nega, Accius, 15&5 (R.) ; say yes or say no !REMARK.The positive (aio,I say) is sometimes to be supplied for asubsequent clause, as C., Fin.,i. 18, 61. The same thing happens withthe other negatives, as volo from nolo, iubeo from veto, scio from nescio,queo from nequeo, quisquam from nemo, ut from n.POSITION OF THE NEGATIVE.448. The Negative naturally belongs to the Predicate, andusually stands immediately before it, but may be placedbefore any emphatic word or combination of words.Potes non revert!, SEN., E.M., 49, 10 ; possibly you may not return.(N5n potes revert!, you cannot possibly return.} Saepe virl fallunt ;teneraenon saepe puellae, Ov.,A.A.,m. 31 ; often do men deceive ; soft-heartedmaidens not often. Non omnis aetas, Lyde, liido convenit, PL., B., 129 ;not every age, (good) Lydus (Playfair), sorts ivith play. Non ego ventosaeplebis suffragia vSnor, H., Ep., i. 19, 37; I do not hunt the voices ofthe ivindy commons, no, not I.NOTES. 1. As the Copula esse, to be, is, strictly speaking, a predicate, the Negativegenerally precedes it, contrary to the English idiom, except in contrasts. The differencein position can often be brought out only by stress of voice fSllx n5n :erat, hewastft happy ; non felix erat, he was NOT happy, he was FAR PROM happy.2. NS quidem straddles the emphatic word or emphatic group (445) ;but veryrarely does the group consist of more than two words.3. A negative with an Inf. is often transferred to the governing verb nSn putant:lugendum (esse) virls, C., Tusc., in. 28, 70 ;on nego,see 447.449. Two negatives in the same sentence destroy oneanother, and make an affirmative, but see 445 :Non nego, I do not deny (I admit}.REMARKS. i. Non possum non, I cannot but (I must):Qul mortem in malls ponit non potest earn non timgre, C., Fin., in. 8,29 ;he who classes death among misfortunes cannot but (must) fear it.2. The double Negative is often stronger than the opposite Positive;this is a common form of the figure LItotSs, understatement (700).Non indoctus, highly educated ; non sum nescius, I am well aware.Non indecorS pulvere sordid!, H., 0., n. i, 22; swart (soiled) with (nodis)honourable dust. Non Ignara mali miseris succurrere disco, V., A., i.630 ;not unacquainted (= but too well acquainted) with misfortune, Ilearn to succour the wretched.19
2QOINCOMPLETE SENTENCE.3. It follows from R. 2 that noc non is not simply equivalent to et,and ; nee belongs to the sentence, non to the particular word :Nee hoc [Ze"n5] non vidit, f.., Fin., iv. 22, 60; nor did Zeno fail to seethis. At neque non(di) diJigunt nos, C., Dii\, n. 49, 102 ;but neither (isit true that) the gods do \iot love us, etc.In the classical Latin this form of connection is used to connect clauses but not singlewords, and the words are regularly separated. VAREO, the poets, and later proseuse necnon like et, and connect with it also single ideas.4. Of especial importance is the position of the Negative in the followingcombinations ;Indefinite Affirmative.General Affirmative.nonnihil, somewhat ; nihil non, everything ;nonnemo, some one, some ; nemo n5n, everybody ;nonnulli, some people ; null! non, all ;nonnumquam, sometimes ; numquam non, always ;nonnusquam, somewhere ; nusquam n5n, everywhere.In ipsa curia nonnemo hostis est, C., Mur., 39, 84 ;in the senate-houseitself there are enemies (n6mo non hostis est, everybody is an enemy).Non est placandl spSs mini nfilla Dei, Ov., Tr., v. 8, 22 (428) ;/ have somehope of appeasing God (nulla sp5s non est, / have every hope). Nem5n5n didicisse inavult quam discere, QUINT., m. i, 6; everybody prefershaving learned to learning.INCOMPLETE SENTENCE.InterrogativeSentences.450. An interrogative sentence is necessarily incomplete.The answer is the complement.451. A question may relate :(a)To the existence or the non-existence of the Predicate:Predicate Question.VIvitne pater 1 Is my father alive ?(b) To some undetermined essential part of the sentence,such as Subject, Object, Adjective, Adverbial modifier :Nominal Question.Quis est ? Who is it ? Quid ais 1 What do you say f QuI hie mos 'What sort of way is this 9 Cur n5n discedis 1 Why do you not depart ?For a list of Interrogative Pronouns see 104.REMARKS. i. The second class requires no rules except as to mood(462).2. The form of the question is often used to imply a negative opin-
DIRECT SIMPLE QUESTIONS.2QIion on the part of the speaker Quid interc.it inter periurum et mendacemlC., Rose. Com., 16, 46; what is the dijj'trence between a perjured:man and a liar ? All questions of this kind are called Rhetorical.452. i.Interrogative sentences are divided into simple andcompound (disjunctive).Am I? (simple) ;Amnot? (disjunctive).I, or am INOTE. Strictly speaking, only the simple interrogative sentence belongs to this section;but for the sake of completeness, the whole subject will be treated here.2. Interrogative sentences are further divided into directand indirect, or independent and dependent. Am 19 (direct);He asks whether I am (indirect).DIRECT SIMPLE QUESTIONS.453. Direct simple questions sometimes have no interrogativesign. Such questions are chiefly passionate in theircharacter, and serve to express Astonishment, Blame, Disgust.Infelix est Fabricius quod rus suum fodit ? SEN., Dial., i. 3, 6; Fabriciusis unhappy because he digs his own field ? (Impossible !) Hens,inquit. linguam vis meam praecludere ? PHAEDR., i. 23, 5; Ho ! ho ! quothhe, you wish to shut my mouth, you do ? (You shall not.) Tuom parasltumn5n novistil PL., Men., 505 ; you don't know your own parasite ?(Strange !)Hunc tu vltae splendorem maculis adspergis istls 1 C., Plane.,12, 30 ; you bespatter this splendid life with such blots as those ?NOTES. 1. Questions of this kind are characteristic of the Comic Poets. In CICEROthey are found especially in expressions of doubt, with posse, and with an emphaticpersonal pronoun.2. Such a question may have the force of a command. So in the phrase etiam tutaces 1 won't you keep quiet? common in comedy (PL., Trin., 514).3. Noteworthy is the occasional usage of the question in place of a condition.Amat ? sapit, PL., Am., 995 ; is he in, love? Tie is sensible. Trlstis es ?indignorquod sum tibi causa doloris, Ov., TV., iv. 3, 33 (542). See 593, 4.4. When several questions follow in immediate succession, only the first generallytakes the Interrogative Pronoun, or -ne. Repeated questioning is passionate.5. On nt in the exclamatory question, see 558.454. Interrogative Particles. Ne (enclitic) is always appendedto the emphatic word, and generally serves to denotea question, without indicating the expectation of the speaker.Omnisne pecunia dissoltita est ? C., Verr., in. 77, 180; is ALL the moneypaid out ? (Estne omnis pecunia dissoluta 1 is all the money paid out ?)REMARKS. i. As the emphatic word usually begins the sentence,
292 DIRECT SIMPLE QUESTIONS.so -ne is usually appended LO the first word in the sentence. Butexceptions are not uncom-uon.2. -Ne is originally a negative. Questioning a negative leans to theaffirmative; and -ne is not always strictly impartial.NOTES. 1. -Ne sometimes cuts off a preceding -s (in which case it may shorten apreceding long vowel), and often drops its own e. Viden? Seest? Tun? You?Satin ? For certain? Also scln, ain, vin, itan,etc. This occurs especially in earlyLatin.2. This -ne is not to be confounded with the asseverative -ne, which is found occasionallyin PLAUTUS and TERENCE, CATULLUS, HORACE (o s6rl studiorum, quineputetis, etc., H.,
DIRECT DISJUNCTIVE QUESTIONS.2Q3you rather have me scatter your brains over the place now ?(Vir custoditabsens, my husband keeps guard, though absent. Is it not so ?) Annescls longas regibus esse mantis ? Ov., Her., 16, 166 or ;perhaps you donot know (you do not know, then) that kings have long hands (arms).NOTES. 1. This usage is found in early Latin, but is a characteristic of CICEBOespecially.2. An is strengthened by ne. This is found frequently in early Latin, more rarelyCICERO uses anne only in disjunctive questions, and HORACE, TIBULLUS, PRO-later.PERTIUS not at all.so nescio an = nescio num.3. In early Latin very frequently, less often in the poets ; occasionally in prose, beginningwith LIVY, an is used as a simple interrogative ;There seems to be good reason for believing that an was originally a simple interrogativeparticle, but became identified later with disjunctive questions.2. Especially to be noted, in connection with an, are the phrases,nescio an (first in CICERO, and not common), baud scio an (this is theusual phrase: baud sciam an is rare), / do not knoiv but ; dubito an, Idoubt, I doubt but = I am inclined to think ; incertum an (once inCICERO), and rarely dubitarim and dubium an, which give a modest affirmation; very rarely a negation. Negative particles, added to theseexpressions, give a mild negation.Haud scio an ita sit, C., Tusc., n. 17, 41; I do not knoiv but it is so.Hand scio an nulla (senectus) beatior esse possit, C., Cat. II., 16, 56; I donot know but it is impossible for any old age to be happier. Dubito an[Tbrasybulum] primum omnium ponam, NEP., vin. i, 1; I doubt but 1should (= 1 am inclined to think I should) put Thrasybulus first of all.NOTE. In early Latin these phrases are still dubitative. The affirmative force comesin first in CICERO, and seems to have been equivalent to forsitan, perhaps, with thePotential Subjunctive : F5rsitan et PriamI fuerint quae fata requiras, V., A., n.506 ; perhaps you may ask what was thefate of Priam, too.DIRECT DISJUNCTIVEQUESTIONS.458. Direct Disjunctive Questions have the followingforms :First Clause.utrum, whether,-ne,Second and Subsequent Clauses.an (anne), oran,an (anne).Utrum nescls quam alte" ascenderis, an pro ninilo id putas ? C., Fam., x.26, 3 ;are you not aware how high you have mounted, or do you countthat as nothing ? Vosne Lucium Domitium an vos Domitius deseruit *CAES., B.C., n. 32, 8 ;have you deserted Lucius Domitius, or has Domitiusdeserted you ? lloquar an sileam ? V., A., in. 39; shall I speak, orhold my peace ? Utrum hoc tu parum commeministl, an ego non satis intellexf,an mutastl sententiaml C., Alt., ix. 2; do you not remember this,or did I misunderstand you, or have you changed your view ?
294 INDIRECT QUESTIONS.NOTES. 1. TTtrunme an is found once in CICERO (Inv.,i. 31,6!), not in CAESABor LIVT, occasionally elsewhere (H., Epod., i, 7) ; utruni ne an is more common.Ne an, which is common in prose, is not found in CAT., TIB., PROP., Hon., LUCAN.2. Ne in the second member, with omitted particle in first member, occurs only inH., Ep., i. ii, 3 (disputed), in the direct question, except in the combination necne (459).3. Ne ne is very rare ; V., A., H. 738 ;xi. 126.4. Aut (or), in questions, is not to be confounded with an. Aut gives another partof a simple question, or another form of it (or, in other words). An excludes, autextends.(Voluptas) meli5remne efficit aut laudabiliorem virum ? C., Farad., \. 3, 15 ;does pleasure make a better or more praiseworthy man ? (Answer : neither?) Tuvirum me" aut hominem deputas adeo ease? TER., Hec., 524 ;do you hold me (obe your husband or even a man ?459. In direct questions, or not is annon, rarely necne ;inindirect, necne, rarely annon.Isne est quern quaero, annon? TER., Ph., 852; isthat the man I amlooking for, or not ? Sitque memor nostrl necne, referte mihl, Ov., Tr.,iv. 3, 10 (204, N. 7).NOTES. 1. Necne is found indirect questions in CICERO, Twc., in. 18, 41 (suntliaec tua verba necne ?), Place., 25, 59 ;and also LUCR., in. 713. Annon in indirectquestions occurs in CICERO, Inv., i. 50, 95 ;n. 20, 60 ; Gael., 21, 52 ;Halo. ,8, 22, etc.2. Utrum is sometimes used with the suppression of the second clause for whetheror no? but not in early Latin. So C., Flacc., 19, 45, etc.INDIRECT QUESTIONS.460. Indirect questions have the same particles as thedirect,with the following modifications.1 .Simple Questions.(a)Num loses its negative force, and becomes simplywhether. It decays in later Latin.Specular! (iusserunt) num sollicitati animi sociorum essent, L., XLII. 19,8 ; they ordered them to spy out whether the allies had been tamperedwith.(Z>) SI, if, is used for whether, chiefly after verbs and sentencesimplying trial. Compare si (261).Temptata res est si prlmo iiupetu cap! Ardea posset, L., i. 57, 2; an attemptwas made (in case, in hopes that, to see) */ Ardea could be takenby a dash (coup-de-main). Ibo, visam si domi est (467, N.), TEK,., Heaut.,170; / will go (to) see lie,if is at home.NOTES. 1. An is sometimes used for num and ne,but never in model prose.Consuluit deinde (Alexander) an totius orbis imperiumfatis sibi destinarStur,CURT., iv. 7, 26 ;Alexander then asked the oracle whether the empire of thewhole world was destined for him by thefates.2. Nonne is cited only from CICERO and only after quaerere (Ph., xn. 7, 15).
IMOODS IN INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES. 2Q$2. Disjunctive Questions.In addition to the forms for Direct Questions (458), a form with -nein the second clause only is found in the Indirect Question, but isnever common ;see 458,N. 2.Tarquinius Priscl Tarquinil regis filius neposne fuerit parum liquet, L. ,i. 46, 4; whether Tarquin was the son or grandson of king Tarquin theElder does not appear.NOTES. 1. The form -no is not found in CAESAR or SALLUST.2. The form ne ne is poetical, except once in CAESAR (B. G., vn. 141, 8).3. Utrum ne an is rare but classical. TJtrumne an begins with HORACE, is notfound in LIVY, VELL., VAL. M., and both PLINYS. In TACITUS only in the THalogus.SUMMARY OF DIRECT AND INDIRECT DISJUNCTIVEQUESTIONS.461. Direct.Is the, last syllable short or long ? Cf. C., Or., 64, 217.Postrema syllaba utrum brevis est an longa?Indirect.brevisne est an longaTIn a verse it makes no difference whether the last syllable be short orlong :MOODS INf utrum postrema syllaba brevis sit an longa.postrema syllaba brevisne sit an longa.I postrSma syllaba brevis an longa sit (CICERO).[postrema syllaba brevis sit longane.INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES.1. In Direct Questions.462. The Mood of the question is the Mood of the expectedor anticipated answer.463. Indicative questions expect an Indicative answer,when the question is genuine.A. Quis homo est ? B. Ego sum, TER., And., 965 ;who is that ? It is I.A. VIvitne (pater) 1 B. VIvom llquimus, PL., Capt., 282; is his fatherliving ? We left him alive.464. Indicative questions anticipate an Indicative answerin the negative when the questionis rhetorical.Quis non paupertatem extimgscitl C., Tusc., v. 31, 89 ;who does notdread poverty ?
296 MOODS IN INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES.REMARK. Nonne and num in the direct question are often rhetorical(see PL., Am., 539 C., Div., ; i. 14, 24). With nonne a negative answeris anticipated to a negative, hence the affirmative character.further, 451, R. 2.Compare465. Subjunctive questions which expect Imperative answersare put chiefly in the First Person, when the questionis deliberative.A. Abeam? B. Abl, PL., Merc., 749 shall I; go away ? Oo.A. Quid nunc faciam ? B. T6 suspendito, PL., Ps., 1229; what shall Ido now ? Hang yourself.REMARK. So in the representative of the First Person in dependentdiscourse (265).466. Subjunctive questions anticipate a potential answerin the negative, when the question is rhetorical.Quis hoc credat ? who would believe this ? [Noone would believethis.] Quid faceret aliud? ivhat else was he to do ? [Nothing.]Quis tulerit Gracchos dS sSditione querentes ? Juv., n. 24 (259).REMARK. On the Exclamatory Question see 534, 558.2. In Indirect Questions.467. The Dependent Interrogative isalwaysin the Subjunctive.The Subjunctive may represent the Indicative.[C5nsiderabimns] quid fgcerit (Indie, fecit), quid facial (Indie, facit), quidfacturus sit (Indie, faciet or facturus est), Of. C., Inv., i. 25, 36; we milconsider what he has done, what he is doing, what he is going to do(will do). (Epanunondas) quaeslvit salvusne esset clipeus, C., Fin., n. 30,97 ; Epaminondas asked whether his shield was safe. (Salvusne est 1)The Subjunctive may be original. See 265.Ipse docet quid agam; fas est et ab hoste doceri, Ov., M., iv. 428 (219);(Quid agam, what I am to do ; not what I am doing). Quaero a t curC. Cornelium non dgfenderem, C., Vat., 2, 5 ;J inquire of you why I wasnot to defend C. Cornelius. (Cur non defenderem 1 why was I not todefend ?)REMARKS. i. Nescio quis, nescio quid, nescio qui, nescio quod, I knownot who, what, which, may be used exactly as indefinite pronouns, andthen have no effect on the construction. This usage is found at allperiods.Nescio quid maius nascitur Iliade, PROP., n. (in.) 32(34), 66 ;something,I knoiv not what, is coming to the birth, greater than the Iliad.
PECULIARITIES OF INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES. 2972. The Relative has the same form as the Interrogative quis ?exceptin the Nom. Sing. hence the ; importance of distinguishing betweenthem in dependent sentences. The interrogative depends on the leadingverb, the relative belongs to the antecedent. (611, R. 2.)Interrogative : die quid rogem, tell me what it is I am asking.Relative : die quod rogo, TER., And., 764 tell me that which I;amasking (the answer to my question).The relative is not unfrequently used where we should expect theinterrogative, especially when the facts of the case are to be emphasised:Dicam quod senti5, C., Or., i. 44, 195 ;I will tell you my real opinion.Incorporated relatives are not to be confounded with interrogatives :Patefacio vobis quas istl penitus abstrusas insidias (= insidias quas) seposuissse arbitrantur, C., Agr., n. 18, 49; 1 am exposing to your view theschemes which those people fancy they have laid in profound secrecy.NOTE. In the early Latin of Comedy the leading verb is very frequently disconnectedfrom the interrogative, which consequently appears as an independent sentencewith the Indicative. This is most common after die, responds, loquere, and kindredImperatives; vidS (PLAUTUS also circumspice, respice); tS rogo, interrogo,quaero, and similar phrases ; aucliro, viclere, etc., scln ;relative words, ut, quomodo,etc., where the modal and not interrogative force is prominent. Classical prose hasgiven up all these usages. A few cases in CICERO are contested or differently explained.In poetry and later prose the examples are found only here and there.Die, quid est ? PL-, Men., 397; tell me, what is it? (Die tellquid sit,me what itis.) Quin tu un5 verbs die :quid est quod m6 veils ? TER., And., 45 ;won't youtell me in one word : What is it you want of me f Die niihi quid fScI nisi n5n sapienteramavl, Ov., Her., n. 27; tell me what have I done, save that I have lovedunwisely.So also, nescio quomodo, I know not how = strangely ; and mlrum quantum,it(is) marvellous how much = ivonderfully, are used as adverbs :Mirum quantum profuit ad concordiam, L., n. i, 11 ; it served wonderfully topromote harmony. Nescio quo pacto vel magis hominSs iuvat gloria lata quammagna, PLIN., Ep., iv. 12, 7 ; somehow or other, people are even more charmed to havea widespread reputation than a grand one.Early Latin shows also perquam, admodum quam, minis quam, incredibiloquantum CICERO mlrum inure) ; quam, nimium quantum, sane quam, valdeSALLUST immane quantum; LIVY adds oppido quan-quam; CAESAR none of these ;tum ;PLINY MAI. immSnsum, Infinltum quantum PLORUS ; plurimum quantum.The position excludes a conscious ellipsis of the Subjunctive.PECULIARITIES OF INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES.468. The subject of the dependent clause is often treatedas the object of the leading clause by Anticipation (Prolepsis).Nosti Marcellum quam tardus sit, CAELIUS (C., Fam., viu. 10, 3); youknow Marcellus, what a slow creature he is.NOTE.in general.This usage is very common in Comedy, and belongs to conversational style
298 PECULIARITIES OF INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES.469. Contrary to our idiom, the interrogative is often usedin participial clauses. In English, the participle and verbchange places, and a Causal sentence becomes Final or Consecutive.Quam utilitatem petentes scire cupimus ilia quae occulta nobis sunt 1 C.,Fin., m. 1 1, 37 ;what advantage do we seek when we desire to know thosethings which are hidden from us ?[Solon PisistratS tyrann5] quaerentlqua tandem re frgtus sib! tarn audaciter resisteret, respcndisse dicitursenectute, C., Cat.M., 20, 72 ; Solon, to Pisistratus the usurper, askinghim (= wlien Pisistratus the usurper asked him) on what thing relying(= on what he relied that) he resisted him so boldly, is said to haveanswered " old age"NOTE. The Abl. Abe. with the interrogative is rare. C., Verr., in. 80, 185.470. Final sentences (sentences of Design)questions more freely than in English.are used inSessum it praetor. Quid ut iudicgtur I C., N.D., in. 30, 74 ; the judgeis going to take his seat. What is to be adjudged ? (To adjudge what ?)REMARK. The Latin language goes further than the English incombining interrogative words in the same clause ;thus two iiiterrogativesare not uncommon :(so),Considera quis quern fraudasse dicatur, C., JRosc.Com., 7, 21.Yes and No.471. (a) Yes is represented :1. By sane, (literally) soundly, sanS quidem, yes indeed, etiam, evenvSr5 (rarely vSrum), of a truth, ita, so, omnlno, by all means, certg,surely, certo, for certain, admodum, to a degree, etc.Aut etiam aut n6n respondere [potest], C., Ac., n. 32, 104 ;he cananswer either yes or no.2.By cgnseo, / think so ; scilicet, to be sure.Quid s! etiam occentem hymenaeum ? CSnseo, PL., Cos., 806 ;what ifI should also sing a marriage-song ? I think you had better.3. By repeating the emphatic word either with or without the confirmatoryparticles, vSrS (principally with pronouns), sang, prSrsus, etc.Estisne? Sumus, are you ? We are. Dasnel DO sane", C., Leg., i. 7,21 ; do you grant ? I do indeed.(V) No is represented :1. By n5n, non v8rS, non ita, minimg, by no means, niliil, nothing,miniine vero, niliil sang, nihil minus.2.By repeating the emphatic word with the negative :
SYNTAX OF THE COMPOUND SENTENCE. 299Non Irata es * Non sum Irata, PL., Gas., 1007;you are not angry ?I am not.(c) YEA or NAY. Immo conveys a correction, and either removes adoubt or heightens a previous statement : yes indeed, nay rather.Ecquid placeant (aedes) mSrogas! Immo perplacent, PL., Most., 907;do I like the house, you ask me ? Yes indeed, very much. Causa igiturn5n bona est ? Immo optima, C., Att., ix. 7, 4 ;the cause, then, is a badone ? Nay,it is an excellent one.REMARK. Yes, for, and no, for, are often expressed simply by namand enim : Turn Antonius : Herl enim, inquit, h5c mihl proposueram, C.,Or., ii. 10, 40 ; then quoth Antony : Yes, for I had proposed this tomyself yesterday.SYNTAX OF THE COMPOUND SENTENCE.472. i. A compound sentence is one in which the necessaryparts of the sentence occur more than once one which;consists of two or more clauses.2. Coordination (Parataxis) is that arrangementof thesentence according to which the different clauses are merelyplaced side by side.3. Subordination (Hypotaxis)is that arrangement of thesentence according to which one clause depends on the other.He /became poor and we became rich; the second clause isa coordinate sentence.He became poor that we might be rich;is a subordinate sentence.the second clause4. The sentence which is modified is called the PrincipalClause, that which modifies is called the Subordinate Clause." He became poor" is the Principal Clause," that we mightbe rich " is the Subordinate Clause.REMARK. Logical dependence and grammatical dependence are notto be confounded. In the conditional sentence, vivam si vlvet, let melive if she lives, my living depends on her living yet " vivam " is the;principal, " si vivet " the subordinate clause. It is the dependence ofthe introductory particle that determines the grammatical relation.COORDINATION.473. Coordinate sentences are divided into various classes,according to the particles by which the separate clauses arebound together.
300 COORDINATION.REMARK. Coordinate sentences often dispense with conjunctions(Asyndeton). Then the connection must determine the character.Copulative Sentences.474. The following particles are called Copulative Conjunctions: et, -que, atque (ac), etiam, quoque.NOTE. The Copulative Conjunctions are often omitted, in climax, in enumerations,in contrasts, in standing formulte, particularly in dating by the consuls of a year, if thepraenomina are added and; finally, in gumming up previous enumerations by suchwords as alii, cSterl, cuncti, multl, omne"s, reliqul.475. Et issimply and, the most common and general particleof connection, and combines likes and uulikes.Panem et aquam natura deslderat, SEN., E.M., 25, 4 ;bread and water(is what) nature calls for. Probitas laudatur et alget, Juv., i. 74 ;honestyis bepraised and freezes.NOTES. 1. We find sometimes two clauses connected by et where we should expectet tamen. This usage is characteristic of TACITUS, but is found all through thelanguage. Fieri potest, ut rectS quis sentiat et id, quod sentit, polite eloquinon possit, C., Tusc., i. 3, 6.2. Et sometimes introduces a conclusion to a condition expressed in the Imperative,but only once in early Latin, never in classical prose. Die quibus in terrls ;et erismihi magnus Apollo, V., EC., in. 104.3. Et, instead of a temporal conjunction, begins with CAESAR (Cf. B.G., I. 37, 1)it is never common.and SALLTJST (lug., 97,"4) ;4. On neque ullus for et nullus and the like, see 480. On et after words indicatingLikeness, see 643. On et for etiam, see 478, N. 2.476. -due (enclitic) unites things that belong closely toone another. The second member serves to completeor extendthe first.Senatus populusque Romanus, C., Plane., 37, 90; the Senate and peopleof Rome. Ibi mortuus sepultusque Alexander, L. ,xxxvi. 20, 5 ;thereAlexander died and was buried. [S61J oriens et occidens diem noctemqueconncit, C., N.D., n. 40, 102 ;the sun by its rising and setting makesday and night.NOT.ES. 1.Que was very common in early Latin, especially in legal phraseology,where it was always retained.2. Que que que is ante-classical and poetic.3.Que is always added to the first word in the clause it introduces, in PLAUTUS, aswell as in classical prose ;but the Augustan poets are free hi their position, for metricalreasons. As regards prepositions, queis never appended to ob and sub, rarely to a andad, but frequently to other monosyllabic prepositions it is ; always appended to dissyllabicprepositions in -a, and often to other dissyllabic prepositions.4. On que for quoque see 479, N. 2.5. Combinations :() et et;(b) que et; rare in early Latin, never in CICERO, CAESAR; begins with SALLTJST.
COORDINATION.3OISAIXUST and TACITUS always add the que to the pronoun, LIVY and later prose writersto the substantive.(c) et que ; rare, and beginning with ENNIUS.(d) que que begins with PLAUTUS, ENNIUS. CICERO has it but once (noctSsquediesque, Fin., i. 16, 51) it enters prose with SALLUST, and ; poets are fond of it.Et domino satis et nimium furlquelupoque, TIB., iv. i, 187 ; enoughfor owner,and too much for thief and wolf.477. Atque (compounded of ad and -que) adds a moreimportant to a less important member. But the second memberoften owes itsimportance to the necessity of having thecomplement (-que).Ac (a shorter form, which does not stand before a vowelor h) is fainter than atque, and almost equivalent to et.Intra moenia atque in sinu urbis sunt hostSs, S., C., 52, 35 ; within thewatts, ay, and in the heart of the city, are the enemies. A. Servos ] Ego *B. Atque meus, PL., Cas., 735 ;a slave ? I? And mine to boot.NOTES. 1. The confirmative force of atque, as in the second example, is foundespecially in PLAUTUS, occasionally later.2.Atque adds a climax, and then is often strengthened by gcastor, profecto, vSr5,etc., PL., B., 86 ; C., Tusc., i. 20, 46.3. In comedy, atque has sometimes demonstrative force atque eccum, PL., : St., 577.4. Occasionally in CICERO, then in the Augustan poets, LIVY and later prose writers,notably TACITUS, atque or ac is often used to connect the parts of a clause in whichfit or que (sometimes both) has been already employed:Et potentes sequitur invidia et humiles abiectosque contemptus et turpgsc nocentes odium, QUINT., iv. i, 14 ;the powerful are followed by envy ; thelowandgrovelling, by contempt ; the base and hurtful, by hatred.5.Atque atque is found occasionally in CATO, CATULLUS, CICERO, and VERGIL.Que atque begins in poetry with VERGIL, in prose with LIVY, and is very rare.C.Atque, introducing a principal clause after a temporal conjunction, belongsexclusively to PLAUTUS :279. Also Ej)., 217.Dum circumspecto m, atque ego lembum conspicor, B.,1.Atque is used before consonants, as well as ac,to connect single notions : whensentences or clauses are to be connected, ac only is allowable either ; atque or ac withexpressions of Likeness. STAMM.8. On atque, after words indicating Likeness, see 643.Atque follows a comparativeonly after a negative in early and classical Latin. HORACE is first to use it after apositive.9. Phraseological is alius atque alius, one or another, found first in LIVY, and rare.478. Etiam, even (now), yet, still, exaggerates (heightens),and generally precedes the word to which it belongs.Nobis r5s familiaris etiam ad necessaria deest, Cf. S., C., 20, 11 ;icelack means even for the necessaries of life. Ad Appl Claud! senectutemaccedebat etiam ut caecus esset, C., Cat.M., 6, 16 (553, 4).NOTES. 1. Etiam as a temporal adverb refers to the Past or Present, and meansstill; it is sometimes strengthened by turn (tune) or nnm (nunc). But beginning with
3
COOKDINATION. 303Neque amet quemquam nee amgtur ab ullo, Juv., xn. 130 ;no one, and be loved by none.mayhe love3. Nee is often nearly equivalent to nee tamen, and yet not :Extra invidiam nee extra gloriam erat, TAC., Agr., 8, 3 ;he was beyondthe reach of envy, and yet not beyond the reach of glory. Cf. TER.,Eun., 249 ; C., Tusc., n., 25, GO.NOTES. 1.Neque = nS quidem,is ante-classical and post-classical: nee nunc,cum mS vocat ultro, accedam 7 II., ,11.3, 262 (the only case in HORACE).2. CAESAR, LUCRETIUS, VERGIL, and PROPERTIUS use neque regularly beforevowels.3. Combinations :(a) neque neque nee nee; ; neque nee ;nee neque. Sometimes the firstneque has the force of and neither ; but this is limited in prose to CAESAR, SALLUST,and LIVT in ; poetry to CATULLUS and PROPERTIUS.(6) neque et ; neque que ; neque ac. Of these neque et is rare in earlyLatin, but more common in CICERO and later ;neque que is rare, and found first inCICERO ;neque atque (ac) is very rare, and begins in TACITUS.(c) et neque is found first in CICERO, who is fond of it, but it fades out after him.4.Neque is usually used for non, when followed by the strengthening wordsenim, tamen, ve"ro, etc.481. i. Insertion and Omission of Copulatives. Whenmultus, much, many, is followed by another attribute, thetwo are often combined by copulative particles:many renowneddeeds, multa et praeclara facinora ;many good qualities,multae bonaeque artes.2. Several subjects or objects, standing in the same relations,either take et throughout or omit it throughout. Theomission of it is common in emphatic enumeration.PhrygSs et PIsidae et Cilice's, C., Div., i. 41, 92 ; or, Phryges, Plsidae,CilicSs, Phrygians, Pisidians, and Cilicians.NOTE.Et before the third member of a series is rare, but occurs here and there atall periods ;in CICERO it usually draws especial attention to the Last member. Atque(c) is used thus a little more frequently (m5r8s instituta atque vita, C., Fam., xv.4, 14), and queis not uncommon :aegritudinBs, Irae libidinSsque,33,80.C., Tusc., i.3. Et is further omitted in climaxes, in antitheses, inphrases, and in formula.Virl n5n [est] debilitari dolore, frangi, succumbere, C., Fin., n. 29, 95 ;it is unmanly to allow one's self to be disabled (unnerved) by grief,to bebroken-spirited, to succumb. Difficilis facilis, iucundus acerbus, es idem,MART., xn. 47, 1 (310).PatrSs ConscrlptI, Fathers (and) Conscript (Senators).luppiter Optimus Maximus, Father Jove, supremely good (and) great.
304 COORDINATION".Other Particles Employed.482. Other particles are sometimes employed instead ofthe copulative in the same general sense.1.Temporal : turn turn, then then; alias alias, at one time atanother ; iam iam, nunc mine, modo modo, now now ; simul simul,at the same time.Turn GraecS turn Latlne, partly in Greek, partly in Latin. HoratiusCocles nunc singulos provocabat, nunc increpabat omnes, Cf. L., n. 10, 8 ;Horatius Cocles now challenged them singly, now taunted them all.Modo hue, modo illuc, C., Alt., xm. 25, 3 ;now hither, now thither(hither and thither). Simul spernebant, simul metugbant, they despisedand feared at the same time (they at once despised and feared).NOTES. 1. Of these turn turn is not ante-classical, nunc nunc is found first inLUCR., and is introduced into prose by LIVY : simul simul is found first in CAESAR,but not in CICERO ; iam iam begins with VERGIL and LIVT. Aliquand5 aliquando,quandoque quandSque, are post-Augustan ; interdum interdum israre, but occurs in CICERO.2. The combinations vary in many ways. Ciceronian are turn alias ;aliasplSrumque interdum alias; ;modo turn ;modo vicissim ;most of them foundbut once. Some fifteen other combinations are post-Ciceronian.3. On cum turn,see 588.2. Local : In CICERO only alio ali5 ;hinc illinc. Others are : hieillic (first in VERGIL) ;hinc bine (VERGIL, LIVY) ;hinc inde (TACITUS) ;illinc hinc (Livv) ;inde hinc (TACITUS) ; alibi alibi (Livy) ;aliundealiunde (PLINY).3. Modal : aliter aliter ; qua qua, rare, and lacking in many authors(e.g., CAESAR, SALLUST). In CICERO only four times, and confined tothe Letters ; pariter pariter is poetical and post-classical ; aeque aequeis found once in HORACE and once in TACITUS.4. Comparative ut : ita, as so :Dolabellam ut TarsSnsSs ita LaodicSni ultr5 arcessiSrunt, C., Fam., xn.13, 4 as the ; people of Tarsus so the people of Laodicea (= both thepeople of Tarsus and those of Laodicea) sent for Dolabella of their ownaccord.Often, however, the actions compared are adversative ; and ut maybe loosely translated although, while.Haec omnia ut invltls ita n5n adversantibus patricils transacta, L., in.55, 15 ;all this was done, the patricians, though unwilling, yet notopposing (= against the wishes, but without any opposition on the partof the patricians).NOTE. There are also many other similar combinations, as :quemadmodumSic ;ut SIC ; tamquam sic,etc. The adversative use of ut ita is rare in the classicalperiod, but extends later.
COORDINATION. 3055. Adversative : non modo, non solum, non tantum, not only ; sed, sedetiam, sed quoque, verum etiam, but even, but also :TTrbes maritimae non solum multis perlculls oppositae [sunt] sed etiamcaecls, C., Rep., n. 3, 5 cities on the seaboard are liable not : only tomany dangers, but even (also) to hidden (ones). [Non] docerl tantum sedetiam delectarl volunt, QUINT., iv. i, 57 ; they wish not merely to betaught, but to be tickled to boot.In the negative form, non modo non, not only not ; sed ne quidem,but not even ; sed vix, but hardly.Ego non modo tibi non Irascor, sed nS reprehendo quidem factum tuum,C., Still., 1 8, 50 ;1 not only am not angry ivith you, but I do not evenfind fault with your action.REMARKS. i. Instead of non modo (solum) non sednS quidem, thelatter non is generally omitted, when the two negative clauses have averb in common, the negative of the first clause being supplied by thesecond ;otherwise both negatives are expressed.Pisonc consule senatui non solum iuvare rem publicam sed n6 luggrequidem Iic5bat, Cf. C., Pis. 10, 23; when Piso was consul, it was not onlynot left free for the senate (= the senate was not only not free) to helpthe commonwealth, but not even to mourn (for her).2. Nedum, not (to speak of) yet, much less, is also used, either with orwithout a verb in the Subjunctive ; it is found first and only once inTERENCE, never in CAESAR and SALLUST, in CICERO only after negativesentences ;from LIVY on it is used after affirmative clauses as well.Satrapa numquam sufferre gius sumptus queat, nSdum til possis, TER.,a nabob could never stand that girl's expenditures, much-ZZeem^.,454;less could you.NOTES. 1. Non tantum is never found in early Latin, CAESAR and SALLUST,rarely in CICERO. Sed quoque is found first in CICERO ; so, too, sed simply, butrarely. LIVY is especially free in his use of sed. VSrum, in the second member, isnot ante-classical nor Tacitean. Non alone in the first member is rare, but Ciceronian,it is usually followed by sed only ; occasionally by sed etiam. Sed is sometimesomitted from LIVY on. Of. L., xxviu. 39, II ; TAC., Ann., in. 19, 2, etc,2. Sed et,for sed etiam, belongs to post-Augustan Latin.Adversative Sentences.483. The Adversative particles are :autem, sed, verum,vfiro, at, atqul, tamen, ceterum. Of these only sed and tamenare really adversative.NOTE. The Adversative particles are often omitted : as when an affirmative is followedby a negative, or the reverse, or in other contrasts.484. Autem (post-positive) is the weakest form of but, and20
306 COORDINATION.indicates a difference from the foregoing,n, contrast ratherthan a contradiction. It serves as a particle of transitionand explanation (= moreover, furthermore, now), and ofresumption (to come back), and is often used in syllogisms.Moclo accSdens, turn autem recSdens, C. ,N. D. ,n. 40, 102 ;now approaching,then again receding. Rumoribus mecum pugnas, ego autem a tSratiSnes require, C., N.D., in. 5, 13; you fight me, with rumours, whereasI ask of you reasons. Quod est bonum, onine laudabile est ; quod autemlaudabile est, omne est honestum ;bonum igitur quod est, honestum est,C., Fin., in. 8, 27; everything that is good is praiseworthy ; but everythingthat is praiseivorthy is virtuous; therefore, what is good isvirtuous.REMARK. Autem commonly follows the first word in the sentenceor clause ;but when an unemphatic est or aunt occupies the secondplace, it is put in the third. So igitur and enim.NOTES. 1. Noteworthy is the use of autem in lively questions. CICERO employsit in this way, also to correct his own previous questions (Epanorthdste).Egon debacchatus sum autem an tu in me * TER., Ad., 185. Num quis testisPostumium appellavit 1 Testis autem ? non accusator ? C., Rab.Post., 5, 10.2. Autem is a favorite word with CICERO, especially in his philosophical and moralworks, but not with the Historians, least of alltimes in all.with TACITUS, who uses it only nine485. Sed (set)is used partly in a stronger sense, to denotecontradiction, partly in a weaker sense, to introduce a newthought, or to revive an old one.Non est vlvere sed valgre vita, MART., vi. 70, 15 (442, R. 2). Domitiusnulla quidem arte sed Latins tamen dicebat, C., Br., 77, 267; Domitiusspoke with no art it is true, but for all that, in good Latin.NOTES. 1. The use of sed to carry on a narrative is characteristic of the historians,though found also in CICERO. Sed in ea coniuratione fuit Q. Curius,S., C., 23, 1.2. Sed is repeated by anaphora (682), occasionally in CICERO (Verr., 111.72, 169),more often later.3. Sed may be strengthened by tamen ; by v5r5, enimvSrS, enim ; by autem,but only in connection with quid, and then only in comedy and in VERGIL. Sometimesit is equal to sed tamen, as in V., A., TV. 660.486. Verum, it is true, true, always takes the first placein a sentence, and is practically equivalent to sed in itsstronger sense.Si certum est facere, faciam ;verum ne post conferas culpam in me, TER.,Eun. ,388 ; if you are determined to do it, I will arrange it ; but youmust not afterward lay the blame on me.
COOKDISTATION. 3O/NOTE. VSrum gradually gives place to sed in CICERO. It is used occasionally toreturn to the subject (ve"rum haec quidem hactenus, C., Tusc., m. 34,84), and inyielding a 1point (verum esto, C., Fin., n. 23, 75), where sed is the usual word.487. Vero, of a truth, is generally put in the second place,asserts with conviction, and is used to heighten the statement.[Platonem] Dion adeo admlratus est ut s5 totum ei traderet. Nequevero minus Plato delectatus est Dione, NEP., x. 2, 3; Dion admired Platoto such a degree that he gave himself wholly up to him ; and indeedPlato was no less delighted with Dion.NOTKS. 1. VSro is properly an affirmative adverb, and such is its only use inPLAUTUS. In TERENCE it has also acquired adversative force, which it preservesthroughout the language in greater or less degree so iu the historians it is ;hardly morethan autem.2. The combination vErum v5r5 is ante-classical ;on combinations with enim,see 498, N. 6.3. Ver5 is also, but not so commonly, used in transitions ; especially in the formulaeage v6ro, iam ve"ro.488. At (another form of ad = in addition to) introducesstartling transitions, lively objections, remonstrances, questions,wishes, often by way of quotation." PhiloctSta, St! brevis dolor." At iam decimum annum in spSluncaiacet, C., Fin., n. 29, 94 ;" Philoctetes, still ! the pain is short." Buthe has been lying in his cave going on ten years. "At multis mallsaffectus?" Quis negat? C., Fin., v. 30, 92; "but he has sufferedmuch ? " Who denies it ? At vidgte hominis intolerabilem andaciam !C., Dom., 44, 115; well, but see the fellow's insufferable audacity! Atvobls male sit! CAT., in. 13; and ill luck to you !NOTES. 1. Ast is the archaic form of at, and is found occasionally in CICERO, deLeg. and ad AM., but more often in the poets and the later archaists.2. At is used in anaphora, and also, especially in the poets, in continuing the narrative.Noteworthy is its use after conditional sentences (in CICERO only after negatives,never in SALLUST), where it is frequently strengthened by certe", tamen, saltern: siminus supplicio adficl, at custodirl oportSbat, C., Verr., v. 27, 69.489. Atqui (but at any rate, but for all that) is stillstronger than at, and is used chiefly in argument.Vix crgdibile. Atqui sic habet, H., S., i. 9, 52 ;scarce credible. Butfor all that, 'tis so.NOTES. 1.Atquin is occasional in early Latin, and even in CICERO.2. At seems sometimes to be used for atqul. C., Tusc., in. 9, 19.490. Tamen (literally, even thus), nevertheless, is oftencombined with at, verum, sed.
308 COORDINATION.It iscommonly prepositive, unlessbe made emphatic.a particular word is toNaturam expelles furca, tamen usque recurret, H., Up.,i. 10, 24 ; youmay drive out Dame Nature unth a pitchfork, for all that she will everbe returning. Domitius nulls quidem arte sed Latlne tamen dlcebat, C.,Br., ii. 77,267(485).REMARK. Nihilominus (nothing the less), nevertheless, is used liketamen, by which it is occasionally strengthened.491. Ceterum, for the rest, is used by the Historians as anadversative particle.Duo imperatores, ipsl pares ceterum opibus disparibus, S., lug., 52, 1 ;tivo commanders, equal in personal qualities, but of unequal resources.NOTE. CSterum is found once in TERENCE (Eun., 452), once iu CICERO (Q.F., n.12, 1), otherwise not before SAIXUST.Disjunctive Sentences.492. The Disjunctive particles are aut, vel, -ve, sive (sen),NOTE. The Disjunctive particles are but rarely omitted, and then mainly in contrastedopposites like pauper dives, plus minus, and the like.493. i .Aut, or, denotes absolute exclusion or substitution.Vinceris aut vincis, PROP., n. 8, 8 ; you are conquered or conquering.2. Aut is often corrective or at least, at most, rather(aut saltern, aut potius).Cunctl aut magna pars fidem mutavissent, S., lug., 56, 5 ; all, or at leasta great part, would have changed their allegiance. Duo aut summumtr5s iuvenes, L., xxxui. 5, 8 ;3. Aut aut, either or.two, or at most three, youths.Quaedam terrae partes aut frigore rigent aut uruntur calore, Cf. C.,Tusc., i. 28, 68 ;some parts of the earth are either frozen with cold orburnt with heat. Aut die aut accipe calcem, Juv., in. 295 ;either speakor take a kick.NOTES. 1. The use of aut to carry on a preceding negative is found first in CICERO.but becomes more common later : nSm5 tribunes aut plSbem timebat, L-, in. 16, 4.2. Aut is sometimes equivalent to partly partly in TACITUS ;Hausta aut obruta Campaniae ora, //., i. 2.3. On aut in interrogative sentences, see 458, N. 4.494. i. Vel (literally, you may choose) gives a choice,often with etiam, even, potius, rather.
COOKDINATION. 309Ego vel Cluvignus, .Tuv., T. 80 ; /, or, if you choose, Cluviemis. Perme vel stertas licet, non modo quiescas, C., Ac., u. 29, 93 ; for all I care,you may (even) snore, if you choose, not merely take your rest (sleep).Satis vel etiam nimium multa, C., Fam., iv. 14, 3 ; enough, or even toomuch. Epicurus homo minims malus vel potius vir optimus, C., Tusc., n.19, 44 ; Epicurus (was) a person by no means bad, or, rather, a man ofexcellent character.2. Vel vel, either or (whether or).Miltiades cllxit[ ] ponte rescisso rcgem vel hostium ferrd vel inopia paucisdiebus interiturum, NEP., i. 3, 4 ;Miltiades said that if the bridge werecut the king would perish in a few days, whether by the sword of theenemy, or for want ofprovisions.NOTES. 1. Vel, for example, is rare in PLAUTUS and TEKENCE, but common inCICERO, especially in the Letters.2. Vel in the sense of aut is rare in the classical period (C., Rep., n. 28, 50), but ismore common later, beginning with OVID. See TAC., Ann., i. 59.3. Vel vel is found in PLAUTUS occasionally in the sense as well as, but in classicalLatin is rigidly distinguished from et 6t.4. Aut is not uncommonly subdivided by vel vel : aut canere vel voce velfidibus, C., Div., n. 59, 122.495. -Ve (enclitic) is a weaker form of vel, and in CICEEOis used principally with numerals, in the sense at most, orwith words from the same stem or of similar formation.Bis terve, C., Fam., n. i, 1 ;twice or at most thrice (bis terque, twiceand indeed as much as thrice, if not more).Cur timeam dubitemve locum defendere? Juv., i. 103 ; why should Ifear or hesitate to maintain my position ?ratio, C., Inv., u. 9, 31 ;Aliquid faciendl n6n faciendrvethe method of doing something or not doing it.NOTES. 1. In early Latin ve is more often copulative than adversative.2. Ve ve is poetical only.496. i. Slve (seu), if you choose, gives a choice betweentwo designations of the same object.Urbem matri seu novercae relinquit, L., i. 3, 3 ;he leaves the city to hismother or (if it seems more likely) to his step-mother.2. Sive slve (seu seu), whether or (indifference).Slve medicum adhibueris slve non adbibueris non convalesces, C., Fat.,12, 29 whether ; you employ a physician, or do not employ (one), youivill not get well. Seu visa est catulls cerva fidelibus seu rupit teretesMarsus aper plagas, H., 0., i. i, 27 ;whether a doe hath appeared to thefaithful hounds, or a Marsian boar hath burst the tightly-twisted toils.NOTES. 1. Single slve (= or) is not found in PLAUTUS or TERENCE ( Cf. And., 190),but it occurs in LUCRETIUS, LUCILIUS, and is common in CICEHO. CAESAR and SAL-
3IOCOORDINATION.LUST, however, do not use it, and it is rare in the Poets. In the sense of slve Bive itis found occasionally in poetry but in ; prose only three tunes in TACITUS.2. Slve Slve is not found in TERENCE, but from CICERO on becomes common.3. No distinction seems possible between slve and seu.497. An is used in the sense of or not uncommonly in CICERO,especially in the Letters; occasionally in LIVY, and frequently in TACI-TUS. Elsewhere it is rare. See 457.Tiberius casu an manibus [Hateril] impeditus prociderat,TAC., Ann.,i. 13, 7 ;Tiberius had fallen forward, either by chance or tripped byHaterius 1hands.Causal and Illative Sentences.498. A. The Causal particles are nam, enim, namque. andetenim, for.Nam isput at the beginning of a sentence ; enim is post-positive(484, R.) : namque and etenim are commonly put in the first place.Sensus mirince conlocatl sunt ;nam oculi tamquam speculators altissimumlocum obtinent, C., N.D., 11. 56, 140 ;the senses are admirablysituated ; for the eyes, like watchmen, occupy the highest post. Piscesova relinquunt, facile enim ilia aqua sustinentur, C., N.D., n. 51, 129 ;fish leave their eggs, for they are easily kept alive by the water. [Themistocles]muros Atheniensium restituit suo periculo ; namque Laoedaemoniiprohibere conati sunt, NEP., n. 6, 2 ;Themistocles restored the walls ofAthens with risk to himself ; for the Lacedaemonians endeavoured toprevent it.NOTES. 1. The Augustan poets postpone both nam and namque according to therequirements of the metre, and in prose, beginning with LIVY, isnamque found sometimesin the second place, but more often in LIVY than later.In early Latin enim is often first in the sentence ; etenim is postponed in proseonly in the elder FLINT and APULBIUS in the ; poets, not uncommonly, so in AFRANIUS,TIBULLUS, PROPERTIUS, and HORACE.2. These particles are originally asseverative, and are often used not only to furnisha reason, but also to give an explanation or illustration (as for Instance). Quid enimagasl what, for instance, can you do? This is especially true of enim, but is alsocommon enough with nam (N. 3), and a broad difference between nam and enim(which is of common origin with nam) cannot be proved. Etenim is often used tocarry on the argument, and gives an additional ground.3. The asseverative force of nam is retained in conversational style occasionally,even in CICERO ( Verr., i. 51, 133). Enim is almost wholly asseverative in PLAUTUS andTERENCE. Namque is very rare in PLAUTUS and TERENCE, and is found before vowelsonly. In classical Lathi it is also rare, and found usually before vowels. With LIVY itcomes into general use before vowels and consonants equally. Etenim is found but oncein PLAUTUS (Am., 26, an interpolation) and four times in TERENCE ;in post-classicalLatin also it is not common, but it is very frequent in classical Latin, especially in CICERO.4. Noteworthy is the use of nam, in passing over a matter : nam quid ego dactione ipsa plura dicam ] (C., O., i. 5, 18), which is especially common in CICERO.5. Nam shows an affinity for interrogative particles'. Here it sometimes precedes in
COORDINATION. 31 1the early language (TER., Ph., 932), but becomes firmly attached in the classical periodin the forms quisnam, ubinam, etc., which, however, sometimes suffer tmesis andtransposition in poetry (V., G., 4,445).6. In atenim (first in CICERO), nempe enim (ante-classical and post-classical),sed enim (rare), v6rumenim, enimveTo, vSrum enimvSrS, as in etenim, the enimgives.a ground or an illustration of the leading particle, but translation by an ellipsiswould be too heavy, and enim is best left untranslated :A. Audi quid dicam. B. At enim taedet iam audire eaclem milieus, TER.,Ph., 487 A.;Hear what I say. B. But (I woii't, for) Iam tired of hearing the samethings a thousand times already.7. Enim is used pleonastically after quia in early Latin, and then again in PETRO-NIUS and GELLIUS ; also after ut and n5 in early Latin.8.Quippe is originally interrogative. From this the causal force developes, whichis not uncommon in CICERO.quippe is equal to enim.In SALLUST, and especially in LIVY and later writers,499. B. Illative particles are itaque, igitur, ergo ; eo, hinc,inde, ideo, idcirco, quocirca, propterea, quapropter, proin, proinde.500. Itaque (literally, and so), therefore, is put at the beginningof the sentence by the best writers, and is used offacts that follow from the preceding statement.NSmo ausus est Phocionem liber sepelire ; itaque a servls sepultus est,Cf. NEP., xix. 4, 4; no free man dared to bury Phocion, and so he wasburied by slaves.REMARK. Itaqne in early and classical Latin has first place in a sentence.It is first postponed by LUCRETIUS, then by CORNIFICIUS andHORACE, and more often later.501. Igitur, therefore, is used of opinions which have theirnatural ground in the preceding statement in;CICERO it isusually post-positive,in SALLUST never.Mihl non satisfacit. Sed quot homines tot sententiae ; fall! igitur possumus,C., Fin., i. 5, 15 ;ME it does not satisfy. But many men manyminds. , / may therefore be mistaken.NOTE. In historical writers igituris sometimes used like itaque. Occasionallyalso (not in classical Latin), it seems to have the force of enim (PL., Most., 1102, MSS.).502. Ergo denotes necessary consequence, and is used especiallyin arguments, with somewhat more emphasis than igitur.Negat haec ffliam me suam esse; non erg-5 haec mater mea est, PL.,Ep., 590 ; she says that I am not her daughter, therefore she is not mymother.NOTES. 1. In the Poets erg5 sometimes introduces a strong conclusion in advanceof the premise (II.,
312 SUBORDINATION.2.Ergd usually conies first, but its position is apt to vary in accordance with thestress laid upon it.3.Itaque ergo is found in TERENCE and LIVT in;erg5 igitur PJLAUTUS.503. Other Coordinating Conjunctions : hinc, hence,is found notunfrequently : hinc illae lacrumae, TER., And., 126. Inde, thence, therefore,is rare, and first in CICERO, but more common in later Latin. E5,therefore, is found in early Latin, rarely in CICERO (Fam., vi. 20, 1),not in CAESAR or SALLUST ; again in Livy and later ;so ideo, on thataccount, but atque ide6 is found once in CAESAR. Idcirco, on that account,is rare, but from the earliest times. Quocirca,is found first in the classical period ;inon which account,quapropter is found here and thereearly Latin, but more commonly in the classical time, rarely later;propterea, on that account, is rare, and belongs to early Latin. Proin,proinde, accordingly, are employed in exhortations, appeals, and the like.(Quod praeceptum nosce te ipsum), quia maius erat quam ut ab hominevid6r6tur, idcirco assignatum est deo, C., Fin., v. 16, 44 ; this precept(know thyself), because it was too great to seem to be of man, was, onthat account, attributed to a god. Proinde aut exeant aut quiescant, C.,Cat., ii. 5, 11; let them then either depart or be quiet.SUBORDINATION.504. Subordinate sentences are only extended forms of thesimple sentence, and are divided into Adjective and Substantivesentences, according as they represent adjective and substantiverelations.This arrangement is a matter of convenience merely, and no attemptis made to represent the development of the subordinate sentence fromthe coordinate.505. Adjective sentences express an attribute of the subjectin an expanded form.Tlxor quae bona est, PL., Merc., 812 (624) = uxor bona.506. Substantive sentences are introduced by particles,which correspond in their origin and use to the ObliqueCases, Accusative and Ablative.These two cases furnish the mass of adverbial relations, and hencewe make a subdivision for this class, and the distribution of the subordinatesentence appears as follows :507. A. Substantive sentences.I.Object sentences.
SUBORDINATION. 313II. Adverbial sentences :1. Of Cause. (Causal.)2. Of Design and Tendency. (Final andConsecutive. )3. Of Time. (Temporal.)4. Of Condition and Concession. (Conditionaland Concessive.)B. Adjective sentences. (Relative.)Moods inSubordinate Sentences.508. i. Final and Consecutive Clauses always take theSubjunctive. Others vary according to their conception.Especially important are the changes produced by OratioObliqua.2. Oratio Obliqua, or Indirect Discourse, is opposed toOratio Recta, or Direct Discourse, and gives the main driftof a speech and not the exact words. Oratio Obliqua, proper,depends on some Verb of Saying or Thinking expressed orimplied, the Principal Declarative Clauses being put in theInfinitive, the Dependent in the Subjunctive.Socrates dlcere solebat :0. B. Omnes in eo quod sciunt satis sunt eloquentes.Socrates used to say : "All men ARE eloquent enough in whatthey UNDERSTAND."6. 0. Omnes in eo quod scirent satis esse eloquentes, (.'., Or., i. 14, 63.Socrates used to say that all men WERE eloquent enough in whatthey UNDERSTOOD.3. The oblique relation may be confined to a dependentclause and not extend to the whole sentence. This may becalled Partial Obliquity.0. E. Nova nupta dlcit : Fleo quod Ire necesse est.The bride says :I weep because I must needs go.0. 0. Nova nupta dlcit s flSre quod Ire necesse sit.The bride says that she weeps because she must needs go.6. B. Nova nupta net quod ire necesse est, Cf. CAT., LXI. 81.The bride weeps because she must go.6. 0. Nova nupta net quod Ire necesse sit.TJie bride is weeping because " she must go"(quoth she).
314 SEQUENCE OF TENSES.4. Akin to 0. 0. is the so-called Attraction of Mood, bywhich clauses originally Indicative are put in the Subjunctivebecause they depend on Infinitives or Subjunctives.(603.)NSa dubito quin nova nupta fleat quod Ire necesse sit. 1 do not doubtthat the bride is weeping because she must go.REMARK.The full discussion of O. 0. must, of course, be reservedfor a later period. See 648.SEQUENCE OF TENSES.509. i. In those dependent sentences which require theSubjunctive, the choice of the tenses of the dependent clauseis determined largely by the time of the leading or principalclause, so that Principal Tenses are ordinarily followed byPrincipal Tenses ; Historical, by Historical.NOTE.As the subordinate sentence arose out of the coordinate, hypotaxis out ofparataxis, the tenses of the Subjv. had originally an independent value, and the associationwas simply the natural association of time. But in some classes of sentences acertain mechanical levelling has taken place, as in the Final sentence ;and in others,as in the Interrogative sentence, the range of the Subjv. is restricted by the necessity ofclearness, just as the range of the Inf. is restricted by the necessity of clearness (530) ;BO that a conventional Sequence of Tenses has to be recognised. To substitute forevery dependent tense a corresponding independent tense, and so do away with thewhole doctrine of Sequence, is impossible. At the same time it must be observed thatthe mechanical rule is often violated by a return to the primitive condition of parataxis,and that2. This rule is subject to the following modifications :1. Tense means time, not merely tense-form, so that(a) The Historical Present may be conceived according to its sense(Past) or according to its tense (Present). (229.)(b) In the Pure Perfect may be felt the past inception or origin(Past), or the present completion (Present). (235, i.)2. The effect of a past action may be continued into the present orthe future of the writer (513).3. The leading clause may itself consist of a principal and dependent,clause, and so give rise to a conflict of tenses with varying Sequence(511, E. 2).4. An original Subjunctive (467) of the past (265) resists levelling,especially in the Indirect Question.
\the,.SEQUENCE OF TENSES. 315510.All forms that relate 1f the Present Subjunctiveto the Present and I(for continued action) ;" are followed * by " -I . ., n f ,.Future J(so especially f1 the Perfect SubiunctiveSubjunctivePrincipal Tenses)(for completed action).All forms that relate tothe Past (so especiallyHistorical Tenses)I are followed bythe Imperfect Subjunctive(for continued action) ;the Pluperfect Subjunctive(for completed action).REMARK. The action which iscompleted with regard to the leadingverb may be in itself a continued action. So in :English / do notknow what Tie has been doing, I did not know what he had been doing.The Latin is unable to make this distinction, and accordingly theImperfect Indicative (/ was doing) is represented in this dependentform by the Perfect and Pluperfect, when the action iscompleted asto the leading verb.511.PR. (PURE cognosce, I am finding out,icognosce, etc., I am finding out,quid facias,quid faceres,what you are to do.what you were to do.OR HIST.),quid facias,what you are doing ;FUT., cognoscam, I shall (try to)quid fecerls,find out,what you have done,PURE PP., cognovl, I have found out what you have been(I know),doing (what you did),FUT. PF., c6gn5vero, I shall have found what you were doingHIST. PR.,IMPF.,cognosce,cognoscebam,out (shall know),I am (was) findingout,I was finding out,(before).quid faceres,what you were doing ;quid fecisses,whatHIST. Pr., cognovi, I you had done, whatfound out,you had been doing,PLDPF., cognoveram, I had found out what you were doing(I knew),(before).When the Subjunctive is original, we have :(cognovl, etc., I knew, quid faceres, what you were to do.Principal Tenses.Nihil rgfert postrSma syllaba brevis an longa sit, Of. C., Or., 64, 217(461). TJbil (Caesarem) orant (historical) ut sibi parcat, CAES., B. O., vi. 9,
316 SEQUENCE OF TENSES.7 (546, i). N6mo adeo ferus est ut non mitescere possit, H., Ep., i. i, 39(552). Nee mea qul digitis lumina condat erit, Ov., Her., 10, 120 (681, 2).Riisticus exspectat dum defluat amnis, H., Ep., i. 2, 42 (572). Post mortemin morte nihil est quod metuam mall, PL., Capt., 741 (631, 2).Ardeat ipsalicet, tormentis gaudet amantis, Juv., vi. 209 (607).Utrum nescls quam alts ascenderls an pro nihilo id putas ? C., Fam., x.26,3 (458). Laudat Africanum Panaetius quod fuerit abstingns, C., Off.,ii. 22, 76 (542). N6n is es ut te pudor umquam a turpitudine revocarit,C., Cat., i. 9, 22 (552). Quern mea Calliopg laeserit unus ego (sum), Ov.,Tr., ii. 568 (631, i). Sim licet extrgmum, sicut sum, missus in orbem, Ov.,Tr., iv. 9, 9 (607). Multl fugrunt qul tranquillitatem expetentes a negotiispublicis sg removerint, C., Off., i. 20, 69 (631, 2).Historical Tenses.Epaminondas quaesivit salvusne esset clipeus, C., Fin., n. 30, 97 (467).Noctu ambulabat in publics Themistocles quod somnum capere non posset,C., Tusc., iv. 19, 44 (541). [Atugniensgs] creant decem praetorgs qul exercituipraeessent, NEP., i. 4, 4(545). Accidit ut una nocte omngs Hermaedeicerentur, NEP. ,vn. 3, 2 (513, R. 2). Ad Appi Claucli senectutem accgdgbatetiam ut caecus esset, C., Cat.M., 6, 16 (553, 4). Hannibal omnia priusquamexcgderet pugna (erat) expertus, L., xxx. 35, 4 (577). (Aggsilaus)cum ex Aegypto revertergtur dgcgssit, NEP., xvn. 8, 6 (585).Tanta opibus Etruria erat ut iam non terras solum sed mare etiam famanominis sui implesset, L., i. 2, 5 (521, R. i). Cum prlinl ordines hostiumconcidissent, tamen acerrimg reliqui resistebant, OAES., B.G., vii. 62, 4(587). Deleta (est) Ausonum gens perinde ac si interneclvo bello certasset,L., ix. 25, 9 (602)ȮriginalSubjunctive Retained.Ipse docet quid agam (original, agam) fas est et ab hoste ;docSrl, Ov.,M., iv. 428 (219). Quaer5 a tg cur ego C. Cornglium non defenderem(original, dgfenderem), C., Vat., 2, 5 (467). Misgrunt Delphos consultumquid facerent (original, faciamus), NEP., n. 2, 6 (518).REMARKS. i. The treatment of the Hist. Pr. according to its sense(past) is the rule in classical Latin, especially when the dependent clauseprecedes. But there are many exceptions.Agunt gratias quod sib! pepercissent ; quod anna cum hominibus consanguineiscontulerint queruntur, CAES., B. C., i. 74, 2; they returnthanks to them for having spared them, and complain that they hadcrossed swords with kinsmen.2. Noteworthy is the shift from the primary to the secondary sequence ;this is mostly confined to clauses of double dependence, i.e., where onesubordinate clause is itself principal to a second subordinate clause.
disputatSEQUENCE OF TENSES. 3 1/Here the first has usually the primary, the second the secondary sequence.Eogat ut curet quod dlxisset, C., Quinct., 5, 18 ;he asks him to attendto what he had said (he would).So of authors :[ Chrysippus aethera esse euin | quern homings lovem appellarent,C., N.D., i. 15, 40 ; Chrysippus maintains that to be ether which mencall Jove.3. The Pure Pf. is usually treated as a Hist. Pf. in the matter ofsequence :Quae subsidia haberes et habere posses, exposui, Q. CICERO, 4, 13 ;whatsupports you have or can have I have set forth.4. The reverse usage, when an Hist. Pf. is followed by a primarySubjv., is not common. Many of those cited from CICERO are from theLetters, where the shift of tense might be influenced by the letter-tenseprinciple (252).Sed quo consilio redierim, initio audistis, post estis expert!, C., Ph., x. 4, 8.Quis miles fuit, qui Brundisil illam non vlderit, C., Ph., 11. 25, 61. (Thecontext shows that fait cannot be Pure Pf.)512. Sequence of Tenses in Sentences of Design. Sentencesof Design have, as a rule, only the Present and ImperfectSubjunctive. The Roman keeps the purpose andthe process, rather than the attainment, in view.PR., edunt, they are eating,PUBE PP., 5d6runt, they have eaten,FUT., edent, they will eat,FUT. PP., ederint, they will have eaten,ut vlvant,> that they may live (toIMPF., edebant, they were eating,~\ ut vlverent,PLUPF., Sderant, they had eaten, L that they might live (toHIST. PP., 6d6runt, they ate, live).Spectatum veniunt, veniunt spectentur ut ipsae, Ov., A. A., i.99 (435).Sed precor ut possim tutius ess miser, v. ,Tr. ,v. 2, 78 (424). Gallinae pennisfovent pull5s ne" frigore laedantur, Cf. C., N.D., n. 52, 129(545). Lggembrevem esse oportet quo facilius ab imperltis teneatur, SEN., E.M., 94, 38(545). MS praemlsit domum haec ut nuntiem uxorl suae, PL., Am., 195 ; liehas sent me home ahead of him, to take the news to his wife. Oculosecfodiam tibl n5 m5 observare possis, PL., Aul., 53; I will gouge out youreyes for you, to make it impossible for you to watch me.[Laelius] venisbat ad cgnam ut satiaret dSsideria naturae, C., Fin., n.8, 25 ;Laelius used to go to table, to satisfy the cravings of nature.(Phaethon) optavit ut in currum patris tolleretur, C., Off., in. 25, 94 (546, i).
3l8SEQUENCE OF TENSES.REMARK. Parenthetical final sentences like ut ita dlcam, n5 errStis,are really dependent on the thought or utterance of the speaker, andhave the present sequence everywhere.N6 longior sim, vale, C., Fam., xv. 19; not to be tedious, farewell!Ne tamen ignores, virtute Neronis Armenius cecidit, II., Ep.,I. 12, 25 ;butthat you may not fail to know it, it was by the valour of Nero that the.Armenian fell.NOTES. 1. The Pf. and Plnpf. Snbjv. are sometimes found in sentences of Design,chiefly in earlier and later Latin (no example is cited from CAESAU or SALLUST), whenstress is laid on completion, or when an element of Hope or Fear comes in : Ut Sicdlxerim (first found in QUINT.), if I may be allowed to use tfie expression.Afflrmare audeo me omni ope adnlsurum esse ne frustra vos hanc spem dem6 conceperltis, L., XLIV. 22 ;I dare assure you that I will strain every nerve to keepyou from having conceived this hope of me in vain. (After a past tense, n concepissStis.)Nunc agendum est ne frustra oppressum esse Antonium gavisi simus,C., ad /;/., i. 4, 3. Hie obsistam, ne imprudent! hue ea se subrepsit (131, 4, b. 2)mihl, PL., M.G., 333. Eff&cit n6 cuius alterlus sacrilegium r6s publica quamNerOnis sSnsisset, TAC., Agr., 6.When the tense is compound, the participle is usually to be considered as a mereadjective.Patronus extiti utl ne [Sex. Boscius] omnino desertus esset, C., Rose. Am., 2,5 ; where desertus = solus.2. Occasional apparent exceptions are to be explained in various ways. Thus, in C.,as anSest., 14, 32 : etiamne edlcere audeas nS maerrent, we have a repetitionindignant question of the preceding statement : edicunt (Hist. Pr.) duo consules utad suum vestltum senatores redirent.513. Exceptional Sequence of Tenses : Sentences of Result(Consecutive Sentences). In Sentences of Eesult, thePresent Subjunctive is used after Past Tenses to denote thecontinuance into the Present, the Perfect Subjunctive toimply final result. This Perfect Subjunctive may representeither the Pure Perfect or Aorist, the latter especially withthe negative:Present Tense :the action happened once for all or not at all.[Siciliam Verres] per triennium ita vexavit ut ea restitui in antiquumstatum nullo modo possit, C., Verr., I. 4, 12 ; Verres so harried Sicily forthree years as to make it utterly impossible for it to be restored to iff.original condition. In [Lucullo] tanta prudentia fait ut kodie stet Asia,C., Ac., n. i, 3 Lucullus's ; forethought was so great that Asia standsfirm to-day.Perfect Tense (Pure):(MurSna) Asiam sic obilt ut in ea neque avaritiae neque luxuriae vestigiumreliquerit, C., Mur., 9, 20 ;Murena so administered Asia as not tohave (that he has nat) left in it a trace either of greed or debauchery(there is no trace there).
SEQUENCE OF TENSES. 319Perfect Tense (Aorist):Equitgs hostium aoriter cum equitatu nostrS confllxgrunt, tamen ut nostrleos in silvas collgsque compulerint, CAES., B.G., v. 15, 1 ; the cavalry ofthe enemy engaged the cavalry on our side briskly, and yet (the upshotwas that) our men forced them into the woods and hills. Neque vSro tarnremisso ac languido animo quisquam omnium fuit qul ea nocte conquigverit,CAES., B.C., i. 21, 5; and indeed there was no one at all of so slack andindifferent a temper as to take (a wink of) sleep that night.REMARKS. i. After a Pure Pf., if the dependent clause is affirmative,CICEIIO prefers the Impf. (he has but five cases of Pf.); if negativethe Pf. (in the proportion 2 to 1).2. After accidit, contigit, and other verbs of Happening, the Impf. isalways used, the result being already emphasised in the Indie, form.Accidit ut una nocte omngs Hermae deicerentur, NEP., vn., 3, 2 ;ithappened that in one night all the Ilermae were thrown down.NOTES. 1. The use of the Aoristic Pf. Subjv. after an Aoristic Pf. Indie, seems tohave been an attempt of the Romans to replace the consecutive Aor. Inf. in Greek withwore. Examples are not found in early Latin, are rare in CICEBO, very rare in CAESAH,perhaps not at all iij SALLUST ;more frequent in LIVT, common in TACITUS, very commonhi NEPOS and SUETONIUS, etc.2. In two coordinated clauses depending on the same verb we find the tenses occasionallyvarying. The Pf. in the first subordinate, with Impf. in the second, is doubtfulin any case, rare in CICERO, and is cited but once each from CAESAR (B. O., vu. 17) andVELLEIUS (i. 9, 1). The reverse construction, Impf. followed by Pf., is more common,but found first (though rarely) in LIVY, and belongs mainly to late Latin.Zeno nullo morto is erat qul nervos virtutis inciderit, sed contra qul omniain virtute poneret, C., Ac., 1. 10, 35. Here the shift is due to the negative. Tantuspavor omngs occupavit ut non modo alius quisquam anna caperet sed etiamipse rgx perfugerit, L., xxiv. 40, 1#. Here the tenses depend on the ideas of continuanceand completion, of the many and the single (n5n capigbant rSx perfugit >.3. In relative sentences of coincident action with causal coloring, either the coincidenceis retained, or a principal clause in the Past is followed by the Impf. Subjunctive.Tu hiiinanisshng fgcisti qul me certiorem feceiis, C., Att., xm. 43,1. Cumhoc Pompgius vehementer ggit cum dlceret, etc., C., Att., n. 22, 2. Videor mihigratum fgcisse Siculls, quod eorum iniurias sim persecutus, c., Verr.,u. 6, 15(518, K.).Representation of the Subjunctive in the Future andFuture Perfect Tenses.514. The Subjunctive has no Future or Future Perfect,which are represented either by the other Subjunctives, orin the Active by the Subjunctive ofthe Periphrastic Conjugation.RULE I.(a) After a Future or Future Perfect Tense, theFuture relation (contemporary with the leading Future) is
quidquid32OSEQUENCE OF TENSES.represented by the Present Subjunctive ;the Future Perfect(prior to the leading Future) by the Perfect Subjunctive,according to the rule.I"1Cognoscam, quid facias, what you are doingI shall (try to) find out,(will be doing).Cognovero, feceris, what you have doneI shall have found out (shall know), j(will have done).(b) But whenever the dependent Future is subsequent tothe leading Future, the Periphrastic Tense must be employed.Cognoscam,I shall (try to) find out,I 4 factSruB 8te 'CognSverS,I shall have found out (shall know), Jyou wil1 do) '[Considerabimus], [ice shnJl consider].A. Quid fgcerit aut quid ipsl accident aut quid dlxerit, what he hasdone, or what has happened to him, or what he /to-s said.B. Aut quid faciat, quid ipsl accidat, quid dlcat, or, what he is doing,what is happening to him, what he is saying.C. Aut quid facturus sit, quid ips! casurum sit, qua sit usurus oratione,C., Inv., i. 25, 36; or what he is going to do (will do), what is going to(will) happen to him, what plea he is going to employ (will employ).Tu quid sis acturus pergratum erit si ad m6 scripseris, 0., Fam., ix. 2, 5;it will he a great favour if you will write to me what you are goingto do.REMARK. In some of these forms ambiguityis unavoidable. So Amay represent a real Perfect, B a real Present.515. EULE II. After the other tenses, the Future relationis expressed by the Active Periphrastic Subjunctive, Presentor Imperfect.1CSgnSsco,/ am finding out,IquidCognovi,I have found out (know), |facturus sis (what you are going todo), what you will do.C5gnosc6bam,/ was trying to find out,ICognoveram,J had found out,facturus essSs (what you were going todo), what you would do.
SEQUENCE OF TENSES. 321Tarn ea res est facilis ut innumerabills natura mundos effectura sit, cfficiat,effecerit, Cf. C., N.D., i. 21, 53; the thing is so easy that naturewill make, is making, has made, innumerable worlds.Incertum est quam longa cuiusque nostrum vita futura sit, C., Verr., i.58, 153 ;it is uncertain how long the life of each one of us is going tobe (will be).Antea dubitabam venturaene essent legiones ;nuuc iuih! non est dubiumquln venturae n5n sint, C., Fain., n. 17, 5 ; before, Iwas doubtful whetherthe legions would come (or no) ;now I have no doubt that they will notcome.REMARKS. i. The Pf. and Plupf. Subjv. of the Periphrastic are usedonly to represent the Apodosis of an Unreal Conditional Sentence.Cognosce, Cognovl, quid facturue fuerls, (what you have beenIam finding out, I havefound cut what you would h .me done, going to do).(know),Cognoscebam, Cognoveram, [quid facturiu fuissSs, (what you had beenI was trying tofind out, I hadfound out, what you would have going to do).done, rare.]2. There is no Periphrastic for the Fut. Pf. active, no Periphrasticfor passive and Supineless Verbs. The Grammars make up a Periphrasticfor all these from futurum sit, esset ut, as :Nandubitoqulnfuturumsit,I do not doubt\I ut necetur, that he will be killed.But there is no warrant in actual usage.For the dependent Fut. Pf. act. TERENCE says (Hec., 618).: Tu5 r8fert nil utrumillaec feceriut quandS liaec aberit.For the dependent Fut. Pf. pass. CICERO says (Fam.,vi. 12,8): Nee dubito quincSnfecta res futura sit, nor do I doubt but the matter will have beeh settled.In the absence of the Periphrastic forms, use the proper tenses of posse. (248, R.)3. When the preceding verb has a future character (Fear, Hope,Power, Will, and the like), the simple Subjv. is sufficient.Galli, nisi pcrfregerint munition es, de omnl salute desperant ; Roman!, sirem obtinuerint, finem labSrum omnium exspectant, CAES., B. o., VH. 85, 3 ;theGauls despair of all safety unless they break through (shall have broken through) thefortifications ; the Romans lookforward to an end of all their toils, if they hold theirown (shall have held). VSnerunt querentSs nee spem ullam esse resistendi, nisipraesidium Romanus misisset, L-, xxxiv. n, 2 ; they came with the complaint thatthere ivas no hope of resistance unless the Roman sent a force to protect them. Intentiquando hostis inprudentia rueret, TAC., H., n. 34.Of course the Deliberative Subjunctive is future : Examples, 265.Et certamen habent letl, quae vivasequatur coniugium, PEOP., iv. 12, 19 (M.).516. Sequence of Tenses in Oratid :Obliqua In Oratio Obliquaand kindred constructions, the attraction of tenses ap-21
322 SEQUENCE OF TENSES.plies also to the representatives of the Future and FuturePerfect Subjunctive.In [clava] erat scrlptum nisi domum reverterStur sg capitis eum damnaturos,NEP., iv. 3, 4; it was written on the staff that if he did not returnhome, they would condemn Mm to death. (Oratio EScta : nisidomum revertSris, tS capitis damnabimus, unless you (shall) return home,we will condemn you to death). Pythia praecgpit ut Miltiadem sibl imperatoremsumerent ;id si fScissent (6. E., ffccerltis) incepta prospera futura(6. E., eront), NEP., i. i, 3 the ; Pythia instructed them to take JQltiadesfor their general ; that if they did that, their undertakings would besuccessful. Lacedaemonii, Philippo minitante per litteras s6 omnia quaeconarentur (0. E., conabimini) prohibittirum, quaeslverunt num s6 esset etiammorl prohibiturus (6. E., prohibsbis), C.,Tusc., v. 14, 42; the Lacedaemonians,when Philip threatened them by letter that he would preventeverything they undertook (should undertake), asked whether he wasgoing to (would) prevent them from dying too.517. Sequence of Tenses after the other Moods. The Imperativeand the Present and Perfect Subjunctive have theSequences of the Principal Tenses the; Imperfect and Pluperfecthave the Sequences of the Historical Tenses.[NS] compone comas quia sis venturus ad illam, Ov., Hem. Am., 679; donot arrange (your) locks because (forsooth) you are going to see her.Excellentibus ingenils citius defuerit ars qua civem regant quam qua hostemsuperent, L., n. 43, 10; great geniuses would be more likely to lack theskill to control the citizen than the skill to overcome the enemy. QuidmS prohibgret EpicurSum esse, s! probarem quae ille dicer et 7 C., fin., i.8, 27; what would prevent me from being an Epicurean if I approvedwhat he said (says) ? Turn ego tS primus hortarer diu pgnsitarSs quernpotissimuxn eligerSs, PLIN., Ep., iv. 15, 8; in that case I should be thefirst to exhort you to weigh long whom you should choose above allothers. Quae vita fuisset Priamo si ab adulSscentia scisset quos eventussenectutis esset habiturus ? C., Div., n. 9, 22 ;what sort of life wouldPriam have led if he had known, from early manhood, what were to bethe closing scenes of h is old age ?REMARKS. i. Of course, when the Pf. Subjv. represents an HistoricalTense, it takes the historical Sequence :Magna culpa Pelopis qul non docuerit filium quatenus esset quidquecurandum, C., Tusc.. i.44, 107; greatly to blame is Pelops for not havingtaught his son how far each thing was to be cared for. Qul scis an eacausa m6 odisse adsimulaverit, ut cum matre plus una esset T TER., Hec.,235; how do you know but she has pretended to hate me in order to bemore with her (own) mother f
IquidSEQUENCE OF TENSES. 323So also in the Conditional proposition, when the action is past.varying conception, see C., Off., in. 24, 92.For2. The Impf. Subjv., being used in opposition to the Present, mightbe treated as a Principal Tense, but the construction is less usual :Vergrer nS immodicam oratiSnem putarSs nisi esset generis gius ut saepeincipere saepe dSsinere videatur, PLIN., Ep., ix. 4, 1; / should be afraidof your thinking the speech of immoderate length, if it were not of suchkind as to produce the effect of often beginning, often ending. 6 ego ngpossim tales sentlre dolores quam mallem in gelidis montibus esse lapis!TIB., ii. 4, 7.518. Sequence of Tenses after an Infinitive or Participle.When a subordinate clause depends on an Infinitive orParticiple, Gerund or Supine, the tense of that clause followsthe tense of the Finite verb, if the Finite verb is Past ; if theFinite verb is Present, it follows the tense that the dependentverb would have had, if it had been independent.Dicit sS interrogate (originalinterrogo),He says that he is asking,Dicit sg interrogasse (original( quid agas,quid egerls,]quid acturus sis,Iwhat you are doing,what you have done,what you are goingto do (will do).interrogavl),He says that he asked,DIxit s6 interrogate (originalinterrogS),quid ageres,quid egisses,quid acturus esses,what you were doing.what you had done.^l'hatyou were goingto do (would do).He said that he was asking,what he is doing,f quid agat,Mini interrogantl,when I ask him,(literally :to me asking),Mini interroganti,when I asked him,(literally :to me asking),C n5n rewhathe has spondet,quid Sgerit,done,1 he givesacturus what he is going no an-[ sit, to do (will do), [ swer.quid ageret,^vhat he ivas doing,quid ggisset, what he haddone,quid acturusesset, what he was goingto do,/ think I haveApud Hypanim fluvium Aristotelgs ait bestiolas quasdam nascl quae unamdiem vivant, C., Tusc., i. 39, 94 (650). Satis mih! multa verba fecisse videorquarS esset hoc bellum necessarium, C., Imp., 10, 27;said enough (to show) why this war is necessary. Apelles pictorgs eosn5nrespondit,he gaveno answer.
324 REFLEXIVE IX SUBORDINATE SENTENCES.peccare dlcebat qul n5n sentirent quid esset satis, C., Or., 22, 73; Apelleaused to say that those painters blundered who did not perceive ichatwas (is) enough. Athenienses Cyrsilum quendam suadentem ut in urbemangrent lapidibus obrugrunt, C., Off., in. u, 48(546). Cupldo incessitanimos iuvenum sclscitandl ad quern eorum regnum Bomanum essetventurum,L., i. 56, 10; the minds of the young men were seized by the desireof inquiring to which of them the kingdom of Rome would come.Mlsgrunt Delphos consulturn quid facerent, NEP., n. 2, 6 ; they sent toDelphi to ask the oracle what they should do. See 265.REMARK. Nevertheless examples are not unfrequentwhere thesequence of the governing verb is retained : Videor mihi gratum fScisseSiculis quod eorum iniuriSs meo periculo sim persecutus, C., Ven:, n. 6, 15;/ seem to have pleased the Sicilians, in that I have followed up theirinjuries at my own risk (on account of the coincidence, 513, N. 3).519. Original Subjunctives in Dependence.i. The Potentialof Present or Future after a Past tense goes into thePast ;the same is true of Deliberative Questions (465). Onthe other hand, the Potential of the Past must be retainedeven after a Present tense (467).Vide5 causas esse permultas quae [Titum Eoscium] impellerent, C., Rose.Am. , 33, 92 ;/ see that there are very many causes which might haveimpelled Titus Roscius. QuaeroC., Vat., 2, 5 (467).a tS cur Gaium Cornelium non defenderem,2. On the behaviour of Conditional Subjunctives in dependencesee 597, n. 4.REMARK. The Sequence of Tenses is not unfrequently deranged bythe attraction of parenthetic clauses or, especially in long sentences, bythe shifting of the conception. Examples are C., Balb,,i. 2 ; Ph., m.15, 39 ; Ac., n. 1 8, 56, and many others.USE OF THE REFLEXIVE IN SUBORDINATESENTENCES.520. In subordinate clauses, the Eeflexive is used withreference either to the subject of the principal, or to thesubject of the subordinate, clause ;and sometimes first tothe one and then to the other.521. The Reflexive is used of the principal subject whenreference is made to the thought or will of that subject ;hence, in Infinitive Sentences, in Indirect Questions, in Sen-
REFLEXIVE IN SUBORDINATE SENTENCES. 325tences of Design, and in Sentences which partakeOblique Relation.of theSentit animus s6 vl sua, n5n aliena movSii, C., Tusc., I. 23, 55; themind feels that it moves by its own force, (and) not by that of another.Quaesiverunt num sS esset etiam morl prohibiturus, C., Tusc., v. 14, 42(516). Pompeius a me petivit ut secura et apud se essem cottldie, Cf. C.,Alt., v. 6, 1 ; Pompey asked me to be with him, and at his house, daily.Paetus o nines libros quos frater suns rellquisset mih! donavit, C., AH., n. i,12 ;Paetus presented to me all the books (as he said) that his brother hadleft (qu5s frater elus rellquerat, would be the statement of the narrator).REMARKS. i. Sentences of Tendency and Result have forms of is,when the subj. is not the same as that of the leading verb ;otherwisethe Reflexive :Tarquinius sic Servium diligebat ut is eius vulgo haberetur films, G.,Tarquin loved Servius so that he was commonly consid-Rep. n. 21, 38 ;ered his son. But Tanta opibus Etruria erat ut iam non terras sSlum sedmare etiam fama n5minis sui implesset, L., i. 2, 5; so great in means (= sopowerful) was Etruria that she had already filled not only the land,but even the sea, with the reputation of her name.2. The Reflexive may refer to the real agent, and not to the grammaticalsubj. of the principal clause. (309, 2.)A Caesare invitor sib! ut sim legatus, C., Alt., n. 18, 3; / am invitedby Caesar (= Caesar invites me) to be lieutenant to him.Especially to be noted is the freer use of suus (309, 4). The otherforms are employed chiefly in reflexive formulae (309, 3), as se recipere,to withdraw, etc.(Roman!) sul colligendi hostibus facultatem (non) relinquunt, C.u:s.,B.G., m. 6, 1(309, 3).3. The Reflexive is used in general sentences, as one, one's self, etc.(309, i): DSforme est dS s5 ipsum praedicare, C., Off., i. 38, 137; it is unseemlyto be bragging about one's self.With the Inf. this follows naturally from 420.4. In Indie, relative sentences, which are mere circumlocutions (505),is is the rule:SocratSs inhonestam sib! crSdidit 5rati5nem quam ei Lysias re5 composuerat,QUINT., n. 15, 30; Socrates believed the speech which Lysias hadcomposed for him when he was arraigned, dishonoring to him.Sometimes, however, the Reflexive isput contrary to the rule :Metellus in ils urbibus quae ad se clefecerant praesidia imponit, S.,lug., 61, 1; Metellus put garrisons in those towns which had gone overto him ; regularly, ad eum.Ille habet quod sib! debebatur, PETR., 43, 1; he has his due; regularly,ei.
I326 KEFLEXIVE IN SUBORDINATE SENTENCES.5. Sometimes the Demonstrative is used instead of the Reflexive,because the narrator presents his point of view:Solon, quo tutior vita eius esset, furere s simulavit, C., Off., i. 30, 108;Solon feigned madness that his life might be the safer. (The notion ofResult intrudes.) Pompems ignes fieri prohibuit, quo occultior esset 6iusadventus, CAES., B.C., in. 30, 5; Pompey forbade fires to be kindled in,order that his approach, might be the better concealed.NOTES. 1. Occasionally, principally in early Latin, the Reflexive seems to be usedwith the force merely of a third personal pronoun :Vitis si macra erit, sarmenta sua concldito minute", CATO, Agr., 37, 3.But sentences like eum fe"cisse aiunt quod sibi faciundum fuit (PL., Poen., 956),where the relative clause is but a circumlocution for officium suom, belong properlyunder B. 4. Similarly, C., Inv.,i. 33, 55. In the sentence, Cicero tibl mandat, utAristodemo idem dS se respondeas quod de fratre suo respondistl (C., At/., n. 7 ,5), d fratre eius would jar ou account of the 36 to which it refers.2. Examples of Reflexives pointing both ways :Roman! legates miserunt qui a [Prusia] peterent ne ininucissimum suum(- BSmanorum) apud s5 (= Prusiam) haberet, NEP., xxin. 12, 2 ; the Romans sentambassadors to ask Prusias not to keep their bitterest enemy at his court.AgrippaAttioum flSns Srabat atque obsecrabat ut sS sib! sulsque reservaret, Cf. NEP.,xxv. 22, 2 ; Agrippa begged and conjured Atticus with tears to save himself [Atticus]for him [Agrippa] and for his own family [Atticns].Hopeless ambiguity :HerSs meus dare ill! damnas esto omnia sua, QUINT., TII. 9, 12 ; my heir is togive him all that is his. .3. For the sake of clearness, the subj. of the leading sentence is not unfrequentlyreferred to in the form of the Demonstrative instead of the Reflexive :i(Helvetii Allobrogibus sesS vel persuasuros exlstimabant vel vl coacturosut per suos finSs eos ire paterentur, CAES., B. G-., i. 6, 3 the Helvetians;thought thatthey would persuade or force the Allobroges to let them [the Helvetians] go throughtheir tenitory.4. Ipse is always used in its proper distinctive sense ; so, when it represents thespeaker in 0. 0. (660.) Eius and SuT.522. Alexander moriens anulum suum dederat Perdiccae, NEP., xvni.2, 1; Alexander,[vfhen] dying, had given his ring to Perdiccas.Perdiccas accgperat eius anulum, Perdiccas had received his ring.Quare Alexander declaraverat sS regnum el commendasse, thereby,Alexander had declared that he had committed the kingdom to him.Ex quo Perdiccas conieccrat eum rggnum sibi commendasse, from thisPerdiccas had gathered that he had committed the kingdom to him.Ex quo omnes coniecerant eum rggnum ei commendasse, from this, allhad gathered that he had committed the kingdom to him.Perdiccas postulavit ut se regem babgrent cum Alexander anulum sibidedisset, Perdiccas demanded that they should have him for king, asAlexander had given the ring to him.Amid pOstulaveruut ut omnes eum regem babgrent cum Alexander anu-
OBJECT SENTENCES, 327ium el dedisset, (his) friends demanded that all should have him forking, as Alexander had given the ring to him. (Lattmann and Miiller.)Ita se gesserat Perdiccas ut el regnum ab Alexandra comrnendaretur,Perdiccas had so behaved himself that the kingdom was intrusted tohim by Alexander.OBJECT SENTENCES.523. Verbs of Doing, Perceiving, Conceiving, of Thinkingand Saying, often take their object in the form of asentence.NOTES. 1. These sentences are regarded, grammatically, as neuter substantives.The Accusative of neuter substantives is employed as a Nominative. Hence, a passiveor intransitive verb may take an object sentence as a subject.2. To object sentences belong also Dependent Interrogative clauses, which havebeen treated elsewhere for convenience of reference. See 452, i, N., 460, 467.I. Object Sentences introduced by QUOD.524. Clauses which serve merely as periphrases (circumlocutions)or expansions of elements in the leading sentenceare introduced by quod, that.NOTES. 1. This usage seems to be in origin explanatory; that is, a demonstrativein the leading clause is explained by the quod clause. But as the relative can alwaysinclude the antecedent demonstrative, the prevailing usage is without an antecedent.In any case, however, the connection is essentially relative.2. The original relation of quod and its antecedent is adverbial. They are Accusativesof Extent, that = in that, and are to be classed under the Inner Object (332). Butafter transitive verbs quod and its antecedent are felt as Outer Objects, though wheneverthe notion of Cause intrudes (in. that = because), the original relation comes back,as in causal sentences proper.3. The antecedent demonstrative (whether omitted or inserted) would therefore beeither the direct object of the verb or it would be in adverbial or prepositional relation.We have then two uses of the explanatory clause ; (a) with verbs, with or without anantecedent demonstrative ; (b) as explanatory of an antecedent (expressed or implied)in adverbial relation to the verb or dependent upon a preposition.525. i. Quod (the fact that, the circumstance that, inthat) is used to introduce explanatory claiises, after verbs ofAdding and Dropping, and after verbs of Doing and Happeningwith an adverb.Adde hue quod perferri lltteraenulla condicione potuSrunt, POLLIO (C.,Fam., x. 31, 4); add to this the fact that letters could under no circumstancesbe got through. Adde quod ingenuas didicisse fideliter artSsemollit m5re"s nee sinit esse feros, Ov., Pont., n. 9, 47; add (the fact) thatto have acquired faithfully the accomplishments (education) of a gentleman,softens the character, and does not let it be savage.Praetereo quod
328 OBJECT SENTENCES.earn sib! domain delSgit, C., Cluent., 66,188 ;I pass over the fact thaihe chose that house for himself. Bene facis quod mS adiuvas. C., Fin.,in. 4, 16 ; you do well (in) that you help me. Accidit perincommode quodeum nusquam vidistl, C., Att.,i. 17, 2 ;ithappened very unfortunatelythat you saw him nowhere. Bene mihl gvenit quod mittor ad mortem, C.,Tusc., i.41, 97; it is fortunate for me that lam sent to death (execution).NOTES. 1. Of verbs of Adding adicere is introduced by LIVT, addere is citedonce each from Accius (209, E.) and TERENCE (Ph., 168), then more often from LUCRE-TIUS, HORACE, and OVID, but not from CICERO and VERGIL. AccBdere is the passiveof addere and occurs at all periods. Of verbs of Dropping, only praetereo, mitto,and omittO (C., Alt., viii. 3, 3) are cited (all classical).2. Esse is found mostly in the combinations quid (hoc) est quod, why is it that,this is why, which are confined to early Latin Scln :quid est quod ego ad 16 veniS 1PL., Men., 677 ; hoc est quod ad vos veniS, PL., St., 127. Est quod, nihil est quod,etc., occur here and there later, but the effect of the negative on the mood is noteworthy.Compare positive sed est quod suscSnset tibl (TER., And., 448) ;there is somethingthat makes him angry with you, with negative nihil est iam quod mini suscenseas(PL., Merc., 317) ;there is nothing to make you angry with me.3. To this group belongs the exclamatory interrogation Quid ? quod, or quidquod? what of this, that ?Quid quod simulac mihi collibitum est praesto est imago ? C., N.D., i. 38, 108;what is to be said of the fact that the image presents itself as soon as I see Jit ? (Nay,does not (lie image present itself?)4. The use of quod after verbs of Doing and Happening is found first in CICERO ;PLAUTUS uses qnia in this construction.5. With several of the above-mentioned verbs ut can be employed, as well as quod(ut, of the tendency quod, of the fact) :Ad Appl ClaudI senectutem accedebat ut etiam caecus esset, C., Cat.M., 6, 16(553, 4), or, quod caecus erat. Accedit quod patrem plus etiam quam ipse scitamo", C., Alt., xm. 21, 7 ; besides, I love the father even more than he himself knows.But when the action is prospective or conditional, ut must be used :Additur ad hanc deflnitionem a Zenone r ect 5 ut ilia oplnio praesentis mallsit rec6ns, C., Tusc., in. 31, 75.C. Quod with verbs of Motion as an adverbial Ace. is confined to early Latin and tovenio (PL., Men., 677) and mitt5 (PL., Ps., 639).7. The extension of quod to verba sentiendl et dicendl is very unusual. Oneexample in early Latin (PL., Asin., 52) is much disputed ; suspicious examples are C.,Fam., in. 8,6; CAES., B. C.,i. 23,8, but a certain example is in b.Hisp. (10, 2), renuntiaruntquod habSrent. The only case in Augustan poets is V., A., ix. 289 It ; isdoubtful in LIVT ; perhaps twice in TACITUS (Ann., m. 34 ;xiv. 6). In later Latin,from PETRONIUS on, it becomes frequent.2. Quod (in that, as to the fact that) is used to introduceexplanatory clauses after demonstratives (expressed or implied),independent of the leading verb. See 627, R. 2.Mihl quidem videntur homings hac r5 maxime bestils praestare, quodloqul possunt, C., Inr., i. 4; to me men seem to excel beasts most in this,that they have the power of speech. Praeterquam quod fieri non potuit, n6fingl quidem potest. C., Div., 11. 12, 28; besides the fact that this couldnot be done, it could not even be made up. Nil habet InfSlix paupertas
OBJECT SENTENCES. 329diirius in sS quam quod (= id quod) ridicules homings facit, Juv., in. 152 ;unhappy poverty hath in itself nothing harder (to bear) than that itmakes people ridiculous. Magnum beneficium [est] naturae quod necesseest mori, SEN. ,E.M. , 101, 14 (204). Quod spiro et placeo, si places, tuum est,H., 0., iv. 3, 24; that I do breathe and please, if that I please, is thine.NOTES. 1. In early usage^the antecedent is not common, but it is employed veryoften by CICERO, for the purposes of argument.2. Prepositional usages with the Abl. are ex e5, d6 e5, in e5, pr5 e5, Cum 63quod. Of these cum e5 quod, with the proviso that, is very rare, occurring but oncein CICERO (Att., vi. i, 7). The prepositional usages with the Ace. are ad id quod(only in LIVT) ;super id quod (only in TACITUS) praeter quod (FLOKUS and late;writers); prae quod (PLAUTUS only). Similar isexcepto quod (HoR., QUINT.). Aspraeter and super are comparative in force, we find praeter quam quod (early Latin,Cic., and later), super quam quod (only in LIVT). Similar to is praeter quod nisiquod (PLAUT., CICERO [not Orations], SALI,., LIVT, and later). Tantum quod = nisiquod, once in CICERO (Verr., i. 45, 116) and is rare; tantum quod, temporal, "just," iscolloquial, and found first in CICERO'S Letters, then not till the post-Augustan period.3.Quod, "as to the fact that," is combined also with, the Subjv. in early Latin:quod ille gallinam sS sectarl etc. dicat, (PL., If. #., 162). This is explained as beingthe Potential Subjv., inasmuch as all the examples cited involve supposed statements oractions of a second or third (often indefinite) person, which the speaker merely wishesto anticipate. The usage is occasional, also, later :C., Pis., 27, 66 ; Verr., v. 68, 175, andsporadically in FRONTO and GAIUS. Sometimes the idea of Partial Obliquity enters, asin C., Br., 18, 73, quod aequalis fuerit LIvius, minor fuit aliquanto Inv., ir. ; 29,89, (reading doubtful).In general the usage of quod, "as to the fact that,' 1 '1is familiar. CICERO uses it oftenin his Letters. But CAESAR is fond of it too. TACITUS has it but once (Dial., 25).3. The reigning mood is the Indicative. The Subjunctiveisonly used as in Oratid Obliqua.Cum Castam accusarem nihil magis press! quam quod accusator e"ius praevaricationiscrimine corruisset, PLIN., Ep., in. g, 34 ;when I accusedCasta there was no point that I laid more stress on than (what I stated)" that her accuser had gone to pieces under a charge of collusion."REMARK. Verbs of Emotion, such as Rejoicing, Sorrowing, etc.,take quod with the Indie, or Subjunctive. See Causal Sentences, 539.II.Object Sentences, with Accusative and Infinitive.526. Preliminary Observation. On the simple Infinitiveas an object, see 423.The Inf., as a verbal predicate, has its subject in the Accusative. (420.)527. Active verbs of Saying, Showing, Believing, andPerceiving (verba sentiendl et declarandl), and similar expressions,take the Accusative and Infinitive :Thales Milesius aquam dixit esse initium rSrum, C., N.D., i. 10, 25;
33OOBJECT SENTENCES.Thales of Miletus said that ivater was the first principle of things.[Solon] furere se simulavit, C., Off., i. 30, 108; Solon pretended to be mad.Medici causa morbi invents curationem esse inventam putant, C., Tusc.,in. 10, 23; physicians think that, (when) the cause of disease (is) discovered,/he method of treatment is discovered. Volucrgs vidgmus fingereet construere nidos, C., Or., n. 6, 23; we see that birds fashion and buildnests. Audiet Give's acuisse ferrum, H., 0., \. 2, 21; [the youth] shallhear that citizens gave edge to steel. Tlmagene's auctor est omniumin lltteris studiorum antiquissimam musicen extitisse, QUINT., i. 10, 10 ;Timagenes is the authority (for the statement) that of all intellectualpursuits music ivas the most ancient.The sentence very often passes over into the Ace. and Inf. (0. O.)without any formal notice.REMARKS. i. Verba sentiendl comprise two classes, those of (a)Actual and those of (b) Intellectual Perception. Some verbs, such assentlre, vidSre, cernere, audire, belongmost common are :to both classes. Otherwise the(a) C5nspicarl, conspicere, aspicere, suspicere, prSspicere, also rarelytuSri and somniare (early).Intellegere; cognoscere, comperlre, scire, nescire, and less commonly,(b)but Ciceronian, discere, ignorare, accipere, animadvertere, perspicere,etc.2. Verba declarandl can likewise be divided into two classes :(a)those of Actual and (b) those of Intellectual Representation ; but theclasses often fade into each other, or, rather, a verb of IntellectualRepresentation can be readily used as one of Actual Representation.In general, verbs of Intellectual Representation are those of Thinking,Remembering, Belief and Opinion, Expectation, Trust and Hope.Verbs of Actual Representation are those of Saying, Showing, Approving,Boasting, Pretending, Promising, Swearing, Threatening, Accusing(the last have more often quod). Verbs of Concluding belongalways to both classes. The principal of these verbs are : putare, diicere,arbitrarf, cSnsSre, suspicarl, credere, exlstimare, meminisse, confidere, sperare,dgsperare. Then dicere, Sdicere, affirmare, confinnare, Si5 (rare),loqul (rare), negare, fatSrl, narrare, tradere, scrlbere, nuntiare, ostendere,probare, gloriari, demonstrare, persuadere, significare, pollicerl. promittere,minarl, simulare, dissimulare, etc.; concludere, colligere, efficere. Alsoponere, to suppose (rare), faeere, to represent. Similar expressions arespes est, opinio est, fama est, auctor sum, testis sum, certiorem aliquemfaeere, etc.3. When the subj. of the Inf. is a personal or reflexive pronoun, thatsubj. may be omitted chiefly with Fut. Inf. and then esse also isdropped. This occurs rarely in CICEKO, more frequently in earlyLatin, CAESAR, and later.
OBJECT SENTENCES. 33!BefrSetur5s carcerem minabantur, L., vi. 17, G ; they threatened tobreak open the jail.4. The simple Inf. is often used in English, where the Latin takesAce. and Infinitive. This is especially true of verbs of Hoping andPromising.Sp6ro me hoc adepturum esse, / hope to (that I shall) obtainthis. Promitte'bat sS venturum esse, he promised to (that he would)come.5. When the Ace. with the Inf. is followed by a dependent Ace.,ambiguity may arise :Aio tS, Aeacida, Bomanos vincere posse (C., Div., n. 56, 116), in whicht6 may be subject or object.Real ambiguity is to be avoided by giving the sentence a passiveturn :Ai5 a t5, Aeacida, Bomanos vinci posse, I affirm thatbe conquered by thee, son of Aeacus.the Romans canAio te, Aeacida, a Bomanis vinci posse, / affirm that thou, son ofAeacus, canst be conquered by the Romans.When the context shows which is the real subj., formal ambiguityis of no importance. But see QUINT., vn. 9, 10.NOTES. 1. Verbs of Perception and Representation take the Part, to express theactual condition of the object of Perception or Representation (536). As there is no Pr.Part, pass., the Inf. must be used, and thus the difference between Intellectual and ActualPerception is effaced, sometimes even in the active, and, in fact, the use of the Part,is confined to authors who are consciously influenced by a rivalry with the Greek.Audio civSs acuentes ferrum, Cf. H., 0., i. 2, 21 ; I hear citizens sharpening) thesteel. Audid a civibus acul ferrum, I hear that the steel is sharpened by citizens ;or, the steel as it is sharpened by citizens. Octavium (dolore) conficl vldl, C., fin.,n. 28, 93 ; / have seen Octamus (when he was) wearing met with anguish. Vldlhistriones flentes Sgredl, QUINT., vi. 2, 35 ; I have seen actors leave the stage weeping.(Plat5) a Deo aedificarl mundum facit, C., N.D., i. 8, 19 ; Plato makes out thatthe universe is built by God. Polyphemum Homerus cum ariete conloquentemfacit, C., Two., v. 39, 115 (536). Fac, quaeso, qul ego sum esse tS, C., Fam., vn. 23,1 ; suppose, I pray, yourself to be me.2. The (Greek) attraction of the predicate of the Inf. into the Nom. after the Verbof Saying or Thinking, is poetical ;the first example is PL., Asin., 634.Phaselus ille, quern vicietis, hospites, ait fuisse navium celerrimus, CAT.,iv. i ; that pinnace yonder, which -lov cee, my stranger guests, declares she used to be(claims to have been) the fastest craft ajioat.There is one example in CICERO (Agr., n. 21, 57).3. The use of the Ace. and Inf. with verba dSclarandl is an outgrowth of the useafter verbs of Creation (423), just as in English "I declare him to be," is an extensionof " I make him to be," in which Ace. and Inf. have each its proper force. This is theorigin of the so-called OratiS Obliqua, or Indirect Discourse, which represents not theexact language used, but the general drift, and in which the tenses of the Inf. seem torepresent approximately the tenses of the Indicative. It was to complete the scheme ofthe Tenses that the Fut. Inf. was developed, and this is the sole use of that tense. Theuse of the Ace. and Inf. after verba sentiendi, like the use in English " I see him go,"is more primitive, but the original case of the Inf. is no longer felt.
332 NOMINATIVE AYITH INFINITIVE.Nominative with Infinitive.528. Passive verbs of Saying, Showing, Believing, andPerceiving :1. In the Simple tenses prefer the personal construction,in which the Accusative Subject ofthe Nominative Subject of the leading verb.the Infinitive appears as2. In the Compound tenses prefer the impersonal construction,which is the rule with Gerund and Gerundive.Thus, instead ofTradunt Homerum caecum fuisse, they say that Homer was Hind,we should have,or,Traditur HomSrus caecus fuisse, Homer is said to have been blind,[Traditum] est HomSrum caecum foisse, C., Tusc., v. 39, 114 ; there isa tradition that Homer was blind.[Aristaeus] inventor olel esse dicitur, C., Verr., iv. 57, 128 ;Aristaeusis said to be the inventor of oil. Terenti fabellae propter elegantiam sermonisputabantnr a Laelio scrlbl, C., Att., vii. 3, 10 ;Terence's plays, onaccount of the elegance of the language, were thought to be written byLaelius. [SI VSios migrabimus] amlsisse patriam vidsbimur, L.,v. 53,5 ; if we remove to Veji, we shall seem to have lost our country. Ecusdamnatum Irl videbatur, QUINT., ix. 2, 88 (435, N. 4). Creditor Pythagoraeauditorem fuisse Numam, L., XL. 29, 8 ; it is believed that Numawas a hearer of Pythagoras.But:[Venerem] Adonidi nupsisse proditum est, C., N.D., in. 23, 59 ; it is recordedthat Venus married Adonis. (Philonem) existimandum est disertumfuisse, C., Or., i. 14, 62 we must; suppose that Philo was eloquent.REMARKS. i. The impersonal construction is the rule if a Dat. iscombined with the verb : mih! nuntiabatur Parthos transisse Euphratem,C., Fain., xv. i, 2 ;it was announced to me that the Parthians hadcrossed the Euphrates.2. Various peculiarities are noteworthy in the matter of these verbs.Thus, dicitur usually means it is maintained, dictum est, it is said.CrSditur, etc. (impersonal), is the regular form in classical prose ;thepersonal construction is poetical and late. Vidfirl is used, as a rule,personally the impersonal construction vidstur is rare. The active;forms traduut, crSdunt, etc., are everywhere common.
TENSES OF THE INFINITIVE. 333NOTES. 1. In early Latin the personal construction is found with argul, cluei'e (avirtual passive), did, existimari, inveniri, iuberl, nuntiarl, perhiberi, reperlrl.All these, except cluere, are retained in the classical period. CICERO and CAESARadd twenty-five new verbs, and from this time on the construction increases.2. Virtual passives, on the analogy of cluSre, are rare ;apparere, constare, venirein suspicionem, are Ciceronian so also ;opusest in [C.], Fam., xi. u, 2, and perhapsTER., Anil., 337.3. A second clause following a Nom. with the Inf. takes Its Bubj. in the AccusativeC., Or., n. 74, 299.4. In verbs of Saying, except dtc5 (compare TAC., Ann., iv. 34, &), the personal constructionfs confined to the third person. The poets are free in treating verbs under thishead.Tenses of the Infinitive with Verba SentiendT et DeclarandT.529. The Infinitive denotes only the stage of the action,and determines only the relation to the time of the leadingverb (281).530. After verbs of Saying, Showing, Believing,and Perceiving,and the like,The Present Infinitive expresses contemporaneous action ;The Perfect Infinitive expresses prior action ;The Future Infinitive expresses future action.REMARK. The action which iscompleted with regard to the leadingverb may be in itself a continued action. So in :English / have beenstudying, I had been studying. Hence, the .Impf Indie. (/ was studying)is represented in this dependent form by the Pf. Inf., because it isprior to the leading verb.B^" In this table the Present is taken as the type of the Principal,the Imperfect as the type of the Historical, Tenses.531. Contemporaneous Action.ACTIVE.PASSIVE.P. T. DIcit : t5 errare, te dScipI,He says, that you are going wrong, that you are (being) deceived (217, R.).H. T. DIc6bat : tS errare,. tS dScipi,He was saying, that you were- going that you were (being) deceived,wrong,Prior Action.P. T. DIcit : te errasse, te deceptum esse,He says, that you have gone wrong, that you have been (are) deceived,that you went wrong,that you were deceived (AoR.),that you have been going (that people have been deceiving you/,wrong,
334 TENSES OF THE INFINITIVE.B. T. Dlceoat : te errasse, te deceptum esse,lie was saying, (fiat you had gone that you had been deceived,wrong,that you went wrong,that you were deceived (AoR.),that you had been (that people had been deceiving you),going wrong,Subsequent Action.P. T. Dicit: te erraturuni esse, te deceptum iri,He says, that you (are about to go that you (are going to) will be dewrong),will (be) go(ing) wrong,ceived.II . T.DlcSbat : te erraturum esse, te deceptum iri,He was saying, that you were about that you were going to (would) be\.to (would) go wrong,deceived.Periphrastic Future.The following form (the Periphrastic Future) is necessary when the verb has noSup. or Fut. participle. It is often formed from other verbs to intimate an interval,which cannot be expressed by other forms, and is more common in the passive thanthe Fut. Inf. pass, of the paradigms.
ACCUSATIVE AND INFINITIVE. 335Accusative and Infinitive with Verbs of Will and Desire.532. Verbs of Will and Desire take a Dependent Accusativeand Infinitive.The relation is that of an Object to be Effected.SI vis mS flgre, dolendum est primum ipsi tibi, H., A. P., 102; if youwish me to weep, you must first feel the pang yourself. Utrum [Milonis]corporis an Pythagorae tib! malls vires ingenii darl ? C., Cat. M., 10, 33;which (whether) would you rather have given to you, Milo's strength ofbody or Pythagoras' strength of mind ? Ipse iubet mortis t meminissedeus, MART., u. 59 (376). Vltae summa brevis spem nos vetat inchoarelongam, H.,0.,i. 4, 15 (423, N. 6). N5mo ire quemquam publics probibetvia, PL.. Cure., 35 (389). Germain vinum ad sS oninlno importarlnon sinunt, CAES., B. &., iv. 2, 6; the Germans do not permit wineto be imported into their country at all.REMARKS. i. A list of these verbs is given in 423, N. 2.2. When the subj. of the Inf. is the same as the subj. of the leadingverb, the subj. of the Inf. is usually not expressed :Nl pargre velis, pereundum erit ante lucernas, Juv., x. 339 ;unless youresolve to obey, you will have to perish before candle-light. Et iam malletequos numquam tetigisse paternos, Ov., M., n. 182; and now he couldhave wished rather never to have touched his father's horses.But the subj. may be expressed, and commonly is expressed, whenthe action of the Inf. is not within the power of the subject ; so especiallywith an Inf. .passive:(Timoleon) maluit s6 diligi quain metui, NEP., xx. 3, 4;Timoleon preferredthat he should be loved rather than that he should be feared.Ego rus abituram m6 certo dScrSvl, TER., Hec., 586. Principem s5 essemavult quam viderl, C., Off., i. 19, 65.NOTES. 1. On the construction of this class of verbs with ut (nS, quominus), see546. Impero, I command, in model prose takes only the Inf. passive or deponent; inSALLUST, HIRTIUS, CURTIUS, TACITUS, and the Poets sometimes the active.(Hannibal) imperavit quam plurinias venenatas serpentes vivas colligl,NEP., 23, 10 ;Hannibal ordered as many poisonous serpents as possible to be caughtalive.Permitto seldom takes the Inf. (e.g., C., Verr., v. 9, 22); the Ace. with Inf. begins inTACITUS ; concede takes Inf. pass, only, in classical prose. Iube5, Ibid ; sino, I let ;veto, I forbid ; prohibeo, / prohibit, always have the Inf. of passive verbs. Withsino and vet5 the model construction is Inf. only. Sin5 takes ut occasionally hiearly and late Latin, vet5 does not have ne till in the post-Ciceronian period. InbSretakes ut when it is applied to decrees of the Senate, and from LIVY on when used of theorders of generals ;prohibre takes n6 and quominus. These verbs may themselvesbe turned into the passive iubeor, sinor, vetor, prohibeor.:2. After iube5, Ibid, and veto, I forbid, the Inf. act. can be used without a subj.(even an imaginary or indefinite one) :Iubet reddere, he bids return (orders the returning).
336 ACCUSATIVE AND INFINITIVE.Vetat adhibSre medicinam, 0., Alt., xvi. 15, 5 ;he forbids the administration ofmediant. Infandum, rSglna, iubes renovare dolorem, V., A., n. 3 ; unspeakable,queen, the anguish u'hich you bid (me, us) revive.3. After volo, nolo, malo in early Latin, ut and the Snbjv. is proportionallymore common than in the classical time. But with the Potential forms, velim, malim,vellem, mallem, CICERO uses only the Subjv. (without ut). When volo meansmaintain, it takes the Inf. only see; 546, K. i.4. It is noteworthy that in classical Prose cupere never takes ut, while optarenever takes the Infinitive.5. On the use of the Pf . Inf. instead of the Pr. after these verbs, see 537, N. i.6. The Poets go much further in using verbs and phrases as expressions of Will andDesire. See 423, N. 4.Accusative and Infinitive with Verbs of Emotion.533. Verbs of Emotion take a dependent Accusative andInfinitive, inasmuch as these verbs may be considered asverbs of Saying and Thinking. (542.)Salvoin tS advSnisse gaudeo, TEH,., Ph., 286 ;I rejoice that you shouldhave arrived safe (to think that you have arrived safe, at your arrivingsafe). Quod salvos advgnistl, that you have arrived safe. Quod salvosadvenerls, that (as you say) you have arrived safe.Inferiores non dolere [debent] s6 a suls dlguitate superari, C., Lad., 20,71 ; inferiors ought not to consider it a grievance that they are surpassedin rank by their own (friends).REMARKS. i. This construction, outside of a few verbs, is not common,though found in a wide range of authors. Gaudere, laetarl, dolgre,in addition CICERO uses,querl (beginning in Cic.), mlrari, are common ;rarely, however, more than once each, maerere, lugere, coufici, discruciarl,angi, sollicitari, indignari, fremere, demirarl, admlrarl, subesse timorem.Early Latin shows ridSre (NAEV.), gestire, mihl dolet (TER.), maestus sum(PLAUT.), cruciari (PLAUT.), lamentarl (PLAUT., HOR.), susplrare (LucR.),incendor ira (TER.), ferSx est (PLAUT.), invidSre (PLAUT., HOR.), formldare,vereri, in addition to the common gaudgre, etc., already cited.2. On the Participle after a verb of Emotion, 536, N. 2.Accusative and Infinitive in Exclamations.534. The Accusative with the Infinitive is used in Exclamationsand Exclamatory Questions asthe object of an unexpressedthought or feeling.Hem, mea lux, t5 nunc, mea Terentia, sic vexarl, C., Fam., xiv. 2, 2;h'm, light of my life, for you to be so harassed now, Terentia dear.Hominemne Bomanum tarn GraecS loqul T PLIN., Ep., TV. 3, 5 ;a Romanspeak such good Greek ? (To think that a Roman should speak such
ACCUSATIVE AND INFINITIVE. 337good Greek.) M5ne incepto dSsistere ? V., A., i. 37; I desist from myundertaking 9 Hinc abire matrem? TER., Hec., 612 ;mother go awayfrom here ?REMARKS. i. Different is quod, which gives the ground.Ei mihi quod nullis amor est sanabilis herbls, Ov., M., i. 523; woe's methat (in that, because) love is not to be cured by any herbs.2. On ut, with the Subjv. in a similar sense, see 558. Both formsoffer an objection.Accusative and Infinitive as a Subject.535. The Accusative with the Infinitive may be treated asThe Predicate is a substantive orthe Subject of a sentence.neuter adjective, an impersonal verb or abstract phrase.In the English " for to," the "for " belongs not to the case but to the Infinitive, butthe object relation has been effaced here as it has been in Latin. See 422, N. 1.Est inusitatum rggem reum capitis esse, C., Dei., i. i ;it is an extraordinarything that a king should (for a king to) be tried for his life.Facinus est vincire civem Roinanum, C., Verr., v. 66, 170; it is an outrageto put a Roman citizen in chains. Necesse est facere sumptum qul quaerit(= eum qul quaerit) lucrum, PL., As., 218; need is that he make outlaywho an income seeks. Legem brevem esse oportet, qu5 facilius ab imperltlsteneatur, SEN., E.M., 94, 38; it is proper that a law should be briej(a law ought to be brief), that it may the more easily be grasped by theuneducated. Quid Milords intererat interficl Clodium, C., Mil., 13, 34(382, 2). Opus est tS animo valSre, C., Fam., xvi. 14, 2 (406, N. 5).REMARKS. i. A list of expressions taking the Inf. as a subj. isgivenin 422, NN.2. Oportet, it is proper, and necesse est, must needs, are often usedwith the Subjunctive. So also many other phrases with ut. (See 557.)Necesse also takes the Dat. of the Person :Ut culpent alii, tibi m5 laudare necesse est, Ov., Her., 12, 131 ;let othersblame, but you must give me praise.3. When the indirect obj. of the leading verb is the same as thesubj. of the Inf. the predicate of the subj. is put in the same case as theindirect object: in standard prose chiefly with licet, it is left (free) ;in poetry and later prose with necesse, with satius est, it is better, contingit,it happens, vacat, there is room.Licuit esse otioso Themistocli, C., Tusc., i. 15, 33 Themistocles was;free to live a life of leisure.The Ace. is occasionally found ; always if the Dat. is not expressed.Medios esse iam n5n licebit (nos), C., Alt., x. 8, 4; it will no longer beallowable to be neutral.
338 CAUSAL SENTENCES.Object Sentences Represented by the Participle.536. The Participle is used after verbs of Perception andRepresentation, to express the actual condition of the objectof perception or representation.Catonem vldl in bibliotheca sedenteni multis circumfusum Stoicorumlibrls, C., Fin., in. 2, 7 ;I saw Cato sitting in the library with an oceanof Stoic books about him. Prodiga non sentit pereuntem femina censum,Juv., vi. 362 ;the lavish woman does not perceive (how) the income (is)dwindling. Saepe illam audlvl furtlva voce loquentem, CAT., LXVII. 41 ;I have often heard her talking in a stealthy (in an under-) tone. Gaudsquod spectant ocull t6 mille loquentem, II., Ep., i. 6, 19 (542). PolyphSmumHomerus cum ariete conloquentem facit, C., Tusc., v. 39, 115 ;Homerrepresents Polyphemus (as) talking with the ram.NOTES. 1. This constraction is found but once in early Latin (Piso), then in CICERO,S*T.T.TTST, NEPOS, VITBUVIUS, LIVT, HORACE. The naturalisation of it is due to CICERO,and other students of Greek models. The poverty of Latin in participles was a seriousdrawback to the convenient distinction from the Infinitive ; and it may be said that theparticiple was never perfectly at home.2. On the Inf., see 527, N. 1. The Greek construction of Part, agreeing with theleading Nom. after verbs of Perception and Emotion, is rare and poetical:Gaudent scrfbentSs, H.,.Ep.,ii. 2, 107; they have joy while writing. SSnsitmedios delapsus in hostgs, V., A., n. 377 ;he perceived (it) havingfallen (that he hadfallen} 'midst the enemy. Gaudent perfusl sanguine fratrum, V., G., n. 510 ; theyrejoice, bedrenched with brothers* blood.537. The Perfect Participle Passive is used after verbs ofCausation and Desire, to denote impatience of anything exceptentire fulfilment :Si qul voluptatibus ducuntur missSs faciant honorgs, C., Sest., 66, 138 ;if any are led captive by sensual pleasures let them dismiss honours (at,once and forever). Hulc mandes si quid rScte" curatum veils, TER., Ad.,372 ; you must intrust to him whatever you want properly attended to.NOTES. 1. After verbs of Will and Desire, the Inf. esse is occasionally found withthis Part., and hence it may be considered a Pf. Infinitive (280, 2, c). Compare, however,Pf. Part. pass, with opus est, usus est (406).2. The verbs of Causation thus employed are curSre, dare, facere, reddere. Theusage is most common in early Latin.In the classical period oiily missum facere.CAUSAL SENTENCES.538. Causal sentences are introduced :1.By quia, because, quod, (in that) because. \2. By quoniam (quom iam), now that, quandfl, quandd- > ;quidem, since. } Pr P er '>
CAUSAL SENTENCES. 3393. By cum (quom), as. (Inference.)4. By the Relative Pronoun, partly alone, partly with ut, utpote,qnlppe, etc. (See 626, 634.)NOTES. 1. Quodis the Ace. Sing, neuter, and quiais probably the Ace. PI. neuterfrom the relative stem. They have accordingly often a correlative demonstrative ;sowith quod : eo, ea re", ideo, iclcirco, ea gratia (in SALLUST only), hoc, hac mente(H., S., ii. 2, 90), propterea, and a few combinations with ob and propter with ; quiaare found eo, ea re", ide5, idcirco, propterea, and ergo (in PLAUTUS only).2. Quod and quia differ in classical prose, chiefly in that quod is used, and notquia, when the causal sentence is at the same time an object sentence.3. Quoniam is originally temporal, and as such is still found in PLAUTUS. Thecausal use of it becomes much more extensive in classical prose, and, likequandOit is(quandoquidem), used of evident reasons.4. Quando is used principally as a temporal particle. In a causal sense it is veryrare in CICERO (in the Orations never, unless compounded with quidem), and is notfound in CAESAK. The compound with isquidem more common.5.Quatenus, in so far as, is poetical and in late prose. HORACE shows first example,0., in. 24, 30. VALERIUS M., Q.UINTILIAN, TACITUS, PLINY MINOR, and SUE-TONIUS show occasional examples.Causal Sentences with QUOD, QUIA, QUONIAM, and QUANDO.539. Causal sentences with quod, quia, quoniam, andquando are put in the Indicative, except in oblique relation(Partial or Total).REMARK. The other person of the oblique clause may be imaginary,and the writer or speaker may quote from himself indirectly :Laetatus sum, quod mihi lice"ret recta defendere, C., Fam., i. 9, 18 ;1was glad (to say to myself) that I was free to champion the right.540. Causal sentences with quod, quia, quoniam, andquando take the Indicative in Direct Discourse.Torquatus filium suura quod is contra imperium in hostem pugnaveratnecarl iiissit, S., C., 52, 30 ; Torquatus bade his son be put to deathbecause he = had fought against the enemy contrary to order(s) [quodpugnasset because, as Torquatus said or thought]. Amantes d6 formaiudicare non possunt, quia sensum oculdrum praecipit animus, QUINT., vi.2, 6 ;lovers cannot Judge of beauty, because the heart forestalls the eye.Quia natura mutarl non potest idcirco vSrae amlcitiae sempiternae snnt,C., Lael., 9, 32; because nature cannot change, therefore true friendshipsare everlasting. Neque me" vixisse paenitet quoniam ita vlxl ut nonfrustra me" natum exlstumem, C., Cat.M., 23, 84 ;and I am not sorrylived that I think I was born not infor having lived, since I have sovain. Solus ero quoniam n5n licet esse tuum, PROP., n. 9, 46 ;I shall bealone since I may not be thine. Voluptas sSmovenda est quandS ad mai5raquaedam nati sumus, Cf, C., Fin., v, 8, 21; pleasure is to be put aside
34OCAUSAL SENTENCES.because we are born for greater things.Erant quibus appetentior famae[Helvidius] vidgrStur quando etiam sapientibus cupidS gloriae novissimaexuitur, TAC., H., iv. 6, 1 ;there were some to whom Helvidius seemedtoo eager for fame, since, even from the wise, ambition is the last(infirmity) that is put off. Sequitur ut liberatorgs (sint), quandoquidemtertium nihil potest esse, C., Ph., n. 13, 31.541. Causal sentences with quod, quia, quoniam, andquando take the Subjunctive in Oblique Discourse (Partialor Total).Noctu ambulabat in publics Themistocles quod somnum capere non posset,C., Tusc., IT. 1 9, 44 ; Themistocles used to walk about in publicat night because (as he said) he could not get to sleep. Aristldes nonneob earn causam expulsus est patria quod praeter modum iustus esset ?C., Tusc., v. 36, 105 ; (there is) Aristides ; was he not banished his countryfor the (alleged) reason " that he was unreasonably just" ? [NS]compone comas quia sis venturus ad illam, Ov., Hem.Am., 679 (517).Quoniam (so most MSS.) ipse pr5 sS dlcere non posset, verba fScit fraterelus St6sagoras, NEP., i. 7, 5; "as [Miltiades] could not speak for himself,"his brother, Stesagoras, made a speech. (Indirect quotation fromthe speech of Stesagoras.)A good example is PL., M.G., 1412-15.NOTES. 1.Quia is the usual particle in the caueal sense in PLAUTUS, quod beingvery rare ; but quod is more common in TERENCE, and is the regular particle in classicalprose (CAESAR has but one case of quia), though the use of quia revives in postclassicalLatin. CICERO makes a point on the difference in meaning in Rose.Am., 50,145 : coneSdo et quod (by reason of the fact that) animus aequus est, et quia(because) necesse est.2. A rejected reason is introduced by non quod with the Snbjv. (as being the suggestionof another person). The Indie., which is properly used of excluded facts, isalso used of flat denials, like the negative and Indie, in the independent sentence, butthe Subjv. is the rule. N5n quia is the rule in early Latin, but classical prose showsvery few examples. From LIVY on it becomes common. Other equivalents are n5nqu5, n5n e5 quod, n5n eS qu5 further, n5n; quin for n5n qu5 n5n. All of these arefound with Subjv. only. The corresponding affirmative is given by sed quod or sedquia indiscriminately, regularly with the Indicative.Subjunctive :Pugiles in iactandis caestibus ingemiscunt, non quod doleant, sed quiaprofundenda voce omne corpus intenditur venitque plaga vebementior, C.,Tusc., ii. 23, 56; boxers In plying the caestus heave groans, not that (as you might suppose)they are in pain, but because in givingfull vent to the voice all the body is put tothe stretch and the blow comes with a greater rush. Maiorgs nostrl in dominion d6servS quaerl n51u6runt ;non quin posset v6rum inveniri, sed quia videbaturindignum esse, C., Mil., 22, 59 ; our ancestors would not allow a slave to be questionedby toi'ture against his master, not because (not as though they thought) the truth couldnot be got at, but because such a course seemed degrading. A [Lacedaemoniorumexulibus] praetor vim arcuerat, n5n quia salvSs vellet sed quia perire causaindicta nolebat, L., xxxvui. 33, 11 ;the praetor had warded off violence from the
CAUSAL SENTENCES. 34!Lacedaemonian exiles, not (as you might have supposed) because he wished them toescape, but because he did not wish them to perish with their case not pleaded (unheard).The same principle applies to magis quod (qu5), quia quam qu5 (first in CICERO),quod (first in SALLUST), quia (first in LIVY), with the moods in inverse order.Libertatis originem inde, magis quia annuum imperium consularc factumest quam quod deminutum quidquam sit ex regia potestate, numerSs, L., n.i, 7 ; you may begin to count the origin of liberty from that point, rather because theconsular government was limited to a year, than because aught was taken away fromthe royal power.Indicative :Sum non dlcam miser, sed certe exercitus, non quia multis debeo sed quiasaepe concurrunt aliquorum bene de m6 merit5rum inter ipsos contentionSs,C., Plane., 32, 78 ; lam, / will not say, wretched, but certainly worried, not because Iam in debt to many, but because the rival claims of some ivho have deserved well of meoften conflict. Compare also H., S., n. 2, 89.3. Verbs of Saying and Thinking are occasionally put in the Subjv. with quod bya kind of attraction. Compare 585, N. 3.Impetrare non potui, quod religione sS impedirl dicerent, C., Fam., iv. 12, 3 ;I could not obtain permission, because they said they were embarrassed (prevented) bya religious scruple (= quod impedirentur, because (as they said) they were prevented).This attraction is said to occur not unf requently in CICERO, several times in CAESABand SALLUST, but is not cited from any other author. Compare, however, crSderent,L., xxi. i, 3.4. On the use of tamquam, etc., to indicate an assumed reason, see 602, N. 4.5. isQuandoque archaic and rare. It is found first in the Twelve Tables, a fewtimes in CICERO and LIVY, three times in HORACE, and occasionally later.6. Causal sentences may be represented by a participle (669), or by the relative (636).QUOD with Verbs of Emotion.542. Quod is used to give the ground of Emotions and Expressionsof Emotion, such as verbs of Joy, Sorrow, Surprise,Satisfaction and Anger, Praise and Blame, Thanksand Complaint.The rule for the Mood has been given already: 539.Indicative :Gauds quod spectant ocull t5 mflle loquentem, H., Ep., i. 6, 19 ; rejoicethat a thousand eyes are gazing at you (while you are) speaking. Doletmihl quod tu nunc stomacharis, C., ad Br., i. 17, 6 ;it pains me that youare angry now. Qulntum paenitet quod animum tuum offendit, Cf. C. ,Alt. ,XP. 13, 2(377, R. 3). luvat mg quod vigent studia, PLIN., Ep., i. 13, 1 /;am charmed that studies are flourishing. Tristis es ? indignor quod sumtibi causa doloris, Ov., Tr., iv. 3, 33; are you sad ? Iam provoked (withmyself) that I am a cause of pain to you. Tibi gratias ago, quod mSomnI molestiS liberastl, C., Fam., xm. 62; / thank you, that you freedme from all annoyance.Subjunctive :Gaudet miles quod vicerit hostem, Ov., Tr., n. 49 ;the soldier rejoices
342 SENTENCES OF DESIGN AND TENDENCY.at having conquered the enemy.Neque mini umquam veniet in mentempoenitere quod a me ipse non desclverim, C., Att., n. 4, 2 ;it ivill neveroccur to me to be sorry for not having been untrue to myself. LaudatAfricanum Panaetius quod fuerit abstinSns, C., Off., n. 22, 76 ; Panaetiu*praises Africanus for having been abstinent. NgrnS est Sratorem quodLatlnS loqueretur admiratus, C., Or., in. 14, 52; no one (ever) admired an,orator for speaking (good) Latin.Socrates accusatus est quod corrumperetiuventutem, QUINT., iv. 4, 5 ; Socrates was accused of corruptingyouth. Meminl gloriarl solitum esse Qulntum HortSnsium quod numquambello civil! interfuisset, C., Fam., n. 16, 3; I remember that Quintus Hortensiusused to boast of never having engaged in civil war. Aguntgratiasquod sib! pepercissent, CAES., B.C., i. 74, 2 (511, E. i).REMARK. This class of verbs may be construed with the Ace. andInf. : salvom te advenisse gaudeo (533) ;also with quia, principally inearly Latin, and in CICERO'S Letters, then occasionally in LIVY, TACI-TUS, SUETONIUS, and later. But in Expressions of Praise and Blame,Thanks and Complaint, quod is more common. On cum, see 564, N. 2.Am5 te et n5n neglexisse habeo gratiam, TER., Ph., 54; Hove you(= much obliged), and I am thankful to you for not having neglected,(it). Gratulor ingeidum nBn latuisse tuum, Ov., Tr., i. 9, 54; I congratulate(you) that your genius has not lain hidden. [Tsocrates] queritur plushonoris corporum quam animorum virtutibus darl, QUINT., ni. 8, 9 ;Isocratescomplains that more honour is paid to the virtues of the body thanto those of the mind.NOTES. 1. Perplexing Emotion (Wonder) may be followed by a Conditional, or bya Dependent Interrogative, as in English, but this construction is not found in VERGIL,CAESAB, SALLUST, and is never common.Mlror si [Tarquinius] quemquam amlcum habere potuit, C., Lad., 15, 54 ;1wonder if Tarquin could ever have had a friend.Besides mlror (and mlrum), there is one case of gaudeo si in CICEKO ( Yen:, TV. 17,37), and a few cases after expressions of Fear in TACITUS. There are also sporadic casesof indlgnarl (indlgnitas) si.2. Noteworthy is the phrase mlrum (-a) Hi (nisi),'tis a wonder that not, whichbelongs to the colloquialisms of early Latin (Pi,., Capt., 820), but reappears once in Lrvrr.SENTENCES OF DESIGN AND TENDENCY.543. i. Sentences of Design are commonlySentences. Sentences of Tendency are commonly calledcalled FinalConsecutive Sentences. Both contemplate the end the one,as an aim ;the other, as a consequence.2.They are alike in having the Subjunctive and the particleut (how, that}, a relative conjunction.
FINAL SENTENCES. 3433. They differ in the Tenses employed. The Final Sentence,as a rule, takes only the Present and Imperfect Subjunctive.Consecutive Sentences may take also Perfect andPluperfect.4. They differ in the kind of Subjunctive employed. TheFinal Sentence takes the Optative. The Consecutive Sentencetakes the Potential. Hence the difference in theNegative.Final : n8 (ut n6), -Consecutive : ut n5n, that not.n6 quis,ut nemo, that no one.nS ullus, ut nullus, ////// no.n8 umquam, (ne quand5,) ut numquam, that never,ne usquam, (ngcubi,)ut niisquam, that nowhere.n aut aut, (ut n8ve neve,) ut neque neque, that neither nor.REMARKS. i. Verbs of Effecting have the Final Sequence.2. Verbs of Hindering have the sequence of the Final Sentence, butoften the signification of the Consecutive.3. Verbs of Fearing belong to the Final Sentence only so far as theyhave the Optative Subjunctive ;the subordinate clause is only semidependentupon the principal, and we have a partial survival of originalparataxis.NOTES. 1. Inasmuch as the Subjv. cannot express a fact, the Latin Consecutiveclause does not properly express actual result, but only a tendency, which may, weinfer, lead to a result. To obviate this difficulty, the Latin has recourse to the circumlocutionswith accidit, 6venit, etc.2. It is to be remarked that the difference between Final and Consecutive often consistsonly in the point of view. What is final from the point of view of the doer isconsecutive from the point of view of the spectator ;hence the variation in sequenceafter verbs of Effecting. A frustrated purpose gives a negative result ;hence the variationin negative after verbs of Hindering.3. Here and there hi CICERO, more often hi LIVT and later writers, instead of nva(neu), a second clause is added by neque, the force of the final particle being feltthroughout the sentence.Monitor tuus suadebit tibi ut nine discedas neque mini verbuin ullumrespondeas, C., Din. in Caec., 16, 52 ; your adviser wiM caunselyou to depart hence andanswer me never a word.FINAL SENTENCES.544. Final Sentences are divided into two classes :I. Final Sentences in which the Design is expressed bythe particle ;Pure Final Sentences (Sentences of Design).Oportet Ssse, ut vivas, n6n vivere ut edas, [C.], ad Her., iv. 28, 39;must eat in order to live, not live in order to eat.you
344 FINAL SENTENCES.This form may be translated by. (in order) to ; sometimes by thatmay, that might, that, with the Subjunctive and the like.II. Final Sentences in which the Design lies in the leadingverb (verba studii et voluntatis, verbs of Will and Desire);Complementary Final Sentences.Volo uti mill! respondeas, C., Vat., 7, 17; I wish you to answer me.This form is often rendered by to, never by in order to, sometimesby that and the Subjunctive, or some equivalent.Of the same nature, but partly Final and partly Consecutivein their sequence, are :Verbs of Hindering.Peculiar in their sequence are :III.Verbs of Fearing.REMARKS. i. The use of the Subjv. with Temporal Particles oftenadds a final sense, inasmuch as the Subjv. regularly looks forward tothe future. So dum, donee, quoad (572), antequam, priuaquam (577).2. The general sense of a Final Sentence may also be expressed:(1) By the Relative qul with the Subjunctive. (630.)(2) By the Genitive of Gerund or Gerundive, with (seldom without)causa or gratia. (428, R. 2.)(3) By ad with Gerund and Gerundive. (432.)(4) By the Dative of the Gerund and Gerundive. (429, 2.)(5) By the Accusative of the Gerund and Gerundive after verbs ofGiving, We. (430.)(6) By the Accusative Supine after verbs of Motion. (435.)(7) By the Future Participle Active (post-Ciceronian). (438, N.)(8) By the Infinitive (poetic and rare). (421, N. 1, a.)I. Pure Final Sentences.545. Pure Final Sentences are introduced by :1. TJt (uti) (how) that, and other relative pronouns andadverbs. (630.)Ut and nfi are often preceded by a demonstrative expression, suchas: idcirco, therefore; e5, to that end ; propterea, on that account; e5consilio, with that design ; ea causa, re, for that reason.2. Quo = nt eo, that thereby; with comparatives, thatthe . . .;
FINAL SENTENCES. 3453. N6, that not, lest, continued by neve, neu. (444.)Oportet 6sse, ut vivas, n5n vlvere ut edas, [C.], ad Her., iv. 28, 39 (544,I.). Inventa sunt specula, ut homS ipse se" n5sset, SEN., N.Q., 1. 17, 4;mirrors were invented, to make man acquainted with himself. Utame"ris, amabilis esto, Ov., A. A., n. 107; that you may be loved (to makeyourself loved, in order to be loved), be lovable. LSgem brevem esseoportet, quo facilius ab imperitis teneatur, SEN., E. M., 94, 38 (535).[Senex]serit arborSs, quae alter! saeclo prosint, CAECILIUS (C., Tusc.,i. 14, 31);the old man sets out trees, to do good to the next generation. Semper habSPyladen aliquem qui curet Orestem, Ov. ,Rem. Am. , 589 ; always have somePylades, to tend Orestes. [Ath5ni6ns6s] creant decem praetSrSs qui exercituipraeessent, NEP., i. 4, 4 ;the Athenians make ten generals to commandtheir army. [Magnesiam Themistocli Artaxerxgs] urbem dSnarat,quae el panem praebgret, NEP., u. 10, 3; Artaxerxes had given Themistoclesthe city of Magnesia, to furnish him with bread.Gallinae pennisfovent pullos, nS frigore laeclantur, Cf. C., N.D.,u. 52, 129; hens keep(their) chickens warm with (their) wings, that they may not be (to keepthem from being) hurt by the cold. Dionysius, n6 collum tOnsorl committeret,tondere fllias suas docuit, d., Tusc., v. 20, 58 (423, N. 6).REMARKS. i. Ut nS is found for nS with apparently no difference insignification, occasionally at all periods, but not in CAESAR, SALLUST,LIVY. Quo without comparativeis rare and cited only from PLAUTUS,TERENCE, SALLUST, OVID, and late Latin ; qu5nS (= ut n6) is not foundtill the time of DICTYS ; apparent examples in classical Latin are to beotherwise explained. Quominus and quin occur in special uses.2. Ut n5n is used when a particular word is negatived :Confer te ad Mallium, ut non eiectus ad alienos sed invltatus ad tuosIsse videaris, C., Cat., i. 9, 23 ;betake yourself to Mallius, that you mayseem to have gone not as an outcast to strangers but as an invited guestto your own (friends).3. Ut and n6 are used parenthetically at all periods, depending ona suppressed word of Saying or the like.Utque magis stupeas liidos Paridemque reliquit, Juv., vi. 87 and to;stun you more (I tell you that) she left Paris and the games.The verb of Saying may be inserted :atque ut omnSs intellegant dlco,C., Imp., 8, 20 ;and that all may understand, I say.II.Complementary Final Sentences.A. Verbs of Will and Desire.546. Complementary Final Sentences follow verbs ofWilling and Wishing, of Warning and Beseeching, of Urg-
346 FINAL SENTENCES.ing and Demanding, of Resolving and Endeavouring (verbastudil et voluutatis).1. Positive : ut.Volo uti mihl respondeas, C., Vat.. 7. 17 (544, II.). (Pb.a6tb.6n) optavitut in currum patris tollergtur, C., Off.,m. 25, 94; Phaethon desired tobe lifted up into his father'schariot. Admoneo ut cottidiS meditereresistendum esse iracundiae, C., Q.F., 1. 1. 13, 38 ;I admonish you to reflectdaily that resistance must be made to hot-headedness. TJbii(Caesarem)Brant, ut sib! parcat, CAES., B. dr., vi. 9, 7 ;the Ubii beg Ccesar to sparethem. Sed precor ut possim tutius esse miser, Ov., Tr., \. 2, 78 (423, 2).Exigis ut Priamus natorum funere ludat, Ov., Tr., v. 12, 7; you exact thatPriam sport at (his) sons' funeral. AthSniensSs cum statuerent ut nav8sconscenderent, Cyrsilum quendam suadentem ut in urbe manerent lapidibusobmerunt, C., Off.,iu. n,48; the Athenians, resolving to go on boardtheir ships, overwhelmed with stones ( stoned) one Cyrsilus, who triedto persuade them to remain in the city.So also any verb or phrase used as a verb of Willing orDemanding.Pytbia respondit ut moenibus llgneis se munirent, NEP., II. 2, 6 : thePythia answered that they must defend themselves with walls of wood.2.Negative : ne, ntne continued ; by neve (neu), and not.Caesar suls imperavit ne quod omnlno telum in hostes reicerent, CAES.,B. O., i. 46, 2 ;Caesar gave orders to his (men) not to throw back any missileat all at the enemy. Themistocles [collegis suls] praedlxit ut n6 priusLacedaemoniOrum Iggatos dlmitterent quam ipse esset remissus, NEP., n. 7,3 ;Themistocles told his colleagues beforehand not to dismiss the Lacedaemonianenvoys before he were sent back. Pompgius suls praedixeratut Caesaris impetum exciperent nSve s5 Ioc5 movSrent, CAES., B.C., in. 92,1 ; Pompey had told his men beforehand to receive Caesar's charge andnot to move from their position.REMARKS. i. When verbs of Willing and Wishing are used asverbs of Saying and Thinking, Knowing and Showing, the Inf. mustbe used. The English translation is that, and the Indie. :void, / milhave it (maintain), moneo, / remark, persuaded, / convince, dgcerno, /decide, c5g5, I conclude:[Moneo] artem sine adsiduitate dicendl non multum iuvare, Cf. [C.], adHer., i. i, 1 ;I remark that art without constant practice in speaking isof little avail. Viz cuiquam persuadebatur Graecia omni cessuros (Bomanos),L., xxxui. 32, 3 ;scarce any one could be persuaded that the Romanswould retire from all Greece. N5n sunt istl audiendl qui virtutem duramet quasi feiream esse quandam volant, C., Lael., 13, 48 (313, E. 2). Est
FINAL SENTENCES. 347mos hominum ut nolint eundem pluribus rSbus excellere, C., Brut., 21, 84 ;it is the ivay of the world not to allow that the same man excels in morethings (than one).2. When the idea of Wishing is emphatic, the simple Subjv., withoutut, isemployed, and the restriction of sequence to Pr. and Impf.is removed :Velim existimes neminem cuiquam cariorem umquam fuisse quam te mihi,C., Fam., i. 9, 24 ;/ wish you to think that no one was ever dearer toany one than you to me. Malo te sapiens hostis metuat quam stultl civ 6slaudent, L., xxn. 39, 20 ;1 had rather a wise enemy should fear youthan foolish citizens should praise you. Excusatum habeas me rogo,c6no domi, MART., n. 79, 2 (238). Hue ades, insanl feriant sine litorafluctus, V., EC., 9, 43 ;come hither (and) let the mad waves lash theshores. Tarn fglix essSs quam formosissima vellem, Ov., Am., i. 8, 27 (302).Vellem me" ad cenam invltassgs, C., Fam., xn. 4, 1 (261, E.). Occidit occideritquesinas cum nomine Tr
348 FINAL SENTENCES.but the final sense is often effaced, especially in qu5minus. Quin is aconsecutive particle. The sequence of verbs of Hindering is that ofthe Final Sentence.The negative often disappears in the English translation.548. Verbs and phrases signifying to Prevent, to Forbid,to Eefuse, and to Beware, may take ne with the Subjunctive,if they are not negatived.Iinpedior n5 plura dlcam, C., Sull., 33, 92 ;I am hindered from sayingmore (I am hindered that I should say no more).' 'Who did hinderyou that ye should not obey the truth ? " GAL., v. 7.Servitiis mea mihi interdlxit ne quid mlrer meum malum, PL., Pers.,621 ; my slavery has forbidden me to marvel aught at illof mine. HistiaeusnSrSs conficeretur obstitit, NEP., i. 3, 5 Histiaeus; opposed thething's being done. (Begulus) sententiam n5 dlceret recusavit, C. , Off. , in.27, 100; Regulus refused to pronounce an opinion. Maledictls deterrfiren5 scribat parat, TEE., Ph., 3 (423, 2). Tantum cum fing6s n6 sis manifSstacav5t5, Ov., A. A., in. 801 (271, 2). Tantum ne noceas dum vis prOdessevideto, Ov., Tr., i. i, 101; only see (to if) that you do not do harmwhile you wish to do good.NOTES. 1. The most important of these words are: Presenting: impedlre, impedimentsesse, prohibere, tenSre, retingre, dSterrSre, intercludere, interpellate,deprecarl, obsistere, obstare, intercedere, interponere. Forbidding:interdlcere. liefusing: recusare, repugnare, resistere, s6 tenere, sS reprimere,sibi temperare, morari. Beware; cav6re, videre, and a few others,especially the phrase per aliquem stare (more often with quominus).2. Many verbs of Preventing and Refusing also take quominus (549), and some alsothe Infinitive (423, 2, N. 2).3. CavSre, to beware, and praecavSre belong to verbs of Hindering only so far asaction is contemplated. Cavere, followed by nt, means to be sure to ; by nS or utnS, to see to it that not ; by nS, to lake precautions against. When nS is omitted,cave, cav6t5, with the Subjv., form circumlocutions for the negative Imperative(271, 2). So with vid5 Ut, nS. CavSre also has the Inf. occasionally as a verb ofnegative Will (423, 2, N. 2), beginning with PLAUTUS. In prose it is cited only fromCATO (once), CICERO (Att., in. 17, 3), SALLUST (Tug., 64, 2), and PLINY MAI.4. VidS n6 (n6 n5n), see to it left, is often used as a polite formula for dubitS an(457, 2), 7 am inclined to think. CrSdere omnia vide ne non sit necesse, C., Div.,n. 13, 31.549. Verbs of Preventing and Eef using may take quominus(= ut eo minus), that thereby the less, with the Subjunctive.Aetas non impedit quominus agrl colendl studia teneamus. C., Cat.M.,17, 60 ; age does not hinder our retaining interest in agriculture. NSndeterret sapientem mors quominus rel publicae consulat, C., Tusc., I. 38,91 ;death does not deter the sage from consulting the interest of theState. Quid obstat quSminus (Deus) sit beatus ? C., N.D., i. 34, 95; what
FINAL SENTENCES. 349is in the way of God's being happy ? Caesar c5gn5vit per Afraniumstare quominus proelio dlmicarStur, CAES.,J5. C., i. 41, 3 ;Caesar foundthat it was Afranius's fault that there was no decisive fight (stat, thereis a stand-still).NOTES. 1. With impedlre and prohibgre CAESAR never uses qu5minus CICERO;rarely. But with other words implying Hindrance CICERO uses quominus not unfrequently.With probibSre the regular construction is the Inf., but this is rare withimpedlre, quSminus being the rule. With recusare, the Inf. is rare (CAES., E.G.,in. 22, 3) but classical, becoming more frequent from LIVY on. The passive of dSterrfireis also construed with the Inf. occasionally.2. PLAUTUS does not use quominus, TERENCE first, but seldom. It is especiallycommon from the time of CICERO. In TERENCE the elements are sometimes separated(qu5 minus), thus emphasising the relative character. But it is not so used in theclassical Latin, and in the Silver Age the force of its origin ceases to be felt, so that it isconstrued like quln. The fact that it is not found in PLAUTUS nor in VITRUVIUS hasled to the suggestion that it is a book-word.3. The difference in usage between quSminus and quln seems to be that whilequln is always used with negatives, quominus occurs sometimes with positives, so thataccording to the connection it is either Final or Consecutive.4. Qu5 sStius for isquSminua archaic, but occurs twice in COHNIFICIUS andtwice in CICERO (Inv., n. 45, 132 ; 57, 170).III.Verbs of Fearing.550. i. Verbs of Fearing, and expressionsthat involveFear, take the Present and Perfect, Imperfect and PluperfectSubjunctive.The Present Subjunctive represents the Present and FutureIndicative. The Perfect Subjunctive regularly representsthe Perfect Indicative.Present and Perfect Subjunctive become Imperfect andPluperfect after a Past Tense.These constructions are survivals of the original parataxis, when nS and ut wereparticles of wish.1Thus, timed : nS veniat, lam afraid; may fie not come (i.e., I amafraid that he will), becomes, when the two clauses are combined, timed nS veniat,I am afraid lest (that) he may (will) come. Similarly with ut,which in this usagewas originally how. Hence,2. With verbs of Fearing, ne, lest, shows that the negativeis wished and the positive feared ;ut (ne n5n) showsthat the positive is wished and the negative feared : ne nonis used regularly after thenegative force.negative, or an interrogative withVereor ng hostis veniat, I fear lest the enemy come, that he is coming,that he will come. (I wish he may not come.)Vereor nehostis vSnerit, I fear lest the enemy have come, that (it willturn out that) he has come.
35OFINAL SENTENCES.Vereor ut amlcus veniat, I fear (hoio my friend can come) lest my friendcome not, thatcome.he is not coming, will not(I wish he may come.)Vereor ut amicus venerit, / fear lestmy friend have not come, that hehas not come.NSn vereor n6 amicus non veniat, I do not fear that my friend is notcoming, will not come.Non vereor ne amicus non venerit, I do not fear that my friend has notcome.Id paves, ne ducas tu illam, tu autem ut ducas. TER. , And., 349 ; that'swhat you dread, YOU lest you marry her (ne ducam !) ; YOU, on the otherhand, lest you don't (utinam ducam!).Vereor n6 dum minuere velim laborem augeam, C. , Leg., i. 4, 12 ;I fearlest, while I wish to lessen the toil, J increase it (that I am increasingit).Veremur ne paruni hie liber mellis et absinthii multum habere videatur,QUIXT., in. i, 5; I am afraid that this hook will seem to have toolittle honey and (too) much wormwood. Timeo n5 tib! nibil praeter lacrimasqueam reddere, C., Plane., 42, 101; lam afraid that lean giveyou nothing in return save tears. Aurum Inspicere volt ne subruptumsiet, PL., Aul., 39 he wishes to ; inspect the gold (for fear) lest it hefilched.Time5 ut sustineas (Iab5res), C., Fam., xiv. 2, 3; I fear that you milnot hold out under yourtoils. Vereor ne dum defendam meSs, non parcamtuls, C., Att., i. 17, 3; I fear lest in defending my own I may not sparethine. N5n vereor ne tua virtus opinion! hominum non respondeat, Cf. C.,Fam., n. 5, 2; I do not fear that your virtue will not answer to (comeup to) public expectation. Metuo ne id c5nsilii ceperlmus quod non facileexplicare posslmus, C., Fam., siv. 12 I; fear that ice have formed apianthat we cannot readily explain. Unum illud extimescebam ne quid turpiusfacerem, vel dicam, iam effgcissem, C. , Att., ix. 7, 1 ; the only thing I fearedwas, lest I should act disgracefully, or, I should (rather) say, (lest) 1had already acted disgracefully.NOTES. 1. Ut seems to be used only after metu5, paveo, timed, and vereor.Most common is vereor ;metuo is common in early Latin, but is cited but rarely later(HORACE, CICERO) ;paveo has to be supplied once with ut in TER., And., 349. TimeoUt is found first in CICERO, and is very rare."N6 n5n is very rare in early Latin, but becomes more frequent from CICERO on.Ut ne is never found for ne.3. Two strange cases are cited where, instead of n6, ut seems to be used, viz., HOR.,S.,i. 3, 120, nam ut ferula caedSs meritum maiora sublre verbera, non vereor,and L., xxvni. 22, 12, nihil minus, quam ut egredi obsessl moenibus auderent,timer! poterat. In the first case the ut clause precedes, and the non vereor is usedby anacoluthon ;in j;he second the ut clause is a circumlocution for an omitted illud,to nihil. Thisparallelis also helped by the antecedence of the ut clause.4. When a verb of Fear is a verb of Uncertainty an indirect question may follow :vereor qu6 mods acceptor! sltis, [C.], ad Her., iv. 37, 49.
CONSECUTIVE SENTENCES. 351ERO, however, is restrained in his usage, and the most examples are found in the poetsand later prose writers.(b) With the Ace. and Inf. verbs of Fear are verbs of Thinking or of Perception :vereor = cum timSre puto or video.VerSbar non omnSs causam vincere posse suam [Ov., Her., 16, 75].5. (a) With the Inf. verbs of Fear are verbs of (negative) Will : vereor = praetimore nolo.VSs Allobrogum tgstimonils non crSdere timetis 1 C., Font., 12, 26 ; are yeafraid to disbelieve the testimony of the Allobroges f Vereor laud are praesentem,C., N.D., i. 21, 58 (423, 2). Nil metuunt iurare, CAT., LXIV. 146 ; they have nofear totake an oath.These constructions are found at all periods and with a wide range of words. CIC-T5lumqueinstare tremgscit, V., A., XH. 916.This construction is rare, but occurs at all periods more; often, however, it involvesthe substantives timor and metus, especially in LIVT, who shows seven cases altogether.CONSECUTIVE SENTENCES.Sentences of Tendency and Result.551. i. Consecutive Sentences are those sentences whichshow the Consequence or Tendency of Actions. In Latin,Kesult is a mere inference from Tendency, though often anirresistible inference. In other words, the Latin languageuses so as throughout, and not so that, although so that isoften a convenient translation. The result is only implied,not stated.2. Consecutive Sentences are divided into two classes :I. Consecutive Sentences in which the Tendencyis expressedby the Particle : Pure Consecutive Sentences.II. Consecutive Sentences in which the Tendencylies inthe leading Verb :(a) after verbs of Effecting ; (I) afternegatived verbs of Preventing, Doubt, and Uncertainty ;(c) after words and phrases requiring expansion.I. Pure Consecutive Sentences.552. Pure Consecutive Sentences are introduced by1. Tit (uti), that, so that, and other relative pronouns andadverbs (631).2. Ut non, that, so that, as not, continued by neque, nee(543, 4).3. Quin = ut non, after a negative sentence (554).Correlative demonstratives occur very often : ita (sic), tarn,
352 CONSECUTIVE SENTENCES.tantopere, tanto, tantum, adeo, eo, hue ; tails, tantus, tot, b,eius modi, and others of similar meaning.In virtute molt! sunt adscensus, at is maxime gloria excellat, qui virtiiteprurimum praestet, C., Plane., 25, 60 ;in virtue there are manydegrees, so that he excels most in glory who is most advanced in virtue.Neque me vixisse paenitet quoniam ita vixi at non frustra me natum exlstumem,C., Cat.M., 23, 84 (540). Tanta vis probitatis est, ut earn inhoste etiam diligamus, C., Lad., 9, 2Q so ; great is the virtue of uprightness,that we love it even in an enemy. Non is es ut tS pudor umquam aturpitudine revocarit, C., Cat., i. 9, 22 ; you are not the man for shameever to have recalled you (= ever to have been recalled by shame) frombaseness. N6m6 ade5 ferus est at non mitescere possit, H., Ep., i. i, 39 ;no one is so savage that he cannot (be made to) soften. Nil tarn difficileest quin quaerendo investlgari possiet, TER., Heaut., 675 ; naughthard but it can (= that it cannot) be tracked out by search. Nomqaamtarn male est Siculis qoin aliquid facets et commode dlcant, C., Verr., iv.is so43, 95 ;the Sicilians are never so badly off as not to (have) somethingor other clever and pat (to) say.REMARKS. i. Notice especially the impersonal tantom abest, afuit(rarely aberat) at at. The phrase originates with an abstract Abl.dependent on a personal absum, which abstract Abl. is afterward expandedinto a consecutive clause with at.[Aggsilaus] tantum afuit ab Insolentia gloriae at commiseratus sit fortunamGraeciae, NEP., xvii. 5, 2 ; Agesilaus was so far from the insolenceof glory that he pitied the (mis)fortune of Greece. Tantum abestab eo at malum mors sit at verear ne homini sit nihil bonum aliud, C.,Tusc., i. 31, 76 ; so far is it from death (= so far is death from) beingTantum afuit, ut illoruman evil that 1 fear man has no other blessing.praesidio nostram flrmaremus classem, ut etiam a Bhodils urbe prohiberenturnostri milites, LENTULUS [C., Fam., xu. 15, 2] so ; far were we fromstrengthening our fleet by reinforcements from them that our soldierswere actually kept away from the city by the Rhodians. Tantum abestat nostra miremur at usque eo difficiles simas at nobis non satisfaciat ipseDemosthenes, C. , Or., 29, 104 ;so far are we from admiring our own (compositions)that ice are so hard to please that Demosthenes himself fails tosatisfy us.The personal construction is extremely rare.The second at may be omitted, and a declarativesentence followasyndetically Tantum aberat ut binos : (Iibr5s) scriberent vix : singulosconfecerunt, C., Alt., xin. 21, 5 so ; far were, they from writing two copiesof each book, they with difficulty finished up one.2. Dlgnus, worthy, indlgnus, unworthy, aptus, idoneus, fit, take a consecutivesentence with qul. Occasionally in early, more often in later
CONSECUTIVE SENTENCES. 353Latin, dlgnus and indfgnus take ut. In poetry all these words arefound sometimes with the Infinitive.Qui modeste paret, videtur qul aliquando imperet dignus esse, C., Leg.,in. 2, 5 ;he who obeys duly seems to be worthy to command some day.3. While ita (sic) is usually antecedent to a consecutive ut, itmay also be antecedent to a final ut or n5 when the design or wishintrudes. Ita mS gessl nS tibl pud5rl essem, L., XL. 15, 6 ;I behaved myselfso as not to be a disgrace to you.So not unfrequently when a restriction or condition is intended :Ita probanda est mansuetudo ut adhibeatur rel publicae causa severitas,C., Off., i. 25, 88 mildness is to be ; approved, so that (provided that)strictness be used for the sake of the commonwealth. Ita frul voluntvoluptatibus ut nulll propter eas cSnsequantur dolores, C., Fin., i. 14, 48 ;they wish to enjoy pleasures without having any pain to ensue on accountof them. [Pythagoras et PlatS] mortem ita laudant ut fugere vltamvetent, C., Scaur., 4, 5; Pythagoras and Plato so praise death, that they(while they praise death) forbid fleeing from life. Ita tu istaec tuamlsc6t5 n6 mS admlsceas, TER., Heaut., 783 ;mix up your mixings so youmix me not withal. Tantum a vallS [PompSl] prlma acigs aberat, uti nSte"15 adicl posset, CAES., B.C., in. 55.Ut alone may also be used thus ESx esse nolim ut esse crudelis :velim,SYR., 577 ;king I would not be, if I must school myself to cruelty.4. TTt n5n is often = without, and the English verbal in -ing :(Octavianus) numquam fllios suos populo commendavit ut non adiceret : simerSbuntur, SUET., Aug., 56; Octavianus (Augustus) never recommendedhis sons to the people in such a way as not to add (= without adding):if they are worthy. Qul n5 malum liabeat abstinet sS ab iniuria certsmalet existiraarl bonus vir ut non sit quam esse ut non putetur, C., Fin., n.22, 71 ;he who, to avoid misfortune, abstains from injury, will certainlyprefer being thought a good man without being such, to being (a goodman) without being believed (to be such).II.Complementary Consecutive Sentences.A. Verbs of Effecting.553. Verbs of Effecting belong partly to the Consecutive,partly to the Final Sentence. The negative is non or ne ;thesequence, final.Such verbs are :i. Verbs of Causation :facere, efficere, perficere, 7 make,effect, achieve ; assequl, consequl, 7 attain, accomplish, andmany others.The following are cited as more or less common in CICERO :proncere,23
354 CONSECUTIVE SENTENCES.impctrare, valgre, committere, tenSre, adipiscl, praestare, ferre (in phrasesconsuetude, natura, fortuna fert), adferre, adiuvare, expugnare, extorquere,exprimere, and a few others.Efficiam ut intellegatis, C., Cluent., 3, 7; I will cause you to understand.Sed perfice, ut Crassua haec quae coartavit nobls explicet, C., Or.,I. 35, 163 ;but bring it about that Crassus (make Crassus) unfold to uswhat he has condensed. N5n committam ut causam aliquam tib! reciisandldem, C., Or., n. 57, 233; / shall not make the blunder of giving you anexcuse for refusing.Negatives :ESrum obscuritas non verborum facit ut nSn intellegatur oratio, C., Fin.,ii. 5, 15 ;it is the obscurity of the subject, not of the words, thatcauses the language not to be understood. Potestis efficere ut male moriar,ut non moriar non potestis, PLIN., Ep., in. 16, 11; you may make me diea hard death, keep me from dying you cannot. Efficiam posthac n5quemquam voce lacessas, V., EC., 3, 51; / will bring it about that youchallenge no one hereafter in song.Facere ut is often little more than a periphrasis ; especially in theforms fac ut and fax5, faxit (both peculiar to Comedy).Fortuna vestra facit ut irae meae temperem, L., xxxvi. 35, 3; your fortunecauses that I(makes me) restrain my anger (put metes'to my anger).Invitus (325, R. 6) facio ut recorder ruinas rei publicae, C., Vat., 9, 21 ; (itrecall the ruined conditionis) against my will that I (am doing so as to)of the commonwealth.2. Verbs of Compelling and Permitting :Cogere, adigere, impellere, ducere, with itscompounds, movSre, commovgre,to which must be added exorare, to force by pleading. Permittere,sinere, concgdere, dare, (non) patl, and less often larglri. tribuere,ferre.Tenemus memoria Catulum esse coactum ut vitase ipse privaret, 0., Or.,in. 3, 9 ;we remember that Catulus was forced to take his own life.Illud natura non patitur, ut aliorum spolils nostras copias augeamus, C.,Off., in. 5, 22; nature does not allow us to increase our wealth by thespoils of others. Collggam perpulerat nS contra rem publicam sentlret, S.,C., 26, 4; he had prevailed upon his colleague, not to take sides againstthe commonwealth.NOTE. Cogere has usually the Inf. (423, 2, N. 2), so occasionally sinere, patl. Onpermittere, see 532, N. 1.CSgere in the sense conclude is a verb of Saying (546, B. i).Facere and in efficere,the sense came, are very rarely used with the Infinitive. CompareC., Sr., 38, 142, (acti5) talSs 5rat6r6s vidSrl facit, quales ipsl s6 vidSrlvolunt. This becomes more common in very late Lathi.3. Passive verbs of Causation, and their equivalents,
CONSECUTIVE SENTENCES. 355namely, many Impersonal Verbs of Happeningand Following,of Accident and Consequent.Such verbs are conficl, efficl, fit, accidit, contingit, obtingit, Svenit, ithappens, usu venit, it occurs, sequitur, it follows, and many others. Soalso est, it is the case.Ex qu5 efficitur, n6n ut voluptas n6 (the design of the arguer) sit voluptas,sed ut voluptas non (the result of the argument) sit summum bonum,C., Fin., H. 8, 24; from which it results, not that pleasure is notpleasure, but that pleasure is not the supreme good. Potest fieri ut fallar,C., Fam., xni. 73, 2 ; (it) may be (that) I am mistaken. Potest fieri utis unde tS audlsse dicis Iratus cllxerit, C., Or., n. 70, 285; (it) may be (that)he from whom you say you heard (it) said it in anger. Persaepe 6venitut utilitas cum honestate certet, C., Part. Or., 25, 89; it very often (so)happens that profit is at variance with honor.NOTE. Noteworthy is the early Latin use of (fieri) potis ut n8,as iii fieri potisest ut nS qua exeat, TER., Ad., 626.4. Very many impersonal verbs and combinations of neuteradjectives with est,mentioned.after the analogy of the impersonals justSuch are :additur, accedit, it is added ; restat, reliquom est, it remains ;apparet, it is plain. Enumerations, as, proximum, tertium, extremumest ; inusitatum, rarum est, it rarely happens that ; novom, singulare,mirum, inauditum, verum, falsum, (non) vSrlsimile, consequens, etc. Alsorarely, interest, necesse est, necessarium est, and the like.Ad Appi Claud! seaectutem accedebat etiam ut caecus esset, C., Cat.M.,6, 16 ;to the old age of Appius Claudius was further added his beingblind. El ne integrum quiclem erat ut ad iustitiam remigraret, C., Tusc.,v. 21, 62 ; for him it was not even an open question to go back tojustice.Rarum (= raro accidit) ut sit idoneus suae rei quisque defensor,QUINT., iv. i, 46; it is rare for a man to be a good defender of his owncase.REMARKS. i. Necesse est, it is necessary, generally, and oportet, itbehooves, always omit ut :[Leuctrica pugna] immortalis sit necesse est, NEP., xv. 10, 2 ;the battleof Leuctra must needs be immortal. Sed non effugies ;mecum moriarisoportet, PROP., n. 8, 25 but ; you shall not escape; you must die withme.2. The neuter adjectives with ut are very rare until the post-classicalperiod and are far more commonly construed with the Infinitive.3. Very common is the periphrasis fore (futurum) ut, which gives thecommon form of the Fut. Infinitive. See 248.
3 $6 CONSECUTIVE SENTENCES.B. Verbs of Hindering.554. Quln is used like quominus, with Verbs of Preventing,Eef using, etc., but only when they are negatived or questioned.NOTES. 1.Quln is compounded of qul an interrogative-relative Ablative orLocative and nS (n8n). Its first use is interrogative: "why not " in an indignantquestion ; almost equivalent to an indignant Imperative, with which, through the fadingout of its composition, it is occasionally connected, especially in early and laterLatin, rarely in CICERO (269).12. An indignant question (How not? Why not! ) objects to opposition, and is thereforenaturally construed with the negative of a verb of Hindering. Hence quill,as aninterrogative (How not ?), takes the sequence of the Interrogative Sentence. But thisshows itself only after words of doubt ;after verbs of Preventing the sequence coincideswith that of the Final Sentence, and after other negative sentences the sequence coincideswith that of the Consecutive Sentence.3. By ite combination with verbs of Preventing, quln came to be felt as a consecutiveparticle = ut non, and was then used in other consecutive connections forat non.555. Quin is used when Verbs and Phrases of Preventing,Omitting, Refraining, Refusing, and Delaying, Doubt, andUncertainty, are negatived or questioned.1. Verbs of Preventing and the like (sequenceFinal Sentence).of theViz nunc obsistitur illis quln lanient mundum, Ov., M., I. 58 ; theyare now hardly to be kept (that they should not rend) from rendingthe universe. Antiochus non s5 tenuit quln contra suum doctorem librumSderet, C., Ac., n. 4, 12; Antiochus did not refrain from publishing abook against his teacher. Vix reprimor quln t6 manSre iubeam, PL.,M.G., 1368; I am scarcely kept back (keep myself back) from biddingyou remain. Neque mS luppiter [prohibebit] quln sic faciam uti constitul,PL., Am., 1051 ; nor will Jupiter prevent me from doing just asI determined to do.REMARK. The list of verbs is given in 548, N. 1.2. Verbs of Doubt and Uncertainty (sequence of theInterrogative Sentence).N8n dubium est quln uxSrem nolit fflius, TER., And., 172 ;there is nodoubt that (my) son does not want a wife. Quia dubitet (= n6m5 dubitet)quln in virtute dlvitiae sint? C., Parad., vi. 2,48 (259). NSndubitarl debet quln fuerint ante Homgrum. pogtae, C., Br., 18, 71 ; it is notto be doubted that there were, poets before Homer. Nunc mib.1 non estdubium quln venturae non sint (legiones), C., Fam., 11. 17, 5 (515).
CONSECUTIVE SENTENCES. 357Occasionally verbs of Saying and Thinking are found with the sameconstruction, because they are near equivalents.Negari non potest quin rectius sit etiam ad pacatos barbaros exercitummitti, Cf. L., XL. 36, 2; it cannot be denied (doubted) that it is better foran army to be sent to the barbarians even though they be quiet. Nonabest susplcio (Litotes [700] for dubitarl non potest) quin (Orgetorix) ipsesibi mortem consclverit, CAES., B.Gr.,i. 4, 4; there is no lack of groundto suspect (there is no doubt that) Orgetorix killed himself.REMARKS. i. The principal gain of the interrogative sequenceisthat the Periphrastic Fut. may be employed (of which, however, thefirst example is cited from CICERO), but according to 515, R. 3, n6ndubito quin may have the simple Subjv. instead of the Periphrastic :Non dubitare quin d6 omnibus obsidibus supplicium sumat (Ariovistus),CAES., B." G., i. 3i,15 ; Tie did not doubt that Ariovistus would put allthe hostages to death." Compare CAT., cvm. 3.So when there is an original Subjv. notion :Non dubito quin ad t5 statim veniam, C.,Att.,vm. IIB, 3; / do notdoubt that I ought to come to you forthwith. (Veniam ? Shall I come ?)z. Of course dubito and non dubito may have the ordinary interrogativeconstructions (467). On dubito an, see 457, 2.3. Non dubito, with the Inf., usually means / do not hesitate to:Non dubitem dlcere crane's sapientes semper esse beatos, C., Fin.,v. 32,95 ;/ should not hesitate to say that all wise men are always happy.Et dubitamus adMc virtutem extenders factls ? V., A., vi. 806; and do westill hesitate to spread our (fame for) valour by our deeds ? Comparevereor, timeo, I fear, hesitate to (550, 2, N. 5).So occasionally non dubito quin. See R. i.(KomanI) arbitrabantur non dubitaturum fortem virum quin cederet aequoanimo iSgibus, C., Mil., 23, 63; the Romans thought that a braveman would not hesitate to yield with equanimity to the laws.NOTE. Non dubito with the Inf. for non dubito quin occurs chiefly in NEPOS,LIVY, and later writers.Sunt multi qul quae turpia esse dubitare non possunt utilitatis specieductl probent, QUINT. ,111. 8,3; there are many who, led on by the appearance ofprofit, appi'ove what they cannot doubt to be base.556. Quin, equivalent to ut non, may be used after anynegative sentence (sequence of the Consecutive Sentence).Here itmay often be translated " without."Nil tarn difficile est quin quaerendo invgstlgari possiet, TER., Heaut.,675 (552). Nullum adhuc intermisi diem quin aliquid ad te Htterarumdarem, C., Att., vn. 15, 1; I have thus far not allowed a day to pass butI dropped you (without dropping you) something of a letter (a line ortwo).
358 CONSECUTIVE SENTENCES.Note the combination (facere) n5n possum quin, / cannot but, andsimilar combinations ;n5n possum n5n with Inf. is also classical.Facere non possum quin cottldie" ad tS mittam (lltteras), C., Att., xn. 27,2; I cannot do without (I cannot help) sending a letter to you daily.Non possum quin exclamem, PL. ,Trin. , 705 I cannot but ; (I must) cryout. (Null8 modo facere possum ut non sim popularis, C.,Agr.,u. 3, 7I cannot help being a man of the people.)(reading doubtful) ;Nihil abest quin sim miserrimus, C.,Att.,s.i. 15,8; there is nothingwanting that I should be (= to make me) perfectly miserable. Fierinullo modo poterat quin CleomenI parceretur, C., Verr., v. 40, 104; it couldin nowise happen but that Cleomenes should be spared (= Cleomeneshad to be spared). Paulum afuit quin (Fabius) Varum interficeret, CAES.,B.C., n. 35, 2; there was little lacking but Fabius (had) killed Varus(= Fabius came near killing Varus).Explanatory Ut.557. A Consecutive Sentence with ut is often used to givethe contents or character of a preceding substantive, adjective,or pronoun.Est m5s hominum ut nSlint enndem pluribus rebus excellere, C.,Sr.,21, 84 (546, R. i). An quoiquamst usus hominl sS ut cruciet ? TER., Heaut.,8 1 (406, N. 5). Est miserorum ut malevolentes sint atque invideant bonis,PL., Capt., 583;the wretched have a way of being ill-natured and envyingthe well-to-do. Nee memn ad t6 ut mittam gratils, PL., Asin., 190 ;nor is it my style to let her go to you as a gracious gift. Id est propriumclvitatis ut sit llbera, C., Off., n. 22, 78 ;it is the peculiar privilege of astate, to be free. Illud ipsum habet consul ut el reliqul magistrates par eant,C., Leg., in. 7, 16 ;the consul has this very prerogative, that the othermagistrates be obedient unto him. Totum in eo est, ut tib! imperSs, C.,Tusc., n. 22, 53; all depends upon this (one thing), your self-command.REMARK. These are principally mos, consuStudS, habit, wont ; opus,usus, need; many substantives of opinion and perception, as oplnio, sententia,cogitatio, mens, sapientia, scientia, cognitio ; natura, genus, status,and others, usually with a demonstrative attached ; adjectives indicatingpossession meum, tuom, suom :(all mainly ante-class.), proprium,commune, praecipuum (LiVY), and predicate Genitives with esse :id, h5c,illud, etc. These should be distinguished from final usages.NOTES. 1. Tendency and Character lend themselves readily to circumlocution, andut with Subjv. becomes a manner of equivalent to the Inf., which, however, is by farthe more common construction.2. To the same principle is to be referred the use of ut after maior (magis) quarn,n5n aliter quam (without), first in LTVY ;after nisi (591, f>, B. 3). See 298.Praeceptum maius erat quam ut ab nomine videretur, C., Fin., \. 16, 44 (503).
TEMPOEAL SENTENCES. 359Exclamatory Questions.558. Ut with the Subjunctive is used in ExclamatoryQuestions, usually with the insertion of -ne.Egone ut t6 interpellem 1 C., Tusc., n. 18, 42 ;/ interrupt you ? Taut umquam t corrigas ? C., Cat., i. 9, 22; you ever reform yourself?Di magnl, ut qui clvem Romanum occldisset, impunitatem acciperet, SEN.,Ben., v. 16, 3 ;Great Gods ! that one who had slain a Roman citizen,should escape unpunished!NOTE. The expression is closely parallel with the Ace. and Infinitive. The oneobjects to the idea ; the other, to any state of things that could produce the result.In neither case is there any definite or conscious ellipsis. Compare TEB., Hec., 589,with 613.TEMPORAL SENTENCES.559. The action of the Temporal or Dependent clause maystand to the action of the Principal clause in one of threerelations :1. It maybe antecedent.CONJUNCTIONS :Fostquam (Postea quam, not ante-class.), after that,after; ut, as ; ubi, when (literally, where); simulac, as soon as ; ut primum,cum prlmum, the first moment that.II.Itmay be contemporaneous.CONJUNCTIONS :Bum, donee, while, until ; quoad, up to (the time) that ;quamdiu, as long as ; cum, when.III.Itmay be subsequent.CONJUNCTIONS :Antequam, priusquam, before that, before.A special chapter is required byIV.Cum (quom), when.MOODS IN TEMPORAL SENTENCES.560. i. The mood of Temporal clauses is regularly theIndicative.2. The Subjunctiveis used only:(1) In Oratio Obllqua (508), Total or Partial. So also inthe Ideal Second Person.(2) When the idea of Design or Condition is introduced.
360 TEMPORAL SENTENCES.I. ANTECEDENT ACTION.561. In historical narrative, Temporal Clauses with postquam(posteaquam), ubi, ut, simulac, ut primum, and cumprimmn commonly take the Historical Perfect or the HistoricalPresent Indicative.The English translation is not unfrequently the Pluperfect.Postquam Caesar pervgnit, obsidSs poposcit, CAES., E.G., I. 27, 3 ; afterCaesar arrived, he demanded hostages. Quae ubi nuntiantur Romam.senatus extemplS dictatorem did iussit, L., iv. 56, 8 ;when these tidingswere carried to Rome, the senate forthwith ordered a dictator to be appointed.PompSius ut equitatum suum pulsum vldit, acie excessit, CAES.,B.C., in. 94, 5 ;as Pompey saw his cavalry beaten, he left the line ofbattle. (Pelopidas) non dubitavit, simul ac conspexit hostem, confllgere(555, 2, R. 3), NEP., xvi. 5, 3 ;as soon as he (had) caught sight of theenemy, Pelopidas did not hesitate to engage (him).Subjunctive in Oratio Obliqua.Ariovistum, ut semel Galloruia copias vicerit (5. B. vlcit), superbe imperare,CAES., B.G., i. 31, 12 ;" that Ariovistus, as soon as he had oncebeaten the forces of the Gauls, exercised his rule arrogantly"562. The Imperfectis used to express an action continuedinto the time of the principal clause (overlapping).The translation often indicates the spectator (233, N. 1).Tu postquam qui tibl erant amid non poterant vincere, ut amid tiblessent qui vincSbant effScisti, C., Quinct., 22, 70 ; after (you saw) thatthose who were friendly to you could not be victorious you managedthat those should be friendly to you -who were going to be victorious.Ubi nginS obvius ibat, ad castra hostium tendunt, L., ix. 45, 14 ;ivhen(they saw that) no one was coming to meet them, they proceeded to the,camp of the enemy.Subjunctive in Oratio Obliqua.Scrlpsistl (euin) posteaquam non audSret (6. E. non audebat) reprehendere,laudare coepisse, C., Att., i. 13, 4 ; you wrote that, after he could not getup the courage to blame, he began to praise.563. i. The Pluperfectis used to express an action completedbefore the time of the principal clause often of the;Resulting Condition.Alblnus postquam dgcrSverat n5n ggredi pr5vincia, mllites statlvls castrlshabebat, S., lug., 44, 4 ; after Albinus had fully determined not to depart
TEMPORAL SENTENCES. 361from the .province, lie kept Ms soldiers in cantonments. Posteaquammultitudinem collSgerat emblematum, Instituit officinam, C., Verr., iv. 24,54 ; after he had got together a great number of figures, he set up shop.2. The Pluperfectis used with postquam when a definiteinterval is mentioned. Rarely also the Historical Perfect(Aorist).Post and quam are often separated.post may be omitted (403, N. 4, d).With an Ablative of Measure,( Aristlcles) decessit fere post annum quartum quam Themistocles Atheniserat expulsus, NEP., in. 3, 3 ;Aristides died about four years afterThemistocles had been (was) banished from Athens. Post diem tertiumgesta rSs est quam dlxerat, C., Mil., 16, 44; the matter was accomplishedthree days after he had said it would be. [Hamilcar nono ann5 J postquamin Hispaniam vSnerat occlsus est, NEP., xxn. 4, 2 ;Hamilcar was killednine years after he came to Spain. (Aristldgs) sexto fere anno quam eratexpulsus in patriam restitutus est, NEP., in. i, 5 ; Aristides was restoredto his country about six years after he was exiled. Triduo fer6 postquamHannibal a ripa BhodanI movit, ad castra hostium venerat, L., xxi. 32, 1 ;(within) about three days after Hannibal moved from the banks of theRhone he had come to the camp of the enemy.Subjunctive in Oratio Obliqua.Scriptum a Posldonio est trlginta annls vixisse Panaetium posteaquamlibros [d5 officils] edidisset, C., Off., in. 2, 8; it is recorded by Posidoniusthat Panaetius lived thirty years after he put forth his books on Duties.The attraction is sometimes neglected.NOTES. 1. The most common of these conjunctions is postquam, but the othersalso occur at all periods. Simul (atque)is rare in early Latin. In the following notesthe usage in Iterative action is excluded.2. The Impf. with postquam is cited but once from early Latin (Pi,., Most., 640), itbecomes more common in CICERO, but is distinctive of LIVY, who shows nearly onehundred examples. The Impf. with ubi is cited once in early Latin (TEB., Min., 405),where, however, it is Iterative, not at all from CICERO, once from CAESAR, after whichit is found more frequently, but never becomes common. THb Impf. with ut is foundfirst in CICERO, never in CAESAR, SALLUST, VERGIL, but not uncommonly in LIVY ;only once in TACITUS (ff., in. 31), where it is Iterative. The Impf. with simul (atque)is not cited from CICERO and CAESAR, but appears once in SALLUST, where it isIterative ; it is very rare.3. The Plupf. with postquam is not cited from PLAUTUS or HORACE, and but oncefrom TERENCE (And. 177) ;CICERO uses it but rarely, CAESAR but once (B. C., m. 58,5) ; LIVY uses it often, and TACITUS is fond of it. The Plupf. with ubi is found oncein PLAUTUS, twice each in CICERO and CAESAR, and then more frequently. The Plupf.with ut (prlmum) is found first in CICERO, perhaps but once in CAESAR (B. C., m. 63, 6),more often later. The Plupf. with simul (atque)is cited once from CICERO, not at allfrom CAESAR, and rarely later.4. Some dozen cases are cited, principally from CICERO, of the Subjv. with post-
362 TEMPORAL SENTENCES.qnam not in O.O. Most of these are disputed. If the Snbjv. is to remain in thesepassages it is to be explained as due either to Partial Obliquity or to the intrusion of thecum Subjv. into other temporal constructions. The Subjv. appears in late Latin.5. The Subjv. with ubi occurs occasionally in early Latin, but only once in CICERO,not unfrequently in LIVY and TACITUS. This is usually explained as either the Iterativeor Potential Subjunctive. The Subjv. with ut is post-classical, and the Subjv. withsimul does not occur.564. Postquam and the like, with the Present and PerfectIndicative, assume a causative signification (compare quoniam,now that = since).[Curia] minor mihl videtur posteaquam est maior, C., Fin., v. i,2 thesenate-house seems to me smaller now that it is (really) greater. Tremohorreoque postquam aspexl hanc, TER., Eun., 84 ;/ quiver and shiversince I have seen her.NOTES. 1. The use of temporal conjunctions, especially inpostquam the PresentSphere, is much more common in early Latin than later. Ubi and ut occur at all periods,but rarely ; ubi has almost the same force as si ;ut means ex quo, since. Simulis rare, and found first in LUCRETIUS.2.Cum, also, has sometimes the causal signification.Gratulor tibi cum tantum vales, C., Fam., ix. 14, 3 ;I wish you joy now thatyou have so much influence.565. TTbi and simul are occasionally found with the Futureand Future Perfect ;not so postquam and ut.Ubi me aspiciet ad carnuncem rapiet continue, PL., B., 689 ;as soonas he shall catch (catches')sight of me he will hurry me at once to thehangman. Id tibi quidem hercle flet, Demaenetum simulac conspexero,PL., Asin., 477; that indeed shall certainly be your fate, as soon as Ishall have espied Demaenetus.NOTE. When thus used ubi and simul approach almost the meaning of cum (580).So also quandO seu 580, N. 3. These uses should be; distinguished from those of IterativeAction.Iterative Action.566. EULE I. When two actions are repeated contemporaneously,both are put in tenses of continuance.Humiles laboraut ubi potentes dissident, PHAED., i. 30, 1 ; the lowlysuffer when the powerful disagree. Populus me sibilat ;at mihi plaudoipse domi simul ac nummos contemplor in area, H. ? S., i. I, 66 the ; peoplehiss me ;cash inlut I clap myself at home as soon as I gloat o'er mythe strong box. Ubi frumento opus erat, cohortgs praesidium agitabant,S., lug., 55, 4 ;when there was need of corn, the cohorts would serve asan escort.
TEMPORAL SENTENCES. 363The Subjunctive with the Ideal Second Person.Bonus sSgnior fit ubi neglegas, S., lug., 31, 28 ;a good man becomesmore spiritless when you neglect Mm.567. KULE II. When one action is repeatedbefore another,the antecedent action isput in the Perfect, Pluperfect,or Future Perfect ;the subsequent action in the Present,Imperfect, or Future, according to the relation.%^T As this use runs through all sentences involving antecedentaction, all the classes are represented in the following examples.Observe the greater exactness of the Latin expression. Compare244, R. 2.Quotiens cecidit, surgit, As often as Tie falls, he rises.QuotiSns ceciderat, surgebat, As often as he fell, he rose.QuotiSns ceciderit, surget, As often as he falls, he will rise.Simul Inflavit tibicen a perito carmen agnoscitur, C., Ac., n. 27, 86; assoon as thefluter blows, the song is recognised by the connoisseur. [Alcibiades]simul ac serenuserat, luxuriosus reperiebatur, NEP., vn. i, 4; assoon as Alcibiades relaxed, he was found a debauchee. Dociliora sunt ingeniapriusquam obduruerunt, QUINT., i. 12, 9 ;minds are more teachablebefore they (have) become hardened. [Ager] cum multos annos quiSvit,uberiores efferre fruggs solet, C., Br., 4, 16 when a; field has rested(rests) many years, it usually produces a more abundant crop. Cumpalam eius anuli ad palmam converterat (Gyges) a nullo videbatur, C., Off.,in. 9, 38 ; whenever) Gyges turned the bezel of the ring toward the palm(of Ms hand), he was to be seen by no one. Si pSs condoluit, si dSns, ferrenon possumus, C., Tusc., n, 22, 62; if a foot, if a tooth ache(s), we cannotendure it. Stomachabatur senex, si quid asperius dixeram, C., N.D., i. 33,93 ; the old man used to be fretted, if I said anything (that was) ratherharsh. Qu5s Iab5rant6s cSnspexerat, his subsidia submittebat, CAES. ,B.G.,iv. 26, 4; to those whom he saw (had espied) hard pressed he would sendreinforcements. Haerebant in memoria quaecumque audierat et viderat(ThemistoclSs), C., Ac., n. i, 2 ;whatever Themistocles had heard andseen (= heard and saw) remained fixed in Ms memory. Qui timere dSsierint,Sdisse incipient, TAG., Agr., 32; those who cease to fear will beginto hate.The Subjunctive with the Ideal Second Person.Ubi consuluerls, mature facto opus est, S., C., I, 6 ;when you havedeliberated, you want speedy action.The Subjunctive in Oratio Obliqua.[Cats] mirari se aiebat quod non rideret haruspex baruspicem cum vidis-
364 TEMPORAL SENTENCES.set, C., Div., n. 24, 51 ;Cato said that he, wondered that an haruspexdid not laugh when he saw (another) haruspex. (N5n ridet cum vidit.)The Subjunctive by Attraction.[Araneolae] re"te texunt ut si quid inhaeserit confidant, C., N.D., n. 48,123 ; spiders weave webs to despatch anything that gets caught (si quidinliaesit, conficiunt). Quare fiebat, ut omnium oculos, quotiescunque inpublicum prodisset, ad s6 converteret, NEP., vn. 3, 5 ; whereby it happenedthat he attracted the eyes of all every time he went out in public(quotiescunque pr odierat, convcrtebat).NOTE. The Subjunctive in Iterative Tenses may be accounted for on the principlethat a repeated action which is retrospective from the point of view of the narrator, andBO naturally takes the Indicative, becomes prospective from the point of view of theagent, and so takes the Subjunctive. But, however the construction is justified, the factremains that the Subjunctive in Iterative Sentences is a growth in Latin. With theprincipal tenses it is confined mostly to the Ideal Second Person. Indefinite quis is verynear to this. So CICERO, Bab. Post., 13, 36 : ubi semel quis pSieraverit-oportet.With Impf and Plupf the first examples (excluding cum) are in CATULLUS . . (LXXXIV. t),and CAESAR (e.g. B. C., n. 15, 3). Then it spreads, probably under Greek influence,and is very common in the historians, especially LIVT and TACITUS. Ubi and ut arethe particles employed ;also very often si and relatives, in general qulcumque, quotiSns,etc. With cum, Iterative Subjunctives are found to a limited extent also in CICEBOand CAESAR ;but all cases of principal tenses in third person have been emended, andthose with historical tenses are not common, and sometimes doubtful.Cum ferrum s6 Inflexisset, neque Svellere neque pugnare poterant (= videbant86 n5n posse), CAES., B. G., i. 25, 3 ;when the iron had bent, they found thatthey could neither pluck It out nor fight. Incurrere ea gens in Macedonian! solitaerat (as if constituerat) ubi rSgem occupatum externo bello sensisset, L., xxvi.25, 7 ; that tribe was wont to make a raid on Macedonia, whenever they perceived theking engrossed in foreign war. QuI unum elus ordinis offendisset omnes advers5shabebat (as if cert5 sciSbat s5 habiturum), L., xxxin. 46, 1 ; whoso hadoffended one of that order was sure to have all against him. Modum adbibendo ubir6s posceret, priores erant, L.,m. 19, 3 ; by the use of moderation, when the casedemanded it, they were his superiors.II.CONTEMPORANEOUS ACTION.568. Conjunctions used of Contemporaneous Action are :Bum, donee, ivliile, so long as^ until ; quoad, up to (thetime) that ; quamdiu, as long as ; cum, when.An action may be contemporaneous in Extent so long as,while.An action may be contemporaneous in Limit until.REMARK. Dum, (while) yet, denotes duration, which may be coextensive,so long as, or not. It is often causal. D5nec (old form d5nicum,used only in the sense until), is parallellong as, until. CICEIIO uses it only as until.with dum in the sense so
TEMPORAL SENTENCES. 3651. Contemporaneous in Extent.(So long as, while.)569. Complete Coextension. Bum, donee, quoad, quamdiu,so long as, while, take the Indicative of all the tenses.Vita dum superest, bene est, MAECENAS (SEN., E.M., 101, 11) ;while'as) life remains, 'tis well. Sibi vSro hanc laudem relinquont,(so long" Vixit, dum vixit, bene," TER., Hec., 461 ; they leave indeed this praisefor themselves, " He lived well while he lived" (all the time). TiberiusGracchus tarn diu laudabitur dum memoria rerum Komanarum inanebit, (,'.,Off., n. 12, 43 ;Tiberius Gracchus shall be praised so long as thememory of Roman history remains (shall remain). Fuit haec g6ns fortisdum Lycurgl I5ges vigSbant, C., Tusc.,i. 42, 101 ;this nation was braveso long as the laws of Lycurgus were in force. Donee gratus eram tibJ,Persarum vigui rgge beatior, H., 0., in. 9, 1 ;while I was pleasing inyour sight, I throve more blessed than Persia's king. Quoad potuit, restitit,CAES., S.G., iv. 12, 5 ;as long as he could, he withstood.Subjunctive in Oratio Obliqua.(Regulus dlxit) quam diu iure iurando hostium teneretur non esse sesenatorem, C., Off., in. 27, 100 ; [Regulus said] that as long as he wasbound by his oath to the enemy he was not a senator. (Quamdiu teneornon sum senator.)Subjunctive by Attraction.Faciam ut mel meminerls dum vltam vivas, PL., Pers., 494 (333, 2).NOTES. 1. Dum. In the Past Sphere we have the Pf. (Aor.), Hist. Pr., and Imperfect.Of these the -Hist. Pr. is found first in SALLDST (C., 36, 1), and the Impf., whileoccurring at all periods, is rare. The Pf . is not in CAESAR. Dum in the PresentSphere is rare the Pure Pr. has heen observed ha; PL., B., 737: mane dum scrlbit,which looks much like parataxis, and occasionally in CICKBO and later ;the Pure Pf .is cited only from TERENCE (And., 556, 597), and is only apparent. Several examplesof the Future Sphere are cited, PL., B., 225, n5n metuo tnihi dum h5c valebitpectus ;TEB., Heaut., 107 ; C., Rosc.Am., 32, 991 ; V., A., i. 607, etc.Donee is not found in the sense " so long as," until LUCR., v. 178 ;then H., O., i. 9,16 ; ni, 9, 1. Also Ov., Tr., i. 9, 5. Lrvrr uses it occasionally, but TACITUS affects it,and employs Hist. Pf., Impf., and Fut. tenses.Quoad (correlative with ade5) belongs especially to the classical poets, but is alsofound in prose. Compare C., Ph., in. n, 28, etc. It is usually found in the PastSphere in;the Present the adverbial force, "so far as," seems to preponderate ; PL.,Asin., 296 quoad vlr6s valent. The Future tenses are more common.:Quamdiu (correlative with tamdiu) is found with this usage first in CICERO.2. When the actions are coextensive, the tenses are generally the same in both members,but not always.570. Partial Coextension. Dum, while, while yet, dur-
366 TEMPORAL SENTENCES.ing, commonly takes the Present Indicative after all Tenses:so especially in narrative.Cape hunc equum, dum tibi virium aliquid superest, L., xxn. 49, 7 ;take this horse, while you have yet some strength left. Dum haec Romaeaguntur, consoles ambo in Liguribus gerebant bellum, L., xxxix. i, 1;while these things were going on at Rome, both consuls were carrying onwar in Liguria. Praetermissa gius rei occasio est, dum in castellls recipiendistempus teritur, L., xxxin. 18, 20 the ; opportunity was allowedto slip by, while time was wasted in recovering miserable forts.^~ Dum in this sense often resists the change into Snbjv. in 0. 0., especially inpost-classical Latin. (655, B. 3.)NOTES. 1. Quamdiu and quoad are, by their composition, ihcapable of beingused in this sense, and as donee was avoided, dum is the only temporal conjunctionof limit that is loose enough in its formation to serve for partial coextension. ThePr. after it, formally an Hist. Pr., always connotes continuance, and the constructionbecomes practically a periphrasis for a missing Pr. participle.2. The Pure Pr. of the Present Sphere is found occasionally, principally in earlyLatin. In this sense the relation is often causal, and the construction is parallel withthe Pr. participle, the lack of which in the passive it supplies.Ardua dum metuunt (= metuentSs) amittunt v6ra vial, LUCB., i. 660 (372, N. a).The causal relation is also often present with the other tenses.3. Other tenses are extremely rare, as the Future ; PL., Men., 214, dum COquStur,interim potabimus; the Impf., NEP., xxm. 2, 4, quae divlna res dum conficiSbatur,quaesivit a me.4. LIVT, xxxu. 24, 5, shows one case of the Plupf . as a shorthand to express themaintenance of the result, dum averterat = dum aversos tnebat.2. Contemporaneous in Limit.(Until.)571. Dum, donee, quoad, up to (the time) that, until, havethe Present, Historical Present, Historical Perfect, andFuture Perfect Indicative.Tityre, dum redeo, brevis est via, pasce capellas, V., EC., 9,23; Tityrus,while lam returning (= till I return) the way is short feed mykids. Epaminondas ferrum in corpora usque eo retinuit, quoad renuntiatumest vicisse Eoeotios, Cf. NEP. ,xv. 9, 3 ; Epaminondas retained the ironin his body, until word was brought back that the Boeotians had conquered.Donee redilt Marcellus, silentium fait, L., xxm. 31, 9 ; untilMarcellus returned, there was silence. Eaud desinam donee perfScero hoc,TEB., Ph., 420; I will not cease until I have (shall have) accomplishedit. Exspectabo dum venit, TEE., Eun., 206 ;I mil wait until he comes.Subjunctive in Oratio Obliqua,Sclpioni SUanoque donee revocatl ab senatu forent prorogatum imperium
TEMPORAL SENTENCES. 367cst, L., xxvu. 7, 17; Scipio and Silanus had their command extendeduntil " they should have been recalled by the senate."NOTES. 1. With the Past Sphere the idea of limit precludes the employment of atense of continuance, which would naturally involve the notion of Overlapping Action.The Impf. is, therefore, not found until the time of TACITUS (once with d5H6C, H.,i. 9). With the Present Sphere the tense must be iterative or historical. Otherwise thePr. is used by anticipation for the Future.2. The Fut. Indie, is found occasionally in early Latin, usually, however, the Present.In the classical times, and afterwards, the Subjv. takes its place. Thus CICERO uses theSubjv. regularly, after verba exspectandl, except in possibly four passages of theearlier Orations and Letters.3. Donee is not uncommon in early Latin, but is very rare in CICERO, and neveroccurs in CAESAR. On the other hand, TACITUS shows one hundred and thirty-eightcases of it.4. Donicum belongs to early Latin, but is not found in TERENCE ;one case with theSubjv. is found in NEPOS.isDonique found in LUCRETIUS four times with the Indie.,always before vowels ;in VITRUVIUS once with Indie., three times with Subjv. ;otherwiseit is not cited.5.Quoad, tentil, occurs once in PLAUTUS, and with the Subjunctive. Otherwise it isfound with both moods occasionally throughout the language.6. LIVY introduces donee inversum, like cum inversum (581). Seexxi.46, 6;xxxv. 50, 4, etc.572. Bum, donee, and quoad, until, take the Subjunctivewhen Suspense and Design are involved.Verglnius dum collegam consuleret moratus (est), L., iv. 21, 10; Verginiusdelayed until he could (long enough to) consult his colleague. Attanti tibi sit non indulgere theatris, dum bene de vacuo pectore cedat amor,Ov., Rem.Am,, 751 but let it;be worth the cost to you (= deem it worththe cost) not to indulge in play-going, until love be fairly gone from(your) untenanted bosom.Often with verba exspectandl, especially exspecto, / wait.Rusticus exspectat dum defluat amnis, H., Ep., i. 2, 42; the clown waitsfor the river to run off (dry).REMARKS. i. The Subjv. is sometimes used in narrative with dum,while, and donee, while, until, to express subordination. The principleis that of Partial Obliquity. There is often a Causal or Iterativesense (like cum, 584, R.).Dum intentus in eum se rex totus averteret, alter elatam securim incaput deiecit, L., i. 40, 7; while the king, intent upon him, was turningquite away, the other raised his axe and planted itin his skull.(Averteret from the point of view of alter = dum videt avertentem.)2. Verba exspectandl have also other constructions, as ut, si, quin, butnot the Infinitive.573. Dum, mods, and dummodO, if only, provided only,
368 TEMPORAL SENTENCES.only, are used with the Presentin Conditional Wishes.and Imperfect SubjunctiveThe negative is ne (dum ng = n5 interim).Oderint dum metuant, Accius (C., Off., i. 28, 97); let them hate so longas they fear (provided that, if they will only fear). Quo lubeat nubant,dum dos nS flat comes, PL., AuL, 491 let them marry where (= whom);they please, if but the dowry do not go with them. Dummodo moratare"ct6 veniat, dotata est satis, PL., AuL, 239; provided only she come witha good character, she is endowed (= her dowry is) enough. In eo multaadmiranda sunt :eligere modo ciirae sit, QUINT., x. i, 131; many thingsin him are to be admired ; only you must be careful to choose. Copiaplacandl sit modo parva tul, Ov., Her., 20, 74 (428, E. i).NOTES. 1. It has been noticed that TACITUS uses dummodo only in the Germaniaand Dialoffits, otherwise dum.2. Dummodo nS and mod5 nS are found first in CICERO. In post-Augustan Latinn6n is sometimes used for n6 ;Juv., vn. 222, dummodo non pereat.III.SUBSEQUENT ACTION.Antequam and Priusquam with the Indicative'574. Antequam and prinsquam, before, take the Present,Perfect, and Future Perfect Indicative, when the limit isstated as a fact. The Present is used in anticipation of theFuture.REMARKS. i. The elements ante, antes, prins, and quam are oftenseparated.2. As prius (ante) -quam is negative in its signification (= necdum),the Indie, is sometimes found where we should expect the Subjunctive.NOTE. Antequam is much rarer than priusquam, especially in early Latin, whereit is cited only from CATO, CAELIUS, TERENCE (Hec., 146, with Subjv. in O. O.), andVARRO. CICEBO prefers it before a Pr. Indie., priusquam elsewhere.575. The Present Indicative is used after positive sentences.Antequam ad sententiam redeo, d me pauca dlcam, C., Cat., iv. 10, 20 ;Omniabefore I return to the subject,I will say a few things of myself.experlri cert urn est prius quam pereo, TER., And., 311 ;/ am determined totry everything before I perish.to keep from perishing.)(Prius quam peream = sooner thanperish,NOTES. 1. The Pure Pf. Indie, is used of Iterative Action, and is rare. (567.)Dociliora sunt ingenia priusquam obduruSrunt, QUINT.,1. 12, 9 (567).Instead of this, the Pr. Subjv. is more common in general statements. (567, N.)2. TACITUS shows no example of the Pr. Indicative.
TEMPORAL SENTENCES. 369576. The Perfect (Aorist) and Future Perfect Indicativeare used both after positive and after negative clauses, chieflythe latter.ii.'Heraclio, aliquanto ante quam est mortuus, omnia tradiderat, C., Verr.,1 8, 46; some time before he died he had handed over everything toHeraclius.Lggati non ante profectl quam impositos in nave's mllitSs vldSrunt,L., xxxiv. 12, 8 ; the envoys did not set out until they saw thesoldiers on board.Neque dSfatigabor ante quam illorum vias rationesqueet pro omnibus et contra omnia disputandl percgpero, C., Or., in. 36, 145 ;/ will not let myself grow weary before (until) / learn (shall have learned)their methods of disputing for and against everything.Subjunctive in Oratio Obliqua.Themistocles [collegia suis] praeclixit, ut ne prius Lacedaemoniorumlegates dimitterent quam ipse esset remissus, NEP., n. 7, 3(546, 2).prius dimittetis quam ego ero remissus.)(N5nREMARK. After negative clauses containing a historical tense the Pf .is the rule and the connection isalways close n5n priusquam = dum.:Violations of this rule are very rare ;see 577, 2.NOTES. 1. The Fut. is found occasionally in PLAUTUS, but has disappeared by thetime of TERENCE. The Fut. Pf. is never common, but is found atall periods. TACITUSavoids it, and so do other authors.2. The Impf . is confined to LIVY, who shows four examples, and to one case in lateLatin. ThePlupf. is found once in CICEKO (Dam., 30, 78), where it may be Iterative,and once in early Latin.Antequam and Priusquam with the Subjunctive.577. Antequam and priusquam are used with the Subjunctivewhen an ideal limit is given when the;action is expected,contingent, designed, or subordinate.i. An ideal limit involves necessary antecedence, but not necessaryconsequence. After positive sentences, the Subjunctive is the rule,especially in generic sentences and in narrative. (Compare cum, 585.)After Historical Tenses the Subjunctiveis almost invariable when theaction does not, or is not to, take place. The translation is often before,and the verbal in -ing (Greek vplv with the Infinitive).Ante vidSmus fulgSrem quam sonum audiamus, SEN., N.Q., n. 12,6;we see the flash of lightning before hearing the sound (we may neverhear it). But compare LUCB., vi. 170. In omnibus negotiis prius quamaggrediare adbibenda est praeparatio diliggns, C., Off.,i. 21, 73; in allaffairs, before addressing yourself (to them), you must make use of carefulpreparation (Ideal Second Person). [Collem] celeriter priusquam ab24
3/O TEMPORAL SENTENCES.adversariis sentiatur communit, CAES., B.C., i. 54,4; Tie speedily fortifiedthe hill before Tie was (too soon to be) perceived by the enemy (priusquam =: prius quam ut). Hannibal omnia priusquam excederet pugna(erat) expertus, L.,xxx. 35, 4; Hannibal had tried everything beforewithdrawing from the fight (= to avoid withdrawing from the fight).Saepe magna indolSs virtutis priusquam rel publicae prodesse potuissetexstincta est, C., Ph., v. 17, 47; often hath great native worth been extinguishedbefore it could be of service to the State.Ducentis annls antequam urbem Bomam caperent in Italiam Galll transcendSrunt, L., v. 33, 5;(it ivas) two hundred years before their taking Home (that) the Gaulscrossed into Italy (here the Subjv. gives the natural point of reference).2. After an historical tense in the negative, the Subjunctive is exceptional.(576, R.)Inde non prius egressus est quam (= ibi manebat dum) rex eum in fidemreciperet, NEP., n. 8, 4; he did not come out until the Jcing should takehim under his protection (he stayed to make the king take him underhis protection). See CAES., B.G., vi. 37, 2; L., XLV. n, 3.NOTES. 1. The Pr. Subjv. is common, but is usually generic; the few cases of FinalSubjv. are confined to early Latin. Very rarely the Hist. Pr. is found after a Hist.Present See CAES., B. C., i. 22.2. The Pf . occurs occasionally ; it is usually in a final sense.Non prius dimittunt quam ab bis sit concSssum, CAES., B. G., in. 18.3. In LIVY we find the Impf . Subjv. used not unfrequently, where the idea of suspenseor design is very slight, much after the manner of cum nondum (as C., Ph., v.i,4).4. The Plnpf. Subjv. is cited five times from CICERO and four times from LIVT. Inthese passages the completion rather than the continuance is in suspense.5.Postridiequain is found in PLATJTUS, CICERO (Letters), and SUETONIUS withthe Indicative. In CICERO, Ac., n. 3, 9, with the Subjunctive. isPridiSquam foundin PLAUTUS and CICERO with the Indicative ;in LIVT, VAL. MAX., and SUETONIUSwith the Subjunctive. Both are very rare.6. When the will is involved, potius quam is used in the same way as prius quam.It out rather than be aslave.Depugna potius quam servias, C., Alt. vn. 7, 7 ; fightIV.CONSTRUCTIONS OF CUM (QTJOM).578. Cum is a (locative) relative conjunction.NOTE. Originally locative (where), quom became temporal (when) like nbi. Whentime is not defined by a fixed date, it readily becomes circumstance, and this circumstanceis interpreted as cause, condition, and the like. Compare the circumstantialrelative itself. The first construction was with the Indicative as with any other merelyrelative clause, and this is the sole constniction in earliest Latin. But, beginning withTERENCE, we can observe the drift ever increasing in Latin towards the expression ofcharacter. by tendency (Subjv.) rather than by fact (Indie.), so that the relative of charactertakes more and more the Subjunctive, and cum follows the lead of ut and of theinflected relative pronoun.579. There are two great uses of cum :L Temporal cum (when, &0ra),.with the Indicative.
TEMPORAL SENTENCES. 37!II. Circumstantial cum (as, whereas), with the Subjunctive.In the second usage the relation is still purely a matter ofinference ;but according to this inferential connection wedistinguish :(a) Historical cum, as, giving the attendant circumstances,mainly temporal, under which an action took place.(b) Causal cum, as, whereas, since, indicating that themain action proceeded from the subordinate one.(c) Concessive cum, ivhereas, although, indicating that themain action was accomplished in spite of that of the subordinateclause.I. Cum vSr appetit, mllites ex hlbernls movent, when spring approaches,soldiers move out of winter-quarters.II.(a) Cum vSr appeteret, Hannibal ex hlbernls mSvit, as spring ivasapproaching (spring approaching), Hannibal moved out of winterquarters.(b) Cum v6r appetat, ex hlbernls movendum est, as (since) spring isapproaching, we must move out of winter-quarters.(c) Cum v6r appeteret, tamen hosted ex hlbernls n5n m5vgrunt, whereas(although) spring was approaching, nevertheless the enemy did not moveout of winter-quarters.1 . Temporal Cum.580. Cum, when, is used with all the tenses of the Indicativeto designate merely temporal relations.In the Principal clause, a temporal adverb or temporal expressionis frequently employed, such as turn, tune, then ; nunc, now ; diSs, day ;tempus, time ; iam, already ; vix, scarcely, and the like.Animus, nee cum adest nee cum discSdit, apparet, C., Cat. 31., 22, 80;the soul is not visible, either when it is present, or when it departs.Stomachor cum aliorum n5n m5 digna in me" conferuntur, C., Plane., 14, 35 ;/ get fretted when other people's jokes that are not worthy of me arefoisted on me. [Sex librSs dS re" publica] turn scrlpsimus cum gubernacularel publicae tenebamus, C., Div., n. i, 3; I wrote the six books about theState at the time when I held the helm of the State. Eecordare tempusillud cum pater Curio maergns iacSbat in lecto, C., Ph., n. 18, 45; rememberthe time when Curio the father lay abed from grief.Longum illudtempus cum non ero magis me movet quam hoc exiguum, C., Att., xn. 18, 1 ;that long time (to come), when I shall not exist, has more effect on methan this scant (present time). Iam dilucescebat cum signum consul
372 TEMPORAL SENTENCES.dedit, L., xxxvi. 24, 6; by this time day was beginning to dawn, whenthe consul gave the signal. (See 581.)Ideal Second Person with the Subjunctive :Pater, hominum imnortalis est rnfjLtnja, Etiani torn vivit quom essecredas mortuam, PL., Pers., 355; Father, immortal is the ill-fame of theworld. It lives on even when you think that it is dead.But the presence of a temporal adverb does not mean necessarily thatthe cum clause ismerely temporal.REMARKS. i. Fuit cum commonly follows the analogyof othercharacteristic relatives (631), and takes the Subjunctive :Fuit tempus cum (= fuit cum) rura colerent homings, VARRO, R.R., in.i, 1 ;there was a time when all mankind tilled fields= were countrymen.The Indie, is rare.2. Meminl cum, / remember the time when, takes the Indie., butaudire cum takes the Subjv. parallel with the participle:Memini cum mihi desipere vidsbare, C., Fam., vn. 28, 1; / rememberthe time when you seemed to me to show the worst possible taste. AudlvlMetr odor urn cum dS ils ipsis rebus disputaret, C., Or., n. 90, 365; I haveheard Metrodorus discussing) these very matters.3. Peculiar is the use of cum with Lapses of Time. Lapses of Timeare treated as Designations of Time in Accusative or Ablative :Multi anni sunt cum (= multos annos) in aere meo est, C., Fain,., xv.14, 1; (it is) many years (that) he has been (230) in my debt. Permultlanni iam erant cum inter patricios magistrates tribundsque nulla certaminafuerant, L., ix. 33, 3; very many years had elapsed since there hadbeen any struggles between the patrician magistrates and the tribunes.Nondum centum et decent anni sunt cum (= ex quo = abbinc annos) dS pecunilsrepetundis lata lex est, C., Off., n. 21, 75; it is not yet one hundredand ten years since the law concerning extortion was proposed.NOTES. 1. In PLAUTUS cum with the Indie, may be explicative, causal, concessive,adversative. Explicative: salvos quom {that) advenis, gaudeo, Most., 1128. Causal: salvos quom (sinee) peregrg advenis, c6na detur,., 536. C'
TEMPORAL SENTENCES. 373temporal nsage of quandS is still the prevailing one in PLAUTUS, over seventy instanceshaving been collected. Of these the majority are in the Present and Future Spheres, inwhich the shift to the causal conception is very easy ; many of them are also iterative.In TEBENCE the temporal usage of quandS has disappeared unless possibly in onepassage (Ad., 206), but sporadic cases are found later, even in CICERO.Quoniam hinc est profecturus peregre thensaurum demonstravit mini,PL., Trin., 149. Turn, quandS I6gat5s Tyrum mlsimus, C., Leg.Agr., u. 16, 41.581. Cum Inversum. When the two actions are independent,cum is sometimes used with the one which seems to belogically the principal clause, just as in English.lam non longius blcliii via aberant, cum duas venissc legiones cognoscuiu,CAES., B.G., vi. 7, 2 ; they were now distant not more than two days'march, when they learned that two legions were come.Similar is the addition of an illustrative fact, often causal or adversative,by cum interea (interim), quidem, tamen, etc., with the Indicative.cum. When the actions of the two582. Explicativeclauses are coincident, cum is almost equivalent to its kindredrelative quod, in that.Aiacem, hunc quom vidSs, ipsum vides, PL., Copt., 615 when; you seehim, you see Ajax himself. Cum tacent, clamant, C., Cat., i. 8, 21 ;when(= in that) they are silent, they cry aloud. Dixi omnia cum hominemnominavl, PLIN., Ep., iv. 22, 4; I have said everything, in naming theman.583. Conditional cum. Cum with the Future, FuturePerfect, or Universal Present, is oftensi,if, with which it is sometimes interchanged.almost equivalent toCum poscgs, posce Latlng, Juv., xi. 148; when (if) you (shall) ask (foranything), ask in Latin. Cum veniet contra, digits compesce labellum,Juv., 1. 160 ;when (if)he meets you, padlock your lip with your finger.584. Iterative cum. Cum in the sense of quotiens, as oftenas, takes the Tenses of Iterative Action.lie,Solet cum se"purgat in me cSnferre omnem culpam, C., Alt., ix. 2 A, 1;is accustomed, when he clears himself, to put off all the blame on me.[Ager] cummultos annos requievit uberiorSs efferre fruggs solet, C., Br., 4,16 (567). Cum palam eius anull ad palmam converterat (Gyges) a nullovidebatur, C., Off., m. 9, 38 (567).REMARK. The Subjv. is also found (567, N.):Cum in ius duel dSbitorem vidissent, undique convolabant, L., n. 27, 8 ;whenever they saw a debtor taken to court, they made it a rule to hurrytogether from all quarters.
374 TEMPORAL SENTENCES.2. Circumstantial Cum.585. Historical cum. Cum, ivhen (as), is vised in narrativewith the Imperfect Subjunctive of contemporaneousaction,, with the Pluperfect Subjunctive of antecedent action,to characterise the temporal circumstances under which anaction took place.[Agesilaus] cum ex Aegypto reverterStur decgssit, N EP. ,xvn. 8, 6 ; Agesilausdied as he was returning from Egypt. Zenonem cum Athenis essemaudiebam frequenter, C., N. D., I. 21, 59; when I was (being) at Athens,1 heard Zeno (lecture) frequently. Ath6ni6ns5s cum statuerent ut nave'sconscenderent, Cyrsilum quendam suadentem ut in urbe mangrent, lapidibusobruerunt, C., Off., in. n, 48 (546).Cum Caesar Anconam occupavisset, urbem rellquimus, C., Finn., xvi. 12,2 ;when (as) Caesar had occupied Ancona (Caesar having occupiedAncona), I left the city. Attalus moritur alters et septuagesimo ann5,cum quattuor et quadraginta annos regnasset, L.. xxxin. 21, 1; Attalusdied in his seventy-second year, having reigned forty-four years.REMARK. The subordinate clause generally precedes. The circum-but sometimes the exact shadestantiality often appears as causality,cannot be distinguished. Owing to this implicit character, cum withthe Subjv. is a close equivalent to the participle, and often serves tosupply its absence. Compare 611 with 631, 2.NOTES. 1. How closely allied the ideas of time and circumstance are, in theseconstructions, is seen from such examples as this :Cum varicgs secabantur C. Mario, dolSbat, C., Tusc., n. 15, 35 (time). Marinacum secarBtur, ut supra dlxl, vetuit, etc., C., Tusc., n. 22, 53 (circumstances).Cum ad tribum Polliam ventum est, (date) et praeco cunctarStur (circumstances)citare ipsum c6ns5rem; Cita, inquit Nero, M. Llvium, L.,xxix.37,8.2. The use of temporal particles with the Pr. is necessarily limited to iterative orcausal (adversative) relations. Hence there is no room for the circumstantial cum withthe Suhjv. except so far as it is causal-adversative. Fut. and Put. Pf . are found chieflyin general or iterative relations.3. By attraction similar to that with quod (541, N. 3) and other relatives, cum diceret,with an Inf., is found where diceret would be more naturally omitted or inserted as(ut dlcebat) ; so cum adsentire sS diceret for cum adsentiret, L., i. 54,1. Similarlywith cum causal :" saying, as he did," C., Mil., 5, 12.586. Causal cum. Cum, when, whereas, since, seeing that,with any tense of the Subjunctive,is used to denote the reason,and occasionally the motive, of an action (580, N. 1).Quae cum ita sint, effectum est njhil esse malum quod turpe non sit, C.,Fin., in. 8, 29 ;since these things are so, it is made out (proved) thatnothing is bad that is not dishonourable. Cum [Ath6nas] tamquam ad
TEMPORAL SENTENCES. 375mercaturam bonarum artium sis profectus, inanem redlre turpissinmni est,C., Off., in. 2, 6; os (since) you set out for Athens as if to market for accomplishments,it would be utterly disgraceful to return empty (handed).Dolo erat pugnandum, cum par non esset armls, NEP., xxm. 10, 4 ;he hadto fight by stratagem, as lie (seeing that he) was not a match in arms.REMARKS. i. The characteristic nature of the Subjv. with cumcomes out more clearly in the causal connection, owing to the parallelwith utpote, quippe, and the relative (626, N.).2. The primary tenses are more common, in this connection, but thehistorical tenses are abundant enough. With the latter the causalrelation need never be emphasised.587. Concessive and Adversative cum. Causal cum,whereas, becomes Concessive cum, wliereas, although, withthe Subjunctive, when the cause is not sufficient ;the relationis often adversative, and there is no limitation as totense.The temporal notion is still at work; whether the times are for oragainst an action is a matter outside of language (580, N. 1).Nihil mS adiuvit cum posset, C., Att., ix. 13, 3 ;he gave me no assistance,although (at a time when) he had it in his power. Cum primiordines hostium conciclissent, tamen acerrime reliqul resistebant, CAES.,B.G., vn. 62, 4; although the first ranks of the enemy had fallen (beencut to pieces), nevertheless the rest resisted most vigorously. Perlre artemputamus nisi apparet, cum dSsinat ars esse, si apparet, QUINT., iv. 2, 127;we think that (our) art is lost unless it shows, whereas it ceases to be artif it shows.REMARKS. i. To emphasise the adversative idea, tamen is oftenadded in the principal clause.2. Adversative cum n5n, whereas not, is often conveniently translatedwithout; cum non Inferior fuisset, C., Off., i. 32, 116 ;withoutbeing inferior.588. Cum turn. i. When cum, when, turn, then, have thesame verb, the verb isput in the Indicative. Cum turn thenhas the force of both and especially, and a strengtheningadverb, such as maxime, praecipue, is often added to thelatter.(Pausanias) consilia cum patriae turn sib! ininuca capiebat NEP., ,iv. 3, 3 ;Pausanias conceived plans that were hurtful both to his country andespecially to himself.
cum3/6 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES.2. When they have different verbs, the verb with cum isusually in the Indicative, but may be in the Subjunctive,especially when the actions of the two verbs are not contemporarythis ; Subjunctive often has a concessive force.[Sisennae historia|facile omnes vincat superiores. turn indicat tanienquantum absit a summ5, C., Br., 64, 228; although the history of Sisennaeasily surpasses all former histories, yet it shows how far it is from thehighest (mark).CONDITIONAL SENTENCES.589. In Conditional Sentences the clause which containsthe condition (supposed cause) is called the Prdtasis, thatwhich contains the consequenceis called the Apodosis.Logically, Protasis is Premiss ; and Apodosis, Conclusion.Grammatically, the Apodosis is the Principal, the Protasisthe Dependent, clause.590. Sign ofthe Conditional. The common conditionalparticle is si, if.NOTES. 1. SI is a locative case, literally, so, in those circumstances (comp. si-c, so,and the English : " I would by combat make her good, so were I a man." SHAKE-SPEARE). Hence, conditional clauses with si may be regarded as adverbs in the Abl.case, and are often actually represented by the Abl. Absolute.Sic is found as the correlative of si in the colloquial language, as : sic scrlbgs allquid,si vacabis (C., Aft., xn. 38, 2) sic ;ignovisse putato me tibi, si cenas liodiemecum (H., Ep., i. 7, 69). Instead of sic, its equivalent turn occurs at all periods, beingin the Augustan time restricted to formal uses.is alsoIgiturfound as late as CICEKO,who likewise uses ita. Other particles are post-classical.2. The connection with the Causal Sentence is shown by si quidem, which in laterLatin is almost = quoniam ;see 595, K. 5.3. The temporal particles cum and quandS, when, and the locative ubi,are alsoused to indicate conditional relations in which the idea of Time or Space is involved.591. Negative of The si. negative of si is si non or nisi.(a) With si non, if not, the non negatives the single word ;hence an opposing positive is expected, either in a precedingcondition, or in the conclusion. Therefore, si non is the rule :i .When the positive of the same verb precedes.SI fSceris, magnam habebS gratiam si non;feceris, IgnOscam, C., Fam.,v. 19 ; if you do it, I will be very grateful to you; if you do not, I willforgive (you).
CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 3772. When the Condition is concessive ;in this case the principalclause often contains an adversative particle.Si mihl bona r5 publica frul non licuerit, at carebo mala, C., Mil., 34,93 ; if I shall not be allowed to enjoy good government, 1 shall at leastbe rid of bad.(b) With nisi, unless, the negative ni- refers to the principalclause, which is thus denied, if the conditional clause isaccepted ;hence :1. Nisi adds an exception or restriction to the leadingstatement. Compare the general use of nisi, except (R. 2).Nisi molestumst, paucls percontarier (130, 6) volo ego ex t5, PL., Rud.,120; if it is not disagreeable, I wish to ask you a few questions.So the formulae nisi fallor (ni fallor is found first in OVID), nisi m8omnia fallunt (C., Att., viu. 7, 1), and the like.2. Nisi is in favorite use after negatives.Parvl (= nihill) sunt foris anna nisi est consilium domi, C., Off., I. 22,76 (411, R. 2). [Non] possem vivere nisi in lltterls viverem, C., Fam., ix.could not live unless I lived in study. Memoria minuitur nisi26, 1 ;Iearn exerceas, C., Cat.M., 7, 21; memory wanes unless (except)you exerciseit. (SI n5n exerceas, in case you fail to exercise it.)So more often than si nSn, in asseverations. Peream nisi sollicitussum, C., Fam., xv. 19, 4 ; may I die if I am not troubled.REMARKS. i. Sometimes the difference is unessential :Nisi Curi5 fuisset, hodiS t5 muscae comSdissent, Cf. QUINT., xi. 3, 129;if it had not been for Curio, the flies would have eaten you up this day.SI n5n fuisset would be equally correct.2. Nisi is often used after negative sentences or equivalents in thesignification of but, except, besides, only :Inspice quid portem nib.il hie nisi trlste ; videbis, Ov., Tr., in. i, 9;examine what I am bringing ; you will see nothing here except (what is)sad. Falsus honor iuvat et mendax Infamia terret, quern nisi mendosumet medicandum? H., Ep.,i. 16, 39 ; "false honour charms and lyingslander scares," whom but the faulty and the fit for physic ?So nisi si, except in case, with a following verb ;occasional in earlyLatin, more common later, but not in CAES. (B. G. , i. 31, 14, is disputed),SALL., VERG., HOR. Nisi ut, except on condition that, is post-classical.Necesse est Casilinenses se dedere Eanniball;nisi si malunt fame* perlre,C., Inv., n. 57, 171; the people of Casilinum must needs surrender toHannibal ; unless (except in case) they prefer to perish by hunger.3. Nisi quod introduces an actual limitation with the exception, that(525, 2, N. 2) ; so praeterquam quod ;nisi ut (e. g. C., Imp., 23, 67).
378 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES.Nihil acciderat [Polycratl] quod nollet nisi quod annlum quo deiectabaturin marl abiecerat, C., Fin,, v. 30, 92 ; nothing had happened to Polycratesthat he could not have wished, except that he had thrown into thesea a ring in which he took delight (= a favorite ring). Nihil peccatnisi quod nihil peccat, PLIX., Ep., ix. 26, 1; he makes no blunder exceptthat he makes no blunder (" faultily faultless ").4. Nisi forte (found very often in CICERO, very rarely earlier), unless,perhaps, nisi vSro (peculiar to CICERO), unless, indeed, with the Indie.,either limit a previous statement, or make an ironical concession :Nemo" fere saltat sobrius nisi forte Insanit, C., Mur., 6, 13; there isscarce any one that dances (when) sober, unless perhaps he is cracked.Plenum forum est eorum hominum,. . . nisi .vero paucos fuisse arbitramini,C., Sull., g, 28; the forum is full of those men; unless, indeed, youthink they were (but) few.NOTES. 1. Nisi is sometimes strengthened by tamen, but, yet.Nisi etiam hie opperiar tamen paulisper, PL., Aid., 805 ; Of. C., Alt., v. 14, 3.Even without tamen it is adversative in colloquial Latin, especially after nescio.2. Nl is found mostly in early Latin and the poets, and in legal formulas and colloquialphrases. It is rare in CICERO, and never used in CAESAR.Peream nl piscem putavl esse, VARRO, S.R., in. 3, 9 ; may I die if I did notthink it wa-s a fish.3. Nisi forte is found occasionally with the Subjv. from APULBIUS on.592. Two Conditions excluding each the other. Whentwo conditions exclude each the other, si is used for the first ;sin, if not (but if), for the second.Sin is further strengthened by autem, vero (rare), but;minus, less (not); secus (rare), otherwise; aliter, else.Mercatura, si tennis est, sordida putanda est sin; magna et copiosa, nonest admodum vituperanda, C., Off.,I. 42, 151; mercantile business, if itis petty, is to be considered dirty (work); if (it is) not (petty, but) greatand abundant (= conducted on a large scale), it is not to be found faultwith much.REMARK. If the verb or predicate is to be supplied from thecontext, si minus, if less (not), sin minus, sin aliter, */ otherwise, arecommonly used, rarely si non :Educ tecum omnes tuos si ; minus, quam plurimos, C., Cat., I. 5, 10;take out with you all your (followers) ; if not, as many as possible.Odero si potero ; si n5n, invitus amabo, Ov., Am., in. n, 35 (242, R. 2).NOTE. Much less common are simple orsi, si strengthened by non, nihil, nflllus,minus, or by autem, vSro;or sed si, at si (COL.), si contra (HOR., PLIN.). Sin mayalso be followed by n5n, but commonly only when one or more words intervene.PCma cruda si sunt, vix Svelluntur ;si mattira, decidunt, C., Cat.M., 19, 71;iffruit is green it can hardly be plucked, if rii>e it falls (of it
CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 379593. Other Forms of the Protasis. i. The Protasis maybe expressed by a Relative.ftul vidgret, urbem captam dlceret, C., Verr., iv. 23, 52; whoso had seenit, had said that the city was taken. Mlraretur qui turn cerneret, L.,xxxiv. 9, 4 (258).2. The Protasis may be contained in a Participle.Si latet ars, pr5dest ;affert deprensa pudorem, Ov., A. A., n. 313 ; art,if concealed, does good ; detected, it brings shame. Maxima's virtutSsiacere omngs necesse est voluptate dominante, C., Fin., n. 35, 117 ;all thegreatest virtues must necessarily lie prostrate, if the pleasure (of thesenses) is mistress. Nihil [potest] gvenlre nisi causa anteegdente, C., Fat.,15, 34; nothing can happen, unless a cause precede.3. The Protasis maybe involved in a modifier.Fgcgrunt id servl Mil8nis quod suos quisque servos in tali rg facere voluisset,C., Mil., 10, 29 ;the servants of Milo did what each man wouldhave wished his servants to do in such case (si quid tale accidisset). Atbene n5n poterat sine ptLr5 pectore vivl, LUCR., v. 18 ;but there could be nogood living without a clean heart (nisi purum pectus esset). Neque enimmateriam ipsam (cgnsgbant) cohaergre potuisse si nulla vl contingrgtur,neque vim sine aliqua materia, C., Ac., i. 6, 24.4. The Protasis may be expressed by an Interrogative, or,what is more common, by an Imperative or equivalent.Trlstis es ?indignor quod sum tibi causa doloris, Ov., Tr., iv. 3, 33 (542).Cgdit amor rgbus : rgs age, tutus eris, Ov., Rem.Am., 144 ;love yields tobusiness ; be busy (if you plunge into business), you will be safe. Immuta(verbOrum collocationem), perierit totargs, C., Or., 70, 232 (244, E. 4).Classification of Conditional Sentences.594. Conditional sentences may be divided into threeclasses, according to the character of the Protasis :I. Logical Conditional Sentences : si, with the Indicative.II. Ideal Conditional Sentences : si, chiefly with Presentand Perfect Subjunctive.III. Unreal Conditional Sentences :si, with Imperfectand Pluperfect Subjunctive.NOTES. 1. In some grammars of Greek and Latin, conditional sentences, and sentencesinvolving conditional relations, have been divided into particular and general.Whether a condition be particular or general depends simply on the character of theApodosis. Any form of the Conditional Sentence may be general, if it implies a rule ofaction. The forme for Iterative action have been given (566, 567).
380 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES.2. Conditional Sentences with the Subjunctive (Ideal and Unreal) are best understoodby comparing the forms of the Ideal and Unreal wish which have the same mood andthe same tenses. The Unreal wish of the Past is the Plupf ., that of the Present is theIrnpf. Subjunctive. The Ideal wish is the Pr. and Pf. Subjunctive. The same temporalrelations appear in the conditional.I. LOGICAL CONDITIONAL SENTENCES.595. The Logical Conditional Sentence simply states theelements in question, according to the formula :then that is so ; if this is not so, then that is not so.if this is so,Itmay be compared with the Indicative Question.The Protasis is in the Indicative : the Apodosis is generallyin the Indicative ;but in future relations any equivalent ofthe Future (Subjunctive, Imperative) may be used.PROTASIS.APODOSIS.Si id credis,If you believe that,SI id cr edebas,If you believed that,erras,you are going wrong.errabas,you were going wrong,Si id cr edidisti,errasti,If you (have) believed that,you went (have gone) wrong.SI id cred6s,errabis,If you (shall) believe that,you ivill (be) go(iag) wrong (234, E.).SI id crSdideris,erraver is,If you (shall have) believe(d) that, you will have gone (will go) wrong.SI quid crSdidisti,erras,If you have believed anything(= when you believe anything), you go wrong. Comp. 569.SI quid crgdideras,errabas,If you had believed anythingwhen ( you believed anything), you ivent wrong.SI splritum ducit, vlvit, C., Inv., I. 46, 86; if Tie is drawing (his) 'breath(breathing) Tie is living. Parvi sunt foris anna nisi est consilium doml,C., Off., i. 22, 76 (411, E. 2). Si occidl, rgctS feel ;sed non occidi, QUINT.,rv. 5, 13 ; if I killed him, I did right ; but I did not kill him. [Naturam]si sequBmur ducem, numquam aberrabimus, C., Off., I. 28, 100; if we(shall) follow nature (as our) guide, we shall never go astray. [Improbos]si meus consulatus sustulerit, multa saecula propagarit rel publicaewith the de-C., Cat., ii. 5, 11; if my consulship shall have done awaystructives, it loill have added many ages to the life of the State. Si pSscondoluit, si dens, ferre non possumus, C., Tusc., n. 22, 52 (567). Stomachabatursenex, si quid asperius dixeram, C., N.D., i. 33, 93 (567). Vlvam, sivivet ;si cadet ilia, cadam, PROP., n. (in.) 28 (25), 42 (8); let me live, ifshe lives; if she falls, let me fall. Nunc si forte poles, sed non potes,optima coniunx, flnitis gaude tot mini morte malls, Ov., Ti:. in. 3, 55;
CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 381now, if haply you can, but you cannot, noble wife, rejoice that so manyevils have been finished for me by death. Flectere si nequeo superos,Acheronta mov5b8, V., A., vn. 312; */ I can't bend the gods above, I'llrouse (all) hell below. SI tot exempla virtutis non movent, nihil umquammovebit ;si tanta clacles vilem vitam non fecit, nulla faciet, L., xxn. 60,14; if so many examples of valour stir you not, nothing will ever do it ;if so great a disaster has not made life cheap, none (ever) wilLDesinSstimere, si sperare desierls, SEN., E.M., i. 5, 7 ; you will cease to fear, ifyou (shall have) cease(d) to hope. Peream male, si non optimum erat,H., S., n. i, 6 ; may I die the death if it was not best. SI volebas participarl,auferres (= auferre debebas) dlmidium domum, PL., True., 748; ifyou wished to share in it, you should have taken the half home. Respirar5si te vldero, C., Att., n. 24, 5; I shall breathe again, if I shall haveseen you.REMARKS. i. After a verb of Saying or Thinking (Oratio Obllqua),the Protasis must be put in the Subjv., according to the rule.(SI id credis, erras.) Dico, te, si id credas, errare.Dm, te, si id crederes, errare.(Si id cre"des, errabis.)(SI id credidisti, errastl.)For examples, see Oratio Obllqua, 657.2. The Subjv. is used by Attraction :Dico, te, si id credas, erraturum esse.Dlxl, te, si id crederes, erraturum esse.Dico, te, si id crediderls, errasse.Dlxl, te, si id credidisses, errasse.[ArSneolae] rete texunt ut si quid inhaeserit confidant, C., N.D., n. 48,123 (567). (SI quid inhaesit conflciunt.)3. The Ideal Second Person takes the Subjv. in connection withthe Universal Present :(Senectus) plena est voluptatis si ilia scias uti, SEN., E.M., 12, 4; oldage is full of pleasure if you know (if one knows) how to enjoy it.Memoria minuitur nisi earn exerceas, C., Cat.M., 7, 21 (591, b. 2).4. Sive sive (seu seu) almost invariably takes the Logical form.(496, 2.) The Subjv. is occasionally used by Attraction or with theIdeal Second Person.Seu vicit, ferociter mstat victls ;seu victus est, Instaurat cum victoribuscertamen, L., xxvn. 14, 1 ; if he vanquishes (567), he presses the vanquishedfuriously ; if he is vanquished, he renews the, struggle, with thevanquishers.5. Slquidem, as giving the basis for a conclusion, often approachesIn this case the Apodosis precedes.Molesta veritas, slquidem ex ea nascitur odium, C., Lael., 24, 89;the causal sense (590, N. 2).truth is burdensome, if indeed (since) hatred arises from it.6. SI mod6, if only, serves to limit the preceding statement.
382 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES.A deo tantum rationem habemus, si modo habemus. C., N.D., in. 28,71 ;all that we have from God is (bare) reason, if only we have it.SI vSro when thus used is ironical (C., Ph., vin. 8, 24). SI tamenseems to be post-classical.NOTES. 1. Phraseological are si quaeris (quaerimus) in a sense approaching thatof profecto (C., Off., m. 20, 80 ; Tusc., m. 29, 73): SI dls placet, if the gods will,often ironical (Cf. TEE., Eun., 919 ; C., Fin., n. 10, 31). SI forte, peradventure (C.,Or., ra. 12, 47 ; MU., 38, 104).2. It will be observed that the tense involved depends in each member upon thesense. But for this very reason certain combinations would be uncommon. ThusPr. Impf. and Fut. Pr. are rare ;Pr. Put. is more common in ante-classical andpost-classical Latin than Fut. Fut., the Pres. being used by anticipation. CICEROprefers Fut. Fut. CICERO also uses frequently Fut. Pf . Fut. Pf ., which is also foundelsewhere, but rarely. Pf . Fut. is found first in CICERO, and is never common ;alsoImpf. Impf. Plupf. Impf. is mostly found in ante-classical and post-classical Latin.The Pf., by anticipation for Fut. Pf., is not nnfrequent in early Latin. So C., Fam.,xn. 6, 2 :(Brfitus) si cSnservatus erit, vlcimus (237) ; Of. SEN., Ben., in. 62, 145.PL., Poen., 671, shows us our only example of Pr. Fut. Pf . : Rex sum, si ego iliumad me adlexero.II.IDEAL CONDITIONAL SENTENCES.596. The Ideal Conditional Sentence represents the matteras still in suspense. The supposition is more or less fanciful,and no real test is to be applied. There is often a wishfor or against. The point of view is usually the Present.i. The Protasis isput in the Present Subjunctive for continuedaction, and in the Perfect Subjunctive for completionor attainment.The Apodosisis in the Present or Perfect Subjunctive.The Imperative and Future Indicative or equivalents areoften found. The Universal Present is frequently used,especially in combination with the Ideal Second Person (595,B. 3 ; 663, 2).On the difference between Subjunctive and Future, see 257.PROTASIS.APODOSIS.SI id credas,erres,If you should (were to) believe that,you would be going wrong.Si id credas,erraveris,If you should (were to) believe that,you would go wrong.Si id credideris,erres,1. If you should (prove to) have believedthat (Perfect ;Action Past or Future), you would be going wrong.2. If you should (come to) believe that (Aor. ;Action Future),SI id credideris,If you (should have) believe(d) that,you would be going wrong.erraveris (rare),you would (have)
CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 383Si vlcinus tuus equum meliorem habeat quam tuus est, tuumne equummalls an illlus? C., Inv., i. 31, 52 ; if your neighbour (were to) have aletter horse than yours is, would you prefer your horse or his 9 SIgladium quis apud te sana mente deposuerit, repetat Insaniens, redderepeccatum sit, officium non reddere, C., Off., in. 25, 95 ; if a man in soundmind were to deposit (to have deposited) a sword with you, (and) reclaimit (when) mad, it would be wrong to return it, right not to return it.Hanc viam si asperam esse negem, mentiar, C., Sest., 46, 100 ; if I shouldsay that this way is not rough, I should lie. SI nunc mS suspendammeam operam luserim, et mels inimicis voluptatem creaverim, PL., Cos.,424; should I hang myself now, I should (thereby) (have) fool(ed) mywork away, and give(n) to my enemies a charming treat.Ciceroni nemoducentSs nunc dederit nummos nisi fulserit anulus ingens, Juv., vn. 139 ;no one would give Cicero nowadays two hundred two-pences unless ahuge ring glittered (on his hand).SI quis furioso praecepta det, erit ipsoif one should give advice to aquern monebit, Insanior, SEN., E.M., 94, 17;madman, he will be more out of his mind than the very man whom headvises. SI valeant homines, ars tua, Phoebe, iacet, Ov., Tr., iv. 3, 78;should men keep well, your art, Phoebus, is naught. 5tia si tollas,perisre Cupldinis arcus, Ov., Bern. Am., 139 (204, N. 6). (Senectus) estplena voluptStis, si ilia scias uti, SEN., E.M., 12, 4 (595, E. 3). Memoriaminuitur nisi earn exerceas, C., Cat.M., 7, 21 (591, b. 2). Nulla est excusatiopeccatl, si amlcl causa peccaverls, C., Lael., n, 37; it is no excusefor a sin to have sinned for the sake of a friend.be the Past. In that case the2. The Point of View mayProtasis is found in the Imperfect, very rarely the PluperfectSubjunctive, and the Apodosis has corresponding forms.This usage, however, is rare, inasmuch as it coincides inform with the Unreal Condition, from which, it is distinguishableonly by a careful study of the context. When foundwith indefinite persons, the construction is the Potential ofthe Past.The idea of Partial Obliquity frequently enters, in whichcase simay often be translated, in case that.Quod usu non veniebat de eo si quis legem constituent non tarn prohib5revideretur quam adinonere, C., Tull., 4, 9; if one should make a lawabout that which was not customary, he would seem not so much to preventas to warn. (Present si quis constituat, videatur.) Si Alfenus turn:indicium accipere vellet, denique omnia quae postulates facere voluisset, quidagergs 1 C., Quinct., 26, 83 ;in case Alfenus was willing then to undertakethe trial, and should have been willing afterwards to do all thatyou required, what were you to do ? (See the whole passage Present :
384 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES.si nunc velit,. . .voluerit, agas.) Si tribuni mg triumphare probibgrent,Furium et Aemilium testgs citaturus fui, L., xxxvni. 47; should the tribunesprevent me from triumphing, I was going to summon Furius andAemilius as witnesses. Quid faceret 1 si vivere vellet, Seianus roganduserat, SEN., Cons.Marc., 22, 6 ;what was he to do ? if he wished to liveSejanus was (the man) to oe asked. See TAG., Ann., in. 13. Erat Quinctius,si egdergs, placabilis, L., xxxvi. 32, 5 ; Quinctius was, if youyielded to him, (sure to be) placable. (Est si cedas.) 81 luxuriae temperaret,avaritiam non timgrgs, TAC., H., n. 62 ; if he were to controlhis love of pleasure, you should not have feared avarice. (SI temperet,non timeas.) Cur igitur et Camillus doleret, si haec . . . gventura putaret 1et ego doleam si. . .putem? C., Tusc., I. 37, 90. (Present: doleat si putet.)REMARKS. i. The Ideal is not controlled by impossibility or improbability,and the lively fancy of the Eoman often employs the Idealwhere we should expect the Unreal. (Comp. 256, N. 2.) This is morecommon in early Latin.Tii si Me sis, aliter sentias, TER., And., 310; if you were I (put yourselfin my place), you would think differently. Haec si tgcum patrialoquatur, nonne impetrare debeatl C., Cat., I. 8, 19; if your countryshould (were to) speak thus with you, ought she not to get (what shewants) ? So C., Fin., iv. 22, 61.2. Sometimes the conception shifts in the course of a long sentence :SI reviviscant et tgcum loquantur quid talibus viris responderes 1 C.,Fin., iv. 22, 61: if they should come to life again, and speak with youwhat answer would you make to such men ?3. When non possum is followed by nisi (si n5n),the Ideal of the Past, after the past tense, and mayof the Present after a primary tense.the Protasis hashave the idealNeque munitiones Caesaris prohibere poterat, nisi proelio decertare vellet,CAES., B.C., in. 44. See MADVIG on C., Fin., in. 21, 70.4. In comparing Ideal and Unreal Conditionals, exclude future verbssuch as posse, velle, etc. The future sense of such Unreal Conditionalscomes from the auxiliary.5. In Oratio Obliqua the difference between Ideal and Logical Futureis necessarily effaced, so far as the mood is concerned. (656.)III.UNREAL CONDITIONAL SENTENCES.597. The Unreal Conditional sentence is used of thatwhich is Unfulfilled or Impossible, and is expressed by theImperfect Subjunctive for continued action generally, inopposition to the Present and; by the Pluperfect Subjunctiveuniformly in opposition to the Past.
CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 385The notion of Impossibility comes from the irreversible character ofthe Past Tense. Compare the Periphrastic Conjug. Perfect and Imperfect.Any action that, is decided is considered Past (compare C.,Off., n. 21, 75). (See 277, 3, N.)PROTASIS.SI id crSderSs,If you believed (were believing) that, [youdo not,]errargs,APODOSIS.you would be going wrong.Si id crSdidissSs,erxavissSs,If you had believed that, [you did not,] you would have gone wrong.Sapientia non expetergtur, si nihil efficeret, C., Fin., i. 13, 43 ;wisdomwould not be sought after, if it did no practical good. Caederem tS, nisiIrascerer, SEN., Ira, i. 15, 3; Ishould flog you, if I were not getting angry.Si ibi t6 esse sclssem, ad t5 ipse venissem, C., Fin., i. 8 ; if I had knownyou were there, I should have come to you myself.Hectora quis nosset,felix si TrSia fuisset ? Ov., Tr., IT. 3, 75 ;who would know (of) Hector, ifTroy had been happy ? Nisi ante Roma profectus esses, nunc earn certsrelinquerSs, C., Fam., vn. n, 1; if you had not departed from Rome before,you would certainly leave it now. Ego nisi peperissem, Roma n5noppugnaretur nisi filium ;haberem, libera in llbera patria mortua essem,L. ,n. 40, 8 ;had I not become a mother, Rome would not be besieged ;had I not a son, Ishould have died a free woman in a free land.REMARKS. i. The Impf. Subjv. is sometimes used in opposition tocontinuance from a point iu the Past into the Present. This is necessarilythe case when the Protasis is in the Impf., and the Apodosis inthe Plupf., except when the Impf. denotes opposition to a generalstatement, which holds good both for Past and for Present :Non tarn facile opes Carthaginis tantae concidissent, nisi Sicilia classibusnostrls pateret, Cf. C., Verr., n. i, 3 the ; great resources of Carthage (Carthagewith her great resources) would not have fallen so readily, if Sicilyhad not been (as it still continues to be) open to our fleets. SI pudoremhaberSs, ultimam mini pensionem remlsissSs, SEN., E.M., 29, 10 ; if youhad (= you had not, as you have not) any delicacy, you would have letme off from the last payment, Memoriam ipsam cum voce perdidissgmus,si tarn in nostra potestate esset obllvlscl quam tacSre, TAG., Agr., 2, 4 ;we should have lostmemory itself, together with utterance, if it were asmuch in our power to forget as to keep silent.The Impf. in both members, referring to the Past, always admits otanother explanation than that of the Unreal ;thus we have a caseof Representation (654, N.) inProtogenes si lalysum ilium suum caeno oblitum vidSret, magnum, credo,acciperet dolorem, C., Alt., n. 21, 4; if Protogenes could see that famouslalysus of his besmeared with mud, he would feel a mighty pang. SeePL., Aul, 742.25
,Compare386 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES.2. In Unreal Conditions, after a negative Protasis, the Apodosis issometimes expressed by the Impf. Indie., when the action is representedas interrupted (233); by the Plupf. and Hist. Pf., when the conclusionis confidently anticipated (254, K. 3).Labebar longius, nisi mg retinuissem, C., Leg., i. 19, 52 (254, R. 3).This usage after a positive is cited first in the post-Augustan writers.Cases like C., Verr., v. 42, 129; L., xxii. 28, 13, do not belong here.Omnlno supervacua erat doctrina, si natura sufficeret, QUINT. , IT. 8, 8(254, R. 3). Peractum erat bellum, si Pompeium Brundisil opprimerepotuisset, FLOR., n. 13, 19 ;the war was (had been) finished, if he hadbeen able to crush Pompey at Brundusium.The Impf. Indie, is sometimes found in the Protasis :Ipsanx tibl epistolam misissem, nisi (v.l., sed) tarn subito fratris puer proficiscebatur,C., Alt., vin. I, 2; I should have sent you the letter itself, ifmy brother's servant was not starting so suddenly.3. (a) The Indicative is the regular construction in the Apodosiswith verbs which signify Possibility or Power, Obligation or Necessityso with the active and passive Periphrastic vix, paene, scarcely,hardly, and the like. In many cases it is difficult to distinguish thisusage from that of the Ideal (596, 2).Consul esse qui potui, nisi eum vitae cursum tenuissem 1 C., Rep., i. 6,10 ;how could I have been consul, if I had not kept that course of life ?Antoni gladios potuit contemnere, si sic omnia dixisset, Juv.,x. 123 ;hemight have despised Antony's swords, if he had thus said all (that hedid say). Emendaturus, si licuisset, eram, Ov., Tr., I. 7, 40 ;I shouldhave removed the faults, if I had been free (to do it).Pens iter paenehostibus dedit (paene dedit = dabat = daturas erat), ni Onus vir fuisset, L.,ii. 10, 2; the bridge well nigh gave a passage to the enemy, had it notbeen for one man.(b) With the Indie, the Possibility and the rest are stated absolutely ;when the Subjv. is used the Possibility and the rest are conditioned asin any other Unreal sentence.quid facere potuissem, nisi turn consul fuissem, with consul essequi potui, nisi eum vitae cursum tenuissem, C., Rep., i. 6, 10. Qui sifuissetmeliore fortuna, fortasse austerior et gravior esse potuisset, C., Pis., 29, 71.4. In Oratio Obliqua the Protasis is unchanged the Apodosis is;formed by the Periphrastic Pr. and Pf. Inf. (149), for the Active, futurum(fore) ut, futurum fuisse ut for passive and Supineless verbs.A. Dico (dixl), te, si id crederes, erraturum esse.B. Dico (dixi), te, si id cr6didiss6s, erraturum fuisse.A. Dicoidixi), si id crederes, fore ut deciperSris.B. Dico (dixi), si id credidisses, futurum fuisse ut decipereris.A is very rare ; A, theoretical. For the long form, B, the simple
quln,CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 387Perfect Infinitive is found. Examples, see 659, K. In B, fuisse isomitted occasionally in later Latin ; TAC., Ann., i. 33, etc.5. (a) When the Apodosis of an Unreal Conditional is mad,e to dependon a sentence which requires the Subjv., the Plupf. is turnedinto the Periphrastic Pf. Subjv. the Impf. form is unchanged.;jN5n dubito, quln, si id crgderSs, errares,]/ do not doubt, that, if you believed that, you would be going wrong.Non dubitabam, si id credidisses, erraturus fueris,I did not doubt, J that, if you had believed that, you would have gone wrong.Honestum tale est ut, vel si Ignorarent id homings, esset laudabile, Cf.C., Fin., ii. 15, 49; virtue is a thing to deserve praise, even if men didnot know it. Ea res tantum tumultum ac fugam praebuit ut nisi castraPunica extra urbem fuissent, effusura se omnis pavida multitude fuerit, L.,xxvi. 10, 1 ;that matter caused so much tumult and flight (= so wild apanic), that had not the Punic camp been outside the city the whole,frightened multitude, would have poured forth. Nee dubium erat quln,si tarn pauci simul oblre omnia possent, terga daturi hostes fuerint, L., iv.38, 5 ;there was no doubt that, if it had been possible for so small anumber to manage everything at the same time, the enemy would haveturned their backs. Die quidnam facturus fueris, si e5 tempore censorfuissSs 1 L., ix. 33, 7 ; tell (me) what you would have done, if you hadbeen censor at that time f See C., Pis., 7, 14.(b) The Periphrastic Plupf. Subjv. occurs rarely, and then only inthe Dependent Interrogative. The only examples cited are from LIVY.Sublbat cogitatio animum, quonam modo tolerabilis futura Etruria fuissetsi quid in Samnio adversi evenisset ; L., x. 45, 3.(c) Potui (254, R. i) commonly becomes potuerim, and ful with thePeriphrastic passive in -dus becomes fuerim, after all tenses.Haud dubium fuit quln, nisi ea mora intervenisset, castra eo die Punicacapl potuerint, L., xxiv. 42, 3; there was no doubt that, had not that delayinterfered, the Punic camp could have been taken on that day. Quae(res) sua sponte nefaria est ut etiamsl lex non esset, magnopere vltandafuerit, C., Verr., i. 42, 108.(d) The passive Conditional is unchanged :Id ille si repudiasset, dubitatis quln el vis esset allata? C.,Sest.,2g,62 ; if he had rejected that, do you doubt that force would have beenbrought (to bear) on him ?The active form is rarely unchanged (L., ir. 33, 9).In the absenceof the Periphrastic tense the Inf. with potuerim is often a sufficientsubstitute; see L., xxxn. 28, 6.NOTE. In PLAUTUS and TERENCE, absque with the Abl. and esset (foret) iafound a few times instead of nisi (si non) with Nom., and esset (fuisset) in the senseifit were not (had not been) for.Nam absque te esset, hodie numquam ad solem occasum viverem, PL.,Men., 1022.Cf. Liv., n. 10, 2 (R. 3, above).
388 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES.INCOMPLETE CONDITIONAL SENTENCES.598. Omission of the Conditional Sign. Occasionally themembers of a Conditional sentence are put side by side withouta Conditional sign.An ille mihf (351) liber, cul mulier imperat 7 poscit, dandum est ; vocat,veniendum est ; eicit, abeundum; minatur, extime'scendum, C., Parad., 5, 2;or is he free (tell) me, to whom a woman gives orders ? she asks, he mustgive ; she calls, he must come ; she turns out (of door), he must go ; shethreatens, he must be frightened. Unum cognorfs, omnis noris, TER.,Ph., 265; you know one, you know ctll. DedissSs hulc animo par corpus,fecisset quod optabat, PLIN., Ep., i. 12, 8; had you given him a bodythat was a match, for his spirit, he ivould have accomplished what hedesired.599. Omission of the Verb of the Protasis. When theverb of the Protasis is omitted, either the precise form or thegeneral idea of the verb is to be supplied from the Apodosis.SI quisquam (= si quisquam fuit), Cato sapiens fait, Cf. C., LaeL, 2, 9;if any one ^cas wise, Cato was. Educ tecum omnes tu5s ; si minus, quamplurimos, C., Cat., i. 5, 10 (592, R.).600. Total Omission of the Protasis. i. The Protasis isoften contained in a participle or involved in the context ;for examples see 593, 2 and 3.2. The Potential Subjunctive is sometimes mechanicallyexplained by the omission of an indefinite Protasis (257, N. 2).Nimio plus quam velim [Volscorum] ingenia sunt mobilia, L., n. 37, 4;the dispositions of the Volscians are (too) much more unstable than Ishould like. Tuam mihi darl vellem eloquentiara. C., N.D., u. 59, 147; Icould wish to have your eloquence given me. Tarn f61ix essgs quam fb"rmosissimavellem, Ov., Am., i. 8, 27 (302). (TItinam esses !)601. Omission and Involution of the Apodosis. TheApodosis is omitted in Wishes (261), and implied after verbsand phrases denoting Trial (460, 2). It is often involved inOratio Obllqua, and sometimes consists in the general notionof Result, Ascertainment,
CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 389is loved. (lugurtha) timgbat iram ( ng irasceretur) senatus, nl paruissetlegatis, S., lug., 25, 7 ; lugurtha was afraid of the anger of the senate(that the senate would get angry) in case he did not (should not have)obey(ed) the legates.CONDITIONAL SENTENCES OF COMPARISON.602. The Apodosisis omitted in comparisons with ut si,velut si, ac si, quam si (rare), tamquam si, quasi, or simplyvelut and tamquam, as if.The verb is to be supplied from the Protasis, as is commonin correlative sentences. The Mood is the Subjunctive.The tenses follow the rule of sequence, rather than theordinary use of the conditional. In English, the translationimplies the unreality of the comparison.-Noll timere quasi [ quam tiineas si] assem elephants des, QUINT., VI.3, 59; don't be afraid, as if you were giving a penny to an elephant.Parvi prlmo ortu sic iacent tamquam [= iaceant si] oranlno sine ammo sint,C., Fin., v. 15, 42 ; babies, ivhen first born, lie (there), as if they had nomind at all. Hie est obstandum, mllites, velut si ante Eomana moeniapugnSmus, L., xxi. 41, 15;here (is where) we must oppose them, soldiers,as if we were fighting before the walls of Rome (velut obstSmus, si pugnemus,as we ^vould oppose them, if we were to fight). MS iuvat, velutipse in parte laboris ac periculi fuerim, ad finem belli Punici pervenisse, L.,xxxi. i ; I am delighted to have reached the end of the Punic war, as ifI had shared in the toil and danger (of it). Tantus patrSs metus c5pitvelut si iam ad portas hostis esset, L., xxi. 16, 2 ;a great fear took holdof the senators, as if the enemy were already at their gates. Deleta (est)Ausonum gens perinde ac si interactive bello certasset, L., ix. 25, 9; theAusonian race was blotted out, just as if it had engaged in an internecinewar (war to the knife).REMAHKS. i. Occasionally the sequence is violated out of regard tothe Conditional:Massilieuses in eo honore audimus apud Romanes esse ac si medium| |umbilicum Graeciae incolerent, L., xxxvn. 54, 21; we hear that the peopleof Marseilles are in as high honour with the Romans as if they inhabitedthe mid-navel (= the heart) of Greece. Eius negotium sic velim suscipias,ut si esset res mea, C., Fam., n. 14, 1 ;I wish you would undertake hisbusiness just as if it were my affair.2. The principal clause often contains correlatives, as :ita, sic,perinde, proinde, similiter, n5n (baud) secus, etc.NOTES. 1.Tamquam and quasi are also used in direct comparison with the Indie-
cometesmutationem390 CONCESSIVE SENTENCES.ativc.Here the verbs with both clauses are apt to be the same, in which case the verbwith quasi or tamquam is usually omitted in model prose.Quasi poma ex arboribus, cruda si sunt, vix gvelluntur, sic vitam adulescentibusvis aufert, C., Cat.M., 19, 71.2.Quasi is used to soften or apologise for a single word (= ut ita dicam).Mors est quaedam quasi migratio commutatioque vltae, Cf. C., Tusc., 1. 12,27 ;death is as it were a shifting of life's quarters.3. As in the ordinary Conditional sentence, so in the Comparative sentence, the Protasismay be expressed by a participle:Galll laeti ut explorata victoria ad castra Romanorum pergunt, Cf. CAES.,B. G., m. 18, 8 ; the Gauls in their joy, as if (then-) victory had been fully ascertained,proceeded to the camp of the Romans. Antiochus securus de bello Romano erattamquam non transiturls in Asiam Romanis, L., xxxvi. 41, 1 ;Antiochus was asunconcerned about the war with Borne as if the Romans did not intend to cross overinto Asia Minor.4. In CELSUS, QUINTILIAN, JUVENAL, FLINT MIN., and especially in TACITUSand SUETONIUS, we findtamquam used almost like quod (541), to indicate an assumedreason, in imitation of the similar Greek use of is with the participle, andoccasionally where we might have expected the Ace. and Infinitive.Fridem invisus tamquam plus quain civilia agitaret, TAG., Ann., 1. 12, 6 ;long misliked as (in Tiberius' judgment) plotting high treason. Suspectus tamquamipse suSs incenderit aedgs, Juv., m. 222 ; suspected of having (as if he had) sethis own house on fire.>Vulgl opinio est (tamquam regniportendat, TAC. Ann., xiv. 22, 1 ; it is the popular belief that a comet portends achange in the kingdom.Other particles, quasi, sicut, and ut, occur much more rarely and are cited mainlyfrom TACITUS (quasi only in the Annals). Compare SUET., Tit., 5.5. Ut SI is rare in early Latin, not being found at all in PLAUTUS. It is found butonce in LIVT, but frequently in CICERO and later Latin. Velut Si is found first inCAESAR. Velut for velut Si is found first in LIVY. Ac si is equivalent to quasi onlyin late Latin.1. The Conditional particles, etsi, etiamsl, tametsi (tamenetsi).CONCESSIVE SENTENCES.603. Concessive Sentences are introduced by :2. The generic relative, quamquam.3. The compounds, quamvis, quantumvis.4. The verb licet.5.The Final particles, ut (ne).6. Cum (quom).These all answer generally to the notion although.NOTE. Etsi (et + si),even if; etiamsl, even, now if ; tametsi, yet even if ;quamquam (quam + quam), to what extent soever ; quamvis, to what extent youchoose ; quantumvis,to what amount you choose ; licet, it is left free (perhaps intrans.of linquo, I leave).604. Etsi, etiamsi, and tametsi, take the Indicative or Subjunctive,according to the general principles which regulate
'CONCESSIVE SENTENCES.39!the use of si, if,The Indicative is more common, especiallywith etsi.De futuris rebus etsi semper difficile est dicere, tamen interdum coniecturapossls acce"dere, C., Fam., vi. 4, 1; although it is always difficultto tell about the future, nevertheless you can sometimes come near it byguessing. [Hamilcar] etsi flagrabat bellandi cupiditate, tamen pad serviundumputavit, NEP., xxii. i, 3 ; although Hamilcar was on fire with thedesire of war, nevertheless he thought that he ought to subserve (to workfor) peace. Inops ille etiamsi referre gratiam n5n potest, habere certspotest, C., Off., ii. 20, 69; the needy man (spoken of), if he cannot returna favour, can at least fed it. Me ve"ra pro gratis loqui, etsi meum ingeniumnon mongret, necessitas cogit, L., in. 68, 9; even if my dispositiondid not bid me, necessity compels me to speak what is true instead ofwhat is palatable.REMARKS. i. SI itself is often concessive (591, 2), and the additionof et, etiam, and tamen serves merely to fix the idea.2. Etiamsi is used ot'tener with the Subjv. than with the Indie.,and seems to be found only in conditional sentences. On the otherin the sense "andhand, etsi is also used like quamquam (605, R. 2)," virtutem si unam amiseris etsi amitti non potest virtus, C. ,yet ;Tusc., ii. 14, 82 ;so too, but rarely, tametsi. Etsi is a favorite wordwith CICERO, but does not occur in QUINTILIAN nor in SALLUST, the latterof whom prefers tametsi. Tametsi is not found in the Augustanpoets nor in TACITUS, and belongs especially to familiar speech.3. Tamen is often correlative even with tametsi.605. ftuamquam, to ivliat extent soever., falls under the headof generic relatives (254, E. 4), and, in the best authors, isconstrued with the Indicative.Medici quamquam intellegunt saepe, tamen numquam aegris dlcunt, illomorbo eos esse morituros, C., Div., n. 25, 54; although physicians oftenknow, nevertheless they never tell their patients that they will die ofthat (particular) disease.REMARKS. i. The Potential Subjv. (257, N. 3) is sometimes foundwith quamquam : Quamquam exercitum qui in Volscis erat mallet, nihilrecusavit, L., vi. 9, 6; although he might well have preferred the armywhich was in the Volscian country, nevertheless he made no objection.So especially with the Ideal Second Person.2. Quamquam is often used like etsi, but more frequently, at thebeginning of sentences, in the same way as the English, and yet,although, hoivever, in order to limit the whole preceding sentence.3. The Indie., with etsi and quamquam, is, of course, liable to attractioninto the Subjv. in Oratio Obliqua (506).
392 CONCESSIVE SENTENCES.NOTE.The Subjv. with quamquam (not due to attraction) is first cited from CICERO(perhaps Tusc., v. 30, 85), NEPOS (xxv. 13, 6), after which, following the developmentin all generic sentences in Latin, it becomes more and more common ; thus, in post-Augustan Latin, JUVENAL uses it exclusively, and PLINY MIN. and TACITUS regularly.606. ftuamvis follows the analogy of volo, / will, withwhich it iscompounded, and takes the Subjunctive (usuallythe principal tenses).Quantumvis and quamlibet (as conjunctions) belong topoetry and silver prose.Quamvls sint sub aqua, sub aqua maledlcere temptant, Ov., M., vi. 376;although they be under the water, under the water they try to revile.Quamvls ille niger, quamvis tu candidus esses, V., EC., n. 16; although hewas black, although you were fair. [Vitia mentis], quamvis exigua sint,in maius excSdunt, SEN., E.M., 85, 12 ;mental ailments (= passions),no matter how slight they be, go on increasing. Quamvis sis molestusnumquam tS esse confitSbor malum, C., Tusc., u. 25, 61 ; although you betroublesome, I shall never confess that youare evil.NOTES. 1. The Indie, with quamvis is cited in prose first from C., Rab.Post., z,4 ; NEP., 1. 2, 3 (except in fragments of VABBO and VATINIUS) ;in poetry it appearsfirst in LUCRETIUS. Then it grows, so that in the post-Augustan period it is used justlikequamquam with the Indie., though the Subjv. is also common :Quamvis ingenio non valet, arte valet, Ov., Am., 1. 15, 14 ; although he does not(ell by genius, fie does tell by art.2. The verb of quamvis is sometimes inflected : Quam volet Epicurus iocBtur,tamen numquam ui6 movebit, C., N.D., 11. 17, 46.607. Licet retains its verbal nature, and, according to theSequence of Tenses, takes only the Present and Perfect Subjunctive:Licet irrideat si qui vult, C., Parad., i. i, 8; let any one laugh who will.Ardeat ipsa licet, tormentis gaudet amantis, Juv., vi. 209; though she herselfis aglow, she rejoices in the tortures of her lover. Sim licet extrgmum,sicut sum, missus in orbem, Ov., Tr., iv. 9, 9 ; although I be sent, as 1have been, to the end of the world.NOTES. 1. Exceptions are extremely rare : Juv., xm. 56.2. Quamvisis sometimes combined with licet,as :quamvis licet InsectemuristBs metuo n6 s61i pbilosopni sint, C., Tusc., iv. 24,53.3. Occasionally licet is inflected; e. g., H., Epod., 15, 19 ; S., n. i, 59. From thetime of APULEIUS licet is construed with the Indicative.608. Ut and ne are also used concessively for the sake ofargument this is common in;CICERO, who often attaches toit sane ;the basis of this is the Imperative Subjunctive.Ut desint vires, tamen est laudanda voluntas, Ov., Pont., m. 4, 79 ;
RELATIVE SENTENCES. 393granted that strength be lacking, nevertheless you must praise (my)good ivill. N6 sit summum malum dolor, malum certe est, C., Tusc., n.5, 14 ; granted that pain be not the chief evil, an evil it certainly is.REMARKS. i. Ut n6n can be used on the principle of the SpecificNegative: Hie dies ultimus est; ut non sit, prope ab ultimo est, SEN.,E. M., 15, 12 ;this is your last day ; granted that it be not, it is near thelast.2. Examples with past tenses are rare: C., Mil., 17, 46; L., xxxvm.46, 3, etc.3. On ita ut, see 262 ;on ut ita, see 482, 4.609. Concessive Sentence represented by a Participle orPredicative Attribute. The Concessive sentence may berepresented by a Participle or Predicative Attribute.[Risus] interdum ita repente grumpit, ut eum cupientgs tengre nequeamus,Cf. C., Or., n. 58, 235; laughter between whiles (occasionally) breaksout so suddenly that we cannot keep it down, although we desire to doso. Multorum tS ocull et aur6s nQn sentientem custodient, C., Gat., 1.2,6;(of) many (the) eyes and ears will keep guard over you, though you perceiveit not (WITHOUT your perceiving if). Quis Aristldem non mortunmdiligit ? C., Fin., v. 22, 62; who does not love Aristides, (though) dead ?NOTES. 1.Quamquam, quamvls, and etsi are often combined with the participle.This, however, is rare in classical Latin, but becomes more common later.(Caesar), quamquam obsidione Massiliae retardante, brevi tamen omniasubSgit, SUET., lul., 34.2. With adjectives and adverbs this is much more common, so especially withquamvls, which is used with a positive as a circumlocution for the superlative. Withthe superlative quamvlsis rare.Etsi non iniquum, certe" triste senatus consultum, L., xxv. 6, 2. Cum omniaper populum geruntur, quamvls iustum atque moderatum tamen ipsa aequabilitasest inlqua, C., Hep., i. 27, 43.RELATIVE SENTENCES.610. The Latin language uses the relative construction farmore than the English so in the beginning of sentences,:and in combination with Conjunctions and other Kelatives.REMARKS. i. The awkwardness, or impossibility, of a literal translationmay generally be relieved by the substitution of a demonstrativewith an appropriate conjunction, or the employment of an abstractnoun :Quae cum ita sint, now since these things are so (Ciceronian formula).Futura modo exspectant ; quae quia certa esse non possunt, couficiunturet angore et metu, C., Fin., i. 18, 60; they only look forward to thefuture ; and because that cannot be certain, they wear themselves out
394 RELATIVE SENTENCES.with distress and fear. [Epicurus] non satis polltus ils artibus quas quitenent, eruditi appellantur, C:, Fin., i. 7, 26;Epicurus is not sufficientlypolished by those accomplishments, from the possession of which peopleare called cultivated.2. Notice especially quod in combination with si and its compoundsubi, quia, quoniam, ut (poetic and post-class.), utinam, n6, utinam n6, qui(rare), in which quod means and as for that, and is sometimes translatedby and, but, therefore, whereas, sometimes not at all.Quod nl fuissem incogitans ita eum exspectarem ut par fait, TEB., Ph.,155 ; whereas, had I not been "heedless, 1 should be awaiting him, inproper mood.NOTES. 1. The use of the Relative to connect two independent clauses instead of ademonstrative, is very rare hi PLAUTUS, more common in TERENCE, but fully developed only in the classical period.2. The Relative is the fertile source of many of the introductory particles of the compoundsentence (quom, quia, quoniam, compounds of quam, ut, ubi, etc.), and istherefore treated last on account of the multiplicity of its uses.611. Kelative sentences are introduced by the Eelativepronouns in all their forms : adjective, substantive, andadverbial. (See Tables 109 foil.)REMARKS. i. The Relative adverbs of Place, and their correlatives,may be used instead of a preposition with a Relative. TTnde, whence, isfrequently used of persons, but the others rarely occasional ;examplesare cited for ubi and qu5, the others = less frequently ibi in : e5, etc.;ubi = in qu5, etc.; inde = ex eo, etc.; unde =x qu5, etc.; eo = in eum,etc.; qu5 = in quern, etc.Potest fieri ut is, unde tS audisse dicis, iratus dixerit, C., Or., n. 70, 285;it may be that Tie, from whom you say you heard (it),said it in anger.Qu5 (= quibus) lubeat nubant, dum d5s nS fiat comes, PL., Aul., 491 (573).z. The Relative is not to be confounded with the Dependent Interrogativesentence (469, R. 2).Quae probat populus ego nescio, SEN., E.M., 29, 10; the things that thepeople approves, I do not know (quid probet, what it is the people approves}.Et quid ego t5 velim, et tu. quod quaeris, sci6s, TER., And., 536;you shall know both what (it is) I want of you, and what (the thingwhich) you are asking (= the answer to your qwstion).612. Position of Relatives. The Relative and Eelativeforms are put at the beginning of sentences and clauses.The preposition, however, generally, though not invariably,precedes its Relative (413).613. Antecedent. The word to which the Relative refers
RELATIVE SENTENCES. 395is called the Antecedent, because it precedes in thought evenwhen it does not in expression.REMARK. The close connection between Relative and Antecedentis shown by the frequent use of one preposition in common (414, it. i).CONCORD.614. The Relative agrees with its Antecedent in Gender,Number, and Person.Is minimo eget mortalis, qul minimum cupit, SYRUS, 286 (Fr.) (
396 RELATIVE SENTENCES.vi. 33, 3 ;the river Scheldt, which empties into the Maas. lusta gloria,qui est fructus virtutis, ('., Pis., 24, 57 ;real glory, which is the fruit:of virtue.Exceptions are not unfrequent, especially when the predicative substantivein the Relative clause is a foreign word or a proper name.Stellae quas Graecl cometas vocant, C., N.D., n. 5, 14; the stars whichthe Greeks call comets.Est genus quoddam hominum quod Helotae vocatur,NEP., iv. 3, 6 ;there is a certain class of men called Helots.4. The pronominal apposition may be taken up into the Relative anddisappear :Testarum sufiragils quod illi ostracismum vocant, NEP., v. 3, 1; by potsherdvotes (a, thing) which they call " ostracism."5. When the Relative refers to the combined antecedents of differentgender, the strongest gender is preferred, according to 282 :Grandes natu matres et parvi liberi, quorum utrumque aetas misericordiamvestram requirit, C., Verr., \. 49, 129; aged matrons and infantchildren, whose age on either hand demands your compassion. Otiumateque divitiae, quae prlma mortales putant, S., C., 36, 4 ;leisure andmoney, which mortals reckon as the prime things.Or, the nearest gender may be preferred :Eae fruges atque fructus quos terra gignit, C., N.D., n. 14, 37 ;fruits offield and tree which earth bears.6. Combined Persons follow the rule, 287.thoseNOTE. A noteworthy peculiarity is found in early Latin, where a generic Relativesentence with quiis made the subject of an abstract substantive with est, and representedby a demonstrative in agreement with that substantive.Istaec virtus est, quandS usust, qui malum fert fortiter, PL., Asin., 323;that's manhood who (if one) bears evil bravely, when there's need.The parallel Greek construction suggests Greek influence.615. Repetition ofthe Antecedent. The Antecedent ofthe Relative is not seldom repeated in the Eelative clause,with the Eelative as its attributive.(Caesar) intellexit diem Instare, quo die frumentum militibus nietlri oporteret,CAES., B.G., i. 16, 5 ; Caesar saw that the day was at hand, onivhich day it behooved to measure corn (corn was to be measured out)to the soldiers.NOTE. This usage belongs to the formal style of government and law. CAESAR isvery fond of it, especially with the word die's. It is occasional in PLAUTUS and TER-ENCE, and not uncommon in CICERO ;but after CICERO it fades out, being found butrarely in LIVT, and only here and there later.616. Incorporation of the Antecedent. i. The Antecedentsubstantive is often incorporated into the Relative
RELATIVE SENTENCES. 397clause ;sometimes there is a demonstrative antecedent,sometimes not.In quern primum egress! sunt locum Troia vocatur, L., I. I, 3; the firstp/ticf they landed at was called Troy. Quam quisque norit artem, in hacs6 exerceat, [C.], Tusc., i. 18, 41; what trade each man is master of, (in)that let him practise (himself), that let him ply.NOTES. i. Incorporation, while much less frequent than Repetition, is still notnnfrequently met with in LIVT ;after EIVY it decays. No examples are cited fromSALLUST with a demonstrative antecedent, and but one from CAESAR. No exampleis cited from CAESAR without a demonstrative antecedent.2. Instead of a principal clause, followed by a consecutive clause, the structure issometimes reversed. What would have been the dependent clause becomes the principalclause, and an incorporated explanatory Relative takes the place of the demonstrative.This is confined to certain substantives, and is found a number of times inCICERO, but rarely elsewhere (SALL., HOB., LIVT, OVID, SEN., TAC., PLINY MIN.).Qua enim prudentia es, nihil te fugiet (- ea prudentia es, ut nihil tefugiat), C., Fain., xi. 13, 1. Yells tantummodo ; quae tua virtus (est), expugnabis,H., &, i. 9, 54.2. An appositional substantive, from which a Eelativeclause depends, is regularly incorporatedclause.into the Relative[Amanus] Syriam a Cilicia dividit, qui mons erat hostium plenus, C.,Aft., v. 20, 3 ; Syria is divided from Cilicia by Amanus, a mountainwhich was full of enemies.NOTE. This usage is found first in CICERO. The normal English position is foundfirst in LIVY, but it becomes more common in later Latin.Priscus, vir cuius providentiam in r5 publica ante experta clvitas erat,L., iv. 46, 10.3. Adjectives, especially superlatives, are sometimes transferredfrom the substantive in the principal clause and madeto agree with the Relative in the Relative clause.|Themistocles1rle servls suis quern habuit fidelissimuni ad regem. nusit,NEP., ii. 4, 3; Themistocles sent the most faithful slave he had to theking. Nominl credo, qui large" blandust dives pauperl, PL., Aul., 196; 1trust no rich man who is lavishly Tcind to a poor man.617. Attraction of the Relative. The Accusative of theRelative is occasionally attracted into the Ablative of theantecedent, rarely into any other case.Hoc conflrmamus illo augurio quo dlximus, C., Att., x. 8, 7; we confirmthis by the augury which we mentioned.NOTES. 1. This attraction takes place chiefly when the verb of the Relative clausemust be supplied from the principal sentence ; that is, with auxiliary verbs like velle,80l6re, iubere ;and after verbs of Saying aud the like.
398 RELATIVE SENTENCES.It is rare in early Latin, bnt common from CICERO on.Quibus poterat saucils ductis secum ad urbem pergit, L., IT. 39, 9 ; hmAngtaken with him all tfie wounded he could, he proceeded to the city.2. Inverted Attraction. So-called Inverted Attraction is found only in poetry, andthen usually in the Ace., which may be considered as an object of thought or feeling.This Ace. stands usually for a Norn., sometimes, but only in Comedy, for theGen. Dat. or Abl. A strange usage is the Nom. where the Ace. would be expected.This may be noriinStlvus pendens, a form of anacoluthon (697), and is found onlyin early Latin.TJrbem quam statuo, vestra est, V., A ., i. 573 ; (as for) the city which lam rearing,(it) is yours. Istum quern quaeris, ego sum, PL., Cure., 419 ; (asfort Unit man.whotn you are looking for, I am he. Ille qui mandavit eum exturbasti exaedibus ? PL., fnn., 137. (" He that hath ears to hear, let him hear.")618. Correlative Use of the Relative. The usual Correlativeof qui is is, more rarely hie, ille.Is minimo eget mortalis, qui minimum cupit, SYRUS, 286 (Fr.) (308).Hie sapiens, de quo loquor, C., Ac., n. 33, 105 (305, 3). Ilia digs veniet,mea qua lugubria ponam, Ov., Tr., iv. 2, 73 (307, 4).619. Absorption of the Correlative. The Correlative, is,when it would stand in the sameThis is a kind of Incorporation.is often absorbed, especiallycase as the Eelative.Postume, n5n bene olet, qui bene semper olet, MART., n. 12, 4; Postumus,(he) smells not sweet, who always smells sweet. Quern arma non(him) whom arms had not crushedfregerant'vitia vlcSrunt, CURT., vi. 2, 1 ;did vices overcome. Quern di dfligunt adulgscSns moritur, PL., B., 816;(he) whom the gods love dies young. XerxSs praemium proposuit qui [= elqui] mvSnisset novam voluptatem, C., Tusc., v. 7, 20; Xerxes offered areward to him who should invent a new pleasure. Miseranda vita qui[= eorum qui] sS metul quam amari malunt, NEP., x. 9, 5; pitiable is thelife of those who would prefer being feared to being loved. Dlscitesanari per quern [= per eum, per quern] didicistis amare, Ov., Mem. Am.,43 (401).Difficult and rare are cases like :Nunc redeo ad quae (for ad ea quae) mini mandas, C., Aft., v. n, 6.620. Position of the Correlative clause. The Relativeclause naturally follows its Correlative, but it often precedes ;incorporation also is common.Male se res habet cum quod virtute efficl rlebet id temptatur pecunia, C.,Off. n., 6, 22 ;it is a bad state of affairs when what ought to be accomplishedby worth, is attempted by money. Quod vides accidere puerls h5cnSbis quoque maiusculis pueris Bvenit, SEN., E.M., 24, 13; what you seebefall children (this) happens to us also, children of a larger growth.Quam quisque norit artem, in hac se exerceat, [C.], Tusc., i. 18, 41 (616, i).
EELATIVE SENTENCES. 399The Correlative absorbed :Quod nSn dedit fortuna, non eripit, SEN., E.M., 59, 18; what fortunehas not given (does not give), she does not take away. Per quas n5spetitis saepe fugatis opgs, Qv., A.A., in. 132; the means you take to winus often scare us off.621. Indefinite Antecedent. The Indefinite Antecedent isgenerally omitted.Elige cui dicas : tu nrihi sola placSs, Ov., A. A., i.42; choose same oneto irJtom you may say : You alone please me.REMARK. Such sentences are sometimes hardly to be distinguishedfrom the Interrogative: [Con5n] n5n quaeslvit ubi ipse tuto vlveret, NEP.,ix. 2, 1 ;Conon did not seek a place to live in safety himself, might beeither Relative or Deliberative (265).TENSES INRELATIVE SENTENCES.622. Future and Future Perfect. The Future andFuture Perfect are used with greater exactness than in currentEnglish (242, 244).Sit liber, dominus qul volet esse meus, MART., n. 32, 8;he must be freeii'ho wishes (shall wish) to be my master. Qul prior strinxerit ferrum,6ius victoria erit, Liv. (244, R. 2).623. Iterative Action. Relative sentences follow the lawslaid down for Iterative action (566, 567).I.Contemporaneous action :Ore traliit quodcumque potest, atque addit acerv5, H., S., I. I, 34; dragswith its mouth whatever it can, and adds to the treasure (Jieap). Quacumqueincgdebat agmen, IggatI occurrgbant, L., xxxiv. 16, 6; in whateverdirection the column advanced, ambassadors came to meet them.II. Prior action :[Terra] numquam sine usura reddit, quod accSpit, C., Cat.N., 15, 51 ;earth never returns without interest what it has received (receives). Quodn5n dedit fortuna, non gripit, SEN., E.M., 59, 18 (620). Non cgnat quotiSnsn5mo vocavit eum, MART., v. 47, 2; he does not dine as often as (when)no one has invited (invites) him. Haerebant in memoria quaecumqueaudierat et vlderat [Themistocles], C., Ac., u. i, 2 (567). Sequentur tSquScumque pervSnens vitia, SEN., JS.M., 28, 1; vices will follow youwhithersoever you go. Qul timgre dgsierint, odisse incipient, TAG., Agr.,32 (567).REMARK. On the Subjv. m Iterative Sentences, see 567, N.the
4OORELATIVE SENTENCES.MOODS INRELATIVE SENTENCES.624. The Relative clause, as such that is, as the representativeof an adjective takes the Indicative mood.TJxor quae bona est, PL., Merc., 812 ;a toife who is good (a good icife).REMARK. The Relative in this use often serves as a circumlocutionfor a substantive, with this difference : that the substantive expressesa permanent relation ;the Relative clause, a transient relation : il quldocent = those who teach = the teachers (inasmuch as they are exercisingfunctions). On the Relative with Subjv. after an adj. clause,see 438, R.625. Indefinite and Generic Relatives. i.Quicumque,quisquis, and the like, being essentially Iterative Relatives,take the Indicative according to the principles of Iterativeaction (254, R. 4). So also simple Relatives when similarlyused.Quacumque incedebat agmen, legati occurrebant, Liv., xxxiv. 16, 6 (62.3).REMARK. According to 567, N., the Subjv. is used :(1) In Oratio Obliqua (Total or Partial) :Marti Galli quae bells cgperint (Pf. Subjv.) dSvovent (= sg daturasvovent), Cf. CAES., B. G., vi. 17, 3; the Gauls devote (promise to give) toMars whatever they (shall) take in war (6. B., Quae ceperimus, dabimus).(2) By Attraction of Mood (Complementary Clauses) :Quis eum diligat quern metuat ? C., Lael., 15, 53 (629).(3) In the Ideal Second Person :Bonos segnior fit ubi neglegas, S.-, lug., 31, 28 (566).(4) By the spread of the Subjv. in post-classical Latin :Qul unum eius ordinis offendisset omnes adversos habebat, L., xxxm46, 1 (567).2. ftui = si quis, if any, has the Indicative when the Conditionis Logical.[Terra] numquam sine usura reddit, quod accepit, C.,Cat.M., 15, 51(623). (SI quid accepit.) Qul morl didicit, servlre dsdidicit, SEN., E.M.,26,10(423).REMARK. When the Condition is Ideal, the Subjv. is necessary (596).In post-classical Latin the Subjv. is the rule with all conditionals.626. Explanatory Relative. Qui, with the Indicative(= is enim, for he), often approaches quod, in that.Habeo senectuti magnain gratiam, quae mini sermOnis aviditatem
RELATIVE SENTENCES.4
4O2RELATIVE SENTENCES.628. The Subjunctiveis used in Relative clauses whichform a part of the utterance or the view of another than thenarrator, or of the narrator himself when indirectly quoted(539, R.). So especially in Oratio Obliqua and Final Sentences.RctS Graeci praecipiunt, non temptanda quae effici n5n possint, QUINT.,iv. 5, 17; right are the Greeks in teaching that those things are not tobe attempted which cannot be accomplished. Apucl Hypanira fluviumAristoteles ait, bestiolas quasdam nasci quae unum diem vlvant, C., Tusc.,i. 39, 94 (650). Virtus facit ut eos dfligamus in quibus ipsa inesse videatur,C., Off., i. 17, 56; virtue makes us love those in whom she seems toreside. Postulatur ab hominibus ut ab ils se abstineant maxime vitils, inquibus alterum reprehenderlnt, C., Verr., in. 2, 4 ;it is demanded of menthat they refrain from those faults most of all as to which they haveblamed another. Senatus censuit uti qulcumque Galliam provinciamobtingret, Haeduos dsfenderet, CAES., B.G., i.35; the senate decreed thatwhoever obtained Gaul as his province should defend the Haedui.Paetus (mine's libros quos frater suus rellquisset mihi donavit, C., Aft., n.i,12; (this is Paetus' statement; otherwise: quos frater 6ius (521) reliquit; compare C., Alt., I. 20, 7).Xerxgs praemium proposuit qui [= elqui] inv6nisset novam voluptatem, C., Tusc., \. 7, 20 (619).REMARK. Even in Oratio Obliqua the Indie, is retained :(a) In explanations of the narrator :Nuntiatur Afranio magn5s commeatus qui iter habebant ad Caesarem adflumen constitisse, CAES., B.C., i. 51, 1; it is (was) announced to Afraniusthat large supplies of provisions (which were on their way toCaesar) had halted at the river.In the historians this sometimes occurs where the Relative clause isan integral part of the sentence, especially in the Impf. and Pluperfect;partly for clearness, partly for liveliness. For shifting Indie, andSubjv., see L., xxvi. i.(b) In mere circumlocutions :Quis neget haec omnia quae vidcmus deorum potestate administrarHCf. C., Cat., in. q, 21; ivho would deny that this whole visible world ismanaged by the power of the gods ? Providendum est ng quae dlcunturab e5 qui dlcit dissentiant, QUINT., in. 8, 48; we must see to it that thespeech be not out of keeping with the speaker.629. Relative sentences which depend on Infinitives andSubjunctives, and form an integral part of the thought, areput in the Subjunctive (Attraction of Mood).Pigrl est ingeni! contention esse ilsquae sint ab alils inventa, QUINT., x.
RELATIVE SENTENCES. 4032, 4; it is the mark of a slow genius to be content with what has been foundout by others. Quis aut eum diligat quern metuat aut eum a quo sS metulputet? G.,Lael., 15, 53; who could love a man whom he fears, or bywhom he deems himself feared ? Nam quod emaspossls iure vocare tuum,MART., n. 20, 2; for what you buy you may rightly call your own. AbIn virtute sunt multialio exspectes alter! quod fSceris, SYRUS, 2 (Pr.) (319).ascensus, ut isgloria maximg excellat, qui virtute plurimum praestet, C.,Plane., 25, 60 (552). Si solos eos dlcergs miseros quibus moriendum esset,neminem eorum qui vlverent exciperes ;moriendum est enim omnibus, C.,Tusc., i. 5, 9; if you called only those wretched who had (have) to die,you would except none who lived (live) ; for all have to die.REMARK. The Indie, is used :(a) In mere circumlocutions ; so, often in Consecutive Sentences :Necesse est facere sumptum qui quaerit lucrum, PL., .As., 218 (535).Emcitur ab 6rat5re, ut ii qui audiunt ita adficiantur ut orator velit, Cf. C.,Br., 49, 185; it is brought about by the orator that those who hear him( his auditors) are affected as he loishes (them to be}.(b) Of individual facts :Et quod vidgs perisse perditum ducas, CAT. ,vm. 2 ;and what you see(definite thing, definite person) is lost for aye, for aye deem lost.videas, anybody, anything.)(Quod630. Relative Sentences ofDesign. Optative Eelative sentencesare put in the Subjunctive of Design, when qui = ut is.Sunt multi qui gripiunt aliis quod aliis largiantur, C., Off., i. 14, 43;some to lavish on others. [Senex] seritmany are they who snatch fromarborgs, quae alter! saeclo prosint, CAECILIUS (C., Tusc., i. 14, 31) (545).Semper hab6 Pyladen aliquem qui curet Orestem, Ov., Rem.Am., 589 (545).[Magnesiam Themistocli Artaxerxes] urbem donarat, quae ei panempraebgret, NEP., n. 10, 3 (545).NOTES. 1. The basis of this construction is the characteristic Subjv., and the conceptionseems Potential rather than Optative ;but in many cases the characteristic forceis no longer felt.2. After mittere there are a few cases where the .Impf Indie, is used with much the3. By attraction similar to that with quod (541, N. 3) and quom (585, N. 3),Bame force as the Impf. Subjv., but the purpose is merely inferential from the continuancein the tense.Inmittebantur illi canes, qui invgstigabant omnia, C., Verr., iv. 21, 47.the Kelativeis sometimes found with an Inf. and dlceret, where the Subjv. of the verb in theInf., or the Indie, with a parenthetical ut dixit, is to be expected.Litteras quas me sib! mlsisse dlceret - misisset,rmlserat, ut dixit) recitavit,C., PA., ii. 4, 7.631. Relative Sentences of Tendency. Potential Relativesentences are put in the Subjunctive of Tendency, whenquiut is.
404 RELATIVE SENTENCES.The notion is generally that of Character and Adaptation, and wedistinguish three varieties :1. With a definite antecedent, when the character isemphasised ; regularly after idoneus, suitable ; aptus, Jit ;dignus, worthy / indlgnus, unworthy ; after is, talis, eiusmodi,after unus and solus.tarn, tantus, and the like ;Est innocentia adfectio tails animl, quae noceat neminl, C. ,Tusc. ,in. 8,16 ;harmlessness (innocence) is that state of mind that does harm to noone (is innocuous to any one). Hie ego sim cuius laniet furiosa capillos,Ov., A. A., n. 451 ;may I be the man whose hair she tears in her seasonsof frenzy. Solus es, C. Caesar, cuius in victoria ceciderit nein
RELATIVE SENTENCES. 405qul quom sse cupit quod edit (172, N.)~non habet, PL., Capt., 463;he is apoor wretch who, when he wants to eat, has not anything to eat (n5nhabet quid edat would mean does not know what to eat). Quotus estquisque qul somniis pareat, C., Div., n. 60, 125 ; (how many men in theworld), the fewest men in the world obey dreams.REMARKS. i. The Indie, maybe used in the statements of definitefacts, and not of general characteristics :Mult! suut qul eripiant,Multi aunt qul eripiunt,Tfiere are many to snatch away. Many are they who snatch away.Of course this happens only after affirmative sentences. The poetsuse the Indie, more freely than prose writers :Sunt-quI (= quldam)quod sentiunt non audent (so MSS.) dicere, C., Off.,i. 24, 84 ;some dare not say what they think. Sunt-quibus ingrate timidaindulgentia servit, Ov., A. A., n. 435 ;to some trembling indulgenceplays the slave all thanklessly.est-qul (definite) n5n curat habSre, H., Up., n. 2, 182.Sunt qui (indefinite) non habeant,2. When a definite predicate is negatived, the Indie, maystand onaccount of the definite statement, the Subj v. on account of the negative :A. Nib.il bonum est quod non eum qul id possidet meliorem facit ; or,B. Nihil bonum est quod non eum qui id possideat meliorem faciat.A. Nothing that does not make its owner better is good.B. Tftere is nothing good that does not make its owner better.3. After comparatives with quam as an object clause.Maiora in clefectione cleliquerant, quam quibus ignosci posset, L., xxvi.12, 6; (in that revolt) they had been guilty of greater crimes than couldbe forgiven (had sinned past forgiveness). Non longins hostSs aberant,quam qu5 tslum adicl posset, CAES., B. &., n. 21, 3; the enemy were notmore than ajaveliris throw distant.REMARKS. i. Classical Latin prefers ut after comparatives.2. Instead of quam ut, quam is not unfrequently found alone, especiallyafter potius, but also after amplius, celerius, etc.; in which case theconstruction resembles that of antequam.4. Parallel with a descriptive adjective with which it isconnected by et or sed.Exierant (duo) adulescentes et Drusi maxime familiares, et in quibusmagnam spem maiorSs colloearent, C., Or., i. 7, 25 ; two young men hadcome out (who were) intimates of Drusus and in whom their elders wereputting great hopes.632. ftuin in Sentences of Character. After negativeclauses, usually with a demonstrative tarn, ita, etc., qum is
406 RELATIVE SENTENCES.often used (556) where we might expect qui non, and sometimeswhere we should expect quae non, or quod non.Sunt certa vitia quae nem8 est quin effugere cupiat, C., Or., in. n, 41;there are certain faults which there is no one but (= everybody) desiresto escape.Nil tarn difficile est quin quaerendo investlgari possiet (= possit),TER., Heaut., 675 (552).REMARK. That quin was felt not as qui non, but rather as ut non, isshown by the fact that the demonstrative may be expressed:Non cum quoquam anna contuli quin is mini succubuerit, NEP., xvm.ii, 5; / have never measured swords with any one that he has not (buthe has) succumbed to me.633. Relative in a Causal Sense. When qui= cum is, ashe, the Subjunctive is employed. (See 586, R. i.)The particles ut, utpote, quippe, as, are often used in conjunctionwith the Relative ;for their range, see 626, N. 1.suo toto consulatu somnum non vi-(Caninius) fuit mlrifica vigilautia quiderit, C., Fam., vn. 30, 1 ; Caninius has shown marvellous watchfulness,,not to have seen (= taken a wink of) sleep in his whole consulship.fortunate adulescens, qui tuae virtutis Homerum praeconem inveneris !C., Arch., 10, 24; lucky youth ! to have found a crier (= trumpeter) ofyour valor (in) Homer ! Maior gloria in Sclpione, Quinctii recentior utqui eo anno triumphasset, L., xxsv. 10, 5; Scipio's glory was greater,Quinctius was 1fresher, as (was to be expected in) a man ivho (inasmuchas he) had triumphed in that year.REMARK. On the use of the Indie, after quippe, etc., see 626,On the sequence of tenses, see 513, N. 3.isN. 1.634. Relative in a Concessive or Adversative Sense. Quisometimes used as equivalent to cum is in a Concessive orAdversative Sense.Ego qui leviter Graecas litteras attigissem, tamen cum venissem Athenascomplures ibi digs sum commoratus, C., Or., i. 18, 82; although I haddabbled but slightly in Greek, nevertheless, having come to Athens, Istayed there several days.NOTE. The Indie, is the rule for this construction in early Latin (580, N. 1).635. Relative and Infinitive. The Accusative and Infinitivemay be used in Oratid Obliqua after a Eelative, whenthe Eelative is to be resolved into a Coordinating Conjunctionand the Demonstrative.(Philosophi censent ) unum quemque nostrum mundi esse parteni, ex quoillud natura cousequi ut communein utilitatem nostrae anteponamus, C.,
RELATIVE SENTENCES. 407Fin., in. ig, C>4; philosophers hold that every one of us is a part of theuniverse, and that the natural consequence of this is for us to preferthe common welfare to our own.NOTES. 1. This usage is not cited earlier than CICERO, and seems to be found principallythere, with sporadic examples from other authors.2. Occasional examples are also found of the Inf. after etsi (LrvY), quamquam(TAC.), in the sense and yet ; cum interim (LIVY), quia (SEN.), nisi (TAG.), si n5n(LIVY) ; and after quern admodum, ut (Cic., LIVY, TAG.), in comparative sentences.636. Combination of Relative Sentences. Eelative Sentencesare combined by means of Copulative Conjunctionsonly luhen they are actually coordinate.When the second Relative would stand in the same case asthe first, it iscommonly omitted ().When it would stand in a different case (b), the Demonstrativeis often substituted (c) ; or, if the case be the Nominative(d) or Accusative (e), the Relative may be omittedaltogether.(') Dumnorix qul principal uni obtiuebat ac plebi acceptus erat (CAES., E.G.,1-3,5),Dumnorix, who field the chieftaincy, and (who) tvas acceptable to the commons ;(b) Dumnorix qu! prlncipatum obtiuebat culque plebs favebat,Dumnorix, who held the chieftaincy, and whom (he commons favoured ;(c) Dumnorix qul prlncipatum obtinebat eique plebs favebat,Dumnorix, who held the chieftaincy, and whom the commons favoured ;(d) Dumnorix quern plebs diligebat et prlncipatum obtinebat,Dumnorix, whom the commons loved, and (who) held the chieftaincy ;(e) Dumnorix qul prlncipatum obtinebat et plebs diligebat,Dumnoi-ix, who held the chieftaincy, and (whom) the commons loved.Examples : (a) CAES., B. G., iv. 34, 4 ; (b) C., Lad., 23, 87 ; Tusc., i. 30, 72 ; (c) C., Br.,74, 258 ; Tusc., v. 13, 38 ; (e) C., Off., n. 6, 21 ; L., x. 29, 3 ; (d) 8., lug., 101, 5 ; TKR.,Ad., 85.NOTES. 1. The insertion of a demonstrative is almost confined to early Latin,LUCRETIUS, and CICEKO. CAESAR and SALLUST have no examples, and LIVY very few.On the other hand, the use of a relative by zeugma (690) in connection with two ormore verbs governing different cases is found at all periods.2. (a) The Relative is not combined with adversative or illative conjunctions (butwho, who therefore) except at the beginning of a sentence, when it represents a followingdemonstrative or anticipates it (620).Qul fortis est, idem fidens est ; qui autem fidens est, is non extimescitC., Tusc., in. 7, 14 ;he who is brave is confident, but he who is confident is not afraid.(b) Sed qul, qul tamen, can be used in antithesis to adjectives.Sophr5n mlmorum quidem scriptor sed quern Plato probavit, QUINT.,1. 10,17 ; Sophron, a writer of mimes, ''tis true, but (one) that Plato approved.(c) Qul tamen may be added to explain a foregoing statement.Causam tibi exposuimus Ephesi, quam tu tamen coram facilius cognosces,C., Fam., xin. 55, 1.3. Two or more Relative clauses may be connected with the same antecedent whenthe one serves to complete the idea of the principal clause, the other to modify it :
4O8COMPARATIVE SENTENCES.Ilia vis quae investigat occulta, quae inventio dicitur, C., Tusc., i. 25, 61 ;the faculty that tracks out hidden things, which is called (the faculty of) research.4. The Relative is often repeated by anaphora (682) for stylistic reasons. CompareC., Tusc., i. 25, 62 ; Plane., 33, 81 ; L., xxni. 14, 3.637. Relative Sentence represented by a Participle. TheKelative sentence is sometimes represented by a Participle,but generally the Participle expresses a closer connectionthan the mere explanatory Eelative.Onmes aliud agentes, aliud simulantes perfidi (sunt), C., Off., in. 14, 60;all who are driving at one thing and pretending another are treacherous.Pisistratus Homer| ji libros confuses antea sic disposuissedlcitur at nunohabemus, C., Or., in. 34, 137; Pisistratus is said to have arranged thebooks of Homer, which were (whereas they were) in confusion before,as we have them now.COMPARATIVE SENTENCES.638. A peculiar phase of the Relative sentence is the Comparative,which is introduced in English by as or than, inLatin by a great variety of relative forms :(a) By correlatives ; (b) by atque or ac ; (c) by quam.639. Moods in Comparative Sentences. The mood of theDependent clause is the Indicative, unless the Subjunctiveis required by the laws of oblique relation, or by the conditionalidea (602).REMARK. On potius quam with the Subjv., see below, 644, R. 3.640. The dependent clause often borrows its verb from theleading clause. Compare 602.Ignoratio futurorum malorum utilior est quam scientia, C., Div., n. 9,23 (296). Servi inoribus isdem erant quibus dominus, Cf. C., Verr., in. 25,62 ;the servants had the same character as the master.641. When the dependent clause (or standard of comparison)borrows its verb from the leading clause, the dependentclause is treated as a part of the leading clause ;and ifthe first or leading clause standsin the Accusative with theInfinitive, the second or dependent clause must have theAccusative likewise.Ita sentio Latinam linguam locupletiorem esse quam Graecam, C., Fin.,1.3,10; it is my opinion that the Latin language is richer than the
mostCOMPARATIVE SENTENCES. 409Greek.Ego Gaium Caesarem non eadem cle re publics sentlre quae me scio,C., Pis., 32, 79; / know that Gains Caesar has not the same politicalviews that I (have).I. Correlative Comparative Sentences.642. Correlative Sentences of Comparison are introducedby Adjective and Adverbial Correlatives :1.Adjective correlatives :tot, totidem quot, (so) as many ~|tantus quantus, (so) as great \tails qualis, suchidem qul, the same \j2. Adverbial correlatives :tarn quani, (so) as much "1tantopere quantopere, (so) as much8 'totiSns (6s) quotiens (e"s),as often |tanuliu quamdiu, as longIita, sic fut, uti, slcut, tamquam (rare), ~\quasi (rare),item, itideui I quemadmodum,IquOmodo,Quot homings, tot sententiae, (as) many men, (so) many minds, TER.,Ph., 454. Frumentum tantl fuit quantl iste aestimavit, C., Verr., in. 84,194 ;corn was worth as much as he valued it. Plerique habere amlcumtalem volunt, quales ipsi esse non possuut, C., Lael., 22, 82', peoplewish to have a friend of a character such as they themselves cannotpossess. Cimon incidit in eandem invidiam quam pater suus, NEP., v. 3, 1(310). Nihil est tarn populare quam bonitas, C., Lig., 12, 37; nothing isso winning as kindness. Sic dS ambitione quomodo d6 arnica queruntur,SEN., E.M., 22, 10; they complain of ambition as they do of a sweetheart.Tamdiu requiSsco quamdiu ad tS scrlbo, C., Att., ix. 4, 1 ;I rest aslong as I am writing to you. Opt5 ut ita cuzque Sveniat, ut dS re publicsquisque mereatur, C., Ph., n. 46, 119; I wish each one's fortune to besuch as he deserves of the state.3. The Correlative is sometimes omitted.Hom5, non quam istl sunt, gloriosus, L. ,xxxv. 49, 7 ;a man, not (so)vainglorious as they are. Disces quamdiu vol6s, C., Off., i. i, 2 ; you shalllearn (as long) as you wish.REMARKS. i. Instead of Idem qul, Idem ut is sometimes found.Disputationeui exponimus elsdem fere verbis ut actum disputatumque
4IOCOMPARATIVE SENTENCES.est, C., Tusc. ii. 3, 9; we are setting forth the discussion in very muchthe same words in which it was actually carried on.On Idem with atque, ac, et, see 643; on Idem with Dat., see 359, N. 6 ;on Idem with cum, see 310, R. 2.2. (a) The more the more, may be translated by quo (quisque) eo, andthe like, with the comparatives ;but usually by ut (quisque), quam ita,tarn, etc., with the superlative, especially when the subj. is indefinite.Tanto brevius omne quanto fellcius tempus, PLINY, Ep., vm. 14, 10 ;time is the shorter, the happier it is. Quam citissime confides, tarnmaxims expediet, CATO, Agr., 64, 2; the quicker the better. Ut quisquesib! plurimum confidit, ita maxime excellit, C., Lael., 9, 30; the more aman trusts himself, the more he excels.(b) When the predicate is the same, one member often coalesces withthe other: Optimum quidque rarissimum est, C., Fin., u. 25, 81 (318, 2),= ut quidque optimum est, ita rarissimum.3. Tit ita is often used adversatively (482, 4). On ita ut, in asseverations,see 202.4. Ut and pro eo ut are frequently used in a limiting or causal sense,so far as, inasmuch as; pr5 eS ut temporum difficultas tulit (C., Verr.,in. 54, 126), so far as the hard times permitted ; ut turn re's erant, asthings tvere then; ut temporibus illls (C., Verr., in. 54, 125), for thosetimes; ut erat furiosus (C., Hose. Am., 12, 33), stark mad as he was; utSiculI(C., Tusc., i. 8, 15), as (is, was, to be expected of) Sicilians.Vir ut inter AetolSs facundus, L., xxxn. 33, 9; a man of eloquence foran Aetolian. Ut sunt humana, nihil est perpetuom datum, PL. , Cist., 194 ;as the world wags, nothing is given for good and all.5. On quam, quantus, and the Superlative, see 303.Notice in this connection quam qnl, ut qul, and the like, with theSuperlative (usually maxime) :Tarn sum amlcus rel publicae quam qul maxime (= est), C., Fam., v. 2,6; / am as devoted a friend to the state as he who is most (= as anyman). Proelium, ut quod maxime umquam, commissum est, L., vii. 33, 5.Domus celebratur ita, ut cum maxime, C., Q.F.. n. 4, 6.6. The Correlative forms do not always correspond exactly.Subeunda dlmicatio totiens, quot coniuratl superessent, L., n. 13, 2.II.Comparative Sentences with ATQUE (AC).643. Adjectives and Adverbs of Likeness and Unlikenessmay take atque or ac.Virtus eadem in homine ac de5 est, C. , i.Leg. 8, 25 , ;virtue is the samein man as in god. Date operam ne simill utamur fortuna atque usisumus, TER., Ph., 30 do ; your endeavour that we have not (il\)-luck likethat we had before. Dissimulatio est cum alia dlcuntur ac sentias, C.,
COMPARATIVE SENTENCES. 411Or., ii. 67, 269; dissimulation is when other things are said than whatyou mean (somethingis said other than what you mean). Similiter(602, R. 2) facis ac si me roge"s cur tS duobus contuear oculls, et non alteroconlveam, C., N.D., in. 3, 8; you are acting (like) as if you were to askme ivhy I am looking at you with two eyes, and not blinking with one.N5n dixl secus ac senti8bam, C., Or., n. 6, 24 ;/ did not speak otherwisethan I thought.NOTES. 1. The expression is commonly explained by an ellipsis:Aliter dixl atque[aliter] sentiebam, I spoke one way and yet I was thinking another way.So we find: Timeo ng aliud credam atque aliud nunties, TER.,Sec.,844; Ifear that I believe one thing, and you are telling another.2. Instead of atque, et is sometimes used ;this is not common, but the greater proportionof cases occurs in the classical period Solet enim aliud sentlre et :loqui,C., Fam., viu. i, 3 ; for he has a way of thinking one thing and saying another.3. These words are principally:aequos, par, pariter, Idem, iuxta (from theclassical period on), perinde, proinde, pro eo ; alius, aliter, secus (usually with anegative), contra, contrarius, similis, dissimilis, simul ;and rarely item, talis,totidem, proxime*, and a few others. PLAUTUS uses thus some words which involvea similar meaning, as (dennutare (M.G., 1130). Compare also M.G., 763 ; B., 725.4. Alius and secus have quam occasionally at all periods. On the other hand, nonalius and other negative combinations seldom have atque, commonly quamor nisi.After negative forms of alius CICERO has regularly nisi, occasionally praeter.Pbilosophia quid est aliud (= nihil est aliud) nisi donum deoruin ?(.'., Tusc.,i. 26, 64 ; philosophy what else is it but (he gift of the gods?III.Comparative Sentences with QUAM.644. Comparative Sentences with quam follow the comparativedegree or comparative expressions.The Verb of the dependent clause is commonly to be suppliedfrom the leading clause, according to 640.In Comparative Sentences quam takes the same case afterit as before it.Melior tutiorque est certa pax quam spSrata victoria, L., xxx. 30, 19(307, R. i). Potius amlcum quam dictum perdidi, QUINT., vi. 3, 20; I preferredto lose my friend rather than my joke. Velim exis times neminemculquam cariorem umquam fuisse quam to" mini, C., Fam., i. 9, 24 (546, it. i).REMARKS. i. When the second member is a subj., and the firstmember an oblique case, the second member must be put in the Nom. ,with the proper form of the verb esse, unless the oblique case be anAccusative :Vicinus tuus equum meli5rem habet quam tuus est, Cf. C., Inv., i. 31, 52(596). Ego hominem callidiorem vidi neminem quam Phormidnem, TEE.,Ph., 591 ;I have seen no shrewder man than Phormio (= quam Phormioest). Tib!, multo maiori quam Africanus fuit, me non multo minorem quamLaelium adiunctum esse patere, Cf. C., Fam,, v. 7, 3.
412 THE ABRIDGED SENTENCE.2. On quam pr5, and quam qui, see 298. On the double comparative,see 299.3. (a) When two clauses are compared by potius, rather, prius, before,citius, quicker, sooner, the second clause isput in the Pr. or Impf.Subjv. (512), with or (in CICERO) without ut.DSpugna potius quam servias, C., Att., vn. 7, 7 (577, N. 6). (Dixerunt)se milieus morituros potius quam ut tantura dedecoris adraitti patiantur,L., IT. 2, 8; they said that they would rather die a thousand times than(to) suffer such a disgrace to slip in. Morituros sS affirmabant citiusquam in aliSnos mSrgs verterentur, L., xxiv. 3, 12 ; they declared thatthey had rather die, than let themselves be changed to foreign ways.(b) If the leading clause is in the Inf., the dependent clause maybe in the Inf. likewise, and this is the regular construction in classicalLatin when the Inf. follows a verb of Will and Desire ;CICERO usesthe Inf. regularly, CAESAR generally, though examples of the simpleSubjv. are not uncommon in both ;LIVY is very fond of the Subjv.,especially with ut, which is cited first from him.86 ab omnibus desertos potius quam abs tS defenses esse malunt, C., Div.in Caec., 6, 21; they prefer to be deserted by all rather than defendedby you.NOTES. 1. Instead of tam quam,so as, the Roman prefers the combinationsn5n minus quam non magis quam (by LltotSs).(a) N6n minus quam means no less than = quite as much :Patria hominibus non minus quam liberl cara esse debet, (Cf. C.,) Fam., iv.5, 2 ; country ought to be no less dear to men than children (= quite as dear as).The meaning as little as is cited only from TEB., Hec., 647: n5n tibi illud factualminus placet quam mihi, where not less than = quite as much as = as little as.(b) N5n magis quam means quite as little, or quite as much :Animus n5n magis est sanus quam corpus, Of. C., Tusc., in. 5, 10 ; the mindis no more sound than the body = as little sound as the body. (Or it might mean : Themind is no more sound than the body = the body is quite as sound as the mind.)So with other comparatives.Fabius uon in armis praestantior fait quam in togS, Cf.C., Cat.M.,4, ll;Fabius was not more distinguished in war than in peace (no less distinguished in peacethan in war, quite as distinguished in peace as in war).2. After a negative comparative, atque is occasionally found forquamin PLAUTOS,TERENCE, CATULLUS, VERGIL; much more often in HORACE (nine times in theSatires, twice in the Epodes), who uses it also after a positive.Non Apollinis magis verum atque hoc responsumst, TER., And., 698. nilnon minus ac tibi pectore uritur intimo flamma, CAT., LXI. 176. Cf. H., s., n. ^, 96.THE ABRIDGED SENTENCE.645. The compound sentence may be reduced to a simplesentence, by substituting an Infinitive or a Participle for thedependent clause.
THE ABRIDGED SENTENCE. 413THE INFINITIVE AND INFINITIVE FORMS.646. The practical uses of the Infinitive and its kindredforms, as equivalents of dependent clauses, have already beenconsidered :Infinitive after Verbs of Creation : 423.Gerund and Gerundive : 425-433.Supine: 434-436.Infinitive in Object Sentences : 526-531.Infinitive in Complementary Final Sentences : 532.Infinitive in Eelative Sentences : 635.NOTE. Under the head of the Abridged Sentence will be treated the Historical Infinitiveand Orati5 Obllqua : the Historical Infinitive, because it is a compendiousImperfect : Oratio Obllqua, because it foreshortens, if it does not actually abridge,and effaces the finer distinctions of Oratio Recta.HISTORICAL INFINITIVE.647. The Infinitive of the Present is sometimes used bythe historians to give a rapid sequence of events, with thesubject in the Nominative ; generally, several Infinitives insuccession.(VerrSs) minitar! Diodoro, vociferarl palam, lacrimas interdum vix tenSre,C., Verr., iv. 18, 39 ;Verres threatened (was for threatening) Diodorus,bawled out before everybody, sometimes could hardly restrain his tears.NOTES. 1. The ancient assumption of an ellipsis of coepit, began (QUINT., ix. 3,58), serves to show the conception, although it does not explain the construction, whichhas not yet received a convincing explanation. A curious parallel is de with Infinitivein French. The Final Infinitive (to be) for, may help the conception, as it sometimesdoes the translation. It takes the place of the Imperfect, is used chiefly in rapid passages,and gives the outline of the thought, and not the details ; it has regularly thesequence of a Past tense.2. The Historical Infinitive is sometimes found after etc.cum, ubi, See S., lug.,98, 2 ; L., in. 37, 6 ; TAC., Ann., n. 4, 4 ; H., in. 31 ; Ann., in. 26, 2. No examples arecited from CICEUO and CAESAR ;this usage is characteristic of TACITUS.ORATIO OBLlQUA.648. The thoughts of the narrator, or the exact words ofa person, as reported by the narrator, are called Oratio Recta,or Direct Discourse.Indirect Discourse, or Oratio Obllqua, reports not the exactwords spoken, but the general impression produced.REMARKS. I. Uuder the general head of Oratio Obllqua are em-
414 THE ABRIDGED SENTENCE.braced also those clauses which imply Indirect Quotation (PartialObliquity). See 508.2. Inquam, quoth I, is used in citing the Oratio Recta ; aio, / say,generally in Oratio Obliqua.Inquam never precedes the Oratio Obliqua.but is always parenthetic ; aio may or may not be parenthetic. OratioRecta may also be cited by a parenthetic " ut ait,"" ut aiunt," rarelyait, (as) he says, (as) they say. The subject of inquit often precedesthe quotation, but when it is mentioned in the parenthesis it is almostalways put after the verb.Turn Cotta : rumoribus mecum, inquit, pugnas, C., N.D., in. 5, 13 (484).Aliquot somnia vSra, inquit Ennius, C., Div., n. 62, 127; "some dreamsare true," quoth Ennius.3. The lacking forms of inquam are supplied by forms of dlcere.649. Oratio Obliqua differs from Oratio Recta, partly in theuse of the Moods and Tenses, partly in the use of the pronouns.NOTES. 1. It must be remembered that as a rule the Roman thought immediatelyin 6. 0., and did not think first in 0. R. and then transfer to 6. 0. ;also that 6. 0. isnecessarily less accurate in its conception than 6. R. ,and hence it is not always possibleto construct the 6. R. from the 6. 0. with perfect certainty. What is ideal to thespeaker may become unreal to the narrator, from his knowledge of the result, and hence,when accuracy is aimed at, the narrator takes the point of view of the speaker, and inthe last resort passes over to 0. Recta.2. 6. Obliqua often comes in without any formal notice, and the governing verb hasoften to be supplied from the contest, sometimes from a preceding negative.(Regulus) sententiam n6 diceret recusavit ; (saying that) quam diu iureiurando hostium ten5r6tur, non esse s6 senatorem, C., m. Off., 27, 100.(Idem Regulus) reddi captivos negavit esse utile ; (saying that) illos enimadulescentes esse, se iam cQnfectum senectute,v.>.3. Sometimes, after a long stretch of 0. Obliqua, the writer suddenly shifts to the0. Recta. Examples : C., Tusc., n. 25, 61 ; L., n. 7, 9, etc.Moods inOratio OblTqua.650. In Oratio Obliqua the principal clauses (except Interrogativesand Imperatives) are put in the Infinitive, thesubordinate clauses in the Subjunctive.Oratio Recta :Apud Hypanim fluvium, inquit Aristoteles,Oratio Obliqua : Apud Hypanim fluvium Aristoteles ait0. R. : bestiolae quaedam nascuntur,6. 0. :0. R. :bestiolas quasdam nascl,quae unum diem vlvunt,0. 0. :quae unum diem vlvant, C., Tusc., i. 39, 94.6. R. On the river Bog, says Aristotle,I little creatures are born, that live (but)0. 0. Aristotle says that on the river Bog, ' one day.Socrates dlcere solebat :0. R. Omnes in eo quod sciunt satis sunt eloquentes,0. 0. Omnes in eo quod sclrent satis esse eloquentes, C., Or., 1. 14, ca
THE ABRIDGED SENTENCE. 4156. B. Socrates used to say : "All men ARE eloquent enough in what they UNDER-STAND."0. 0. Socrates used to say that all men WERE eloquent enough in what they UNDER-STOOD.REMARK. When the Principal Clause, or Apodosis, is in the Indie.,the Inf. is used according to the rule for Verbs of Saying and Thinking.When the Principal Clause, or Apodosis, is in the Subjv., as inthe Ideal and Unreal Conditions, special rules are necessary (656).Otherwise, Subjv. in 0. B. continues to be Subjv. in 6. 0.NOTE. In CAESAR, B.C., 111.73, "> where a principal clause is apparently put inthe Subjv., instead of dStrlmentum in bonum verteret, read (fore ut) . . . verteret,with Vossius, Dubner, Perrin, Hoffmann. NEP., n. 7, 6, is disputed.651. Interrogative sentences are put in the Subjunctive,according to 467 ;inasmuch as the verb of Saying involvesthe verb of Asking.Ariovistus respondit se prius in Galliam venisse quam populum Romanum:quid sibl vellet cur in suas possessi5n6s veniret, CAES., B.G., i. 44,7 ;Ariovistus replied that he had come to Gaul before the Roman people;what did he (Caesar) mean by coming into his possessions 9 (Quidtibi vis \)REMARKS. i. Indicative Rhetorical Questions (464), being substantiallystatements, are transferred from the Indie, of 6. B. to the Ace.and Inf. of 6. 0. when they are in the First and Third Persons. TheSecond Person goes into the Subjunctive.6. B. Num possum*Can I ? [No.] 0. 0. Num posse 1CAES., B.G.,i. 14; Could lie ?Quid est turpius 1 What is baser ? [Nothing.] Quid esse turpius 1CAES., B.Cf., v. 28, 6; What was baser ?Quo se repulses ab Bomanls itiir5s ? L., xxxiv. 11,6; whither shouldthey go, if repelled by the Romans ? (Quo Ibimus ?) Cui non apparc-reab e5 qul prior arma intulisset iniuriam ortam (esse) * L., xxxn. 10, 6; towhom is it not evident that the wrong began with him, who had beenthe first to wage war ? (Cui non apparet ?)Examples are not found in early Latin, are rare in classical period,but are especially common in LIVY.Si bonum ducerent, quid pr5 noxio damnassent? L., xxvu. 34, 13;' ifthey thought him a good man, why had they condemned him as guilty ?(Si bonum ducitis, quid pro noxio damnastis \)The Question in the Second Person often veils an Imperative. Herefrom LIVY on the Subjv. is the rule.Nee cessabant Sabini lustars rogit antes quid tererent tempus, L.,ni.61, 13. (0. B., Quid teritis *)
THE ABRIDGED SENTENCE.Exceptions are rare ; Subjv. with Third Person, CAES., B.C., i. 32,8; Inf. with Second Person, L., vi. 39, 10.2. In Subjv. Rhetorical Questions the Subjv. is either retained ortransferred to the Infinitive. The Deliberative? Subjv. is always retained.Qiiis sibi persuaderet sine certa re Ambiorigem ad eiusmodl consiliumdiscendisse 1 CAES., B. G., v. 29, 5 ;who could persuade himself thatAmbiorix had proceeded to an extreme measure like that, without (havingmade) a sure thing (of it) ? (Quis sibi persuadeat 1)The Inf. form would be the Future :quern sibi persuasurum 1 (G59),and is not to be distinguished from the Fut. Indicative.652. Imperative sentences are put in the Subjunctive,sometimes with, usually without, ut; the Negative is, ofcourse, ne (never ut ne).Eedditur responsum : nondura tempos pugnae ease ;castrls se tenerent,L., n. 45, 8; there teas returned for answer, that it was not yet time tofight, that they must keep within the camp. (0. R., castrls v5s tente.)(Vercingetorfx) cohortatus est ng :perturbarentur incommode, CAES., B.G.,vn. 29, 1 ; Vercingetorix comforted them (by saying) that they must notallow themselves to be disconcerted oy the disaster. (0. E., nSlite perturbarf.)REMARKS. i. TTt can be used according to 546, after verbs of Willand Desire and their equivalents.Pytbia respondit nt moenibus llgnels s6 munlrent, NEP., n. 2,6 ;thePythia answered that they must defend themselves with walls of wood.2. Verbs of Will and Desire, being also verba dlcendi, frequentlyhave an nt clause followed by an Ace. with the Inf., the second clauseadding a statement to the request.TTbil orabant ut sibi auxilium ferret ;ad auxilium spemqne reliqul temporissatis futurum, CAES., B.G., iv. 16, 5.Tenses inOratio Obliqua.653. The Tenses of the Infinitive follow the laws alreadylaid down (530):The Present Infinitive expresses contemporaneous action ;The Perfect Infinitive expresses prior action ;The Future Infinitive expresses future action.REMARK. The Impf. Indie., as expressing prior continuance,becomes the Pf . Inf. in 6. 0., and hence loses its note of continuance.654. The Tenses of the Subjunctive follow the laws of
THE ABRIDGED SENTENCE. 417sequence (510).The choice isregulated by the point ofnew of the Reporter, or the point of view of the Speaker.NOTE. By assuming the point of view of the speaker, greater liveliness as well asgreater accuracy is imparted to the discourse. This form is technically called RepraesentatiS.In Conditional Sentences RepraesentatiS often serves to prevent ambiguity.The point of view not unf requently shifts from reporter to speaker, sometimes inthe same sentence ;this has the effect of giving additional emphasis to the primaryverb, and is therefore common in commands and in favourable alternatives.Point of View of the Reporter:in sua G-alliaLegation! Ariovistus respondit sibl mirum viderl quid :quam bel!5 vicisset, Caesar! negotii esset, CAES. ,B. G. i. , 34, 4 ;to theembassy Ariovistus replied, that it seemed strange to him (he wondered)what business Caesar had in his Gaul, which he had conquered inwar.Point of View of the Speaker :[ Legatis Helvetiorum] Caesar respondit consuesse decs immortales, quo:gravius homings ex commutatione rerum doleant, quos pro scelere eorumulclscl velint, his secundi5r5s interdum rSs concSdere, CAES., B.G., i. 14, 5;to the envoys of the Helvetians Caesar replied, that the gods were (are)wont, that men might (may) suffer the more severely from change intheir fortunes, to grant occasional increase of prosperity to those whomthey wished (wish) to punish for their crime. (A long passage is L.,xxvni. 32.)Point of View shifted :Ad haec Marcius respondit: SI quid ab senatu petere vellent, ab armlsdiscedant, S., C., 34, 1; thereto Marcius replied: If they wished to askanything of the senate, they must lay down their arms.Proinde aut cSderent (undesired alternative) animo atque virtute gentiper eos dies totiens ab se victae, aut itineris finem sperent (desired alternative)campum interiacentem Tiber! ac moenibus Romanls, L., xxi. 30, 11 ;therefore they should either yield in spirit and courage to a nationwhich during those days they had so often conquered, or they must hopeas the end of their march the plain that lies between the Tiber and thewalls of Rome.655. Object, Causal, Temporal, and Relative Clauses followthe general laws for Subordinate Clauses in OratioObliqua.For examples of Object Clauses, see 525 ;for Causal, see 541 ;forTemporal, see 561-564, 569-577; for Relative, see 628.REMARKS. i. Coordinate Relative Clauses are put in the Ace. andInfinitive (635).27
'41 8 THE ABRIDGED SENTENCE.2. Relative Clauses are put in the Indicative : (a) In mere circumlocutions,(b) In explanations of the narrator (628, R.).3. Dam, with the Indie., is often retained as a mere circumlocution:Die, hospes, Spartae nos te hie vidisse iacentis, dum sanctis patriae leglbusobsequimur, C., Tusc.,i. 42, 101 ; tellSparta, stranger, that thou hastseen us lying here obeying (in obedience to) our country's hallowedlaws.So also sometimes cum ;see C., Lael., 3, 12.656. Conditional Sentences in Oratio Obllqua, Total andPartial.1. The Protasis follows the rule.2. The Indicative Apodosis follows the rule, but Present,Imperfect, and Perfect Subjunctive are turned into theFuture Infinitive or its periphrases.The Pluperfect Subjunctiveis transferred to the PerfectInfinitive of the Active Periphrastic Conjugation.Passive and Supineless Verbs take the circumlocutionwith futurum fuisse ut . . . .248, N. 3.REMARK. Fosse needs no Fut. (248, R.), and potuisse no Periphrasticso that these forms are often used to lighten the construction.Pf. Inf.,3.Identical Forms. In the transfer of Conditions to6. 0., the difference between many forms disappears. Forinstance,I. 1. SI id credis, errabis."j2. SI id crScles, errabis. I Dico te, si id creuas, erraturum esse.3. SI id credas, erres.II. 1. SI id crgdis, errabis. 1a S IdX, Sff 1 -4. Si id crederes, errares.HI. l. SI id crgdideris, errabis.3.ll'idSSS; Serf,4. SI id cr6didiss6s, errarSs,NOTES. 1. In No. I. the difference is not vital, though exactness is lost.2. (a) In No. II. the ambiguity lies practically between 2 and 3 ;inasmuch asHepraesentatio is usually employed for the Logical Condition, and the PeriphrasticPf . Inf. is employed in the Unreal, wherever it is possible. The difference betweenan Unfulfilled Present and an Unfulfilled Past would naturally vanish to the narrator,to whom both are Past.Ariovistus rospondit si :quid ipsl a Caesare opus esset, sese ad ilium ventiirumfuisse : si quid ille s6 velit, ilium ad s6 venire oportere, CAES., B. G., i.
THE ABEIDGED SENTENCE. 41934, 2 ;Arwvistus answered, that if he had wanted anything of Caesar he would havecome to him ; if he (Caesar) wanted anything of him, he ought to come to him (Ariovistus).0. B. : si quid mihi a Caesare opus esset, ego ad ilium venissem ;siquid ille mS vult, ilium ad mS venire oportet.Fatentur se virtutis causa, nisi ea voluptatem faceret, ne manum quidemversuros fuisse, C., Fin., v. 31, 93 ; they confess that for virtue's own sake, if it didnot cause pleasure, they would not even turn a hand. 0, R. : nisi ea voluptatemfaceret n5 manum quidem verterSmus.(6) Occasionally in the Logical Condition the Put. Indie, is changed to the Fut.Periphrastic Subjv., thus : si adsJmsurus esset, etiam opinaturum is an Q. 0.quotation for si ... adsentiStur, opinabitur in C., Ac., n. 21, 67.3. No. III., like No. II., is used chiefly of the future. Bat in 3 the periphrases withfore (futurum esse) are commonly employed for the active and the Pf .participle, withfore for the passive. In 4 the same fading out of the difference between UnfulfilledPresent and Past occurs as in II.657. Logical Conditions in Oratio Obliqua.1. Ad haec Ariovistus respondit : si ipse populo Romans non praescriberetquemadmodum suo iure uterStur, non oportere sese a populo Romano insu5 iure impediri, CAES., E.G.,i. 36, 2 ;to this Arwvistus made answer:If he did not prescribe to the Roman people how to exercise their right,he ought not to be hindered by the Roman people in the exercise of hisright. (0. B. : si ego non praescrfoo, non oportet me impediri.)2. Si bonum ducerent, quid pro noxio damnassent 1 Si noxium comperissent,quid alterum (consulatum) crSderent? L., xxvu. 34, 13; if theythought him a good man, why had they condemned him as guilty ; if,on the other hand, they had found him guilty, why did they intrusthim with a second consulship 9 (0. B. : si ducitis, quid damnastis ? sicomperistis, quid creditis ? )3. Titurius clamitabat, suam sententiam in utramque partem essetutam ;si nihil esset (0. B. : si nihil erit) durius, nullo perlculo ad proximamlegionem perventuros (0. B, :pervenietis) si Gallia omnis cum Germanisconsentiret (0. B. si :;consentit) unam esse (6. B. :est) in celeritatepositam salutem, CAES., B.G., v. 29, 6; Titurius kept crying out thathis resolution was safe in either case :if there were (should be) noespecial pressure, they would get to the next legion without danger ; ifall Gaul was in league with the Germans, their only safety lay in speed.4. Eum omnium laborum finem fore exlstimabant si hostem Iliberointer clud ere potuissent, CAES., B.C., i. 68, 3; they thought that would bethe end of all (their) toils, if they could cut off the enemy from theEbro. (6. B. : is laborum finis erit (or fuerit) si hostem intercluderepotuerimus.5. [HI] lugurthae non mediocrem animum pollicitando aecendebant siMicipsa rgx occidisset, fore uti solus imperi Numidiae potirgtur, 3., lug., 8,1 ; these persons kindled no little courage in Jugurtha('s heart) by promisingover and over that if King Micipsa fell, he alone should possess therule over Numidia. (0. B. : si Micipsa occiderit, tu solus imperi potiSris.)
42OTHE ABRIDGED SENTENCE.6. [FidSs data est] si lugurtham vlvom ant necatum sib! tradidissetfore ut ill! senatus inpunitatem et sua omnia concederet, S., lug., 61, 5; hisword was pledged that if he delivered to him Jugurtha, alive or dead,the senate would grant him impunity, and all that was his. (6. E. : simih! tradideris, tibi senatus tua omnia concedet. )7.Non mul to ante urbem captam exaudita vox est ... futurum esse,nisi provisum esset, ut Roma caperStur, C., Div., i. 45, 101 ; not long beforethe taking of the city, a voice was heard (saying), that unless precautionswere adopted, Rome would be taken. (0. B. : nisi provisum erit,Roma capietur.)8. Ariovistus respondit si quid ille sg velit ilium ad sS venire oportere,CAES., E.G., i. 34, 2 (656, 3, N. 2).9. Ariovistus respondit nisi decgdat [Caesar] sese ilium pro hoste habiturum; quod si eum interfecerit, multis sese nobilibus principibusque populiRomani gratum esse facturum, CAES., B.G., i. 44, 12; Ariovistus replied,that unless Caesar withdrew, he should regard him as an enemy, andin case he killed him, he would do a favour to many men of the highestposition among the Roman people. (0. E. : nisi decodes te pro hostehabgbo . . . si tS interfgcero gratum fecsro: 244, B. 4.)REMARK.Posse is used as has been stated (656, 2, R.).Negarunt diriml bellum posse nisi Messeniis Achaei Pylum redderent,L., xxvn. 30, 13 ; they said that the war could not be stopped unless theAchaeans restored Pylos to the Messenians. (6. E. : bellum diriml n6npotest (potent) nisi Pylum reddent.)Docent, si turris concidisset, non posse militSs continer! quin spe praedaein urbem irrumperent, CAES., B.C., 11. 12, 4; they show that if the towerfell, the soldiers could not be kept from bursting into the city in the hopeof booty. (6. E. si :conciderit, non possunt (poterunt) contineri.)658. Ideal Conditions in Oratio Obliqua.1. Ait sS si uratur " Quam hoc suave " dicturum, C., Fin., n. 27, 88; hedeclares that if he were to be burnt he would " say, How sweet this is."(0. E. : si urar, dicam, same form as Logical.)2. Voluptatem si ipsa pro sg loquatur concessuram arbitror Dignitati,C., Fin., in. i, 1 ;J think that if Pleasure were to speak for herself, shewould yield (the palm) to Virtue. The contest shows that the conditioii is Ideal, not Logical. Si loquatur, concedat. Compare 596,R. i.659. Unreal Conditions in Oratio Obliqua.i. Titurius clamitabat Eburongs, si [Caesar] adesset, ad castra ventures[non] esse, CAES., .B.6?., v. 29, 2 ;Titurius kept crying out that ifCaesar were there, the Eburones would not be coming to the camp.'.0. E. ; si Caesar adesset, Eburoues non venirent.) On the rareness of
THE ABRIDGED SENTENCE. 421this form, see 599, R. 4 ;and even this passage has been emended intoventures sesS (for esse).2.| Apparebat si diutius| vlxisset, Hamilcare dace Poencs arma Italiaeinlaturos fuisse, L., xxi. 2, 2; it was evident that if he had lived longer,the Punics would have carried their arms into Italy under Hamilcar'sconduct.3. Nisi eo ipso temper e nun til de Caesar is victoria essent allatl exlstimabantplgrique futurum fuisse ut (oppidum) amitterStur, CAES., B. C., m.101, 3 ;had not news of Caesar's victory been brought at that very time,most persons thought the city would have been lost. (0. E. : nisi nuntilallatl essent, oppidum amissum esset.)NOTE. As the Plupf. Indie, is sometimes used (rhetorically) for the Subjv. (254, K.3), BO the ordinary Pf . Inf. is sometimes employed instead of the Periphrastic :Nemo mihi persuadebit multos praestantes viros tanta esse conatos-( conaturos fuisse) nisi animo cernerent (597, B. i) posteritatem ad se pertinSre,C., Cat. M., 23, 82; tio one will persuade me that (so) many eminent men hadmade such mighty endeavours, had they not seen with their minds'" (eye) that posteritybelonged to them. Agricola solebat narrare s prima in iuventa studiumphiiosophiae acrius hausisse (0. R. :hauserat), nl prudentia matris coercuisset,Cf. TAC., Agr., 4, 5 ; Agricola used to relate that in his earliest youth he wouldhave drunk in more eagerly the study of philosophy, had not his mother's prudencerestrained him.So with potuisse:(PompSium) plerlque exlstimant s! acrius InsequI voluisset bellum eo diSpotuisse finire, CAES., B. C., in. 51, 3 ; most people think that if Pompey had (but)determined to follow up more energetically, he could have finished the war on that day.(0. B. si :voluisset, potuit, 597, R. 3.) Namque ilia multitudine si sana mensesset (597, B. i) Graeciae, supplicium Persas dare potuisse, NEP., xvii. 5, 2 ; forwith that number, if Greece' had had (had been in her) sound mind, the Persiansmight have paid the penalty (due). (0. R. : si sana m6ns esset Graeciae, suppliciumPersae dare potuerunt.)Pronouns inOratio Obliqua.660. i. The Reflexive is used according to the principleslaid down in 520 ff.2. The person addressed is usually ille ;less often is.Ariovistus respondit nisi decedat [Caesar] sese ilium pro hoste habiturum:quod si eum interfecerit, multis sese nobilibus prlncipibusque popullRomani gratum esse facturum, CAES., B.G., i. 44, 12 (657, 9).Of course, this does not exclude the ordinary demonstrative use.3. Hie and iste are commonly changed into ille or is, mineischanged into turn and tune, except when already contrastedwith tune, when it is retained (S., lug., 109, 3 ; in, 1).Diodorus [respondit] illud argentum se paucis illis diebus mlsisse Lilybaeum,C., Verr., iv. 18, 39 (398, R. 4).
422 THE ABRIDGED SENTENCE.4. Nos is used when the narrator's party is referred to ;compare CAES., B. G,, i. 44, below.5. Ipse seems to be used sometimes in 6. 0. with referenceto the principal subject, as contrasted with the person addressed.0. E. as well.Usually, however, ipse would have occurred in theAriovistus respondit: Si ipse populo Romano non praescriberet, quemadmochimsuo lore uteretur, non oportere sese a populo Romano in suo iureimpedirl, CAES., B.G., i. 36, 2 (657).661. Specimens of the conversion of Oratio Obllqua intoOratio Recta.Oratio Obllqua.G.,i. 44. otherwise traducS.Oratio Recta.i. Ariovistus respondit:Transisse Rhenum sese non sud Transz* Rhenum non mea spontesponte sed rogatum et arcessltuw sed rogatus et arcessltus aa Gallis ;non sine magna spe magnlsquepraemiis domum propin-praemiis domum propinquosqueGallis ;n5n sine mffigna sp5 magnlsquequosque rellqm'sse; sedes habere reliqui; sedes habe5 in Gallia abin Gallia ab ipsis concessas, obsides ipsis concessas, obsides ipsorumipsorum voluntate datSs ; stlpendiumcapere iure belli, quod vic-iure belli, quod victores victis im-voluntate datos; stlpendium capi'5tSres victis imponereNon consuerin/. ponere consuerim(. Non ego Galassed Galll mihl bellum intule-sese Gallis sed G&llos sibi bellumiutuKsse ; omnBs Galliae clvitatesad se oppugnandum \enisse me oppugnandum vQnerunt et conrunt; omnes Galliae clvitates adet contra se castra habuisse ;eo-s tra me castra babuerunt ; eae omnescopiae a me uno proelio pulsaeomn6s copias a se uno proelio pulsflsac superStos esse. Si iterum ac superatae sunt. SI iterum experirlexperiri velint, se iterum paratuwvolunt, iterum paratus sumesse decertare ;si pace uti velint, decertare, si pace uti volunt, inlquumest deinlquum esse d5 stipendio recusare,quod sua voluntate ad stipendio recusare,id tempus quod sua voluntate ad hoc tempuspependerin^. Amlcitiam populi pependerunt. Amlcitiam populiRoman! sibi Ornaments et praesidio,non detriments esse oportere sidio, nOn detriments esse oporteRomanI mihl ornameuto et prae-idque se ea spB petisse. Si per idquepopulum Romanum spe petn. Si per populumstlpendium Romanum stlpendium remitterremitta^wr et deditlcil subtrahawtur,non minus libenter sese recusanuslibenter recusaZw populi RS-et deditlcil subtrabentur, nSn miturumpopuli RomanI amlcitiam manl amlcitiam quam appetw.quam appetierit. Quod multitudinemGermanSrum in Galliam in Galliam traducam,* id mel mu-Quod multitudinem GermanSrumtraduea^, id se sul muniendl, non niendl, non Galliae impiignandaeGalliae impiignandae causa i&cere ; causa facio; eius rel testimonio estEius rel testimonio esse quod nisirogatus non venenY quod nisiet quod bellumrogatus non vent et quodbellum nSn intul* sed defend*.non intulen'i sed defenderiY.* Allusion to the preceding speech,CAES., B.
THE ABRIDGED SENTENCE. 423OratidObllqua.Oratio E6cta.2. His Caesar ita respondit:Ed sibi, minus dubitationis darlquod eas rBs quas legati HelvBtilcommemorassent memoria teneretatque eo gravius ferre quo minusmerito populi R5manl &ccidissent ;si alicuius iniuriae sibi consciusquifuisset non fume difficile cavere ;sed eO deceptum quod neque commissuma sB inteilegeret quarBtimeretneque sine causa timendumpntdret. Quod si veteris contumeliaeobllvlsci vellet, num etiam recentiuminiuriarum, quod eo invltoiter per prOvinciam per vim temptdssent,quod Aeduos, quod AmbarrCs,quod Allobrogas vexassentmemoriam deponere posse 9 Quodsud victoria tarn insolenter gloriarentur,quodque tarn diu. se impunetulisse iniurias admlrarentur e5-dem pertinere. Consume enimdeds immortalBs quo gravius hominesex commutatione r5rumdoleant, quos pro scelere eOrumulciscl vetint, his secundiorBs interdumres et diuturniorem impunitatemconcBdere. Cum ea itasint, tamen si obsidBs ab ils sibidentur, uti ea quae polliceemtfwfactui'os intellega^, et si Aeduis dBiniuriis quas ipsis sociisque eorumintulerint, item si Allobrogibussatisfaciaw^, sese cum ils pacemesse facturum.CAES., B.Q., i. 14.Hoc mihl minus dubitatiCnisdatur quod eas rBs quas vos, legatiHelvBtii, commemordstis, memoriateneo atque hoc gravius fero quominus merito populi Roman! acciderunt; qui si alicuius iniuriaesib! cSnscius fuisset, non fn.it difficilecavere ;sed eo dBceptus quodneque commissum a sB intellegefta^quarB timBret neque sine causa timendumputtibat. Quod si veteriscontumBliae oblivlsci void, numetiam recentium iniuriarum, quodme invitO iter per prOvinciam pervim tern ptasta's, quod AeduSs, quodAmbarros, quod Allobrogas vexastis,memoriam deponere possum?Quod vestra victoria tarn msolenterglon&mini, quodque tarn diu vosimpune tulisse iniurias admlrdminleOdemConsuevenmtpertine^.enim di immortalBs quo graviushomines ex commutatione rerumdoleant, quOs pro scelere eSrumulciscl volunt, his secundiores interdumres et diuturniorem impunitatemconcedere. Cum haec itasint, tamen si obsides a vobls mihldabuntur, uti ea, quae potticemini,facturos intellegam et si Aeduis dBiniuriis quas ipsis sociisque eorumintub'sfo's, item si Allobrogibussatisfacie^'s, ego voblscum pacemfaciam.3. Sulla regl patefecit:Quod pollicea^wr, senatuw etpopuluTO Romanuw, quoniam ampliusarmis valuissent, nOn in gratiamh&bitiirds; faciundum aliquid,quod illorum magis quamsud retulisse \ideretur; id ideo inpromptu esse, quoniam lugurthaecOpiam haberet, quern si ROmanlstr&didisset, fore ut illl plurimumdeberetur ; amlcitiam, foedus, Numidiaepartem, quam nunc peteret,tune ultro adven^ram.S., lug., in.Quod pollicms, senatus et populusRomanus quoniam ampliusarmis valuerunt, non in gratiamb&bebunt faciundum aliquid, quodillorum magis quam tud retulissevidedtur; id ideo in promptu est,quoniam lugurthae copiam habes,quern si Romanls tradiderls tiblplurimum dBbei*7wr; amicitia, foedus,Numidiae pars, quam nunctune ultro advene^.pett's,
424 THE ABRIDGED SENTENCE.Oratio Obllqua.Gratis Recta.4. Athenienses deplordveruntvastdtionem populdtionemque miserabilemagrorum. Neque se id Non idqueri quod hostilia ab querimur quod hostiliahoste passl ab hoste passl sumus. Sunt enimforent; esse enim quaedam belli quaedam belli iura quae ut facereiura quae ut facere ita pat! sit fas. pati est fas. Sata exuri, diruiSata exiiri, dirui tecta, praedas tecta, praedas hominum pecorumqueagi misera magis quam indignahominum pecorumque agi miseramagis quam indigna patientl esse ; patientl sunt verum enimverum verO idenim vBrfl id se quen, quod querimur quod is, qul Romanesis, qui Romanes alienigenas et barbarosvocet, adeo omnia simul dl-omnia simul divina humanaquealienigenas et barbaros vocat, adeovina humanaque itira pollum'i ut iura pollmYpriore populatione cum priore populationeInfernis cum Infernis diis, secunda cum superlsbellum nefarium gesserit.diis, secunda cum superis bellumnefarium gesserit. Omnia sepulcraOmnia sepulcra monumentaque di-monumentaque diruta esse in ruta sunt in finibus nostrls, omni-finibus suls, omnium nudatos um nudat* manes, nullius ossa terrSmanes, nullius ossa terra tegl. teguntur. Qualem terram AtticamQualem terram Atticam fecerit,iecit, exornatam quondam opulentamque,quondam opulentamque,talem eum si \\cebit (or :si licea^ Aetoliam liceatf)Graeciamque omnem Graeciamquei&cturum. nem om-is&iet (or:faciat). UrbisUrbis quoque suae similem defOrmitdtemfuturam fuisse, nisi Romanlsubvenissent.quoque nostrae simili's deformitosfuisset, nisi Romanl subvenissent.INVOLVED ORATIO OBLlQUA.MOOD.ATTRACTION OF662. OratiS Obllqua proper depends on some verb of Thinking orSaying, expressed or understood. In a more general sense the term 6.Obliqua is used of all complementary clauses that belong to ideal relations.The principle is the same in both sets of sentences, for in theone, as in the other, the Infinitive takes its dependencies in the Subjunctive,on account of the close relation between the Ideal mood andthe Substantive Idea of the verb. Hence the favourite combination ofthe Infinitive and the Ideal Second person:Difficile est amlcitiam manere si a virtute dgfScerls, C., Lael., n, 87; itis hard for friendship to abide if you (one) have fallen away from virtue.Proprium humanl ingenil est odisse quern laeseris, TAG., Agr., 42,4 ;it is (peculiar to) human nature to hate whom you have injured.(But odisti quern laesistl.)The so-called attraction of mood, by which clauses originally Indicativebecome Subjunctive in dependence on Subjunctives,phase of the same general principle.is another
THE ABEIDGED SENTENCE. 425663. i. All clauses which depend on Infinitives and Subjunctives,and form an integral part of the thought, are putin the Subjunctive (Subjunctive by Attraction).Recordatione nostrae amicitiae sic fruor ut beats vlxisse videar quia comSclpione vixerim, C., Lael, , 4, 15 : / enjoy the remembrance of our friendshipso much that I seem to have lived happily because I lived withScipio. Vereor nS dum minuere velim labOrem augeam, C., Leg., i, 4, 12;increase it (dumI fear lest while I am wishing to lessen the toil I mayminuere volo, augeo).C., Cat.M., 10, 33 (263, 2, a).Isto bono utare dum adsit, cum absit, ne requlras,QuarS fisbat ut omnium oculos quotiescumquein publicum prodisset ad sS converteret, NEP., vn. 3, 5 (567; quotiescumqueprodierat convert ebat). Nescire quid antequam natus sis accident,id est semper ease puerum, C., Or., 34, 120 ;not to know what happenedbefore you were born, (that) is to be always a boy. Fraus fldem in parvissibl praestruit ut cum operae pretium sit, cum mercede magna fallat, L.,xxvin. 42, 7 ; fraud lays itself a foundation of credit in small thingsin order that when it is worth while it may make a great profit bycheating. [Araneolae] rSte texunt ut si quid inhaeserit confidant, C.,N.D., ii. 48, 123 (567 ; si quid inhaesit conficiunt). AbeuntI si quidpoposceritconcedere mSris, TAG., G., 21, 4 ;to the departing (guest)customary to grant anything that he asks (si quid poposcit concSdunt).it isNOTES. 1. Dum not unfrequently resists the Attraction both in prose and poetry:Tantum ne noceas dum vis prodesse vidStQ, Ov., Tr.. 1. 1, 101 (548).2. On the retention of the Indie, in Eelative clauses, see 628, B.2. PARTIAL OBLIQUITY. (a) From this it is easy to see how theSubjunctive came to be used in a Generic or Iterative sense afterTenses of Continuance. Present, Imperfect, and Future Indicativemay all involve the Notion of Habit, Will, Inclination, Endeavour, andthe complementary clauses would follow the sense rather than the form.For examples, see 567, N.(6) So also isexplained the use of the Subjunctive in Causal Sentences,and especially in Conditional Sentences, where the Apodosis isembodied in the leading verb.(lugurtha) timSbat Iram senatus (= nS IrascerStur senatus) ni paruissetISgatls, S., lug., 25, 7 (601). [TTbils] auxilium suum (= s6 auxiliaturum)pollicitus est, si ab Suebls premerentur, CAES., B.O., iv. 19, 1. Praetoraedem (= se aedificaturum) Diovl vovit si e5 die hostis fudisset, L., xxxi.21, 12.The idea of 6. 0. is shown in the tense :Si per Metellum licitum esset matres veniebant ( venturae erant), C.,Verr., v. 49, 129. [Dictator]ad hostem ducit nullo loco nisi necessitascogeret fortunae s6 commissurus, L., xxn. 12, 2 (438, N.).
426 PAKTICIPIAL SENTENCES.PARTICIPIAL SENTENCES.664. Participles are used in Latin even more extensivelythan in English, to express a great variety of subordinaterelations, such as Time and Circumstance, Cause and Occasion,Condition and Concession. The classification cannotalways be exact, as one kind blends with another.REMARKS. I. It is sometimes convenient to translate a ParticipialSentence by a coordinate clause, but the Participle itself is never coordinate,and such clauses are never equivalents. (410, R. 2.)Manlius Gallum caesura torque spoliavit, L., vi. 42, 5; Manlius slew theGaul and stripped him of his neckchain (after slaying the Gaul strippedhim of his neckchain, having slain, etc.). (Miltiades) capitis absolutus,pecunia multatus est, NEP., i. 7, 6; Miltiades (though) acquitted of a capitalcharge, was mulcted in (a sum of) money (was acquitted, but mulcted).2. A common translation of the Participle is an abstract substantive;see 325, R. 3; 437, N.2.Nee terra mutata mutavit mores, L., xxxvn. 54, 18 ;nor hath thechange of land changed the character. Teucer TJlixgn reum facit Aiacisoccisi, QUINT., iv. 2, 13 ;Teucer indicts Ulysses for the murder of Ajax.Inter haec parata atque decreta, S.. C., 43, 3.3. On the Participle after verbs of Perception and Representation,see 536.665. Participles may represent Time When.Alexander moriens anuluni suum dederat Ferdiccae, NEP., xvm. 2, 1;Alexander (when he was) dying, had given his ring to Perdiccas.Dionysius tyrannus Syracusis expulsus CorinthI pueros docSbat, C., Tusc.,m. 12, 27; Dionysius the tyrant, (after he had been) exiled from Syracuse(after his exile from Syracuse), taught (a) boys' (school) at Corinth.Ablative Absolute.(Solon et Pisistratus) Servio Tulli5 rSgnante vigu6runt, C., Br., 10, 39;Solon and Pisistratus flourished when Servius Tullius was king (in thereign of Servius Tullius). S5le orto VolscI sS circumvallatos vlderunt,Cf. L., iv. 9, 13; when the sun was risen (after sunrise), the Volscianssaw that they were surrounded by lines of intrenchment.NOTES. 1. On the Abl. Abe. of the simple Participle, see 410, N. 4.2. SUETONIUS uses the Abl. Abe. as well as the simple Participle with ante (prius):quam (Tiberius) exc5ssum AugustI n5n prius palanx fBcit quam Agrippaiuvene interempto, Tib., 22 ;see also lul., 58.
PARTICIPIAL SENTENCES. 427666. Participles may represent Cause Why.Areopagltae damnaverunt puerum coturnicum oculos eruentem, Cf.QUINT., v. 9, 13; the court of Mars' Hill condemned a boy for pluckingout (because he plucked out) the eyes of quails. AthniSns6s Alcibiademcorruptum a rege Persarum capere noluisse Cymen arguebant, Cf. NEP.,vii. 7,2; the Athenians charged Alcibiades with having been unwillingto take Cyme (because he had been) bribed by the King of Persia.Ablative Absolute.(Roman! veteres) rggnarl omnes volSbant llbertatis dulcedine nondumexperts, L., i. 17, 3 ;the old Romans all wished to have a king over them(because they had) not yet tried the sweetness of liberty.NOTE.An apparent cause is given by ut, as, velut, as, for instance, tamquam,(BO) CM, quasi, as if, see 602, N. 3.lu this usage CICERO and CAESAR are very careful, employing only quasi, ut,LIVT introduces tamquam, utpote, velut, and the tendency grows until it reachesits culmination in TACITUS.667: Participles may represent Condition and Concession.SI latet ars prSdest, affert dSprSnsa pudorem, Ov., A. A., n. 313 (593,2). [Blsus] interdum ita repente erumpit ut eum cupientes tenere nequeamus,Cf. C., Or., n. 58, 235 (609). (Miltiades) capitis absolutus, pecuniamultatus est, NEP., i. 7, 6(664, E. i).Ablative Absolute.Maximas virtutSs iacere omngs necesse est voluptate dominante, C., Fin.,n. 35, 117 (593, 2).NOTE.On the combination of quamquam, quamvis, and etsi with the Participle,see 609, N. 1 ; nisi also is not uncommon ; tamen is sometimes added in the principalclause.668. Participles may represent Eelative Clauses (637).OmnSs aliud agentSs, aliud simulantgs, perfidl (sunt), C., Off., in. 14, 60(637). [Flsistratus] Homeri libros confuses antea sic disposuisse dicitur utnunc habSmus, C., Or., in. 34, 137 (637).REMARK. So-called, qul dicitur, vocatur, quern vocant ;above-mentioned,quern antea, supra dlximus.669. Future Participle (Active). The Future Participle is a verbaladjective, denoting Capability and Tendency, chiefly employed in theolder language with sum, I am, as a periphrastic tense. In later Latinit is used freely, just as the Present and Perfect Participles, to expresssubordinate relations.Peculiar is the free use of it in Sentences of Design, and especially
428 ARRANGEMENT OF WORDS.noticeable the compactness gained by the employment of it in ConditionalRelations.670. In later Latin, the Future Participle (active) is usedto represent subordinate relations (438, N.):1. Time When.(Tiberius) traiecturus (= com traiecturus esset) BhSnum commeatum nontransmlsit, SUET., Tib,, 18; when Tiberius was about to cross the Rhine,he did not send over the provisions.2. Cause Why.Deridiculo fait senez foedissimae adulationis tantum infamia usurus,TAC., Ann., in. 57, 3; a butt of ridicule was the old man, as infamyivas the only gain he would make by his foul fawning. Antiochus sgcurusdS bello Romano erat tamquam non transiturls in Asiam Romania,L., xxxvi. 41, 1 (602, N. 3).3. Purpose (usually after a verb of Motion).(Maroboduus) misit legates ad Tiberium oraturos auxilia, TAG., Ann. n.46 (438, N.). Consul Larisam est profectus, ibi de sumnia belli consultaturus,L., xxxvi. 14, 5.NOTE. The Pr. Participle is sometimes used in a similar sense, but the Purpose isonly an inference :L6gatl venSrunt nuntiantes Asiae quoque civitatSs sollicitarl, L., xxxi. 2,1 ; envoys came with the announcement that the states of Asia also were tampered with.4. Condition and Concession.(1) Protasis.Dedituris se Hannibal! fuisse accersendum Romanorum praesidium 1 L.,xxni. 44, 2 ; if they had been ready to surrender to Hannibal, wouldthey have had to send for a Roman garrison ? (= si dediturl foissent,6. E. : si dSditurl fuerunt.)(2) Apodosis.Quatixmt arma, rupturl imperium nl ducantur, TAC., H., in. 19, 3;they clash their arms, ready to break orders, if they be not led forward.Librum misl exigent! tibi, missurus etsl non exegisses, PLIN., Ep.. in. 13,1 ;I have sent you the book, as you exacted it, although I should havesent it even if you had not exacted it.ARRANGEMENT OF WORDS.671. The Latin language allows greater freedom in thearrangement of words than the English. This freedom is,of course, due to its greater wealth of inflections.
ARRANGEMENT OF WORDS. 429Two elements enter into the composition of a Latin Sentence,governing to some extent its arrangement : Grammarand Ehetoric.672. i. Grammatical arrangement has for its object clearness.It shows the ideas in the order of development in themind of the speaker. By Grammatical arrangement thesentence grows under the view.2. Ehetorical arrangement has for its objects Emphasisand Ehythm. It presents a sentence already developed insuch a way that the attention is directed to certain parts ofit especially.(a) Emphasis is produced :1. By reversing the ordinary position.2.By approximation of similars or opposites.3. By separation.In all sentences Beginning and End are emphatic points.In longsentences the Means as well as the Extremes are the points of emphasis.(b) Rhythm. Much depends on the rhythmical order of words, forwhich the treatises of the ancients are to be consulted. Especiallyavoided are poetic rhythms.or close of an Hexameter at the end of a period.So, for example, the Dactyl and Spondee,673. Two further principles seem to underlie the arrangementof Latin sentences :(a) that of the ascending construction; (b) that of the descending construction. In theascending construction, which is more common, the principalword is placed last, and the subordinate ones, in theorder of their importance, precede. In the descending constructionthe reverse is the process. The descending constructionis regular in definitions.674. RULE I. The most simple arrangement of a sentenceis as follows :1. The Subject and its Modifiers.2. The Predicate and its Modifiers.i. Dionysius tyrannus, Syracusis expulsus, 2. Corinth! pueros docSbat,C.,Tusc., m. 12, 27(665).Rhetorical positions:Potentes sequitur invidia, QUINT., iv. 1, 14 (477, N. 4). Nobls non satis-
43O ARRANGEMENT OF WORDS.facit ipse DSmosthenSs, Cf. C., Or., 29, 104 (552, R. i). Dlscrlptus (erat)populus cnsu, ordinibus, aetatibus, C., Leg., in. ig, 44 (397). Intramoenia sunt host6s, S., C., 52, 35 (477).REMARK.The modifiers of the predicate stand in the order of theirimportance. The following arrangement is common :i. Place, Time, Cause, or Means. 2. Indirect Object. 3. DirectObject. 4. Adverb. 5. Verb.NOTE.The postponement of the subject is rare and always for definite reasons inthe classical period later it ;becomes a mannerism, especially in the elder PLINY ; to alees degree in NEPOS and LIVT.675. EULE II. Interrogative Sentences begin with theinterrogative, subordinate clauses with the leading particleor relative.Quis eum diligat quern metuat ? C., Lael., 15, 53 (629). Postquam Caesarpervgnit obsides poposcit, CAES., B.G., i. 27, 3 (561). Si sptritum ducitvivit, C., Inv., i. 46, 86 (595). QuI timgre dgsierint odisse incipient, TAG.,Agr., 32 (567).Rhetorical position:[Naturam] si sequSmur ducem, numquam aberrabiinus, C., Off., l. 28,100 (595). DS futuris rebus etsi semper difficile est dicere, tamen interdumconiectura possls accedere, C., Fam., vi. 4, 1 (604).[Cat5] mirarl sS aiebatquod non rlderet haruspex, haruspicem com vldisset, C., Div., n. 24, 51(567).676. RULE III. An Adjective usually precedes, but oftenfollows, the word to which it belongs a ; dependent Genitiveusually follows the governing word ;so too does a word inApposition.Saepe magna indoles virtutis priusqnam rel publicae pr odesse potuisset ezstinctaest, C., Ph., v. 17, 47 (577). S6nsum oculorum praecipit animus,QUINT., vi. 2, 6 (540).Rhetorical position:[lacerates] queritur plus honoris corporum quam animorum virtutibusdarl, QUINT., in. 8, 9 (542, R.).[Ager], cum multos annos quievit, uberiSresefiferre fruggs solet, C., Br., 4, 16 (567). VerSmur nS parummellis et absintb.il multum habere videatur, QUINT., in. i, 5 (550).hie liberREMARKS. i. The demonstrative pronouns regularly precede; thepossessives regularly follow.Veremur n6 hie liber absinthil multum habere videatur, QUINT., 111.i, 5 (550), Torquatus fflium suum necarl iussit, S., C., 52, 30 (540).
1RisusinterdnmARRANGEMENT OF WORDS. 431Rhetorical position:Becordare tempus illud, cum pater Curio maergns iacebat in lecto, ('.,Ph., ii. 18, 45 (580). Osculatur tigrim suus custos, SEN., E.M., 85, 41(309, 2).2. Ordinals regularly follow, Cardinals regularly precede the substantive.3. Many expressions have become fixed formulae : so titles, propernames, and the like ;see 288.Facinus est vincire civem Romanum, C., Verr., v. 66, 170 (535).4. The titles r6x, imperator, etc., frequently precede the proper namewith which they are in apposition.5. New modifiers of either element may be inserted, prefixed, oradded :Catonem vldl in bibliotheca sedentem multis circumfusum Stoicorumlibris, C., Fin., Hi. 2, 7 (536). Saepe raagna indoles virtutis priusquamrel publicae prodesse potuisset exstincta est, C., Ph., v. 17, 47 (577). Atvidete hominis intolerabilem audaciam, C. ,J)om. , 44, 115 (488) . (Arictides)interfuit pugnae naval! apud Salamina, XKP., HI. 2, 1.NOTES. 1. The tendency in Latin was to reverse the Indo-Germanic rule by whichan attributive adjective and a dependent Genitive preceded the governing word. But inearly Latin the adjective still holds its place more often before its substantive, while theGenitive has already succumbed for the most part to the tendency. In the classicalperiod the adjective is more often used after its substantive. But neither positioncan be strictly called rhetorical. The same is true of the possessive pronoun.2. The original force of a following adjective or Genitive was restrictive or appositional,while, when it preceded, it formed a close compound with its substantive ; thus,bonus homo, a good man (one idea) ; homo bonus, a man (one idea) who is good(another idea). In classical Latin this distinction is no longer inevitable, though it isoften essential.next to their677. EULE IV. Adverbs are commonly putverb (before it when it ends a sentence), and immediatelybefore their adjective or adverb.Zenonem cum Athenis essem audiebam frequenter ,C.,N.D.,i. 21, 59(585). Caedl discipulos ininime velim, QUINT., i. 3, 13 (257). Vix culquampersuadsbatur Graecia omnl c6ssur5s (RomanSs), L., xxxin. 32, 3 (546, R. i).|ita repente erumpit ut eum cupientes tenere nequeamus,C., Or., n. 58, 235 (609)..Rhetorical positions:[Iram] bene Ennius initium dlxit Insaniae, C., Tusc., iv. 23, 52(440).Saepe magna indoles virtutis priusquam rel publicae prodesse potuisset exstinctaest, C., Ph., v. 17, 47 (577).REMARKS. i. Fere, paene, prope, usually follow:NeinS fere saltat sobrius nisi forte Insanit, C., Mur., 6, 13 (591, R. 4).2. Negatives always precede, see 448.
432 ARRANGEMENT OF WORDS.NOTE. The separation of adverbs from their adjectives is rare, except in the case oftam and quam, which PLAUTUS, TERENCE, CICERO, and later authors often separate,e. ff., by a preposition: tam ab tenul exitio. Hyperbaton with other adverbs is rare.678. KTJLE V. Prepositions regularly precedetheir case(413).A recta cSnscientia traversum unguem n5n oportet discedere, C., Ait.,xiii. 20, 4 (328,i).REMARKS. i. On versus, tenus, and the postposition of cum in combinationwith the personal pronouns and the relative, see 418, R. i.2. Monosyllabic prepositions are not unfrequently put between theadjective and substantive : magna cum cura. See 413, R. 2.Less frequently they are placed between the Gen. and substantive ;except when the relative is employed.3. Dissyllabic prepositions are sometimes put after their case (Anastrophe),especially after a relative or demonstrative most :frequentlycontra, inter, propter. So also adverbs. See 413, R. i.4. The preposition may be separated from its case byadverb (413, R. 3): ad AppIesset, C., Cat.Jtf., 6, 16 (553, 4).a Gen. or anClaudI senectutein accgdebat etiam ut caecus5. Monosyllabic prepositions, such as cum, ex, d6, post, sometimes appendthe enclitics -que, -ve, -ne, as, exque iis,and from them. Usually,however, the enclitics join the dependent substantive : in patriamquerediit, and returned to his country. See 413, N. 3.On the position of per, see 413, N. 2.679. EULE VI. Particles vary.Enim commonly takes the second, seldom the third place ;nam andnamque are regularly prepositive. See 498, N. 1.Erg5 in the syllogism precedes, elsewhere follows ; igitur is commonlysecond or third ; itaque regularly first. See 502, N. 2 ; 500, R,Tamen is first, but may follow an emphatic word. See 490.Etiam usually precedes, quoque always follows. See 478, 479.Quidem and dSmum (at length) follow the word to which theybelong.680. EULE VII. A word that belongs to more than oneword regularly stands before them all, or after them all,sometimes after the first (291).Ariovistus respondit multls s6se nobilibus prlncipibusque populi RomanIgratum esse facturum, CAES., E.G., i. 44, 12 (657, 9). [IsocratSs] queriturplus honoris corporum quam animorum virtutibus darl, QUINT., in. 8, 9 (542,R.). Longum est muloruni persequl utilitates et asinorum, C., N.D., u.64, 159 (254, R. i).
1ARRANGEMENT OF CLAUSES. 433681. EULE VIII. Words of kindred or opposite meaningare often put side by side for the sake of complement orcontrast.Manus manum lavat, one hand washes the other. [Cato]mlrarl seaiebat quod non rideret haruspex, haruspicera cum vldisset, C., Div., II.24, 51 (567). Emit morte immortalitatem, QUINT., ix. 3, 71 (404).682. KULE IX. Contrasted Pairs. When pairs are contrasted,the second isput in the same order as the first, butoften in inverse order. The employment of the same orderis called Anaphora (repetition).The inverse order is calledChiasmus, or crosswise position, and gives alternate stress.The principle is of wide application, not merely in the simplesentence but also in the period.Same order (Anaphora).Fortuna (i) vestra (2) facit ut Irae (i) meae (2) temper em, L., xxxvi.35, 3 (553, i).Malo te sapiens (i) hostis (2) metuat quam stulti (i) cIvSs(2) laudent, L., xxu. 39, 20(546, R. 2).Inverse order (Chiasmus).Ante videmus (i) fulgorem (2) quam sonum (2) audiamus (i), SEN., N. Q.,ii. 12, 6 (577). Farvi stint foris (i) arma (2) nisi est consilium (2) doml(i), C., Off., i. 22, 76 (411, R. 2).REMARK.Chiasmus is from the Greek letter X (chi):1. Foris **- 2. arma2. consilium -" i. doml.683. Poetical Peculiarities. In the poets we find many varietiesof arrangement of substantive and adjective, designed to draw especialattention to the idea or to colour the verse. These occur chiefly in theHexameter and Pentameter, but to a lesser degree also in other measures.Thus the substantive and adjective are put either at the end ofeach hemistich, or at the beginning of each hemistich, or one is at theend of the first and the other at the beginning of the second.Cerberus et nullas hodiS petat improbus umbras et iaceat tacitd\ lapsacatena sera, PROP., iv. (v.) n, 25. Puniceo stabis suras evincta cothurnd,V., EC., 7, 32. lie similem vestrls moribus esse putas?PROP., n. (in.)29 (27), 32. ARRANGEMENT OF CLAUSES.684. A period is a compound sentence with one or moresubordinate clauses, in which sentence the meaning is keptsuspended to the close.28
ab;434 ARRANGEMENT OF CLAUSES.685. Latin periods may be divided into two classes :1.Responsive or Apodotic, in which a Protasis has anApodosis.2.Intercalary or Enthetic, in which the various items areinserted in their proper place between Subject and Predicate.Ut saepe homines aegri morbo gravl, cum aestu febrlque iactantur,siaquam gelidam biberunt, primo relevarl videntur, delude multogravius vehementiusque affllctantur sic hie morbus, qul est in re pub-:lica, relevatus istlus poena, vehementius, reliquls vivls, ingravescet,C., Cat., I. 13, 31 (Apodotic).Catuvolcus, rex dlmidiae partis Eburonum, qul una cum Ambiorigeconsilium inierat, aetate iam confectus, cum labOrein aut belli aut fugaeferre non posset,omnibus precibus detestatus Ambiorigem, qul eiusconsilil auctor fuisset, taxo, cuius magna in Gallia GermaniSque copiaest, s6 exanimavit, CAES., B.G., vi. 31, 5 (Enthetic).686. NAGELSBACH'S careful study of the subject has led to the followingresults. The simplest period is composed of one subordinate (a)and one principal (A) clause ;the principal varieties are :(i) a : A,where the principal clause follows the subordinate ; (2) A (a) A, wherethe subordinate clause is inserted within the principal clause ; (3) A\ a,where the principal clause precedes the subordinate clause ; (4) a (A) a,where the principal clause is inserted within the subordinate clause.When two subordinate clauses (a, b), independent of each other, areused, the forms are: (5) a : A\ b; (6)a:A(b)a; (j)A(a)A \ (8)A (a) A (b) A ; (9) a : (b : A). If the dependent clauses are of differentdegree (a, a, A), that one is, depending upon the other, some fifteenadditional forms are allowable.Some examples are :a (A) a : illorum vid5s qnam niteat oratio, C., Fin., iv. 3, 5. a : (b : A) :cur nolint, etiamsl taceant, satis dicunt, C., Div. in Caec., 6, 21. a : a : A :quid agatur, cum aperuero, facile erit statuere, C., Ph., v. 2, 6. a : A a:\illud quid sit, sclre cupio, quod iacis obscure, C., Alt., n. 7, 4. a|(A) a:n6s utl exspectar6mus sS, rellquit qul rogaret, VARRO, R.R., I. 2, 32.A a| (a) a : mando tib! plans, totum ut videas cuius modi sit, C., Alt., I.12,2.687. Periods are also divided into Historical and Oratorical. Theformer are, as a rule, simple. The most common form is a : A, i.e.,where a subordinate clause is followed by a leading clause : Id ubidixisset hastam in hostium fines emittebat, L., I. 42, 13. Another commonperiod, developed and much liked by LIVY, and later by TACITUS,was a :a : A, consisting of (i) a participial clause ; (2) a clauseintroduced by a conjunction; (3) the principal clause.Cf. TAC., Ann.,
. .accgpitFIGURES. 435n. 69, 3, dStentus ubi .plebem proturbat. Historians,having much occasion for description, are also proneto use thedescending period, i.e., the form in which the principal clause precedes.So especially NEPOS. LIVY likes also to use two independent subordinateclauses asyndetically.The Oratorical periods are much more diverse and complicated,owing to the greater variety of effects at which they aim. We find,however, the ascending structure, where the emphasis is continuallyascending until it culminates at the end, more common.See an excellent example in C., Imp., 5, 11 :Vos eum regem inultum esse patieminl qul iSgatum popull RomanIconsularem VINCULIS AC VEEBERIBUS ATQUE OMNI SUPPLICIO EXCRUCIA-TUM NECAVIT ?FIGURES OF SYNTAX AND RHETORIC.688. Ellipsis is the omission of some integral part of thethought, such as the substantive of the adjective (204, N. 1),the copula of the predicate (209), the verb of the adverb.Uncle domo? V., A., vin. 114 (391, R. 2).EEMARK.When the ellipsis is indefinite, do not attempt to supplyit. The figure is still much abused by commentators in the explanationof grammatical phenomena.689. Brachylogy (breviloquentia) is a failure to repeat anelement which is often to be supplied in a more or lessmodified form.Tamfellxess5squamformosissima(=es) vellem, Ov., Am., I. 8, 27(302).690. Zeugma or Syllepsis is a junction of two words underthe same regimen, or with the same modifier, although thecommon factor strictly applies but to one.Mantis ac suppliers voces ad Tiberium tendens, TAG., Ann., n. 29, 2;stretching out Jtands and (uttering) suppliant cries to Tiberius.691. Aposidpesis is a rhetorical breaking off before theclose of the sentence, as in the famous Vergilian duosego692. Pleonasm is the use of superfluous words.693. Enallageis a shift from one form to another : vos 6Calliope precor, V., A., ix. 525.
.instead436 PIGUKES.Hypallage is an interchange in the relations of words :dare classibus austros, V., A., m. 61.694. Oxymoron is the use of words apparently contradictoryof each other : cum tacent clamant, C., Cat., i. 8, 21(582).695. Synecdoche is the use of the part for the whole, or thereverse : tectum for domum, puppis for navis, mucro for gladius,etc.696. Hyperbaton, Trajection, is a violent displacement ofwords. Lydia die per omnes te deos oro, H., 0., i. 8, 1 (413,N. 2).697. Anacoluthon,\or want of sequence, occurs when thescheme of a sentence ischanged in its course.698. jlendiadys ( Iv Sia Svoiv) consists in giving an analysisof a complex, in putting two substantives connectedby a copulative conjunction, instead of one substantive andan adjective or attributive genitive.Vulgus et multitude, the common herd. Via et ratiS (C., Verr., i. 16,47), scientific method. VI et armis, by force of arms.So two verbs may be translated by an adverb and a verb : fundlfugSrique, to be utterly routed.699. Constructio Praegnans. So-called cdnstructid praegnansis nothing but an extended application of the accusativeof the Inner Object (Object Effected). The result isinvolved, not distinctly stated.Exitium inrltat, Cf. TAC., Ann., xiii. i, 1 ; he provokes destruction (adezitium inrltat).700. Litotes, or Understatement, is the use of an expressionby which more is meant than meets the ear. This isespecially common with the Negative.Non indecoro pulvere sordid!, H., 0., n. i, 22 (449, R. 2).
PRINCIPAL RULES OF SYNTAX. 437(211).PRINCIPAL RULES OF SYNTAX.1. The Verb agrees with its subject in number and person (211).2. The Adjective agrees with its subject in gender, number, and case3. The common Predicate of two or more subjects is putin thePlural (285) ;when the genders are different, it takes the strongestgender or the nearest (286) when the; persons are different, it takesthe first in preference to the second, the second in preference to thethird (287).4. The common Attribute of two or more substantives agrees withthe nearest, rarely with the most important (290).5. The Predicate substantive agrees with its subject in case (211).6. The Appositive agrees with its subject in case if ; possible, also innumber and person (321).7. The Relative agrees with its antecedent in gender, number, andperson (614).8.Disproportion is indicated by the comparative with quam pr5,quam ut, quam qul (298).9. In comparing two qualities, use either magis quam with the positive,or a double comparative (299).10. Superlative's denoting order and sequence are often used partitivelyand then usually precede their substantive (291, R. 2).n. The Genitive forms mel, tul, sul, nostrl, vestrl, are used mainlyas objective genitives ;nostrum and vestrum as partitive (304, 2).12. The Reflexive is used regularly when reference is made to thegrammatical subject ; frequently when reference is made to the actualsubject (309).13. The Reflexive is used of the principal subject, when reference ismade to the thought or will of that subject; hence, in Infinitive clauses,or Indirect Questions, in Sentences of Design, and in Oratio Obliqua(521).14. The Possessive Pronoun is used instead of the Possessive or SubjectiveGenitive in the First and Second Persons (362, 364).R. 2).15. The Appositive to a possessive pronoun is in the Genitive (321,16. With words of Inclination and Disinclination, Knowledge andIgnorance, Order and Position, Time and Season, the adjective is usuallyemployed for the adverb (325, R. 6).17. The Indicative, not the Subjunctive, is used in expressions ofPossibility, Power, Obligation, and Necessity (254, R.i).
438 PRINCIPAL RULES OF SYNTAX.1 8. The Potential of the Present or Future is the Present or Perfectthe Potential of the Past is the Imperfect Subjunc-Subjunctive (257) ;tive (258).ig. The Optative Subjunctive may be used to express a Wish (260),an Asseveration (262), a Command (263), or a Concession (264).20. The First Imperative looks forward to immediate, the Secondto contingent, fulfilment (268).21. The Negative of the Imperative is regularly n5ll with the Infinitive;sometimes nS with the Perfect Subjunctive (270, R. 2), or cav8with the Subjunctive (271) is also used.22. The Infinitive, with or without a subject, may be treated as aneuter subject (422), object (423), or predicate (424).23. The Infinitive is used as the object of verbs of Will, Power,Duty, Habit, Inclination, Resolve, Continuance, End, etc. (423).24. The Accusative and Infinitive is used as the object of verbs ofWill and Desire (532).25. The Accusative and Infinitive is used as the object of verbs ofEmotion (533).26. The Accusative and Infinitive is used in Exclamation (534).27. After verbs of Saying, Showing, Believing, and Perceiving, thePresent Infinitive expresses action contemporary with that of the governingverb, the Perfect, action prior to it, the Future, action future toit (530).28. The Genitive of the Gerund and Gerundive is used chieflyafter substantives and adjectives that require a complement (428).29. The Dative of the Gerund and Gerundive is used mainly inpost-classical Latin after words of Fitness and Function ;also afterwords of Capacity and Adaptation, and to express Design (429).30. The Accusative of the Gerund and Gerundive is used after verbsof Giving and Taking, Sending and Leaving, etc., to indicate Design(430).31. The Ablative of the Gerund and Gerundive is used to denoteMeans and Cause, rarely Manner (431).32. The Supine in -urn is used chiefly after verbs of Motion toexpress Design (435).33. The Supine in -fi is used chiefly with adjectives to indicateRespect (436).34. The Present Participle denotes continuance, the Perfect, completion,at the time of the leading verb (282).35. The Future Participle is used in post-Ciceronian Latin to expressDesign (438, N.).
PRINCIPAL RULES OF SYNTAX. 43936. The Participle is used after verbs of Perception and Representationto express the actual condition of the object (536).37. The Perfect Participle passive is used after verbs of Causationand Desire, to denote impatience of anything except entire fulfilment(587).38. The subject of a finite verb is in the Nominative (203).39. Verbs of Seeming, Becoming, with the passive of verbs of Making,Choosing, Showing, Thinking, and Calling, take two Nominatives,one of the subject, one of the predicate (206).40. With passive verbs of Saying, Showing, Believing, and Perceiving,the Accusative subject of the Infinitive becomes the Nominativesubject of the leading verb (528).41. The Appositional Genitive is used after v5x, nomen, verbum,rSs, etc. (361, i).42. The Epexegetical Genitive (or Genitive of Explanation) is usedafter genus, vitium, culpa, etc. (361, 2).43. The Possessive Genitive is used of the Third Person to denotepossession (362).44. The Subjective Genitive is used of the subject of the action indicatedby the substantive (363, i) ; the Objective Genitive of the objectof that action (363, 2).45. Essential or permanent qualities are put in the Genitive,always with an adjective (365); external and transient qualities in theAblative, always with an adjective (400). See No. 82.46. The Genitives of Quality and Possession may be used as predicates(366).47. The Partitive Genitive stands for the whole to which a partbelongs (367).48. Adjectives of Fulness and Want, of Knowledge and Ignorance,of Desire and Disgust, of Participation and Power, may take the Genitive(374). Also some present participles used as adjectives, and inlater Latin some verbals in -ax (375).49. Verbs of Reminding, Remembering, and Forgetting take usuallythe Genitive (376) ;but sometimes the Accusative, especially ofthings (376, R.).50. Impersonal verbs of Emotion take the Accusative of the PersonWho Feels, and the Genitive of the Exciting Cause (371).51. Verbs of Accusing, Convicting, Condemning, and Acquitting,take the Genitive of the Charge (378).52. Verbs of Rating and Buying take the Genitive of the General,the Ablative of the Particular Value (379, 404). See No. 87.
44OPRINCIPAL RULES OF SYNTAX.53. Interest and Refert take the Genitive of the Person, rarely of theThing concerned (381).54. The Indirect Object is put in the Dative (345).55. Verbs of Advantage and Disadvantage, Bidding and Forbidding,Pleasure and Displeasure, Yielding and Resisting, take theDative (346).56. Many intransitive verbs compounded with ad, ante, con, in, inter,ob, post, prae, sub, and super may take a Dative; transitive verbs alsoan Accusative besides (347).57. Verbs of Giving and Putting take a Dative and Accusative, oran Accusative and Ablative (348).58. The Dative is used with esse to denote possession (349).59. The Dative is used of the Person Interested in the action (350).60. The Ethical Dative is used of the personal pronouns only (351).61. The Dative of Reference is used of the Person to whom a statementis referred (352).62. The Dative of Agent is used with the Perfect passive, theGerund, and the Gerundive (354).63. The Dative may denote the Object For Which in combinationwith the Person To Whom (355).64. Adjectives of Friendliness, Fulness, Likeness, Nearness, withtheir opposites, take the Dative (359).65. Active transitive verbs take the Accusative case (330).66. Many intransitive verbs, mostly those of Motion, compoundedwith ad, ante, circum, con, in, inter, ob, per, praeter, sub, subter, super,and trans, take the Accusative ;transitive verbs thus compounded mayhave two Accusatives (331).67. Intransitive verbs may take an Accusative of similar form ormeaning (333, 2).68. The Accusative may express Extent in Degree, Space, or Time(334-6).69. Names of Towns and Small Islands are put in the Accusative ofPlace Whither; so also domus and rus (337). See No. 74 and 92.70. Verbs meaning to Inquire, Require, Teach, and Conceal, taketwo Accusatives, one of the Person, one of the Thing (339).71. Verbs of Naming, Making, Taking, Choosing, and Showing,take two Accusatives of the same Person or Thing (34(5).72. The subject of the Infinitive is regularly in the Accusative (420).73. The Accusative may be used in Exclamations (343).74. Place Where is denoted by the Ablative, usually with in (385) ;
PRINCIPAL RULES OF SYNTAX. 44!Place Whence by the Ablative, usually with ex, d6, or ab (390).Names of Towns and Small Islands omit the prepositions (386, 391).See No. 9 and 92.75. Attendance is denoted by the Ablative with cum (392).76. Time When or Within Which is denoted by the Ablative (393).77. Origin or Descent is denoted by the Ablative with or withoutex and d6 (395).78. Material is denoted by the Ablative with ex (396).79. The Point of View or Respect is denoted by the Ablative (397).80. Comparatives without quam are followed by the Ablative (398).81. Manner is denoted by the Ablative regularly with an adjectiveor cum (399).82. External and transient qualities are denoted by the Ablative,always with an adjective (400) ;essential and permanent qualities bythe Genitive, always with an adjective (365). See No. 45.83. Cause, Means, and Instrument, are denoted by the Ablative(401, 408).84. The Agentis denoted by the Ablative with & (ab) (401).85. The Standard of Measurement is denoted by the Ablative (402),86. Measure of Difference is put in the Ablative (403).87. Definite Price isput in the Ablative (404) ;General Price in theGenitive (379). See No. 52.88. Verbs of Depriving and Pilling, of Plenty and Want, take theAblative (405).89. The Ablative is used with opus and usus (406).90. TTtor, fruor, fungor, potior, and vescor take the Ablative (407).91. The Ablative, combined with a participle, serves to modify theverbal predicate of a sentence: Ablative Absolute (409).92. Names of Towns and Small Islands of the First and SecondDeclensions are put in the Locative of the Place Where (411). SeeNo. 69 and 74.(455).(456).93. Adverbs qualify verbs, adjectives, and other adverbs (439).94. A question for information merely is introduced by -ne (454).95. A question that expects the answer yes is introduced by nonne96. A question that expects the answer no is introduced by num97. The Deliberative Question is in the Subjunctive (265).98. The Indirect Question is in the Subjunctive (467).
442 PRINCIPAL RULES OF SYNTAX.99. Sequence of Tenses. Principal tenses are ordinarily followed byPrincipal tenses, Historical by Historical (509).100. After a Future or Future Perfect, the Future relation isexpressed by the Present, the Future Perfect by the Perfect Subjunctive(514). After other tenses the Future relation is expressed by theActive Periphrastic Present and Imperfect Subjunctive (515).101. In Oratio Obllqua all subordinate tenses follow the general lawof sequence (516).102. Quod, the fact that, in that, is used with the Indicative tointroduce explanatory clausesDoing and Happening, and demonstratives (525).after Verbs of Adding and Dropping,103. Quod, quia, quoniam, and quando take the Indicative in DirectDiscourse, the Subjunctive in Indirect Discourse, to express Cause(540, 541).104- Quod is used after verbs of Emotion with the Indicative in Direct,the Subjunctive in Indirect Discourse, to give the Ground (542).105. Final Sentences have the Present and Imperfect Subjunctivewith ut or nS (545).106. Complementary Final Clauses are used after verbs of Will andDesire (546).107. Positive verbs of Preventing, Refusing, Forbidding, and Bewaring,may take nS with the Subjunctive (548).108. Verbs of Preventing and Refusing may take quominus withthe Subjunctive (549). See No. 112.109. Verbs of Fear are followed by nS or ut (nS n5n) and all tensesof the Subjunctive (550).no. Consecutive Sentences have the Subjunctive with ut and ut n5n(552).in. Verbs of Effecting have the Subjunctive with ut and nS, or utn5n (553).112. Negatived or Questioned verbs of Preventing, Hindering, etc.,of Doubt and Uncertainty, may be followed by the Subjunctive withquln (555). See No. 108.113. A Consecutive Clause with ut is often used to give the contentsor character of a preceding substantive, adjective, or pronoun (557).114. Ut, ut primum, cum, cum primum, ubi, ubi primum, simulac,simul atque, and postquam take the Perfect Indicative, in the sense ofas soon as; but the Imperfect of Overlapping Action, and the Pluperfectwhen a definite interval isgiven (561, 562, 563).115. When two actions are repeated contemporaneously, both areput in the Indicative in tenses of continuance (566).
PRINCIPAL RULES OF SYNTAX. 443116. When one action is repeated before another, the antecedentaction is put in the Perfect, Pluperfect, or Future Perfect, the subsequentin the Present, Imperfect, or Future, according to the relation(567).117. Dum, donee, quoad, quamdiu, so long as, while, take the Indicativeof all tenses (569).1 1 8. Dam, while, while yet, takes the Present Indicative after alltenses (570).119. Dum, donee, quoad, until, take the Present, Historical Present,Historical Perfect, and Future Perfect Indicative (571).120. Dum, donee, quoad, until, take the Subjunctive when Suspenseor Design is involved (572).121. Dum, modo, and dummodS, */ only, provided only, take thePresent and Imperfect Subjunctive in Conditional Wishes (573).122. Antequam and priusquam take the Indicative Present, Perfect,and Future Perfect when the limit is stated as a fact; the Subjunctivewhen the action is expected, contingent, designed, or subordinate(574, 577).123. Temporal cum, when, is used with all tenses of the Indicativeto designate merely temporal relations (580).124. Historical cum, when, is used with the Imperfect and PluperfectSubjunctive to give the temporal circumstances under which anaction took place (585).125. Causal and Concessive cum, when, whereas, although, are usedwith all tenses of the Subjunctive (586, 587).126. The Logical Condition has usually some form of the Indicativein both Protasis and Apodosis (595).127. The Ideal Condition has usually the Present or PerfectSubjunctive, less often the Imperfect or Pluperfect,(596).in both clauses128. The Unreal Condition has the Imperfect Subjunctive of oppositionto present, the Pluperfect of opposition to past fact (597).129. Ut si, ac si, quasi, quam si, tamquam, tamquam si, velut, andvelut si, introduce a comparison in the Subjunctive. The tense followsthe rule of sequence (602).130. Concessive clauses may be introduced by etsl, etiamsi, tametsl,with the Indicative or Subjunctive (604); by quamquam, with theIndicative (605) ;by quamvis, with the Subjunctive (606).131. Indefinite and generic relatives usuallyhave the Indicative(625) ; so explanatory qui, when equivalent to quod (626).132. The Subjunctive is used in Relative Clauses that form a part
PRINCIPAL RULES OF SYNTAX.of the utterance of another ;so in Oratio Obliquaand Final Clauses(628).133. Relative sentences that depend on Infinitives or Subjunctives,and form an integral part of the thought, are put in the Subjunctiveby Attraction (629).134. Relative sentences are put in the Subjunctive of Design whenqui = ut (final) is (630).135. Relative sentences are put in the Subjunctive of Tendencywhen qui= ut (consecutive) is ;so after dignus, indlgnus, idoneus, aptus,etc.; after an indefinite antecedent; after comparatives with quam (631).136. Comparativesentences after words of Likeness and Unlikenessmay be introduced by atque or ac (643).137. Comparative sentences after comparatives are introduced byquam (644).138. In Oratio Obliqua, Principal Clauses are put in the Infinitive,except Interrogatives and Imperatives, which are put in the Subjunctive; Subordinate clauses are put in the Subjunctive (650, 651, 652).
PROSODY.701. PROSODY treats of Quantity and Versification.REMARKS. i. Prosody originally meant Accent. Latin Accent isregulated by Quantity, and as classical Latin versification is also quantitative,Prosody is loosely used of both quantity and versification.2. In the earliest Latin the Accent was not regulated by Quantity,but was on the initial syllable (15, N.). This often resulted in(a) The disappearance of the vowel (8, 2) in the antepenult or pro-antepenult ; thisoccurs especially in Greek words, but also in some common Latin words :Poludeuces,FoldeucSs, Polluces, Pollux ; balineion, balineum, balneum, bath ; maximus,greatest, for magisimos ; optumus, best, for opitumns, etc.(b) The shortening of a long penult (8). This was still going on in the time ofPLAUTUS, and occurs here and there in the poets:anchora, anchor, from ankura ;sopgiero, I swear falsely, for periurO ; chorea, dance, from choreia, etc.(c) The weakening (8) of the antepenult, sometimes also of the penult, both in Greekwords and Latin : Massilia from Massalia ;beni- and mail- for bene and male incomposition ; -hibeo for habeo in composition ;and a few others, as -cido for caedoin composition, etc.QUANTITY.702. KULE I. A syllable is said to be long by nature whenit contains a long vowel or diphthong : 6, vae, leges, saevae.REMARKS. i. (a) A vowel before -gm, -gn, -nf, -ns islong by nature ;(b) a vowel before -nt, -nd is short by nature.EXCEPTIONS :(a) Egnatius, Theognis, and some Greek words in -egma, as phlegma,phlegm ; but pegma.(b) Contio (for coventi5), assembly ; igntaculum, ientatio, breakfast ;nuntius, messenger; qulntus, fifth; and Greek substantives in -us, -untis,-5n, -ontis ; CharCndas, Epammondas ;also nundinae (noven-d-), marketday; nondum, not yet ; prSndo, I seize; quindecim, fifteen ; rendo, I sell;undecim, eleven ; vlndgmia, vintage.2. Inchoative verbs have vowel before -so long by nature ; discs, 7learn.3. Noteworthy are the following : quartus, fourth ; qulnque, five, andits derivatives ;vlgintl, twenty ; mille, thousand, and its derivatives.
44^QUANTITY.4. In verbs the quantity of the Present Stem is generally retainedthroughout before two consonants (except -ns).Except dlc5, 1 say ; Supine, dictum ; duco, / lead ; Supine, ductum ;and their derivatives, like dictio, etc.5. Noteworthy are the following : ago, / drive, 5gl, actum ; emo, /buy, Sml, emptum ; frango, / break, frggl, fractum ; fungor, / perform,functus ; iubeo, I order, iussi, iussum ; iungo, I join, iunxl, iunctum; lego,I read, legl, lectum ; pango, / fix, pactum ; rego, / govern, rexl, rectum ;sancio, / sanction, sanxl, sanctum, sancltum ; struo, J pile up, struzl,structum ; tango, / touch, tactum ; tego, / cover, t6xi, tSctum ; traho, /draw, traxi, tractum; ungo, / anoint, unxl, unctum; vinco, I conquer,vixi, victum.6. In verbs, a vowel resulting from syncope is long before ss, st(131).Also, perhaps, I before s and t in syncopated Pf . forms of Ire and petere.NOTE. On the method of distinguishing long vowels on inscriptions, see 12, i, N.703. KULE II A syllable is said to be long ly position(12, 2) when a short vowel is followed bytwo or more consonants,or a double consonant :ais, collum, castra.REMARKS. i. The consonants may be divided between two words :per mare, in terris but when all the consonants are in the second;word,the preceding short syllable commonly remains short, except in theThesis (729) of a verse, when it is lengthened praemia scrlbae.:2.Every vowel sound followed by i consonant (j) is long (except inthe compounds of iugum, yoke). This is due sometimes to naturallength of the vowel, sometimes to compensation Gains from : Gavins,peiero for periuro ;but biiugus, two-horse.NOTE. In compounds of iacere, to throw, the i is often omitted, and the precedingvowel lengthened by compensation ;so conicere ;a short vowel with the i omitted isnot found until OVID'S time.3. Final s, preceded by a short vowel, is dropped before a consonantin the older poetry ;often too in LUCRETIUS.In somnis vidit priu(s) quam sam (= earn) discere coepit. ENNIUS.NOTE. In comic poetry, a short final syllable in s blends with est, and sometimeswith es :opust (= opus est) ;simili's (- similis es).704. RULE III. A syllable ending in a short vowel beforea mute, followed by 1 or r, is common (13) : tene-brae, darkness.In early Latin it is regularly short, so, too, when themute and liquid begin a word.REMARKS. i. The syllable must end in a short vowel :navi-fragus,ship-wrecking ; melli-fluus, flowing with honey ; but in ab-rump5 the aislong by position.
QUANTITY. 4472. In Greek words m and n are included under this rule :TS-cmSssa,Cy-cnus.EXCEPTION. Derivative substantives in abrum, acrum, atrum fromverbs ;as flabra, blasts. Zmaragdos, MART.,V. i i,l, cannot be paralleled.705. EULE IV. Every diphthong, and every vowel derivedfrom a diphthong, or contracted from other vowels, islong (14) : saevos, cruel ; conclude, / shut up (from claudo) ;imquos, unfair (from aequos) ; cogo, I drive together (fromcoigo= con + ago).EXCEPTION. Prae in compositionis shortened before a vowel untilthe time of STATIUS ; prae-ustus, burnt at the point (V., A., vii. 524).706. RULE V. One simple vowel before another vowelsound,or h, makes a short syllable:deus, God j puer, boy ;nihil, nothing.EXCEPTIONS :1. a in the old Gen. of the First Declension : aural.2. 6 in -61 of the Fifth Declension, when a vowel precedes'.diSI, butfidei (63, N. i).3. a and e before i in proper names in -ius :Gal, PompSl.4. i in the Gen. form -lus (76, R. 2). Alterms is often shortened,perhaps even in prose : unlus, ullius, nullius, totius, are found in poetry.In alius the i is never shortened (alius for aliius).5. i in fI5 is long, except before er: flo,but fieret and fieri.6. eheu, Diana, ohe, dins (= divas).7. Many Greek words : aer, Menelaus, museum, M6d6a.8. In early Latin many words retain the original length of thevowel :ais, rSI ;all forms of fI5 ;cluo ;ful and its forms ; pluit, luit,adnul, etc. Most of the shortened forms also occur, and are morecommon.Quantity of Final Syllables.A. POLYSYLLABLES.707. RULE VI. In words of more than one syllable, finala, e, and y are short ; i, o, and u are long.i. a is short :terra, earth ; dona, gifts ; capita, heads.EXCEPTIONS :1. Abl. of the First Declension : terra.2. Voc. of words in as (Aenga), and Greek Nona, in a (Electra).3. Impv. of First Conjugation ama.:
448 QUANTITY.4. Most uninflected words :triginta, iuxta, but ita, quia, 6ia. Withputs, for instance, compare cav6 below.2. e is short.EXCEPTIONS :1. Abl. of the Fifth Declension : diS.2.Impv. of Second Conjugation : monS (but see Note).3. Most adverbs of Second Declension : rSctS ;but ben6, male, Inferng(LucR.), maxumg (PLAUT.), probe (PLAUT.), superne (LucR., HOR.),temerg (PLAUT., TER.).4. Greek words in 6 (77) :TempS, mel6.5. Que is thought to be not unfrequently long in the Thesis of earlySaturnians ;so in the hexameter of the classical period if a secondque follows in the Arsis.NOTE. Observe that in PLATTTTJS and TERENCE any dissyllabic Iambic impv. mayhave the last 6 shortened ; principally cave", habl, iubl, mang, mong, move, tac,ten!, val8, vidS. See 716. Later poets also shorten sometimes when the penult islong ; salve (MART.).3. y is always short, except in contracted forms : misy(Dative misy = misyi).4. i is long : domini, viginti, audi.EXCEPTIONS :1. Greek Dat. si : TrSasi.2. Greek Nona., as sinapi; Voc., as Pan; Dat. Sing, (rarely), asMinSidi.3. quasi, nisi, cm (when a dissyllable).4. i is common in mibi, tibl, sib!, ibi, ubl.Observe the compounds : ibidem, ibiqne, ubique, ubinam, ubivls, ubicnnque,necubi, utmam, utique, slcuti ; (but utl).5. o is long : bono, tuto.EXCEPTIONS :1. Common in homo; in the Augustan times in leSand many propernames ;as Sclpio ;in the post-Augustan times in many common substantives:virgd. NSm5 is found first in OVID, mentis in HORACE.2. Frequently short in Iambic words in early Latin, especially inverbs, many of which remained common in the Augustan times, asvo!5, veto, sci6, petQ, puts, etc.; so less often nescio, desinS, obsecrS, dlxer5,oderS. From SENECA on, the Gerund may be shortened : amand6.3. o is usually short in modd, cito, oct6, eg6, ilic6, immd, dud, amb6(post-classical) ; and in many other words in later poetry.6. u isalways long : cornu, fructu, andltu.
QUANTITY. 449708. RULE VII. All final syllables that end in a simpleconsonant other than s are short.EXCEPTIONS :1. allec, lien, and many Greek substantives.2. The adverbs and oblique cases of illlc, illuc, istlc, istuc, canhardly be considered exceptions, as -c is for -ce, and ismerely enclitic.3. Compounds of par dispar, impar.:4. ilt, petilt, and their compounds.5. Final -at, -et, -it, were originally long, and as such often occurin early Latin, and occasionally before a pause in the classical poets.709. EULE VIII. Of final syllables in a: as, es, os, arelong ; is, us, ys, short.i. as is long Aeneas, servas, amas.:EXCEPTIONS :1. Greek substantives in as, adis :Areas, Arcadis.2. Greek Ace. PI., Third Declension :hgrSas, Arcadas.3. anas, anatis.2. es is long : reges, dies, mones.EXCEPTIONS :1. Nom. and Voc. Sing., Third Declension, when th'e Gen. has etis,itis, idis : seges, miles, obses ;but abies, aries, paries.2. Compounds of 8s, be (long syllable in PLAUTUS) : adfis, potfis.3. penes (Preposition).4. Greek words in 6s (cS): Norn. PL, as Arcades; Voc., as Demosthenes; Neuter, as cacoethes,5. Iambic verbal forms in Second Person Sing, in early Latin.3. os is long : deos, nepos.EXCEPTIONS :1. Compos, imp6s, ex5s ;and as the Nom. ending in the Second Declension.2. Greek words in 5s (oS): melds.4. is is short : canis, legis.EXCEPTIONS :1. Dat. and Abl. Plural :terrls, bonis.2. Ace. PI. of the Third Declension : omnls = omngs.3. In the Nom. of sundry Proper Names, increasing longGenitive :Quiris, Quirltis.in theaudls.4. Second Person Sing. Pr. Indie, active, Fourth Conjugation:29
450 QUANTITY.5. In the verbal forms from vis, sis, fis,and veils :n5-ll8, m5-lls,ad-sis, calc-fis.6. In the Second Person Sing. Put. Pf. Indie, and Pf. Subjv., isis common :vlderls.7. Pulvis, cinls, sanguls, occasionally in early Latin.5. us is short : servus, currus.EXCEPTIONS :1. Gen. Sing., Nom. and Ace. PI., Fourth Declension : currfis.2. Nom. Third Declension, when the Gen. has a long u :virtus,virtutis; incus, incudis; telliis, telluris.3.In Greek words with ft (ouS) : tripus, Sapphus but; Oedipus andpolypus.4. Occasionally the Dat. and Abl. PI. of the Third Declension, theFirst Person PI. active of verbs, seem to be long in early Latin.6. ys is short chlamys.:B. MONOSYLLABLES.710. RULE IX. All monosyllables that end in a vowelare long : a, da, me, de, hi, si, 6, do, tu.Except the enclitics : -qu6, -v6, -n6, -cS, -t6, -ps8, ptS.711. RULE X. Declined or conjugated monosyllablesthat end in a consonant follow the rules given : das, fles,scis, dat, net, is, id, quis, his, quis, quos.Me, this one, is sometimes short die and dfic;have the quantity oftheir verbs ; es, be, is short in classical Latin, long in early Latin.712. RULE XI. Monosyllabic Nominatives of substantivesand adjectives are long when they end in a consonant,even if the stem-syllable be short :6s, mos, ver, sol, fur, plus ;lar (laris), pes (pe"dis), bos (b6vis), par (pans).EXCEPTIONS :vir and lac, os (ossis), mel ;Also cor, vas (vadis), fel.Also quot, tot.713. RULE XII. Monosyllabic particlesthat end in aconsonant are short :an, cis, in, n6c, p6r, te"r.Excepting 6n and n5n and quin ;And also eras and cur and sin ;Also the Adverbs in c :hie, hue, hac, sic ;and ac (atque),
QUANTITY. 45 1Quantity of Stem-Syllables.714. RULE XIII. The quantity of stem-syllables, whennot determined by the general rules, is fixed by the usage ofthe poets (long or short % authority).REMARKS. i. The changes of quantity in the formation of tensestemshave been set forth in the conjugation of the verb (153, 2).2. The occasional differences in the quantity of the stem-syllableswhich spring from the same radical can only be explained by referencetothe'history of each word, and cannot be given here. Some examplesare :paciscor,macer,16go,rego,t6go,Seer,moles,pax, pacis.macero.lex, legis.rex, regis.tegula.acerbus.mdlestus.sedeS,fides,dux, duels,vdc5,lucerna,suspicor,mftveS,sedes.fido (feido).duco (doucS).vox.luceo (louceo").suspicio.mobilis (= movbilis).Quantity inCompounds.715. RULE XIV. Compounds generally keep the quantityof their constituent parts : (cedo) ante-cedo, de-cedo,pro-cedo ; (caedo), occido ; (cado), occldo.REMARKS. i. Of the inseparable prefixes, dl, se, and vB are long,r6 short :dlduco, sgdiico, vScors, reduce ; di, in disertus, is shortened fordis, and in dirimo, dir stands for dis.2. N8 is short, except in nedum, nem5 (ne-hem5), nequam, nequlquam,nequaquam, nequitia, neve.3. E6 comes from red, which in the forms redd, recc, repp, rell, rett,occurs principally in poetry before many consonantal verb forms ;butthis doubling varies at different periods, and is found throughoutonly in reddo. Re by compensation for the loss of the d is found,occasionally, principally in Perfect stems and in dactylic poetry,especially in reicere, religio (also relligio and religi5), reducS (once inPLAUT.).4. Pr5 is shortened before vowels, and in manywords before consonants,especially before f : prdavos, prOblbeS, prdinde, prfifugio, prdfugus,prdfundus, prdfiteor, prdfarl, prdfanus, prdficlscor, prdcella, prftcul,prdnepos. The older language shortens less frequently than the later.In Greek words pro (itpo) is generally short prdpheta but : ; prologus.5. The second part of the compound is sometimes shortened : deier5,
452 FIGURES OF PROSODY.(from iHr5), cognitus, agnitus (from notus). Notice the quantity inthe compounds of -dicus :fatidlcus, vSridicus (dlco), and innuba, pronuba(nubC,.6. Mechanical rules, more minute than those given above, might bemultiplied indefinitely, but they are all open to so many exceptions asto be of little practical value. A correct pronunciation of Latin cannotbe acquired except by constant practice, under the direction of acompetent teacher, or by a diligent study of the Latin poets, and consequentlyof Latin versification.Peculiarities of Quantity inEarly Latin.716. The Iambic (734) Law. Any combination of short and long,having an accent on the short, or immediately preceding or followingan accented syllable, may be scanned as a Pyrrhic. This applies to(a) Iambic words, especially imperatives, as :rogfi, vide, mane ;(&) Words beginning with an Iambus, when the second syllable islong by position, and the third syllable is accented, as :senectutem,voluntatis ;(c) Two monosyllables closely connected, or a monosyllable closelyconnected with a following long initial syllable, as :quis Me est, utThe monosyllable may have become so by elision.dccepl.(d) Trochaic words following a short accented syllable, as :quid Istuc.(e) Cretic words, but more often in anapaestic measure, or at thebeginning of a hemistich, as vSnerant.NOTES. 1. Before quidem a monosyllable is shortened : ttt quidem.2. A combination like voluptas mea is looked upon as a single word.3. Authorities are not agreed as to the shortening in polysyllabic words, when the:second syllable is long by nature and the third syllable accented ;in trisyllables whichhave become Iambic by elision ;in Cretics at Trochaic and Iambic close in ; polysyllableslike simillumae.717. Personal pronouns and similar words of common occurrenceforming Trochees (734) may shorten the initial syllable when followedby a long syllable or its equivalent, even in the oblique cases : illeme, dmnium me, unde tibf .NOTES. 1. The words involved are ille, illic, iste, istic, ipse, ecquis, omnis,nempe, inde, unde, qoippe, Immo, and a few others that are disputed, such as somedissyllabic imperatives like mitte, redde, and monosyllables followed by -que, -ne,-V6, and the like.2.Nempe, inde, unde, quippe, ille, iste, may perhaps suffer syncope and bescanned as monosyllables.3.Nempe never forms a whole foot. Proin, dein, exin are used only before consonants:proinde only before vowels ; deinde usually before vowels, rarely beforeconsonants.4. Trochees also come under the operation of the Iambic Law when they follow ashort accented syllable.
FIGURES OF PEOSODY. 453FIGURES OF PROSODY.718. Poetry often preserves the older forms of language,and perpetuates peculiarities of pronunciation, both of whichare too frequently set down to poetic license.719. i. Elision. When one word ends with a vowel andanother begins with a vowel, or h, the first vowel is elided.Elision is not a total omission, but rather a hurried halfpronunciation,similar to Grace notes in music._ a efelix un(a) ant(e) alias Priamela virg5.VERG.2. Ectlilipsis. In like manner m final (afaint nasalsound)is elided with its short vowel before a vowel or h.u u eMonstr(um), horrend(um), Inf5rm(e) ing6ns cul lumen ademptum. VERG.EXCEPTION. After a vowel or m final, the word est, is, drops its eand joins the preceding syllable (Aphceresis).Si rixast ubi tii pulsas ego vapuld tantum. Juv.Aeternas quouiam poenas in morte timendumst. LUCB.720. Hiatus. Hiatus is the meeting of two vowels inseparate syllables, which meeting produces an almost continuousopening (yawning) of the vocal tube. In the body ofa word this hiatus, or yawning, is avoided sometimes by contraction,often by shortening the first vowel (13).REMARKS. i. The IJiatus is sometimes allowed :a, in the Thesis(729), chiefly when the first vowel is long ; b, in an Arsis (729), or resolvedThesis, when a long vowel is shortened (Semi-hiatus) ; c, before a pause,chiefly in the principal Caesura (750) ; d, in early Latin, in the principalCaesura, before a change of speakers, and occasionally elsewhere.(a) Stant et iuniperl (h) et castaneae (h) hlrsutae. VERG.(b) CrSdimus ? an qui (h) amant ipsl sibi somnia fingunt 1 VERG.(c) Promissam eripul genero. (h) Arma impia sumpsi. VERG.(d) A. Abl. B. Quid abeam I A. St! abl (h). B. Abeam (h)1 A. Abl.PLAUT.2. Monosyllabic interjections are not elided.3. On the elision of e in -ne T see 456, R. 2.721. Diastole. Many final syllables, which were originallylong, are restored to their rights by the weight of the Thesis.
454 FIGURES OF PROSODY.TJxor, heus uxor, quamquam tu irata's mihi.- PLAUT.Dummodo morata rectS veniat dotatast satis. PLAUT.Perrupit Acheronta Herculeus labor. HOR.Sometimes, however, Diastole arises from the necessities of theverse (as in proper names), or is owing to a pause (Punctuation).Nee quas Pr ^amides i:aquosis .vallibus Idae. Ov.Desine plura puer et quod nunc Instat agamus. VERG.Pectorib?7s inhians spirantia consulit exta. VERG.NOTE. The extent to which diastole is allowable is a matter of dispute, especiallyin early Latin.On qu6, see 707, 2, Ex. 5.722. Systole. Long syllables which had begun to shortenin prose, are shortened (Systole).Obstupul stet^runtque comae vox faucibus haesit. VERG.terra magn(um) alterms spectare laborem. LUCR.Umus ad certain formam priinordia rerum. LUCR.Nullius addictus iurare in verba magistri. HOR.NOTE. The short penult of the Pf. instetferunt, ded6runt, was probably original(DEDRO in inscriptions). See 131, 4, b, 5 and 6.723. Hardening. The vowels i and n assert their halfconsonantnature (Hardening) abi'etS :(abifite"), genva (g6nua),tenttfa (t6nuia).FliivzQrum rgx Eridanus camposque per omnes. VERG.Nam quae ten/la sunt hiscendlst nulla potestas. LUCR.724. Dialysis. The consonants i and v assert their halfvowelnature: dissdlwo (dissolve),Gaus (Gains, from Gavius).AdulterStur et columba miluo.Stamina non ulll dissoluenda deo.HOR.TIB.725. Syncope. Short vowels are dropped between consonants,as often in prose calfacid for calefacio.:Templorum positor templdrum sancte repostor.Ov.Quiddam magnum addens unum me surpite (= surripite) morti.HOR.726. Tmesis. Compound words are separatedinto theirparts.Qu5 mS cunque (= quocumque m6) rapit tempestas deferor hospes.HOR.NOTE. The earlier poets carry Tmesis much further, in unwise emulation of theGreek. Celebrated is : SaxS cere comminuit brum. ENNIUS.
VERSIFICATION. 455727. tfynizesis. Vowels are connected by a slur, as oftenin the living language:deinde, deinceps.Quid faciam roger anne rogem ? quid deinde rogabo ! Ov.So even when h intervenes, as dehinc :Eurum ad s6 Zephyrumque vocat, dehinc talia fatur. VERG.REMARK.Synizesis (settling together) is also called Synaergsis (takingtogether'), as opposed to Diaeresis (5) ;but Synaeresis properlymeans contraction, as in cog5 (for coagS), and ne"m5 (for nehemS). Synaloephais a general term embracing all methods of avoiding Hiatus.NOTE. 1. Synizesis is very common in early Latin, especially in pronominal forms:ml (mihi), metis,and its forms, dissyllabic forms like eb, eum, etc.728. Synaplieia. A line ends in a short vowel, which iselided before the initial vowel of a following line, or a wordis divided between two lines, i. e., the two lines are joinedtogether.Sors oxitura et nos in aeteru(um)Exilium impositura cumbae. HOR., 0., n. 3, 27.Gallicum Elien(um), horribile aequor, ultimosqueBritannos. CAT., n. n.VERSIFICATION.729. Rhythm. Rhythm means harmonious movement.In language, Rhythmis marked by the stress of voice (Accent).The accented partis called the Thesis *;the unaccented,the Arsis. The Rhythmical Accent is called theIctus (blow, beat).REMARK. Besides the dominant Ictus, there is a subordinate orsecondary Ictus, just as there is a dominant and a secondary Accentin words.730. Metre. Rhythm, when represented in language, isembodied in Metre (Measure). A Metre is a system of syllablesstanding in a determined order.* Thesis and Arsis are Greek terms, meaning the putting down and the raising ofthe foot in marching. The Roman Grammarians, misunderstanding the Greek, appliedthe terms to the lowering and raising of the voice, and thus reversed the significations.Modern scholars up to recent times followed the Roman habit, but at present the tendencyis to use the terms in their original signification, as above.
456 VERSIFICATION.731. Unit of Measure. The Unit of Measure is the shortsyllable, (^), and is called Mora, Tempus (Time).The value in music is J^ = .The long ( )is the double of the short.The value in music is J = i.REMARK. An irrational syllable is one which is not an exact mul-of the standard unit. Feet containing such quantities are calledtipleirrational.732. Resolution and Contraction. In some verses, twoshort syllables may be used instead of a long (Resolution),or a long instead of two short (Contraction).Eesblution w ^Contraction, ^~J733. Feet. As elements of musical strains, Metres arecalled Bars. As elements of verses, they are called Feet.As musical strains are composed of equal bars, so versesare composed of equal feet, marked as in music, thus|.REMARK. Theoretically, the number of metres is unrestricted ;practically, only those metres are important that serve to embody theprincipal rhythms.734. Names of the Feet. The feet in use are the following:Feet of Three Times.Trochee,JJJJ000J000J JJJ^~ Jj
VERSIFICATION. 457Feet of Five Times.Cretic,First Paeon,v/V \J wlegeriut.Fourth Pae5n,Bacchlus,Antibacchius,
458 VERSIFICATION.of versification is subordinate, and the principles of Greekrhythm have but a limited application.The Greek classes are based on the relation of Thesis to Arsis.1. Equal Class, in which the Thesis is equal to the Arsis (ysvoSiGov).This may be called the Dactylico-Anapaestic class.II. Unequal Class, in which the Thesis is double of the Arsis (ysvoSdi7tA.a
-^Vare-era|vlte pri- |uss5veris|arboVERSIFICATION. 459741. Syllaba Anceps. The final syllable of an independentseries or verse may be short or long indifferently. Itmay be short when the metre demands a long ; long whenthe metre demands a short. Such a syllable is called a SyllabaAnceps.742. Catalexis and Pause. A complete series is calledAcatalectic ;an incomplete series is called Catalectic. Aseries or verse is said to be Catalectic in syllabam, in dissyllabum,in trisyUabum, according to the number of syllablesin the catalectic foot.The time is made up by Pause.Trimeter dactylicus catalecticus in sylldbam.Trimeter dactylicus catalecticus in dissyllabum.The omission of one raora is marked . ;of two ~~~743. Protraction and Syncope. Protraction (rovrj) consistsin drawing out a long syllable beyond its normal quantity.It occurs in the body of a verse, and serves to makeup for the omission of one or more Arses, which omission iscalled Syncope.i_ = 3 = J. (triseme long) ; i_i = 4 = J (tetraseme long).744. Correption. Correption is the shortening of a syllableto suit the measure.1. So a long syllable sometimes takes the place of a short, and ismarked > ; similarly, two short syllables often seem to take the placeof one, and may be marked ^j.2. When a Dactyl is used as a substitute for a Trochee, the approximatevalue is often 1$ + $ + 1 = 3 =I-J J ;which may be indicatedby -wv-(cyclic Dactyl).The following line illustrates all the points mentioned :->\Nullam|a be be b d e|sa-|||||L_ I-vw !- I|||-A-rem. HOR.(a) Irrational trochee (irrational long). (6) Cyclic dactyl, (c) Syncope and Protraction(triseme long), (d) Syllaba anceps. (e) CatalSxia.
460 VERSIFICATION.REMARK.long in Anacrusis.Under this head, notice the frequent use of the irrational745. Verse. A Simple Rhythmis one that consists of asimple series a; Compound Rhythmis one that consists oftwo or more series.A Verse is a simple or compound rhythmical series, whichforms a distinct and separate unit. The end of a verse ismarked1. By closing with a full word. Two verses cannot divide a wordbetween them, except very rarely by Synapheia (728).2. By the Syllaba Anceps, which can stand unconditionally.3. By the Hiatus, i. e., the verse may end with a vowel, though thenext verse begin with one. Occasionally such verses are joined bySynapheia (V., A., i. 332-3, 448-9 5" 745-6)-746. Methods of Combining Verses. The same verse maybe repeated throughout without recurring groups (StichicComposition) such as the;Septenarius and Octonarius, theTrochaic Septenarius, the Heroic Hexameter, the IambicSenarius (Trimeter). Or the same verse or different versesmay be grouped in pairs (distichs), triplets (tristichs), fours(tetrastichs). Beyond these simple stanzas Latin versificationseldom ventured.Larger groups of series are called Systems.Larger groups of verses are called Strophes, a name sometimesattached to the Horatian stanzas.747. Cantica and Dlverbia. In the Drama there is a broad divisionbetween that part of the play which was simply spoken, and iscalled Dlverbium, comprising the scenes in the Iambic Senarius, andthat part which was either sung or recited to a musical accompanimentcalled Canticum. The Canticum is subdivided into :(1) Thosescenes which were merely recited to the accompaniment of the flute,and were written in Trochaic and Iambic Septenarii and Iambic Octonarii; and (2) those parts which were written in varying measures(mutatis modls cantica) and sung. The latter division is also called" Cantica in the narrow sense," and may be divided into monologues,dialogues, etc. The greatest variety of measures is found in the monologues.748. Union of Language with Rhythm. When embodied
VERSIFICATION.461in language, rhythm has to deal with rhythmical groupsalready in existence. Every full word is a rhythmical groupwith its accent, is a metrical group with its long or shortsyllables, is a word-foot. Ictus sometimes conflicts withaccent ;the unity of the verse-foot breaks up the unity ofthe word-foot.749. Conflict of Ictus and Accent. In ordinary Latinverse, at least according to modern pronunciation, the Ictusoverrides the Accent ;this conflict seems, however, to havebeen avoided in the second half of the Dactylic Hexameter,and the Ictus made to coincide with the Accent.NOTE. The extent to which this conflict was felt by the Homane themselves is amatter of uncertainty, but it seems likely that the dominant accent of a word was notso sharp as in modern pronunciation, and consequently the conflict would not be serious.750. Conflict of Word-foot and Verse-foot. The conflictof word-foot and verse-foot gives rise to Caesura. Caesurameans an incision produced by the end of a word in themiddle of a verse-foot, and is marked f.iThis incision serves as a pause, partly to rest the voice for a morevigorous effort, partly to prevent monotony by distributing the massesof the verse.REMARKS. i. So in the Heroic Hexameter the great Caesura fallsbefore the middle of the verse, to give the voice strength for the firstArsis of the second half.Una salus victls f nullam sperare salutem. VERG.It does not occur at the middle, as in that case the verse wouldbecome monotonous.2. In many treatises anyincision in a verse is called a Caesura.751. Varieties ofCaesura. Caesurae have differentnames to show their position in the foot, as follows :Semiternaria, after the third half foot, i.e., in the second foot.Semiqulnaria, after the fifth half foot, i.e., in the third foot.Semiseptenaria, after the seventh half foot, i.e., in the fourth foot.Seminovenaria, after the ninth half foot, i.e., in the fifth foot.REMARK. These Caesurae are frequentlycalled after their Greeknames, thus :trihemimeral, genlhemimeral, hepthemimeral, etc.
Romamaquaesoqueit.volens462 VERSIFICATION.752. Masculine and Feminine Caesurae. In trisyllabicmetres, when the end of the word within the verse-foot fallson a Thesis, it is called a Masculine Caesura ;when on anArsis, a Feminine Caesura.a b c dUna sa|lus f vi| ctls f nul |lam f spe |rare | sa|a, &, c, are Masculine Caesurae ; d, a Feminine Caesura.lutem.Especially noteworthyis the Feminine Caesura of the third foot inthe Hexameter, called the Third Trochee (783, R. 2).753. Diaeresis. When verse-foot and word-foot coincide,Diaeresis arises, marked |Ite domum saturae f venit | Hesperus Qite capellae. VERG.REMARKS. i. Diaeresis, like Caesura, serves to distribute the massesof the verse and prevent monotony. What is Caesura in an ascendingrhythm becomes Diaeresis as soon as the rhythm is treated anacrustically.Suls|et i| psa f B5|Su : is et|| ipsa ||with Anacrusis.]|vi|ribus Jmit. Iambic Trimeter.viri|bos f ru|Troch. Trimeter Catal.,2. Diaeresis at the end of the fourth foot of a Hexameter is calledBucolic Caesura, and has a special effect (783, E. 3).754. Recitation. When the word-foot runs over into thenext verse-foot, a more energetic recitation is required, inorder to preserve the sense, and hence the multiplication ofCaesurae lends vigour to the verse.REMARK. The ordinary mode of scanning, or singing out the elementsof a verse, without reference to signification, cannot be toostrongly condemned, as,Unasa, lusvic, tisnul, lamspe, raresa, lutem !Numerus Italicus.755. The oldest remains of Italian poetry are found in some fragmentsof ritualistic and sacred songs, and seem to have had no regardto quantity. No definite theory can be formed of this so-called NumerusItalicus in which they were composed, but they seem to have been inseries of four Theses, usually united in pairs or triplets, but sometimesseparate. An exampleis the prayer to Mars, from CATO, Agr., 141.Mars pater tg precor uti sies| |Mini domo| familiaeque nostrae, tic.propitiua
ProserpinaVERSIFICATION. 463Saturnian Verse.756. The Saturnian verse is an old Italian rhythm which occurs inthe earlier monuments of Latin literature. It divides itself into twoparts, with three Theses in each but the exact metrical ;compositionhas been a matter of much dispute, the remains not being sufficient toadmit of any dogmatism. The two principal theories are :1. The Quantitative Theory. The Saturnian is a six-foot verse withAnacrusis, and a Caesura after the third Arsis, or more rarely afterthe third Thesis.Dabunt inaliun Metelli Naevio|poetae.Cornelius Lucius| Sclpio Barbatus.Quoius fo'rma virtutei| parlsuma fuit.Eorinn sectam sequontur |multl mortales.NOTES. 1. The Thesis is formed by a long or two shorts ;the Arsis by a short, along, or two shorts (not immediately before the Caesura). The Arsis may be whollysuppressed, most often the second Arsis of the second hemistich. Short syllables underthe Ictus may be scanned long. Hiatus occurs everywhere, but usually in Caesura.2. This theory is held by many scholars, but with various modifications. Thus, somedo not accept the lengthening of the short syllables, others would scau by protractionfour feet iu each half verse, etc.Dabunt malum MetelliINaeviS poetae, etc.2. The Accentual TJieory. The Saturnian verse falls into two halves,the first of which has three Theses, the second usually three, sometimestwo, in which case there is usually Anacrusis inQuantity is not considered.Dabunt malum Metelli|Naevio poetae.Quoius forma virtutei| parisuma flit.the second hemistich.NOTES. 1. Two accented syllables are regularly divided by a single unaccentedsyllable, except that between the second and third there are always two. Hiatusallowed only at Caesura.2. A modification of this theory would scanDabunt malum Metelli!Naevio poStae.3. Very recently a modification of the Accentual Theory has been proposed, whichhas much in its favor :(a) The accent must fall on the beginning of each line, though it may be a secondaryaccent ;the first hemistich has three, the second has but two Theses.(6) The first hemistich has normally seven syllables, the second six ;but an extrashort syllable may be admitted where it would be wholly or partially suppressed incurrent pronunciation.(c) After the first two feet there is an alternation between words accented on the firstand those accented on the second syllable.(cO A final short vowel is elided, otherwise semi-hiatus is the rale ;fall Hiatus at the Caesura.Dabunt malum Metelli Naevio|poetae.Prim(a) ineedit CcrerisIpuer.but there may be
464 VERSIFICATION.IambicRhythms.757. The Iambic Ehythm is an ascending rhythm, inwhich the Thesis is double of the Arsis. It isrepresentedBy the Iambus : w -^ ;By the Tribrach : ^ ;By the Spondee : -c- ;By the Dactyl: O\>;By the Anapaest : \j ^> -e-\ andBy the Proceleusmaticus ^>^> : vj/w. VREMARK. The Spondee, Dactyl, Anapaest, and Proce&usmatidisare all irrational, and are consequently marked on the schemesyftius:> , > w w v-*,; see 744. r758. Iambic Octondrius (Tetrameter Acatalectic).Iuss(I) adpararl prandium aml-||c(a) exspectat me, scio, PL.,Men., 599. > ^ v->-> j. ^^ |^ ^ > ->Hic finis est iambe salve f vfndicisdoctor mail, SERVIUS. >^.^ \JJ.^J >JL w >^wAnacrustic Scheme :j. v-NOTE. This verse is predominantly a comic verse, occurring most frequently inTERENCE, who shows five hundred lines, while PLAUTUS shows but three hundred.The substitutions are the same as in the Senarins (761, N. 1). There are two varieties :(a) That which is divided into two equal halves by Diaeresis at the end of the fourthfoot. In this case the fourth foot as well as the eighth has all the privileges of the finalfoot of the Senarins (Hiatus, Syllaba Anceps), and conforms also to its rules, so that theline is practically a distich of two Quaternarii ;but Hiatus after the fourth foot isdenied for TERENCE.(b) That which is divided into two unequal halves by a Caesura after the fifth Arsis.Here the rules of the final foot apply only to the eighth, and the fourth may be a Spondee.The principle which governs the choice of words after the s&niquln&ria in theSenarins applies here after the dividing Caesura. The Hiatus comes under the generalrules. Prom the earliest period there is a tendency to keep the even feet pure. Thisvariety is preferred by TERENCE to the former. Examples of the two forms are :6 Troia, 6 patria, Pergamum,IPriame, periisti senex, PLAUT.Is porro m(6) autem verberat incursat i!pugnJs calcibus, PI-AUT.Facil(e) omn.es quom valemus recta consilia!aegrotis damns, TEE.759. Iambic Septenarius (Tetrameter Catalectic).Bemitte pallium mini||meum quodinvollstl, CAT. w^w -.w ||w^^w^. A
^|>_>ww>www>>teria,VERSIFICATION. 461Anacrustic Scheme :NOTES. 1. This verse is confined principally to PLATITUS and TERENCE ; it is to beregarded as a compound of Dimeter + Dimeter Catalectic hence :regular Diaeresis afterthe fourth foot, which is treated as a final foot. The same rules, in regard to the variousword-feet allowable, apply here as in the case of the Senarius (761, N. 6). Substitutionsare allowable in every foot except in the fourth, when followed by a Diaeresis.With Syllaba Anceps:Si abduxerls celabitur "itidein ut celata aclhuc est, PLAUT.With Hiatus :Sed si tibi vlgin^I minae I!argentl prSferuntur, PLAUT.2. Exceptionally in PLAUTUS, more often in TERENCE, the line is cut by Caesura afterthe fifth Arsis.In this case the fourth foot has no exceptional laws except that if theseventh foot is not pure the fourth should be, though this is not absolutely necessary.760. The Iambic Senarius (a Stichic measure). This is an imitationof the Iambic Trimeter of the Greeks, but differs from it in that itis a line of six separate feet and not of three dipodies. In the earlyLatin there is no distinction between the odd and even feet, such asprevails in the Greek Trimeter, but the same substitutions were allowablein the one as in the other. This distinction is regained in HORACEand SENECA, who follow the Greek treatment closely, and with whomthe line may be with some degree of justice called the Iambic Trimeter,but it isvery doubtful whether the Roman felt the Iambic Trimeter asdid the Greek. In both Senarius and Trimeter the last foot is alwayspure.(0M761. The Early Use (Senarius).Any substitution is allowed in any foot except the last.Quamvls sermones| possunt longltexier, PL., Trin., 797. >^|> |QuI scire possls f aut ingeniumnSscere, TEB., And., 53. > ^ |w|S(I) uxoris f propter amoremf nolitducere, TER., And., 155. > ^|Di fortunabuntj vostra consili(a),>||>^|^_^|^|>ww||^|^|fta vo!5, PL., Trin., 576. >^|> |>^_|w |^,v^v_/|wEl r(ei) operam dare tSffiierat aliquant(S)aequius, PL., Trin.,119. >
|w>| |^|>>466 VEKSIFICATIOtf.fanlty. The two shorts of an Arsis should not be divided between two words if thefirst short ends a word ;but there are sundry exceptions ; especially the case wheretwo words are closely connected, as, for instance, a preposition and ite case ;propteramSrem.2. The most frequent Caesura is the semiquitiaria. Next comes the sSmisejitSndna,which is usually accompanied by the slmiternana or by Diaeresis after second foot.Examples above.3. Elision is more frequent in the Iambic Senarius than in the Dactylic Hexameter,and occurs especially before the first and fifth Theses ;also not unfrequently in thefourth foot. The proportion of elision varies between TERENCE (four elisions in everythree verses) and HORACE (one in five stichic verses, and one in seven in distichs).4. Semi-hiatus (720), also called Graecanicus or LSgitimus, is very common both inThesis and Arsis ;Hiatus is also admitted at a change of speaker ; whether it is admissiblebefore proper names, foreign words, and in the principal Caesura, is still a matterof dispute.5. If the line is divided by the s&niqiiln&ria Caesura, and the fifth foot is formed bya single word, the second half of the third foot, together with the fourth, may be formedby a single word only when that is a Crctic or a Fourth Paeon ; as, fllius bonan fidS(PL., Most., 670). Thus dSpinxtl verbls probg would not he allowable for verblsdgpinxtl probS (PL., Poen., 1114).6. To close the line with two Iambic feet was not allowable, except as follows :(1)When the line ends with a word of four syllables or more. (2) When the line ends witha Cretic. (3) When the line ends with an Iambic word preceded by an anapaest orFourth Paeon. (4) When a change of person precedes the sixth foot. (5) When elisionoccurs in the fifth or sixth foot.762. The Later Use (Trimeter).Sufs et ipsa f Roma vir ibiis ruit w ^ -^ - ^. -|Heu m per urbein f nam pudettanti mall > ^ w |>^.w |Deripere lunam f vScibus possimmels >v^/ww |InfSmis Helenas f Castor offgnsusjc. w |vicein >-2.wv_/v_ -- -^ w |>v^ww |_d.\_^.wAlitibus atque f canibus homicid(am)Hectorem > ^-v-'v-'v-'|>^.v_'wvy|>^. j- ^->^-> ^|
lyinpha>|^w|desiVERSIFICATION.467fifth foot is pure in CATULLUS, but is almost always a Spondee in SENECA andPETRONIUS.2. Diaeresis at the middle of the verse is avoided. Short particles, which adhereclosely to the following word, do not constitute exceptions.Laboriosa nee cohors Ulixel, HOB.AdulterStur etjjolumba nuluo, HOB.In like manner explainBefertque tanta grexjimlcus ubera, HOB.3. The Caesura is usually the sSmiqulndria, but the stmisepttnaria is found also,but either with the semiqulnaria or with Diaeresis after the second foot.4. The SSnSrim ptt)*us, composed wholly of Iambi, is found first in CATULLUS (iv.and xxix.) ;also in HOBACE (Epod., xvi.), VEBGIL (Cat., 3, 4, 8), and the PriapSa.5. Of course, in the Anacrustic Scheme, the Caesura of the ordinary scheme becomesDiaeresis.Le : vis ereIIIpanteII1lit Ipe de.763. Iambic Trimeter Catalectic. ,MeS renldet in domo lacunar ^^>Rggumque pueris nee satelles Orel, HOR. > J -LW^^>^.W w^.^7Anacrustic Scheme, :^ : ^ w |Syncope).w|^_| /\ (withNOTES. This occurs in HOBACE (0., i. 4; n. 18). No resolutions are found except inthe second line quoted, where pueris may be dissyllabic (27), and the Spondee alone isused for the Iambus, mainly in the third foot. The Caesura is always sZmiqulnfiria.764. Trimeter lambicus Claudus (Choliambus) ;Scazon( HobUer) Hipponacteus.Miser Catulle desinas ineptlre, CAT. w ^ ^ w^w w^^wFuls^re quondam candid! tibf s5lSs, CAT. > JL\J >^w w^.^Dominis parantur ista; serviunt v6bis,MART. wo-^w w^w ^> JL j.Anacrustic Scheme : :^w| |^.^| wli-i-l^^. Tro-\J \J ' Wchaic Trimeter with Anacrusis, Syncope, and Protraction.NOTES. 1. In the Choliambus the rhythm is reversed at the close, by putting a Trocheeor Spondee in the sixth foot. The lighter the first part of the verse, the greater thesurprise. It is intended to express comic anger, resentment, disappointment.2. This metre, introduced into Rome by MATTIUS, was used frequently by CATULLUSand MABTIAL. PEBSIUS also has it in his Prologue.3. The Dactyl is occasional in the first and third feet, the Tribrach occurs very rarelyin the first, more often in the third and fourth, frequently in the second. The Spondeeis found in the first and third feet ;the Anapaest only in the first.4. The Caesura is usually sZmiqmnfiria, sometimes sZmisepf&naria, which is regularly supported by Diaeresis after the second foot.765. Iambic Quaterndrius (Dimeter}.Inarsit aestu6sius ^ . w w _s_ ^Imbi-gs nivesque comparat >-=- w w^wVidfoe properantfe domum w ^ ww^>^.wAst ego vicissim risers, HOE. > ^w w > ^ x.
parce468 VEKSIFICATION.Anacrustic Scheme :NOTE.This verse is constructed according to the principles which govern the Senaritisand Octonarius. It is rare in systems until the tune of SENECA, and is usuallyemployed as a Clausula in connection with Octonarii and Septenarii (PLADTUS, TER-ENCE), Senarii (HORACE), or Dactylic Hexameter (HORACE).766. Iambic Terndrius (Dimeter Catalectie},Id repperi i(am) exemplum >^w > ^ or> : ^^^>uiNOTE./\This verse is found mainly in PLAUTUS and TERENCE, and used as a Clausulato Bacchic Tetrameters (PLAUTUS), Iambic Septenarii (PLAUTUS) ;but twice inTERENCE (A?ul., 485 ; Hec., 731). It is found in systems first in PETRONTUS.767. The Iambic Tripody Catalectie and the Dipody Acatalecticare found here and there.Inops amStor, Trin,, 256. Bonu(s) sit bonis, B., 660.Trochaic Rhythms.768. The Trochaic Rhythm is a descending rhythm, inwhich the Thesis is double of the Arsis. It is represented,By the Trochee : j. w ;By the Tribrach : o w -/;By the Spondee ^ : ;By the Anapaest -^ : *-> ;By the Dactyl ^ w w : .By the Proceleusmaticus : ^ w w.REMARK. The Spondee, Anapaest, Dactyl, and Proceleusmaticus areall irrational and are accordingly measured > ww, > ,-^ w or w^. \j ^u ;see 744.769. Trochaic Octonarius (Tetrameter Acatalectic}.Scheme:>> >-> > > > ->Farce iam camoena vati iam sacro furori. SERVIUS.||Date viam qua fugere liceat , facite, t otae | j plateae pateant, PL. ,Aul. ,407.NOTE. This verse belongs to the cantica of early Comedy. It is properly a compoundof two Quaternarii. Hence Hiatus and Syllaba Anceps are admitted in theDiaeresis. A fourth or sixth Thesis, formed by the last syllable of a word forming orending in a Spondee or Anapaest, was avoided, as was also a monosyllabicclose. TheSubstitutions were allowed in all feet except the eighth, where the Tribrach is rare.770. Trochaic Septenarius (Tetrameter Catalectie).Scheme :-c-^ ^ ^> ^ ^> ^v^
iubeoservavistl--^VERSIFICATION. 469Cras amet qui numqu(am) amavit|| quiqu(e) amavit eras amet. PERVIG.YEN.Tu m(6) amoris magi' qu(am) honoris|| gratia. ENNIUS.Vapular(e) ego t6 vehementer : n6 m6 territes. PLAUT.||NOTES. 1. This is usually divided by a Diaeresis after the fourth Arsis into twohalves, with the license of a closing verse before the Diaeresis ;this is often supportedby Diaeresis after the second foot. Not unfrequently the line is divided byCaesura after the fourth Thesis, which may in this case be Anceps or have Hiatus,though not in TEBBNCE but other critics refuse to admit such a; division, and preferDiaeresis after the fifth foot. The substitutions are allowable in any foot except theseventh, which is regularly kept pure, though occasionally in early Latin a Tribrach ora Dactyl occurs even here. But the Dactyl is rare ha the fourth foot.2. The rule for the words allowable after the sVmiquinarla Caesura in the Senarius(761, N. 5) apply here after the Diaeresis, with the necessary modifications ;that is, thesecond hemistich cannot be formed by a word occupying the fifth and the Thesis of thesixth foot, followed by a word occupying the two succeeding half feet, unless the firstword is a Cretic or a Fourth Paeon.3. In regard to the close the same rules apply as hi the case of the Iambic Senarius(761, N. 6) in ; regard to the fourth and sixth Theses the rules are the same as for theOctonarius (769, N.).4. The strict Septenarius of the later poets keeps the odd feet pure, and rigidlyobserves tho Diaeresis.771. Trochaic Tetrameter Claudus.Hunc Ceres, cibf ministra, frugibus sulsporcet, VARRO. ^.^ w^w ^> JL \j >_/^^wNOTE.This verse is found only hi the Menippean Satires of VARKO, and is formed,like the Iambic Senarius Claudus, by reversing the last two quantities.772. Trochaic Quaternarius with Anacrusis.SI fractus illabatur orbis, HOE. w : ^ w|NOTE.|This occurs only in the Alcaic Strophe of HOBACB.w|U773. Trochaic Terndrius (Dimeter Catalectic).Respice v5ro ThespriS, PL., Ep., 3. & ^ NOTE. This is rare, and appears only in early Latin and as a Clausula, usually withCretics. Substitutions were allowable in every foot.
||470 VEKSIFICATION.775. Trochaic Tripody Catalectic.Eheu, qu(am) ego malls \ perdidi modis,PL., Ps., 259. JL> \i> \j \j .*. j.^> .z.||^ jc.NOTE. This is found occasionally in early Latin ; usually two at a time, otherwiseas a Clausula. When the first word is a Cretic the line may end in two Iambi.776. Trochaic Dipody (Monometer).Nimis inepta's, PL., Hud., 68 1. vi/ ^ w ^. ^NOTE.This is found occasionally as a Clausula with Cretic Tetrameters.Anapaestic Rhythms.777. The Anapaestic Rhythmis an ascending rhythm, inwhich the Thesis is to the Arsis as 2 to 2. It is represented,By the Anapaest w w : ^. ;By the Spondee :--;By the Dactyl : >i,w;By the Proceleusmaticus : *- w \I/ ^>.NOTES. 1. The Anapaestic measure is not uncommon in the Cantica of PLAUTUS ;but it is the metre most subject to license of all the early metres. Notice especially theoperation of the Iambic Law (716, 717) ;the common occurrence of Synizesis, of Diastole,and less often of Syncope', etc.2. Strict Anapaestic lines after the model of the Greek are found only in VAEBO,SENECA, and later authors.778. Anapaestic Octondrius (Tetrameter Acatalectic), andAnapaestic Septenarius (Tetrameter Catalectic}.Hostibiis victis, clvibus salvls rS|| plavi-w\L>^>cida, pacibus perfectis, Pers., 753.
saeculavinculapateatdetegat---VERSIFICATION. 4/1780. Anapaestic Quaterndrius (Dimeter Acatalcctic).Venient annls||sgris ^ w ^ - vz/wrerum w w ^. w w ow--Quibus Oceanusj|Laxet et inge"ns tellus -||v^> w \-> -c- --Tethysque novos orbes - -c- v_/||-&^-Nee sit terrls ultima ThulS. SEN. TRAG.||M/W --NOTE. This verse avoids resolution of the fourth Thesis :Syllaba Auccps andHiatus are rare.781. Anapaestic Dimeter Catalectic (Paroemiac).Volucer pede corpore pulcher w^^ww ^w^.v-Lingua catus ore canorus -.ww w w _. >-Verum memorare magis quam^.\j \j ww^.wFfinctum laudare decSbit. AUSON. ^- ww^.v^NOTES. 1. This verse is not common except as the close of a system of AnapaesticAcatalectic Dimeters. It allows in early Latin resolution of the third Thesis.2. Latin Anapaests, as found in later writers, are mere metrical imitations of theGreek Anapaests, and do not correspond to their original in contents. The GreekAnapaest was an anacrustic dactylic measure or march (in j time). Heiice the use ofPause to bring out the four bars.Paroemiacus : Anacrustic Scheme.Volucer pede corpore pulcher782. Anapaestic Dipody (Manometer Acatalectic).Omne paratumst, PL., Min., 365 ^^> j-NOTB.This verse is found in anapaestic systems between Anapaestic Dimeters.DactylicRhythms.783. The Dactylic Rhythmis a descending rhythm, inwhich the Thesis is equal to the Arsis = (2 2).The Dactylic Rhythm is represented by the Dactyl :-*-
.Quamvfshastlslonglsqu(e)^wetcampus*.wruitAppennlnus.ex^equoremoeniaridiculusquatitbarbaraturbacornuaconspicitursplendetacrenigra.*-wbombum.+w4/2 VERIFICATION.bles. This variety in the length of the verse, combined with the greatnumber of caesural pauses, gives the Hexameter peculiar advantagesfor continuous composition.Scheme : w\\\\\+-1. Ut fugiunt aquilas t timidissima !1 columbae. Ov. "i2. At tuba terribill t sonitu t 1!procul canoro. VERG.|FJve Dact lg3.Quadrupedante putrem t sonitu I !ungula campum. fVERG.4. Cum medio celergs t revolant VERG.Imergl."i5. Vastius insurggns t decimae Iimpetus undae. Ov. I F0ur Dactyls.6. Et reboat raucuin t regio t cita LUCR.I:j!7. Muta metu terram t genibus t summissa petSbat. LUCR. "i8. Inter cunctantSs t cecidit t moribunda ministros. VERG. I Three Dactyls.9. Ne turbata volent t rapidls t ludibria ventis. VERG.10. Versaqu(e) in obnixos t :lurgentur vasto. VERQ. ITWQ Dacty]B11. Processit longe t flammantia II mundl. LUCR.12. Portam vl multa t converse j cardine torquet. VERG.13. TgctCum) august(um) inggns t centum sublime columnls. ! One Dactyl.VERG.14. 0111 respondit t Kej^Albai Longal. ESTNIUS. J-No Dactyl.15. Aut iSvSs ocreas t lento t ducunt argentO.VERG.16. Sunt apud infernos t totmllia formosamm. PROP.17.Aeriaeque AlpSs t eUiubifer Ov.I!"j18. Procubuit viridi- in1 lltore !! sus. VERG. IMonosyllabic19. Parturiunt inontes t nascetur 11 iiius. HOR. ending.10 +6 = 16 8 ISemiqnin. and20. Nascere, praeque diem+veniens age,i|Lucifer,almum. VERG. > Bucolic.f Third Trochee21.Inslgnem pietate t virnm t tot adire laborSs. VERG. and[ Semisept.22. t nigrae violae t sunt !! vaccinia VERG.I } Split in half.23. 1! fl I! IISparsis et horret. EN. Shivered.;2'.sint sub aqua sub aqua maledlcere tentant. Ov. a, - sound.}'25. M6 m(6) adsum qui fSc(I) in mS convertite fermm. VERG. }-e - sound.26. Discissos nudos laniabant dentibus artus. VERG. J-s - sound.NOTES. 1. The two reigning ictuses are the first and fourth, and the pauses are soarranged as to give special prominence to them the first by the pause at the end of thepreceding verse, the fourth by pauses within the verse, both before and after the Thesis.2. The principal Caesura is the slmiquln&ria or penlhemimeral, i. e., after the Thesisof the third foot, or Masculine Caesura of the third foot ; the next is the sSmiseptSnSriaor hepthemimeral, after the Thesis of the fourth foot but; usually supplemented by thesSmiterndria in the Thesis of the second or by one after the second Trochee ;thenthe Feminine Caesura of the third foot, the so-called Third Trochee, which is less usedamong the Romans than among the Greeks. As Latin poetry is largely rhetorical,and the Caesura is of more importance for recitation than for singing, the Roman poetsare very exact in the observance of these pauses.
pervortentcsvenitomniaetcircumcursant.IteVEKSIFICATION. 473In verses with several Caesuras, the semiseptenaria outranks the stmiqulitSria, if itprecedes a period, and the latter does not, or if it is perfect and the latter is imperfect(i.e., formed by tmesis or by elision) it also as a masculine Caesura outranks the Third;Trochee as a feminine. In other cases there may be doubt as to the principal Caesura.3. The Diaeresis which is most carefully avoided is the one after the third foot,especially if that foot ends in a Spondee, and the verse is thereby split in half.Examples are found occasionally, and if the regular Caasura precedes, the verse isnot positively faulty.His lacrimls vltam t damus IImiserSseimus ultrS. VERG.It is abominable when no other Caesura proper is combined with it.Poeni I! II IIENNIUS.On the other hand the Diaeresis at the end of the fourth foot divides the verse intoproportionate parts (sixteen and eight morae, or two to one), and gives a graceful trochaicmovement to the hexameter. This is called the Bucolic Caesura, and while commonin Greek, is not so in Latin even in bucolic poetry. JUVENAL, however, ia fond ofit, showing one in every fifteen verses.Ite domuiu saturaeI IIHesperus capellae. VERG.4. Verses without Caesura are very rare ;a few are found in ENNIUS (see No. 23) andLUCILIUS. HORACE uses one designedly in A.P., 263.5. Elision is found most often in VERGIL (one case in every two verses) and leastoften in LUCAN (leaving out ENNIUS and CLAUDIAN). CATULLUS, JUVENAL, HORACE,OVID stand about midway between these two extremes. It is very rare in the Thesisof the first foot, and is found oftenest in the following order : the Thesis of the secondfoot, the Arsis of the fourth, the Arsis of the first, the Thesis of the third.6. Simple Hiatus is very rare in lines composed wholly of Latin words, except at theprincipal Caesura ; it is found after a final short syllable (excluding -m) but twice (V.,EC., u. 53 ; A., i. 405) ;after a long monosyllable (omitting Interjections o and a) butonce (V., A., iv. 235). But before the principal Caesura, or if the line contains a Greekword, examples are not very uncommon. VERGIL has altogether about forty cases ;HORACE shows two cases (S., 1. 1, 108 ; Epod., 13, 3) ;CATULLUS two in the Hexameterof the Elegiac Distich (66, 11 ; 107, 1); PROFERTIUS one (m. 7, 49).7. Of Semi-hiatus VERGIL shows some ten examples at the close of the Dactyl, but allof Greek words except A., in. an ; EC., 3, 79 ;there are occasional examples elsewhere,as in PROPERTIUS, HORACE, etc. There are also several examples of Semi-hiatus after amonosyllable in the first short of the Dactyl, as :CAT., xcvn. i ; V., A., vi. 507 ; HOR.,S., i. g, 38. Hiatus after num occurs in HOR., S., n. 2, 28.8. VERGIL is fond of Diastole, showing fifty-seven cases, all except three (A., m.464, 702 ; xii. 648) of syllables ending in a consonant ; HORACE, in Satires and Epistles,has eleven, once only of a vowel (S., n. 3, 22) ; CATULLUS, three ; PROPBRTIUS, three ;TIBULLUS, four ;MARTIAL (in the Distich), two ; VERGIL also lengthens que sixteentimes, but only when queis repeated in the verse, and before two consonants or adouble consonant (except A., in. 91) ; OVID exercises no such care.9. A short syllable formed by a final short vowel remains short before two consonants,of which the second is not a liquid (mainly sc, sp, st), especially in the fifthfoot, less often in the first. LUCILIUS, LUCRETIUS, and ENNIUS have numerous examplesof this ; VBRGIL but one case (A., xi. 309), except before z ;HORACE has eightcases in the Satires ; PROPERTIUS six ;TIBULLUS two cases, one before smaragdos.10. A Hexameter should close (a) with a dissyllable preceded by a polysyllable of atleast three syllables, or (6) with a trisyllable preceded by a word of at least two syllables.The preposition is proclitic to its case. Exceptions to this rule are common in earlyLatin, but decrease later. Thus ENNIUS shows fourteen per cent, of exceptional lines.In later times artistic reasons sometimes caused the employment even of a monosyllableat the end (see exs. 18, 19).11. Spondaic lines are exceptional in ENNIUS and LUCRETIUS, more common in
IW' 1474 VERSIFICATION.CATULLUS, rare in VERGIL, OVID, HORACE, never in TIBULLUS. The stricter poetsrequired that in this case the fourth foot should be a Dactyl, and then the two last feetwere usually a single word. Entirely Spondaic lines are found in ENNIUS (three cases,as Ann., i. 66, M.) and CAT. (n6, 3).12. Emaus shows three peculiar cases of the resolution of the Thesis in the Dactyl,Ann., 267 ; Sat., 53 and 59.13. Hypermetrical verses running into the next by Synapheia are rare ; e.g., LUCK.,v. 846 ; CAT., 64, 298 ; 115, 5. VERGIL has twenty cases, usually involving que or ve,but twice -m (A., vn. 160 ; G., i., 295) ;three other cases are doubtful. HORACE hastwo cases (in the Satires), OVID three, VALERIUS FLACCUS one. HORACE has alsofour cases of two verses united by tmesis of a compound word.14. Pure dactylic lines are rare ;the most usual forms of the first four feet of theBtichic measure are these : DSSS, 15 per cent. ; DSDS, 11.8 per cent. ; DDSS, 11 per cent. ;SDSS, 10 per cent. The most uncommon are SSDD, 1.9 per cent. ; SDDD, 2 per cent. Theproportion of Spondee to Dactyl in the first four feet varies from 65.8 per cent. 'ofSpondee in CATULLUS to 45.2 per cent, in OVID. The following statements are fromDrobisch :(a) Excepting ENNIUS, CICERO, and Smus ITALICUS, Latin poets havemore Dactyls than Spondees in the first foot. (6) Excepting LUCRETIUS, more Spondeesin the second, (c) Excepting VALERIUS FLACCUS, more Spondees in the third.(d) Without exception, more Spondees in the fourth.15. Much of the beauty of the Hexameter depends on the selection and arrangementof the words, considered as metrical elements. The examples given above have beenchosen with especial reference to the picturesque effect of the verse. Monosyllables at theend of the Hexameter denote surprise ; anapaestic words, rapid movement, and the like.Again, the Hexameter may be lowered to a conversational tone by large masses ofSpondees, and free handling of the Caesura. Compare the Hexameters of HORACE inthe Odes with those in the Satires.785. Elegiac Pentameter (Catalectic Trimeter repeated).The Elegiac Pentameter consists of two Catalectic Trimeters or Penthemimers,the first of which admits Spondees, the second does not.There is a fixed Diaeresis in the middle of the verse, as marked above,which is commonly supplemented by the semiterndria Caesura. ThePentameter derives its name from the old measurement : w w ,w w ,,ww ,^w ;and the name is a convenient one, because theverse consists of 2 + 2% Dactyls. The Elegiac Distich is used in sentimental,amatory, epigrammatic poetry.The musical measurement of the Pentameter is as follows :W v->>->WV->IIAThis shows why neither Syllaba Anceps nor Hiatus is allowed at theIWWIDiaeresis, and explains the preference for length by nature at that point.At dolor in lacrimas verterat omne||merum, TIB.Me legat et lecto carmine doctus||^. w w ^. w wamet, Ov. ^. ^ w ^- *At nunc barbaries|| grandis habgrenihil, Ov. - j. \j \j *.Concessum nulls|| llge redlbit iter,PBOP. J. J. J.
VERSIFICATION. 475The Elegiac Pentameter occurs only as a Clausula to the HeroicHexameter, with which it forms the Elegiac Distich. Consequently thesense should not run into the following Hexameter (exceptions rare):Saep(e) ego tentavi curas depellere vinoAt dolor in lacrimas verterat omne||merum, TIB.Ingeniom quondam fuerat pretiosius auroAt nunc barbaries|| grandis Labere nihil, O v.Par erat Inferior versus : risisse CupldoDicitur atque unum|| surripuisse pedem, Ov.Saep(e) ego cum dominae dukes a llmine duroAgnosco voces haec | negat esse domi, TIB.NOTES. 1. In the first two feet of the Pentameter, which alone can suffer variation,the forms are as follows :DS, 46 per cent.; DD, 24.5 per cent.; ss, 16 per cent.; SD, 13.5per cent.CATULLUS, however, has BS, 34.5 per cent.2. Elision is rare, especially in the second hemistich. When it occurs it is generallyin the first Arsis or second Thesis, and usually affects a short vowel or -m. CATULLUSshows the greatest proportion of examples, OVID the smallest. Except in CATULLUS andLTGDAMUS there are fewer cases of Elision in the Pentameter than in the Hexameter.3. Elision and Diastole in the Diaeresis are rare. CATULLUS especially, and PRO-PEBTIUS occasionally, have Elision. PROPERTIUS and MARTIAL show each two casesof Diastole (PROP., n. 8, 8 ;n. 24, 4 ; MART., ix. 101, 4 ; xrv. 77, 2).4. A final short vowel before two consonants, one of which is a liquid or s,islengthened twice in TIBULLUS, and remains short once in PROPERTIUS (TiB., i. 5, 38 ;i. 6, 34 ; PROP., iv. 4, 48).5. Dialysis occurs in compounds of solvo and volvS ; as, CAT., 66, 74 ; TIB., i. 7, 2, etc.6. In the strict handling of the Pentameter by OVID, the rule was that it shouldclose with a dissyllable.So in his Amores, OVID shows no example of any other ending;and in his Tristia the proportion is one in one hundred and forty lines. In earliertimes, however, there was no especial avoidance of polysyllabic endings, thoughmore are found in CATULLUS than in any other author. Peculiar is PROPERTIUS, who,while almost equalling CATULLUS in his disregard of the law of the dissyllabic endingin the first book, equals the Tristia of OVID in the observance of it in his fourth.With dissyllabic ending the prevailing forms of the second Hemistich are*-*and ^ , but TIBULLUS and OVID, and in less degree CATUL-LUS, employ quite often w ,w and , '-'-', .786. Dactylic Tetrameter Acat. (metrum Alcmdnium).None decet aut viridi nitiduin caput ^.ww^.ww-c.^w^.wwFallida mors aequG pulsat pede j-w^- .*_ .z. ^ ^Vftae summa brevis spemnos vetat ^ ^^w^ ij^This verse occurs mainly in combination with an Ithyphattlc toform the GreaterArchttochian verse ; occasionally in stichic composition in SENECA ;also in TER.,And., 625.787. Dactylic Tetrameter Cat. in Dissyllabum (ArcJiilochium).Aut Epheson bimarisve Connthi^.WWJL^WJLWW^."VJfortes peioraque pass! -t ^. ^.ww^.TJHgnsorem cohibent Archy ta, II OH -* ^.\j \j ^. j. ^
476 VERSIFICATION.NOTE.This line, which only occurs in the Alcmanian System, may also be lookedupon as an Acatalectic Tetrameter with a spondaic close.788. Dactylic Trimeter Catalectic in Syllabam (LesserArchilochiari).Pulvis et umbra sumus, HOR. ^ w w -=- w w ^NOTE.This line occurs mainly in the first three ArchUochian Strophes.789. Dactylic Dimeter Catalectic in Dissyllabum (Adonic).Terruit urbem, HOB. -*- ^ ^ -^ wNOTE. Though generally measured thus, this verse is properly logaoedic, and willrecur under that head (792). It occurs mainly in the Sapphic stanza, and at the closeof series of Sapphic Heudecasyllabics in SENECA.Logaoedic Rhythms.790. The Logacedic Khythmis a peculiar form of the Trochaicrhythm, in which the Arsis has a stronger secondaryictus than the ordinary Trochee.Instead of the Trochee, the cyclic Dactyl or the irrationalTrochee may be employed.This cyclic Dactyl is representedin morae by 1, ,1 ;in music, by J. J j = ^, TV, iWhen Dactyls are employed, the Trochee preceding iscalled a Basis, or Tread, commonly marked x .If the basisis double, the second is almost always irrational in Latinpoetry. Instead of the Trochee, an Iambus is sometimesprefixed. Anacrusis and Syncope are also found.REMARKS. i. Logaoedic comes from Xoyos, prose, anddotSr/,song, perhaps because the rhythms seem to vary as in prose.2. Dactyls are usually, but not necessarily, employed.791. Alcaic Enneasyllabic.No Dactyl.Sf fractus illabatur orbis, HOE.^ : *-v*.>*.\jj.\jNOTE. The Anacrusis should be long. HORACE shows no exceptions in the fourthbook and very few in the first three. The regular Caesura is the sSmiquwdria.792. Adonic.One Dactyl.Terruit urbem, HOE. -
VEBSIFICATION. 477793. Aristophanic (Choriambic).Lydia die per omnfe, HOK. A/w|jc. v\NOTE. This verse occurs mainly in the lesser Sapphic Strophe of HORACE.ut. |AOne Dactyl, with Basis.794. Pherecratean. xNigris aequora ventis, HOR. ^ >|A/ |-^
478 VERSIFICATION.Further, CATULLUS, like the Greeks, employed occasionally a Trochee in the secondfoot ;HORACE made it a rule to employ only a Spondee there.2. The regular Cfesura in Latin is the gSmigulnaria ; but the Third Trochee (784,N. 2) is found not unfrequently in CATULLUS and HORACE, but not later. The usageof HORACE is peculiar in this :respect In the first and second books there are sevencases in two hundred and eighty-five verses ;in the third none at all ;in the fourthtwenty-two in one hundred and five verses ;in the Carmen S&culare nineteen infifty-seven verses.3. Elision is very common in CATULLUS, but occurs in HORACE only in about oneverse in ten. Later usage tends to restrict Elision. Licenses are extremely rare in theclassical period. So HORACE shows one example of Diastole (0., n. 6,14). Monosyllabicendings are not common, but the word is usually attached closely with whatprecedes. The last syllable is regularly long.4. SENECA shows some peculiarities:occasionally a Dactyl in the second foot, or aSpondee in the third ; occasionally also Dialysis.One Dactyl with Double Basis and Anacrusis.798. -Alcaic (Greater) Hendecasyllabic. x xVidSs ut alta stet nive candidum >:-^w-z.>|| | |A/w |Soracte nee iam sustineant||onus, HOR.j.\j|^. ^NOTES. 1. The second Basis is always a Spondee the;few exceptions having beenemended. The Anacrusis is regularly long I ;IonACE shows no exception in the fourthbook and very few in the first three. The last syllable may be long or short.2. The regular Caesura is a Diaeresis after the second foot ;HORACE shows but twoexceptions in six hundred and thirty-four verses (0., i. 37, 14 ;rv. 14, 17). A few othersshow imperfect Caesurae, as O., 1. 16, 21 ; i. 37, 5 ;n. 17, 21.3. In regard to Elision, the facts are the eaine as in the case of the Sapphic.4. Licenses are not common : Diastole occurs in H., O., in. 5, 17 ; Hardening(723) occurs in H., O., m. 4, 41 ;m. 6, 6. Tmesis is not unfrequent in forms ofquicumque (H., O., i. 9, 14 ; 1. 16, 2 i. ; 27, 14).Two Dactyls.799. Alcaic (Lesser) or Decasyllabic.Vertere funeribus triumphos, HOR.A, \j.^NOTE. The Caesura is regularly the sSmiternaria, occasionally the Second Trochee.Elision occurs a little less often in this measure than in the Hendecasyllabic. The lastsyllable is usually long. Diastole' occurs in H., 0., n. 13, 16.In all these, the Dactyl has a diminished value.More questionableis the logaoedic character of the Greater Archilochian :800. Archilochian (Greater)= Dactylic Tetrameter andTrochaic Tripody.Solvitur acris hiems grata vice vgris et|| Favo'ni, HOR.
cur||j-vVERSIFICATION. 479If measured logaoedically, the two shorts of the Dactyl must be reducedin value to one (^^ = I ^J^l ' \^^r ' v^A_;" ' 'ALogaoedic tetrapody + Logaocdic tetrapody with Syncope.NOTE. Diaeresis is always found after the fourth foot, which is always Dactylic.The principal Caesura is the semiquinaria. In the third foot a Spondee is preferred,whereas the Greek model has more often the Dactyl.801. Choriambic Rhythms. When a logacedic series issyncopated, apparent choriambi arise. What is -u ^ t_|||seems to be ww . Genuine choriambi do not exist inLatin, except, perhaps, in the single line PL., Men,, no.802. Asclepiadean (Lesser).This verse is formed by a Catalectic Pherecratean followed by aCatalectic Aristophanic.Maecenas atavfs eclite || rlgibfis, xHOR. > A, w||uc_A, w||NOTES. 1. There should be Diasresis, complete or incomplete (i.e., weakened byElision), between the two halves. Only two exceptions are cited (H., 0., n. 12, 25 ;rv.8, 17). The Caesura is regularly the sSmiternarla in HORACE, less often the SecondTrochee.2. Elision occurs about as often as in the Elegiac Pentameter. It occurs most oftenin the first Dactyl and in the stichic measure. The final syllable may be short orlong but a; monosyllable is rare. Licenses are likewise rare, as Diastole (H., 0., i.3,36).803' Asclepiadean (Greater).Nullam Vare sacra vite|| prius seVeris || arborem, HOR.j.^NOTE. This verse differs from the preceding by having a Catalectic Adonic (792)inserted between the two halves. Diasresis always separates the parts in HORACE. Therules of Elision are the same as in the preceding verse.804. Sapphic (Greater).Te dees or6 Sybarin ||x xJ- w|^-> |-T-^ li-c-llAyv^ |^.wproperas amando, HOB.|"-^|ANOTE. This verse differs from the lesser Sapphic by the insertion of a catalecticAdonic. It is found only in HORACE (0., i. 8). Diaeresis always occurs after the fourthfoot, and there is also a semlqiflnaria. Caesura.
^||^480 VEESIFICATION.805. Priapean (Glyconic + Pherecrateari).Hunc lucum tibi dedicQ|| cdnsecroque Priape, CAT.XXA, w ut.I^ >IWI>|A, w |^| ^ ^NOTE.Diaeresis always follows the Glyconic, but neither Hiatus nor Syllaba Ancepais allowable. The verse occurs in CAT. 17 and Priap. 85.Cretic and Bacchic Rhythms.806. These passionate rhythms are found not unf requentlyin PLAUTUS and occasionally elsewhere. They both belongto the Quinquepartite or Five-Eighths class.The distribution of the Creticus is 3 + 2 morae.The metrical value of the Creticus is ^(Amphimacer).For itmay be substituted the First Paeon, w ^ w, or theFourth Paeon, w ^ w .NOTE. Double resolution in the same foot is not allowable, and there is rarely morethan one resolution in a verse. Instead of the middle short an irrational long is sometimesfound.807. Tetrameter Acataleetic. -f. ^ ^- ^.w^. ^ w ^ ^.w^.\ | |Ex bonis pessura(l) et frandulentisstuni, PL., Capt., 235.NOTE. Resolution is not allowed at the end nor in the second foot immediately beforea Csesura. The Arsis immediately preceding (i.e., of the second and fourth foot)is regularly pure.808. Tetrameter Catalectic. -*- ^ ^|^w^.|^w^.|*.Da mi(hi) h6c mel metim sf m(e) amis s(i)andes, PL., Trin., 244.NOTE. The existence of such lines is disputed, but the balance of authority seemsto be in favor of recognising them.809. Dimeter Acataleetic.Nosce salt(em) hunc quis est, PL., Ps., 262. j- w ^|^^ *.NOTE. This verse is found usually at the close of a Cretic system, or with TrochaicSeptenarii. It follows the same rules as the Tetrameter, that is, the last long is notresolved and the second Arsis is kept pure.810. Acataleetic Cretic, Trimeters are rare and not always certain.Compare PL., Trin., 267, 269, 271 ; Ps., 1119 ; Most., 338 ;CatalecticTrimeters and Dimeters are even more uncertain. Compare PL.,Trin., 275 ; True., 121.811. The Bacchlushas the following measure : ^ -* -^,= 1 +2 + 2 morae (J"J J),or if the descending form -^ ^- w be regardedas the normal one 2+2 + 1 morae (Jj J").
,814.w^^.w^.^w^.^-^^.^wwVERSIFICATION. 481For the long two shorts are sometimes substituted. On the otherhand, an irrational long may be used for the short, and occasionallytwo shorts are also thus used.812. Bacchic Tetrameter.Quibus nee locust ullu' nee ape's parata w JL ^\Miseric6rdi6rnflllani6stf6minaram wOw^.|||||^ 6^ 6NOTE. In this verse there is usually a Caesura after either the second or thirdIambus ; rarely Diaeresis after the second Bacchius. The Arsis is kept pure in thesecond and fourth feet if the following long closes a word. Not more than one dissyllabicArsis is allowable. Usually there is only one resolved Thesis, very rarely two,never more than three.813. Dimeter Acatalectic.Ad aetat(em) agundam, PL., Trin., 232. ^ ^. ^|^*. JLNOTE. This is rare except at the close of a Bacchic series, to form the transitionto another rhythm.Bacchic Hexameter occurs in nine lines in a monologue in PL.,Am., 633-642. Hypermetric combination into systems is found in PL.,Men., 571 ff, and VABRO, Sat., p. 195 (R.).Ionic Rhythm.815. The Ionic Khythm is represented by lonicus a maiorew w J J jjFor the lonicus a maiore may be substitutedthe Ditrochaeus - ^ ^-. This is called Anaclasis (breakingup).The verse iscommonly anacrustic, so that it begins withthe thesis ^ ^ : . Such verses are called Ionic! a minore.The second long has a strong secondary ictus.In the early Latin, beginning with ENNIUS, the verse was used withmuch license. Resolution of the long syllables was common as well asthe use of irrational long, and the contraction of two short syllablesinto a long. HORACE alone shows the pure Ionic.The lonicus is an excited measure, and serves to express the frenzyof distress as well as the madness of triumph.816. Tetrameter Catalectic Ionic a maiore (Sotadeari).This measure, introduced by ENNIUS, was used with great freedomby the earlier poets but a stricter; handlingis found in later Latinpoets, as PETRONIUS, MARTIAL, etc.21
^|^482 VERIFICATION.Nam quani varia sint generapo&natOrum, Baebi,^ w ww|Quamque longe discinct(a) ali(a)ab aliis, sic nSsce. Accius. ^.^> >\*. wv |^-A^_/\Later Latin :The most common scheme is the pure Ionic with Anaclasis, especiallyin the third foot. Irrational longs are not used, and there israrely more than one resolution, as : ^>^> w w or ww>^ w.Molles vetergs Deliacl maim recisi ^ w^^ ww^w-.w^ter corripuf terribilein manu bipennem. ^ ww^. v^w-c-v^^w^PROP.817. A combination of the Ionic a mdidre into systems is found inLAEVIUS, who has a system of ten followed by a system of nine. Sometraces of similar arrangement have been observed in the Satires ofVARRO.818. Tetrameter Catalectic Ionic d mindre (Cfalliambic).This verse was introduced by VARRO in his Menippean Satires, andappears also in CATULLUS, 63, and in some fragments of MAECENAS.In CATULLUS the two short syllables may be contracted (ten timesin the first foot, six times in the third), and the long may be resolved,but not twice in the same Dimeter (except 63), and very rarely in thefirst foot of the second Dimeter (once in 91), but almost regularly inthe penultimate long. Diaeresis between the two Dimeters is regular.Anaclasis is found in the majority of the lines ; regularly in the firstDimeter (except 18, 54, 75).The frequent resolutions and conversions give this verse a peculiarlywild character.Ordinary Scheme :Without Anaclasis : ^>^^- ^^>^. ^^^. ^>^>^.With Anaclasis : v^^.^j ^>^- wj-v ^j-.Anacrustic Scheme :Without Anaclasis : w w : *. *~> w|^f J|LZJ|Awe*|AEt ear(um) omni(a) adlrem furibundalatibula wv_/_z. ww.^. \-w^.ww_
^wNomenVEKSIFICATIOX. 483Super altavectus Attis celeri ratelam iam dolet quod egl iam iamquepaenitet. CAT. -e- ^> ^ ^ -t.w w^.819. Dimeter Catalectic Ionic a minors (Anacreontic).This verse is found first in LAEVIUS, then in SENECA, PETRONIUS,and later. Anaclasis is regular in the first foot. The long syllablemay be resolved, or the two shorts at the beginning may be contracted.The verse may end in a Syllaba Anceps.Vener(em) igitur alm(um) adoransSen femin(a) isve mas estIt(a)o-we/ww^w^.^_ w ^ w ^ut alba Noctilucast. ^ ^ -f- ^ *. ^> *.NOTE. Owing to the similarity of the verse to the Iambic Quaternarius Catalectic itis also called the HemiamMc.Compound Verses.820. lambelegus (Iambic Dimeter and Dactylic Trimeter Cat.).This verse occurs only in the second ArchilocMan Strophe ofHORACE, and is often scanned as two verses :Tu vfna TorquatS movS consule|| pressa meo. I Ion.> :^w|^ >* |^^|^ I I A I H821. Elegiambus (Dactylic Trimeter Cat. and Iambic Dimeter).This verse occurs only in the third ArchilocMan Strophe of HORACE,arid is often scanned as two verses :Dg'sinet imparibus certare submotus | pudor. HOR.A "^i:^w ^|\j| i|^A \/\822. Versus Reizianus (Iambic Dimeter and Anapaestic TripodyCatalectic).Bed!, qu6 fugis nunc ? ten6 tens. Quid stolidS clamas 1||Qni(a) ad tris viros if am) ego deferam tuom.|| Qu(am) obrem 1PL., Aul., 415.NOTE. From the time of REIZ, after whom this verse has been named, it has beenthe subject of a great deal of discussion. In regard to the first part of the verse there
484 VERSIFICATION.is considerable unanimity, in regard to the second opinions differ. Some regardan Iambic Dimeter Catalectic Syncopated (w w *. i_c_ JL \j); others as an IambicTripody Catalectic (w^.^^ /\). SPENGEL regards it as a Hypercatalectic AnapaesticMonometer, and he has been followed with a variation in the nomenclature inthe above scheme. LEO regards it aa Logacedic. The most recent view (KLOTZ)regards it as sometimes Logaoedic, and sometimes Anapaestic.823. i- PLAUTUS shows several verses compounded of a Cretic Dimeterand a Catalectic Trochaic Tripody. These verses are usually,but not always, separated by Diaeresis. Examples : Ps., 1285, 1287.2. Some authorities consider verses like PL., Most., 693, Rud., 209,compounded of a Cretic Dimeter and a Clausula. Others regard themas Catalectic Cretic Tetrameters.it asThe Cantica of Early Latin.824. The construction of the Cantica (in 'the narrow sense) ofPLAUTUS and TERENCE is still a matter of dispute. Three opinionshave been advanced. One looks at them as antistrophic, followingthe scheme A.B.B. ;others hold that the scheme is A.B.A. The thirdview is that with some exceptions the Cantica are irregular compositions,without a fixed principle ef responsion.In TERENCE, Trochaic Octonarii are always followed by TrochaicSeptenarii, and very frequently the Trochaic Septenarii are followedby Iambic Octonarii. In PLAUTUS there are long series of Cretic andBacchic verses, and sometimes these alternate, without, however, anyregular scheme, with other verses.A Bacchic Trochaic Canticum is found in PL., Merc., 335-363, asfollows : I. 2 Bacc. Tetram. ;II. 4 Anap. Dim. ;III. i Troch. Octon. ;IV. 13 Bacc. Tetram.; V. i Troch. Octon.; VI. 2 Bacc. Tetram.; VII.1 Troch. Octon. ;VIII. 2 Bacc. Tetram. ;IX. 2 Troch. Octon.A Trochaic Iambic Canticum is TER.,PA., 153-163. A. 153-157:2 Troch. Octon.; i Troch. Sept.; i Iamb. Octon. B. 158-163; i Troch.Octon. ; 2 Troch. Sept. ; 3 Iamb. Octon. ; i Iamb. Quater. (Clausula).The Cantica of Later Latin.825. i- The Cantica of SEXECA are composed mostly in AnapaesticDimeters, closed frequently, though not necessarily, by a Monometer.A Dactyl is common in the first and third feet. The Spondeeis likewisevery common, a favourite close beingvJ/ ^ -f- . The Diaeresisbetween the Dimeters is regular. Examples : Here. Fur., 125-203.In Ag., 310-407, Dimeters and Monometers alternate.2. Iambic Dimeters, occasionally alternating with Trimeters, butusually stichic, are found occasionally ;as Med., 771-786.
-vv,--^-VERSIFICATION. 48$3. Peculiar to SENECA is the use of a large variety of Logacedicmeasures in his Cantica. So we find not unf requently the followingin stichic repetition: Lesser Asclepiad5ans, Glyconics, Sapphic Hendecasyllabics,Adonics, and other imitations of Horatian measures ;but there are few traces of antistrophic arrangement.Lyric Metres of Horace.826. In the schemes that follow, the Roman numerals refer toperiods, the Arabic to the number of feet or bars, the dots indicatethe end of a line.I.Asclepiadean Strophe No. 1. Lesser Asclepiadean Verse (802)repeated in tetrastichs.-> I-- 1^-1-- iIAI/\ oO.,i. i; in. 30;iv. 8.II. Asclepiadean Strophe No. 2. Glyconics (795) and LesserAsclepiadean (802) alternating, and so forming tetrastichs.0., i. 3, 13, 19, 36; in. 9, 15, 19, 24, 25, 28; iv. i, 3.III. Asclepiadean Strophe No. 3. Three Lesser Asclepiadean Verses(802) followed by a Glyconic (795).->II_wIA40., i. 6, 15, 24, 33; ii. 12; in. 10, 16; iv. 5, 12.
w486 VERSIFICATION.IV. Asclepiadean Strophe No. 4. Two Lesser Asclepiadean Verses(802), a Pherecratean (794), and a Glyconic (795).->III. ->I->I-V*0., I. 5, 14, 21, 23; m. 7, 13; iv. 13.V. Asclepiadean Strophe No. 5. Greater Asclepiadean (803), repeatedin fours.->|-uor|i-|*vw|,_|-v+|-.v|- .| $A23->II32IO. tI. ii, 18;iv. 10.VI. Sapphic Strophe. Three Lesser Sapphics (797), and an Adonic(792), which is merely a Clausula. In the Sapphic HORACE regularlybreaks the Dactylẋ-|->x-w|x|x|f-^-f^||-w||-w-w|| 55I- 50., I. 2, 10, 12, 20, 22, 25, 30, 32, 38; ii. 2, 4, 6, 8, io, 16; in. 8, ii,14, 18, 20, 22, 27; iv. 2, 6, ii ; Carmen Saeculare.NOTE. In Greek the third and fourth verses ran together to form a single verse.In Latin this is rare ;one case is found in CATTTLLUS, n, 11, and three in HORACE, 0.,i. 2, 19 ; 25, 11 n.; 16, 7 ;but the occurrence of Hiatus between the two lines in HOBACB(0., i. 2, 47 ; 12, 7 ; 12, 31 ; 22, 15, etc.) may be considered as indicating that the verseswere conceived as separate. Elision and Hiatus are also occasionally found in thelines. Elision, second and third: CAT., ii, 22; H., 0., n. 2, 18 ; 16, 34;iv. 2,22;third and fourth :CAT., n, 19 ; H., 0., iv. 2, 23 ; C.S., 47. Hiatus, first and second :H., 0., i. 2, 41 ; 12, 25 ;n. 16, 5 ;ni. iz, 29 ; 27, 33 ;second and third : H., 0., i. 2, 6 ;12, 6 ; 25, 18 ; 30, 6 ;n. 2, 6 ; 4, 6 ;m. n, 50 ; 27, 10.
IVERSIFICATION. 487VII. Lesser Sapphic, Strophe. Aristophanic '(TC)3), and GreaterSapphic (804). Two pairs are combined into a tetrastich.AVIII. Alcaic Strophe. Two Alcaic verses of eleven syllables (798),a Trochaic Quaternarius with Anacrusis (772), and one Alcaic verse ofAten (799).>I. w>\JII. >I. 5n.440., i. 9, 16, 17, 26, 27, 29, 31, 34, 35, 37 ;n. i, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, 13, 14,15, 17, 19, 20; in. i, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 17, 21, 23, 26, 29; IV. 4, 9, 15, 17.NOTE. Elision between the verses is much more rare than in the Sapphic strophe ;it occurs but twice :0., n. 3, 27 ;in. 29, 35. Hiatus, on the other hand, is very common.IX. Archilochian Strophe No. 1. A Dactylic Hexameter (784), anda Lesser Archilochian (788), two pairs to a tetrastich.w v-/ wV^lv^/a, iv. 7 .X. Archilochian Strophe No. 2. A Dactylic Hexameter (784), andan lambelegus (820).v-> >_/ I^Epod., 13.
"v^,"^I-~A488 VERSIFICATION*.XI. Archilochian Strophe No. 3. An Iambic Trimeter (762), followedby an Elegiambus (821).Epod., ii.XII. Archilochian Strophe No. 4. A Greater Archilochian (800),and a Trimeter Iambic Catalectic (763). Two pairs combined to forma tetrastich.0., i. 4.This verse may be considered as Logaoedic, thus (800) :A^|_vJ V/|l 1^^I~v^,I-I -A I-^I II~I II1 W ~^IIIIIIII4IXIII. Alcmanian Strophe. A Dactylic Hexameter (784), followedby a Catalectic Dactylic Tetrameter (787).0., i. 7, 28; Epod., 12.NOTE.place (787, N.).The Tetrameter may be considered acatalectic with a Spondee in the fourthXIV. Iambic Trimeter repeated (762).Epod., 17.XV. Iambic Strophe. Iambic Trimeter (762), and Dimeter (765).Epod., 1-10.
VERSIFICATION. 489XVI. Pythiambic Strophe No. 1. A Dactylic Hexameter (784), orVersus Pythius, and an Iambic Dimeter (765).Epod., 14, 15.XVII. Pythiambic Strophe No. 2.an Iambic Trimeter (760).A Dactylic Hexameter (784), andEpod., 16,XVIII. Trochaic Strophe. A Catalectic Trochaic Dimeter (772),and a Catalectic Iambic Trimeter (763). Two pairs make a tetrastich.0., ii. 18.XIX. The Ionic System is found once in HORACE ;it consists of tenlonicl 5 minore feet, variously arranged by metrists. Some regard thesystem as composed of ten Tetrameters followed by a Dimeter. Others,with more probability, divide into two Dimeters followed by two Trimeters.The scheme may be made a" maiore by Anacrusis.lOnicus a minore scheme :Miserarum(e)st neque amSrl ^ ^ ww^ ^. |dare ludum neque dulcl w^-^. -^^.mala vln6 laver(e) aut exanimarl ww^ ^w^|WW^-L||metuentes patruae vertera linguae w^.
490 VERSI827. INDEX OF HORATIAN ODES AND METRES.BOOK. ODE.I. 1
-APPENDIX.ROMAN CALENDAR.The names of the Roman months were originally adjectives. Thesubstantive mgnsis, month, may or may not be expressed : (me"nsis)lanuarius, Februarius, and so on. Before Augustus, the months Julyand August were called, not lulius and Augustus, but Qulntllis andSextilis.The Romans counted backward from three points in the month,Calends (Kalendae), Nones (N5nae), and Ides (Idus), to which the namesof the months are added as adjectives: Kalendae lanuariae, Nonae Februariae,Idus Martiae. The Calends are the first day, the Nones thefifth, the Ides the thirteenth. In March, May, July, and October theNones and Ides are two days later. Or thus :In March, July, October, May,The Ides are on the fifteenth day,The Nones the seventh ;but all besidesHave two days less for Nones and Ides.In counting backward (" come next Calends, next Nones, next Ides ")the Romans used for "the day before" prldig with the Ace.: prldieKalendas lanuarias, Dec. 31 ; prldie Nonas Ian. Jan. 4 ; prldie Idus Ian.= Jan. 12.The longer intervals are expressed by ante diem tertium, quartum,etc., before the Accusative, so that ante diem tertium Kal. Ian. means"two days before the Calends of January; " ante diem quartum, or a. d.iv., or iv. Kal. Ian., "three days before," and so on. This remarkablecombination is treated as one word, so that it can be used with theprepositions ex and in ex ante diem : iii. Nonas lunias usque ad prldieKal. Septembrgs, from June 3 to August 31 differre ;aliquid in ante diemxv. Kal. Nov., to postpone a matter to the 18th of October.LEAP YEAR.In leap year the intercalary day was counted betweena. d. vi. Kal. Mart, and a. d. vii. Kal. Mart. It was called a. d. bis sexturnKal. Mart., so that a. d. vii. Kal. Mart, corresponded to our February23, just as in the ordinary year.To turn Roman Dates intoEnglish.For Nones and Ides. I. Add one to the date of the Nones and Ides,and subtract the given number.
492 ROMAN SYSTEMS OF MEASURE AND WEIGHT.For Calends. II. Add two to the days of the preceding month, andsubtract the given number.EXAMPLES : a. d. viii. Id. Ian. (13 + 1 8)= Jan. 6 ; a. d. iv. NSn.Apr. (5 + 1 - 4)= Apr. 2; a. d. xiv. Kal. Oct. (30 + 2 - 14)= Sept. 18.Year. To obtain the year B.C., subtract the given date from 754(753 B.C. being the assumed date of the founding of Rome, anno urbisconditae). To obtain the year A.D., subtract 753.Thus : Cicero was born 648, a. u. c. = 106 B.C.Augustus died 767, a. u. c. = 14 A.D.NOTE. Before the reform of the Calendar by Julius Caesar in B.C. 46, the yearconsisted of 355 days, divided into twelve months, of which March, May, Quintllis(July), and October had 31 days, February 28, the remainder 29. To rectify theCalendar, every second year, at the discretion of the Pontifices, a month of varyinglength, called mSnsis intercalaris, was inserted after the 23d of February.ROMAN SYSTEMS OF MEASUREMENT.LONG
ROMAN MONEY AND NAMES. 493NOTES. 1. The multiples of the fincia were sSscuncia (!}), sextans (2), quadrans(3), trigns (4), quincunx (5), sgmis (6), septunx (7), bes (8), dodrSns (9), dextans(10), deunx (11).2. The libra was also called as (see below), which latter is taken as the unit in allmeasures, and the foregoing divisions applied to it. Hence, by substituting as foriugerum. we have deunx as JJ of a iugerum, dextans as { j,ROMAN MONEY.The unit was originally the as (which was about a pound of copper),with its fractional divisions. This gradually depreciated, until, afterthe second Punic war, the unit had become a sSstertius, which wasnominally 2assSs.2 1 assSa = i sestertius (about 25 denarii = i aureus (minimus).etc.4 cts.). looo sSsterti!= i sestertium2 sestertii = i qulnarius. ($42.94 to Augustus's time).2 quinaril= i denarius.NOTE. SSstertium (which may be a fossilised Gen. PL = sSstertiorum) wasmodified by distributives (rarely by cardinals), thus : blna sSstertia, 2000 sesterces.But in multiples of a million (deciSns centena mllia ?'.sestertium,., sestertiSrum),centSna mllia was regularly omitted, and sestertium declined as a neutersingular. HS stands as well for sestertius as sestertium ;and the meaning is regulatedby the form of the numeral ;thus HS vlgintl (XX) 20 s6stertil ;HS vicSna(XX) = 20 sSstertia, i.e.,20,000 sestertii.ROMAN NAMES.The Roman usually had three names a ; nomen, indicating the g6ns,a cognomen, indicating the familia in the g6ns, and the praenomen, indicatingthe individual in the familia.The nomina all end in ius. The cognomina have various forms, inaccordance with their derivation. For example:Q. Mucius Scaevola(from scaevos, left hand).The praenomina are as follows, with their abbreviations:Aulus,
494 INDEX OF VERBS.INDEX OF VERBS.[The References are to the Sections.]ag-gredior, -gredl, -gressus, 165.Ab-do, ere, -did!, -ditum, 151, i.af-fllgo, ere, -flixi, -flictum, 147, 2. at-tendo, ere, -tendl, -tentuin, 155.ab-igo (AGO), ere, -egl, -Sctum, a-gnosco, ere, a-gnovl, a-gnitum160, i.(agnoturus), 140.ab-icio (IACIO), ere, -iecl, -iectum, ago, ere, egl, actum, 160, i.160, 3.jiio, 175, i.ab-lu5, ere, -lul, -lutum, 162. albeo, 5re, to be tchite.ab-nuo, ere, -nul (-nuiturus), 162. algeo, ere, alsi, 147, i.ab-oleo, ere, evi, itum, 137, b.lex!ab-olesco, -ere, -olevi, -olitum, 140.al-licio, ere,/ ,.'--. -lectum, i50, i.ab-ripio (RAPIO), -ere, -ripul, -repturn,al-luo, ere, -lul, -lutum, 162.146.alo, ere, alul, al(i)tum, 142, 3.abs-condo (DO), ere, -di (-didi), amb-igo (AGO), ere, 172, i.ditum, 151, i.amb-io (EO), Ire, Ivi (il), Itum, 169,ab-sisto, -ere, -stiti, 154, i.2, R. I.ab-sum, -esse, ab-ful, a-ful, 117.ac-eend
INDEX OF VERBS. 495co-gnosco, ere, -gnovi, -gnitum,at-texo, ere, -texul, -textum, 152,3.coepi, coepisse, 175, 5, a. 160, 3.at-tineo (TENEO), ere, ul, -tentura, 140.135, I. a.co-go (AGO), ere, co-egi, co-actum,at-tingo (TANGO), ere, attigl, attactura,160, i.155.col-lido (LAEDO), ere, -Us!, llsum,at-tollo, ere, to raise up.audeo, ere, ausus sum, 167.147, 2.col-ligo (LEGO), ere, -l5gi, -lectuni,audio, Ire, ivi, itum. See 127.160, i.au-fero, -ferre, abstull, abhTtum, col-luceo, Ere, -luxl, 157, i.171.augeo, ere, auxi, auctum, 147, i.colo, ere, colul, cultum, 142, 3.com-buro, ere, -ussi, -ustum,147,2.ave, 175, 4.com-edo, ere, -5di, -esum (estum),172.Balbutio, ire, to stutter.comitatus, 167, N. 1.batuo, ere, ul, 162.comminlscor, I, commentus sum,bibo, ere, bib!, (bibitum), 154, 2. 165.com-moveo, ere, -movl, -motum,Cado, ere, cecidi, casum, 153.caecutio, ire, to be blind.159.co-mo (EMO), ere, compsi, comptum,caedo, ere, cecidi, caesum, 153.147, 2.calefacio, ere, -feel, -factum, 160, com-parco,ere,-parsi,-parsum,153.3; 173, N. 2.com-pello, ere, com-pull, -pulsum,calesco, ere, calui, to get warm. 155.calleo, ere, ul, to be skilled.com-perio (PARIO), ire, corn-perl,calveo, ere, to be bald.com-per-tum, 161, 166.candeo, ere, ul, to shine.compBsco, ere, ul, 145.caneo, ere, to be gray.com-pingo, ere, -p5gi, -pactum,cano, ere, cecini, eantum, 153.160, 2.capesso, ere, Ivi, itum, 137, c. com-plector, I, corn-plexus, 165.capio, ere, cepi, captum, 126; com-pleo, ere, 5vi, 6tum, 147.160,3-com-primo (PBEMO), ere, -press!,carpo, ere, carpsi, carptum, 147, 2. -pressum, 147, 2.caveo, ere, cavl, cautum, 159.cedo, 175, 6.cedo, ere, cessi, cessum, 147, 2.cenatus, 167, N. 1.com-pungo, ere, -punxi, -punctum,155.con-cido (CADO), ere, -cidl, 153, a.con-cido (CAEDO), ere, -cidl, -cisum,- cSnsum, ' 10 r153,censeo, ere, m, 135, 1. a.(cgnsltu 8)>con-cino (CANO), ere, -cinui, 142, 3.cerno, ere, crevi, (cretum), 139. concitus (CIEO), 137, b.con-cludo (CLAUDO), ere, -clusi,-clusum, 147, 2.cingo, ere. cinxl, cinctum, 149, b. con-cumbo, ere, -cubul, -cubitum,eircum-do, -dare, -dedi, -datum, 144.151, i.con-cuplsco, ere, -cupivi, cupltum,circum-sisto, ere, stetl, 154, i.140.circum-sto, stare, stetl, 151, 2. con-cutio (QUATIO), ere, -cussl, -cussum,claudo, ere, claxisi, clausum, 147, 2.clepo, ere, 9 fP*. \ cleptum, 147, 2.co-alesco, ere, -aim, (-alitum), 140,145.147, 2.con-do, ere, -didl, -ditum, 151, i.con-dormisco, -ere, -Ivi, itum, 140.con-fercio (FARCIO), ire (fersi), fertum,150, 2.co-arguo, ere, ul, 162.con-fero, -ferre, -tull, collatum,co-emo, ere, -5ml, -em(p)tum, 171.160, i.con-ficio (FACio),ere, -fec!,-fectum,
496 INDEX OF VERBS.cudo, ere, cudl, cusum, 160, i.con-fiteor (FATEOR), eri, -fessus,cubo, are, cubui, cubitum, 142, 2. dis-sideo (SEUEO), ere, -sedi, 159.164.con-fligo, ere, -flixl, -fllctura,cupio, ere, cuplvi, cupltum, 141.curro, ere, cucurri, cursum, 155.147, 2.con-fringo (FRANGO), ere, -fregi, De-eerno, ere, -cr5vi, -cretum, 139.-fractum, 160, 2.con-gruo, ere, congrui, 162.de-cerpo (CARPO), ere, si, turn, 147,2.con-icio (IACIO), ere, -iecl, -iectum, de-do, dedere, dedidl, deditum,160. 3.151, i.coniiiratus, 167, N. 1.de-fendo, ere, -fendi, -fensum, 160,co-nlveo, Sre,g^ 147, 2.,defetiscor, I, to be worn out.con-quiro (QUAERO), ere, -quisivl, de-g5 (AGO), ere, 160, I.-quisitum, 137, c.deleo. See Paradigm, 123, 124.con-sero, ere, -serul, -sertum, de-libuo, uere, ui, titum, 162.152, 3.de-ligo, ere, -legl, -Iectum, 160,con-sero, ere, -sBvI, -situm, 138. de-mo i.(EMO), ere, dempsi, demptum,con-sideratus, 167, N. 1.147, 2.con-sido, ere, consfidi, -sessum, depello, ere, depuli, depulsum, 155.160, i.de-primo (PREMO), ere, -pressl,con-sisto, ere, -stitl, -stitum, 154, i.con-spergo, ere, -spersl, -spersum,pressum, 147, 2.depsS, ere, depsui, depstum, 142, 3.147, 2.de-scendo (SCANDO), ere, -scendi,con-spicio, ere, -spexi, -spectum, -scensum, 160, 2.150, i.de-sero, ere, -serul, -sertum, 142, 3.con-stituo (STATUO), ere, ui, -stitutum,162.con-sto, -stare, -stitl, (constaturus),151, 2.cle-silio (SALIO), tr*de-sino, ere, desitum, 139.'con-suesc5, ere, -suevl, suBtum, de-sipio (SAPIO), -ere, 141.140; 175, 5.d5-sisto, ere, -stitl, -stitum, 154, i.cSnsulO, ere, consulul, -sultum, de-spicio, ere, -spexi, -spectum,142, 3.150, i.con-temno, ere, -tem(p)sl, -tem(p)- de-su5sco, -ere, -evi, -5tum, 140.tum, 149, c.d5-sum, -esse, -fui, 117.con-tendo, ere, -tendl, -tentum, de-tendo, ere, -tendl, -tentum, 155.155.de-tineo (TENEO), 5re, -ui, -tentum,con-texo, ere,-texul,-textum,152,3.con-tineo (TENEO), ere, in, -tentum,135,i. a.de-vertor, -I, 167.135, i. a.dicO, ere, dixi, dictum, 147, 2.con-ting5 (TANGO), ere, contigi, dif-fero, -ferre, distull, dilatum,contactum, 155.171.convaleseO, ere, -valul, -valitum, dl-gnosco (NOSCO), ere, -gnovl, 140.145.di-ligo, ere, -lexl, -Iectum, 147, 2.coquo, ere, coxi, coctum, 147, 2, di-mico, are, avl, atum, 142, 2.168, i.dl-rigo, ere, -rexi, -rectum, 147, 2.cor-ripio (RAPIO), ere, -ripul, -repturn,dir-imo (EMO), ere, -Bml, -emptum,146.160, i.cor-ruo, ere, corrul, 162.disco, ere, didicT, 156.crebresco, ere, crebrul, to get frequent.dis-crep5, are, -crepui (Svl), 142, 2.dis-cumbo. ere, -cubui, -cubitum,cre-do, ere, -did!, -ditum, 151, i. 144.crepo, are, ere pui.crepi turn, 142, 2. dis-pescO, ere, -p5scul, to divide,cresco, ere, crevi, cretum, 140.145.
INDEX OF VERBS. 497di-stinguo, ere, -stinxi, -stinctum,149, b.dl-stS, -stare, 151, 2.ditesco, ere, to grow rich.divido, ere, dlvisi, divisum, 147, 2.do, dare, dedl, datum, 151, i.doceo, ere, docui, doctum, 135, i, a.dorno, are, ui, itum, 143, 2.diico, ere, duxl, ductum, 147, 2dulcEsco, ere, to grow sweet.duresco, ere, durul, to grow hard.Ed5, ere, edl, esum, 160, i, 172.e-do (DO), edere, 5didi, editum,151, i.e-dormisco, -ere, -Ivi, -Itum, 140.ef-fero, -ferre, extull, elatum, 171.egeo, ere, egul, to want.e-licio, ere, -licul, -licitum, 150, i.Snectum,e-ligO (LEGO), ere, -l6gi, -lectum,160, i.e-mico, are, ui (atiirus), 142, 2.emineo, ere, ui, to stand out.emo, ere, emi, emptum, 160, i.emungo, ere, emunxl, emuncturn,149, b.e-nec5, are.tillGCUl',_,.(enecavl),142, 2.e5, ire, Ivi, itum, 169, 2.e-vado, ere, 5vasi, evSsum, 147, 2.e-vSneseo, ere, evSnui, 145.ex-ardesco, ere, exarsi, exSrsum,147, i.ex-cello, ere, ui (excelsus), 144.excitus, 137.ex-cliido (CLAUDO), ere, -si, -sum,147, 2.ex-currO, ere, ex(cu)currl, -cursum,155.ex-imo, ere, emi, -emptum, 160, i.ex-ol5sco, ere, -olevi, -oletum, 140.ex-pello, ere, -pull, -pulsum, 155.expergiscor, I, experrectus sum,165.ex-perior, in, -pertus sum, 166.ex-pleO, ere, evi, etum, 124, 137,b.ex-plico, are, ui (avi), itum (atum),142.ex-plodo (PLAUDO), ere, -si, -sum,147, 2.exsecratus, 167, N. 2.ex-stinguo, ere, -stinxi, -stinctum,149, b. 33ex-sistf), ere, -stitl, -stitum, 154, i,ex-sto, are (exstaturus), 151, 2.ex-tendo, ere, di, -sum (-turn), 155.ex-tollo, ere, 155.ex-uo, ere, -ui, -utum, 162.Facesso, ere, Ivi (-1),itum, 137, cfaciO, ere, feel, factum, 160, 3.fallo, ere, fefelli, falsum, 155.farcio, Ire, farsl, fartum, 150, 2.fan, 175, 3.fateor, Bri, fassus sum, 164.fatlsco, ere, to fall apart.fatlscor, I (fessus, adj.).faveo, ere, favi, fautum, 159.ferio, ire, to strike.fero, ferre, tuli, latum, 171.ferveo, ere, fervl (ferbui), 159.fldO, ere, fisus sum, 167!flgO, ere, fixi, fixum, 147, 2.flndo, ere, fidl, fissum, 160, 3.fingo, ere, finxi, fictum, 149, a.flo, fieri, factus sum, 173.flecto, ere, flexi, flexum, 148.fleo, ere, evi, etum, 137, b.fllgO, ere, fllxi, flictum, 147, 2.floreo, ere, ui, to bloom.fluO, ere, fluxl (fluxus, adj.), 147,2.fodio, ere, fodi, fossum, 160, 3.forem, 116.foveo, ere, fovi, fotum, 159.frango, ere, fregl, fractum, 160, 2.fremo, ere, ui, 142, 3.frendo (eo), ere (ui), fresum, fressum, 144.frico, are, ui, frictum (atum), 1422.frigeo, Ere (frixi), 147, i.frigo, ere, frixi, frictum, 147, 2.frondeo, ere, ui, to be leafy.fruor, I, fructus (fruitus) sum, 165.fugio, ere, fugl, fugitum, 160, 3.fulcio, Ire, fulsi, fultum, 150, 2.fulgeo, ere, fulsi, 147, i.fundo, ere, fudi, fusum, 160, 2.fungor, I, functus sum, 165.(furo, def.), furere, to rave.Gannio, Ire, to yelp.gaudeo, ere, gavisus sum, 167.gemo, ere, ui, 142, 3.gero, ere, gessi, gestum, 147, 2.glgno, ere, genul, genitum, 143.glisco, ere, to sicell.gradior, I, gressus sum, 165,
498 IXDEX OF VERBS.inter-ficio, ere, -feci, -fectum, 160,Haereo, 5re, haesi, (haesura), 147,150, i. inansuBsco, -ere, -Bvi, -etum, 140,i.3; 173, N. 2.haurio, ire, hausi, haustum (hausurus,in-sto, are,-stitl (instaturus),151,2.hausturus), 150, 2.have, 175, 4.In-sum, -esse, -ful, 117.intel-lego, ere, -lexi, -lectum, 147, 2.hisco, ere, to yawn.inter-imo (EMO), ere, -emi, -einptum,horreo, ere, ui, to stand on end160, i.hortor, Sri, atus sum, 128.inter-pungo, ere, -punxl, -puncturn,155.laceS, ere, iacui, to lie.iacio, ere, i6ei, iactum, 160, 3.Ico, ere, ici, ictum, 160, i.inter-sto, are, -stetl, 151, 2.inter-sum, -esse, -ful, 117.inveterasco, ere, -5vi, 140.I-gnosco, ere, -gnovi, -gnotum, in-vado, ere, invasi, -vasum,147, 2.140.IrSscor, I, iratus sum, to get angry.il-lici5, ere, -lexi, -lectum, 150, i. iubeo, ere, iussi, iiissum, 147, i.il-lido (LAEDO), ere, -llsl, -Hsum, iungS, ere, iunxl, iunctum, 149, b.147, 2.irabuS, ere, ui, utum, 162.iurStus, 167, K. 1.iuv5, Sre, iuvl, iutum (iuvatarus),imitatus, 167, N. 2.158.immineo, ere, to overhang.im-pingo (PANGO), ere, pegi, pSctum,Labor, I, lapsus sum, 165.160, 2.lacesso, ere, lacessivi, -itum, 137, c .in-calesco, ere, -calm, 145.laciO, 150.in-cendo, ere, -cendl, -censum, laedo, ere, laesi, laesum, 147, 2.160, 2.lambs, ere, I, 160, 2.incesso, ere, Ivi (T), 137, c.langueo, ere, I, to be languid.in-cido (CADO), ere, -cidl, -casum, largior, iri, itus sum, 166.152.lateS, ere, ui, to lie hid.in-cido (CAEDO), ere, -cidl, cisum, lavo, are (ere), lavi, lautum, 10-153.in-cipio (CAPIO), ere, -cepl, -ceptum,tum, lavatum, 158.lego, ere, legi, lectum, 160, i.160, 3.libet, libere, libuit (libitum est), itin-crepo, are, ui, itum, 142, 2.pleases.in-cumbo, ere, -cubul, -cubitum, liceor, 5ri, itus sum, 164.144.licet, licere, licuit (licitum est), iiin-cutiO (QUATIO), ere, -cussi, -cussum,147, 2.ind-igeo (EGEO), ere, ui, to want.ind-iplscor, I, indeptus sum, 165.in-do, ere, -didi, -uitum, 151, i.is permitted.lingo, ere, linxi, linctum, 149, b.lino, ere, lev! (llvi), litum, 139.linquo, ere, HquI, 160, 2.liqueo, 5re, licui, to be clear.indulgeo, ere, indulsi (indultum), liveo, ere, to be livid.147, i.loquor, I, locutus sum, 128, 2; 165.in-duo, ere, -dm, -dutum, 162. luceo, ere, luxi, 147, i.ineptio, Ire, to be silly.ludo, ere, lusi, lusum, 147, 2.in-fllgo, ere, -fllxi, -fllctum, 147, 2. lugeo, ere, luxi, 147, i.ingemisco, ere, ingemui, 145.Iutum, to wash,iingruo, ere, ui. See congruo, 162. luo.ere, lui, -< luitum, to atone for,in-notesco, ere, notui, 145.(162.in-olesco, ere, -ol5vl, 140.inquam, 175, 2.Maereo, ere, to grieve.In-sideo (SEDEO), ere, -sedi, -sessum,malo, mSlle, malui, 142, 3; 174.159.mando, ere, mandl, mansum,In-sisto, ere, -stitl, 154, i.160, 2.in-spicio, ere, -spexl, -spectum. maneo, ere, mans!, mansum, 147, i.
INDEX OF VERBS. 499raedeor, Sri, to heal.meminl, 175, 5, b.mentior, irl, Itus, 128, 2; 1G6.mereor, 5ri, meritus sum, 164.mergo, ere, mersi, raersum, 147, 2.metier, In, mensus sum, 166.meto, ere, messui (rare), messuin,142,3-metuo, ere, ui, 162.mico, are, ul, 142, 2.mingo, ere, miiixi, mictiim, 149, a.minuo, ere, minui, minutum, 162.misceo, ere, ul, mixtum (mistum).misereor, eri, miseritus (misertus)sum, 164.mitto, ere, misi, missum, 147, z.molo, ere, molui, molitum, 142, 3.moneo, 6re, ul, itum, 131.mordeo, 6re, momordi, morsum,152.morior, morl, mortuus sum (moriturus),165.moveo, ere, movi, motum, 159.mulceo, ere, mulsi, mulsum, 147,I.mulgeo, 5re, mulsi, mulsum(ctum), 157, i.mungo, ere, munxi, munctum,160.Nanclscor, I, nactus(nanctus),165.nascor, i,natus sum (nasciturus),165.neco, are, avl, atum, 142, 2.necto, ere, nexl (nexul), nexum,148.neg-lego, ere, -lexi, -lectum,147,2.necopinatus, 167, N. 2.neo, nere, nevi, netum, 137, b.nequeo, ire, 170.ningo, ere, ninxi, 149, b.niteo, ere, ul, to shine.mtor, I, mxus (nisus) sum, 165.nOlo, nolle, nolul, 142, 3 ;174.noceo, ere, ul (nociturus), to behurtful.nosco, ere, novi, notum, 140; 175,S,d.nOtesco, ere, notui, 145.ntibo, ere, nupsi, nuptum, 147, 2.Ob-do, ere, -didl, -ditum, 151, i.ob-dormisco, ere, -dormivi, -dormitum,140.obliviscor, I, oblitus sum, 165.ob-sideo (SEDEO), 3re, -sedl, -sessum,159.ob-sisto, ere, -stiti, -stitum, 154, i.obs-olesco, ere, -olevl, -oletum,140.ob-sto, stare, stiti (obstaturus),151, 2.obtineo (TENEO), ere, -tinul, -tenturn,135, i, a.oc-cido (CADO), ere, -cidi, -casum,153.oc-cido (CAEDO), ere, -eidl, -clsum,153.oc-cino (CANO), ere, -cinul, 142, 3;153.oc-cipio (CAPIO), ere, -cepl, -ceptum,160, 3.occulo, ere, occului, oceultum,142, 3.5di, def., 175, 5, a.of-fendo, ere,-fendi,-f6nsum,160, 2.of-fero, -ferre, obtuli, oblatum,171.oleo, ere, ul, to smell.operio, ire, operui, opertum, 142, 4.oplnatus, 167, N. 2.opperior, in, oppertus (or Itus),166.Crdior, irl, orsus sum, 166.orior, irl, ortus sum (oriturus), 166.os-tendo, ere, -tendi, -tensum(-tentus), 155.Paciscor, I, pactus sum, 165, 167,N. 2.palleo, -ere, -ul, to be pale.pando, ere, pandl, passum (pansum),160, 2.Danj?o ere \ Pe P^! '155 'iango, ere -^ panxi> UQ ^parco, ere, peperci (parsi), parsurus,153.pario, ere, peperl, partum (pariturus),157.partior, irl, itus, 166.pasco, ere, pavi, pastum, 140.pate-facio, ere, -fed, -factum, 173,N. 2.pateo, Ere, ul, to be open.patior, I, passus sum, 165.paveo, ere, pavi, 159.pecto, ere, pexi, pexum, 148.-lectum,pel-licio, -licere, ,", . i150, i.
500 INDEX OF VERBS.pello, ere, pepull, pulsura, 155.pendeo, ere, pependi, 152.pendd, ere, pependi, pensum, 155.per-cello, ere, perculi, perculsum,144.percEnseo (CENSEO), 6re, -censul,-censum, 135, i, a.percitus (CIEO), 137.per-do, ere, -didl, -ditum, 169, 2,K. i; 151, i.per-eo, Ire, peril, itum, 169, 2, R. i.per-ficio, ere, -fEd, -fectum, 160, 3.per-fringo, ere, -fregl, -fractum,160, 2.pergo (REGO), ere, perrBxI, perrectum,147, 2.per-petior (PATIOR), I, perpessussum, 165.per-spicio, ere, -spexl, -spectum,150, i.per-sto, -stare, -stiti, 151, 2.per-tineo (TENEO), Ere, ul, 135, i, a.pessum-do, -dare, -dedl, -datum,151, i.peto, ere, ivi (il), Itum, 137, c.piget, pigere, piguit, pigitum est,it irks.pingo, ere, pinxi, pictum, 149, a.plnso, ere, ul (I), plnsitum (pistum,pinsum), 142, 3.plango, ere, planxl, planctum,149, b.plaudo.ere, plausi, plausum,147, 2.plecto, ere, (plexl), plexum, 148.plector, I, to be punished.-pleo, 137, b.plico, are, ul (avi), itum (atum),142, 2.polleo, ere, to be.potent.polliceor. erl, itus sum, 164.pono, ere, posui, positum, 139.posco, ere, poposcl, 156.pos-sideo (SEDEO), ere, -sedl, -sessum,159.pos-sum, posse, potui, 119.potior, Iri, Itus sum, 166.poto, fire, avi, poturn, potatum,136, 4, c.potus, 167, N. 1.prae-cello, ere, -cellul, 144.p'rae-cino. ere, -cinul, 142, 3.prae-curro, ere, -cucurri, -cursurn,155.prae-sideo (SEDEO). ere, -s5di, 159prae-sum, -esse, -ful, 117.prae-sto, -stare, -stiti (-staturus),151, 2.prandeo, Ere, prandl, pr5nsum,159.prehendo, ere, prehendi, prehensum,160, 2.premo, ere, pressi, pressum, 147, 2.prod-igo (AGO), ere, -egl, 160, i.pro-do, ere, -didl, -ditum, 151, i.pro-flclscor, I, profeetus sum, 165.pro-fiteor (FATEOR), erl, -fessussum, 164.promo (EMO), ere, prompsi, promptum,147, 2.pro-sum, prodesse, profui, 118.pro-tendo (TENDO), ere, -tend!,-tentum, tensum, 155.psallo, ere, I, 160, 2.pudet, Ere, puduit, puditum est,it shames.puerasco, ere, to become a boy.pungo, ere, pupugi, punctum, 155.punior, In, Itus sum, 166.Quaero, ere, quaesivl, quaesltum,137, c.quaeso, 175, 6.quatio, ere, (quassi), quassum,147, 2.queo, quire, 170.queror, querl, questus sum, 167.quiesco, ere, quievl, quietum, 140.Rado, ere, rasl, rasum, 147, 2.rapio, ere, rapui, raptum, 146.raucio, Ire, rausl, rausum, 150, 2.re-cEuse5 (CEXSEO), Ere, -censul,-censum (recensltum), 135, i, a.re-cido, ere, reccidi, recasura, 153.recrudesco, ere, -crudui, to getraw again.re-cumbo, ere, -cubui, 144.red-arguo, ere, -argul, 162.red-do, ere, -didl, -ditum, 151, i.red-igo (AGO), ere, -Egl, -actum,160, i.red-imo, -Ere, 160, i.re-fello (FALLO), ere, refelll, 155.re-fero, -ferre, -tull, -latum, 171.rego, ere, rexl, rectum, 147, 2.re-linquo, ere, -HquI, -lictum,160, 2.reminlscor, I, to recollect.
INDEX OF VEKBS. 501renideo, 5re, to glitter.reor, rerl, ratus sum, 164.re-pells, ere, reppull, pulsum, 155.re- peris, ire, repperl, repertum,157, 161.repo, ere, r5psl, reptum, 147, 2.re-siplsco, ere, -siplvi (sipui), 140.re-sistS, ere, -stiti, -stitum, 154, i.re-spondeS, ere, -spondi, -sponsum,152.re-sto, stare, -stiti, 151, 2.re-stinguo, ere, -stinxl, -stinctum,149, b.re-tineS (TENEO), ere, ul, -tentum,135, i, a.re-vertor, I, reverti, reversum,160, i ;167.re-vivIscS, ere, vixi, victum, torevive.sepelio, Ire, Ivi, sepultum, 137, a.sequor, I, secutus sum, 165.sero, ere, 142, 3.sero, ere, sevi, satum, 138.serpo, ere, serpsi, serptum, 147, 2.sido, ere, sidi, 160, i.sileo. ere, ul, to be silent.sine, ere, sivi, situm, 139.sisto, ere, (stiti), statum, 154, i.sitio, ire, ivi, to thirst.soleo, ere, solitus sum, 167.solve, ere, solvl, solutum, 160, i.sentio, ire, sensi, sensum, 150, 2. 160, 3.sorbeo, ere (sorp-sl), sorbui, 142, i.sordeo, ere, ul, to be dirty.sortior, m, sortltus sum, 166.spargo, ere, sparsi, sparsum, 147,2.rldeo, ere, risi, risum, 147, i. sperno, ere, sprevl, spretum, 139.rigeo, ere, ul, to be stiff.-spicio, 150, i.rodo, ere, rSsI, rosum, 147, 2. splendeo, 5re, ul, to shine.rubeS, 6re, ui, to be red.spondeo, ere, spopondl, sponsum,rudo, ere, rudlvi, I turn, 137, c.152.rumpo, ere, rupl, ruptum, 160, 2. spuo, ere, spui, sputum, 162.ruo, ere, rui, rutum (ruiturus), 162. squaleo, ere, to be rough, foul.statuo, ere, statul, statutum, 162.SaepiS, Ire, saepsi, saeptum, 150, 2. sterno, ere, stravl, stratum, 139.sternuo, ere, sternul, 162.salis,Ite/|J^ saltum, 142, 4.sterto, ere, stertui, 142, 3.sallo, ere, (salli), salsum, 160, 2. -stinguo, ere, 149, b.salve, def., 175, 4.sto, stare, stetl, statum, 151, 2.strepo, ere, strepul, strepitum,142, 3-sapio, ere (saplvi), sapui, 141. strldeo, Ere (ere), strkll, 159.sarcio, ire, sarsi, sartum, 150, 2. stringo, ere, strinxl, strictum,satis-do, -dare, -dedi, -datum ,151 , i .149, a.scabo, ere, scabi, to scratch, 160, i. struS, ere, struxl, structum, 147, 2.scalpo, ere, scalpsl, scalptum, studeS, ere, ul, to be zealous.147, 2.scando, ere, scandi, scSnsum,stupeS, ere, ul, to be astounded.suadeS, ere, su3sl, suasum, 147, i.160, 2.sub-dS, ere, -didl, -ditum, 151, i.scateo, ere, to gush forth.sub-igS (AGO), ere, -egl, -actum,scindo, ere, scidi, scissum, 160, 3. 160, i.sclsco, ere, scivi, scitum, 140.scrlbo, ere, scrips!, scrlptum, 147,suc-cedS (CEDO),sum, 147.ere, -cessl, -ces-2.suc-cendo, ere, -cendi, -censum,sculpo, ere, sculpsl, sculptum, 160, 2.147, 2.suc-censeo, ere, ul, -censum, 135,seco, are, secul, U2 i,2 '>ni, suc-currS, ere, -currl,-cursum,155.sedeo, 5re, s5dl, sessum, 159. suesco, ere, suevl, suetum, 140.s5ligo (LEGO), ere, -l6gi, -l5ctum. suf-ferS, -ferre, sus-tinul, 171, N. 2.160, 1.suf-ficis (FACIO), ere, -feel, -fectum,
5O2INDEX OF VERBS.tueor, eri ^JJ^s) tutatussum, 164.suf-fodio, ere, -fodi, -fossum,160, 3.triido, ere, trusi, trusum, 147, 2. voveo, ere, vovi, votum, 159.sug-gero, ere, -gessi, -gestum, 147, tumeo, 6re, ui, to swell.2.tundo, ere, tutudi, tunsum, tusum,sugo, ere, suxi, suctum, 147, 2.155.sum, esse, ful, 116.turgeo, ere, tursl, 147,sumo (EMO), ere, sumpsl, sumpturn,147, 2.Ulclscor, I, ultus sum, 165.suo, ere, sui, sutum, 162.ungo, ere, unxl, unctum 149, b.superbio, ire, to be haughty.urgeo, ere, ursi, 147, i.super-sto, -stare, -steti, 151, 2.super-sum, -esse, -fui, 117.tiro, ere, tissi, tistum, 147, 2.utor, i, tisus sum, 165.sup-pono, ere, -posul, -positum,139, A.Vado, ere, 147, 2.surgo (REGO), ere, surrexi, surrEctum,vale, 175, 4.147, 2.veho, ere, vexi, vectum, 147,2 ;165.surripio, ere, ui (surpui), -reptum, vello, ere, veil! (vulsi), vulsum,146.160, 2.ven-do, ere, -didi, -ditum, 151, i ;Taedet, pertaesum est, it tires.tango, ere, tetigl, tactum, 155.169, 2, R. i.ven-eo, ire, ivi (ii), 169, 2,. E. i .?tego, ere, t5xl, t5ctum, 147, 2. venio, ire, veni, ventum, 161.temno, ere, 149, c.v5num-do, -dare, -dedl, -datum,tendo, ere, tetendi, tensum (-turn), 151, i.155.teneo, ere, tenui, (tentum),135, i, a.vereor, eri, veritus sum, 164.verro, ere, verri, versum, 160, i.tergeo, ere, tersl, tersum, 147, i. verto, ere, verti, versum, 160, i.tero, ere, trivi, tritum, 137, c. vescor, I, 165.texo, ere, texul, textum, 143, 3.timeo, ere, ui, to fear.ting(u)o, ere, tinxl, tinctum,149,Z.vesperasco, ere, avi, 140.veto, are, vetui, vetitum, 142, 2.video, ere, vldi, visum, 159.tollo, ere (sustuli, sublatum), 155. vieo, ere, etum, to plait. Seetondeo, ere, totondl, tonsum, 152.tono, are, ui, 142, 2.torpeo, ere, ui, to be torpid.torqueo, ere, torsi, tortum, 147, i.torreo, ere, torrui, tostum, 135,i,a.tra-do, ere, -didi, -ditum, 151, i.traho, ere, traxi, tractum, 147, 2.137, b.vigeo, ere, ui, to flourish.vincio, ire, vinxi, vinctum, 150, 2.vinco, ere, vicl, victum, 160, 2.viso, ere, visi, 160, i.vivo, ere, vixi, victum, 147, 2.volo, velle, volui, 142, 3; 174.tremo, ere, ui, to tremble.volvo, ere, volvi, volutum, 160, i.tribuo, ere, ui, tributum, 162. vomo, ere, vomul, vomitum, 142, 3.
GENERAL INDEX.ABBREVIATIONS. Abl., ablative; Abs., absolute; Ace., accusative: act., active; adj.,adjective; adv., adverb; attrib., attributive, attribution ; app.,appositive, apposition;Comp., comparison, comparative; coustr., construction; cop., copula, copulative;cpd., compound, compounded; Dat., dative; decl., declension; def., definite; dem.,demonstrative; fern., feminine; Fut., future; Fut. Pf., future perfect; Gen., genitive;Ger., gerund, gerundive; Impf., imperfect; Imp v., imperative; indef., indefinite;Indie., indicative; Inf., infinitive; interrog., interrogative; Loc., locative;masc., masculine; neg., negative; neut., neuter; Nona., nominative; obj., object;Part., partitive; part., participle; pass., passive; PL, plural; poss., possessive, possession;pred., predicate; prep., preposition; pron., pronoun ; rel., relative; Sg.,singular; subj,, subject ; Subjv., subjunctive ; subst., substantive ; Sup., supine ; vb.,verb ; Voc., vocative.83; Comp. of part., 89,is.l; forms advs.,e f,A Sound of, 3; weakening of, 8,1; lengthparts, in I and e, 82; adjs. iu Interrog., 469.N.; of part., 665.N.2.of final, 707,1. See ab.91,2.ab (a) In composition, 9,4; varies witb a With act. vb. cannot be subj. of pass.,as prep., 9,4; syntax of as prep., 417,1;position of, 413,u.l Dat. after vbs. cpd.:with, 347.R.5; gives Point of Reference,217, R.I; with vbs. involving comparison,296,N.l; prepositional uses instead, ib.N.3; with pro of Disproportion, 298; for335,N. with Abl. takes place of second;inner obj., 333,2, N. 4; with abesse andAce., 339.N.2: with Abl. of Separation, distare, 335.K.2; of Point of Reference,390: with Abl. of Point of View, i6.2,N.6; ib- N. ; with Ace. after vbs. of Giving andwith Towns, 391.B.1; with Abl. of Origin, Putting, 348; with preps, instead of395; with Abl. of Respect, 397, N.I; with Part. Gen., 372.R.2. Scheme of Syntax,Abl. of Agent, 401; to express Cause, 384; of Place where, 385: of Towns, 386;408.N.3; with Abl. Ger., 433.of Place whence, 390; with vbs. of Abstaining,abdicate with se and Abl., 390,N.3.390,2; with Adjs., 390,3; ofabesse with Ace. of Extent, or a and Towns, 391; preps, with Towns, ib. B.I;Abl., 335,11.2: with Dat., 349.R.4; with of Attendance, 392; of Time, 393; preps.,Abl. of Measure, 403.N.1; of Place, 390, 394; of Origin, 395; preps., ib. N.2; ofN.3; tantum abest ut, nt, 552.B.1. Material, 396; of Respect, 397; withabbinc with Ace., 336.B.3.words of Eminence, ib. N.2; with Comp.,abb.orr.5re with Abl. of Place, 390, N.3. 398, 296, and RR.1,2; of Manner, 399;ability adjs. of, with Inf., 423,N.l,c.of Quality, 400, and R.I; with cum ofablre with Abl. of Place, 390.N.3.unnatural productions, ib. N.2 ;of Instrument,ABLATIVE defined, 23,6; 1st decl. Sg. in401; of Agent, 314, and B.2,5d.Pl. ineis,29,N.4 PI. in abus,29,R.4 ; ;2d decl. Sg. in 5d, 33.N.3; PI. in gis, 33,N.5; 3d decl. Sg. in ei(J ( e, 37,4; mute401 and RR.1,2; with special vbs., 401,NN.1-7; of Standard, 402; of Difference,403; of Price, 404; with vbs. of Plentystems with 1, 64; sporadic cases in I ( 54, and Want, 405; with opus and usus,N.2 ;vowel stems in I, 57.R.2 ; adjs. 406; with utor, fruor, etc., 407; of Cause,used as substs. in J, 57,R.2,n.; 4th 408 and NN.2-6; of Ger., 431; of Ger.decl. in ubus, 61,R.l; adjs. in d, 75.N.3; with preps., 433; of Sup., 436-PI. in Is (for Us) and abus, 75.N.6; adjs. ABLATIVE ABSOLUTE concord with twoof three endings in e, 79.R.1: adjs. andandsubjs., 285, N.3; syntax of, 409,10; with
504 GENEKAL INDEXwith t'6.N.4; with verbal abrumpere with Abl. of Place, 390, N. 3.domum, ib. B.3; force of ad, 16. B.4; adesse with Dat., etc., 347.R.2.absiste with Iiif. for Impv., 271,2,N.2.usque,ib. N.5; of Respect, 338: withsubsts.,vbs. ofabsolvere with Abl. of Place, 390.N.3. Clothing, etc., and passives, ib. N.2;absonus with Abl., 359, N. 2.Greek Ace. or Abl. instead, ib. N.I.Absorption of Correlative 619.Double Ace., 339-342: with vbs. of Inquiring,absque 417,2; withSubjv., 597, N.etc., 339; special vbs., ib. BB.,abstaining vbs. of, with Abl., 390,2.xx.; pass, form, ib. N.4; with vbs. ofabstingre with Abl. of Place, 390.N.3. Naming, Making, etc., 340: pass, form,abstract relations expressed by Indie.,t'6. B.I; End by ad or Dat., ib. B.2; one254,R.l: substs. become concrete in PI., Ace. is cognate, 341 and N.2; one Ace.204.N.5; formation of, 181,2,6.forms a phrase, 342; as a general objectiveabundantia 84.case, 343; with Interjections, ib. 1;abundare with Gen., 383.1.N.2.Ace. and Inf., ib. 2; and Dat. with vbs.abun.de ''fry, 439.N.3.of Giving and Putting, 348; with prepa.abutl with Abl., 407 and N.2,a.for Part. Gen., 372, B. 2: for Abl. ofgC see atque ; ac Si with Subjv. of Standard, 403.N.2; subj. of Inf., 203.B.1;Comparison, 608; SCS1= quasi,16. N.5. 420: after impersonal Ger., 427,N.2; ofaccedere with Dat., etc., 347, K. 2; with Ger., 430; of Ger. with preps., 432; ofquod, 625; with ut, 553,4.Sup., 435; with Inf. as object clause,accent in early Latin, 701, R.2 ;in music,526-535; with Inf. as subj., 535; with729; conflict with Ictus, 749.Inf. after vbs. of Emotion, 542, R. ; withaccentuation 15; effect of enclitics, t6. Inf. in rel. clause, 635; with Inf. inB.I; in cpds., ib.-R.Z; in Voc., ib. B.3; dependent comparative clause, 641.early, t&.N.accusing -vbs. of, with Gen., 378; withaccidit with Dat., 346.B.2 ; sequence other constr., t'6. BB.2 and 5.after, 513, B. 2; with ut, 553,3.acqui8scerewith Abl., 401.N.6.accipere with Inf., 627,B.l.acquitting vbs. of, with Gen., 378; withaccommodatus with Dat. Ger.,429,x.l. other constr., t'6. BB.2 and 3.accumbere with Dat., etc., 347,B.2. action, activity suffixes for, 181,2; 182,1.ACCUSATIVE definition, 23,4. 3d decl. 36; active voice 112,2 ; 213 ;Inf. as pass.,in im, 37,3; 54,N.l; in eiS, 38,3; of vowel 532, x. 2; of something caused to bestems, 57.B.1 and 5; PI. in Is and 6s ( 57, done, 219; periphrastic, 247.B.5; in Greek substs., 66, NN. 3 and 4; of ad in composition, 9,4; vbs. cpd. with,adjs. of three endings in Ig ( eis, 79.N.2; take Ace., 331; with Towns and Countries,iul3,83,N.l; of Comp. inls, els, 89, E. 2;forms advs., 91,1.337, BB.I and 4; with Ace. of Endafter vbs. of Taking, etc., 340, B.2: withBecomes subj. of pass. , 216 ; syntax of, Ace. for Dat., 345, R. 2; vbs. cpd. with,328-343: general view, 328,329; direct take Dat. ,347; in the neighbourhood of, 386,obj., 330; with vbs. of Emotion, i&.n. and B.2; ftence,403,N.4,e; position of, 413, B.I;K.2; 333,l,N.l; with verbal substs., 330, as adv., 415; as prep., 416,1; with Ace.N.3; with adjs. in undus, i&.N.4 with;Ger., 429,2; 428, B.2; 432 and B. ; aftercpd. vbs., 331. Inner obj., 332, 333; neut. vbs. of Hindering, 432,R. with Ger. for;pron and adj., 333,1; Cognate, t6.2; Abl. 'Abl. Sup., 436.N.3: ad id quod, 525,2,instead, t6.2,N.4; with vbs. of Taste and N.2.Smell, i&.2,N.5; extension of Cognate adaequS with Abl., 296.N.1; 398.N.2.idea, t6.2,NN.2 and 6..Double Ace., 333, adaptation words of, with Dat. Ger.,1; of Extent, 334-336; in Degree, 334, in 429,2.Space, 335, in Time. 336; with abesse addere with operam and Dat. Ger., 429,and dlstare, 335.R.2; with abhinc, 336, 1; with quod, 625,1, N.I; with ut,653,4.B.3; with nStuS, t'6.B.4; with adjs., ib. adding vbs. of, with quod, 526,1 ;listN.I; of Extent as subj. of pass., t6.N.3; of, ib. N.I: with ut,# N.5; 663,4.of Local Object, 337; prep, with Large adductUS with Abl. of Cause, 408.N.2.Towns, t'6. BB.l and 2; domum and in ade5 with ut, 562.
GENERAL INDEX. 505380.N.1; with Abl. and ex, 402.B.2.aetas in Abl. of Time, 393, K. 5 ; idaeta-adfatim very, 439, N. 3.ADVEBB defined, 16,5, and n.3; discussionadvantage \\>a. with of, Dat., 346. with ante, 403.N.4.adferre with ut, 553,1.of, 91, 92: from Ace., 91,1; from Abl., ib.adhaere"scere with Dat., etc., 347.B.2.adhortari with u t, 546.N.1.adh.UC strengthens Comp., 301; as yet, miscellaneous, 92,6 ; comparison of, 93;still, 478,N.l.numeral, 98; pron., 110; with Dat., 359,adicere with quod, 525,i,n.l.N.7; with Part. Gen., 372.N.3 genera];adigere with ut, 553,1.use of, 439; position of, 440; for rel.adipisci with ut, 553,1.with prep., 611,B.l: position of, 677.adlre with Ace. or ad, 331.B.3.adversarl with Dat., 346.B.2.adiuvare with ut, 553,1.adversative sentences, 483-491 ; particles,483 ;ADJECTIVE 16,2; and subst., ib. B.I, N.I;cum, 580.NN.1 and 2, 587;decl. of, 17; defined, 72; 1st and 2d decl.,qul, 634.73; Gen. and Voc., 73; stems in ro, 74; adversus gives obj. toward which, 359,with Norn, wanting, 74.B.2; Pronominal, B.2; as adv., 415; as prep., 416,2.76; 3d decl., 77; two endings, 78; stems advertere animum, with Ace., 342.in ri, 78,2; in gli and gri, 78,B.; one ae pronunciation of, 1 and N. ;weakeningending, 80: case peculiarities, 83; abundautia,of, 8,1.84; varying decl. ,84,2; defective aedes omitted, with Gen., 362.R.3.and indeclinable, 85; comparison of, 86;correlative, 109: formation of, 182.As subst., 204.NN.1-4 ; agreement ofaequalisaequareaequumwith Gen. or Dat., 359, B.I.with Dat., 346,N. 3.sit, 254.B.1;pred., 211; exceptions, ib. KB.; attrib.aeque with Abl., 296, N.I; aequo afteragrees in Gender, 286; neut. with fern., Coinp., 398.N.1; with atque, 643.N.3;i&. 3; concord of, 289; with two subjs., aequS aequS, 482,3.290; position, 290.N.2, 291; meaning aes decl. of, 47,6.varies with position, ib. B.I ; 676 ; aestimare with Gen., 379; with Abl.,superlatives of Order and Sequence,291,1,K.2; numerals, 292-295: comparatives,296-301; superlatives, 302, 303; oftis, 336.N.2.Inclination, Knowledge, etc., in pred., aeternum as adv., 336.N.1.325.B.6; verbal with Ace., 330,N.3; neut. afficere with Abl. of Means, 401.N.3.in Cognate Ace., 333,1 ;of Extent in affinis with Dat. or Ace., 359.R.1; withDegree, 334 and B.I; or Time, 336.N.1; Gen., 374.N.2.with Gen. of Quality, 365.B.2; of 3d affitrmare with inf., 527,8.2.decl. as pred., 366,B.2 ; with Abl. of age with PL, 211.N.2; with Impv., 269;Separation, 390,3; with Abl. of Attendance,age ve"r5, 487.N.3 ; id ago, with ut,392.B.1; with Abl. of Quality, 400; 546.N.1.in Abl. Abs., 410.NN.4.5; with Inf., 421,N.l.c; with Inf. for Gen. of Ger., 428,N.3;agencyagentsuffixes for, 181,1.ab,214, 401; in Abl.,with Abl. Ger., 431, N.I; with Abl. Sup.,436.N.2; neut. with ut, 553,4, and B.2.214, B.2; in Dat., 215, 354, 355; and Instrument,401, B.I.adligarewith s5 and Gen., 378,B.l. aggredlwith Inf., 423.2.N.2.admirarl with Inf., 533.B.1.aiS 175,1; supplied from neg5, 447, B. ;admodum very, 439.N.3-, with quamintroduces O.R., 648.B.2 ;with Inf., 527,and Indie., 467,N.; yef, 471,1.B.2.admon8re with two Aces., 341.N.2 ;with alaris and alarms, 84,2.ut, 546,N.l.Alcaic measure, 791, 799.Adonic measure, 789, 792.Alcmanian measure, 786.adorlrl with Inf., 423.2.N.2.all forms indef. prons., 111,1.adorning vbs. of, with Abl., 401,N.l. aliSnus poss. of alius, 108; with Gen.adstringere with se" and Gen., 378.B.1. or Dat., 359, it. 1 and N.2.adul6sc6ns 437, N.I.aliquando aliquando, 482.N.1.2; from Loc., ib. 3; uncertain, ib. 4; byterminations, 92,1-5; syntactical andaliquantum
506 GENERAL INDEX.aliquis and aliqul 107; with PI. vrb., animus with nt, 646.N.2 ; animum advertere,211.N.2; syntax of, 314; with numerals,314,R.2,i; for quisand qul, 107.N.1, and with ACC.. 342: animi as Loc.,374, N. 7; in animo esse,with inf., 422,315, N. 1 ; with two negs., 315.N.1 ;peraliquem stare,with n6, quominus,648,N.l.alius decl. of, 76, 108; reciprocal aliusalium, 221.B.1; with Abl., 319; foralter, CSterl, ib. N.I ; besides, ib. N.2;alia as Ace. of Respect, 338,2; aliterwith Abl. of Measure, 403.N.3; aliusatque alius, 477, N.O; alias alias, 482,l ; turn alias, alias plSrumque,interdum alias,ib. N.2 ; ali5 alio,alibi alibi, ib. 2 ; aliter aliter, n>.3; aliter strengthens sin, 592; followedby quam, nisi, praetor, 643.N.4 with;atque, 643.N.3.allSc decl. of, 68,12.alphabet 1. Sounds of letters, ib. BB.1-3; names of letters, ib. N.alter decl. of, 76, 108; for secundus,96,5 alter ;alterum, reciprocal, 221, B.1; and alius, 319.alteruter decl. of, 76, 108.altitude with Ace. of Extent, 335, R.I.altUS with Ace. of Extent, 335. B.I.N.5.Anio decl. of, 41,4.annuere with Dat., etc., 347.B.2.ante in composition, 9,4 vba. cpd. will;take Ace. or Dat., 331, 347; with Abl. ofStandard or Ace. of Extent, 403.N.4;position of, 413, B.I and N.3; as adv.,415 ;as prep., 416,3 ; with Ace. Ger.,432 and N.I; with part., 437.N.2.anteSquam see antequam.antecedent action, 561-567 ; definite,613 ; repetition of, 615 ; incorporationof, 616 ; indefinite, 621 ; def. or indef.with Indie, or Subjv., 631,1, and 2.antecSdere with Dat., etc., 347,B.2.antecellere with Dat., etc., 347.B.2; withAbl. of Respect, 397.N.2.anteire with Dat., etc., 347.B.2.antepenult U.antequam with Indie., 574-576 ; withPr., 575 ; with Pf. and Fut. Pf., 676 ;with Subjv., 577.amare 122 ;amabO, with Impv., 269 ;amans, 437.N.1 ; with Gen., 375, N.2.amb in composition, 9,4.amblre conj. of, 169.2.B.1.amb5 decl. of., 73,B.,95,108; and uterque,292.amiCUS with Gen. or Dat., 359, E.I.amplius with quam omitted, 296, R.I.an in disjunctive questions, 457,1 ; inphrases, ib. 2 ; strengthened by ne,ib.1,N.2; as a simple interrog. particle, ib.1,N.3; in second part of a disjunctivequestion, 458 ;anne, ib.: and aut, ib.s.4; annSn and necne, 459; fornumor ne in indirect question, 460.1.N.1 ;or 497.anacoluthon 697.Anacreontic measure, 819-'anacrusis and anacrustic scheme, 739anapaestic foot, 734; rhythm, 736; varietiesof, 777-782; substitutes for, 777.anaphora 485, N.2; 636, N. 4: 682.anglwith Ace. and Inf., 533, B.I.decl. of,angiportus 68,5.animadvertere with inf., 527.B.1.animals as instruments or agents, 214,B.2.anterior 87,8.aorist forms on s5, sim, 131,4,6.; definition,224 ;Pure Pf. as Aor., 236, N. ;Hist. Pf., 239 ; Plupf., 241.N.1 ;Pf. asPotential of Past, 258.N.2.apodosis 589; omission of, 601; in comparativesentences, 602 in Indie, in;Unreal Conditions, 597, u. 3 ;after vrb.requiring Subjv., ift.B.5.aposiopesis 691.appare"re as cop. vb., 206,N.l with;Norn, and Inf., 528.N.2 ;with ut, 653,4,appellate with two Aces., 340; with twoNoms., 206.appointing vbs. of, with Dat. of Ger.,429,2.apposition 320; concord in, 321; exceptions,ib. BB.,NN. ; Partitive, 322, 323 ;Restrictive, 322 ; Distributive, 323 ;whole and part, ib. N.2 ; to sentence,324 ; predicate, 325 ; Gen. of, 361 ;tonames of Towns, 386.B.1 ; to Loc., 411,B.3; pron. incorporated, 614, B.4; subst.incorporated, 616,2.appropinquarewith Dat., 346.R.2.appurtenance suffix of, 182,6.aptus constr., 552, B. 2 ;with qulandSubjv., 631,1.apud 416,4.
GENERAL INDEX. 507arbitrarl with Inf., 527.R.2.arbitratu as Abl. of Cause, 408.N.1.arbor - decl. of, 45,N.arc6re with Abl. of Separation, 390,2,u.2.Archilochian measure, 788, 800.arcus decl. of, 68,5.ard6re with inf., 423.2.N.2 ;ardens, toexpress cause, 408.N.2.ardor with ut, 646.N.2.arguerewith Gen., 378.B.1; with Inf.,528.N.1.676; of ad vs., 677; of preps., 678; of particles,679 ;of attributes, 680 ;of opposites,681; of pairs, 682 ; anaphoric andchiastic, 682 ; poetical, 683 ; periods,685; historical and oratorical, 687.arrldere with Cat., etc., 347.R.2.artisan suffixes for, 181,3.asdecl. of,48,K.Asclepiadean measure, 802, 803.asking vbs. of, with two Aces., 339 andB. I.N.I; with Inf. or ut, 546 and B.3.aspergere with Dat. and Ace., or Ace.and Abl., 348,B.l.aspicere with inf., 527.R.1; aspectu,436.N.1.aspirates 6, 2, B.assentiri-with Dat., 346.R.2; 347.E.2.assequl with ut, 653,1.-assere as Inf. ending, 131,4,6.4.asseverations in Subjv., 262; in Fut.Indie., ib. N.; with nisi, 591,6,2.assidgre with Dat., etc., 347.R.2.assimilations of vowels, 8,4 ;of consonants,9,1,2,3 ; of preps., 9,4 ; of Voc.,211.B.3.assugfacere with Abl. or Dat., 401.N.2 ;with Inf., 423.2.N.2.assuescere with Abl. or Dat., 401.N.2;with Inf., 423.2.N.2.astu in Abl. of Manner, 399.N.1.asyndeton after demonstrative, 307,B.4; in coordination, 473, N., 474, N., 483,N., 492.N.at use of, 488 and UN. :ast, 488.N.1.atque for quam, 296.N.4 ; syntax of,477 and notes : adds a third member,481,N.: with adjs. of Likeness, etc., 643;forquam after neg. Comp., 644,N.2.atqul 489; ib.atquln, N.I.attendance Abl. of, 392 ; with cum,ib.B.I; instrumental, ib. B.2.attinet with Inf., 422.N.4; restrictionswith, 627.B.2.attraction in Gender, 211.B.5 ; in mood,508,4, 629; of vb. of Saying into Subjv.,541.N.3, 585.N.3, 630.N.3 ; of Eel., 617 ;inverse, 617.N.2 ;of mood in general,Aristophanic measure, 793.662, 663.arrangement of words, 671-683 ;of attributive 288 ; concord of adj., 289 ;clauses, 684-687 ; grammatical or rhetorical,672 ; ascending and descending, of, 291 ; superlatives of Order and Se-with two or more substs., 290; position673 of ; simple sentences, 674 ;of interrog.sentences, 675 ;quence, 291,1,8.2 ; pred., 325 ;variousof adj. and Gen., peculiarities of, ib. BE. ; omitted withcognate Ace., 333,2, N.I ; with Abl. ofTime, 393, B. 5 ; omitted with Abl. ofManner, 399.N.1; with Inf., 421.N.2; withpart., 437.B.ail pronunciation of, 4 ; weakening of,8,1.auctorem esse, with Dat., 346.N.5 ; withInf., 527.B.2 ; with ut, 546.N.1.auctSritas with ut, 546.N.1 ; auctSritateas Abl. of Cause, 408.N.1.audgre with Inf., 423,2,N.2.audlre like Gr.
GENERAL INDEX.bellum in Abl. of Time, 394.B ; bellias Loc., 4U,B.2.belonging suffixes for, 182,5.benevolus compared, 87,4.beseeching vba. of, with ut, 546.bewaring vbs. of, with ng, 648.bibere with dare, 421.N.1.6.bidding vbs. of, with Cat., 346.biiugus and biiugis, 844-bimatris 85,1-binl for duo, 346.B.2.blandirl with Dat., 346.B.2.boards with Dat. Ger.. 429,1.bonus comparison, 90 ; cul bond, 356,E.I ;bene, as adv. of Degree, 439,N.2,and 3.books omit in with Abl., 387.b6s-decl. of, 62,7.brachylogy 689.breathings 6, 2, A .buying .vbs. of, with Gen. or Abl., 379,C sound of, L.B.1; name of, I,N.cadere with Abl. of Separation, 390,2,N.2.caesura denned, 760 ; varieties, 751 ;masc. and fern., 762 ; bucolic, 763, B. 2 ;in Iamb. Sen., 759, N.2; in lam. Trim.Cat., 761.N.; iu lam. Trim. Claud., 762,N.4 ;in lam. Oct., 763.N.6.;in lam.Sept., 764.N.2 in Troch. Sept., 770,N.2:;in Dae. Hex., 784.N.2 in : alcaic, 791,798, 799,N.l in ; Glyconic, 796; in Phalaecean,796.N.3 ; in Sapphic, 797.N.2, 804 :in Archilochian, 800,N. ;in Asclepiadean,802.N.1.calling vbs. of, with two Aces., 340; withtwo Noms., 206.Calx decl. of, 70.D.campl as Loc., 4U.B.2.cantica defined, 747; in early Latin,824; in later Latin, 826.capabilitydjs. of, with Inf., 421.N.1.C.capacity adjs. of, with Dat. Ger., 429,2 ;suffixes for, 182,2.caplwith Gen. of Charge, 878.B.1.capitaldecl. of, 78, B.caput decl. of, 63,8; est with Inf., 422,N.2.cardinal numbers 94 ;Gen. PI. of, 96,B.2 ;collective Sg. of, 16. ; duo andambo, 292 with :singull,296: for Distributive,295.N.; poeition of, 676.B.2.cargre with Abl., 405; with Gen., 383,1,N.2.caro decl. of, 41,4; gender of, 43,1.asCarthagini Loc., 4U.B.1.earns with Abl. of Price, 404,N.2.cases denned, 23 ; strong and weak,rgctl and obllqul, 24 ; case-forms, 26 ;endings, 26,2.cassis decl. of, 68,12.casu-as Abl. of Mariner, 399,N.l.catalexis 742.causa with Gen., 373; with poss. pron.,ib. B.2; with Gen. Ger., 428.B.2; causa,in phrases with ut, 646.N.2 ;causamvincere, 333,2,8.CAUSAL SENTENCES coordinate, 498 ; particles,498 ; syntax of subordinate, 538-642 ; general division, 638, 539 ; withquod,etc., and Indie., 640 with ;auod,etc,, and Subjv., 841; with quia, ib.N.I ; rejected reason, t'6. N.2 ; withquanddque, ib. N.5 ; with vbs. of Emotion,642 ; si for quod, ib. N.I ; withCum, 680.BB.1 and 2, 686 ; with tamquam,etc., 641.N.4, 602, N.4 ; relative,634 ; clauses in O.O., 665.causation vbs. of, with part., 637 ; withut, 553,1; pass, with ut, ib. 3.causative verbs formation of, 191,4.cause Abl. of, 408 ; various expressionsfor, t'6. NN. ; preventing, t'6. N.4 ; external,t6. N.6; represented by part., 666,670,2.cavBre with Subjv. for Impv., 271,2;with Dat., 346, N.2; constructions with,548,NN. 1 and 3.C6 appended to iste, 104.3.N.2 to ; ille,t'6. N.3.cSdere with Dat., 346, K. 2 ; with Abl. ofSeparation, 390, 2, N.2.cedo defective, 176,6.celare with two Aces., or d6, 339 and B.1 and 3, N.I.celer comparison of, 87,1, and N.cgnsere with Inf., 627.B.2 ; with ut, 646,N.I ;cSnseo, yes, 471,2.centimanus defective, 86,2.cernere with inf., 527,B.l.certare with Dat., 346.N.6; rem certare,333, 2,s.certus strengthens qnldam, 313.B.3 ;with Gen., 374.N.O ;cert6, certO, yet,471,1; certS, strengthens at, 488.N.2-,certius (quam),with inf., 422.N.3-,
GENERAL INDEX. 509certum eat,with inf., 423.2.N.2; certi5remfacere,with inf., 527.R.2.CCSSare with Inf., 423,2,N.2.(cSterus) Nom. masc. wanting, 74,n.2,86,1; use of ceterum, 491; cetera usedpartitively, 291.R.2; alius instead, 319,N.I: as Ace. ofBespect, 338,2.charge in Gen. with Judicial verbs,378 ; with nomine, '& -2 ;in Abl., ib.H.3.chiasmus 682 and B.choosing vbs. of, with two Noras., 206 ;with two Aces., 340 ;End with Dat. orad, *6- R-2 ;vbs. of, with Final Dat.,356.N.2.choriambic feet, 734 ; rhythms, 801.cinglwith Ace., 338.N.2.circa position of, 413, B.I : as adv., 415 ;as prep., 416,5 ;with Ace. Ger., 432 andN.I.circiter as prep., 416,6.circum in composition, 9,4 ; vbs. cpd.with, take Ace., 331; never repeated, ib.B.2; as adv., 415: as prep., 416,5.circtundare with Dat. and Ace., or Ace.and Abl., 348.B.1.circumfundere with Ace. and Dat., orAce. and Abl., 348, K.I.with direct question, 467,circumstantial cum 585-588.cis as prep., 416,7.citerior 87,2 and 7.citius constr.quamafter, 644, n. 3.citra as adv., 415; as prep., 416,7.Civitas concord of, in pred., 211,B.6.Clam as adv., 415; as prep., 416,8.clanculum as prep., 416,8.cllVUS decl. of, 67,2.clothing vbs. of, with Ace. of Respect,338.N.8; with Abl. of Means, 401.N.1.cluSre with Nom. and Inf., 528.N.1.COepI 175,5,a, and N. ;with Inf., 423,N.3.C6gere with Inf., 423,2,N.2; with ut, 653,2; conclude, with Inf., 546.R.1, 653,2,N.cSgitarewith Inf., 423.2.N.2.C0gitati5in phrases with ut, 557.R.Cognate Accusative 333,2 ;similarphrases, ib. B. ; with second Ace., 341 ;with prohibSre, inhere, ib. N.2.COgnatUS with Gen. or Dat., 359, it. 1.cSgnitiSin phrases with ut, 557,K.with Dat.. 349.R.5.cognomen essecognoscere with lnf.,527,B.l cSgnitu;as Sup., 436,N.l.coincidence constr. with, 513.N.3.COlre with Dat., 346.N.6.COlligerewith Inf., 627.E.2.collocare with in and Abl., 385, u.l ;with in and Ace., ib. N.2.coins decl. of, 61.N.5.comitarl with Dat., 346.N.2.COmitilS as Abl. of Time, 393.R.5.commiserarl with ACC., 377,^.2.committere with Ace. Ger., 430.N.1;with ut, 548.N.1.commovSre with ut, 563,2; commotus,to express cause, 408.N.2.Commune as subst., 211.B.4; in phraseswith ut, 557.B. ;communis, with Gen.or Dat., 359. u.l.comparative in ior, 86; in entior, 87,4,5;lacking, 87,9; with quamor Abl., 296and BB. ; omission of quam, ib. B.4; agewith natus,ib. B.5; with opinione,ib.B.6; of Disproportion, 298; omission ofUt after quam, ib. B.2; restriction of,300; strengthened, 301; doubled, ib.;with Part. Gen., 372 and B.2; with Abl.of Respect, 398 and B.; with Abl. ofMeasure, 403.N.1; with Abl. Ger., 431.N.2; with quam qul, 631,3.COMPARATIVE SENTENCES 638-644; divisionof, 638: moods in, 639; vb. omittedin, 640 ;in dependent clauses, 641; correlativesin, 642; the more the more, ib.B.2; with atque, 643; with quam, 644.comparison of adjectives, 86 ; peculiarities,87; by magis and maximS, ib.6;by plus and plurimum, *& 6.N.2; de-of participles, 88,89; offective, 87,2,7,9;advs., 93; irregular, 90; standard of,omitted, 297; of qualities, 299; conditionalsentences of, 602.compelling vbs. of, with ut, 653,2.compensatory lengthening 9,6,a.compercewith Inf. for Impv.,271,2,N.2.comperlre with Gen., 378.R.1; with Inf.,527.B.1.C0mp6sce with Inf. for Impv., 271,2,N.2.complere with Gen., 383,1.COmplexus as a Present, 282,N.compos with Gen., 374,N.3.composition of words, 193-200 ;divisions,193; of substs., 194-198; of vbs.,199, 200.
com,GENERAL INDEX.compounds attrib., 197,1 ; dependent,ib. 2 ; poss., 198 ; quantity in, 716.con see cum.conarl with Inf., 423.2.N.2.conatus defective, 68,5.concedere used personally in pass., 217,N.2; with Cat., 346,R.2; with Inf., 423,2,N.2; 532.N.1; with Ace. Get., 430.N.1;with lit, 548.N.1.conceinng vbs. of, with obj. clause, 523.concessive Subjv., 264 :580.NN.1and 2, 587; qul,634; part., 609,667,670,4.CONCESSIVE SENTENCES 603-609 ; withetsi, etc., 604; with quamquam, 605;with quamvis,etc., 606; with licet,607; with ut, 608; representatives of.609.concludere with inf., 527.B.2.concord 210; pred. with subj., 211; violationsof, ib. BB.l-6,NN.l-3; of anbj.andpred. multiplied, 285-287; of app., 321;neut. for persons, 323, N. 3; of rel., 614.C0ncupi6ns with Gen., 375.N.2.concurrere with Dat., 346,N.6.condecet with Inf., 422.N.4.condemning vbs. of, with Gen., 378; withother constrs., ib. B.2; with Abl., ib. B.3; enforced destination, ib. B.4.condicio in phrases with ut, 546, N.2.condition suffixes for, 181,8; indicatedby a question, 453, M. 3; represented bypart., 667,670,4.conditional cum 683-CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 589-602 ;divisionof, 589; sign, 590 ; negatives, 591:two excluding, 592: equivalents of Protasis,593: classification of, 594. LOGICAL,595; in O.O., ib. B.I; with Subjv., ib. BB.2,3; slve slve,#>-B.4; slquidem,*.R.5; Simoo.0, i&.R.6; phrases, t'ft.N.l; rangeof tenses, t'6.N.2. IDEAL, 596; for unreal,ib.n.I shift to unreal, t'S.B.2; after;non possum,*'& a.3; in 6.O., ib. B.5.UNREAL, 597; Impf. of Past, ib. B.I; Indic.in Apodosis, ib. BB.2,3; in O.O., ib.B.4; after a vb. requiring Subjv., ib. B.5; absque, i&.N.l. INCOMPLETE, 598-601:omission of sign, 598; of vb. of Prot.,599: of Prot., 600 ;_of Apod., 601: of COM-PABISON, 602; in 6.O. general consideration,656: Logical, 657; Ideal, 658; Unreal.659; Pf. Inf. and potuisse, *. N-COnducit with Dat., 346, B. 2; with Gen.,379; with Ace. Ger., 430.N.1.confid with Inf., 533.B.1; with tu,553,3.COnfldere with Dat., 346.B.2 and N.2;with Abl., 40L.N.6; with Inf., 527.B.2.confirmare with inf., 527.R.2.congruere with Dat., etc., 347,s.2.conjugation defined, 17; systems of, 120:first, 122; second, 123; irregular second,124; third, 125; third in io,126: fourth.127; deponents, 128: periphrastic, 129;notes on; 130,131: change in, 136.conjunction defined, 16.7. and R.3.coniungerewith Dat. or cum, 359.N.3.CONSECUTIVE SENTENCES exceptional sequencein, 513; syntax of, 551-558; generaldivision, 551 :Pure, 552: tantumabest ut, ib. B.I; with dlgnus,etc., ib.B.2 ; with idea of Design, 16. B.3: utnon, without, ib. B.4 ; Complementary,553: vbs. of Effecting, 553; vbs. of Causation,ib. 1; of Compelling, etc., ib. 2:Happening, etc., ib. 3; impersonals, ib.t;vbs. of Hindering, 554-556; quln withvbs. of Preventing, 555,1; with vbs. ofDoubt, ib. 2; quln = ut non, 556; n5ndubito quln,ib. BB.1,2 ; ExplanatoryUt, 557; Exclamatory question, 558; rel.sentences, 631; with def. antecedent, t'6.1; with indef. antecedent, t'6. 2: withComp., ib. 3: with adj., ib. 4: with quln,632; Indie, for Subjv., 16. 2.BB.1.2.consentaneum with inf., 422.N.3.COnsentire with Dat., etc., 347.R.2.consequi and consequSns, with ut, 653,1 and 4.consldere with in and Abl., 385,B.l.consilium in Abl. of Cause, 408.N.1 in ;phrases, with Inf., 422.N.2, and 428.N.2;with dare and ut, 546.NN.1 and 2.cSnsistere with Abl. of Material, 396,N.I.consonants 6; double, ib.3; sounds of, 7;phonetic variations in, 9; combinationsof, 10.B.1.censors with Gen., 374.N.2.conspicari with Inf., 527,n.l.conspicerewith inf., 527.R.1.constare with Dat., etc., 347,s.2; withGen., 379; with Abl. of Material, 396,N.1; with Nom. and Inf., 528.N.2.constituere with in and Abl., 385,n.l;with Inf., 423,2,N.2; with ut, 546.N.1.cOnstruetiO ad stnsum, 211,B.1,N.3; pratgn&ns,699.
GENERAL INDEX.cSnsuSscere with luf., 423.2.N.2; con-SuStus, with Inf., 421,N.l,c.COnsuStud6 in Abl. of Manner, 399.N.1;in phrases, with Inf., 422.N.2, or ut, 557,B.cQnSulere with two Aces., 339 and N.I;with Dat., 346.B.2 and N.2; bonl COnsulere,380,N.2.contemporaneous action 538-573; in Extent,569,570: in Limit, 571-573.contendere with Dat., 346.N.6; withInf., 423.2.N.2; with ut, 546.N.1.C0ntin6ri with Abl. of Material, 396.N.1 ;contentus,with Abl., 401.N.6.contingit with ut, 553,3; contigit,with Dat., 346,B.2; sequence after, 513,N.2; attraction of pred. after, 535.B.3.continuance vbs. of, with Inf., 423, andN.2.contra position of, 413.B.1; as adv., 415;as prep., 416,9; with atque, 643,N.3.contracting vbs. of, with Ace. Ger., 430.contraction of shorts, 732.COntrariuS with Gen. or Dat., 359, u.l:with atque, 643.N.3.contrasts with hlC ille, 307,BB.1,2 ;with ipse, 311, B.I; with aliquis, 314;alter etc., alter, 323.convenlre ludic. for Subjv., 254,s.i;with Dat., 346, N.2, 347, B. 2.convicting vbs. of, with Gen., 378; otherconstr., ib. B.2.coordination defined, 472; without conjunction,472.B. ; syntax of, 473-503 ;copulative, 474-482; adversative, 483-491 ; disjunctive, 492-497 ;causal andillative, 498-503.C5piawith Inf., 428.N.2.copula with pred., 205; itself a pred., ib.N.; omitted, 209; agrees with pred.,211,K.1,EX.C.copulativevbs., 206; with Nom. and Inf.,ib. B.3. Particles, 474 ; omitted, ib. N.,481. Sentences, 474-482 ;use of neg. toconnect, 480.cor decl. of, 63,8 ; cordi est, with Inf.,422.N.5.cSram as adv., 415; as prep., 417,3.cornus decl. of, 68,5.decl. of, 48-corpuscorrelatives 109-111 ; pronominal adjs.,109; advs., 110; cpds., Ill; coordinatingparticles, as turn turn, alias alias,etc., 482; of Bel., 618; absorption of, 619,621; position of, 820; in comparativesentences, 642; omitted, 642,3.correptiou 744.COS defective, 70,D.countries in Ace., with prep., 337.B.1;without, ib. N.I; in Abl., 391,N.crassitude with Ace. of Extent, 335.B.1.crassus with Ace. of Extent, 335, K.I.crastim as Loc., 411.N.1.creare with two Aces., 340 ;with twoNoms., 206.creation vbs. of, with Inf., 280,1, b.CrSderepersonal in pass., 217.N.1; withDat., 346.B.2 ; with Inf., 527.B.2 ; crSditur,with Inf., 528.B.2.cretic foot, 734 ; substitutions for, 806 ;rhythms, 808-810.cruciarl-with Inf., 533.R.1.cuius as poss. pron., 106.N.4.Culpa with Epexegetical Gen., 361,2.cum and quom, 7 ;in composition, 9,4 ;with subst. to form cpd. subj., 285.N.2;vbs. cpd. with take Ace., or Dat., 331,347 ; with Abl. of Attendance, 392, andB.I; to indicate Time, 394.N.2; with Abl.of Manner, 399; with unnatural productions,400,ii.2; position of,413,B.l; withAbl. Ger., 433 ;as prep., 417,4 ; with e5and quod, 525,2,N.2 ;(prlmum), assoon as, 561-563 ; Causal,, 564, N.2 ; withIterative action, 566, 567 ; with Subjv.,ib. N. ; derivation of, 578 ; general viewof, 579 ; Temporal, 580; fuit cum, ib.B.I; meminl cum,ib. B.2; with Lapsesof Time, ib. B.3; in early Latin, ib. N.I ;Inverse, 581 ; Explicative, 582 ; Conditional,583, 590,N.3; Iterative, 584; withSubjv., ib. B. ;Circumstantial, 585-588;Historical, 585; Causal, 586; Concessiveand Adversative, 687: cum non = without,ib. B.2; cum turn, 688; mood, ib.2; cum interim,with Inf., 635.N.2; withIndie, retained in O.O., 655,B,3.-cumque makes general relatives, 111,2.CQnCta Ace. of Respect, 338,2; may omitin with Abl. of Place, 388.Cunctarl with Inf., 423,2,N.2.cupere with Pf. Inf., 280,2,e,N. ; withDat., 346,B.2; cupientl CSt, 353.N.2;with Inf., 423AN.2; 538.N i ;with Gen., 376.N.2.cupiditaswith ut, 546.N.2.cupiduswith Gen., 374.N.5.cupressusdeci. of, 68,5.
512 GENERAL INDEX.with Pf. Inf.. 280,2,6, and N.3: with Inf.,of Disappointment,cura with ut, 546.N.2 ; curae est,withas tense ib. R.2 ; 163-166; semi-, 167; how used, 220.Iuf.,422,N.5.423.2.N.2.Curare with Inf., 423,2,N.2 ; with Ace. decgre with Pf. Inf., 280,2An.l ;withGer., 430. -v.l ;with part., 537.N.2; with Dat., 346.N.3 ; with Abl. of Respect,ut, 546.N.1; cura ut for Impv., 271,1,and 2.N.2.397 N.2.dScernere with Inf., 423.2.N.2, and 546,curriculo as Abl. of Manner, 399.N.1. B.I ;with ut, 546.N.1.declension defined, 17 ; varieties of, 27 :Dactylic foot, 734 ; substitutions. 783 ; rules for, 28: 1st, 29. 30: 2d, 31-33; stemsrhythm, 736 ; rhythms, 783-789.in -ro and -ero, 32: 3d, 35-60: stems of,damnas indeclinable, 85,C.35 ;formation of Nom. Sg., 36 ; liquiddaps defective, 70,D.stems, 39-46; sibilant, 47-49; mute, 50-dare Pf. dedrot, 131,6 ; Pr. danunt, 55; vowel, 56-59; 4th, 61, 62; 5th, 63, 64;133,iv., N.2 ;with ad or Dat., 345. u. 2 ;vary between 5th and 3d, 63, R.2 ; ofwith Final Dat., 356.it. 2;operam, withDat. Ger., 429.N.1, or ut, 546.N.1 with;Greek substs., 65 ; adjs. of 1st and 3d,73 ;of pron. adjs., 76; parts., 80.Ace. Ger., 430.N.1;nuptum, etc., 435, decorus with Abl., 397.N.2.N.I ;with Pf. part., 637.N.2; permit, with decreeing vbs. of, with Dat. Ger., 429,2.Ut, 653,2.dSdecet with inf., 422,x.i.DATIVE defined, 23,3 ;1st decl. in al, a, deesse with Dat., 349.R.4.Sbus, as, els, 29,NN.3,4; 3d decl. in ei (dgferre with Gen. of Charge, 378.B.1.6, 37,2; 4th decl. in ubus, uel, U, 61.R., dSfessus-with Inf., 421,N.l,c.and N.2 ; 5th decl., uncommon, 63, K.I ; dSficere with Ace., 346,N.3.in ib. 8, 1, N.2; in Greek substs., 66.N.2; dSflgerewith in and Abl., 385,it.l.in adjs. in gi, a, abus, Is (for ife), 75, degree advs. of, modify other advs., 459,NN.2,6 ;in I of pron. adjs., 76,2 ; with N.2.act. vb. unchanged in pass., 217, 346, dSicere with Abl., 390.2.N.3.B.I; gives End with vbs. of Taking, etc., delectari with Ace., 346.N.3.340.K.2; with ei and vae, 343,1,N.2; of deliberative questions 265 ; Subjv. inIndirect Obj., 344 ; with trans, vbs., O.O., 651.R.2.345 ;with vbs. of Taking Away, ib. B.I ; deliberatum est with inf., 423.2.N.2.and pr5,ib. B.2 ; with intrans, vbs., dSlicium decl. of, 68,3.346; with cpd. vbs., 347; with vbs. cpd. d8ligerewith two Aces., 340 ; with twowith d6, ex, ab,ib- -5 ; and Ace. with Noms., 206.vbs. of Giving and Putting, 348: of Possessor,demanding vbs. of, with ut, 546.349; of Personal Interest, 350 ;dSmergerewith in and Abl., 385, R.I.Ethical, 351 ;of Reference, 352, 353 ; demirari with inf., 533.R.1.with participles, 353 ;of Agent, 215, dSmonstrare with Inf., 627.R.2.354; Double, 356; with substs., 357: Local,demonstratives 104 ;attracted in Gender,358 ;with adjs., 359 ;with cpds. of211, B.5, and N.3 ; syntax of, 305-di, dis, 390,2,N.5; of Ger., 429.flg_with Abl. for second Ace., 339,NN.2,3;vbs. cpd. with take Dat., 347, B.5 ; withAbl. of Separation, 390,1, and 2 ; to indicate307 :hie, 305 : iste, 306; ille, 307 ; hieib.ille, BB.1,2 advs.; similarly used,ib. R.3 ; strengthened by quidem, ib.B.4 ;reflexive of, 521, R. 5 ;followed byTime, 394.N.2; with Abl. of Origin, quod, 525,2 ;continue a rel. clause,395,and N.2 ;with Abl. of Respect, 397, 636. N.I; position of, 676, R.I.N.I; with Abl. of Cause, 408. N. 3: position demovere with Abl., 390.2.N.3.of, 413, B.I as ; prep., 416,5 ;with Abl. denominative 179,2, and N.; Pf. of vbs.,Ger., 433 ;with part., 437.N.2 ; dS e5 134, v. formation of; vbs., 192.quod, 525,2,N.2.dense growths suffixes for, 181,11.death deponent vb. ofas act. in Abl. Abs., dentals 6,1: suffixes with, 186.410.N.1.dSpellerewith Abl., 390.2.N.3.debSre Indie, for Subjv., 254, K.I: Impf. deponent 113 ; conjugation, 128; list of,
GENERAL INDEX. 513deprecariwith n g, 548.N.1.dgprehendl with Gen. of Charge, 378,B.I.depriving vbs. of, with Abl., 405. N-derivative words 179,2.after, 515. it. 3 ;with Ace. and Inf., 532 ;with ut. '& N.l-4 ; with part., 537.N.1 ;with complementary Final clause, 646.dSsistere with Abl., 390,2,N.3.dSspgrare with Dat., 346.B.2 ;with Inf.,527, B.2.determinative pronouns 103 ; syntax of,308.deterrSre-with Inf., 423.2.N.2 ; with n6,548.N.1 ;with quominus, 549.N.1.deturbare with Abl., 390,2,N,3.deus decl. of, 33.K.6.dexter decl. of, 74.E.1 ; Comp. of, 87,1,B.1 ; ib. 2 and 7,diaeresis 6, 753.dialysis 724.person, ib. N.4 ;with ut, 546.N.1 ;die,with Indie, question, 467.N.; dictll,i"Sup., 436.N.difficile comparison of, 87,3 ; with estforSubjv., 254.B.1; with Inf., 421,N.l,c.difficultyadjs. of, with Abl. Sup., 436.N.2.diffidere with Dat., 346.B.2, and N.2 ;not Abl., 401.N.6.dlgnarl with Abl. of Respect, 397.N.2.dignus with Gen., 374.N.10 ;with Abl.of Kespect, 397.N.2 ; constr. after, 652,B.S ;qnj or ut, with Subjv., 631,1, andB.2.33diluvium heteroclite, 68,6.diminutive suffixes for, 181,12, 182,12 ;vbs., 192,2.diphthongs 4 and N. ; length of, 14 ;quantity of, 706.descent suffixes for, 182,11.dis in composition, 9,4.deslderare-with inf., 423.2.N.2.disagreement vbs. of, with Dat., 346.N.6.desiderative verbs formation of, 191,3. dlscere pass, of docSre, 339.N.4 ; withdSsinere with Inf., 423,2,XN.2,3.Inf., 527.B.1.desire adjs. of, with Gen., 374 ; vbs. of, discreparewith Dat., 346.N.G.with Inf., 281,c.; 423,2,NN.2,4; sequence discruciari with Inf., 533,B.l.disgust adjs. of, with Gen., 374.disinclination adj. of, for advs., 325, R.O.disjunctive particles, 492 ; sentences,492-497; particles omitted, 492, H. ; questions,462; forms of, 468; indirect, 460,2.displeasure vbs. of, with Dat., 346 ; adjs.of, with Abl. Sup., 436.N.2.displicSre with Dat., 346.B.2 ; displicet,Inf., with 422.N.4.disproportion by quam pro, qul, ut,etc., 298 ; by positive, with preps., ib.B. ;omission of ut after quam,ib. N.2.dispudet with Gen., 377.N.1 with ; Inf.,422.N.4.dissentlre with Dat., 346.N.6.dissimilation of Consonants, 9,5.diastole 721.dissimilis Comp. of, 87,3.dica defective, 70.D.dissimulare with inf., 627.B.2.dlcere with two Noms. in pass., 206 ; distaedet with Gen., 377.N.1.omission of, 209.N.5 ; dixerat as Aor., distare with Ace., or a and Abl., 335, B.241.N.1 ;dlcat, dlxerit aliquis, 257,? ;2 ;with Dat., 346, N.6 ; with Abl. ofwith Ace. and Inf., 527.B.1 ; with Nom. Measure, 403, N.I.and Inf., 628, and N.I ; dlcitur and distributives 97 ;with pluralia tantum,dictum est,ib. -2 ;not confined to 3dib. B.3 ;for cardinals, ib. N.I, 295,N. ; syntax of, 296; in apposition, 323.dlverbium 747.dives Comp. of, 87,10.divinam rem facere with Abl. ofMeans, 401,N.4.[diciS] defective, 70.D.dig as Loc., 91,3 ;as Abl. of Time, 393,B.6 ;diu, by day, 91, 2./.docSre with two Aces., or dS, 339, and B.difference measure of, 403 ;vbs. of, with 1; with ab,ib. B.2; ib.doctus, B.2, andAbl., ib. N.I.N.4; discere as pass., ib. N.4 ; constr.differre with Dat., 346.N.6.after, 423.N.6.doing vbs. of, take obj. clause, 623, and526,1, and N.4.dolere with Inf., 633.B.1 ;dolet, withDat., 346.N.1 ; with Dat. and Inf., 633,B.I.do!5 as Abl. of Manner, 399.N.1.domus decl., 61.B.2, 68,5; Ace. as Limitof Motion, 337; Abl. of Separation, 390,2; domi, 411.K.2; with Gen. of poss.pron.,
causal,GENERAL INDEX.egSnuS Comp. of, dSnare with Dat. and Ace., or Ace. and87,5 ;with Gen. orwith Inf., 527, B.2, 553, 2,N. N.I.Abl., 348.B.1.Abl., 405.N.3.donee derivation, 568 ami R. : of completeeggrewith Gen. or Ace., 383,1, 405.N.2.coextension, with Indie., 569; ego decl. of, 100; Gen. PI.,nostrum,until, with Indie., 571; inverse, id. N.6;with Subjv., 572; to express subordination,nostrl, 100.R.2, 304,2 and 3; poss. pron.instead, t'6. 2,N.2; nos in 6.O., 660,4.ib. R.ggredlwith Abl., 390.2.N.3.d5nicum 568; range of, 571.N.4.egregie"adv. of Degree, 439.N.2.donique range of, 571.N.4.ei with Dat. in exclamations, 343,1,^.2.doubt vbs. of, with quln, 555,2.eicere with Abl., 390,2,N.3.dropping vbs. of, with quod clause, 525, elabi with Abl., 390.2.N.3.1; with ut,*'& N -4-Elegiambus 821.dubitare-an, 457,2; with Inf., 423,2,*. elision719,1 in ; lam. Sen., 759,^.3; in2 ; n5n dubito,with quln, 555,2,R.l; Dae. Hex., 784.N.5; in Pent., 786.N.2; inwith Interrog., ib. B.2 ;with Inf., t'6. Sapphic, 797, N.3; in Asclepiadean, 802,B.3, and N.K.2.dubium with an and Subjv., 457,2.ellipsis 688; see Omission,ducere with pred. Nom. or phrase, 206, em with Ace. of Exclamation, 343,1,B.1; with Final Bat., 356.B.2; with Gen.of Price, 379: pSnsl ducere, 380,1,N.2;deem, with Ace. and Inf., 527.B.2; lead,with ut, 553,2.N.2.emere2.B.eminencewith Gen., 379; bene emere, 380,words of, with Abl., 397.N.2.dum enclitic, with Impv., 269; with Pr. eniittere with Abl., 390,2,N.3.Indie., 229, R. ;force of, 568, R. of completecoextension, 569; of partial coex-;emotion2, 333,1,vbs. of, with Ace., 330,R. and N.N.I; vbs. of, with Abl. of Cause,tension, 570: until, with Indie., 571; with 408; with Ace. and Inf., 533; in Nom. ofSubjv., 572; to express subordination, Part., 536,x. 2; Causal sentences after,ib.s..; provided that, 573; with modo, 542 and a.; perplexing, with indirectib. ; with Pr. for participle, 570,NN.l question or si, 542.N.1.and 2-,i&. ; retained, with Indie, emphasis in arrangement, 672,2, a.in O.O., 655.K.3, 663.1.N.1.6n in exclamations, 343,1,N.2.dummodo provided that, 573.enallage 693.duo decl. of, 73,B., 95, and ambS, uterque,enclitics effect of, on pronunciation, 15,292.R.l.duritia heteroclite, 68,2.endeavour vbs. of, with ut, 546, 1.duty vbs. of, with Inf., 423 and N.2. ending vbs. of, with Inf., 423,2 andN.2.E sound of, 3; weakening of, 8,1; length endings of cases, 26,2, 27.of final, 707,2; gaud exin cornp., 9,4. endowing vbs. of, with Abl. of Means,ease adjs. of, with Abl. Sup., 436.N.2.401.N.1.ebur decl. of, 44,5.enim position of. 413.N.3, 484,B., 498.N.1 ;Scastor strengthens atque, 477.N.2.yes for, 471,B.; strengthens sed, 485. N.CCCe with Ace. and Nom., 343,1, N.2.3, 498 ; asseverative, 498, N. 2 ;combinationsecquis 106 and N.5.of, ib. N.6 ;after quia, ib. N.7.ecthh'psis 719,2.enimv6r5 strengthens sed, 485.N.3.edere conjugation of, 172,N.Snitl with Inf., 423,2,N.2.edicere with Inf., 527.B.2; with ut, 646, enumerations in Abl. without in, 387.N.I.epanorthosis 484, R.l.Sducere with Abl., 390.2.N.3.epenthesis ofvowels, 8,3; of consonants,effecting vbs. of, have Final Sequence, 9,7.543.R.1, and N.2: constr. of, 553.epicene substantives 21,3.efferre with Abl., 390.2.N.3.epulnm heteroclite, 68,3.efficere with Subjv. and ut, 563,1 and 3; ergause of, 416,10; with Ace. Ger., 432
GENERAL INDEX. 515429,1 ; futurus as adj., 437,N.; essequod, 525.1.N.2; it is theest, case, withUt, 553,3 ; fuit cum, with Subjv., 580,B.I ;restrictions with, 627, a.2 ; sunt'qul, with Subjv., 631,2.esseda heteroclite, 68,1.6t in numerals, 96,4, 97,4; et et, withPL, 285.N.; usage of, 475; - et tamen,ib. N.I; for ib.etiam, N.2, 482.5.N.2;omitted, 481,2,N. and 3 ; with adjs. ofLikeness and Unlikeness, 643,N.2.etenim use of, 498 and NN.Ethical Dative 351.etiam strengthens comparative, 301 ;syntax of, 478 and NN. ; yes, 471,1; andquoque, 479 B. and N.I; with turn, 478,N.I; after sed, V5rum, 482,5, and N.I.etiamsi 603 and N. ; syntax of, 604 andRK.etsl 603; with Indie, or Subjv., 604; andyet, ib. B.2; with part., 609.N.1, 667,N. ;with adj. or adv., ib. N.2; with Inf., 635,N.2.Svadere with two Noms., 206.evenit with Dat., 346,B.2 ; with ut,553,3.event suffixes for, 181,2.Svertere with Abl., 390,2,N.3.ex in comp., 9,4; vbs. cpd. with, takeDat., 347.E.5; with Abl. of Separation,390,1 and 2; with Towns, 391,R.l; withAbl. of Origin, 395 and N.2; with Abl. ofMaterial, 396; with Abl. of Respect, 397,N.I; with Abl. of Measure, 402, B.2; withAbl. of Cause, 408.N.3, 413.B.1; use aserg5 with Gen., 373; as adv., 399.N.1 ;with Gen. Ger., 428.R.2 ; usage of, 502and N.I ; position of.tfc. N.2 ;combinationsof, ib. K.3.prep., 417,6; with Abl. Ger., 433; ex 65eriperewith Abl., 390,2,N.3.quod, 525,2,N.2.grudlre with Abl. or de, 339, K. 2 and N. exadversus use of, 416,2.3; with in or Abl., 401.N.1.excSdere with Abl., 390,2,N.3.6886 conjugation of, 116; early forms, ib. CXCellere with Dat., 347.B.4; with Abl.NN.; cpds., 117; ascopula,205; esse pro,of Respect, 397.N.2: with Abl. of Measure,in numero,efc., 206, u-l; omitted, 209403.N.1.and KN., 280,2, 6,R.2 and c ;with Fut. excepto with quod, 625,2,N.2.part, to form periphrastic, 247 ; cpd. exclamations in Ace., 343,1; in Gen.,tenses with fui, etc., ib. E.I ; forem 383,3; in Ace. and Inf., 634; exclamatoryforessem, ib. N.I, 250.N.2, 251.N.2 ; questions, 558.with Pr. part., 247.N.2 ; futurum excludere with Abl., 390,2,N.3.esse lit, 248; other forms, ib. KN.; in excluding vbs. of, with Abl., 390,2.CO CSt Ut, 249; with Pf. part., 250; exemplumiu phrases with ut, 548,N.2.variations, ib. BB..NN.; with Ger., 251,1; exigere with ordinal, 294 ;with twowith Final Dat., 356, B. 2; with Double Aces., 339 and N.I.Dat., ib. B.3 ;with Gen., 379 ;with in exire with Abl., 390,2,N.3.and Ace., 385, N. 3 ; with Abl., 401.N.7;with Gen. Ger., 428.B.2; with Dat. Ger.,exlstimare with Gen., 379; with ex andAbl., 402,B.2; with Nom. and Inf., 528,N.I; with Ace. and Inf., 527,B.2.exlSx defective, 85,2.exorare with ut, 553,2.ex5rdirl with lnf.,23,2,N.2.expeditwith Dat., 346,B.2.expellerewith Abl., 390.2.N.3.expers with Gen., 374.N.2 ; with Abl.,390.3.N.1.expeterewith Pf. Inf. pass., 280,2, C,N.explSre with Gen., 383.1.N.2 ; explgnunt,133.IV.N.2.explicative cum 580,NN.1,2, 582.with in and Ace., 385.N.2.expSnereexpQscerewith two Aces., 339 and H.I.exprimere with ut, 553,1.expugnare with ut, 553,1.exsequiaswith ire, 333,2,B.exsistere with Abl., 390,2,N.3.exsolvere with Abl., 390,2,N.3.exspectareconstr. of, 572.exspectatione as Abl. of Respect, 398,N.I.exspes defective, 85,2.extent in Degree, 334; in Space, 335; inTime, 336; Ace. of, as subj. of pass.,336,N.3.exterior Comp. of, 87,2 and 7.extorquSre with ut, 553,1.extra as adv., 415; as prep., 416,11.extrgmum Comp. of, 87,2 ;with masc.subj., 211.B.-1 ; with ut, 553,4.exturbare with Abl., 390,2,N.3.
5 i6 GENERAL INDEX.exui with Ace. of Respect, 338.N.2; withDat. and Ace., or Ace. and Abl., 348, R-1-facere early Pf., fgced, 131,6 ; omissionof, 209.N.5; mirum factum, 209.N.2;fac (ut) for Impv., 271,1 ludos and;second Ace., 342 ;with pred. Gen., 366,E!; nihil reliqui, 369.K.2 ;quod facerepossum, 372, N. 3 ;with reum andGen., 378.R.1 ; with Gen. of Price, 379 ;bonl, ib. 1.N.2 ; (sacrum) facere,withAbl., 401,NN.4,7 finem ; facere, withDat. Ger., 429.N.1 ; represent, with Ace.and Inf., 527,K.2; with Pf. part., 537.N.2;with consecutive clause, 553,1 ;withInf., 553.2.N.; facere (fax5) ut as periphrasis,ib. l ; no"n possum (facere)quln, 556 ; Sup. of, 436.N.facilis comparison of, 87,3; with Inf.,421,N,l,c.facinus with est and Inf., 422.N.2.faex decl. of, 52,7, 70,C.fagus heteroclite, 68,5.falSUS without Comp., 87,9 ; with ut,553,4.fama with est and Inf., 627.R.2.fames heteroclite, 68,8.farl conj. of, 175,3, and N.fas 70.B. ; withlnf., 422.N.2, 428.N.2; withAbl. Sup., 436, N. 2.fattening vbs. of, with ex, ab, d6, 385,B.2.fastldiSsus with Gen., 374.N.5.fatBrl with Ace. and Inf., 627.B.2.fatum with est au(l Iui '-, 422.N.2, and428.N.2.[faux] decl. of, 62,7.favSre with Dat., 346, R. 2.fear sequence after vbs. of, 515, R. 3 ;clauses of, and Final Clauses, 543, R. 3 ;syntax of clause of, 650; Inf. or Indirectquestion after, ib. NN.4,5.femur decl. of, 44,5, 68,12.fere position of, 677.K.1.feme -with foedus, 333,2,a.ferox with est and Inf., 533.R.1.ferre conj. of, 171; I5gem with ut,646.N.1 ; in phrases with ut, 653.1and 2.fSstlnarewith Inf., 423.2.N.2.flCUS heteroclite, 68,5.fidem habere with Dat., 346,n. 5.fldere with Dat., 348.B.2 and u.2 ; withAbl., 401.N.6.fieri conjugation of, 173 and NN. ;withtwo Noms., 206, 304,R.l ; with Gen. ofPrice, 379 ; with ex or d6, 396,N.2 ;= tobe sacrificed, with Abl., 401,NN.5,7; withut, 553,3; fieri potis est ut, ib. .figure Whole and Part, 323.N.2; Figuresof Syntax and Rhetoric, 688-700 ;ofProsody, 718-728.flliadecl. of, 29.B.4.filling vbs. of, with Abl., 405.filum heterogeneous, 67,2,6.FINAL SENTENCES with Interrogativeparticle, 470 ; general view, 643, 544 ;Pure, 645; ut n5,or ut non, ib. RR.1,2;Complementary, 546-549 ;with vbs. ofWill and Desire, 646 ; Inf. instead, ib.B.I ; with vbs. of Hindering, 547-549 ;Subjv. without ut, t'k B.2 ; ut n, ib.B,3 ;with Substantives, ib. N.2 ; Inf.instead, ib. N.3 ; nS with vbs. of Preventing,648; quominus, 649; with vbs.of Fear, 550; eight circumlocutions for,644.B.2 ; sequence in, 512.final syllablesquantity of, 711-713-finein Gen. or Abl., 378.R.3.fined) as prep., 417,7.fitnessGer.,429.adjs. of, with Dat., 359; with Dat.flagitare with Abl. or g, 339, i:l, andN.I ;with ut, 546,NN.1,3.flagitium hominis 369.N.1, 361.N.3.flamen defective, 70, D.flocci as Gen. of Price, 380,1.fluere with Abl. of Means, 401,N,5.flumen with Gen. of App., 361,N.l.foedus with ferire, 333, 2,R. ;in phraseswith ut, 646.N.2.following vbs. of, with ut, 653,3.foot in Metre, 733 ;names of, 734 ; equalityof, 740 ;750.conflict of Word and Verse,foras-91,l,d.forbidding vbs. of, with Dat., 346 ; with116, 548.forgetting vbs. of, with Gen. or Ace., 376and B.2.FORMATION OF WORDS 176-200 ; simplewords, 179-192; primitives and derivatives,179 ; suffixes, 180 ;formation ofsubsts., 181 ; of adjs., 182 ; with suffixes,183. Suffixes in detail vowels,184 ; gutturals, 185 ; dentals, 186 ; labials,187 ; s, 188 ; liquids, 189 ;formation of vbs., 190 ;verbalia, 191 ;
GENERAL INDEX.517fvequentativea or intensives, ib. 1 inchoatives,ib. 2 ; desideratives, ib. 3 ;;causativcs, ib. 4 ; meditatives, ib. 6 ;denominatlva, 192 ; cpd. words, 193-200; substs., 191-198 ; vbs.,199, 200; seocompounds.formldare with Iiif., 423,2,N.2, and 533,K.I.forsitan 457.2.N.forte nisi 591.R.4, and N.3.fortiter very, 439.N.3.forum detective, 70,D.fraude as Abl. of Manner, 399,N.l.fremere with Ace. and Inf.,533,B.l.frequSns in pred. attribution, 325.R.6 ;with Abl., 405.N.3.frequentative verbs formation of, 191,1.fretum heteroclite, 68,5.fretus with Abl., 401.N.6.friendliness adjs. of, with Dat., 369.frugl 85,C.; Comp. of, 90-frul with Abl., 407, and N.2,6 ; personalGer., 427.N.5.frflnlSCl with Abl., 407.N.2.&.[frux]defective, 70,D.fugere with Inf. for Impv., 271.2.N.2;fugit m6, with Pr. Inf., 281.2.N.fugitans with Gen., 375,N.2.fulmentum heteroclite, 68,3.fulness suffixes for, 182,10.fulness adjs. of, with Gen., 374 ; vbs. of,with Gen., 383,1.functionsuffixes for, 181,9; in Dat. Ger.,429.fungiwith Abl., 406 and N.2,c; personalGer., 427.N.5.fustis heteroclite, 68,5.FUTURE 112,3; formation of, 114,115;early forms, 130,3 ; part, in urum forfern., 211, N.I; definition of, 223; usageof, 243; of vo!5 and possum,& R-2; asgnomic, ib. N.I ;in Impv. sense, 243;periphrasticact., 247; Indie, for DeliberativeSubjv., 254.N.2; part, act., 283;part, as subst., 437.N.1 ; part, as anadj., 438.N. ; representation of in 6. O.,514, 515; periphrastic in Unreal Cond.,ib. R.I; Inf., 530; in rel. sentences, 622;syntax of part., 669, 670.FUTURE PERFECT 112,3 ; formation of,114,115; in S 5, 131,4,6,1; defined, 223;syntax of, 244; as Fut., ib. R.I; withn51o, V0l5, pOSSUm,etc., ib. H.3; inboth clauses, ib. H.4 ; independent useof, t'6. N.I ; periphrastic, with habe5,ib. N.2 ; as Impv., 245 ; Representationof, iu 6. O., 514,515; Pf. and Plupf. peri-"phrastic in Unreal Condition, 515.R.1;in rel. sentences, 622.Galliambic Verso 818.gaudgre with si, 542.N.1 ;ggvlsus asPr., 282, N.gender 19; common, 21,1; epicene,il>.3;substantlva mobilia,ib. 2 ;of 1stDecl., 30; of 2d Decl., 34; of 3d Decl., 39,43,46,49,55,58 ;of 4th Decl., 62; of 5thDecl., 64; concord in, 286; neut. PI. withfeminines, ib. 3.GENITIVE defined, 23,2 ;of 1st Decl. inas, SI, um, 29.RR..NN. of 2d Decl. in I;(from stems in in io), um, in el, 33, RR.,NN. ;of 3d Decl. in us, CS, 37,1 in ;um,ium, 38,2, 54, 67.R.3; of 4th Decl. in OS,is, I, UUm, 61.N.1; of 5th Decl. in 6s,SI, S, 63.N.1 ; of Greek substs. in 5n,eon, 65,R.l; oes, 66.N.1; of adjs., 73 ;inI, SI, aes, es, um, 75.NN. ; of pron. adjs.iu 1US, 76,1: of adjs. of three endings inum, ium, 79.R.2, 82, 83.N.2; of Comp. ofpart., 89.R.3 of; Cardinals, 95.B.2; ofDistributives, 97,R.l.not subj. of pass., 217.R.1 ; with mflle,293 and N.; with Comp. for Abl., 296.N.2;mei,etc., asobjective, 304,2; nostrum asPart., ib.S; poss. pron. for Gen., 304,2,N.2: in app. to poss. pron., 321,R.2; Part.Gen. for Part. App., 323, R. ;with nSmenest, 349.R.6; general view,360; translatedby abstract subst., ib. R.2; Adnominal,Appositive, 361; Epexegetical, 361; Possessive,362; flagitium hominis, 361,N.I; Family, 362, N.I; Chorographic, ib.N.2; Subjective and Objective, 363; twowith one subst., ib. R.2 ; 1st and 3d personsas possessive, 364; of Quality, 365;as Pred., 366 ;with facere, ib. B.I;auct6ris, ib.; generis, 388, R. ; withprepositional subst., 373; with adjs.,374 and NN.; with participles and verbals,375; with vbs. of Memory, 376;with vbs. of Emotion, 377; with Judicialvbs., 378; with vbs. of Eating and Buying,379,380 with interest and ;rfert,381; with vbs. of Fulness, 383,1; withvbs. of Separation, ib. 2; in Exclamations,ib. 3; pred. with Inf., 422.N.5;Ger., 428 ;with esse, causa,etc., ib. B.
5 i8 GENERAL INDEX.2; Ger. with PI. subst., ib. K.I ; Ger.with vb., ib. N.4; position of, 676 andNN.1,2.genus- decl. of, 48; id genus,336, N.2;with Epexegetical Gen.. 361,2.gerSnswith Gen., 375.N.2.GERUND and GERUNDIVE 112,5 ; formationof, 115,3 ; early forms, 130,8 ; Agentof, in Dat., 215,2; with ease to formperiphrasis, 251; force of Gerundive,ib. N.I; syntax of, 425-433; and Inf.,425; and vb., 426; Gerundive forGerund, 427; impersonal Gerundive,from intrans. vbs., ib. N.4; Gen.ifi.N.2;of, 428; Inf. instead, ib. N.2; dependingon vb., ib. N.4; Dat. instead, z&.N.S;Dat. of, 429; Ace. of, 430 ; Abl. of, 431 ;paralleled by part., ib. N.3; Ace. of,with preps., 432 ;with ad after vbs. ofHindering, z&.R.l ; Abl. of, with preps.,433.gestire with Inf., 423.2.N.2, 533, R. 1 .gignere (genitus), with Abl. of origin,395.N.1.giving vbs. of, with Dat. and Ace., orAce. and Abl., 348 ; with Inf., 423.N.1.6.;with Ace. Ger., 430.gloriarlwith Ace. and Inf., 527.R.2.gloriosumwith est and inf., 422, N.3.Glyconic verse 795.gracilis Comp. of, 87,3.gratiawith Gen., 373; withposs. pron.,ib. R.2; with Gen. Ger., 428.R.2; gratils,as Abl. of Manner, 399,N.l.gratificari-with Dat., 346.R.2.gratularlwith Dat., 346.B.2.gravariwith Inf., 423,2,N.2.Greek substantives decl. of, 65; GreekAce., 338.growthvbs. of, in Abl. Abe., 410.N.1.guttural vowels, 2,1 ; consonants, 6,1 ;suffixes with, 185.hab6re with, two Noms. in pass., 206 ;withPf. part, to denote Maintenanceofthe Result, 238,241,N.2, 244.N.2 ; firstImpv. wanting, 267.R.;with two Aces.,340.R.1; with pr5, loco, numero,anda second Ace., ib.; with Final-Dat., 356,E.2; with Gen. of Price, 379; pgnslkabere, ib. 1.N.2; with in and Ace.,385,N.3; with Ace. Ger., 430.N.1; habeodicendu.m, >* N.2; be able, with Inf.,423.2.N.2.habit vbs. of, with Inf., 423 and N.2.haerSre with Dat., 346,N.f>.hanging vbs. of, with ex, ab, d6, 385.R.2.happening sequence after vbs. of, 513,B.2; vbs. of, with quod clause, 525,1;Ut instead, ib. N.5; vbs. of, with consecutiveclause, 553,3.hardening in a verse, 723.baud 441 and 443, with NN.; scio an,457,2.(h)av6re 175,4.helluarl with Abl., 407,N.2,e.hendiadys 698.heteroclites 68-heterogeneous substantives 67.heterologa 69, c.hiatus defined, 720 ;in lam. Oct., 763,N. ;in Anap. Oct., 778.N.1 ;in Dact.Hex., 784.NN.6.7 ;in Sapphic, 726.N.hie 104, landNN.; syntax of, 305; con.temptuous character of, 306.N.; andille, 307,RR.1,2; strengthened by quidem,ib. E.4 ; two forms of, refer todifferent substs., ib. N.3 ; hie illic,hinc hinc, hinc inde, hinc illinc,illinc hinc, inde nine, 482,2 ; hOcwith ut, 557, n. ;hums, in Gen. of Price,380,1 ; with Abl. of Time, 393.R.4 ;in6. 0., 660,3 ; bine as coordinating conjunction,603.hiems decl. of, 40 ; in Abl. of Time, 393,R.6.hindering sequence after vbs. of, 643,R.2 and N.2 ;vbs. of, with nS, 648 ; withquin, 554-556 and vbs. of Preventing,;655; and vbs. of Doubt, ib. 2.Historical cum 585 and NN.HISTORICAL INFINITIVE parallel withImpt.,254,R.; syntax of, 647 ; conjunctionswith, ib, N.2.HISTORICAL PERFECT 224 ; force of, 239 ;and Pure Pf., 235 ; and Impf., 231, 240;for Plupf., 239.N.; as Potential of Past,258.N.2.HISTORICAL PRESENT 224 and 229; withdum, 229.N..570.historical tenses 225.hodiernus in pred. Attrib., 325.R.6.hom5 in early Latin, 42, N.honor and honos, 45, N.hope constr. of, vbs. of,423,N.5; sequenceafter, vbs. of, 615.R.3; vbs. of, withAcc.and Inf., 527.R.4.HORACE Lyric Metres of, 826.
562GENEEAL INDEX.519482,2; illud with ut, 657.R.;horrSre with Inf., 423.2.N.2.393.R.4 ; illinc hinc, bine illinc, N.4 ;with ut, 553,4.horrescere with inf., 423.2.N.2.hic-illic,in 0. O., 660,2.hortarl with Inf., 423.2.N.2; with ut, illudere with Dat., etc., 347.H.2.646.N.1 ; hortatus, as Pr., 282.N.; nortatu,illustris with Abl. of Kespect, 397.N.2.as Abl. of Cause, 408.N.1.imbecillus and imbecillis, 84,1.humilis Comp. of, 87,3.imber deci. of, 44,2, 45.R.1.humus in Abl. of Separation, 390,2,N.4 ; imberbis-and imberbus, 84,2.liumi, as Loc., 411, K. 2.immane with quantum and indie.,hypallage" 693.467.N.hyperbaton 696.immensum with quantum and indie.,hypotaxis 472.467.N.Immo useof, 471,c; scansion of, 717,N.l.I and J., 1.R.2 ;sound of, 3 ; weakening immolare with Abl. of Means, 401.N.4.of, 8,1; effect of, on preceding vowel, immunis with Abl. of Sep., 390.3.N.1.12.R.2 ; I-class of vb. stems, 133, vi.; impedimento with esse and nS, 548,length of final, 707,4.N.I.iam with Pr. indie., 230; iam diu, iam impedire with Inf., 423.2.N.2 with ; nS,prldem, ib. ;with Impf. Indie., 234 ; 548.N.1 ; with quSminus, 649.N.1.iam iam, 482,1, and N.I ; iam vero, impellere with ut, 553,2; impulsus,487.N.3 ; iam duclum,with Impv., 269. impulsu, of Cause, 408, NN. 1 and 2.lambelegus verse 820.impendio very, 439, N. 3.Iambic law, 716, 717 ; foot, 734 ; rhythm, impendgre with Dat., etc., 347.R.2.736; rhythms, 767-767,impgnsS very, 439.N.3.ictus conflict of, with Accent, 749. imperare with Dat., 346.R.2 ;with Inf.,IDEAL CONDITION from present point of 423,2,N.2, 532,N.l; with ut, 546.N.1.view, 596,1; from past point of view, ib. IMPERATIVE 112,4 ; early forms, 130,5 ;2; = Unreal, ib. E.I; Bhift to Unreal, Subjv. for, 263 ; answers deliberativeib. R.2; after non possum,ib. K.3; inO. O.,ib. K.5,658.question, 265.N.; usage, 266-275 First;and Second, 267 ; strengthening words,idem decl. of, 103,2, and NN.; syntax of, 269; negative of, 270; pronouns with,310 ;with que, et, atque, ib- K.I -,the 267.N. ; concord with, 211.N.2 ; periphrasessame as, with qui, ut, atque, cum,of, 271; representatives of, 272:or Dat., 310.R.3, 359.N.6, 642.B.1 ;not of Past, 272,3 ; tenses of, 278 ;for Protasis,used with is, 310.K.3 iu pred. attrib.,;593,4 ;in Subjv. with O. O., 652325.R.2.and R.I.id6neus constrs. with, 552.B.2 ;with IMPEEFECT 112,3 : early forms, 130,2;qui and Subjv. , 631,1.iecur-decl. of, 44,5, 68,12.force of, 223, 231; and Hist. Pf., 232; ofEndeavor, Disappointment,and Resistanceigiunus with Gen., 374.N.1.to Pressure, 233 ;a tense of Evolution,igitur position of, 484.K.; usage of, 501;ib. N.I ; overlapping, ib. N.2: ;with ergo, 502.N.3; correl. of si, 590.N.1. of Awakening, ib. N.3; with iam, etc.,ignorance adjs. of, in pred. app., 325, 234; of opposition to Present, 254, E.2;6 ;with Gen., 374.in Apodosis of Action begun, ib. B.3,IgnSrarewith Inf., 627.B.1.597.E.2 as ; Potential of Past, 858 in;ignoscerewith Dat., 346.B.2.Wish, 260; with vellem, ib- B.; Subjv.ILLATIVE SENTENCES 499, 500-as Concessive, 264 ; Subjv. as Impv. oi'ille - decl. of, 104,3, and NN. ;forms from Past, 272,3 ; tense relations of Subjv.,olio, ib. N.I ; Syntax of, 307 and;hie, 277; in Sequence, 510.B. ;in Coincidence,ib. BE.1,2 ; et ille,ib- K.2 ; strengthened613,N.3 Subjv. as Principal Tense, 517,;by quidem, ib- n.4 ; repeats a R.2.subst., ib. N.2: two forms with different impersonal verbs 208,1 and 2 ; divineantecedents, ib. N.3 ;refers to oblique Agt. expressed, ib- 1,N.; vbs. of Saying,case of is,ib. N.4 ;with Abl. of Time, tic., 208,2,N.2, 628; in Ger. constr.,427.
520 GENERAL IXDEX.impertlrewith Dat. and Ace., or Ace.ullus, 317 ; quisque, 318 : alter and315 ;quispiam, 316 quisquam and ; 646 ;in O. O., 650. See Hist. Inf.and Abl., 348.E.1 ;laborem, with Dat.alius, 319 ; rel. with Indie., 254,n.4,Ger., 429,1.625.impetrare with ut, 553,1.INDICATIVE 112,4 ; early forms of, 130,1-4;implgrewith Gen., 383.1.meaning of, 254; in Apodosis, 254.R.3 ;implorarewith ut only, 546.N.3.with iudef. rel., ib. R.4 ; Pr. for Deliberativeimponerewith in and Ace., 385.N.2.Subjv., ib. N.2; tense relationsimposwith Gen., 374.N.3.of, 276 ; neg. of, 257 in ; questions, 463,iinprimere with in and Abl., 385, B.I. 464; after nescio quis, etc., 467.R-1; inimprudfins in pred. attrib., 325,n.G. Relative Sentences, ib. E.2 ;in Temporalimpulsu as Abl. of Cause, 408,N.l.Sentences, 560,1 ; to express De-in in composition, 9,4; vbs. cpd. with sign, 630.N.2.take Ace. or Dat., 331, 347; with Countriesindigerewith Gen., 383,1, 405.N.2.and Towns, 337, B.I ;with Ace. for Dat., indlgnarl with Inf., 533.R.1 ; with si,345, r.. 2 ; with app. to Towns, 386,R.l ; 542.N.1.with books, 387; throughout, 388, it.; with indlgnus with Gen., 374.N.10 with ; qul,recipere, 389 with Abl. of Time, ; 394, Ut, or Inf., 552.R.2 ; with qul andB. and K.2; with Abl. of Cause, 408.N.3; Subjv., 631,1 and B.I.position of, 413.R.1 ;as prep., 418,1 ;indigUSwith Abl. or Gen., 405.N.3.with Ace. Ger., 432, and N.I ; with Abl. induere with Dat. and Ace., or Ace. andGer., 43d and N.I ; with part., 437.N.2 ;in eo quod, 525,2,N.2.Abl., 348.B.1 ;indul, with Ace. of Respect,338,N.2.inanis with Gen., 374.N.1.indulgere with Dat., 346.B.2 and N.2.incSdere with Dat., etc., 347.R.2.inermis and inermus, 84,2.incendl with ira and inf., 533.B.1 ; incensusinesse with Dat., etc., 347.R.2.,of Moving Cause, 408.N.2. Inferior 87,2; with Dat., 296.N.3.incertum with an and Subjv., 457,2. INFINITIVE 112,5; formation of, 116,3;inchoative verbs 133, v., 191,2.early forms, 130,6 ;aor. in -xe, etc.,incidere with Dat., etc., 347.B.2.131,4,6,4 Fut. ; in assere, ib- ;act. forinddere with in and Abl., 385.R.1.pass.,213,R.,c.; usage of, 279; assubst.,inciperewith Inf., 423.2.N.2 ; with Ordinal,280; after dgbeS, ib. 2.6.N.3; after294, N.decuit, oportuit, ib- 2,&,R.land2; asincitatus of Moving Cause, 408.x. 2.representative of Indie., 281; afterinclination suffixes for, 182,2.meniini, etc., ib. 2,N. ; syntax of, 419-inclination adjs. of, in pred. attr., 325,R. 424; with Ace. as subj.,420; assubst.,6 ; vbs. of, with Inf., 423 and N.2.421 ; traces of Locative nature, ib. N. 1 ;incliidere with in and Abl., 385, K. l. assubj., 422; as obj., 423; ut instead,inconunodare with Dat., 346.N.1.ib. N.4; as pred. with esse, 425; withincorporation of antecedent, 616 ;qua preps., ib. N.; Fut. pass., 435, N. 4; sequenceprudentia es, 616,1, N.2; of correlative,after, 618 ;Ace. and Inf. after619.incrgdibile with Inf., 422.N.3; withvbs. of Saying and Thinking, 527 ; part,instead, ib. N.I ; tenses after these vbs.,quantum and Indie., 467.N.529-531; after posse, velle, ib. N.3;increpare charge, with Gen., 378, K.I. after spSrare, ib. N.4; with vbs. ofincrepitare charge, with Gen., 378.K.1. Will and Desire, 532 ; with vbs. of Emotion,incubare with Dat., etc., 347.R.2.533 ; ut instead, 532,NN.3,4 ; inincumbere with Dat., etc., 347, R.2. Exclamations, 534 ;and quod, ift.R.l ;[indago] defective, 70,D.Ace. and Inf. as subj., 535; Ace. andinde as coordinating conj., 603 ;in contrastInf. after vbs. of Emotion, 542; withwith bine, 482,2.vbs. of Will and Desire, 646.N.3 ; withindecorus and indecoris, 84,1.vbs. of Fear, 550.N.5 ;with dlgnus,etc.,indefinite pronouns 107 ; syntax of, 313- 562, R.2 ;Ace. and Inf. iu Relative Sentences,319 ;quldam, 313 aliquis, 314 ; ; quis,635 ;after potius, etc., 644.R.3,
GENERAL INDEX. 521Infinitum with est instead of sit, 254,B.I ;and Indie., 467.N.intercalarispart., 437, N. 2. B.2.and intercalarius, 84,2.with quantum intercSdere with Dat., 347, R. 2; withinfitias-vo.A.; ire,333,2,B.inflection 17.infra with Abl. of Measure, 403.N.1 as;adv., 415 as; prep., 416,12.N.3 ;with ng, 548.N.1; with quin, 555,1.infrgnus and infrgnis, 84,1.intercurrere with Dat., 347.B.2.ingratilsas Abl. of Manner, 399, N.I. interdicere with Abl., 390.2.N.3 ; withingeniias Loc., with adjs., 374.N.7.n6, 548.N.1; with quln, 555,1.ingrediwith inf., 423.2.N.2.interdum coordinates with alias, 482,inhaergre with Dat., etc., 347,11.2.l.N.l.inhiare with Dat., etc., 347.R.2.interesse with Dat., 347.B.2 ;interest,inicere manum with Ace., 342.with Gen. and Abl., 381; with Norn.,iniuria as Abl. of Manner, 399,N.l.of Concern.ib. N.3 ; constr. of Objectinnatus with Dat., 347.B.2.382.1 and 2 ;constr. of Thing Involved,Inner Object Ace. of, 328, 330, 332; Abl. ib. 3 ; with ut, 553,4.instead, 333.2.N.4 ;after vbs. of Taste Interest Dat. of Personal, 350.and Smell, ib. 2.N.5.interior 87,2 and 8.inops with Gen., 374, N.I; with Abl., interjection 16.B.2; no syntax, 201.B.1.405.N.3.intermittere with inf., 423,2,N.2.inquam 175,2 ;inquit, impersonal, 208, internecio defective, 70,B.2.N.2; inciting 6. B., 648.R.2; lacking interpellate with ng, 548.N.1.forms supplied by dicere, ib. B.3. interponere with ng, 548.N.1.inquiring vbs. of, with two Aces., 339, interrogate with two ACCS., or dg, 339,and B.l.NN.l and 2.B. 1 and N.I; with Indie., 467.N.Inscrlbere with in and Abl., 385.R.1. interrogative pronouns 106 ; distinguishedinsculpere with in and Abl., 385,R.l.from rel., 467.B.2; with part..inservire with Dat., 347.B.2.469; in Final Sentence, 470; doublingfnsigniswith Abl. of Kespect, 397.N.2; of, ib. B.Inslgniter as adv. of Degree, 439.N.2. INTEBKOGATIVE SENTENCES 450 - 470 ;Insidiarl with Dat., 346,n.2.simple and cpd., 452 ; particles in, 454-Insinuate with Dat., 347.B.2.457; moods in, 462-467; Indie., 463,464;Insistere with Dat., 347.R.2.Subjv., 465,466 ; after vb. of Wonder,Instar 70.B.; with Gen. , 373.542.N.1; after vb. of Fear, 650, N. 4; forInstare with Dat., 347.B.2; with Inf., Protasis, 593,4; in 5. O., 651 and BK.423,2,N.2.intervenlre with Dat., 347.R.2.Instruere with dg, 339.N.3.intra to designate Time, 394.N.2; positioninstrument suffixes for, 181,6 ;in Abl.,of, 413.B.1; as adv., 415; as prep.,214, 401; with ab, 214, a. 2 ; Abl. of contrasted416,14.with Abl. of Attendance, 392.R.2. intransitive verbs used impersonally,INSTBUMENTAL Case, 23, N.208.2 ;used transitively, 213.R.& ;construedInsugtus with Gen., 374.N.4.as pass., 214,B.l ;with neut.integrum with Inf., 422, N.3.subj. in pass., 217; with personal Ger.,intellegerewith inf., 527, B.I; intellects217.B.2; with Pf. part. pass, used active-as Sup., 436.N.ly, 220, N.I; Gerund of, used imperson-intendere with Inf., 423,2,N.2; intentus,ally, 251,2.with Abl., etc., 359, N. 5.inusitatum with ut, 553,4.intensive verbs formation of, 191,1. invadere with Dat., 347.B.2.inter with reflexive to express reciprocalinvgnlrl with Nom. and Inf., 6E8.N.1;action, 221 ;vbs. cpd. with, take inventu in Sup., 436.N.Ace. or Dat., 331,347 ; to designate Time, inversedonee, 571.N.C ; cum, 631 ;attraction394.N.2; position of, 413, B.I ;as prep.,of rel., 617, N. 2.416,13; with Ace. Ger., 432 and N.I; with invicem to indicate reciprocality, 221.ng, 548.N.1; with quln, 555,1.intercludere with Dat. and Ace., orAce. and Abl., 348.B.1; with Abl., 390,2,
522 GENERAL INDEX.mvid6re with personal pass., 217.N.1;decl. of, 68,7.iudicare with inf., 423,2,u.2. likeness suffixes for, 182,4.with Dat., 346.R.2 and N.2; with Inf.,[iuger]iunctns with Dat., etc., 359.N.3.533.K.1.lUS-with Inf., 422.N.2, 428.N.2 ; withinvidus constr. of, 359.N.5.respondere, 333,2, B. in; phrases withinvltUS in pred. app., 325.B.6 ; invitO Ut, 546.N.2; iure, 399.N.1; iure in Abl.est, 353.N.2.of Respect, 397.ioculo as Abl. of Manner, 399.N.1.iiisto as Abl. of Respect, 398.N.1.locus heterogeneous, 67,2.iuvare with Ace., 346.N.3.ionic foot, 734 ; rhythm, 736; rhythms, iuvenis Comp. of, 87,9-815-819 ; substitutions for, 815.iuxta as adv., 415 ;as prep., 416,15.ipse decl. of, 103,3 and N.; ipsus, zft.s.2;syntax of, 311; et ipse, ib. 1.B.2; emphasisesJudgment vbs. of, with Abl. of Standard,reflexive, ib. 2 ; used indeclin-402.ably, 16. 2,K.; in O. O., 660,5.Ira of Moving Cause, 408.N-2; incendor K sounds of, 1,8.1 ;name of, ib. N.Ira with Inf., 633.B.1.knowledge adjs. of, in pred. attrib., 325,Irascl with Dat., 346.B.2.B.6 ; adjs. of, with Gen., 374.Ire 169,2; omission of, 209.N.5; withDat., 358.N.2; with Sup., 435.N.1; with Labials 6,1 ; suffixes with, 187.Infitias, etc., 333, 2,B.laborem with impertireand Dat. Ger.,is decl. of, 103,1 and N.; strengthened by 429,1.quidam, 307, K.4 ;taken up by ib.ille, laborare with Inf., 423.2.N.2 ;with ut,N.4; two forms with different antecedent,ib. N.3; syntax of, 308; = tails, lac decl. of, 53,8; 68,12.546,^.1.ib. B.I ; with et, atque, que,ib. B.2 ;for laedere with ACC., 346.N.3.reflexive, 309.N.1; id temporis, aetatis,laetarl with Ace. and Inf., 533,it.l.336.N.2; eo as coordinating conj., lamentarl with Ace. and Inf., 533.B.1.503; ide5, idcirco, ib.; with qul and largiri with ut, 553,2.Subjv., 631,1; with ut, B.I, 557.B.; later defective, 70,D.in 6. O., 660, 2.latitudine with Ace. of Extent, 335, K.I.islands in Local Ace., 337 ;with in, ib. latus with Ace. of Extent, 335.B.1.B.I and N.3; prep, omitted with Large laurus heteroclite, 68,5.Islands, id. N.I.leaving vbs. of, with Ace. Ger., 430.iste decl. of, 104,11. and NN.; syntax of, lectus heteroclite, 68,5.306 ; contemptuous character of, ib. N. ; length by nature, 12,1, and B.; by position,strengthened by quidem, 307.B.4; inib. 2 ; representation of long vow-6. O., 660,3.els, ib. N.ita with ut, *82,4; correlative of si, lengthening compensatory, 9,6,a._ 590.N.1 ; yes, 471,a,l.letters tenses in, 252; advs. in, ib.; datedItalicus Numerus756.from a place, 391, R. 3.itaque usage of, 500 ; position of, ib. B.; letting vbs. of, with Ace. Ger., 430-with ergo, 502.N.3.levare with Abl., 390,2,N.2.iter decl. of, 44,5.Igx in .phrases with ut, 546.NN.1 and 2 ;iterative action 566, 567 ; Subjv. in, ib.I6ge, 397 and N.I, 399.N.1.N. ;with cum, 584 ;in Relative Sentences,liberalis with Gen., 374.N.1.623.liberate with Abl., 390,2,N.2.Ithyphallic verse, 774.-libet added to rels., 111,3 ;exact useiubSre with two Aces., 341, N. 2 ;with of libuerit, 244.K.3 ;libgns, in pred.Ace. and Dat., 346.N.3; constr. after, attrib., 325.B.6; with Dat., 346.B.2.423, N. 6 ; with Ace. and Inf., 528 and N.I; llCSre exact use of Fut. Pf., 24i,K.3; withwith Inf., 423.2.N.2, 632,NN.1,2; with Dat., 346.B.2 ;with Gen., 379; licet,Subjv., 546,8.2 ;iussii, defective, 68,5;iussu as Abl. of Cause, 408.N.1.although, 603-607; with quamvls,ib. N.2; with Indie., ib. N.3.
GENERAL INDEX. 523likeness adjs. of, with Dat., 349 ;withatque(ac), 643.linguals 6,1,N.linterdecl. of, 44,2, 45,R.l.liquids 6,2,A ;3d Decl. steins in, 39-46 ;suffixes with, 189.litarewith Abl. of Means, 401.N.4.litotes 644.N.1, 700.lltterae in phrases with ut, 646.N.2.living vbs. of, with Abl.,401,N.l.Local Dative 358.locality suffixes for, 181,5, 182,9.locare with Gen., 379; within and Abl.,386.K.1 ; with Ace. Gen., 430.LOCATIVE 23,N. ;of 1st Decl., 29,fi.2; of 2dDecl., 33,KK.3,5 ;3d Decl., 37,6 ; formsadvs., 91,3; syntax of, 411; in 3d Decl.,ib. B.I ; other Locs., ib. B.2 ; app. to, inAbl., t'6. K.3 ;doml, with poss. pron.,ib. B.4.locus-67,2 ; in Ioc5 habere, 340.K.1 ;Abl. without in, 385,N.l.logacadic rhythms 790-805.LOGICAL CONDITION 595 ;with Subjv. byAttraction, ib. B,2; with Ideal 2d Person,t'6. a.3; slve slve,ib. s.4; si quidem,ib. K.5 ; si 6.modo, v5ro, tamen, a.6;tenses in, ib. N.2 ; in 6. O., 657, 595,B.I.longinquus Comp. of, 87,9.with Ace. oflongitudine Extent, 335,B.I.longum with est for Subjv., 254.K.1;longS strengthens Comp. or Superlalative,301, 303 ;with Ace., 335.R.1.loqulwith Ace. and Inf., 527,B.2 ;withIndie, question, 467.N.lubldo in phrases with Inf., 422.N.2.ludos facere with ACC., 342.with Inf., 533, B.I.lugerelux 70,D in Abl. of ; Time, 393,B.5.mactemaer6reM final omitted, 27.N.85,c, 325.B.1.with Inf., 533.B.1.magnificus Comp. of, 87,4.magnitudine with Ace. of Extent, 335,B.I.magnus comparison of, 90 ;constr.with maior, 296.R.5 in;magis,comparisonof Qualities, 299 ;magnl, asGen. of Price, 380,1 maius, with ;Inf.,422.N.3 ;maximi, as Gen. of Price, 380,1 ; non magis quam, 644,N.l.making vbs. of, with two Norns., 206;with two Aces., 340.maledlcere with Dat., 346.B.2.maledicus Comp. of, 87,4.malle conj. of, 174 and N.3;malueram,could have preferred, 254.N.1 ; malim,mallem, as Potential, 257,2, 258.N.1 ;in Unreal Wish, 261,B. ;with Abl., 296,N.I ; with Abl. of Measure, 403.N.1 ;with Inf. or ut, 423.2.N.2, 638 and N.3,546,N.l.malus comparison of, 90; male as neg.,439.N.2.manare with Abl. of Means, 401.N.5.mandate with ut, 546.N.1.mane"re as copulative vb., 206.N.1 with;Abl., 401.N.6.manias Loc., 411,N.l.manifSstus with Gen., 374.N.2 with;Inf., 421,N.l,c.Manner Abl. of, 399 and NN.manus inicere with ACC., 342.mare in Abl. without in, 385.N.1.margarita heteroclite, 68,1.materia heteroclite, 68,2.Material Abl. of, 396; indicated by adj.,ib. ; suffixes for, 182,4.maturate with Inf., 423.2.N.2.maturus Comp. of, 87,l,B.2.m&tutlnus in pred. Attr., 325,R.6.Means Abl. of, 401, and BB..NN.; suffixesfor, 181,6.measure vbs. of, take Abl., 402.Measure Abl. of, 402; of Difference, 403;Abl. of, with vbs. involving Difference,ib. N.I; with ante and post,t'6. N.4.medSri with Dat., 346.B.2 and N.4.medioximus 87,9,N.meditari with inf., 423.2.N.2.meditative verbs formation, 191,5.medium suffixes for, 182,6.medius in pred. attrib., 325.R.6 used;partitively, 291.B.2 ;Abl. used withoutin, 388.memini 175,5,6; First Impv. wanting,267, B.; with Pr. Inf., 281.2.N.; with Ace.,376.B.2 with Inf., 423.2.N.2, 627.R.2 ; ;with cum and Indie., 580,B.2.memoratii as Abl. Sup., 436,N.memoria teneS with Pr. inf., 281,2,N.mendum heteroclite, 68,3.mSns in phrases with ut, 557, B.; inmentem venire,with Gen., 376,R.3;in mentem venire,with inf., 422.N.5.
524 GENERAL INDEX.N.2; n5n meritus Comp. of, 87,9 ; merito as Abi.mode, 482,1 ; contrasted with tum, nS neg. of Opt. Subjv., 260; of Irupv.,of Manner, 399,u.l.vicissim,etiam,482,1,482,5 : modonon modo non,sedsed-met added to personal pron., 102.N.2; n #> quidem, B.1 :providedto ipse, 103.3.N.5.573 ; modo ne,it>. N.S.only,metaplasts 68.molirl with Inf., 423.2.N.2.metathesis of consonants, 9,8.monere with Gen. or Ace., 376 and B.I:metre 730; unit of, 731.with Inf., 423,2,N.2 ;with ut, 546.N.1.metuere with Dat., 346, N. 2 ; with ut, mood 112,4, 253; Indie., 254: Subjv..ne, or Inf., 550 and N.I ; with Inf., 423,2.N.2.255-265; Impv., 266-275 ; Inf., 279-281;attraction of,508,4 ; in Temporal Clauses,metUS with Inf., 550.N.5.560 : in Relative Sentences, 624-635; inmeus 73.R-, 76 ; Voc. of, 100.R-1: early Comparative Sentences, 639 ; in O. O.,forms of, ifc.N.2; synizesis in, ib.x.3, 727,N. ; mea mini, 309,N.2; mel with Gen.650-652.morari with ne, 548. N. 1.Ger., 428,R.l; with u t, 657.B.morigerariwith Dat., 346,8.2.middle voice 218, B., 218; with Ace. of mos (moris) with Inf., 422.NN.2 and 5 ;Respect, 338.N.2.with ut, 557.B.; moribus, 399.N.1.militia in Abl. of Time, 393, B. 5; inLoc., motion vb. of, with Inf., 421,N.l,a; vb. of,411.B.2.with Sup., 435 ; vb. of, with Fut. part.,mllle a subst. in PI., 95.B.3 ; inscriptioua)438.N-; vb. of, with quod, 525,1,N.G; endforma of, t6.K.4 ;mllia, with of, conceived as Rest, 412,8.1.masc. vb., 211,B.l,Ex.6 ;use of, in Sg. mov6re syncope in Pf., 131,3; withand PL, 293 ; as eubst. with Part. Gen., Abl. of Separation, 390, N.I ;with ut,293,N. ; mllia for distributive, 295.N. 553,2: motus, of Moving Cause, 408.N.2.minari, mmitarl with Dat., 346, R. 2; Mulciber heteroelite, 68,4.with Inf.,527,B.2.multare with Abl., 378.B.3.minor quam omitted with, 296, R.I ;multitude substs. of, with PL, 211, R.I,with vbs. of Rating and Buying, 380,1; Ex.o.minoris, minimi, as Gen. of Price, ffi.; multitude" with PL vb., 211,B.l,Ex.a.minus, n > 471,6,1; minimS, n , ib.; multum for Abl. of Measure, 403, N.2;sin minus, 592 si minus, '&. B. ; ; nonminus quam, 644.N.1.very, 439,N.3 ; multO with Comp., 301 ;with Superl., 303.mirarl with Inf., 423,2,N.2, 533,8.1; with munus with Inf., 422.N.2 ; with ut, 546,quod, 642 with ib. N.I.N.2.;si,mlrum with factum and nl, quantum, mutare with Abl., 404.N.1.quln, 209.N.2, 467.N. ; with quod, 642; mutes 6,2,B.with si, 542.N.1; with ib. nl,N.2 ; with miituo f reciprocal action, 221.B.2.Inf.. 422.N.3 with ;quam and Indie., myrtus heteroelite, 68,5.467.N.; with ut, 553,4.mlscere S, with Dat., 346.N.6; withusage of, 498 and NN. ; position of,Dat. and Ace., or Ace. and Abl.,348,B.l. i6., N.I ; asseverative, ib. N.2 ; yes for,miserarl with Ace., 377.N.2.471.B.miserere with Gen., 377.N.1 ;miseret, naming vbs. of, with two Aces., 340.with Gen., 377: misereor, with Gen., namque 498; position of, ib. N.I.ib. ;misergSCO,with Gen., ib. N.I. narrare with inf., 527,8.2.mittere mitte, with inf. for impv., nasals 6,2. A.: nasal class of vbs., 133,iv.271,2,N.2; \vithlnf., 422.N.3; with quod, nascl with two Noms., 206 ;natus,525,l,N.l ; followed by Irnpf. Indie, to constr. of, 296.R.5; with Ace., 336.R.4:give Design, 630.N.2 ;missu, of MovingCause, 408.N-1.with Abl. of Origin, 395.NN.1.3 natti;in Abl. Sup., 436.N.mixed class of Verbs 133, vii.natura in phrases with ut, 657.B.moderari with Dat., 346, R. 2 and N.2. naucum defective, 70, B.; nauci, asmodo strengthens Impv., 269 ; modo Gen. of Price, 380,1-
GENERAL INDEX. 525270; continued by usque, 260; byngve, 270, 444,2 ; with Pf. Subjv., 270,R.2; syntax of, 441, 444; = non, 444,1,N.2; n6 quidem, ib. l,N.2, 445,448,N.2,482,5 and ii.l ;in Final Sentences, 543,4 ; ut ng, 545.R.1; quo n6, ib.; parenthetical,ib. R.3 ; after vbs. of Hindering,548 ; after vbs. of Fear, 550 ; n5non, ib- N.I with ;dum, 573 ;as Concessive.608.ne added to hie, 104,1. N.3 ;to iste,ib.2,N.3; to ille, 103,3, N.4; as interrogative,454; asseverative, ib. N.2; addedto interrogatives, ib. N.3 ;= nonne,ib.N.5; added to num,456,N.; strengthensan, 457,1,N.2 ;to introduce doublequestions, 458; necne or annon,459:to introduce second member of an indirectquestion, 460,2.nearness adjs. of, with Dat., 359.nec = non, 442.N.3 ; see neque.necessarium with ut, 553,4.necesse85,C.; with est instead of Subjv.,254. K.I; with Inf., 538; with ut omitted,638.B.2, 553,4,R.l ; with pred. attracted,538.B.3; with ut, 563,4; withhabeo and Inf., 423.2.N.2,necessity adjs. of, with Inf., 421,N.l,c ;expressed by Indie., 254.K.1, 255, u.ngdum482,5,B.2.nefas 70,B. ;with Inf., 428.N.2; withAbl. Sup., 436.N.2; with Inf., 422.N.2.negare use of, 444,1, N.2; continued byneque neque, 445,N. = dlcS non,;447; with Inf., 527,a.2.negative of Potential, 257; of Opt., 260;of Irnpv., 270; non with Opt., 260;n5n with Impv., 270.R.1 ; noli withInf., 270.B.2 ; advs., 441-449 ;non, 442 ;baud, 443; nec = non, 442.N.3; ng,444 ;subdivision of, 445 ; combinations,446 ; resolution of, ib. N.2 ; positivesupplied from, 447.R.; position of, 448,449 ; two, 449 ; nec non for et,ib. R.3 ;in Copulative Sentences, 480 ;in Finaland Consecutive Sentences, 543,4.negotium in phrases with ut,546. N-2;with Inf., 422.N.5.ngmS decl. of, 70,D. ; and ntillus, 108 ;with PI. vb., 211,K.l,Ex.a; with Impv.Subjv., 270,N.; and quisquam, 317,2;as adj., ib.; et ib.neinO, 2.N.1 ;strengthened by unus ;- ngquis,446,H.3.nequam 85,0.; comparison of, 90.neque with Opt. Subjv. for n8, 260; addsImpv., 270.N.; neque neque with PL,285, N.I; subdivides a general neg., ornego, 445 and N.I ; nec non, 449.R 3 ;for et non, 480 and B.I; for nec tamen,ib. B.3 ;for n8 quidem,ib. N.I ;comparedwith nec, ib. N.2 ;for non, ib. N.4; for ngve, 543.N.3.nequlre conj. of, 170,6 ; nequmont,133,iv.N.2: with Inf., 423.2.N.2.Ngrig-decL of, 41,4.nescio an, 457,2 ;quis, 467.B.1 ; quomodo,i6.N.; with Inf., 423,2,N.2,527,R.l.neu, ngve 444,2 ;adds Final Clause,543,4; neque instead, ib. N.3.neuter decl. of, 76, 108 ;neutiquam,442.N.2.neuter adj. with masc. subj., 211.B.4;demonstrative when subst. is expected,ib. N.3; Sg. sums up PL, ib.; PL pred.to two ferns., 286,3 ;in app. to persons,321,N.2 pron. and adj. in Cognate Ace.,;333,1, 341.N.2 ; proii. and adj. with Part.Gen., 369 ; pron. and adj. not attractedtoGer.,427,N.3,ngve see neu.ni with mirum, 209.N.2 ; range of, 591,N.2.nihil fornullus, 108 with Impv.;Subjv., 270.N.; neg. of quisquam, 317,2; no, 471,6,1 ; nihill as Gen. of Price,380,1; for non, 442.N.2.nihilominus 490,K.nimiswith quam and Indie., 467.N.nimium with quantum, 209.N.2, 467.N.;very, 439.N.3; nimio as Abl. of Standard,403,N.3.nisi with quod, 525,2,N.2, 591,6,R.3; withut,557,N.2, 591,5,B.4; and si non, 591,6;but, except, ib. R.2 ; si, ib. nisi ; forte,vgro, ib. R.4 ; nisi tamen, ib. N.I in;asseverations, 591,6,2 ;with Inf., 635,N.2; with participle, 667.N.nltl-with Abl., 401.N.6 ;with Inf., 423,2,N.2; with ut, 546.N.1.nix-decl. of, 52,7.no how translated, 470,6 and c.nocere with Dat., 346.nolle conj. of, 174; exact use of n51uerit,244, B.3; asnolim, nollem,Potential,257,2, 258; not in Unreal Wish, 261,R-; noli, with Inf. for Impv., 270,N.2,271,2 ; nolim, with Subjv. for Impv.,
526 GENERAL IHDEX.271.2.N.2 with Pf. Inf. pass., 280,2, N. ;inindirect questions, 460, 1 ,o; in rhetoricalquestions, 464, R.number Sg. and PL, 22; Dual, ib. B. and112,1; concord of, 285 and NN. ; violationof Concord in app., 321.R.1 ; substs. of,with Gen., 368 ;definite numbers inAbl. of Time, 393.B.2.numerals cardinals, 94: ordinals, 95 and294: cpd., 96: omission of cent5namilia, ib. 6 ; insertion of et, ib. 5; fractions,ib. 7; signs, 96,ii.; distributives,97 and 295; multiplicatives, 97 ; proportionals,97; advs., 98 ;duo, ambo, uterque,292; mllle, 293: singull, 295:distributives for cardinals, ib. N. ; aliquiswith, 314.R.2 quisque with, ; 318,2 ; with Part. Gen., 370.numero as adv., 399.N.1 ; (in) numerShabere, 340.B.1.nunc strengthens etiam, 478.N.1 nunc;nunc, 482,1 and N.I.nuntiare with Inf., 527.B.2; with Norn,and Inf., 528.N.1.nuperum defective, 85,1.sound of, 3; weakening of, 8,1; asinterjection, 201.R.2, 343.N.1; Q si inWishes, 261; length of final, 707,5.ob in composition, 9,4; vbs. cpd. with,take Ace. or Dat., 331,347 ; to give theCause, 408.N.3; as prep., 416,16; withAce. Ger., 428.R.2, 432 audu.l.et,etiam, 482,5 and N.I ; non modo sed Obesse with Dat., 346.R.2, 347.R.2; withnS quidem,ib. B. 1 ;for n6, 573.N.2. Inf., 422.N.4.nSnne syntax of, 455 ; with indirect obicere with Ace. Ger., 430.N.1.question, 460,1, N.2 ; with rhetorical object direct, becomes subj. of pass.,216; indirect retained in pass., 217;direct, 330; inner, 330,332,333; outer,338 ; indirect, 344 ; of Ger., 427,2; afterDat. Ger., 429.N.2 ; after Ace. Sup., 435,N.3; after Abl. Sup., 436.OBJECT SENTENCES 523-537 ; with quod,524,525 ; with Ace. and Inf., 526,527 ;with Nom. and Inf., 528; alter vbs. ofWill and Desire, 632; after vbs. of Emotion,533 ;in exclamations, 534; as subj.,635; in part., 536, 537; in O. O., 655.Objective Genitive 363; of pers. pron.,364.N.2.obligatewith g@ and Gen. of Charge,378,R.l.obligation expressed by Indie., 254. R.I,255.B.oboedire with Dat., 346.R.2.obrSperewith Dat., 347.R.2.obsaturare with Gen., 383,1, N.2.obsecro strengthens Impv., 269 ; withoutInf., 546.N.3; with nt, 546.N.1.obsequiwith Dat., 346.R.2.obsistere with Dat., 347.R-2 ; with nS,548.N.1 ;with quin, 555,1.
GENEBAL INDEX. 527obstare with Dat., 347.B.2 ;with nS,548.N.1 with quln, 555,1.:obstreperewith Dat., 347.R.2.obtemperarewith Dat., 346.R.2.obtSstor with Inf., 546.N.3.obtingerewith Dat., 347.B.2.obtrectare with Dat., 346.B.2 andN.2.obvenire with Dat., 347.R.2.obversarl with Dat., 347.R.2.occurrere with Dat., 347, R. 2.occursare with Dat., 347. n- 2.Ocior 87,7.5dl conjugation of, 175,5,c ; odi5 6886 aspass, of, if). N.office suffixes for, 181,10.officere with Dat., 346.R.2.officium in phrases with Inf., 422.N.2;with ut, 546.N.2.Olle-for ille, 104.3.N.1.omission of vowels, 8,2, 701,B.2,a ; ofconsonants, 9,6; of subj., 207; of copula,209; of other vbs., ib. Tf.5; of ease i"Pf. Inf. pass., 280,2, a,R.2 and c ;of conjunction,474,N., 481.483.N., 492,N. of;non, 482,5,R.l of vb. of Saying, 545.R.3;;of vb. with sin, 592,E.; of si, 598; of vb.of Protasis, 599; of Protasis, 600; ofApodosis, 601 ; of vb. after quasi andtamquam, 602.N.1 of vb. of comparativeclause, 640.;omittere with quod, 525,1, N.I ;withInf., 423,2,N.2; omitte,with Inf. forImpv., 271,2,N.2.omitting vbs. of, with quod, 555,1; vbs.of, with Inf., 423,2.omnlno yes, 471,a,l.omnis in Abl., without in, 388 omnia,;as Ace. of Kespect, 338,2.onus with Inf., 422.N.2.onustus with Gen., 374.N.1 ;with Abl.,405.N.3.operam in phrases with Dat. Ger., 429,1 and N.I ;with Inf., 422.N.5 ; with ut,546,NN.l and 2.211.R.6; requires prep., 337.R.1.; withEpexegetical Gen., 336.N.1; in app. tpTown in Abl., 356,R.l, 391.U.1 ;in app.toLoc., 411.R.3.tops] defective, 70.D.optare with Inf., 423,2,N.2 with ; ut, ib.N.4,546,N.l as;optat5,Abl. of Manner,399, N.I.OPTATIVE SUBJUNCTIVE 260-265 ; inWishes, 260 ; particles with, 261 ; inAsseverations, 262 ;as Impv. , 263 ;asconcessive, 264; in Deliberative Questions,265.Optimum with Inf., 422.N.3.opus with Abl., 406 with; Gen., ib. N.3 ;with Nom., ib. N.4 ; with part., 437.N.2;with Inf., 422.N.2 ;with ut, 557, R. ; WithNom. and Inf., 628.N.2.Srare with two Aces., 339 and N.I; withInf., 546.N.3 ;with ut,ib. N.I.OBATIO OBLIQUA 608,2; partial, t'6.3, ibA;sequence in, 516; in Relative Sentences,625,R., 628,R., 629.R., 648,649 comes in;without notice, 649.N.2; shift to, ib. N.3;moods in, 650-652 ; interrogative in,651 ; Impv. in, 652 ; tenses in, 653-655 ;in Causal Sentences, 655 ; ConditionalSentences in, 656-659; Logical, 595,B.l,657 ; Ideal, 596,R.5,658 ; Unreal, 597.R.4,659; pronouns in, 660 ; by Attraction,508,4,662; partial, 508,3,663; Representation,654 and N.Orbus with Abl., 405.N.3.order adjs. of, in pred. attrib., 326.R.6.ordinals 94; early forms, 95.N.5; alterlor secundus, 96,5; in dates, 294; forcardinals, ib. and 336,R.l; with quisque,#>-N., 318,2; position of, 676.B.2.ordine as Abl. of Manner, 399, N.I.Origin Abl. of, 395 ; preps, with Abl. of,ib. NN.2 and 3 ; suffixes of, 182,7.orIr1166,169,1 ; ortus, with Abl. ofOrigin, 395.N.1.oriundus with Abl. of Origin, 395.N.1.Oplnio in phrases with Inf., 527, E.2; OS bone, decl. of, 48.R. ; mouth, defective,with ut, 557, is.;opinione as Abl. of 70,D.Eespect, 398, N.I.OStendere with Ace. and Inf., 527.R.2.opitularl with Dat., 346.R.2.OStrea heteroclite, 68,1.oportet Indie, for Subjv., 254,i;.l ;with overlapping action 662,571,N.l.Pf. part, pass., 280.2,&,H.2; with Inf. orSubjv., 635,R.2; with ut, 553,4,R.l.oxymoron 694.OppidO very, 439.N.3; with quantum, Paene with Indie, in Apod, of UnrealCondition, 597.R.3 position of, 677.R.1.;Oppidnm has pred. adj. in agreement, paenitet with Gen., 377 ;with neut.
5 28 GENERAL INDEX.subj., ib. R.2 ;with Inf., 422,N.4 ;with. quod, 542.palam as prep., 417,8.palatals vowels, 2; consonants, 6,1,N.palumbes heteroclite, 68,7.panis heteroclite, 68,12.parwith est instead of Subjv., 254.R.1;with Gen. or Dat, 359.R.1; with Dat.Ger., 429.N.1.parare with Inf., 423.2.N.2; paratus,with Inf., 421,N.l,c.partial obliquity 508,3, 663.particepswith Gen., 374.N.2.participation adjs. of, with Gen., 374.PARTICIPIAL SENTENCES 664-670 ! to 6XpressTime, 665; Cause, 666; Conditionand Concession, 667 ;relative clauses.668 ; Future similarly used, 669,670.PARTICIPLE decl. of, 80,82; Abl. of, 83;Norn, and Ace. PI. of, ib. N.I ; comparisonof, 88,89 Abl. of Cpmp., ib. B.I ; ;Norn. PI. of, ifc.B.2 ; Gen. PI. of, ib. B.3;denned, 112,5; formation of, 115,3;early forms of, 130,7; Pf. pass., 135,1.;Fut. Act., ib. II.; Pf. pass, of Deponentsas act., 167.N.1; Pf. pass, of intrans.vbs. used as act., 220, N.I; Pf. withhabeSand teneo, 238; Fut. periphrastic,247; Pr. periphrastic with esse, ib.N.2; Pf. with ful, 250; as adj., ib. N.2;as pred., 261, K.I ; usage of Pr. and Pf.,282 ; usage of Fut. act., 283 : concordwith two subjs. in Abl. Abs., 285.N.3;Opus and usus, 406; in Abl. Abs., 409,410, and NN.; Pf. pass, parallel withGer., 426.N.2, 427.N.1 ;as subst., 437;Fut. as subst., ib- N.I ; as adj., 438 ;Fut. as adj., ib. N.I; parallel with rel.and Subjv., ib. B.; with interrog., 469 ;sequence after, 518; after vbs. of Perception,etc., 527,N. 1,636; after vbs. ofCausation, etc.. 537; equiv. to cum, 686,B.; for Prot., 593,2 ; for Prot. in ComparativeSentence, 602, N. 3; Concessive,609 ; for rel., 637.particles copulative, 474 ; adversative,483 ;disjunctive, 492: causal, 498 ; illative,499; position of, 679.partitive apposition 322.Partitive Genitive 367-372; with substs.uterque, 371.B.1 ; extensions of, 372,NN. : contrasted with Gen. of Character-parataxis 472.parcerewith Dat., 346.R.2; parce,withInf. for Impv., 271,2,N.2.parenthetical nt and H8 645.B.3.pargre with Dat., 346.E.2.istic, 369.N.1.pariter pariter, 482,3.parts of speech 16.pars with PI. vb., 211,B.l,Ex.a in Abl.;without in, 385.N.1; tuam partem,334, B.2.Part Affected in Ace., 338,1.of Quantity, etc., 368; with iieut. Sg.,369: witli numerals, 370; with pronouns,371 ;with comparatives and superlatives,372 ; preps, instead, ib. B.2 ; withparvus Comp. of, 90 ;in Gen. of Price,380,1.passive voice, 112,2 ; vbs. with twoNoms., 206; vb. agrees with pred., 211,B.1, Ex. 6 ; denned, 214 ; Pf. with Dat.of Agent, 215,1 ;as reflexive, 218 ;ofsomething endured, 219 ; periphrasticforms of, 248-251; with Ace. of Respect,338.N.2 ;impersonal, 346.R.1.patl with ut, 553,2 ; with Inf., tfc.N.patronymics 182,11.paulo, paulum with ante and post,403.N.4.&.pause in Verse, 742.pavSreconstr. of, 550 and N.I.pax decl. of, 70.D in Abl. of Time, ; 393,B.5, 394. R.I.peculiariswith Gen. or Dat., 359, B.I.pecus heteroclite, 68,12.pellere with Abl. of Separation, 390,N.I.pendSre with Gen., 379.penes position of, 413.B.1 ; use of, asprep., 416,17.pentameter elegiac, 785; Pf. Inf. in, 280,2,6,N.2; position of words in, 683.Pr. with Gen., 375; contrasted with adj.,ib. N.I; Comp. of, with Gen., ib. N.2 ; ofpenultpenus11.heteroclite, 68,11.Birth with Abl., 396; Pf. pass, withper vbs. cpd. with take Ace., 331 : withAce. of Extent, 335, 336 ;to expressTime Within Which, ib. B.2, 393.R.1 ;here and there in, 386.R.3; for Abl. ofManner, 399.N.1; with Person ThroughWhom, 401 ; position of, 413.R.1, and N.2 ;use as prep., 416,18,perceiving vbs. of, with Object Clause,523 ;with Ace. and Inf., 526, 527 ; with
GENEKAL INDEX. 529Norn., 528; with part., 627,N.l, 536;Nom. after, 536.N.2.percontarlwith two Aces., 339 and N.I.perdius defective, 85,2.PERFECT defined, 112,3 ; System, 114,2and 3,& ;formation of, 114, 115, 121,2 ;syncopated forms of, 131, 1-3 ; earlyforms of, 131,4; Stem, 134 ; part, pass.,135.1. ; part, as subst, 167.N.1 ; pass,with Dat. of Agent, 215,1; part, used asact., 220, N.I ; defined, 223 ; Historical,225 ; Pure and Historical, 235 ;force of,236 ; trans, by Eng. Pr., ib. K. ; withAor. force, ib. ; Gnomic, ib. N. ;for Fut.Pf.,237; part, with habeS and teneo,238 ; pass, with ful, 250 ; Subjv. asPotential, 257,2 and N.I ;in wishes,260; Subjv. as Impv., 263,2,6, 270.R.2;tense relations in Subjv., 277 ;Inf.as subj. or obj., 280,2 ; after decuit,ib. a, B. 1 ; Emotional, ib. ;afteroportuit, ib. B.2; after velle, 280,2,6 and N.I; after posse,ib. ;afterdebeo, ib. N.3 ; after vbs. of Will andDesire, 280,2,c ; use of part., 282 andN.; part, as subj., 437,N.l ; Sequenceafter, 611,RB.3,4 ; Subjv. in FinalSentences, 512.N.1 ; in Consecutive Sentences,513 and NN. ; Inf., 630; Inf. inO.O., 659.N.perficere with ut, 553,1.pergerewith Inf., 423,2,N.2.perh.ib8reas copulative vb., 206,N.I ; with Nom. and Inf., 628 andN.I.period Eesponsive and Apodotic, 685 ;forms distinguished by Nagelsbach,686 ; Historical and Oratorical, 687.periphrasis for Impv., 271 ; for Fut.periphrastic, 515.R.2 for Fut., 531 and;K.I ; for Apod, in Unreal Condition,897, n.5.PERIPHRASTIC CONJUGATION 129 ; act.,247 ;pass., 251 ;with fin, 247.K.1; withforem, i\ N.I ; Pr. part, with esse,fl>.N.2; with futurum esse ut, 248 ; within eo est,249;with posse, velle, 248,B.; Pf. part, with sum and ful, 250 andB.I ;with forem for essem, ib. N.2 ;withGer., 251 ; Fut. act., 283.perire pass, of perdere, 169,2,K.i.perltUS with Gen., 374,N.4.permanere with two Noms., 206.N.1.permittere used personally in pass.,34217,N.2 ; with Inf., 423.2.N.2, 632.N.1553,2,N.; with ut, 553,2.permitting vbs. of, with ConsecutiveClause, 553,2.pernox defective, 85,2.perperum defective, 85,1.perpetuus and perpes, 84,1 ;perpetuum,as adv. Ace., 336.N.1.perquam with indie., 467.N.persequens with Gen., 375.N.2.perseverare with inf., 423.2.N.2.persons in conjugation of vb., 112,1 ;concord of, 287 ;order of, ib. R.personal endings 114.personal pronouns 304 ; omitted, ib. 1 ;Gen. of,as objective, ib. 2, 364,N.2; poss.for, ib. 2.N.2; Gen. of, as Partitive, ib. 3;for poss., ib. 3.N.1 ; circumlocution forthird personal pronoun, ib. 3,N.2.perspicere with Ace. and Inf., 527.B.1.perstare with Inf., 423,2,N.2.persuadere used personally in pass..217.N.1; with Dat., 346.R.2, and NN.2,4 ;with Inf., 423,2,N.2, 527.R.2, 646,B.l ;with ut, 646,N.l.pertaesum est with Gen., 377-pessum defective, 70,A ; with Ire, 435,N.I.petere with aand Abl., 339.B.1 and N.I;with Ace. Ger., 430.N.1; with Inf., 423,2,N.2; with ut, 546.N.1.Phalaecean verse, 796.Pherecratean verse, 794.phonetic variationsin vowels, 8; in consonants,9 ;in consonant stem-characteristic,121, B.pigetwith Gen., 377; with subj., ib. B.2.pillas Gen. of Price, 380,1.plnus heteroclite, 68,5.plus Comp. of, 87.6.N.place where, in Abl., 385 ;with vbs. ofPlacing, ib. B.I ; with Towns, 386 ;asCause, Means, etc., 389 ; with Books,etc., 387 ;with totus, etc., 388 ;in Loc.,411: ivhence, in Abl., 390, 391 ; withTowns, 391; of origin, 395.N.2 ; whither,in Ace., 337.piace"re with Dat., 346, K. 2; use of Fut.Pf., 244.R.3.pleasure vbs. of, with Dat., 346; adjs. of,with Abl. Sup., 436.N.2.plebs decl. of, 63.N.1, 68,8.plenty vbs. of, with Abl., 405 ; adjs. of.with Gen. or Abl., ib. N. 3.
530 GENERAL ItfDEX.in simple questions, 453, N.I : for" periphrastic,possum non, 449.B.1 ;plSnus with Gen., 374.N.1 ;with Abl.,423,2,N.2 ; Subjv., 254,B.l, 255.B.405.N.3.pleonasm 692.513, B.3, 531. N. 3 and 4; in Apod,of Unreal Condition, 597,B.5,c ; restrictionspleraque as Ace. of Respect, 338,2.with, 627.B.2 ;in Logical Condition,657, B. ;pluere with Abl. of Means, 401.N.5.in Unreal Condition inPLUPEBFECT 112,3 ; formation of, 114, O.O.,659,N.115 ;Aor. forms of, 131,4,6,3 ; denned, Possession Dat. of, 349 ; compared with223 ;force of, 241; translated by Impf., Gen., ib. B.2 ;of qualities, ib. B.3; Gen.and ib. B. ;used as Aor., ib. N.I; periphrastic,of, 362; in 1st 2d person, ib. B.I ;with habeo, ib. N.2 ; Subjv. as Po-omission of governing word, ib. B.3.tential of Past, 258.N.2 ; in Wish, 260 ; possessive pronouns 100-102, 106.N.4 ;with vellem, 261,E. ; Subjv. as Concessive,usage of suus, 309,4 and NN. ; syntax of,ib. N.; Subjv. as Impv. of Past, 312; intense use of, ib. a.l ; for Gen. of273,3 ; tense force in Subjv., 277 ;in personal pron., 304,2,N.2 with Gen. in;Final Sentences, 512,N.l ; to express app., 321,i>.2 for 1st and 2d persons in;Resulting Condition, 563,1 ; Indie, in Subjective Gen., 364 ; as pred., 366, B.3 :Apod, of Unreal Condition, 597.B.2. with interest aud refert, 381 ;withplural of abstracts, 204.N.5; used for (loml, 411.B.4; position of, 676.B.1.Sg., ib. NN.6,7 pred. ; with two subjs., possibility in Indie, rather than Subjv.,285; neut. pred. to two ferns., 286,3.254.B.1, 255.B.plus quam omitted with, 296,u.4 pluris,; postvbs. cpd. with, take Dat., 347; withwith vbs. of Bating and Buying, Abl. or Ace. of Measure, 403.N.4; position380,1 plurimum, with quantum, ; 467,of, 403,N.4,6, 413.B.1 ; omission of,N. ;plurimi, as Gen. of Price, 380,1. with rel., 403,N.4; as adv., 415; aspoema heteroclite, 68,7.prep., 416,20; with Pf. part. pass. ,437,pollere with Inf., 423,2,N.2.N.2.pollicerlwith inf., 627.B.2, 531.N.4. posteaquamsee postquam.pollisdecl. of, 41,4.posterum defective, 74.B.2; Comp. of,pondo defective, 70.A.87, 2 and 7.pone usage of, 416,19.postquam with Hist. Pf. or Pr., 561;ponere with in and Abl., 386, B.I and N. with Impf., 562 ; with Plupf., 563 ; range2; suppose, with Inf., 527.B.2.of tenses with, ib. NN.1-3; with Subjv.,poscere with two Aces. ,339 and N.I; with ib. N.4; Causal with Pr. and Pf., 564 andg and Abl., ib. B.I ; with Inf. or ut, 546,N.I ;in Iterative action, 566,567.NN.1,3.postrldiS quam 577.N.5.position adjs. of, in pred. attrib., 325, R. p8stularewith gaud Abl., 339, R.I and6; of advs., 440 ;of neg., 448 and NN.; ofofN.I ;with Inf., 423.2.N.2, 546.N.3 ;withrel., 612 ; correlative clause, 620 ;ib. N.3.ut,poetical peculiarities in, 683.pOt5nswith Gen., 374.N.3.positive degree lacking, 87,2,7,8, and 9; POTENTIAL SUBJUNCTIVE 257-259; for Pr.with prep, to express disproportion, and Fut., 267; for Past, 258; in questions,298,R.; in comparing qualities, 299; withquam after Comp., 299.N.2 with Part.;Gen., 372.N.2; supplied from neg., 447,259; for Indie., 257.N.3 ;not conditional,257.N.2, 600,2; ofPast coincideswith Unreal of Present, 258.N.2.B.potlrlwith Abl., 407 and N.2,d ; withposse conj. of, 119; potisfor posse, 209, personal Ger., 427.N.5.N.2; use of Fut. and Fut. Pf. of, 242,a.2, potis, e 85,C; potior, 87,7; potius244.B.3; needs no periphrasis, 248,B. ;Indie, for Subjv., 254,B.l ; Impf. Indie,strengthens comparative, 301 ;potiusquam, with Subjv. or Inf., 577.N.6, 631,of Disappointment, ib. B.2 ; with Pf. 3.B.2, 644.B.3 see ; posse.Inf. act., 280,2,&, and N.I with ;quam, power adjs. of, with Gen., 374 ;vbs. of,with Inf., 423 and N.2; sequence afteretc., to strengthen superlative, 303 ;omitted, with quam, ib. B.I; with Inf.,vb. of, 515,B.3; in Indie, rather than
GENERAL INDEX. 531p rae to express disproportion, 296.N.3;vbs. cpd. with take Dat., 347; givesPreventing Cause, 408.N.4; as adv., 415;as prep., 417,9 prae quod, 525,2,;N.2.praecellere with Abl of Kespect, - 397,N.2.praecipere with Inf., 423.2.N.2; withut, 646, N.I ;used personally in pass.,217.N.2 praeceptum, with ut,546,N.2.;praecipitarewith Abl., 390.2.N.3.praecipuumwith ut, 557.B.praeessewith Dat. Ger., 429,1.praeficerewith Dat. Ger., 429,1.praegestirewith inf., 423.2.N.2.(in) praesentia -for the present, 394, R.praesidSrewith Dat., 347.R.2.praestare with Dat., 347.R.2 with Abl.;of Kespect, 397, N.2; with Abl. of Measure,403.N.1; with ut, 653,1.praest51arlwith Dat., 346.N.2.praeter to express disproportion, 296,K.3; vbs. cpd. with, take Ace., 331; positionof, 413.N.3; use as prep., 416,21;with Pf. part, pass., 437.N.2 id quod,;quam quod, quod, 625,2,N.2.praeterlrewith quod, 525,l,N.l.precarlwith ut, 646.N.1.predicate and copula, 205 ;with copulativevbs., 206 ;concord of, 211 ; violationof concord of,i'6. RR.l-C,NN.l-3 in;PI. with two subjs., 285 ;in PI. withneque neque, # N.I ;concord of, inGender, 286 ;in Person, 287 ;Attribution,326; Apposition, ib. and K.6; withAbl. Abs., 410.N.6; after Inf., 638.prepositions assimilation of in composition,9,4 denned, 16,6 repeated with; ;cpd. vbs., 331,BB.2,3 ; with Countriesand Towns, 337, KR. 1-4; withdomum,z5-R.3; omitted with Countries and Towns,337,NN.l-3; instead of Dat., 347.R.1 ;omitted with vbs. and adjs. of Separation,390,2 and 3; with Abl. of Origin,395,NN.2,3 ; syntax of, 412-416 ; origin of,412; position of, 413,678; repetition andomission of, 414; as advs., 415; withAce., 416 ;with Abl., 417; with Ace. andAbl., 418 ;two with same case, 414, R.4;improper, 412,N. with; participles forabstract substantives, 437.N.2.PRESENT 112,3" ; System, 114,3, a rules;for formation of, 121,1 ;notes on System,130 ;formation of Stem, 133 ;defined,223 ;Historical, 224, 229 ; Specificor Universal, 227 ; Progressive, ib.N.I ;of Endeavor, ib. N.2 ;of Resistanceto Pressure, ib. N. 3 ; anticipatesPut., 228 ;with iam, etc., 230 ; contrastedwith Pf. to give Effect in VER-GIL, ib. N.3 ; part, with esse, 247.N.2 ;Indie, for Deliberative Subjv., 254.N.2 ;Subjv. as Potential, 287,2 ; Subjv. inWishes, 260; Subjv. as Irnpv., 263, 270,B.2 ; Subjv. as Concessive, 264 ;tenserelations in Subjv., 277 ;Inf. as subj. orobj., 280, 1 ;Inf. after memini, 281,2,N.; part., 282 ; part, as subst.,437,N.l ;Hist, sequence alter, 511.R.1 ;Inf. aftervbs. of Saying and Thinking, 530 ; Inf.for Fut., 631,NN.3and 4.preventing vbs. of, with ng ( quominus,or qum, 548, 549, 555,1.previous condition given by ex r ab,and Abl., 206.R.2, 396.N.2.Priapean verse, 805.Price Gen. of, 379; Abl. of, 404.prldiequam usage of, 577.N.5.primitive words 179, 1.primoris defective, 85,1.primus with quisque, 318.N.3 ; prlmo,primum, 325.R.7 in ; pred. attrib., 326,B.6 ;used partitively, 291 ;prior,87,8.principal parts 120.principal tenses 225.priusquam with Indie,, 574, 576 ; withPr., 675; with pure Pf., ib. N.I; withPf. or Fut, 576; non priusquam. -dum, & B.; with Subjv., 677 with; utor Inf., 644.B.3.pr5to express disproportion, 298 ;withhabere, 340.R.1 with Nom. or Ace. in;Exclamations, 343,l,N.l for, compared;with Dat., 345.B.2:position of,413,R.l:as prep., 417,10; with Abl. Ger., 433 :pro eo quod, 525,2, N.2 ;pro e5 ut, 642,B.4.probare with inf., 527.B.2.proereatUSwith Abl. of Origin, 395,N.l.proculwith Abl. of Separation, 390.3.N.2 ;as prep., 417,11.prodesse conj. of, 118 ;with Dat., 346,B.2; with Inf., 422.N.4.prodigUSwith Gen., 374.N.1.profectO strengthens atque, 477.N.2.proficere with ut, 553,1.profundusnever with Ace., 335.R.1.
532 GENERAL INDEX.profusus with Gen., 374.N. 1.prognatus with Abl. of Origin, 395.N.1.prohibere with two ACCS., 341.N.2 ; withAbl., 390.2.N.3; with Inf., 423.2.N.2;with n8, 548. and N.I ;with quSminus,549, and N.I ;with Inf., 532.N.1, 549.N.1.prohibiting vbs. of, with Dat., 345, K.I.proinde strengthens Impv., 269 ;ascoordinating conj., 503 ;and proin,ib.prolepsis of subj. of leading clause, 468.promising vbs. of, with Inf., 423,N.5,527, B.4; 531.N.4.promittere-with Pr. Inf., 527.R.2, 531,N.4.PRONOUNS defined, 16,3 ; compared withuouns, ib. N.2 ;decl. of, 17 ; Personal,100-102 ;Determinative, 103 ; Demonstrative,104 ;Relative, 105 ; Interrogative,106 ; Indefinite, 107 ; PronominalAdjectives, 108 ; Possessive, 100-102 ;omitted, 207 ;with Impv., 267.N.; syntaxof, 304-319 ; Personal, 304 ; Demonstrative,305-307 ;hie, 305 ;iste, 306 ;ille, 307 Determinative ; is, 308 ; Keflexive,309 ;idem, 310 ; ipse, 311 ;Possessive,312 ; Indefinite, 313-319 ;quldam,313 ; aliquis, 314 ; quis, 315 ;quispiam, 316 quisquam and ;ullus,317; quisque, 318; alter and alius,319 ;with Part. Gen., 371 ;in O. O., 660.pr5nuntiare used personally in pass.,217.N.2.prSnus constr. of, 359, N. 5.prope as adv., 415 ;as prep., 416,22 ;position of, 678.K.1 ;propior and proximus,87,8 with Ace. or ;ab, 369.K.1.properarewith inf., 423.2.N.2.prSplnarewith Ace. Ger., 430.N.1.propinquus Comp. of, 87,9.proponerewith ACC. Ger., 430.N.1.prSpOSitum est,with Inf., 423,2, N.2;with ut, 646.N.2.593 ; omission of vb. of, 599 ; totalomission of, 600.protraction 743.providere with ut, 546.N.1.providing vbs. of, with Abl., 401.N.1.providus Comp. of, 87,5.proximum i phrases with ut, 557.R.prudgns in pred. attrib., 325,B.G ; withGen., 374.N.4.added to personal pronouns, 102.N.-pte3.pudet with Gen., 377 and B.I ; withsubj., ib. R.2.puer Voc. of, 33.N.2.pugnare with Dat., 346.N.6 with u ; t,546.N.1.purpose in Inf., 423.N.1 ; in Dat. Ger.,429,2; in Sup., 435; in Fut.part, 438.N.;sequence in clauses of, 512 ; reflexive inclauses of, 521; rel. clauses of, 630; seaFinal Sentences.purus with Abl. of Sep., 390.3.N.putare with Gen. of Price, 379; with twoNoms. in pass., 206; (n5n) putaveram,254.N.1 ;pnta, ut puta, for example,274; with Inf., 627.R.2.putting vbs. of, with Dat. and Ace., orAce. and Abl., 348.Qua qua, 482,3..quaerere with g, d6, ex, 339.R.1 ;withInf., 423.2.N.2 ; with Direct Question,467.N.quaeso 175,6 with Impv., 269; without;Inf., 546.N.3.quailsin phrases instead of Comparative,296, N. 3.Quality possession of, 349, R. 3 ; Gen. of,365 and B.I ;Gen. and Abl. of, ib. R.->.400.K.1 ; Gen. of, as pred., 366; Abl. of,400 ; personified quality as person, ib.R.2 ; Comparison of qualities, 299.proprius with Gen. or Dat., 359. R.I ;with ut, 557.B.propter compared with Abl. of Cause,408, N. 3 ; position of, 413.K.1 ;as adv.,415; as prep., 416,23; with Ace. Ger.,432 and N.I.propterea 503.prosody 701-823.prospicerewith Dat., 346, R. 2 ;withInf., 627,R.l ;with ut, 546.N.1.prostare with Gen. of Price, 379.protasis defined, 589 ; equivalents of,quam after comparatives, 296 and R.1 ;omission of, ib. B.4 ; preps, instead, ib.N.3 ;atque instead, ib. N.4 ;with pro,Ut, qui, to express disproportion, 298 ;with positive for comparative, 299.N.2 ;in comparison of qualities, 299; with potuitand superlative, 303; with quiandsuperlative, ib. R.2; magis, nSn aliter,quam ut, 557.N.2 quam ; si, withSubjv. of Comparison, 602 : with quior ut after comparatives, 631,3 with:quam qui and superlative, 642.R.5;
GENERAL INDEX. 533after alius or secus, 643,N.4, with Comparativemoods in, 482-467 ; Indie, in, 463, 464;neg. of, 459 ; particles in indirect, 460 ; quispiam 107,3, and N.I ; syntax of, 316.Sentences, 644 ;with potius, Subjv. in, 465, 466 ; indirect, 467 ; genuine,prius, etc., B.3.463; disconnected, 467.N. ; ex-quamdiu 568; with Indie., 569; range clamatory, 658.of, ib. N.I.qul interrogative 106 and B.quamlibet 606.qul relative 105 and NN.; with quamquamquam603 and N.; with Indie., and Subjv. to express disproportion,605; with Subjv., ib. KB. 1,2, and N; and 298 after ; etc.,dlgnus, 552.B.2; equiv.yet, ib. a.3 with; part., 609.N.1, 667.N. ;to si quis, 625,2; explicative, 626;with Inf., 635.N.2.strengthened by ut, utpote, qulppe,quamvlS 603 and N. with; Subjv., 606; ib. N.I ;quod sciam, 627.B.1 ; equiv. towith Indie., ib. N.I; inflection of vb. of, Cum is, 626.B., 633, 634 ; equiv. to ut is,ib. N.2 ;with licet, 607.N.2; with part., 630, 631; after comparatives with609.N.1, 667.N. with; adj. or adv., 609,quam, 631,3 equiv. to adj., ib. 4 ; ; sedN.2.qul, qul tamen, 636.N.2-, quo quisque,quandS with Causal Indie., 640; withwith comparative, 642, K. 2; seeSubjv., 641 ; early use, 538.N.3, 680.N.3; qu8 and qua.conditional use, 690.N.3.quia after vbs. of Doing and Happening,quandoque with causal clause, 641.N.5; 525,1, N.4; origin of and, correlativesquandoque quandoque, 482.1.N.1. with, 638,NN.1,2 ; with Causal Indie.,quantity rules for, 702-706 ;of final 540; with Subjv., 641; after vbs. ofsyllables, 707-713; of polysyllables, 707- Emotion, 542, n.; with Inf., 635.N.2.709; of monosyllables, 710-713 ;of stem qulcumque 106 and N.5; with Indie.,syllables, 714 ;of cpds., 715 ; in early 254,4, 625.Latin, 716, 717.quldam 107,2 ; syntax of, 313 ; withquantity 12; substs. of, with Gen., 368. quasi, 319, B.2; strengthened by certus,quantumwith minim, minium, etc.,unus, 313.F..;}.209.N.2, 467.N. ;with maximus and quidem with demonstrative pron., 307,tpotuit strengthen superlative, 303 ; B.4 ; position of, 413.N.3, 679 ; yes, withquantum qul, with superlative, ib. B.sang, 471,a.,l.2; quantl, with vbs. of Bating and qnilibet 107 and N.Buying, 380 ;with advs. and Indie., quin with mlrum, 209.N.2; strengthens467,N.Impv., 269 ; non quin as Causal,quantumvls 603 and N., 606.641.N.2; force of, 647; in Consecutivequasi with subst., 439, N. 4; with Subjv. Sentences, 652,3 with;vbs. of Preventing,of Comparison, 602; with Indie., ib. N.I;to apologize, eft.N.2; to give an AssumedReason, id. N.4, 666.N.555,1 with vbs. of Doubt and Un-;certainty, ib. 2; after non dubito, ib. 2,B.I ; equiv. to ut non, 656 ; after vbs.quatenus as a Causal particle, 638.N.5. of Saying, etc., 555,2 in Relative;Sentencesquattuor early forma of, 95.N.3.of Character, 632 and B. ; facereque added to rels., 111,2 ; syntax of, non possum quin, 556.476 and NN.; for quoque, 479.N.2 ;addsqulppe 498.N.8; with qul, 628.N.1.third member, 481, N.qulqui 105 and N.4.quemadmodum sic, 482,3,N.quire conjugation of, 170,a; with Inf.,querl with Ace. and Inf., 633.R.1.433,2,N.2.questions with Potential Subjv., 259; quis indefinite and qui, 107,1; for aliquis,deliberative, 265, 465 rpassionate equiv.ib. B. and N.I ; syntax of, 315 ;to command, 273, 453.N.2 ; predicate aliquis instead, ib. N.I ; familiar usageand nominal, 451 ; rhetorical, 265, 451, of, 317.2.N.2.B.2, 464, 466 ;direct simple, 453-457; quis interrogative 106 ;and qul,t'6. B.;equiv. to Condition, 463.N.3; with ne,454 ;with nonne, 455 with ;num, 456 ;old forms of, ib. NN.1,2 ;qulin Wishes,261; for uter, 300.N.with an, 457 ;direct disjunctive, 458 ;quisnam 106 and N.5.
534 GENERAL INDEX.recipere with Abl. or in, 389.quisquam 107,3,andN.2; syntax of,317;s with Abl., 390, 3,N.l. tive, 636.N.1; repetition of, 615-strengthened by unus, ib. l.N.l; negativereciprocal relations given by inter sS,of, ib. 2; as adj., ib. 1,N.3.221; by alter alterum, etc., ib. B.I ; byquisque 107, 5, and N. ;quisquis instead, invicem, mutuo,etc., ib. a.2.105.N.4; with PI. vb., 211,B.l,Ex.a; with recitation of verses 754.ordinal, 294.N., 318,2; syntax of, 318; recordarl with Pr. Inf., 281,2,N. ;withwith superlatives, ib- 2 ; with reflexives, Ace., 376.K.2.ib. 3; attraction of, ib. N.2 ; suum quisque,rectum with Inf., 422,N.3.ib. N.4; with quo and compara-recusare with Inf., 423.2.N.2; with n6,tive, 642, K. 2 ; ut quisque,with superlative,648.N.1; with quominus, 549 and N.I ;ib.constr. with, 549,N.l.quisquis 105 ;as adj., ib. N.4; with red in composition, 9,4, 715.R.3.Indie., 254,4, 625.reddere with Pf. part., 537.N.2; reddlqulvis 107,4 and N.and fieri, 206.N.1, 340.B.1.quo as Causal conjunction, 541, N. 2 ; n5n reduplication in Pr. stem, 133,11.; inquo in Final Clauses, 545,2 ;quonS, ib. Pf. stem, 134,111. ; omitted in Pf. ofB.I; quo setius, 549.N.4.cpd. vbs., ib.quoad force of, 568 ; of complete coextension,Reference Dat. of, 352.569; until, with Indie., 571; with rgfert with Gen. and Abl., 381, 382 ;Subjv., 572; until, with Subjv., ib. N.5. Nom. with, 381.N.3 ; origin of, ib. N.5;quod in Inner Obj., 333 l.N.l ;introduces expression of Degree of Concern, 382,1Object Sentences, 524; after vbs. of Addingand Dropping, 525,1: after demonstratives,and 2 ; expression of Thing Involved,ib. 3.ib. 2; and ib. ut, 1.N.5 ; refertus with Gen., 374.N.1.quidib.quod, 1.N.2; after verba sentiendi,reflexive 218 ; passive used for, 218;approaches deponent, 218,R-; pronouns,ib. N.T; after demonstratives,with preps., ib. 2.N.2; as to the fact that, 309 ; is retained instead of reflexive, ib.with Subjv., ib. 2.N.3; with Subjv. in N.I ; strengthened, ib. N.2 ; suum quisque,O. O., ib. 3; after vbs. of Motion, ib.l,318.N.3 ;with ipse, 311,2 ; withN.6; gives Ground in Exclamations, 534, Ace. of Respect, 338,N.2; in subordinateB.I ;with Causal Sentence in Indie., clauses, 520-522 ;not in Consecutive540; with Causal Sentence in Subjv., Sentences, 521,K.l refers to real subj.,;541 ; after vbs. of Emotion, 542 ;with 309,2, 521.B.2; free use of, ib.R.3; Indie.dlceret,& N.S ; non quod,ib. N.2 ;Relative Sentences, ib. a.4 ; ambiguitymagis quod, 641.N.2 ; correlatives of, in, ib. N.3 ;demonstrative instead of,638.N.1 and quia, ib. N.2; nisi quod,; ib. B.l.N.3.591.K.3 quod ;si, 610.B.2.reformidare with inf., 423.2.N.2.quonisee cum.refragarlwith Dat, 346.R.2.quSminus force of, 547; with vbs. of refraining vbs. of, with quin, 555,1.Preventing, etc., 549; for nS, 548.N.2; refusing vbs. of, with nS, 548 ;withand quin, 549.N.3.quominus, 549; with Inf., 548.K.2; withquomodo with Direct Question, 467.N. quin, 555,1.quoniam with Causal Indie., 540 ; with Reizianus Versus 822.Subjv., 641; original force of, 538.N.3 ; regiSin Abl. without in, 385.N.1.early tisage of, 580.N.3.relation suffixes for, 181,8.quoque syntax of, 479 ;and etiam, 479, relationship suffixes for, 181,7,182,11.K. and N.I ;que instead, ib. N.2 ;with relative pronouns 105 made; indefinite,sed and vSrum, 482,5 and N.I.111,1 or universal, ib. 2; in Inner Obj.,;Bating vbs. of, with Gen. and Abl., 379,333.1.N.2 ;instead of app. with rgfert,381.N.2; contrasted with interrogative,380.467.K.2, 611,B.2; indefinite with Indie.,rati5 in Abl. of Manner, 399, N.I ;with 354,B.4; with Subjv., 667.N. ;advs. instead,Ut, 546.N.2.611,B.l; continued bydemonstra-
withGENERAL INDEX. 535RELATIVE SENTENCES 610-637 for Protasis,593,1: general consideration;of,610; how introduced, 611; position of,612; antecedent in, 613 ;concord in, 614and EB.; id quod, etc., in app. to a sentence,ib. R.2 ; incorporation of app., ib.B.4 ; repetition of antecedent, 615; incorporationof antecedent, 616; attractionof, 617 ; correlative of, 618 ; absorptionof correlative, 619; position ofcorrelative, 620; indefinite antecedent,621; tenses in, 622,623; in Iterativeaction, 623 ;moods in, 624-635 ;indefiniteand generic relatives with Indie.,254.B.4, 625,1; or Subjv., ib. B.; conditional,625,2 ; explanatory, 626 ; Subjv.in explanatory, 627 ;quod sciam, etc.,ib. K.I; restrictions with esse, posse,attinet, i&- R.2; with Subjv. by PartialObliquity, 628 ; with Subjv. by Attraction,629 ; Final, 630 ; attraction ofdiceret, ib. N.3 ; Consecutive, 631 ;afterdefinite antecedent, ib* 1 ; after indefiniteantecedent, i6.2 ; after comparative,ib. 3; parallel to adj., ib. 4 ; withquln, 632; Causal, 633; Concessive andAdversative, 634; in Inf., 635 ; combination of, 636; participle instead, 637,668;in O. O., 655 and BB.relatuas Sup., 436.N.relieving vbs. of, with Abl., 390,2.relinquerewith Ace. Ger., 430.N.1.reliquum est with ut, 553,4.usedreliquilS partitively with Subst.,291.K.2 alius for, 319.N.1 reliqua,; ;as Ace. of Kespect, 338,2.remembering vbs. of, with Gen., 376 ;with Ace., ib. R. 2.rgmex defective, 70, D.reminding vbs. of, with Gen., 376; withAbl. or Ace., ib. EB.1,2.removing vbs. of, with Abl., 390,2.rendering vbs. of, with Inf., 421,N.1,6.reperlrlwith Nom. and Inf., 528.N.1.repetition of relative, 615-repletuswith Gen., 374.N.1.reponerewith in and Ace., 385, N. 2.reposcerewith two Aces., 339 and N. 1,representatio 654 and N., 656.N.1.representation vbs. of, with Ace. and Inf.,526, 527 ;with part., 527.N.1, 536.reprimerewith n e, 548,N.i.repugnare with Dat., 346, K. 2 with; n6,548,N.lTrequiSs heteroclite, 68,8.requiring vbs. of, with two Aces., 339and B.1.N.1 ;with ab,ib. N.2.rSri part, of, with Pr. force, 282, N.r6s for neut, 204.N.4; construed likeneut., 211.N.2 with ;AppositionalGgn.,361,1 ; in phrases with Inf., 422,N.2*7divlnam rem facere,with Abl., 401, N.* ; rem certare, 333,2,R.resistere with Dat., 346.R.2-,n8,548.N.1 ; with qum, 555,1.resisting vbs. of, with Dat., 346.resolution of long syllable, 732.resolving vbs. of, with Inf., 423 and N.2 ;with ut, 646.Kespect Ace. of, 338; with vbs. of Clothing,etc., ib. N. 2 ;Abl. of, 397 ; Abl. of,with comparatives, 398 ;Abl. of, withwords of Eminence or Superiority, 397,N.2 ; preps, instead, ib. N.I.respice with Direct Question, 467.N.responde with Direct Question, 467.N. ;ius respondere, 333, 2, B.rest conceived as end of Motion, 412,B.2.restat with ut, 553,4.restrictions in Relative Sentences, 627,BR.1,2.result for Sentences of, see ConsecutiveSentences.r6t heteroclite, 68,12.retinere with n, 548.N.1.reus with Gen., 374.N.2 ; 378.B.1.ridere with Ace. and Inf., 533,R.l.rhotacism 47.rhythm in arrangement, 627,2,6 ; denned,739 ; ascending or descending,735 ; names of, 736 ;classes of, 737 ;rhythmical series, 738 ;union of Ian,guage with, 748.rSbur decl. of, 44,5, 45,R-2.rogare with two Aces., 339,and N.I ; withAce. Ger., 430.N.1 ; with ut, 546.N.1 ;with Direct Question, 467.N. ;rogatU,of Moving Cause, 408.N.1.; with Inf. orUt, 546,N.3.root denned, 25,1, N., 177.rudis with Gen., 374.N.4.ru.S as limit of Motion, 337 ; in Abl.ofSeparation, 390,2; rurl in Loc., 411,R.2.S final omitted, 27,N., 703.E.3; suffixeswith, 188.
536 GENERAL INDEX.with ib. N.2; syntax of, 485 ;quidem,ib. B.I ;sacer with Gen. or Dat., 359, B. 1 ; sacrumnS omitted, ib. N.2 ; Si with 5 in Wishes, 261 and N.I ; with-facere,with Abl., 401.N.4.et, repeated,ib. N.2 ; strengthened, ib. N.3.Sacramento as Abl. of Manner, 399, seeking vbs. of, with Final Dat., 356,N.2.N.I.seeming vbs. of, with two Noms., 206.sacrificare with Abl., 401.N.4.semi-deponents 167-sacrificing vbs. of, with Abl., 401,N.4. semi-hiatus 720,R.l.saepeas attrib. to subst., 439.N.4. semi-vowels 6,2, A.saltern strengthens at, 488.N.2. sempiternum as adv. Ace., 336.N.1.salutaris has no superlative, 87,9. senatus decl. of, 61, 68.5.salv6re conjugation of, 176,4.sending vbs. of, with Ace. Ger., 430.sane strengthens Iinpv., 269 ; very, 439, senex decl. of, 56,5 ; Comp. of, 87,9.N.3 ; with concessive n6, 608 ; with sentence simple or cpd., 201 ; syntax ofquamand Indie,, 467.N.; yes, 471,a. simple, 202,ff. ; simplest form of, 202;decl. of,sanguls 41,4.simple expanded, 284, ff. ; incomplete,sapiens as subst., 437.N.1.450-470 ; coordination of, 473 ; Copulative,Sapientia in phrases with Inf., 422, N.474-482; Adversative, 483-491; Dis-2 ; with ut, 657.R.junctive, 492-497 ; Causal and Illative,Sapphic verse, 797, 804.498-503 ; Object, 523-537 ; Causal, 538-satias heteroclite, 68,8 and 12.542 ; Final, 543-550 ; Consecutive, 551-satisi' fry, 439.N.3 attraction of pred.; 558 ; Temporal, 559-688 ; Conditional,after satius est, 535.R.3.589-602; Concessive, 603-609 ; Relative,saturate with Gen., 383,l,N.2.610-637; Abridged, 645-663; Participial,Saturnian verse, 758-664-670.satUS with Abl. of Origin, 395,N.l. sententia in phrases with ut, 646.N.2,saying vbs. of, with Object Clause, 523 ; 557.B.vbs. of, with quod, 625,1,N.7 ;vbs. of, sentlre with Ace. and Inf., 627.B.2.with Ace. and Inf., 626,527 ; vbs. of, Separation Gen. of, 374.N.8, 383,2 ;Abl.with Nona, in pass., 528 ; vbs. of, attractedof, 390.into Subjv. after quod, 541.N. SEQUENCE OF TENSES 509-519 ;rule and3 ;vbs. of, omitted, 645.B.3 ; vbs. of, modifications, 509; general considerations,with quin, 555,2.610 ;shift from primary to secondaryscat6re with Gen., 383.1.N.2.sequence, 511.B.2 ;in sentencesscazon verse, 762.of Design, 512 ; iu sentences of liesult,scientia in phrases with ut, 657.R.613 ;in coincident sentences, ib. N.3 ;scilicet yes, 47l,o,2.representation of Subjv. in, 614, 515 ;SClre first Impv. wanting, 267.R- ; sciens in O. O., 516 ; after other moods, 517 ;inpred. attrib., 325,R.G ;quod sciam, after Inf. or part., 518 ; original Subjvs.quantum sci5, 627, R-l ;with Inf., in, 619 ; derangement of, ib. B.; in Comparative423,2,N.2, 527.R.1 ; followed by directSentences, 602, R.l ; after Hist.question, 467,N. ; sciens, with Gen., Pr.,611, B.I; after Pure Pf., ib. R.3,375.N.2; sdtQ as Sup., 436.N.613.R.1 after Hist. ; Pf., 511.R.4 after;scrlbere with Ace. and Inf., 627, R. 2; accidit, etc., ib. R.2 ;after vb. withwith ut, 546,N,1.future character, 615, B. 3.season adjs. of, in pred. attrib., 325, K. 6.sequester heteroclite, 68,4.secondary words see Derivatives. sequitur with ut, 553,3.secundum as prep., 416,24; alter for sertum heteroclite, 68,3.secundus.servire with Dat., 346.R 2.S6CUS 70,B ; sequius, 87,8 strengthens; servus omitted, 362.N.1.Sin, 694; with quam, 643.N.4.shortening of penult, 701,R-2,ft; of vowels,S8d in composition, 9,4, 715.B.1.716, 717.Bed introduces contrast to demonstrative,showing vbs. of, with two Noms., 206 ;307.B.4 with ; etiam, quoque, with two Aces., 340; with Ace. and Inf.,after non modo, 482,5 and N.I; with 526, 527 with;Nom. and Inf., 528.
GENERAL INDEX.537solvere with Abl.,-out 6 in Wishes, j&.N.l ; SIS, SOdes,with quland Subjv., 631,1. cation of, 288, ff.; prolepsis of subj. ofsultif. with Impv., 269 ;in Indirect somniare390.2.N.2.with Ace. and Inf., 527.B.1.Question after vbs. of Trial, 460,1,6 ;in sonants 6,2,B.Iterative action, 666, 667 ; sign of Condition,S0rtlt5 as Abl. of Manner, 399.N.1.690 and N.I ;ib.slquidem, N.2, Sotadean verse, 816.596.B.5; si n5n and nisi, 691; sin, 692; sound vbs. of, with neut. Ace. of Innersi uiodo, tamen, vero, 695,n.O; si Object, 333.2.N.6.forte, ib. N.I; Concessive, 604, K.I ;with Specification Gen. of, 361.Inf., 635.N.2.spectare with ex and Abl., 402, B. 2.sibilants 6,2,A; suffixes with, 188. specus heteroclite, 68,9.Sic coordinate with other particles, 482, spgrare with Inf., 527.R.2; with Pr.4,N.; correlative of si, 690.N.1.Inf., 531.N.4.slcut gives Assumed Eeason, 602, N. 4.SpSs with est and Pr. Inf., 631.N.4; insignificarewith inf., 527.B.2.phrases with Inf., 527.B.2; with ut,Slgnumin phrases with ut, 646.N.2.646.N.2 ; in Abl. of Respect, 398.N.1.silentio as Abl. of Manner, 399.N.1. splnter defective, 70.B.Bimilis- -compared, 87,3 ; with Gen. or sponte defective,70,A.Dat., 359, K.1 and N.4.Standard Abl. of, 402, 403 ; ex and Abl.simul as prep., 417,12; simul simul,instead of Abl., 402.B.2 ;Abl. of, with482,1 and N.I ; Temporal, with atque ante or post, 403.N.4 ;Ace. of Extent(c), as soon as, 661-563 ;Causal with for Abl., ib. N. 3 ;of comparison omitted,Pr. and Pf., 664and N.; with Fut. and297-Fut. Pf., 665 and N.Stare with Gen. of Price, 379; to abidesimulare with Inf., 627.R.2.by, with Abl., 401, N.6 to ; persist in, withBin use of, 592; strengthened by minus, Inf., 423,2,N.2.etc., ib. B.Statuere with in and Abl., 385.B.1 ; withsine position of, 413.R.1 as prep., 417,; Inf., 423,2,N.2 ; with ut, 546.N.1.13 ;with Abl. Ger., 433.N.2.Status in phrases with ut, 557.B.sinere with Inf., 423.N.C, 553,2,N.; with stem 25,1, 132; Present, 114,3,a, 133;ut,532,N.l,553,2.Perfect, 114,3,6, 134; Supine, 114,3,c,singular in collective sense for PL, 204, 135 ; Formation of Verb stem, 132-135 ;N.8 ; Voc. with PI. vb., 211.N.2 ; neut. varies between Conjugations, 136;sums up preceding PL, ib. N.3 ; as a quantity of stem syllables, 714.subj.. combined with cum and another stem-characteristic 26, 120; euphonicword, 285, N. 2.changes in, 121.R.singularein phrases with Inf., 422.N.3; Stlllare with AbL, 401.N.5.in phrases with ut, 553,4.studgre with Dat., 346,s.2; with Dat.singulus with numerals, 295.Ger., 429,1 and N.I ; with Inf., 423.2.N.Slquidem 590, N. 2, 595,B.5.2 ;with ut, 546.N.1.sinister Comp. of, 87,i,a.l.Studiosus with Gen., 374.N.5.Sis strengthens Impv., 269.stultitia in phrases with Inf., 422, N. 2.sistl as copulative vb., 206.N.1.Suadere with Dat., 346.B.2, and N.2;Slve use of, 496 ; slve slve,ib. 2,595, with Inf., 423.2.N.2 ;with ut, 646.N.1.R.4; or ib. N.I ;and SOU, ib. N.3. Sub in composition, 9,4; vbs. cpd.smell vbs. of, with Inner Object, 333,2, with, take Ace. or Dat., 331, 347; withN.5.condicione, etc., 399,N.3; usage of, assocer and socerus, 32,l,N.prep., 418,2.sod5s strengthens Impv., 269-subesse with Dat, 347.B.2 ;timorem,SOlSre with Inf., 423.2.N.2; BOlitS,as with Ace. and Inf., 533.B.1.Abl. of Respect, 398.N.1.subject 201 ;in Nom., 203 ;in Ace. withSOllicitarl with Ace. and Inf., 533,B.l. Inf., ib. B.I ;forms of, 204 ; omitted,solus decl. of., 76 ;in pred. attrib., 325, 207; of impersonal vbs., 208,1,N. andB.6 ; n6n SOlum Bed, etc., 482,5, and B.I; 2.N.1; Multiplication of, 285,ff.; Qualifi-
538 GENERAL INDEX.dependent clause, 468 ;of Inf. omitted,527.R.3, 532, K.2 and N.2; Ace. and Inf.as, 535 ;attraction of pred. after Ace.and Inf., ib. B.3.SubjectiveGenitive, 363, 364; poss. pron.instead, 364.SUBJUNCTIVE 112,4 ; early forms of, 130,4;Aorist forms of Pf. and Plupf., 131,4,6,2,3; Indie, for Deliberative, 254.N.2;with generic relatives, ib. B. 6,625, R.;force of, 255 Indie, with vbs. of Possi-;bility, etc., I&.B. ;Ideal and Unreal, 256,1 ;Potential and Opt., ib. 2 Potentialof Pr.and Fut., 257-259 ;Potential forIndie., ib. N.3 ;Potential of Past, 258 ;Potential of Past with vellem,etc. , ib.N.I; Opt., 260; negs. of Opt., ^..particleswith Opt., 261 ; Impf. for Unrealwish, ib. N.2; in Asseverations, 262;as Impv., 263, 267, 270, B., 272; as concessive,264 and N. ; tense relations of,277 ; with quam ut or quam qul toexpress disproportion, 298; in Deliberativeor Rhetorical questions, 265,465, 466 ;in Indirect questions, 467 ;after vb. with Fut. character, 615,K.3 ; Original in dependence, 519 ;with quod,as to the fact that, 525,2,N.3 ;tion, 509,4, 629 ; after potius, 644.R.3 ;in 6. O., 650-652.sublimis in pred. attrib., 325.R.6.SUbolet with Inf., 422.N.4.subordination denned, 472; syntax ofSubordinate Clauses, 504,ff.; divisionof, 505-507 ;moods in, 508 ; Sequenceof Tenses in, 509-519.subsequent action syntax of Sentencesof, 574-577 ;with Indie., 574-576; withSubjv., 577.substantives denned, 16,1, and B.l.N.l ;inflection of, 17; division of, 18; genderof, 19, 20 ;mobilia, 21,2 ; epicene, ib.3 ; irregular, 67-71 ; heterogeneous,without suffixes, 183 ; adjs. and parts,used as, 204.XN. ; PI. of abstracts, ib.NN.5,6; agreement of pred., 211 andBB..NN.; with several adjs. in Sg., 290,B.2 ;common surname in PL, 290,N.I ; verbal with Ace., 330.N.3, 337.N.5 ;verbal with Dat., 356.N.3, 357, 358.N.2 ;in Abl. Abs., 410.N.5 ;with Dat. Ger.,428.N.5 ; with Inf. for Gen. Ger., ib. N.4 ;in phrases with Final Sentence, 546,B.2 ;in phrases with Consecutive Sentence,557 and B.Sllbter vbs. cpd. with take Ace., 331;as adv., 415 ; as prep., 418,2.subvenire with Dat., 347.B.2.suecSdere with Dat., 347.B.2.succrescere with Dat., 347.B.2.succumbere with Dat., 347.R.2.succurrere with Dat., 347,8.2.SUdare with Abl. of Means, 401.N.5.sufferre-Pf. of, 171.N.2.suffixes 180 ; primary and secondary, ib.N.I; of substantives, 181; of adjs., 182;forming diminutives, 181,12, 182,12; indetail, 184-189 ;with vowels, 184 ; withgutturals, 185 ; with dentals, 186 ;withlabials, 187 ; with s, 188 ;with liquids,189.suffragarlwith Dat., 346,s.2.sui decl. of, 102 and N.I ;with -met,ib. N.2; with -pte,ib- N.3 ;circumlocu-in Final and Consecutive Sentences, 543,4 ; with ut for Inf., 557.N.1 ; in TemporalClauses, 560,2, 563,NN.4,6 ; inlterativoaction, 567.N.; in Contemporaneousaction, 572, 573 ;tion for Part. Gen., 304,3, N.2; usage of,in Subsequent 309, 520-522 ; complement of Inf., 309,3;action, 577 with ;cum, 585, 588 in; is instead, ib. N.I; with SUUS, ib. N.2.Belative Sentences, 627, 628 ; by Attrac-sultis strengthens Impv., 269.sum see esse.summus comparison of, 87,2 ;used partitively,291, B.2.supellex decl. of, 44,5.super vbs. cpd. with, take Ace. or Dat.,331, 347; as adv., 415; as prep., 418,4 ;with Ace. Ger.,432,N.l ; with Abl. Ger.,433 id ;quod, quam quod, 525,2,N.2.superarewith Ace. of Respect, 397.N.2.superessewith Dat., 347.B.2.superior 87,2 and 7.superiority vbs. of, with Ace. of Respect,397.N.2.superlative in issimus, 86; in rimus,87,1; in limus, ib. 3; in entissimus,67 ; heteroclites, 68 ; metaplasts, ib, ;defective, 69 ;singularia tantum, ib.A ;pluralia tantum, n>. B ;heterologa,ib. C ;formation of, 180, 181 ;ib. 4 and 5; lacking, ib. 9; of parts., 89 ;of advs., 93; meaning of, varies withposition, 291,B.2,302; strengthened, 303;with quam, quantum, qul, ib. B.2,642,
GENEKAL INDEX. 539B.5; with quisque, 318,2; with Part.Gen., 372; with preps., ib. B.2; withlit, 642.B.2.supersedSrewith Abl., 390.2.N.3.superstes with Gen. or Dat., 359,B.l.PUPINE 112,5; system, 114,3,e; formationof, 116,3, 121,3; stem, 135; in Abl. ofSep., 390.3.N.3, 436.N.4: in Abl. of liespect,397,1; with opus, 406.N.5; denned,434; Ace. of, 435; Abl. of, 436.SUppetiae defective, 70,B.supplexwith Dat., 346.N.5.supplicarewith Dat., it. 346, 2 and N-.4.supra with quam after a comparative,296, N.3; with Abl. of Measure, 403.N.1;as adv., 415; as prep., 416,25.surds 6,2,B.surname common, in PI., 290.N.1.BUS decl. of, 59.susce'nse're with Dat., 346,11.2.susciperewith Ace. Ger., 430.N.1.suspicari with Ace. and Inf., 527.B.2.suspicere with Ace. and Inf., 627.B.1.suspirare with Ace. and Inf., 533.B.1.SUStin6re with Inf., 423.2.N.2.SUUS (OS) 102 ; syntax of, 309; emphatic,ib. 2 ; with prep, phrases, ib. 4 ; is instead,ib. N.I ; suum quisque, ib. N.3;suo tempore, ib. 4; with Gen. Ger.,428.B.1 ; in dependent clauses, 521jsuom with tit, 657.B.syllaba anceps 741.syllables division of, 10 ;namesfor, 11;open, 11,B.; close, ib.; length of, 12;common, 13; quantity of final, 707-713 ;of polysyllables, 707-709 ;of monosyllables,710-713.syllepsis 690.syuapheia 728.syncope 725-743 ;in Pf. forms, 131, ff.synecdoche 695.synizeais 727-syntax denned, 201.systole 722.T sound of, 7 ; t-clasa of vbs., 133,m.tabes heteroclite, 68,8.tabo defective,
540 GENERAL INDEX.towns with Ace., 337; in Abl. of Place.of, 114, 115, 121 ; syntax of, 222-252 ;tendere mantis with Dat., 358.N.3.Time How Long, 393.B.2. ultimate defined, U.tenure with Pf. part, to denote MaintenanceWhere, 386; in Abl. of Place Whence, 391;of Result, 238 ; memoria in Loc., 411 ;with preps., 337.N.3. 391,teneo, with Pr. Inf., 281,2,N.; (sg) with B.I ; with appositives, 337.B.2, 386.R.1,nS, 548.N.1 ; with quSminus, 549 ; 391.R.1, 411.R.3.with quill, 665,1; with ut, 653,1 ;tengrl, tractatu asSup., 436.N.with Gen. of Charge, 378.R.1.trade suffixes for, 181,4.tenses 112,3; signs of, 114,2; formation tradere with Ace. Ger., 430,N.l ; withAce. and Inf., 527.B.2.definitions, 223; of continuance, attainment,tradesman suffixes for, 181,3.or completion, 224; Pr., 227-230; training vbs. of, with Ablv 401,N.l.Impf., 231-234 ; PuraPf., 235-238 ; Hist. trajection 696.Pf., 239, 240; Plupf., 241; Fut., 242, trans in composition, 9,4 ; vbs. cpd.243; Fut. Pf., 244, 245; periphrastic, with take Ace., 331 ; as prep., 416,26.246-251; in Letters, 252; of Indie., 276; transitive verb defined, 213 ;used intrans.,i&.of Impv., 278; Sequence of, 509; inR.a:>;Final and Consecutive Sentences, 643, transposition of consonants, 9,8.3 ;in Relative Sentences, 622, 623 ;in tres decl. of, 95.O. O., 653-655; in Inf., 279, 653; of trial vbs. of, with si, 460,1,6; with impliedSubjv., 277, 654, 655 ; fiepresentatio,protasis, 601.654, N.tribes in Abl. of Origin, 395, N. 2.tenus position of, 413.R.1 ; usage of, as tribuere with ut, 553,2.prep., 417,14.Qtributum heteroclite, 68,5.terminatioust of cases 27.tricorporis defective, 85,1.terra in Abl. without in, 386.N.1 ; terraeastrinl-97,R.3.Loc., 411.B.2.tritum with Inf., 422.N.3.tertitun est with ut, 653,4.trochee shortened by Iambic Law, 717;tSstis est with Ace. and Inf., 52^,a.2. trochaic foot, 734; rhythm, 736;thematic class of verbs 133,1.rhythms, 768-776.thickness how expressed, 335.R.1. tu decl. of, 101 and N.I; synizesis in, ib.thinking vbs. of, with two Noms., 206; N.4; with met and -pte, 102.NN.2.3; vestrlwith Object Sentence and quod, 523,and vestrum, 304,2 and 3, 364, R.;625,1, N.7; with Inf., 627; vbs. of, attractedinto Subjv. after quod, 641.N.3;poss. pron. for, 304,2,N.2; till, VCStrl,with Ger., 428.R.1.vbs. of, with quln, 555,2.tugrl with Ace. and Inf., 527.R.1.threat vbs. of, with Inf., 423.N.5.turn with subst., 439.N.4 with etiam,;Tlburl as Loc., 411, K.I.478.N.1 ;as coordinating particle, 482,1time adjs. of, in pred. attrib., 325.R.6 ; and N.I; fum turn, 482,1 and N.I;suffixes for, 182,8; when, in Abl., 393 ; Ctun turn, 588; correlative of si, 590,how long, in Ace., 336; within which, inAbl., 393; with per, 336, 393.B.1 ; withN.I.tuus (OS) 101 and N.3 ; tuum with ut,tOtuS, ib. R.2; when = for which, ib. K.3; 657.R; tUl with Gen. Ger., 428.R.1.with hie, ille,ib. B.4; preps, for Abl.,394 ; lapses of, with cum, 580,B.3; given U length of Final 707,6.by part., 665, 670,1.ubi o soon as, with Indie., 561-563 ;timfire constr. of, 650 and N.I: with Causal, with Indie., 564,s. 1.565 and N.I;Inf., 423.2.N.2.with Iterative action, 566, 667 ;withtimor est, with inf., 550,N.5: tim5rem Subjv., 567.N. Conditional, ;690,N.3.subesse, with Inf., 533.R.1.Qllus decl. of, 76 ;and quisquam, 107,titles position of, 676, R. 4.3.N.2, 108; syntax of, 317.tmesis 726.Uls 416,27.tOtus decl. of, 76; in pred. attrib., 325, ulterior 87,8 ultimus in pred. attrib.,;B.6; with Abl. of Place Where, 388; with 325.B.6.
2 -GENERAL INDEX. 541Ultra with Abl. of Measure, 403.N.1;position of, 413.K.1; as adv., 415; asprep., 416,27.uncertainty vbs. of, with quin, 555,2.understatement definition of, 700.undertaking vbs. of, with Ace. Ger.,430.unimanus defective, 85,2.unlikeness adjs. of, with atque (ac),643.UNREAL CONDITION 597; with Impf. ofwith Indie,quidam, 313,u.3; with quisquam, 317,l,N.l ; with nem.5, nullus, 317.2.N.3 ; inpred. attrib., 325, B.G ;with prep, forPart. Gen., 372.R.2; with qul andSubjv., 631,1.unusquisque 107, 5.urbs with name of Town, requiresprep., 337.B.2, 386.E.1, 391.K.1, 411.B.3;with Appositional Gen., 361,N.l.urgSrlwith Gen. of Charge, 378.H.1.urging vbs. of, with ut, 646.usquewith Ace. of Motion Whither, 337,N.4; usage of, as prep., 416,28.fiSUS with Abl., 406 ; with other constr.,ib.fi.5; as pred., ib.; with Pf. part., 406,ut in wishes, 261; with quam,437.N.2 ;in phrases with ut, 557,R. ;usu venit, with ut, 563,3.to expressdisproportion, 298, 631,3,B.l ;645.R.2, 552 ; parenthetical, ib. B.3 ;ut ng, 545.B.1, 546.B.3 ;after vbs. ofFear, 560 and N.I ;to add restriction,552. B.3 ; after vb. of Causation, 553,1 ;after vbs. of Compelling and Permitting,ib. 2 ;after vbs. of Happening, ib.3 ;after impersonals, ib. 4 ; Explanatory,557 ; Exclamatory, 658 ;withmagis quam, 557.N.2 ut primum, as;soon as, with Indie., 561-563 ; Causal,664, N.; with Iterative sentences, 666,667 ; nisi ut, 567.N.2, 591.B.3 ;with eland Subjv., 602; with Subjv., to givean Assumed Reason, ib. N.4 ;Concessive,608 and B.I; with qul, 626,R.l;after comparatives, 631,3,B.l ; withquisque and superlative, 642.R.2; pr5eo ut,as Causal, ib. B.4 ; ut qul,withsuperlative, ib. a.5 ; introduces O. O.after vbs. of Will and Desire, 652.R.1 ;with part, to give Assumed Reason,666.N.decl. of, 44,2, 45.B.1.fiter, bagopposition to Past, ib. B.I ;Uter, which decl. of, 76, 106; quis for,in Apod., ib. EB.2,3 ;in O. O., ib. E.4, 300.N.; utrum as interrogative particle,659 ; Apod, in, after vb. requiring468 in;Indirect Question, 460,2,N.Subjv., 697,B.5; with absque, ib. N.3 ;utrum, whether or no, 459, N. 2.unus decl. of, 76, 95.N.1 ; PI. with pluraliauterlibet 108.tantum, 95, B.I ;as distributive, uterque decl. of, 108 ;with PI. vb., 211,97,B.3; with superlative, 303 ;with u.l.Ex.a, 292, K. ; to express reciprocalaction, 221, R.I and 2 ; force of, 292 ;with Part. Gen., 371.E.1.uterum heterogeneous, 32,1,N.utervis 108.UtI with Abl., 407 and N.2,a ; otherconstrs. of, ib. N.3 ; with personal Ger.,427, N.5.9utinam in wishes, 261 aiidN. 1.utpotewith qul, 626.N.1.V and u, 1.B.2 ; pronunciation of, 7.vacare with Dat., 346.N.2 ; attractionof pred. after, 635.R.3.vacuus with Gen., 374.N.8.vae with Dat., 343,1, N.I.valde very, 439.N.3 ; with quam andIndie., 467.N.omitted, 298.R.2 with ; potuit, tostrengthen superlative, 303 ; ut ita,482,4 after vbs. of Adding and Happening,525,1,N.5 in Final and Con-vehementer;;secutive Sentences, 543 ; ut non,ib. 4,valgre with Inf., 423.2.N.2; with ut,653,1.validus with Abl. or Gen., 405.N.3.vas heteroclite, 68,7.V6 usage of, 495 ; ve V6,*> N -very, 439.N.3.vel with superlative, 303; usage of, 494;vel vel,ib. 2 ; for example, ib. N.I ; atwell as, ib. N.3.velle conjugation of, 174 ; exact use ofFut. or Fut. Pf., 242, N. 2 and R.3 ; hasno periphrasis, 248,R., 531,N.3 ;velim,257,2 asvellem, Potential, 268,N. 1 ; :vellem, as Unreal, 261.R- ; with Subjv.for Impv., 270.N.2;with Pf. Inf. act.,280,2, b, and N.I ;with Pf. Inf. pass.,280,2,c,N. ; vol8ns in pred. attrib.,325.B.6; sib! velle, 351,N.2; volentiest, 353.N.2; with luf. or ut, 532, andN.3, 646, B.I ; with Inf., 423.2.N.2; withUt, 646,N.l.
542 GENERAL INDEX.velut with Subjv., 602 : with part, togive Assumed Reason, 666, s.velutsi with Subjv., 602.venalis with Abl., 404.N.4.vgndere with Gen. of Price, 379 ; benevgndere, 380,2,B.venire omitted, 209.N.5; venit miniin mentem, with Gen., 376.R.3; withSup., 435, N.I ; ventUTUS as adj., 438,N.; in suspicionem,with Nom. andInf., 528.N.2;with Inf., 422.N.5 ; usuvenit, with ut, 653,3.venire pass, of vEndere, 169,2,R.i ; withGen. of Price, 379.venter decl. of, 44,2, 45.R.1.verbals defined, 179,1; pred. agreementof, 211; eubst. with Ace., 330.N.3, 337,K.5; adj. with Ace., ib. N.4; in bilis,with Dat., 355.N. ;in ax,with Gen.,375 ;formation of verbalia. 191.VERBS defined, 16,4 ; conjugation of, 17 ;inflection of, 114 ; deponents, 113 ; personalendings, 1U; regular, 120, ff. ;classes of, 133 ; Stem or Thematic class,133,1.; Reduplicated Class, ib. II.;T-class, ib. in. ; Nasal class, ib. IV. ;Inchoativeclass, ib. V.; i-class, t'6. VI. ;mixed class, ib. VII. ; listof, 137-162; Deponents,163-166 ; Semi-deponents, 167;Irregular, 168-174; Defective, 175 ;formationof, 190 200; division of, 190 ; Verbalia,191 ; Denominative, 192 ; compositionof, 199, 200 ; Impersonal, 208 ;intrans. used personally, ib. 2; Concordof, 210, 211, 285-287 ;trans, and intraus.,213 ; trans, used as intrans.,ib. R.a ;intrans. used as trans., ib.B.6.verbum with Appositional Gen., 361,1 ;in phrases with ut, 546.N.2.verSri coustr. with, 550 and N.I ; veritusasPr.,282.N. ;with Inf., 423,2,s.2,533.R.1.v6risimile in phrases with Inf., 422.N.3 ;in phrases with ut, 553,4.vSro position of, 413.N.3 ; yes, 471,a,l ;with atque, 477.N.2 ; with sed,485,N.3;syntax of, 487 ;with nisi, 591.B.4 ; withBin, 592.verse 745 ; methods of combining, 746 ;Italic, 755 ; Saturnian, 756 ;compound,820, 823.versificationof, 738.729-823; anacrustic schemeversus position of, 413.R.1; usasprep., 416,29 versus Italicus755.;vertere with Final Dat., 356.B.2.Vrum introduces contrast to dein|fstrative, 307.B.4 ; yes, 471.a,l: >etiam, 482,5 and N.I; syntax of,with Inf., 422.N.3 ; with ut, 553,4.very translations of, 439.N.3.vesci with Abl., 407 and u.2,ei;personal Ger, 427.N.5.vesper decl. 01, 68,10 ; in Abl. of TIL393.K.5; vesperi 37,5, 4U.N.1.vester 101 and u.3.vetare with Ace., 346.N.3; with IL423,2,NN.3 and 6, 532.N.1 and 2.vetus decl. of, 82,2; comp. of, 87,1,K.'|via as Abl. of Manner, 399, N.I.vicissim gives reciprocal relation, 2
GENERAL INDEX. 543ions in, 8 ; weakening of, ib. 1 ;oinis-,1011 of, ib. 2 ; epenthesis of, ib. 3 ;issimilation of, ib. 4 ;'07 ;suffixes with, 184.quantity of final,5 with Appositioual Gen., 361,1.as Abl. of Manner, 399.N.1.gotus lieteroclite, 68,5.JM( vbs. of, with Abl., 405 ; adjs. of,with Gen. and Abl., ifc.N.3.vrning vbs. of, with ut, 546.jakening of vowels 8,1, 701.B.2.right substs. of, with Gen., 369.Itt vbs. of, with Inf., 280,2,c, 423,2, 532;sequence after vbs. of, 516, B. 3 ; ut insteadof Inf. after, 632.N.1-4; with Finalsentence, 546 ;with Inf. instead, ib. R.I ;with simple Subjv., ib. B.2.wishes in Subjv., 260, 261 ; apodosisomitted with, 601.without translated by ut n5n, 552,R.4;quin, 556 cum ; non, 587.B.2.wonder constr. with vbs. of, 542.N.1.words Formation of, 176-200.Y 1.B.3; length of final, 707,3.yes trans, of, 471, a and c.yielding vbs. of, with Dat., 346.Z when introduced, 1.B.3 ;sound of,ib. N.zeugma 690.SYNTAX OF INDIVIDUAL AUTHORS.The syntactical usage of individual authors is treated as follows:ccros 358.N.1; 625,l,N.l.FBANIUS 498, N.I.PULEITJS 336,N.l ; 365,N.; 406.N.3; 498,N.I ; 691.N.3; 607.N.3 ; 626.N.1.AELITJS 574.N.AESAB 208.2.N.2 ; 209,N.5 ; 228.N.1 ; 239,N.; 250,N.land 2; 260; 280,2,c,N.; 285,N.2; 286,3,N.; 311.1.B.2 ; 323,N.l ; 324;335.N.; 336,N.2;337,N.l; 341.N.2; 349.B.5;354.N.2; 356.N.2 and 3; 358.N.3; 359.N.1;369.N.2; 372.N.2 and 3; 374.N.1 and 9;375.N.2; 381.N.4; 386.N.; 391,N.;395,N.2;401.N.7; 407,N.2,d; 410.N.4; 413.B.1; 415;416,2,3,8,15,16,19,22, and 24 ; 418,2; 422,N.2; 423.N.2 and 3; 427.N.2; 429.N.1; 432,N.I; 435.N.2; 436.N.1 ; 443.N.3; 458.N.1;460,2,N.land 2; 467.N.; 475.N.3; 476.N.5;478.N.2 ; 480.N.2 and 3; 482,3; 482,5,B.2and N.I; 496.N.1; 503; 512, N. 1 ; 513.N.1and 2; 525,2,N.3; 527.B.3; 528, N. 1 ; 538,N.4;541,N.land3;642,N.l; 545,8.1; 549.N.1 and 2 ; 563.N.2 and 3 ; 667.N. ; 569.N.1 ;671.N.3; 691,8.2 and N.2; 602.N.5; 615.N.;616,l,N.l ; 626.N.1; 627,8.2; 636.N.1; 644,B.3; 647.N.2; 650.N.; 666.N.B. Hisp. 407,N.2,d; 416,8.Ft. Afr. 407,N.2,
544 GENERAL INDEX.and 2 ; E.5; 361.N.1 ; 352.N.; 354.N.2; 356.R.3460.2.N.3 ; 477.N.8 ;480.N.1 ; 482,2; 439.N.3; 454.N.2 ; 457.N.2; 458.N.1 N.2; 494,N.3; 625, I,N; 545,B.l; 616.N.2.Vand N.3 ; 357; 358.N.3 and 5 ; 361. N.I ; 3; 498.N.1;500.B.; 525,l,N.l, 2.N.2 ; 533,362.N.1 ; 364.N.1; 369, N.2 ; 372.N.2 and 3 ;374,N.1,2,4, and 5 ; 375.N.2 and 3 ; 376.R.1,2, and 3; 380.1.N.1 and 4; 383.N.1; 385,R.I ; 536.N.1 ; 538.N.5 ;641.N.5 563.N.3;;569.N.1 ; 591.B.2 ; 592.N. ;616.1.N.2 ; 644,N.2.N.I; 386.N.; 390,2,N.2 and 3; 391.N.; 395,N.I and 2; 396.N.1; 398.N.1; 403.N.4; 406, JUVENAL 602.N.4 ; 605.N.N.6 ; 407,N.2,d ; 410.N.4 ; 411.R.1 and 2,and N.I; 413.R.1 ; 416,1,2,3,5,7,13,14,15, LIVY 204.N.8 ; 209.N.3; 211,R.l,Ex.a,N.;16,19,24,25,28, and 29 ; 417.1.N.3 and 14 ; 247.N.1; 249.N.; 250,N.land 2; 285, Ex.418,4; 422.N.2.3, and 5 ; 423,N.2and3; 3 and N.2 ; 293.N. ; 3U,1,R.2, 2,N.: 317.N.427.N.2 and 5 ; 428,B.2 and N.I; 429.N.1; 1; 319.N.1; 323, N. 1 ; 335.N. ; 337.N.4;432.N.1 ; 435.N.1 ; 436.N.1; 438.N.; 439.N. 338.N.1; 346.N.2; 347.B.2; 350,1,N. ; 351,2,3 and 4 ; 443.N.3 ; 453, N.I ; 457,l,N.l N.I ; 353.N.2 ; 356.N.2 ;359.N.1 and 4 ;and 2, 2 and N.; 458.N.1 ; 459.N.1 ; 460,1, 363.R.1 ; 366.B.1; 371.N.; 372,N.laud4;N.2 ; 467.N. ; 476.N.5 ; 477.N.4 and 5; 478, 373.R.1 ; 374,N.2and 3; 383.N.1 ; 385.N.N.2 ; 480.K.1 and N.3 ; 481.N.; 482.1.N.1 1 ; 390.2.N.3 ; 391.R.1 and N.; 395.N.1 ;and 2, 2, 3, and 5, n.2 and N.I ;484.N.1 399.N.1 and 3 ; 401.N.2 and 6 ; 403.N.3 ;and 2; 485,N.l and 2; 486,N.; 488,N.land 406.N.3; 410.N.2.3, and 4; 411.B.1 and2; 489.N.1; 491,N.; 493.N.1 ; 494.N.1; N.I ; 413.N.1 ; 415 ; 416,2,7,15,16,22,23,495; 496.N.1; 497; 498,N.3,4,G and 8; 501;603 ; 511,B.4 ; 513.B.1 and NN.1,2 ; 525,1,N.I and 4, 2.N.2 and 3 ; 527.B.1 and 3,24, and 28 ; 417,1,8,10,11, and 14 ; 418,2,and 4 ; 423,N.2 ; 427.N.2 ; 429,2 and N.I;430.N.1 ; 435,N.2 ; 436,N.l ; 437.N.2 ; 438,and N.2 ; 628.N.1 and 2 ; 532.N.1 and 3; N. ;439.x. 3 and 4 ; 442.N.3 ; 443.N.4 ;633.R.1; 536.N.1; 538.N.4; 541,N.1,2,3 and 457,1,N.3 ; 458,N.l ; 460,2,N.3 ; 467.N. ;5; 542,R. and N.I ; 543.N.3 ; 548.N.3 ; 549,N.1,2 and 4; 550,N.1,2 and 5; 653,1; 555,B.I ; 563,N.2,3,4 and 5 ; 567.N.; 569.N.1;671,N.2and3; 573.N.2 ; 574.N.; 576.N.1;677.N.4 and 5 ; 580,N.3 ; 590.N.1; 691.R.4and N.2; 602,N.5 ; 604,B.2; 605.N.; 606,N.1; 608; 615.N.; 616,1,N.2, and 2, N.; 617,477,N.4,5 and 9 ; 478,N.l and 2 ; 480.N.3 ;482,1,N.1,2 and 5,R.2 and N.I; 497 ; 498,N.1,3, and 8 ; 502.N.3 ; 503 ; 513,N.l and2; 525,l,N.l and 7 and 2.N.2 ; 632,N.l ;636.N.1 ; 641,N. 2 and 5 ; 642,B. and N.2;643,N.3 ; 545.B.1 ; 549.N.1 ; 550,N.5 ; 655,2,N. ; 657.B. and N.2; 563,N.2, 3, and 5 ;N.I; 626.N.1; 627,B.land2; 635,N.land 667,N.; 569,N.l; 570.N.4 ; 671,N.6 ; 676,2 ; 636.N.1 ; 643.N.4 ; 644.B.3 ; 647.N.2; N.2 ; 577,N.3,4, and 5 ; 597,B.5 ; 602.N.5;666,N.; 677.N.615,N. ; 616,l,N.l and 2, and 2,N.; 626,N.COLUMELLA 592, N.1 ; 635.N.2 ; 636.N.1 ; 644.R.3 ; 651.B.1 ;COBNIFICTOS 439,N.3 ;500,B.; 549,N.4. 666.N. ; 687.CUBTIUS 416,16 ; 532.N.1.LUCAN 254,N.l ; 468,N.l.LUCILICS 383.1.N.2; 486,N.l.DICTYS 545.K.1.LUCBETIUS 372,N.2 ; 383,1, N.2 ; 405,N.3 ;406,N.6 ; 422,N.4 ; 459.N.1 ; 480.N.2 ; 482,ENNIUS 411.B.2 ; 478.N.5.l,N.l ; 496.N.1 ; 500.B. ; 525,l,N.l ; 533,B.1 ; 564,N.l ; 571.N.4 ; 606.N.1 ; 636.N.1.FLOBUS 467.N ; 525.2.N.2.FBONTO 525,2,N.3.MARTIAL 280,2,6,N.l.GAIUS 625,2,N.3.NAEVIUS 633,N.l.GELLTOS 580, N.3.NEPOS 249,N. ; 250,N.2 ; 356.R.3 ; 408,N.2,c ; 416,10 ; 513.N.1 ; 536.N.1 ; 655,2,N. ;HIBTIUS 423.N.2: 532.N.1.571,N.4 ; 605,N. ; 606,N.l 687.;HORACE 211,B.l, Ex.a.N.; 271.2.N.2 ; 301 ;346.N.2; 361.N.1; 416,5.17,19, and 21; OVID 270.N.; 280,2,6,N.l ; 349.R.5; 364,417,8 ; 418,4 ; 421,N.l,c; 422.N.4 ; 427.N. N.1;401,N.7; 411.R.2; 416,7; 417,7; 427,
GENERAL INDEX. 545PETRONIUS 207,N. ; 625,l,N.l.PLAUTUS 206.N.1 ; 211,R.l, Ex.a.N.; 270,N.I ; 330.N.3 ; 336,N.l ; 347,R.2 ; 357,N ;358,N.l ; 361,N.l ;374,N.1,2,3, and 5;375,N.3 ; 383,1,N.2, and 3 ; 398 :N.2 ; 406,N.6 ; 407.N.2 ; 411,R.l ; 415 ; 416,6,7,16,19,21, and 24; 417,7; 418,4; 422,N.2 ;439,N.3; 454.N.2; 4S5,N.; 467,N.; 476.N.Sand 5 ; 477,N. 1 and 6 ; 478.N.2 ; 487,N.I ; 494,N.l and 6 ; 496,N.l ; 498.N.3 ;602,N.3 ; 525,1,N.4 and 2.N.2 ; 533,K.l ;638,N.l and 3 ; 541,N.l ; 645,R.l ; 646,N.3 ; 648,N.3 ; 649,N.2 ; 563,N.3 ; 569,N.1;571,N.5; 576,N.l ; 577.N.5 ; 580,N.land 3 ; 597,N.; 602,N.5 ; 610,N.l ; 615,N.;626,N.l ; 643.N.3 ; 677,s.PLINY MAJOR 381.N.3 ; 398.N.2; 460,2,N.3;467.N.; 482,2; 498.1.N.1; 592.N.PUNY MINOR 209.N.5 ; 262.N.; 418,4; 460,2.N.3; 638.N.5; 548.N.3; 602.N.4; 605.N.;616.1.N.2.POLLIO 410, N.3.PROPERTIUS 406.N.3; 421,N.l,c ; 457.1.N.2;458.N.1; 480,N.2aud3; 498.N.1.QUADRIGABIUS 407,N.2,b.QUINTILIAN 359.N.5 ; 406.N.3; 612.N.1 ;525,2,N.2; 538.N.5; 602.N.4; 604.R.2;627.R.1.SALLUST 207,N.; 208,2,N.2 ; 247.N.1; 260,N.I; 280,2,c,N.; 285.N.2; 286,3,N.; 311,1,R.2; 323.N.1; 338,N.l; 347.R.2 ; 349.R.4;353.N.2 ; 356.N.3 ; 359.N.1 and 6 ; 369.N.2 ; 372.N.2 and 3 ; 374,N.1,3, and 8 ; 390,3.N.1; 391.N.; 407,N.2,d; 410,N.l,2and 4;416,2,4,7,16,20 and 24 ; 417,7; 418,4; 423,N.2; 428,R.2; 436.N.2 ; 436.N.1 ; 437.N.2;439.N.3; 460.2.N.1; 467.N.; 476.N.3; 476,N.5; 478.N.2; 480.N. 3; 482,3 and 5.R.2 aridN.1;488,N.2; 491.N.; 496.N.1 ; 601; 503;612.N.1; 513.N.1; 625,2,N.2; 532.N.1 ; 536,N.l;638,N.l; 541,N. 2and3; 542.N.1; 545,R.I; 548.N.3 ;563.N.2 ; 569.N.1 ; 591.R.2 ;604.R.2; 616,l,N.l and 2 ; 626.N.1 ; 636,N.I.SENECA 374.N.3 ; 616.1.N.2 ; 635,N.2.SENECA RHETOR 44.5, N.SUETONIUS 349.R.5; 407,N.2.c ; 416,22;513.N.1; 642.R. ; 646.N.3; 677. N.5; 602,N.4; 665,N.2.TACITUS 208.2.N.2; 209.N.3; 211,R.l,Ex.o,N.; 254.N.1; 285,Ex.3 and N.2; 346.N.353; 353,N.2; 354.N.2; 356,N.2; 359,N.5; 364,N.I ; 372.N.2 ; 376.R.1; 390.3.N.1 ; 401.N.6and 7 ; 407,N.2,a ; 410,N.2and 4 ; 411,N.1; 416,10.16,23 and 24; 417,3 and 12;423.N.3; 428.R.2 and N.4 ; 432,N.l; 437,N.2- 442, N.3; 443.N.4 ; 460.2.N.3; 476,N.I ; 476.N.5 ; 477,N.4 ; 480.N.3 ; 482,2,3and 5.N.1 ; 484.N.2 ; 493.N.2 ;496.N.1 ;497 ; 513.N.1 ; 525,1,N.7, and 2,N.2and3;532.N.1 ; 538.N.5 ; 542.R. and N.I ; 546,N.3; 563,N.2,3 and 5; 567,N. ; 569,.\.l;571,N.land 3; 673,N.l; 675.N.2 ; 676.N.1 ; 602,N.4 ; 604.R.2 ; 605,N. ; 616,1,N.2;635.N.2; 647,N.2; 666,N.; 687.TERENCE 211,R.l,Ex.o,N. ; 271,N.2 ; 286,N.2 ; 337.N.4 ; 358.N.1 ; 361.N.1 ; 383,1,N.2; 399,N.l ; 407,N.2 ; 4U.R.2 ; 415; 416,1,8, and 28; 423,N.2 ; 428,R.2; 439,R.3 ;454,N.2 ; 455,N.; 482,5,R.2 ; 487,N.l ; 489,N. ; 494,N.l ; 496,N.l and 2 ; 498 N.3 ; 602,N.3 ; 525,l,N.l ; 533,R.l ; 641,N.l ; 645,R.I ; 649.N.2 ; 669.N.1 ; 571,N.4 ; 674.N. ;676.N.1 ; 578,N. ; 680,N.l and 3 ; 597,N. ; 610,N.l ; 615.N. ; 626.N.1 ; 644,N.2 ;677,N.TIBULLUS 455,N.:457,1,N.2 ; 468.N.1:498.N.1.VALERIUS MAXIMUS 285,N.2 ; 432,N.l ;460,2,N.3 ; 538.N.5 ; 577,N.5.VARUO 416,7,15, and 23 ; 422,N.4 ; 427.N.2 ; 437,N.2 ; 449,R.3 ; 574,N. ; 606,N.l.VATINIUS 606,N. 1 .VELLEIUS 209,N.5 ; 285,N.2 ; 349,R.5 ; 391,N.; 460,2,N.3; 513,N.2.VERGIL 211.R.l,Ex.a,N. ; 230,N.2 ; 269;276,2,N.2 ; 301 ; 336,N.l ; 346.N.2 ; 374,N.3 ; 383,1,N.2 and 3 ; 390,2,N.4 ;411.R.2 ; 417,3 ; 421,N.l,c ; 422,N.4 ; 442,N.3 ;443,N.l ; 458,N.3 ; 477,N.5 ; 480,N.2 ; 482,l,N.l and 2 ; 486,N,3 ; 526,l,N.l ; 542,N.1; 546,N.3; 563,N.2 ; 591,R.2; 644,N.2.VITRUVIUS 353,N.l ; 386,N.; 416,5 and 25;418,3 ; 439.N.3 ; 636,N.l ; 649.N.2 ; 671,N.4.THE HISTORIANS 209, N. 5 ; 211,R.l,Ex.& ;214,R.2; 363,R.l ; 391,N. ; 484,N.2 ; 485,N.I; 487,N.l; 491; 501.N.; 567,N.; 628,R.THE POETS 211,R.l,Ex.a,N. and R.4; 217,N.I and 2; 230,N.2 ; 241,N.l ; 261 ;269 ;270; 271,2,N.2 ; 280,2,6 and N.2; 290,N.2 ; 295,N.; 296,N.1,3, and 4 ; 321.N.1; 332,2.N.2 and 3 ; 333,2,N.6 ;336.N.3; 337,N.
546 GENERAL INDEX.537,N.2; 541.N.5; 542,B. and 1 and 2 ; 338,N.l and 2 ; 346.N.6 ; 350,1,2.N.2, and 3; 627,8.3; 528,N.l; 636,N.l; N.I ; 669 ; 677,N.N.; 351,N.l ; 352,N. ; 354,N.2 ; 358; 361, N.3; 549,N.4; 550,N.l and 2;N.2; 546,553,3,N.;N.I ; 362,N.l ; 373,B.l ; 374,N. 1,3,6,8, and 557,B.; 563,N,1,2, and 5; 564,N.l; 571,10 ; 375 ; 383,l,N.l ; 385.N.1 ; 386,N.; 390, N.2,3, and 5; 574,N.; 576.N.1; 677,N.l;3.N.1 and 2; 391,N.; 394,3,N.l ; 396.N.1 680,N.3; 591,8.2 and N.2; 602,N.5; 614,and 3; 397.N.2 ; 401,N.4and 6 :404,u.l; N.; 617,N.land2; 626.N1. and 2; 627,407,N.2,e ; 413,B.l and 3, and N.I ; 416, B.l;634,N.;636,N.l; 651,B.l.14, and 20 ; 417,5,12, and 24 ; 418,3 and CLASSICAL LATIN 220,N,1 ; 241.N.1 260 : ;4; 421,N.l; 427.N.5 ; 428,N.2 and 3; 263.2.N.; 269 ; 270,N. 282.N.; ; 285, Ex.3 :435,N.l ; 436,N.l and 3 ; 437,N.l ; 439,N. 301:303; 309.N.2; 318,N.2;830,N.2; 339,2; 440.E.; 446,N.2 ; 449,n.3 ; 454,N.3 ;N.I and 4; 342 ;343.N.1; 346,N.2; 347.B.1;457,1,N.3; 460,2,N.2 ; 467,N.; 476.N.2.3, 348.B.2; 356,8.2; 359.N.4; 363.N.; 374,and 5 ; 477.N.4 ; 482,3 ; 488,N.l and 2; N.1,2,3,4, 5, and 9 ; 381.S.1 ; 383,1 ; 385,495,N.2 496.N.1; ; 498,N.l and 5 ; 502.N. B.I and N.I, 2, and 3 ; 390,2,N.l, and 2 ;1; 626,1,N.7; 527,N.2; 532.N.1 and 6; 391.B.1 ; 393,8.5 ; 394.N.1 ; 398 ;399,N.l:535,B.3 ; 536.X.2 ; 538,x.5 ; 546,B.2 and 401.N.2 and 6 ; 403.N.3 and 4 ; 407.N.2;N.3 ; 552.B.2 ; 591,N.2 ; 604,B.2 617.N.; 408.N.6 410.N.1.2.5 and 6; ; 413,8.3; 416,2 ; 631,2,N.l ;683.THE Cosnc POETS 211,B.l,Ex.a,N.; 228,9,12,16,23, and 29 ; 417,9 and 11 ; 421.N.1 and 2 ; 422.N.4 ; 423.N.4 ; 429,1 and 2;N.I; 242.N.2; 243; 244.N.1 ; 247.N.2 ; 430.N.1; 432.N.1; 437,1; 438.N.; 439.N.3;263,2,N.; 267,N.; 269; 280,2,c.N.; 346.N.1; 442.N.3 ; 444.1.N.2 ; 449.B.3 ; 460,l,N.l,351.N.1; 406.N.2; 416,4; 443.N.4 ; 453, and 2, N.3; 467.N.; 475.N.2: 477.N.8; 479,N.I and 2; 467.N.; 468.N.; 477.N.3 ; 553,1;617.N.2.N.I; 482,4,N.; 494.N.2 andS; 498. N.3 and4; 500,8.; 501.N.; 502.N.1; 603;5U,B.l; .LATEB PBOSE 211,B.l,Ex.a,N.; 217.N.1 525,l,N.l ; 528.B.2, and N.I ;632.N.1.3,and 2; 221,8.2; 269; 361.N.1; 372.N.3; and 4; 535,8.3; 537.N.2; 538.N. 2 and 3 ;374.N.1 and 3; 375; 386.N.; 390,2,N.3; 541,N.land2; 545,8.1; 546,N.3; 549.N.1;404.N.1; 413.N.1; 415; 416, 20, 23,25, and 556; 571.N.2; 602,N.l; 610.N.1 ; 631,3,B.27: 417,5; 427.N.5; 428.N.1, 2, and 3; 1; 643.N.3: 644,8.3; 651,8.1.449.R.3; 460,l,a; 467,N.; 476.N.5; 477.N. POST-CLASSICAL LATIN 211,8.2 ; 239,K. ;4; 528.B.2 and N.4; 535, K. 3; 538.N.5; 241.N.2; 247.N.1; 251.N.2; 254,8.6, and546,8.2; 555,2,N. ; 589.N.1.N.2; 257.N.1; 271.2.N.2; 292,N.; 296.N.ANTECLASSICAL LATIN 211.N.1 and 2; 220, land 2; 298.N.1; 299.N.2 ; 301; 309,N.2; 221.R.2; 241,N.l; 248.N.1; 254.N.2; N.2 ; 319.N.1 ; 330.N.4 ; 333,2,N.6 ; 337,257.N.1; 260; 261.N.2; 271.1.N.1 and 2, N.I and 2 ; 338.N.2 ; 339, N.I and 3 ;and 2.N.1 and 2; 272,3,N.; 280,2,a.B.2; 346, N.2; 349,8.5; 355, N. ; 356,8.3;293. N.; 296. N.I: 301; 303; 309,N.2; 319, 362.N.1 and 2; 366,8.2 ; 374,N.2and 3;N.I; 330.N.2; 339.N.1; 341.N. % 346.N.2; 378,8.4 ; 380,1,N.2 ; 390,3,N.l ; 391,x. ;347.B.1; 350.1.N.; 373,8.1; 374,N.4;375,N.2 ; 3834.N.2; 385.N.2; 390,2,N.l; 390,393,8.5; 397.N.2; 398.N.1: 399,N.2: 403,N.4; 405.N.3; 407.N.2; 408.N.6 ; 410.N.1,N.3; 391,8.2 and N.; 395.N.2; 397.N.2; 2,3, and 5 ; 411,8.1; 415 ; 416,7,10,12,14,399.N.1; 403.N.3; 407.N.2; 408.N.6; 410, 16,17,18, and 22; 417,7; 418,4; 422.N.2.4,N.1,4, and 5; 413,8.1; 416, 10, 12, 16, 23, and 5 ; 423,N.2 and 3 ; 431.N.1 and 3;24, and 27; 417,2,9, and 10; 421.N.1; 432.N.1 ; 433; 435.N.1; 436. N.I: 437.N.1;422.N.2 and 4; 423, N.2 and 3; 427.N.2; 438,N. ; 439,N.2 and 3 ; 479,N.l and 2 ;428.N.1; 429.N.1; 430. N.I: 432.N.1; 433, 480,N.l ; 482,l,N.l and 2, 3,4,N., and.6,N.2; 436,N.l and 4; 437.N.2; 439,N.3; 442,N.3; 443.N.1 and 4; 444,1,N.2; 454,N.l andN.I and 2 ; 494,N.2 ; 498,N.1,3,6, and 8 ;503 ; 513, N.2 ; 525,1,N.7, and 2.N.2; 528,5;456,N.;457,1,N.1,2, and 3, and 2,N.; B.2; 532,N.l; 541.N.1; 543,N.3; 545,B.l;459.N.2; 475.N.1; 476,N.1,2, and 5; 479, 546,N.3; 549,N.2; 553,2,N. and 4,8.2;N.I; 480.N.1; 482,l,N.l, and 5.N.1; 487, 557,N.2 ; 563,N.4and 5; 573.N.2 ; 576,N.N.2; 488,N.l; 495,N.l; 498,N.5,6,and 7; 2; 590,N.l ; 595,8.6; 602.N.5; 605,N.;500; 503; 513.N.1; 525,l,N.2,6,and7, and 606,N.l ; 616,2,N.; 625,1,B. and 2,8.; 626,
WORKS ON LATIN GRAMMAR AND COMPOSITION.LATIN PHRASE BOOK. By C. MEISSNER. Translated byH. W. AUDEN, M.A. Globe 8vo. 4s. 6d.A GRAMMAE OF THE LATIN LANGUAGE,from Plautusto Suetonius. By H. J. ROBY, M.A. Part I. Sounds, Inflections,Word- formation, Appendices. Crown 8vo. 9s. Part II. Syntax,Prepositions, etc. 10s. 6d.SCHOOL LATIN GRAMMAR. By H. J. ROBY, M.A. Crown8vo. 5s.AN ELEMENTARY LATIN GRAMMAR. By H. J. ROBY,M.A., and Professor A. S. WILKINS, LittD. Globe 8vo. 2s. 6d.EXERCISES ON LATIN SYNTAX AND IDIOM. Arrangedwith reference to Roby's School Latin Grammar. ByE. B.ENGLAND,Litt.D. Crown 8vo. 2s. 6d. KEY, for Teachers only. 2s.6d.net.FIRST LATIN GRAMMAR. By M. C. MACMILLAN, M.A.Fcap. 8vo. Is. 6d.LATIN GRAMMAR. By Professor B. L. GILDERSLEEVE andGONZALEZ LODGE. Third Edition. Crown 8vo. 6s.LATIN ACCIDENCE AND EXERCISES, arranged forBeginners. By W. WELCH and C. G. DUFFIELD. Pott 8vo. Is. 6d.EXERCISES IN UNSEEN TRANSLATION IN LATIN.the Same. Pott 8vo. Is. 6d..ByMACMILLAN'S LATIN COURSE:FIRST PART. By A. M. COOK, M.A., Assistant Master at St.Paul's School. Globe 8vo. 3s. 6d.SECOND PART. By A. M. COOK, M. A., and W. E. P. PANTIN.M. A.New and Enlarged Edition. Globe 8vo. 4s. 6d.THIRD PART. By W. E. P. PANTIN, M.A. Globe 8vo. 3s. 6d.KEY, for Teachers only. Globe 8vo. 4s. 6d. net.MACMILLAN'S SHORTER LATIN COURSE:FIRST PART. By A. M. COOK, M.A. Globe 8vo. Is. 6d. KEY,for Teachers only. 4s. 6d. net.SECOND PART. By A. M. COOK, M.A., and W. E. P. PANTIN,M.A. Globe 8vo. 2s. KEY, for Teachers only. 4s. 6d. net.The Third Part of the LATIN COURSE is also intended to formthe concluding volume of the SHORTER LATIN COURSE.MACMILLAN'S LATIN READER. A Latin Reader for theLower Forms in Schools. By H. J. HARDY, M.A. Globe 8vo. 2s. 6d.SHORT EXERCISES IN LATIN PROSE COMPOSI-TION AND EXAMINATION PAPERS IN LATIN GRAM-MAR. By Rev. H. BELCHER, LL.D.PART I. Pott 8vo. Is. 6d. KEY, for Teachers only. Pott 8vo.3s. 6d. net.PART II. On the Syntax of Sentences, with an Appendix, includingExercises in Latin Idioms, etc. Pott 8vo. 2s. KEY, for Teachersonly. Pott 8vo. 3s. net.A Short Guide to Latin Prose Composition.SERMO LATINUS.By Prof. J. P. POSTGATE, LittD. Globe 8vo. 2s. 6d. KEY to"Selected Passages." Globe 8vo. 4s.6d.net.MACMILLAN AND CO., LTD., LONDON.
728050WORKS OH LATIN GRAMMAR AND COMPOSITION.LATIN PASSAGES FOR TRANSLATION. For the use ofHigher Forms in Schools and of Students working for PassSelected Degrees.by M. ALFORD. Globe 8vo. 3s.FIRST STEPS TO LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. ByRev. G. RUST, M.A. Pott 8vo. Is. 6d. KEY, for Teachers only.By W. M. YATES. Pott 8vo. 3s. 6d. net.LATIN PROSE AFTER THE BEST AUTHORS : CaesarianProse. By F. P. SIMPSON, B.A. Extra fcap. 8vo. 2s. 6d. KBYfor Teachers only. Globe 8vo. 5s. net.LATIN PROSE EXERCISES BASED UPON CJSSAR'EGALLIC WAR. With a Classification of Caesar's Chief Phrasesand Grammatical Notes on Caesar's Usages. By CLEMENT BRYANSM.A. Globe 8vo. 2s. 6d. KEY, for Teachers only. GlobeSvo. 4s.6d.netHINTS TOWARDS LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. BjA. W. POTTS, M.A., LL.D., late Fellow of St. John's College,Cambridge. Extra fcap. 8vo. 3s.PASSAGES FOR TRANSLATION INTO LATIN PROSE.Edited with Notes and References to the above. By the Same.Extra fcap. 8vo. 2s. 6d. KEY, for Teachers only. 2s. 6d. net.EXERCISES IN LATIN VERSE OF VARIOUS KINDS.By Rev. G. PRESTON. Globe 8vo. 2s. 6d. KEY, for Teachersonly. Globe 8vo. 5s. net.AN INTRODUCTION TO LATIN ELEGIAC VERSECOMPOSITION. By J. H. LUPTON, Stir-Master of St. Paul'sSchool. Globe 8vo. 2s. 6d. KEY TO PART II. (XXV. -C.).Globe 8vo. 3s. 6d. net.AN INTRODUCTION TO LATINPOSITION. By the Same. Globe 8vo. 3s. KEY, for Teachersonly. Globe 8vo. 4s. 6d. net.By W. E. P. PANTIN, M.A.A FIRST LATIN VERSE BOOK.Globe 8vo. Is. 6d. KEY, for Teachers only. 4s. net.LATIN ELEGIACS AND PROSODY RHYMES FORLYRIC VERSE COM-BEGINNERS. By C. H. ST. L. RUSSELL, M.A. GlobeSvo. Is. 6d.DIC-MACMILLAN'S ELEMENTARY LATIN -ENGLISHTIONARY. By Rev. G. H. NALL,' M.A. 3s. 6d.ENGLISH-LATIN AND LATIN-ENGLISH DICTION-ARIES. By Prof. C. D. YONGE. Each sold separately, 3s. 6d. ;or complete, 7s. 6d.THE STUDENT'S COMPANION TO LATIN AUTHORS.By GEORGE MIDDLETON, M.A., and THOMAS R. MILLS, M.A.Crown 8vo. 6s.AN INTRODUCTION TO LATIN TEXTUAL EMENDA-TION, based on the text of Plautus. By W. M. LINDSAY, M.A.Globe 8vo. 3s. 6d.A SHORT MANUAL OF COMPARATIVE PHILOLOGYFOR CLASSICAL STUDENTS. By P. GILES, M.A. SecondEdition. Crown 8vo. 14s.MACMILLAN AND CO., LTD., LONDON.
PA 2087 .65 1903 SMCGildersleeve, Basil Lanneau,Gildersleeve's Latin grammar3d ed., rev. and enl. / byB. L. Gildersleeve andGonzalez Lodge.
Change language